department of national defence specifications unclassified … · 2020. 2. 7. ·...

DEPARTMENT OF NATIONAL DEFENCE

SPECIFICATIONS

UNCLASSIFIED

Ultra Light Combat Vehicle & Enhanced All Terrain Vehicle (ULCV & EATV Storage Facility), Garrison Petawawa ON

100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS

VOLUME 1 OF 2

SNC-LAVALIN INC. Halifax, Nova Scotia

Project No.: L-P90-2500/029 2016-06-29

635500-0001-T-31-SPE-000-0001 C02

Ultra Light Combat Vehicle & Enhanced All Terrain Vehicle

(ULCV & EATV Storage Facility), Garrison Petawawa ON DCC Contract No.: 53073

100% Construction Documents

UNCLASSIFIED

June 2016

Prepared for: National Defence Headquarters

101 Colonel By Drive Ottawa, ON

Canada K1A 0K2

Prepared by: SNC-LAVALIN INC.

Suite 200, Park Lane Terraces 5657 Spring Garden Road

Halifax, Nova Scotia B3J 3R4

Ph: (902) 492-4544, Fx: (902) 492-4540

Revision: Prepared By: / initials Reviewed By: / initials

Approved By: / initials

Date (y/m/d):

B01 Carla Yeadon Sandy McClearn Sandy McClearn 2016-05-30 C01 Carla Yeadon Sandy McClearn Sandy McClearn 2016-06-29 C02 C Yeadon / C DeCoste Sandy McClearn Sandy McClearn 2016-08-04

National Defence UNCLASSIFIED Section 00 01 11 New ULCV & EATV List of Contents Page 1 Storage Facility Garrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29 Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

Section Title Pages VOLUME 1 OF 2 Division 01 - General Requirements 01 11 00 Summary of Work 5 01 14 00 Work Restrictions 2 01 29 83 Payment Procedures: Testing Laboratory 2 01 31 19 Project Meetings 3 01 32 16.07 Construction Progress Schedule - Bar (GANTT) Chart 12 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures 5 01 35 00.06 Special Procedures for Traffic Control 3 01 35 35 DND Fire Safety Requirements 4 01 35 43 Environmental Procedures 5 01 35 45 Environmental Protection Refueling Vehicles 3 01 41 00 Regulatory Requirements 1 01 41 00.01 Quality Management System 12 01 42 00 References 6 01 45 00 Quality Control 4 01 47 15 Sustainable Requirements: Constructions 10 01 51 00 Temporary Utilities 4 01 52 00 Construction Facilities 4 01 56 00 Temporary Barriers and Enclosures 4 01 61 00 Common Product Requirements 7 01 70 12 Safety Requirements 7 01 71 00 Examination and Preparation 3 01 73 00 Execution Requirements 4 01 74 11 Cleaning 3 01 74 21 Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal 11 01 77 00 Closeout Procedures 2 01 78 00 Closeout Submittals 8 01 79 00 Demonstration and Training 2 01 82 60 Standard Foundations 7 01 82 65 Slab-On-Grade 8 01 83 45 Prefabricated Buildings 12 01 89 83 UXO Clearance Support to Construction 2 01 91 13 General Commissioning (Cx) Requirements 15 01 91 31 Commissioning (Cx) Plan 9 01 91 33 Commissioning Forms 4 01 91 41 Commissioning: Training 4 01 91 51 Building Management Manual (BMM) 4 Division 02 - Existing Conditions 02 41 13 Selective Site Demolition 8


Division 03 – Concrete 03 10 00 - Concrete Forming and Accessories 4 03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcing 4 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete 13 Division 04 – Masonry 04 05 00 Common Work Results 5 04 05 12 Mortar and Masonry Grout 2 04 05 19 Masonry Anchorage and Reinforcing 5 04 05 23 Masonry Accessories 2 04 22 00 Concrete Unit Masonry 5 Division 05 – Metals 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications 6 Division 06 – Wood and Plastics 06 10 10 Rough Carpentry 3 Division 07 - Thermal and Moisture Protection 07 13 52 Air/Moisture Membrane 3 07 21 13 Board Insulation 3 07 21 31 Sprayed Insulation – Polyurethane Foam 2 07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 3 07 81 00 Applied Fireproofing 5 07 92 00 Sealants 5 Division 08 – Openings 08 00 00 Door and Frame Schedule 1 Door and Hardware Schedule 4 08 11 00 Metal doors and Frames 7 08 37 13 Folding Sectional Doors 4 08 71 10 Door Hardware 9 Division 09 – Finishes 09 91 99 Painting 6 Division 10 - Specialties 10 14 53 Traffic Signage 6 10 28 10 Toilet and Bath Accessories 4 10 44 16.19 Fire Extinguishers and Safety Blankets 3 10 51 13 Metal Lockers 2 Division 21 - Fire Suppression 21 05 01 Common Work Results for Mechanical 4 21 13 16 Dry Pipe Sprinkler Systems 12


Division 22 - Plumbing 22 11 18 Domestic Water Pipe Copper 7 22 13 17 Drainage Waste and Vent Piping - Cast Iron and Copper 3 22 13 18 Drainage Waste and Vent Piping - Plastic 3 22 30 05 Domestic Water Heaters 3 22 42 01 Plumbing Specialties and Accessories 10 22 42 03 Washroom Fixtures 4 Division 23 - Heating, Ventilating and Air-Conditioning (HVAC) 23 05 05 Installation of Pipework 6 23 05 13 Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment 5 23 05 16 Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping 3 23 05 17 Pipe Welding 4 23 05 19.01 Thermometers and Pressure Gauges - Piping Systems 3 23 05 23.01 Valves - Bronze 4 23 05 23.02 Valves - Cast Iron 5 23 05 23.05 Butterfly Valves 4 23 05 29 Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment 8 23 05 48 Vibration and Seismic Control for HVAC Piping and Equipment 7 23 05 53.01 Mechanical Identification 7 23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing For HVAC 6 23 05 94 Pressure Testing Of Ducted Air Systems 4 23 07 13 Duct Insulation 6 23 07 15 Thermal Insulation For Piping 8 23 08 01 Performance Verification Mechanical Piping Systems 2 23 11 23 Facility Natural Gas Piping 6 23 31 13.01 Metal Ducts - Low Pressure To 500 Pa 7 23 33 00 Air Duct Accessories 5 23 33 14 Dampers - Balancing 3 23 33 15 Dampers - Operating 3 23 33 16 Dampers - Fire and Smoke 5 23 34 00 HVAC Fans 5 23 34 25 Packaged Roof and Wall Exhausters 4 23 37 13 Diffusers, Registers and Grilles 3 23 37 20 Louvres, Intakes and Vents 3 23 44 00 HVAC Air Filtration 5 23 51 00 Breeching, Chimneys and Stacks 4 23 73 11 Air Handling Units – Packaged 11 23 82 39 Unit Heaters 4 23 82 39.01 Unit Heaters - Electric 4 23 83 00.01 Radiant Heaters – Electric Infrared 3 Division 25 - Integrated Automation 25 01 11 EMCS: Start-up, Verification and Commissioning 7 25 01 12 EMCS: Training 3 25 05 01 EMCS: General Requirements 7 25 05 02 EMCS: Submittals and Review Process 4


25 05 03 EMCS: Project Record Documents 4 25 05 54 EMCS: Identification 3 25 08 20 EMCS: Warranty and Maintenance 4 25 10 01 EMCS: Local Area Network (LAN) 3 25 30 01 EMCS: Building Controllers 11 25 30 02 EMCS: Field Control Devices 17 25 90 01 EMCS: Site Requirements, and Systems Sequences of Operation 4 VOLUME 2 OF 2 Division 26 - Electrical 26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical 11 26 05 01 Arc Flash Hazard Protection 2 26 05 14 Power Cable (15000 V) 5 26 05 20 Wire and Box Connectors (0-1000 V) 2 26 05 21 Wires and Cables (0-1000 V) 3 26 05 22 Connectors and Terminations 3 26 05 27 Grounding - Primary 4 26 05 28 Grounding - Secondary 4 26 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 3 26 05 31 Splitters, Junction, Pull Boxes and Cabinets 2 26 05 32 Outlet Boxes, Conduit Boxes and Fittings 3 26 05 34 Conduits, Conduit Fastenings and Conduit Fittings 4 26 05 43.01 Installation of Cables in Trenches and in Ducts 4 26 09 23.01 Metering and Switchboard Instruments 7 26 09 23.02 Lighting Control Devices - Photoelectric 3 26 09 43 Lighting Control Devices - Low Voltage 4 26 12 16.01 Dry Type Transformers up to 600 V Primary 3 26 12 19 Pad Mounted, Liquid Filled, Medium Voltage Transformers 6 26 24 16.01 Panelboards Breaker Type 4 26 27 26 Wiring Devices 3 26 28 13.01 Fuses - Low Voltage 2 26 28 16.02 Moulded Case Circuit Breakers 2 26 28 20 Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters - Class "A" 4 26 28 23 Disconnect Switches - Fused And Non-Fused 2 26 29 01 Contactors 2 26 29 03 Control Devices 5 26 29 10 Motor Starters To 600 V 5 26 29 20 Variable Frequency Drives 8 26 41 00.01 Primary Lightning Arresters 2 26 41 00.03 Surge Protection Devices 4 26 42 01 Surge Protection Devices Up To 600 V 3 26 50 00 Lighting 3 26 52 00 Emergency Lighting 3 26 53 00 Exit Lights 3


Division 27 - Communications 27 05 26 Grounding And Bonding For Communications 4 27 05 28 Pathways For Communications Systems 3 27 10 05 Structured Cabling For Communication 4

Division 28 - Electronic Safety and Security 28 13 00 Access Control 9 28 31 00.01 Multiplex Fire Alarm System 14 28 31 02 Gas Detection Systems 5

Division 31 - Earthwork 31 05 16 Aggregate Materials 6 31 11 00 Clearing and Grubbing 6 31 14 13 Soil Stripping and Stockpiling 3 31 22 13 Rough Grading 4 31 23 33.01 Excavating, Trenching and Backfilling 13 31 24 13 Roadway Embankments 7 31 25 05 Erosion and Sedimentation Control 6 31 32 19.01 Geotextiles 4 31 37 00 Rip-Rap 4

Division 32 - Exterior Improvements 32 11 16.01 Granular Sub-Base 6 32 11 23 Aggregate Base Courses 6 32 15 60 Roadway Dust Control 4 32 91 19.13 Topsoil Placement and Grading 6 32 92 19 Seeding 4

Division 33 - Utilities 33 05 16 Maintenance Holes and Catch Basin Structures 8 33 11 16 Site Water Utility Distribution Piping 18 33 31 13 Public Sanitary Utility Sewerage Piping 11 33 41 00 Storm Utility Drainage Piping 8 33 65 73 Concrete Encased Duct Bank and Manholes 6

Appendix A: Geotechnical Report


List of Drawings L-P90-2500/029-101 – Existing Conditions and Removals L-P90-2500/029-102 – Siting Plan L-P90-2500/029-310 – Roof Plan & Ground Floor Plans L-P90-2500/029-320 – Sections L-P90-2500/029-330 – Elevations L-P90-2500/029-400 – Mechanical Legend and Notes L-P90-2500/029-401 – Drainage Plan L-P90-2500/029-411 – Plumbing Plan L-P90-2500/029-421 – Mechanical Piping Plan L-P90-2500/029-431 – Ventilation Plan L-P90-2500/029-451 – Fire Suppression Plan L-P90-2500/029-471 – Mechanical Details – Sheet 1 L-P90-2500/029-472 – Mechanical Details – Sheet 2 L-P90-2500/029-481 – Flow Diagrams and Schematics L-P90-2500/029-491 – Mechanical Schedule L-P90-2500/029-500 – Legend and General Notes L-P90-2500/029-501 – Electrical Site Plan and Demolition L-P90-2500/029-502 – Power Distribution Single Line Diagram L-P90-2500/029-503 – Hazardous Area Classification and Detail L-P90-2500/029-510 – Grounding Plan and Details L-P90-2500/029-511 – Power Plan L-P90-2500/029-512 – Systems Plan Layout and Fire Alarm Riser L-P90-2500/029-520 – Lighting Plan and Luminaire Schedule L-P90-2500/029-521 – Lighting Control Diagrams L-P90-2500/029-530 – Typical Site Details Sheet 1 L-P90-2500/029-531 – Typical Site Details Sheet 2 L-P90-2500/029-532 – Typical Site Details Sheet 3 L-P90-2500/029-533 – Typical Site Details Sheet 4 L-P90-2500/029-590 – Equipment Schedule L-P90-2500/029-591 – Panel Schedules and Schematics L-P90-2500/029-600 – Civil Legend and General Notes L-P90-2500/029-601 – Erosion and Sedimentation Control Plan L-P90-2500/029-610 – Grading Plan L-P90-2500/029-611 – Site Utilities Plan L-P90-2500/029-620 – Water and Sanitary Plan and Profile L-P90-2500/029-621 – Driveway Plan and Profile L-P90-2500/029-622 – Ditch Plan and Profile L-P90-2500/029-623 – Pond 5 Plan and Profile L-P90-2500/029-630 – Details

END OF SECTION

National Defence UNCLASSIFIED Section 01 11 00

New ULCV & EATV Summary of Work Page 1Storage FacilityGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

.1 Work of this Contract comprises general construction of avehicle storage building, located at Garrison Petawawa; andfurther identified as National Defence Job Number3478-115928.

1.2 CONTRACT METHOD

.1 Construct Work under stipulated price contract.

1.3 CASH ALLOWANCES

.1 Include in Contract Price specified cash allowances.

.2 Cash allowances, unless otherwise specified, cover net costto Contractor of services, products, construction machineryand equipment, freight, handling, unloading, storageinstallation, and other authorized expenses incurred inperforming Work.

.3 Contract Price, and not cash allowance, includes Contractor'soverhead and profit in connection with such cash allowance.

.4 Contract Price will be adjusted by written order to providefor excess or deficit to each cash allowance.

.5 Include progress payments on accounts of work authorizedunder cash allowances in monthly certificate for payment.

.6 Prepare schedule jointly with Contractor to show when itemscalled for under cash allowances must be authorized by DCCfor ordering purposes so that progress of Work will not bedelayed.

.7 Amount of each allowance, for Work specified in respectivespecification Sections is as follows:.1 Include allowance of $15,500 for purchase andinstallation of the underground natural gas service andassociated pressure regulating station, to be performed bythe natural gas utility Enbridge Gas Distribution..2 This allowance does not include coordination andscheduling of work with Enbridge..3 Coordination and scheduling of work is part of thecontract and is to be included in the Contractor's pricing..4 This allowance does not include excavation andbackfilling.



.5 Excavation and backfilling is part of the Contract andis to be included in the Contractor's pricing.

1.4 WORK BY OTHERS

.1 Co-operate with other Contractors in carrying out theirrespective works and carry out instructions from DCCRepresentative.

.2 Co-ordinate work with that of other Contractors. If any partof work under this Contract depends for its proper executionor result upon work of another Contractor, report promptly toDCC Representative, in writing, any defects which mayinterfere with proper execution of Work.

.3 Work of Project which will be executed after completion ofWork of this Contract, and which is specifically excludedfrom this Contract, is identified on the drawings.

.4 Work of this Project executed during Work of this Contract,and which is specifically excluded from this Contract:.1 Natural Gas distribution on site exterior of thebuildings up to point of connection to the gas meters and thesupply lines to the site shall be provided by Enbridge Gas.Work by Enbridge will be handled as a Prime Cost Allowance..2 Supply of site telecommunications cabling exterior tothe buildings shall be by Shared Services Canada..3 All work in the project area is to be coordinated withthe UXO (Unexploded Ordinance) Contractor. The DCCRepresentative will have and pay for a UXO clearancecontractor. The Contractor shall coordinate all excavationwork with the UXO Contractor. The Contractor shall note thatthe cleared area for UXO is only valid for a limited depthbelow the surface as defined by the UXO contractor. TheContractor shall not excavate into the lower surface withouta further UXO clearance from the UXO contractor. Thecontractor shall include further clearance in their schedule.

1.5 WORK SEQUENCE

.1 Co-ordinate Progress Schedule and co-ordinate with OwnerOccupancy during construction.

.2 Maintain fire access/control.

1.6 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES

.1 Unrestricted use of site until Substantial Performance.



.2 Co-ordinate use of premises under direction of DCCRepresentative.

.3 Obtain and pay for use of additional storage or work areasneeded for operations under this Contract.

.4 Remove or alter existing work to prevent injury or damage toportions of existing work which remain.

.5 Repair or replace portions of existing work which have beenaltered during construction operations to match existing oradjoining work, as directed by DCC Representative.

.6 At completion of operations, condition of existing work:equal to or better than that which existed before new workstarted.

1.7 OWNER FURNISHED ITEMS

.1 Owner Responsibilities: (note: "This section reserved forpossible use for racking.".1 Arrange for delivery of shop drawings, product data,samples, manufacturer's instructions, and certificates toContractor..2 Deliver supplier's bill of materials to Contractor..3 Arrange and pay for delivery to site in accordance withProgress Schedule..4 Inspect deliveries jointly with Contractor..5 Submit claims for transportation damage..6 Arrange for replacement of damaged, defective or missingitems..7 Arrange for manufacturer's field services; arrange forand deliver manufacturer's warranties and bonds toContractor.

.2 Contractor Responsibilities:.1 Designate submittals and delivery date for each productin progress schedule..2 Review shop drawings, product data, samples, and othersubmittals. Submit to DCC Representative notification ofobserved discrepancies or problems anticipated due tonon-conformance with Contract Documents..3 Receive and unload products at site..4 Inspect deliveries jointly with Owner; record shortages,and damaged or defective items..5 Handle products at site, including uncrating andstorage..6 Protect products from damage, and from exposure toelements..7 Assemble, install, connect, adjust, and finish products.



.8 Provide installation inspections required by publicauthorities..9 Repair or replace items damaged by Contractor orsubcontractor on site (under his control).

1.8 EXISTING SERVICES

.1 Notify DCC Representative and utility companies of intendedinterruption of services and obtain required permission.

.2 Where Work involves breaking into or connecting to existingservices, give DCC Representative 5 business days notice fornecessary interruption of mechanical or electrical servicethroughout course of work. Minimize duration ofinterruptions. Carry out work at times as directed bygoverning authorities with minimum disturbance to pedestrianvehicular traffic.

.3 Provide alternative routes for pedestrian and vehiculartraffic.

.4 Establish location and extent of service lines in area ofwork before starting Work. Notify DCC Representative offindings.

.5 Submit schedule to and obtain approval from DCCRepresentative for any shut-down or closure of active serviceor facility including power and communications services.Adhere to approved schedule and provide notice to affectedparties.

.6 Provide adequate bridging over trenches which cross sidewalksor roads to permit normal traffic unless suitable alternatedroute is approved by DCC Representative.

.7 Where unknown services are encountered, immediately adviseConsultant and confirm findings in writing.

.8 Protect, relocate or maintain existing active services. Wheninactive services are encountered, cap off in manner approvedby authorities having jurisdiction.

.9 Record locations of maintained, re-routed and abandonedservice lines.

.10 Construct barriers in accordance with Section 01 56 00 -Temporary Barriers and Enclosures .



1.9 DOCUMENTS REQUIRED

.1 Maintain at job site, one copy each document as follows:.1 Contract Drawings..2 Specifications..3 Addenda..4 Reviewed Shop Drawings..5 List of Outstanding Shop Drawings..6 Change Orders..7 Other Modifications to Contract..8 Field Test Reports..9 Copy of Approved Work Schedule..10 Health and Safety Plan and Other Safety RelatedDocuments..11 Other documents as specified.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Work Restrictions Page 1Storage FacilityGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 ACCESS AND EGRESS

.1 Design, construct and maintain temporary "access to" and"egress from" work areas, including stairs, runways, ramps orladders and scaffolding, independent of finished surfaces andin accordance with relevant municipal, provincial and otherregulations.

1.2 USE OF SITE AND FACILITIES

.1 Construction Cranes: Location and height of constructioncranes are restricted. When construction cranes are elevatedthe cranes shall be continuously lighted with non-LEDluminaires. Notify DCC five (5) working days prior tomobilizing crane on site.


.1 Notify DCC Representative and utility companies of intendedinterruption of services and obtain required permission.

.2 Where Work involves breaking into or connecting to existingservices, give DCC Representative 5 business days notice fornecessary interruption of mechanical or electrical servicethroughout course of work. Keep duration of interruptions toa minimum. Carry out interruptions after normal working hoursof occupants, preferably on weekends.

.3 Provide for pedestrian and vehicular traffic.

.4 Construct barriers in accordance with Section 01 56 00 -Temporary Barriers and Enclosures.

1.4 BUILDING SMOKING ENVIRONMENT

.1 Comply with smoking restrictions. Smoking is not permittedinside of buildings. Contractor shall provide designatedsmoking areas on site and be responsible for maintenance andcompliance.


New ULCV & EATV Work Restrictions Page 2Storage FacilityGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

1.5 SECURITY REQUIREMENTS

.1 The Contractor will abide by all Security Regulations aslaid down by the Garrison Commander and/or other MilitaryAuthorities. It will be the responsibility of theContractor to enforce these regulations.

.2 Contractor will attend a security briefing organized by theDCC Representative prior to gaining access to the worksite.

.3 Conditions of the security requirements will be monitored bythe DCC Representative and Unit Security Officer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Payment Procedures: Page 1Storage Facility Testing LaboratoryGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

.1 Inspecting and testing by inspecting firms or testinglaboratories designated by DCC Representative.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

.1 Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.

.2 Section 01 47 15 - Sustainable Requirements: Construction.

1.3 RELATED REQUIREMENTS SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE

.1 The Contractor to furnish and pay for independent inspectionand testing agency, equipment, facilities and labour to providequality control testing in accordance with the ContractorsQuality Control Plan.

1.4 APPOINTMENT AND PAYMENT

.1 DCC Representative will appoint, pay and manage services oftesting laboratory only for the QA materials testing. Thecontractor is still responsible for following their QCP andmust notify DCC Representative 48 hrs in advance. All qualitycontrol testing and all other tests are to be performed paidfor, and the results provided to DCC Representative by theContractor and are to include the following:

.1 The Contractor to furnish and pay for independentinspection and testing agency, equipment, facilities andlabour to provide quality control testing in accordancewith the Contractors Quality Control Plan..2 Inspection and testing required by laws, ordinances,rules, regulations or orders of public authorities..3 Inspection and testing performed exclusively forContractor's convenience..4 Testing, adjustment and balancing of conveyingsystems, mechanical and electrical equipment and systems..5 Mill tests and certificates of compliance..6 All other tests specified to be carried out and paidfor by the Contractor in the technical specificationsections, under the supervision of the DCC representative.

.2 Where tests or inspections by designated testing laboratoryreveal Work not in accordance with contract requirements, paycosts for additional tests or inspections as required by DCCRepresentative to verify acceptability of corrected work.


New ULCV & EATV Payment Procedures: Page 2Storage Facility Testing LaboratoryGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

1.5 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES

.1 Provide labour, equipment and facilities to:.1 Provide access to Work to be inspected and tested..2 Facilitate inspections and tests..3 Make good Work disturbed by inspection and test..4 Provide storage on site for laboratory's exclusive use tostore equipment and cure test samples.

.2 Notify DCC Representative sufficiently in advance of operationsto allow for assignment of laboratory personnel and schedulingof test.

.3 Where materials are specified to be tested, deliverrepresentative samples in required quantity to testinglaboratory.

.4 Pay costs for uncovering and making good Work that is coveredbefore required inspection or testing is completed and approvedby DCC Representative.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Project Meetings Page 1Storage FacilityGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 ADMINISTRATIVE

.1 DCC Representative will schedule and administer projectmeetings throughout the progress of the work.

.2 DCC Representative will prepare agenda for meetings.

.3 DCC Representative will distribute written notice of eachmeeting four days in advance of meeting date to Contractor.

.4 Provide physical space and make arrangements for meetings.

.5 DCC Representative will preside at meetings.

.6 DCC Representative will record the meeting minutes, includesignificant proceedings and decisions and identify actions byparties.

.7 DCC Representative will reproduce and distribute copies ofminutes within five days after meetings and transmit tomeeting participants and, affected parties not in attendance.

.8 Representative of Contractor, Subcontractor and suppliersattending meetings will be qualified and authorized to act onbehalf of party each represents.

.9 Meetings will be held bi-weekly, with additional meeting srequired.

1.2 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING

.1 Within 15 days after award of Contract, a meeting of partiesin contract to discuss and resolve administrative proceduresand responsibilities will be held.

.2 Senior representatives of DCC Representative, Consultant,Contractor, major Subcontractors, field inspectors andsupervisors will be in attendance.

.3 Establish time and location of meeting and notify partiesconcerned minimum 5 days before meeting.

.4 Agenda to include:.1 Appointment of official representative of participantsin the Work..2 Schedule of Work: in accordance with Section 01 32 16.07- Construction Progress Schedules - Bar (GANTT) Chart .



.3 Schedule of submission of shop drawings, samples, colourchips. Submit submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00- Submittal Procedures..4 Requirements for temporary facilities, site sign,offices, storage sheds, utilities, fences in accordance withSection 01 52 00 - Construction Facilities..5 Delivery schedule of specified equipment..6 Proposed changes, change orders, procedures, approvalsrequired, mark-up percentages permitted, time extensions,overtime, administrative requirements..7 Owner provided products..8 Record drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00 -Submittal Procedures..9 Maintenance manuals in accordance with Section 01 78 00- Closeout Submittals..10 Take-over procedures, acceptance, warranties inaccordance with Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals..11 Monthly progress claims, administrative procedures,photographs, hold backs..12 Appointment of inspection and testing agencies or firms..13 Insurances, transcript of policies.

1.3 PROGRESS MEETINGS

.1 During course of Work and 2 weeks prior to projectcompletion, schedule progress meetings to be held every 14days, or as directed by the DCC Representative.

.2 Contractor, major Subcontractors involved in Work and DCCRepresentative are to be in attendance.

.3 Notify parties minimum 5 days prior to meetings.

.4 DCC Representative will record minutes of meetings andcirculate to attending parties and affected parties not inattendance within five days after meeting.

.5 Agenda to include the following:.1 Review, approval of minutes of previous meeting..2 Review of Work progress since previous meeting..3 Field observations, problems, conflicts..4 Problems which impede construction schedule..5 Review of off-site fabrication delivery schedules..6 Corrective measures and procedures to regain projectedschedule..7 Revision to construction schedule..8 Progress schedule, during succeeding work period..9 Review submittal schedules: expedite as required..10 Maintenance of quality standards.



.11 Review proposed changes for affect on constructionschedule and on completion date and a review of the schedulenarrative prepared by the contractor..12 Other business.

1.4 SPECIAL MEETINGS

.1 DCC Representative reserves the right to require specialmeetings which may be held on short notice and at whichattendance by Contractor and representatives of affectedSubcontractors and suppliers is mandatory. Keep detailed andaccurate meeting notes and distribute copies promptly to allin attendance and those affected by agreements made at suchmeetings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.

END OF SECTION

National Defence UNCLASSIFIED Construction Sect 01 32 16.07

New ULCV & EATV Progress Schedule - Bar Page 1Storage Facility (GANTT) ChartGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DEFINITIONS

.1 Activity: An element of Work performed during course ofProject. An activity normally has an expected duration, andexpected cost and expected resource requirements. Activitiescan be subdivided into tasks.

.2 Actual Finish Date (AF): point in time that Work actually endedon activity.

.3 Actual Start Date (AS): point in time that Work actuallystarted on activity.

.4 Bar Chart (GANTT Chart): A graphic display of schedule-relatedinformation. In typical bar chart, activities or other Projectelements are listed down left side of chart, dates are shownacross top, and activity durations are shown as date-placedhorizontal bars.

.5 Baseline: Original approved plan (for Project, work package, oractivity), plus or minus approved scope changes.

.6 Completion Milestones: they are Substantial Completion andsecondly Final Certificate.

.7 Constraint: applicable restriction that will affect performanceon Project. Factors that affect activities can be scheduled.

.8 Control: applicable restriction that will affect performancewith planned performance, analyzing variances, evaluatingpossible alternatives, and taking appropriate corrective actionas needed.

.9 Critical Activity: any activity on a critical path. Mostcommonly determined by using critical path method.

.10 Critical Path: series of activities that determines duration ofProject. In deterministic model, critical path is usuallydefined as those activities with float less than or equal tospecified value, often zero. It is longest path throughProject.

.11 Critical Path Method (CPM): network analysis technique used topredict Project duration by analyzing which sequence ofactivities (which path) has least amount of schedulingflexibility (least amount of float).



.12 Data Date (DD): date at which, or up to which, Project'sreporting system has provided actual status andaccomplishments.

.13 Duration (DU): number of work periods (not including holidaysor other non-working periods) required to complete activity orother Project element. Usually expressed as workdays or workweeks.

.14 Early Finish Date (EF): in critical path method, earliestpossible point in time on which uncompleted portions ofactivity (or Project) can finish, based on network logic andschedule constraints. Early finish dates can change as Projectprogresses and changes are made to Project plan.

.15 Early Start Date (ESD): in critical path method, earliestpossible point in time on which uncompleted portions ofactivity (or Project) can start, based on network logic andschedule constraints. Early start dates can change as Projectprogresses and changes are made to Project Plan.

.16 Finish Date: point in time associated with activity'scompletion. Usually qualified by one of following: actual,planned, estimated, scheduled, early, late, baseline, target,or current.

.17 Float: amount of time that activity may be delayed from itsearly start without delaying Project finish date. Float ismathematical calculation, and can change as Project progressesand changes are made to Project Plan. This resource isavailable to both DCC Representative and Contractor.

.18 Lag: modification of logical relationship that directs delay insuccessor task.

.19 Late Finish Date (LF): in critical path method, latest possiblepoint in time that activity may be completed without delayingspecified milestone (usually Project finish date).

.20 Late Start Date (LS): in critical path method, latest possiblepoint in time that activity may begin without delayingspecified milestone (usually Project finish date).

.21 Lead: modification of logical relationship that allowsacceleration of successor task.

.22 Logic Diagram: see Project network diagram.

.23 Master Plan: summary level schedule that identifies majoractivities and key milestones.



.24 Milestone: significant event in Project, usually completion ofmajor deliverable.

.25 Monitoring: capture, analysis, and reporting of Projectperformance, usually as compared to plan.

.26 Near-Critical Activity: activity that has low total float.

.27 Non-Critical Activities: activities which when delayed, do notaffect specified Contract duration.

.28 Project Control System: fully computerized system utilizingcommercially available software packages.

.29 Project Network Diagram: schematic display of logicalrelationships of Project activities. Always drawn from left toright to reflect Project chronology.

.30 Project Plan: formal, approved document used to guide bothProject execution and Project control. Primary uses of Projectplan are to document planning assumptions and decisions,facilitate communication among stakeholders, and documentapproved scope, cost and schedule baselines. Project plan maybe summary or detailed.

.31 Project Planning: development and maintenance of Project plan.

.32 Project planning, Monitoring and Control System: overall systemoperated by DCC Representative to enable monitoring of ProjectWork in relation to established milestones.

.33 Project Schedule: planned dates for performing activities andplanned dates for meeting milestones. Dynamic, detailed recordof tasks or activities that must be accomplished to satisfyproject objectives. Monitoring and control process involvesusing project schedule in executing and controlling activitiesand is used as basis for decision making throughout projectlife cycle.

.34 Quantified days duration: working days based on 5 day workweek, discounting statutory holidays.

.35 Risk: uncertain event or condition that, if it occurs, haspositive or negative effect on Project's objectives.

.36 Scheduled Finish Date (SF): point in time that Work wasscheduled to finish on activity. Schedule finish date isnormally within range of dates delimited by early finish dateand late finish date.



.37 Scheduled Start Date (SS): point in time that Work wasscheduled to start on activity. Scheduled start date isnormally within range of dates delimited by early start dateand late start date.

.38 Start Date: point in time associated with activity's start,usually qualified by one of following: actual, planned,estimated, scheduled, early, late, target, baseline or current.

.39 Work Breakdown Structure (WBS): deliverable-oriented groupingof project elements that organizes and defines total Work scopeof Project. Each descending level represents increasinglydetailed definition of Project Work.

1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

.1 Construction Progress Schedule (Project Time Management):describes processes required to ensure timely completion ofProject. These processes ensure that various elements ofProject are properly coordinated. It consists of planning, timeestimating, scheduling, progress monitoring and control.

.2 Planning: this is most basic function of management, that ofdetermining presentation of action and is essential..1 It involves focusing on objective consideration of future,and integrating forward thinking with analysis; therefore, inplanning, implicit assumptions are made about future so thataction can be taken today..2 Planning and scheduling facilities accomplishment ofobjectives and should be considered continuous interactiveprocess involving planning, review, scheduling, analysis,monitoring and reporting.

.3 Ensure that planning process is iterative and results ingenerally top-down processing with more detail being developedas planning progresses, and decisions concerning options andalternatives are made. This implies progressively morereliability of scheduling data. Detail Project schedule is usedfor analysis and progress monitoring.

.4 Ensure project schedule efficiencies through monitoring..1 When activities begin on time and are performed accordingto estimated durations without interruptions, original CriticalPath will remain accurate. Changes and delays will however,create an essential need for continual monitoring of Projectactivities..2 Monitor progress of Project in detail to ensure integrityof Critical Path, by comparing actual completions of individualactivities with their scheduled completions, and reviewprogress of activities that has started but are not yetcompleted.



.3 Monitoring should be done sufficiently often so thatcauses of delays are immediately identified and removed ifpossible.

.5 Project monitoring and reporting: as Project progresses, keepteam aware of changes to schedule, and possible consequences.In addition to Bar Charts and CPM networks, use narrativereports to provide advice on seriousness of difficulties andmeasures to overcome them..1 Narrative reporting begins with statement on generalstatus of Project followed by summarization of delays,potential problems, corrective measures and Project statuscritically. Narrative report is to be submitted on a bi weeklybasis, as a component of the bi weekly construction progressmeetings.

1.3 CPM REQUIREMENTS

.1 Ensure Master Plan and Detail Schedule are practical and remainwithin specified Contract duration.

.2 Master Plan and Detail Schedule deemed impractical by DCCRepresentative are revised and resubmitted for approval.

.3 Acceptance of Master Plan and Detail Schedule showing scheduledContract duration shorter than specified Contract duration doesnot constitute change to Contract. Duration of Contract mayonly be changed through bilateral Agreement.

.4 Consider Master Plan and Detail Schedule deemed practical DCCRepresentative, showing Work completed in less than specifiedContract duration, to have float.

.5 First Milestone on Master Plan and Detail Schedule willidentify start Milestone with an "ES" constraint date equal toAward of Contract date.

.6 Calculate dates for completion milestones from Plan andSchedule using specified time periods for Contract.

.7 Substantial Completion with "LF" constraint equal to calculateddate.

.8 Calculations on updates to be such that if early finish ofInterim Certificate falls later than specified Contractduration then float calculation to reflect negative float.

.9 Delays to non-critical activities, those with float may not bebasis for time extension.



.10 Do not use float suppression techniques such as softwareconstraints, preferential sequencing, special lead/lag logicrestraints, extended activity times or imposed dates other thanrequired by Contract.

.11 Allow for and show Master Plan and Detail Schedule adverseweather conditions normally anticipated. Specified Contractduration has been predicated assuming normal amount of adverseweather conditions.

.12 Provide necessary crews and manpower to meet schedulerequirements for performing Work within specified Contractduration. Simultaneous use of multiple crews on multiple frontson multiple critical paths may be required. Arrangeparticipation on and off site of subcontractors and suppliers,as required by DCC Representative, for purpose of networkplanning, scheduling, updating and progress monitoring.Approvals by DCC Representative of original networks andrevisions do not relieve Contractor from duties andresponsibilities required by Contract.

.13 Ensure that it is understood that Award of Contract or time ofbeginning, rate of progress, Interim Certificate and FinalCertificate as defined times of completion are of essence ofthis contract.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

.1 Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 -Submittal Procedures.

.2 Submit to DCC Representative Project Control System forplanning, scheduling, monitoring and reporting of projectprogress.

.3 Submit Project Control System to DCC Representative forapproval; failure to comply with each required submission, mayresult in progress payment being withheld.

.4 Include costs for execution, preparation and reproduction ofschedule submittals in bid documents.

.5 Submit letter ensuring that schedule has been prepared incoordination with major sub-contractors.

.6 Refer to article "Progress monitoring and reporting" of thisspecification Section for frequency of Project control systemsubmittals.



.7 Submit Project planning, monitoring and control system data aspart of initial schedule submission and monthly statusreporting as required by DCC Representative in following form..1 CD files in original scheduling software containingschedule and cash flow information, labelled with data date,specific update, and person responsible for update. Master PlanBar Chart..2 Construction Detail schedule Bar Chart..3 Listing of project activities including milestones andlogical connectors, networks (sub-networks) from Project startto end. Sort activities by activity identification number andaccompany with descriptions. List early and late start andfinish dates together with durations, codes and float..4 Critically report listing activities and milestones withup to 5 days total float used as first sort for readyidentification of critical or near critical paths throughentire project. List early and late starts and finishes dates,together with durations, codes and float for criticalactivities..5 Progress report in early start sequence, listing for eachtrade, activities due to start, underway, or finished withintwo months from monthly update date. List activityidentification number, description and duration. Providecolumns for entry of actual start and finish dates, durationremaining and remarks concerning action required.

1.5 QUALITY CONTROL

.1 Use experienced personnel, fully qualified in planning andscheduling to provide services from start of construction toFinal Certificate, including Commissioning.

1.6 PROJECT MEETING

.1 Meet with DCC Representative within 5 working days of Award ofContract date, to establish Work requirements and approach toproject construction operations.

1.7 WORK BREAKDOWN STRUCTURE (WBS)

.1 Prepare construction Work Breakdown Structure (WBS) within 10working days of Award of Contract date. Develop WBS through atleast five levels: Project, stage, element, sub-element andwork package.



1.8 MASTER PLAN

.1 Structure and base CPM construction networks system on WBScoding in order to ensure consistency throughout Project.

.2 Prepare comprehensive construction master Plan (CPM logicdiagram) and dependent Cash Flow Projection within 15 workingdays of finalizing Agreement to confirm validity oralternatives of identified milestones..1 Master Plan will be used as baseline.

.1 Revise baseline as conditions dictate and as requiredDCC Representative..2 DCC Representative will review and return revisedbaseline within 10 working days.

.3 Reconcile revisions to Master Plan and Cash Flow Projectionswith previous baseline to provide continuous audit trail.

.4 Initial and subsequent Master Plans will include:.1 CD containing schedule and cash flow information, clearlylabelled with data date, specific update, and personresponsible for update..2 Bar chart identifying coding, activity durations,early/late and start/finish dates, total float, completion aspercentile, current status and budget amounts..3 Network diagram showing coding, activity sequencing(logic), total float, early/late dates, current status anddurations..4 Actual/projected monthly cash flow: expressed monthly andshown in both graphical and numerical form.

1.9 DETAIL SCHEDULE

.1 Provide detailed project schedule (CPM logic diagram) within 15working days of Award of Contract date showing activitysequencing, interdependencies and duration estimates. Includelisted activities as follows:.1 Shop drawings..2 Samples..3 Approvals..4 Procurement..5 Construction..6 Installation..7 Site works..8 Testing..9 Commissioning and acceptance.

.2 Detail CPM schedule to cover in detail minimum period of 3months beginning from Award of Contract date with each activityduration approximately 15 days.



.1 Show remaining activities for CPM construction networksystem up to Final Certificate and develop complete detail asproject progresses..2 Detail activities completely and comprehensivelythroughout duration of project.

.3 Relate Detail Schedule activities to basic activities andmilestones developed and approved in Master Plan.

.4 Clearly show sequence and interdependence of constructionactivities and indicate:.1 Start and completion of all items of Work, their majorcomponents, and interim milestone completion dates..2 Activities for procurement, delivery, installation andcompletion of each major piece of equipment, materials andother supplies, including:

.1 Time for submittals, resubmittals and review.

.2 Time for fabrication and delivery of manufacturedproducts for Work..3 Interdependence of procurement and constructionactivities.

.3 Include sufficient detail to assure adequate planning andexecution of Work. Activities should generally range induration from 3 to 15 workdays each.

.5 Provide level of detail for project activities such thatsequence and interdependency of Contract tasks are demonstratedand allow coordination and control of project activities. Showcontinuous flow from left to right.

.6 Ensure activities with no float are calculated and clearlyindicated on logical CPM construction network system as being,whenever possible, continuous series of activities throughoutlength of Project to form "Critical Path". Increased number ofcritical activities is seen as indication of increased risk.

.7 Insert Change Orders in appropriate and logical location ofDetail Schedule. After analysis, clearly state and report toDCC Representative for review effects created by insertion ofnew Change Order.

1.10 REVIEW OF THE CONSTRUCTION DETAIL SCHEDULE

.1 Allow 5 work days for review by DCC Representative of proposedconstruction Detail Schedule.

.2 Upon receipt of reviewed Detail Schedule make necessaryrevisions and resubmit to DCC Representative for review within5 work days.



.3 Promptly provide additional information to validatepracticability of Detail Schedule as required by DCCRepresentative.

.4 Submittal of Detail Schedule indicates that it meets Contractrequirements and will be executed generally in sequence.

1.11 COMPLIANCE WITH DETAIL SCHEDULE

.1 Comply with reviewed Detail Schedule.

.2 Proceed with significant changes and deviations from scheduledsequence of activities that cause delay, only after writtenreceipt of approval by DCC Representative.

.3 Identify activities that are behind schedule and causing delay.Provide measure to regain slippage..1 Corrective measures may include:

.1 Increase of personnel on site for effected activitiesor work package..2 Increase in materials and equipment..3 Additional work shifts.

.4 Submit to DCC Representative, justification, project scheduledata and supporting evidence for approval of extension toContract completion date or interim milestone date whenrequired. Include as part of supporting evidence:.1 Written submission of proof of delay based on revisedactivity logic, duration and costs, showing time impactanalysis illustrating of each change or delay relative toapproved contract schedule..2 Prepared schedule indicating how change will beincorporated into the overall logic diagram. Demonstrateperceived impact based on date of occurrence of change andinclude status of construction at that time..3 Other supporting evidence requested by DCC Representative..4 Do not assume approval of Contract extension prior toreceipt of written approval from DCC Representative.

.5 In event of Contract extension, display in Detail Schedule thatscheduled float time available for work involved has been usedin full without jeopardizing earned float..1 DCC Representative will determine and advise Contractornumber of allowable days for extension of Contract based onproject schedule updates for period in question, and otherfactual information..2 Construction delays affecting project schedule will notconstitute justification for extension of contract completiondate.



1.12 PROGRESS MONITORING AND REPORTING

.1 On ongoing basis, Detail Schedule on job site must show"Progress to Date". Arrange participation on and off site ofsubcontractors and suppliers, as, and when necessary, forpurpose of network planning, scheduling, updating and progressmonitoring. Inspect work with DCC Representative at least oncemonthly to establish progress on each current activity shown onapplicable networks.

.2 Update and reissue project Work Breakdown Structure andrelevant coding structures as project develops and changes.

.3 Perform Detail Schedule update monthly with status dated (DateDate) on last working day of month. Update to reflectactivities completed to date, activities in progress, logic andduration changes.

.4 Do not automatically update actual start and finish dates byusing default mechanisms found in project management software.

.5 Submit to DCC Representative 6 copies of updated DetailSchedule.

.6 Requirements for monthly progress monitoring and reporting arebasis for progress payment request.

.7 Submit monthly written report based on Detail Schedule, showingWork to date performed, comparing Work progress to planned, andpresenting current forecasts. Report must summarize progress,defining problem areas and anticipated delays with respect toWork schedule, and critical paths. Explain alternatives forpossible schedule recovery to mitigate any potential delay.Include in report:.1 Description of progress made..2 Pending items and status of: permits, shop drawings,change orders, possible time extensions..3 Status of Contract completion date and milestones..4 Current and anticipated problem areas, potential delaysand corrective measures..5 Review of progress and status of Critical Path activities.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Submittal Procedures Page 1Storage FacilityGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 Shop drawings and product data.

.2 Samples.

.3 Certificates and transcripts.

1.2 PRECEDENCE

.1 For Federal Government projects, Division 1 Sections takeprecedence over technical specification sections in otherDivisions of this Project Manual.




1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE

.1 Submit to DCC Representative submittals listed for review.Submit with reasonable promptness and in orderly sequence soas to not cause delay in Work. Failure to submit in ampletime is not considered sufficient reason for an extension ofContract Time and no claim for extension by reason of suchdefault will be allowed.

.2 Work affected by submittal shall not proceed until review iscomplete.

.3 Present shop drawings, product data, samples and mock-ups inSI Metric units.

.4 Where items or information is not produced in SI Metric unitsconverted values are acceptable.

.5 Review submittals prior to submission to DCC Representative.This review represents that necessary requirements have beendetermined and verified, or will be, and that each submittalhas been checked and co-ordinated with requirements of Workand Contract Documents. Submittals not stamped, signed, datedand identified as to specific project and specificationreference number will be returned without being examined andshall be considered rejected.



.6 Notify DCC Representative, in writing at time of submission,identifying deviations from requirements of ContractDocuments stating reasons for deviations.

.7 Verify field measurements and affected adjacent Work arecoordinated.

.8 Contractor's responsibility for errors and omissions insubmission is not relieved by DCC Representative's review ofsubmittals.

.9 Contractor's responsibility for deviations in submission fromrequirements of Contract Documents is not relieved by DCCRepresentative review.

.10 Keep one reviewed copy of each submission on site.

1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA

.1 The term "shop drawings" means drawings, diagrams,illustrations, schedules, performance charts and other datawhich are to be provided by Contractor to illustrate detailsof a portion of Work.

.2 Indicate materials, methods of construction and attachment oranchorage, erection diagrams, connections, explanatory notesand other information necessary for completion of Work. Wherearticles or equipment attach or connect to other articles orequipment, indicate that such items have been coordinated,regardless of Section under which adjacent items will besupplied and installed. Indicate cross references to designdrawings and specifications.

.3 Allow 10 working days for DCC Representative's review of eachsubmission.

.4 Adjustments made on shop drawings by DCC Representative arenot intended to change Contract Price. If adjustments affectvalue of Work, state such in writing to DCC Representativeprior to proceeding with Work.

.5 Make changes in shop drawings as DCC Representative mayrequire, consistent with Contract Documents. Whenresubmitting, notify DCC Representative in writing of anyrevisions other than those requested.

.6 Accompany submissions with transmittal letter, containing:.1 Date..2 Project title and number..3 Contractor's name and address.



.4 Identification and quantity of each shop drawing,product data and sample..5 Other pertinent data.

.7 Submissions shall include:.1 Date and revision dates..2 Project title and number..3 Name and address of:

.1 Subcontractor.

.2 Supplier.

.3 Manufacturer..4 Contractor's stamp, signed by Contractor's authorizedrepresentative certifying approval of submissions,verification of field measurements and compliance withContract Documents..5 Details of appropriate portions of Work as applicable:

.1 Fabrication.

.2 Layout, showing dimensions, including identifiedfield dimensions, and clearances..3 Setting or erection details..4 Capacities..5 Performance characteristics..6 Standards..7 Operating weight..8 Wiring diagrams..9 Single line and schematic diagrams..10 Relationship to adjacent work.

.8 After DCC Representative's review, distribute copies.

.9 Shop drawings shall be submitted electronically in PDF(Portable Document format) files. Shop drawings must belegible, or will be returned "Not Reviewed". Reproductions offacsimile (fax) documents will not be accepted.

.10 Delete information not applicable to project.

.11 Supplement standard information to provide details applicableto project.

.12 If upon review by DCC Representative, no errors or omissionsare discovered or if only minor corrections are made, copieswill be returned and fabrication and installation of Work mayproceed. If shop drawings are rejected, noted copy will bereturned and resubmission of corrected shop drawings, throughsame procedure indicated above, must be performed beforefabrication and installation of Work may proceed. File ofeach shop drawing submitted. PDF to be generated at asuitable scanned resolution to enable clear and unabiguousreading of the document. Optimize the size of files to allowreasonable electronic transmission while maintaining theclarity of the drawing.



1.6 SAMPLES

.1 Submit for review samples as requested in respectivespecification Sections. Label samples with origin andintended use.

.2 Deliver samples prepaid to DCC Representative's businessaddress.

.3 Notify DCC Representative in writing, at time of submissionof deviations in samples from requirements of ContractDocuments.

.4 Where colour, pattern or texture is criterion, submit fullrange of samples.

.5 Adjustments made on samples by DCC Representative are notintended to change Contract Price. If adjustments affectvalue of Work, state such in writing to DCC Representativeprior to proceeding with Work.

.6 Make changes in samples which DCC Representative may require,consistent with Contract Documents.

.7 Reviewed and accepted samples will become standard ofworkmanship and material against which installed Work will beverified.

1.7 MOCK-UPS

.1 Erect mock-ups in accordance with 01 45 00 - Quality Control.

1.8 PROGRESS PHOTOGRAPHS

.1 Submit electronic and hard copy of colour digital photographsin jpg format.

.2 Identification: name and number of project and date ofexposure indicated.

.3 Number of view points: locations of view points determined byDCC Representative. Submit a minimum of 20 pictures, size200mm by 250mm printed on colour photographic quality paper.

.4 Frequency: monthly and at completion excavation and servicesbefore concealment.



1.9 CERTIFICATES AND TRANSCRIPTS

.1 Immediately after award of Contract, submit Workers'Compensation Board status.

.2 Submit Site Superintendent Daily Diaries to the DCCrepresentative on a weekly basis.

.3 Submit estimated cash flow updates on a monthly basis to theDCC representative.

1.10 WORK SCHEDULE

.1 Provide schedule in accordance with Section 01 32 16.07 -Construction Progress Schedules Bar (GANTT) Charts.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBSTITUTION/AVAILABILITY OF MATERIALS

.1 Reference Defence Construction Canada Instructions toTenders.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used.

END OF SECTION

National Defence UNCLASSIFIED Sect 01 35 00.06

New ULCV & EATV Special Procedures for Page 1Storage Facility Traffic ControlGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

.1 Section 01 70 12 - Safety Requirements.

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 Ministry of Transportation, Ontario (MTO).1 Ontario Traffic Manual, Book 7: Temporary Conditions -01.

1.3 PROTECTION OF PUBLIC TRAFFIC

.1 Comply with requirements of Acts, Regulations and By-Laws inforce for regulation of traffic or use of roadways upon orover which it is necessary to carry out Work or haulmaterials or equipment.

.2 When working on travelled way:.1 Place equipment in position to minimize interference andhazard to travelling public..2 Keep equipment units as close together as workingconditions permit and preferably on same side of travelledway..3 Do not leave equipment on travelled way overnight.

.3 Keep travelled way graded, free from pot holes and ofsufficient width for required number of lanes of traffic..1 Provide 7 m wide minimum temporary roadway for trafficin two-way sections through Work and on detours.

.4 Provide detours or temporary roads as indicated, tofacilitate passage of traffic around restricted constructionarea:.1 Grade for detour in accordance with Section 31 24 13 -Roadway Embankments..2 Place and compact granular sub-base in accordance withSection 32 11 16.01 - Granular Sub-base..3 Place and compact granular base in accordance withSection 32 11 23 - Aggregate Base Courses.

.5 Provide and maintain road access and egress to propertyfronting along Work under Contract and in other areas asindicated, except where other means of road access exist thatmeet approval of DCC Representative.



1.4 INFORMATIONAL AND WARNING DEVICES

.1 Provide and maintain signs, flashing warning lights and otherdevices required to indicate construction activities or othertemporary and unusual conditions resulting from Project Workwhich requires road user response.

.2 Supply and erect signs, delineators, barricades andmiscellaneous warning devices to Ontario Traffic Manual, Book7.

.3 Place signs and other devices in locations recommended inOntario Traffic Manual, Book 7.

.4 Meet with DCC Representative prior to commencement of Work toprepare list of signs and other devices required for project.If situation on site changes, revise list to approval of DCCRepresentative.

.5 Continually maintain traffic control devices in use:.1 Check signs daily for legibility, damage, suitabilityand location. Clean, repair or replace to ensure clarity andreflectance..2 Remove or cover signs which do not apply to conditionsexisting from day to day.

1.5 CONTROL OF PUBLIC TRAFFIC

.1 Provide competent flag personnel, trained in accordance with,and properly equipped to Ontario Traffic Manual, Book 7:Temporary Conditions:.1 When public traffic is required to pass working vehiclesor equipment that block all or part of travelled roadway..2 When it is necessary to institute one-way traffic systemthrough construction area or other blockage where trafficvolumes are heavy, approach speeds are high and trafficsignal system is not in use..3 When workmen or equipment are employed on travelled wayover brow of hills, around sharp curves or at other locationswhere oncoming traffic would not otherwise have adequatewarning..4 Where temporary protection is required while othertraffic control devices are being erected or taken down..5 For emergency protection when other traffic controldevices are not readily available..6 In situations where complete protection for workers,working equipment and public traffic is not provided by othertraffic control devices..7 At each end of restricted sections where pilot cars arerequired.



.8 Delays to public traffic due to contractor's operators:15 minutes maximum.

.2 Where roadway, carrying two-way traffic, is restricted to onelane, for 24 hours each day, provide portable traffic signalsystem..1 Adjust, as necessary, and regularly maintain systemduring period of restriction..2 Ensure signal system meets requirements of OntarioTraffic Manual, Book 7: Temporary Conditions.

1.6 OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS

.1 Maintain existing conditions for traffic crossingright-of-way.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV DND Fire Safety Page 1Storage Facility RequirementsGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 PRECEDENCE



.1 Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures

.2 Section 01 47 15 Sustainable requirements: Construction

1.3 FIRE DEPARTMENT BRIEFING

.1 DCC Representative will coordinate arrangements for Contractorto be briefed on Fire Safety at their pre-work conference byFire Chief before any work is commenced.

.2 Permits are to be obtained for hot work and all hot work is tobe closely coordinated with DCC Representative.

1.4 REPORTING FIRES

.1 Know location of nearest fire alarm box and telephone,including emergency phone number.

.2 Report immediately all fire incidents to Fire Department asfollows:.1 activate nearest fire alarm box; or.2 telephone.

.3 Person activating fire alarm box will remain at box to directFire Department to scene of fire.

.4 When reporting fire by telephone, give location of fire, nameor number of building and be prepared to verify the location.

1.5 INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR FIRE PROTECTION AND ALARM SYSTEMS

.1 Fire hydrants, standpipes and hose systems will not be used forother than fire-fighting purposes unless authorized by FireChief.



1.6 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

.1 Supply fire extinguishers, as directed by Garrison PetawawaFire Department, necessary to protect work in progress andcontractor's physical plant on site.

1.7 BLOCKAGE OF ROADWAYS

.1 Advise Garrison Petawawa of any work that would impede fireapparatus response. This includes violation of minimum overheadclearance, as prescribed by Fire Chief, erecting of barricadesand digging of trenches.

1.8 SMOKING PRECAUTIONS

.1 Observe smoking regulations at all times.

1.9 RUBBISH AND WASTE MATERIALS

.1 Rubbish and waste materials are to be kept to a minimum.

.2 Burning of rubbish is prohibited.

.3 Removal:.1 Remove all rubbish from work site at end of work day orshift or as directed.

.4 Storage:.1 Store oily waste in approved receptacles to ensure maximumcleanliness and safety..2 Deposit greasy or oily rags and materials subject tospontaneous combustion in approved receptacles and remove asrequired in 1.9.3.1.

1.10 FLAMMABLE AND COMBUSTIBLE LIQUIDS

.1 Handling, storage and use of flammable and combustible liquidsare to be governed by the current National Fire Code of Canada.

.2 Flammable and combustible liquids such as gasoline, keroseneand naphtha will be kept for ready use in quantities notexceeding 45 litres provided they are stored in approved safetycans bearing Underwriters' Laboratory of Canada or FactoryMutual seal of approval. Storage of quantities of flammable andcombustible liquids exceeding 45 litres for work purposesrequires permission of Fire Chief.



.3 Transfer of flammable and combustible liquids is prohibitedwithin buildings.

.4 Transfer of flammable and combustible liquids will not becarried out in vicinity of open flames or any type ofheat-producing devices.

.5 Flammable liquids having a flash point below 38° C such asnaphtha or gasoline will not be used as solvents or cleaningagents.

.6 Flammable and combustible waste liquids, for disposal, will bestored in approved containers located in a safe ventilatedarea. Quantities are to be kept to a minimum and FireDepartment is to be notified when disposal is required.

1.11 HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES

.1 Work entailing use of toxic or hazardous materials, chemicalsand/or explosives, or otherwise creating hazard to life, safetyor health, will be in accordance with National Fire Code ofCanada.

.2 Obtain from Fire Chief a "Hot Work" permit for work involvingwelding, burning or use of blow torches and salamanders, inbuildings or facilities.

.3 When Work is carried out in dangerous or hazardous areasinvolving use of heat, provide fire watchers equipped withsufficient fire extinguishers. Determination of dangerous orhazardous areas along with level of protection necessary forFire Watch is at discretion of the Fire Chief. Contractors areresponsible for providing fire watch service for work on ascale established and in conjunction with Fire Chief atpre-work conference.

.4 Where flammable liquids, such as lacquers or urethanes are tobe used, proper ventilation will be assured and all sources ofignition are to be eliminated. Fire Chief is to be informedprior to and at cessation of such work.

1.12 QUESTIONS AND/OR CLARIFICATION

.1 Direct any questions or clarification on Fire Safety inaddition to above requirements to DCC Representative.



1.13 FIRE INSPECTION

.1 Site inspections by Fire Chief will be coordinated through DCCRepresentative.

.2 Allow Fire Chief unrestricted access to work site.

.3 Co-operate with Fire Chief during routine fire safetyinspection of work site.

.4 Immediately remedy all unsafe fire situations observed by FireChief.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.

END OF SECTION

National Defence UNCLASSIFIED Section 01 35 43New ULCV & EATV Environmental Procedures Page 1Storage FacilityGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES

.1 Definitions:.1 Environmental Pollution and Damage: presence ofchemical, physical, biological elements or agents whichadversely affect human health and welfare; unfavourably alterecological balances of importance to human life; affect otherspecies of importance to humans; or degrade environmentaesthetically, culturally and/or historically..2 Environmental Protection: prevention/control ofpollution and habitat or environment disruption duringconstruction.

1.2 ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

.1 Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - SubmittalProcedures.

.2 Product Data:.1 Submit 2 copies of WHMIS MSDS in accordance with Section01 70 12 - Safety Requirements.

.3 Before commencing construction activities or delivery ofmaterials to site, submit Environmental Protection Plan forreview and approval by DCC Representative.

.4 Environmental Protection Plan must include comprehensiveoverview of known or potential environmental issues to beaddressed during construction.

.5 Address topics at level of detail commensurate withenvironmental issue and required construction tasks.

.6 Include in Environmental Protection Plan:.1 Names of persons responsible for ensuring adherence toEnvironmental Protection Plan..2 Names and qualifications of persons responsible formanifesting hazardous waste to be removed from site..3 Names and qualifications of persons responsible fortraining site personnel..4 Descriptions of environmental protection personneltraining program.


New ULCV & EATV Environmental Procedures Page 2Storage FacilityGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

.5 Erosion and sediment control plan identifying type andlocation of erosion and sediment controls to be providedincluding monitoring and reporting requirements to assurethat control measures are in compliance with erosion andsediment control plan, Federal, Provincial, and Municipallaws and regulations..6 Drawings indicating locations of proposed temporaryexcavations or embankments for haul roads, stream crossings,material storage areas, structures, sanitary facilities, andstockpiles of excess or spoil materials including methods tocontrol runoff and to contain materials on site..7 Traffic Control Plans including measures to reduceerosion of temporary roadbeds by construction traffic,especially during wet weather.

.1 Plans to include measures to minimize amount ofmaterial transported onto paved public roads by vehiclesor runoff.

.8 Work area plan showing proposed activity in each portionof area and identifying areas of limited use or non-use.

.1 Plan to include measures for marking limits of useareas and methods for protection of features to bepreserved within authorized work areas.

.9 Spill Control Plan to include procedures, instructions,and reports to be used in event of unforeseen spill ofregulated substance..10 Non-Hazardous solid waste disposal plan identifyingmethods and locations for solid waste disposal includingclearing debris..11 Air pollution control plan detailing provisions toassure that dust, debris, materials, and trash, are containedon project site..12 Contaminant Prevention Plan identifying potentiallyhazardous substances to be used on job site; intended actionsto prevent introduction of such materials into air, water, orground; and detailing provisions for compliance with Federal,Provincial, and Municipal laws and regulations for storageand handling of these materials..13 Waste Water Management Plan identifying methods andprocedures for management and discharge of waste waters whichare directly derived from construction activities, such asconcrete curing water, clean-up water, dewatering of groundwater, disinfection water, hydrostatic test water, and waterused in flushing of lines..14 Historical, archaeological, cultural resourcesbiological resources and wetlands plan that definesprocedures for identifying and protecting historical,archaeological, cultural resources, biological resources andwetlands..15 Pesticide treatment plan to be included and updated, asrequired.



1.3 FIRES

.1 Fires and burning of rubbish on site is not permitted.

1.4 DRAINAGE

.1 Develop and submit Erosion and Sediment Control Plan (ESC)identifying type and location of erosion and sedimentcontrols provided. Plan to include monitoring and reportingrequirements to assure that control measures are incompliance with erosion and sediment control plan, Federal,Provincial, and Municipal laws and regulations.

.2 Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) to besubstituted for erosion and sediment control plan.

.3 Provide temporary drainage and pumping required to keepexcavations and site free from water.

.4 Ensure pumped water into waterways, sewer or drainage systemsis free of suspended materials.

.5 Control disposal or runoff of water containing suspendedmaterials or other harmful substances in accordance withlocal authority requirements.

1.5 SITE CLEARING AND PLANT PROTECTION

.1 Protect trees and plants on site and adjacent properties asindicated.

.2 Protect trees and shrubs adjacent to construction work,storage areas and trucking lanes, and encase with protectivewood framework from grade level to height of 2 m minimum.

.3 Protect roots of designated trees to dripline duringexcavation and site grading to prevent disturbance or damage..1 Avoid unnecessary traffic, dumping and storage ofmaterials over root zones.

.4 Minimize stripping of topsoil and vegetation.

.5 Restrict tree removal to areas indicated.

1.6 WORK ADJACENT TO WATERWAYS

.1 Construction equipment to be operated on land only.



.2 Use waterway beds for borrow material only after writtenreceipt of approval from DCC Representative.

.3 Waterways to be kept free of excavated fill, waste materialand debris.

.4 Design and construct temporary crossings to minimize erosionto waterways.

.5 Do not skid logs or construction materials across waterways.

.6 Avoid indicated spawning beds when constructing temporarycrossings of waterways.

.7 Blasting is not allowed.

1.7 POLLUTION CONTROL

.1 Maintain temporary erosion and pollution control featuresinstalled under this Contract.

.2 Control emissions from equipment and plant in accordance withlocal authorities' emission requirements.

.3 Prevent sandblasting and other extraneous materials fromcontaminating air and waterways beyond application area..1 Provide temporary enclosures where directed by DCCRepresentative.

.4 Cover or wet down dry materials and rubbish to preventblowing dust and debris. Provide dust control for temporaryroads.

1.8 HISTORICAL/ ARCHAEOLOGICAL CONTROL

.1 Provide historical, archaeological, cultural resources,biological resources, and wetlands plan that definesprocedures for identifying and protecting historical,archaeological, cultural resources, biological resources andwetlands known to be on project site: and identifiesprocedures to be followed if historical archaeological,cultural resources, biological resources and wetlands notpreviously known to be onsite or in area are discoveredduring construction.

.2 Plan: include methods to assure protection of known ordiscovered resources and identify lines of communicationbetween Contractor personnel and DCC Representative.



1.9 NOTIFICATION

.1 DCC Representative will notify Contractor in writing ofobserved noncompliance with Federal, Provincial or Municipalenvironmental laws or regulations, permits, and otherelements of Contractor's Environmental Protection plan.

.2 Contractor: after receipt of such notice, inform DCCRepresentative of proposed corrective action and take suchaction for approval by DCC Representative..1 Take action only after receipt of written approval byDCC Representative.

.3 DCC Representative will issue stop order of work untilsatisfactory corrective action has been taken.

.4 No time extensions granted or equitable adjustments allowedto Contractor for such suspensions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CLEANING

.1 Progress Cleaning: clean in accordance with Section 01 74 11- Cleaning..1 Leave Work area clean at end of each day.

.2 Bury rubbish and waste materials on site where directed afterreceipt of written approval from DCC Representative.

.3 Ensure public waterways, storm and sanitary sewers remainfree of waste and volatile materials disposal.

.4 Final Cleaning: upon completion remove surplus materials,rubbish, tools and equipment in accordance with Section01 74 11 - Cleaning.

.5 Waste Management: separate waste materials for reuse andrecycling in accordance with Section 01 74 21 -Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal..1 Remove recycling containers and bins from site anddispose of materials at appropriate facility.

END OF SECTION



.1 Remove recycling containers and bins from site anddispose of materials at appropriate facility.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Environmental Protection Page 1Storage Facility Refueling VehiclesGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures.

.2 Section 01 47 15 Sustainable requirements: Construction.

1.2 REFUELING

.1 Refueling of equipment at Garrison Petawawa to be performed inlocations as directed by DCC Representative.

.2 Do not refuel equipment within 30 metres of any watercourse orstorm water catch basin unless protection against spills is inplace and location is approved by DCC Representative.

.3 Use petroleum containers approved for products with no spillfill spouts for dispensing fuels. The sure pour nozzle to haveself closing valve, prevent any flow of fuel until the nozzleis inserted into the receiving container. On removal from thereceiving container the slide valve closes to eliminate anyfuel spill. Nozzle to be equipped with its own automatic venteliminating the need for the user to open or close air inletson the pouring container.

.4 Nozzle to support the weight of the pouring container. Nozzlesto automatically stop the flow when the receiving containerbecomes full. The nozzle to be such that it reduces evaporativelosses of volatile organic compounds during the fuel transfer.

.5 All spills of hydrocarbon based products such as gasoline,kerosene, naptha, lubricating oils, engine oils, greases andde-icing fluids or antifreeze. No matter how large or small tobe reported to DCC Representative.

.6 Oil changes or equipment repairs in the field or on DND landare not permitted.

.7 Refueling to be performed on level surfaces, PCC Portlandcement concrete or HMAC surfaces when approved by the DCCRepresentative unless otherwise directed.

.8 Contractor to have drip pans sized for amounts of product to berecovered and customized to fit under pieces of equipment toperform routine maintenance to equipment while maintainingequipment on property. Drip Pans to be used whenever leavingequipment on site or parking overnight when not in use.



.9 Parking of equipment on site to be on level ground in locationsaway from watercourses and as approved by DCC Representative.Equipment with leaks or poor mechanical repair to be removedfrom site.

1.3 SPILL CONTROL KITS

.1 Contractor to have at the work site a spill control kitconsisting of the following minimum types of equipment:.1 a spaded shovel;.2 a stable broom;.3 a broad nosed shovel;.4 a container(s) suitable, compatible to and of sufficientsize to contain petroleum products being used with equipment;.5 Absorbents;.6 rags;.7 metal container for soiled rags;.8 Booms when working next to a watercourse that willtraverse the width of the watercourse by two times; and.9 Spill control kit to be inspected and approved by BaseEnvironment Office prior to Work commencing. Spill control kitsto be available to Contractor employees at all areas where Workof the Contract is being performed and at all times during thecourse of the Contract..10 Contractor employees to be trained in the use of the spillcontrol kit and the equipment they contain.

1.4 SPILLS

.1 If a spill occurs follow the requirements for spill responseand reporting from Environmental Directive ED 4003 - 1/2003Spill Reporting.

.2 Disposal of spilled materials to be off DND property and atapprove locations for materials to be disposed of.

.3 When parking of equipment on site, the equipment is to besecured from entry, inspected for leaks and the groundprotected from leaks.

.4 Contractor to protect all wells, catch basins, drywells, drainsand watercourses from contamination in event of a spill.

.5 All equipment to be used for the Work of the Contract to beinspected by the DCC Representative for leaks. Equipment not ingood repair to be removed/repaired when directed by DCCRepresentative.

.6 The following spills in the administrative area (built-up) mustbe reported to Base Environment:



.1 POL product greater than 10L;

.2 Any glycol spill greater than 1L;

.3 Any battery acid spill;

.4 Any other hazardous/deleterious substance;

.5 Any release of halocarbons, including releases fromrefrigerators, chillers, air conditioners (vehicle andbuilding) and fire extinguishing systems in armoured vehicles(Halons); and.6 Any spill that enters a drain, ditch, or water bodyregardless of amount.

.7 For spills occurring the Contractor to immediately remove asmuch or all of the contaminated soils created by the spill fromWork of the Contractor as possible.

.8 Contaminated soils/materials to be placed in containerscompatible to the contaminants.

.9 Any remaining clean-up to be performed at no extra cost to DND.Clean-ups to be to the DCC Representative and Base EnvironmentStaff's satisfaction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Regulatory Page 1Storage Facility RequirementsGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL



.2 Section 01 47 15 Sustainable requirements: Construction.

1.2 REFERENCES AND CODES

.1 Perform Work in accordance with National Building Code ofCanada (NBCC) including amendments up to tender closing dateand other codes of provincial or local application providedthat in case of conflict or discrepancy, more stringentrequirements apply.

.2 Meet or exceed requirements of:.1 Contract documents..2 Specified standards, codes and referenced documents.

1.3 BUILDING SMOKING ENVIRONMENT

.1 Comply with smoking restrictions and municipal by-laws.

1.4 ENVIRONMENTAL PROCEDURES

.1 Comply to Section 01 35 43 - Environmental Protection.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Quality Management Page 1Storage Facility SystemGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL



.2 Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control.

.3 Section 01 47 15 - Sustainable requirements: Construction.

.4 Section 01 79 00 - Demonstrating and Training.

.5 Section 01 91 13 - General Commissioning (Cx) Requirements.

1.2 QUALITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

.1 The Contractor shall adopt a documented Quality ManagementSystem to ensure that the specified quality standards forthis project are achieved.

.2 Purpose: Under the terms of the Contract, the Contractor isresponsible for the delivery of a facility that meets thestandards of quality demanded by the specification as itapplies to materials, workmanship, and completed results. Thepurpose of the Contractor Quality Management System is toassist in the fulfillment of this obligation and to providethe DCC Representative with a means to confirm that thespecified level of quality is being achieved.

.3 Quality Management System: The Quality Management System(QMS) consists of the organizational structure and theinherent responsibilities, procedures, processes andresources needed to implement quality management of thebuilding process. In addition, and for the purpose of thisproject, "Commissioning" will be considered an integralelement of the quality management system. The QMS has threesub-systems as follows:.1 Quality Assurance (QA): QA refers to the documentedintent outlining the activities that are implemented in theQMS to provide confidence that the project will satisfy therelevant quality standards and specifications.



.2 Quality Control (QC): QC refers to the actual monitoringof specific project results to determine if they comply withrelevant quality standards. There are a number ofdeliverables associated with the QC sub-system, most of theseare generally already used on typical construction projects.The deliverables include, shop drawing reviews, on-siteinspections and tests and related reports, site meetingminutes etc. In addition, the Commissioning Report is animportant and integral element of the QC sub-systemdeliverables..3 Commissioning Plan (CP): Contractor commissioningCoordinator will participate in the preparation of thedetailed commissioning plan in consultation with themechanical, electrical and other subcontractors. TheCommissioning Authority will require the contractor'scontributions to be completed prior to the 60% completion ofthe construction work at the site.

1.3 ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES

.1 There will be four key individuals (parts) in the project'sQuality Management System. The DCC Representative, theContractor's Project Manager, the Contractor's QualityManager and the Contractor's Commissioning Coordinator. Theirresponsibilities and roles are defined as follows:.1 The Project DCC Representative: The Project DCCRepresentative is the person appointed by DefenceConstruction Canada to act on their behalf in matters ofcontract issues and to ensure that the activities match theContractors schedule and that the construction processes arein accordance with contract documents. The Project DCCRepresentative is responsible to ensure that a QualityManagement System has been established by the Contractor andthat it will satisfy the quality objectives of the project asoutlined in the specification. The Project DCC Representativewill review and accept the Quality Management Plan and willappoint a Commissioning Agent to review the CommissioningPlan..2 Contractor's Project Manager: The Contractor's ProjectManager is responsible for developing and implementing aneffective Quality Management System. This will cover the fullspectrum of work with which the Contractor is involved duringthe contract period. The Contractor's Project Manager willdemonstrate the existence of the Quality Management System bysubmitting a Quality Management Plan and appointing a QualityManager.



.3 Contractor's Quality Manager (QM): The Contractor shallappoint a Quality Manager for the project. The duties of theQuality Manager are independent of and play no role in thework production to which QA/QC activities are applied. TheQuality Manager cannot be the project manager or the projectsupervisor. The Quality Manager shall be empowered to carryout duties and to require conformance to the qualitystandards and requirements of the Contract Documents. Thequality Manager will report directly to the Quality Auditor.The Contractor's Quality Manager must have the followingqualifications:

.1 Must possess one of the following: a CET, P. Eng.,Trade Certificate or PMP Designation..2 Three years of General Construction Experience asan assistant Site Superintendent to include:

.1 Footing/Foundations

.2 Structural steel

.3 Roofing

.4 Mechanical

.5 Electrical

.6 Architectural.3 Will be responsible for:

.1 Day to day execution of the Quality Plan;

.2 Working with trade contractors to explain thenature of the Quality Plan, their role in it andensuring quality workmanship on site;.3 Maintaining Quality records on site including:.4 inspections and test reports;.5 non-conformance reports; and.6 corrective action reports and sign offs..7 Facilitating quality inspections by the DCCRepresentative's representatives;.8 Reporting to the Contractor Project Manager onthe Quality Process for the project.

.4 Contractor's Commissioning Coordinator: The Contractor'sCommissioning Coordinator will be appointed by thecontractor. The Coordinator's responsibilities will includethe following:

.1 Actively participate in the preparation of thedetailed commissioning plan;.2 Assemble the contractor's commissioning team.3 Coordinating the Contractor's team's input into thecommissioning process;.4 Coordinating the mechanical, electrical, controls,and other subcontractor's input into the commissioningprocess; and.5 Execute the Commissioning Plan in consultation withthe Commissioning Authority, DCC Representative, theContractor's PM, and the Contractor's Quality Manager.



1.4 DELIVERABLES

.1 Quality Management Plan: The Quality Management Plan willaddress quality assurance and quality control issues andserves as the guide to the quality related activities theContractor will undertake over the course of the project. Theplan will be delivered within 4 weeks after award. As aminimum, the plan will direct the following activity:.1 Implementing an active program to instill in managementstaff, design professionals, supervisory personnel andsub-contractors an awareness of the requirement for qualitywork and obtaining the commitment to produce it..2 Assembling an experienced staff capable of performinggood quality work and engaging sub-contractors capable ofproducing good quality work, for example:

.1 Perform Work in accordance with standard acceptedindustry practices for type of Work unlessspecifications stipulate more precise requirements..2 Do Work in neat and careful manner to retain Workplumb, square, and straight..3 Ensure Work is properly related to form closejoints and appropriately aligned junctions, edges andsurfaces and is free of warp, twist, wind, wave or otherirregularities..4 When required by specifications or by manufacturersrecommendations, have manufacturer, supplier oraccredited agent, inspect work which incorporates theirproducts..5 Do not permit materials to come in contact withother materials whether in presence of moisture orotherwise if conditions will result in corrosion, stainor discoloration or deterioration of completed Work.Provide compatible, durable separators where contact isunavoidable..6 When any of the above conditions are not met, theDCC Representative may require the Contractor to redothe work at no additional cost and with no additionalconstruction time to the contract.

.3 Establishing as-built drawing review to ensure that theconstruction requirements meet the specification and areunderstood by all project stakeholders. The documentation ofthese reviews shall form the auditable trail of changebetween the requirements in the specification with theconstruction documents..4 Maintaining an effective shop drawing verification andapproval system..5 Establishing a system of inspection reports thatdemonstrate an active site inspection routine by theContractor's team and the Quality Manager complete with asystem of inspection reports.



.1 The Contractor's Quality Management Plan shalldescribe in detail proposed quality control practices.The Quality Management Plan shall:

.1 identify items of work which will be subjectto controls, and list particular checks and testswhich are to be performed for each item of work,.2 indicate frequency of checks, tests andmilestones at which they are to be carried out, and.3 provide for reports on results of theseactivities, with reports submitted to DCCRepresentative and Quality Auditor.

.6 Consulting with supervisory personnel, workmen andsub-contractors to confirm that the requirements of thedrawings and specification are thoroughly understood andexecuted..7 Maintaining material ordering procedures and recordsthat verify and confirm the materials purchased meet thespecified standards..8 Ensuring adequate materials and assembly testingprocedures are in place throughout the project..9 Verifying that the equipment which is to be used toperform the work is appropriate and in good working order..10 Providing inspection services, in some cases by engagingspecialist firms, of certain high risk installations, e.g.roofing, HVAC testing and balancing..11 Providing an inspection framework to ensure conformanceof work of one stage before the next stage is performed, forexample:

.1 verifying that granular base material is compactedto the specified standards before placing reinforcingsteel,.2 verifying reinforcing steel installation forconformity to spec and accepted practice, before placingconcrete,.3 hydrostatic, pneumatic pressure testing prior tobackfilling or closing in.

.12 Providing mock-ups or sample sections of repetitive workto establish acceptable standard of workmanship e.g. concretepavement sections, concrete block masonry and/or brickwork,roof curbing details etc..13 Systems Commissioning as described in the CommissioningPlan..14 The Contractor's Quality Manager will be responsible forall quality aspects on this contract. The contractor'sresponsibilities include the work activities carried out bySubcontractors, suppliers, manufacturers and fabricatorsworking on behalf of the Contractor..15 Implement the Quality Management Plan to organize,demonstrate and document the work is performed in accordancewith the requirements of the Contract Documents.



.16 Incorporate required inspection and testing of work byContractor's subcontractors, suppliers and fabricators intothe Quality Management Plan..17 Incorporate documented Quality Program and proceduresincluding provisions for equipment procurement, manufactureand installation, construction, testing, start-up,operational training and maintainability..18 The following items must be addressed in theContractor's Quality Control Plan:

.1 Management responsibilities,

.2 Quality Management organizational structure,

.3 Quality Management personnel,

.4 Integration of subcontractors, suppliers andfabricators quality programs with the Contractor'sQuality Program,.5 Documentation of the Contractor's Quality Program,.6 Document control,.7 Purchasing control,.8 Product identification and traceability,.9 Process control,.10 Inspection and testing,.11 Inspection, Measuring and Testing Equipment,.12 Inspection and testing status,.13 Standards of acceptance for mock-ups and testpanels where they are not identified by specifications,.14 Non-conformance,.15 Corrective/ preventative action,.16 Quality records and.17 User training.

.19 The Contractor's Quality Manager will carry out weeklyinspections of all divisions of work on-site. The QualityManager shall submit a written report within 2 working daysof weekly inspections to the DCC Representative. The writtenreports shall identify work completed in a particulardivision, any specific problems with the completed work, anynon-conforming work, proposed corrective action and detailednotes pertaining to the quality of the installed works..20 The Quality Management Plan shall be organized by NMSdivisional format. Each division shall contain the followingelements:

.1 Scope of the work subject to control and qualitymeasures,.2 Proposed quality control processes,.3 Description of proposed Inspection and Testingactivities and equipment,.4 Standards of acceptance for results from inspectionand testing activities,.5 Specific Inspection forms and Checklists.



.2 Commissioning Plan: The Commissioning Plan will be aseparately bound volume of the Quality Management Plan. Itwill describe the commissioning activity, and address qualityassurance and quality control issues related to thecommissioning of building systems. The Commissioning Planwill be prepared by the Contractor's CommissioningCoordinator, in concert with the DCC Representative'sCommissioning Agent, the Contractor's PM, Sub-contractors,and the DCC Representative. The Plan will address thefollowing items:.1 The objectives of the commissioning process for thisproject..2 The general approach which will be taken to implementthe commissioning of building systems..3 A description of the commissioning team (to includeowner identified representatives and a brief terms ofreference for the team members..4 A listing and description of the systems which are to becommissioned..5 A sequential listing of the commissioning activities andtests for each system and outline descriptions of eachactivity and test..6 A tentative schedule of the commissioning activitieswhich will be refined throughout the contract period..7 A full commissioning plan, c/w with all test sheets andimplementation schedule must be presented by the 60%completion of the construction work at the site..8 A commissioning plan template is available with thetender documents.

All Contractor QA and QC activities on the Contract, as well asthose QA and QC activities carried out by designers, consultants,sub consultants, trade contractors, suppliers, manufacturers andfabricators working on behalf of the Contractor may be subject toauditing by the Owner or his designated representative. On noticeof a quality audit the contractor will facilitate the auditactivity by providing back up documentation and access to workareas.

1.5 QUALITY CONTROL REPORTS AND RETURNS

.1 Civil: QM to provide the following:.1 Roads/Parking Area

.1 Weekly inspection by QM.

.2 Compaction of gravels and sub-base by QM.

.3 Asphalt grade and asphalt testing reports by QM..2 Concrete Apron

.1 Inspection sigh-off sheets for formwork, rebar andsoils testing for each concrete pour by QM..2 Inspection of soils by soils consultant.



.3 Weekly inspection of foundation and other concretework. Report with connection rebar, bolts, inserts,formwork, concrete materials and methods and conformanceto specifications and drawings as well as coderequirements by QM.

.3 Underground Tankage.1 Installation of site services to be approved by QM..2 Hydrostatic testing certified by QM..3 Weekly inspection of foundation and other concretework. Report to comment on re-bar, and/or bolts,inserts, formwork, concreting materials and methods andconformance to specification and drawing, as well ascode requirements by QM.

.4 Erosion Control.1 Weekly inspection by QM. Report to comment on thecondition of and performance of erosion controlmeasures.

.2 Site Services. QM to provide the following:.1 Installation of site services to be approved by QM andDCC Representative..2 Weekly inspection by QM. Report to comment on joints,bedding, thrust blocks, slope, general workmanship..3 Hydrostatic testing certified by QM..4 Flushing and disinfecting certified by QM..5 Final certification of all structural fills, subgrade,proof rolling and granular fills by soils consultant.

.3 Structural. QM to provide the following:.1 Inspection sign-off sheets for formwork, rebar and soilstesting for each concrete pour by QM..2 Inspection of soils during foundation installation bysoils consultant..3 Weekly inspection of foundation and other concrete work.Report to comment on rebar, and/or bolts, inserts, formworkconcreting materials and methods and conformancespecification and drawings, as well as code requirements QM.All concrete Quality Control testing to be provided and paidfor the by Contractor..4 Inspection and approval of cold weather concretingpractices by QM during weekly inspections. Include formremoval practices..5 Structural steel mill test reports by QM..6 Weekly inspection of structural steel installation by QMto certify conformance to specifications and drawings..7 Inspection of bolt torque and weld by QM.



.8 Structural weld radiography by QM. Radiography to beperformed at manufacturers shop before arrival of steel onsite. Percentage of welds to be tested to be per CSA Standardand as noted on the drawings and specified herein. Acorrective action will be put in place in the event of nonconforming welds, and will at a minimum consist of if a weldfails, adjacent welds are to be tested. If adjacent weldfails, 100% welds will be tested all at Contractors expense..9 Certification by QM that all erectors, fabricators andwelders are certified in accordance with the appropriate CSAstandard.

.4 Architectural. QM to provide the following:.1 Masonry and mortar test reports..2 Pre-cast concrete test reports..3 Roofing inspection. Provide weekly reports..4 Air barrier installation inspection. Provide reports..5 Inspection of insulation and vapour barrier. Approval byDCC Representative before cover-up..6 Inspection and approval of fireproofing and firebarriers by QM..7 Weekly site inspections by QM. Include report on overallconformance to specifications and drawings, quality,accuracy, alignments, levelness and plumbness.

.5 Mechanical. QM to provide the following:.1 Pressure tests of all underground and concealed piping.QM to certify..2 Weekly inspection and report on piping installations byQM..3 Inspection and report by QM that all plumbing clean-outsare installed such that the entire drainage system can berodded..4 Inspection and report by QM on pipe hangers, hangerspacing and rod diameter..5 Inspection and report by QM on position of servicevalves. Certify that valves are oriented correctly..6 Inspection and report by QM on adequate serviceclearance being provided for mechanical equipment..7 Inspection and report by QM on isolation valves andunions being properly located for specific equipment..8 Inspection and report by QM on adequate headroom beingprovided..9 Inspection and report by QM on installation of expansionjoints and flex connectors in piping system..10 QM to inspect and report weekly on general installationconformance to specifications and drawings..11 Inspection and report on ventilation air balancing workdone by an independent specialized firm, QM to monitor.12 Inspection and report of Energy Monitoring of allcontrols systems by QM.



.6 Electrical. QM to provide the following:.1 QM to inspect and report weekly on general installationconformance to specifications and drawings..2 Conduct and pay for tests of the following:

.1 Power distribution system including phasing,voltage, grounding and load balancing..2 Circuits originating from branch distributionpanels..3 Lighting systems and controls..4 Motors, heaters and associated control equipmentincluding sequenced operation of systems whereapplicable..5 Standby power system..6 400 Hz frequency converter..7 Systems: fire alarm system, communication systems..8 Testing and reporting of grounding systems.

.1 Power ground system.

.2 Instrumentation ground system.

.3 Lightning protection ground system.

.4 Static ground system.

.5 Ordinance ground system..3 Carry out tests in presence of DCC Representative.4 Provide instruments, meters, equipment and personnelrequired to conduct tests during and at conclusion ofproject..5 Test all systems in accordance with details inappropriate sections..6 Testing methods and test results: in accordance withCSA, CEC and regulations of the supply authority and otherauthorities having jurisdiction..7 Remove and replace with new materials all conductorsthat are found to be shorted or grounded..8 Conduct dielectric tests, hi-pot tests, insulationresistance tests and ground continuity tests as required bythe nature of the various systems and equipment.

.7 Fire Alarm System Testing and Adjusting. QM to provide thefollowing:.1 Ensure that the manufacturer makes an inspection of thefire alarm and smoke detection system and equipment. Theinspection tests to conform to CAN/ULC-S537 Inspection andTesting of Fire Alarm System..2 On completion of the inspection and when all of theabove conditions have been complied with, the manufacturershall issue to the DCC Representative the following:

.1 A copy of the inspecting technician's reportshowing the location of each device and certifying thetest results of each device..2 A certificate of verification confirming that theinspection has been completed and showing the conditionsupon which such inspection and certification have beenrendered.



.3 Proof of liability insurance for the inspection..3 The Canadian Forces Fire Marshal (CFFM) shall conductcommissioning testing following verification. Amanufacturer's representative shall be present during thetesting..4 The QM must be present at and during the verificationand certification in order for the verification to be valid.The Contractor must furnish to the DCC Representative, priorto verification, as-built drawings showing exact routing ofall conduits, exact location of all devices includingend-of-line devices and exact wire counts..5 Provide weekly inspection reports by QM on generalinstallation and conformance to specifications and drawings..6 Specialized Equipment to be commissioned as permanufacturer's or supplier instruction and recommendation.

1.6 DCC REPRESENTATIVE QUALITY AUDIT

.1 DCC Representative will arrange for Quality Audit during allphases of the Contract. DCC Representative will appointQuality Audit Personnel to assist in conducting the audit.Contractor shall provide access to all areas of the Work andprovide any assistance required by the DCC Representative orhis appointed quality audit personnel to carry out qualityaudit.

.2 DCC Representative's Quality Audit Process will be a seriesof activities, which will permit the DCC Representative toascertain that Work is being performed in accordance with thedrawings and specifications, contractor's Quality ControlProgram and all applicable codes and standards.

.3 The Audit process will enable the DCC Representative tomonitor quality control and quality assurance mechanismswhich are in place, and to request any adjustment to qualitycontrol or quality assurance processes, should suchadjustments become necessary. The Audit process will allowthe DCC Representative to verify, on a continuing basis, thatan appropriate Quality Management System is in place andbeing implemented effectively.

.4 The Quality Audit Personnel appointed by the DCCRepresentative will investigate and evaluate the work andcontractor's degree of compliance with the projectrequirements. The Quality Audit Personnel may perform up tothree different types of audit during the course of theproject:.1 Targeted Audit to attain assurance that the criticalrequirements have been met:



.2 Random Audits to provide assessment of the contractor'sperformance in satisfying the contractual, performance andquality requirements of the work;.3 Monitoring Audits to investigate the compliance ofpossible non-conformance observed by the DCC Representative'srepresentatives in the course of their other duties.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV References Page 1Storage FacilityGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 ASSOCIATIONS

.1 AA - Aluminum Association, 900 19th Street N.W., Washington,D.C., U.S.A. 20006 URL http://www.aluminum.org

.2 AASHTO - American Association of State Highway andTransportation Officials, 444 N Capitol Street N.W., Suite 249,Washington, D.C., U.S.A. 20001 URL http://www.aashto.org

.3 ACEC Association of Consulting Engineers of Canada,130 AlbertStreet, Suite 616, Ottawa, ON. K1P 5G4 URL http://www.acec.ca

.4 .1 American Gear Manufacturers Association (AGMA).1 210.02 Surface Durability - Spur Gears.2 211.02 Surface Durability - Helical and HerringboneGears.3 220.02 Rating Strength of Spur Gears.4 221.02 Rating Strength of Helical and HerringboneGears

.5 AHA - American Hardboard Association, 1210W Northwest Hwy.,Palatine, Illinois, U.S.A. 60067 URL : http://www.hardboard.org

.6 AITC - American Institute of Timber Construction, 7012 S.Revere Parkway, Suite 140, Englewood, Colorado, U.S.A. 80112URL http://www.aitc-glulam.org

.7 AMCA - Air Movement and Control Association Inc., 30 WestUniversity Drive, Arlington Heights, Illinois, U.S.A.60004-1893 URL http://www.amca.org

.8 ANSI - American National Standards Institute, 25 West 43rdStreet, 4th Floor, New York, New York, U.S.A. 10036 URLhttp://www.ansi.org

.9 APA - The Engineered Wood Association, P.O. Box 11700, Tacoma,Washington, U.S.A. 98411-0700 URL http://www.apawood.org

.10 API - American Petroleum Institute,1220 L St. Northwest,Washington, D.C., U.S.A. 20005-4070 URL http://www.api.org

.11 ARI - Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute, 4100 NFairfax Drive, Suite 200, Arlington, Virginia, U.S.A. 22203 URLhttp://www.ari.org

.12 ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigeration andAir-Conditioning Engineer, 1791 Tullie Circle NE, Atlanta,Georgia, U.S.A. 30329 URL http://www.ashrae.org



.13 ASME - American Society of Mechanical Engineers, ASMEHeadquarters, 3 Park Avenue, New York, New York, U.S.A.10016-5990 URL http://www.asme.org

.14 ISAP - International Society for Asphalt Paving, 400 SelbyAvenue, Suite 1, St. Paul, MN 55102 U.S.A. URLhttp://www.asphalt.org

.15 ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials, 100 BarrHarbor Drive West, Conshohocken, Pennsylvania 19428-2959 URLhttp://www.astm.org

.16 AWCI - Association of the Wall and Ceiling IndustriesInternational, 803 West Broad Street, Suite 600, Falls Church,UA, U.S.A. 22046 URL http://www.awci.org

.17 AWMAC - Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association ofCanada, 516-4 Street West, High River, Alberta T1V 1B6 URLhttp://www.awmac.com

.18 AWPA - American Wire Producer's Association, 801 N FairfaxStreet, Suite 211, Alexandria, VA U.S.A. 22314-1757 URLhttp://www.awpa.org

.19 AWPA - American Wood Preservers' Association, P.O. Box 5690,Granbury Texas, U.S.A. 76049-0690 URL http://www.awpa.com

.20 AWS - American Welding Society, 550 N.W. LeJeune Road, Miami,Florida U.S.A. 33126 URL http://www.amweld.org

.21 AWWA - American Water Works Association, 6666 W. Quincy Avenue,Denver, Colorado, U.S.A. 80235 URL http://www.awwa.org

.22 CCA Canadian Construction Association,75 Albert St., Suite 400Ottawa, Ontario, K1P 5E7 URL http://www.cca-acc.com

.23 CCDC Canadian Construction Documents Committee, Refer to ACEC,CCA, CSC or RAIC

.24 CFFM - Canadian Forces Fire Marshal, 101 Colonel By Drive, 8NTMGen George R. Pearkes Bldg., Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0K2 URLhttp://www.dnd.ca/admie/dgcps/CFFMe.htm

.25 CGA - Canadian Gas Association, 20 Eglinton Avenue West, Suite1305, Toronto, Ontario M4R 1K8 URL http://www.cga.ca

.26 CGSB - Canadian General Standards Board, Place du Portage,Phase III, 6B1, 11 Laurier Street, Hull, Quebec K1A 0S5 URLhttp://w3.pwgsc.gc.ca/cgsb



.27 CISC - Canadian Institute of Steel Construction, 201 ConsumersRoad, Suite 300, Willowdale, Ontario M2J 4G8 URLhttp://www.cisc-icca.ca

.28 CLA - Canadian Lumbermen's Association, 27 Goulburn Avenue,Ottawa, Ontario, K1N 8C7 URL http://www.cla-ca.ca

.29 CNLA - Canadian Nursery Landscape Association, RR #4, Stn.Main, 7856 Fifth Street, Milton, Ontario. L9T 2X8 URLhttp://www.canadanursery.com

.30 Crane Manufacturers Association of America (CMAA)

.31 CRCA - Canadian Roofing Contractors Association, 155 QueenStreet, Suite 1300, Ottawa, Ontario K1P 6L1 URLhttp://www.roofingcanada.com

.32 CSA - Canadian Standards Association International, 178 RexdaleBlvd., Toronto, Ontario M9W 1R3 URLhttp://www.csa-international.org

.33 CSC - Construction Specifications Canada, 120 Carlton Street,Suite 312, Toronto, Ontario M5A 4K2 URL http://www.csc-dcc.ca

.34 CSDMA - Canadian Steel Door Manufacturers Association, OneYonge Street, Suite 1801, Toronto, Ontario M5E 1W7

.35 CSPI - Corrugated Steel Pipe Institute, 652 Bishop Street N,Unit 2A, Cambridge, Ontario N3H 4V6 URL http://www.cspi.ca

.36 CSSBI - Canadian Sheet Steel Building Institute, 652 Bishop St.N., Unit 2A, Cambridge, Ontario N3H 4V6 URL http://www.cssbi.ca

.37 CUFCA Canadian Urethane Foam Contractor's Association, Box3214, Winnipeg, Manitoba, R3C 4E7 URL http://www.cufca.ca

.38 CWC - Canadian Wood Council, 1400 Blair Place, Suite 210,Ottawa, Ontario K1J 9B8 URL http://www.cwc.ca

.39 EC - Environment Canada, Conservation and Protection, InquiryCentre, 351 St. Joseph Blvd, Hull, Québec KIA 0H3 URLhttp://www.ec.gc.ca

.40 EFC - Electro Federation of Canada, 5800 Explorer Drive, Suite200, Mississauga, Ontario L4W 5K9 URL http://www.electrofed.com

.41 EIMA EIFS Industry Manufacturer's Association, 3000 CorporateCenter Drive, Suite 270, Morrow, Georgia U.S.A. 30260 URLhttp://www.eima.com



.42 FCC - Fire Commissioner of Canada, Place du Portage, Phase II,165 rue Hotel de Ville, Hull, Quebec K1A 0J2http://info.load-otea.hrdc-drhc.gc.ca/fire-prevention/standards/commissioner.shtml

.43 IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, IEECorporate Office, 3 Park Avenue, 17th Floor, New York, New YorkU.S.A. 10016-5997 URL http://www.ieee.org

.44 MHIA - Material Handling Industry of America.

.45 MPI - The Master Painters Institute, 4090 Graveley Street,Burnaby, BC V5C 3T6 URL http://www.paintinfo.com

.46 MSS - Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve andFittings Industry, 127 Park Street, N.E., Vienna, VirginiaU.S.A. 22180-4602 URL http://www.mss-hq.com

.47 NAAMM - National Association of Architectural MetalManufacturers, 8 South Michigan Avenue, Suite 1000, Chicago,Illinois U.S.A. 60603 URL http://www.naamm.org

.48 NABA - National Air Barrier Association, PO Box 2747, Winnipeg,Manitoba R3C 4E7 URL http://www.naba.ca

.49 NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association,1300 N.17th Street, Suite 1847, Rosslyn, Virginia 22209 URLhttp://www.nema.org

.50 NFPA - National Fire Protection Association, 1 BatterymarchPark, P.O. Box 9101Quincy, Massachusetts, U.S.A. 02269-9101 URLhttp://www.nfpa.org

.51 NFSA - National Fire Sprinkler Association, P.O. Box 1000,Patterson, New York, U.S.A. 12563 URL http://www.nfsa.org

.52 NHLA - National Hardwood Lumber Association, 6830 Raleigh-LaGrange Road,Memphis, TN, U.S.A 38184-0518 URLhttp://www.natlhardwood.org

.53 NLGA - National Lumber Grades Authority, 406-First CapitalPlace, 960 Quayside Drive, New Westminster, B.C. V3M 6G2

.54 NRC - National Research Council, Building M-58, 1200 MontrealRoad, Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0R6 URL http://www.nrc.gc.ca

.55 NSPE National Society of Professional Engineers, 1420 KingStreet, Alexandria, VA U.S.A. 22314-2794 URLhttp://www.nspe.org



.56 PCI - Prestressed Concrete Institute, 209 W. Jackson Blvd.,Suite 500, Chicago, Illinois, U.S.A. 60606-6938 URLhttp://www.pci.org

.57 PEI - Porcelain Enamel Institute, PO Box 920220, Norcross, GAU.S.A. 30010 URL http://www.porecelainenamel.com

.58 QPL - Qualification Program List, c/o Canadian GeneralStandards Board, Place du Portage, Phase III, 6B1, 11 LaurierStreet, Hull, Quebec K1A 1G6 URL http://www.pwgsc.gc.ca/cgsb

.59 RAIC Royal Architectural Institute of Canada, 55 Murray Street,Suite 330, Ottawa, Ontario, K1N 5M3 URL http://www.raic.org

.60 SCC - Standards Council of Canada, 270 Albert Street, Suite2000, Ottawa, Ontario K1P 6N7 URL http://www.scc.ca

.61 SSPC - The Society for Protective Coatings, 40 24th Street, 6thFloor, Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania 15222-4656 URLhttp://www.sspc.org

.62 TPI - Truss Plate Institute, 583 D'Onofrio Drive, Suite 200,Madison, WI, U.S.A. 53719 URL http://www.tpinst.org

.63 TTMAC - Terrazzo, Tile and Marble Association of Canada, 30Capston Gate, Unit 5 Concord, Ontario L4K 3E8 URLhttp://www.ttmac.com

.64 UL - Underwriters' Laboratories, 333 Pfingsten Road,Northbrook, Illinois, U.S.A. 60062-2096 URL http://www.ul.com

.65 ULC - Underwriters' Laboratories of Canada, 7 Crouse Road,Toronto, Ontario M1R 3A9 URL http://www.ulc.ca



.2 Section 01 47 15 Sustainable Requirements: Construction.

.3 Section 01 61 00 - Common Product.

PART2 - PRODUCTS

1.3 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Quality Control Page 1Storage FacilityGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 Inspection and testing, administrative and enforcementrequirements.

.2 Tests and mix designs.

.3 Mock-ups.

.4 Mill tests.

.5 Equipment and system adjust and balance.



.2 Section 01 41 00.01 - Quality Management System.


.4 Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.

.5 Section 01 91 13 - General Commissioning (CX) Requirements.

.6 Section 04 05 00 - Common Work Results for Masonry.

1.3 INSPECTION

.1 Allow DCC Representative access to Work. If part of Work is inpreparation at locations other than Place of Work, allow accessto such Work whenever it is in progress.

.2 Give sufficient notice requesting inspection if Work isdesignated for special tests, inspections or approvals by DCCRepresentative instructions, or law of Place of Work.

.3 If Contractor covers or permits to be covered Work that hasbeen designated for special tests, inspections or approvalsbefore such is made, uncover such Work, have inspections ortests satisfactorily completed and make good such Work.



.4 DCC Representative may order any part of Work to be examined ifWork is suspected to be not in accordance with ContractDocuments. If, upon examination such work is found not inaccordance with Contract Documents, correct such Work and paycost of examination and correction. If such Work is found inaccordance with Contract Documents, DCC Representative shallpay cost of examination and replacement.

.5 DCC Representative will conduct and pay only for QualityAssurance (QA) testing. The Contractor will Conduct and pay forQuality Control (QC) testing. The contractor is stillresponsible for following their QCP and must notify DCCRepresentative 48 hrs in advance.

1.4 INDEPENDENT INSPECTION AGENCIES

.1 The Contractor to furnish and pay for independentinspection/testing agency, equipment, facilities, and labour toprovide Quality Control (QC) testing in accordance with theContractor's Quality Control Plan.

.2 DCC Representative will appoint and pay for independentinspection/testing agency, equipment, facilities and labour toprovide Quality Assurance (QA) testing.

.3 Provide equipment required for executing inspection and testingby appointed agencies.

.4 Employment of inspection/testing agencies does not relaxresponsibility to perform Work in accordance with ContractDocuments.

.5 If defects are revealed during inspection and/or testing,appointed agency will request additional inspection and/ortesting to ascertain full degree of defect. Correct defect andirregularities as advised by DCC Representative at no cost toDCC Representative. Pay costs for retesting and reinspection.

1.5 ACCESS TO WORK

.1 Allow inspection/testing agencies access to Work, off sitemanufacturing and fabrication plants.

.2 Co-operate to provide reasonable facilities for such access.



1.6 PROCEDURES

.1 Notify appropriate agency and DCC Representative in advance ofrequirement for tests, in order that attendance arrangementscan be made.

.2 Submit samples and/or materials required for testing, asspecifically requested in specifications. Submit withreasonable promptness and in an orderly sequence so as not tocause delay in Work.

.3 Provide labour and facilities to obtain and handle samples andmaterials on site. Provide sufficient space to store and curetest samples.

1.7 REJECTED WORK

.1 Remove defective Work, whether result of poor workmanship, useof defective products or damage and whether incorporated inWork or not, which has been rejected by DCC Representative asfailing to conform to Contract Documents. Replace or re-executein accordance with Contract Documents.

.2 Make good other Contractor's work damaged by such removals orreplacements promptly.

.3 If in opinion of DCC Representative it is not expedient tocorrect defective Work or Work not performed in accordance withContract Documents, Owner may deduct from Contract Pricedifference in value between Work performed and that called forby Contract Documents, amount of which shall be determined byDCC Representative.

1.8 REPORTS

.1 Submit 4 copies of inspection and test reports to DCCRepresentative.

.2 Provide copies to Subcontractor of work being inspected ortested.

1.9 TESTS AND MIX DESIGNS

.1 Furnish test results and mix designs as may be requested.

.2 The cost of tests and mix designs beyond those called for inContract Documents or beyond those required by law of Place ofWork shall be appraised by DCC Representative and may beauthorized as recoverable.



1.10 MOCK-UPS

.1 Prepare mock-ups for Work specifically requested inspecifications. Include for Work of all Sections required toprovide mock-ups.

.2 Construct in all locations as specified in specific Section.

.3 Prepare mock-ups for DCC Representative's review withreasonable promptness and in an orderly sequence, so as not tocause any delay in Work.

.4 Failure to prepare mock-ups in ample time is not consideredsufficient reason for an extension of Contract Time and noclaim for extension by reason of such default will be allowed.

.5 If requested, DCC Representative will assist in preparing aschedule fixing dates for preparation.

.6 Remove mock-up at conclusion of Work or when acceptable to DCCRepresentative.

1.11 MILL TESTS

.1 Submit mill test certificates as required of specificationSections.

1.12 EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS

.1 Submit adjustment and balancing reports for mechanical,electrical and building equipment systems.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Sustainable Requirements: Page 1Storage Facility ConstructionGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 ADMINISTRATION

.1 The Owner does not intend for this project to meet therequirements of a recognized sustainability standard,however, the contractor must meet requirements of thesectionand must perform due diligence to incorporatesustainable building practices wherever practical to do so.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

.1 CFC - Chlorofluorocarbons.

.2 HCFC - Hydro Chlorofluorocarbons.

.3 IAQ - Indoor Air Quality.

.4 Dollar Value of Material: to exclude on-site labour,equipment, and installation costs. Note that this informationwill be used solely for the purpose of the LEEDcertification.

.5 Regional Materials - materials or products that have beenextracted, harvested, recovered and processed within 800 km(500 miles) (2,400 km if shipped by rail or water) of thefinal manufacturing site, AND, the final manufacturing siteis within 800 km (500 miles) (2,400 km if shipped by rail orwater) of the project site for these products. Manufacturingrefers to the final assembly of components into the buildingproduct that is installed at project site.

.6 Recycled Content: percentage by weight of constituents thathave been recovered or otherwise diverted from solid wastestream, either pre-consumer or post-consumer..1 Post-Consumer Recycled Content: Percentage (by mass) ofmaterial recovered from the consumer waste stream andutilized in the production of a new product. i.e. recoveredfrom curb- side recycling materials and other discardedhouse-hold items (appliances, furniture)..2 Post-Industrial (Pre-Consumer) Recycled Content:Percentage (by mass) of material recovered from theindustrial waste stream during a manufacturing process,excluding in- house recycled material, and utilized in theproduction of a new product..3 In-house Recycled Content: Percentage (by mass) of wastematerial recovered from a manufacturing process and recycledas feedstock back into the same manufacturing process. (In-house content does not contribute to LEED).





.2 Section 01 35 43 - Environmental Procedures.

.3 Section 01 74 21 - Construction/Demolition Waste Managementand Disposal.

.4 Section 31 22 13 - Rough Grading.

.5 Section 31 23 33.01 - Excavating, Trenching and Backfilling.

.6 Section 32 91 19.13 - Topsoil Placement and Grading.

.7 Section 32 92 19 - Seeding.

1.4 REFERENCES

.1 American National Standard Institute (ANSI)/American Societyof Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers(ASHRAE).1 ANSI/ASHRAE 52.2-12, Method of Testing GeneralVentilation Air-Cleaning Devices for Removal Efficiency byParticulate Size (ANSI approved)..2 ASHRAE 62.1-2013, Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor AirQuality..3 ASHRAE 129-1997, Measuring-Air Change Effectiveness.

.2 Canada Green Building Council (CaGBC).1 LEED Canada 2009 for Design and Construction-2010, LEEDCanada 2009 for Design and Construction Leadership in Energyand Environmental Design Green Building Rating SystemReference Guide.

.3 Carpet and Rug Institute (CRI).1 CRI Green Label Indoor Air Quality Test Program - GreenLabel Testing Program.

.4 Forest Stewardship Council (FSC).1 FSC-STD-01-001-2004, FSC Principle and Criteria forForest Stewardship.

.5 Green Seal Environmental Standards (GS).1 GS-03-97, Environmental Criteria for Anti-CorrosivePaints..2 GS-11-11, Standard for Paints and Coatings.

.6 South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD),California State, Regulation XI. Source Specific Standards.1 SCAQMD Rule 1113-A2011, Architectural Coatings.



.2 SCAQMD Rule 1168-A2005, Adhesives and SealantsApplications.

.7 Scientific Certification Systems (SCS).1 FloorScore Program 2012.

.8 Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning National ContractorsAssociation (SMACNA).1 IAQ Guideline for Occupied Buildings Under Construction,2007.

.9 United States Federal Trade Commission (US Federal TradeCommission).1 16 CFR 260.7 Trade Commission Guidelines for the Use ofEnvironmental Marketing Claims.

.10 Environmental Choice Program.1 CCD-016-97, Thermal Insulation..2 CCD-017-98, Acoustical Products..3 CCD-020-95, Gypsum Wallboard..4 CCD-025-01, Commercial Modular Carpet..5 CCD-026-01, Commercial Non-Modular Carpet..6 CCD-029-95, Water Conserving Products..7 CCD-045-95, Sealant and Caulking Compounds..8 CCD-046-95, Adhesives..9 CCD-047-98, Surface Coatings..10 CCD-048-95, Surface Coatings - Recycled Water-Bourne..11 CCD-127-95, Recycled Plastic Products..12 CCD-144-2003, Naturally-Derived Phenol Substitutes..13 CCD-150-2004, Steel for Use in Construction Products..14 CCD-152-2001, Flooring Products..15 CCD-167-2007, Mosaic Tiles.

.11 National Air Duct Cleaners Association (NADCA).1 NADCA ACR-2002, Assessment Cleaning and Restoration..2 NADCA 05-1997, Requirements for the Installation ofService Openings in HVAC Systems.



.2 Product Data:.1 Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed productliterature and data sheets and include productcharacteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finishand limitations..2 Submit 2 copies of WHMIS MSDS in accordance with Section01 70 12 - Safety Requirements and Section 01 35 43 -Environmental Procedures.



.3 IAQ Management Plan:

1.6 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS

.1 Take measures to ensure chemical spills do not enter drains.

.2 Provide proper storage and containment of herbicides andindoor pesticides..1 Design and construction of storage spaces for hazardousmaterials in accordance with authorities having jurisdiction..2 Include ventilation of areas, which contain potentialsources of air contamination.

.1 Comply with standards for storage of flammable,combustible and hazardous materials, explosives,compressed gas cylinders, and reactive, corrosive andoxidizing materials.

.3 Storage conditions, ventilation requirements,construction materials storage areas, containers, drums andtanks, compatibility issues, and labelling: in accordancewith federal and municipal guidelines supplemented asfollows:

.1 Confine storage of chemicals and hazardous wastesto designated areas with security of access..2 Ensure access to hose bib and water for mixingconcentrated chemicals..3 Include containment to prevent spills from enteringdrains..4 Include venting to exterior..5 Keep storage areas under negative pressure, wherepossible.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LOW-EMITTING MATERIALS

.1 Interior applications requiring adhesives, sealants andsealant primers must comply with the following content limitsfor VOC of the State of California's South Coast Air QualityManagement District (SCAQMD) Rule 1168..1 Wood Glues: 30 g/L..2 Metal to Metal Adhesives: 30 g/L..3 Adhesives for Porous Materials (Except Wood): 50 g/L..4 Subfloor Adhesives: 50 g/L..5 Plastic Foam Adhesives: 50 g/L..6 Carpet Adhesives: 50 g/L..7 Carpet Pad Adhesives: 50 g/L..8 VCT and Asphalt Tile Adhesives: 50 g/L..9 Cove Base Adhesives: 50 g/L..10 Gypsum Board and Panel Adhesives: 50 g/L.



.11 Rubber Floor Adhesives: 60 g/L.

.12 Ceramic Tile Adhesives: 65 g/L.

.13 Multipurpose Construction Adhesives: 70 g/L.

.14 Fiberglass Adhesives: 80 g/L.

.15 Structural Glazing Adhesives: 100 g/L.

.16 Wood flooring Adhesive: 100 g/L.

.17 Contact Adhesive: 250 g/L.

.18 Plastic Cement Welding Compounds: 250 g/L.

.19 ABS Welding Compounds: 325 g/L.

.20 CPVC Welding Compounds: 490 g/L.

.21 PVC Welding Compounds: 510 g/L.

.22 Adhesive Primer for Plastic: 550 g/L.

.23 Sealants: 250 g/L.

.24 Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.

.25 Sealant primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.

.2 Interior applications using paints and coatings must complywith the following limits for VOC content when calculatedaccording to Green Seal Standard GS-11 and Green SealStandard GS-03 and SCAQMD Rule 1113..1 Flat Paints and Coatings: VOC not more than 50 g/L..2 Non-Flat Paints and Coatings: VOC not more than 150 g/L..3 Anti-Corrosive Coatings: VOC not more than 250 g/L..4 Varnishes and Sanding Sealers: VOC not more than 275g/L..5 Stains: VOC not more than 100 g/L..6 Aromatic Compounds: paints and coatings not to containmore than 1.0% by weight total aromatic compounds(hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more benzene rings).

.3 Use carpet that conforms to the Carpet and Rug Institute CRIGreen Label Indoor Air Quality Test Program, and resilientflooring products that are FloorScore certified.

.4 Composite Wood and Laminate Adhesives. Do not use compositewood and agrifiber products that contain addedurea-formaldehyde resin.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL

.1 Create and implement a project-specific erosion andsedimentation control plan for all new constructionactivities associated with the project. The plan mustincorporate practices such as phasing, seeding, grading,mulching, filter socks, stabilized site entrances,preservation of existing vegetation, and other bestmanagement practices (BMPs) to control erosion andsedimentation in runoff from the entire project site duringconstruction. The plan must list the BMPs employed anddescribe how they accomplish the following objectives..1 Prevent lost of soil during construction by storm waterrunoff and/or wind erosion including protecting topsoil bystockpiling for reuse..2 Prevent sedimentation of storm sewer or receivingstreams..3 Prevent polluting the air with dust and particulatematter.

.2 The erosion and sedimentation control plan must describe howthe project team will do the following:.1 Preserve vegetation and mark clearing limits..2 Establish and delineate construction access..3 Control flow rates..4 Install sediment controls..5 Stabilize soils..6 Protect slopes..7 Protect drain inlets..8 Stabilize channels and outlets..9 Control pollutants..10 Control dewatering..11 Maintain the BMPs..12 Manage the erosion and sedimentation control plan.

.3 Follow methods and procedures specified in Section 31 2333.01 Excavating, Trenching and Backfilling.

.4 Establish long term soil stabilization program.

.5 Take measures to prevent loss of soil by storm water runoff.

.6 Protect stockpiled topsoil.

.7 Disturbed surfaces which are not to be used for at least 21days must be stabilized within 14 days through sodding,mulching, hydroseeding or matting.



3.2 CONSTRUCTION INDOOR AIR QUALITY MANAGEMENT

.1 Comply with SMACNA IAQ Guideline for Occupied DuringBuildings under Construction.

.2 Develop and implement Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) ManagementPlan for construction and preoccupancy phases of building asfollows:.1 During construction: meet or exceed minimum requirementsof SMACNA IAQ Guideline for Occupied Buildings underConstruction.

.1 Protect stored on site or installed absorptivematerials from moisture damage.

.2 Adopt IAQ management plan during constructionprocedures, including:

.1 Protection of HVAC system during construction tocontrol pollutant sources, and interrupt pathways forcontamination..2 Sequencing of materials installation to ensuredissipation of high emissions from finishes that off gasunacceptably high quantities of potentially harmfulmaterials during curing to avoid contamination ofabsorptive materials..3 Apply Type 1 interior finishes and allow thesefinishes to completely cure according to intervals andtimes stated in respective finish manufactures printedinstructions before commencing installation of any Type2 materials in same area..4 Do not store any Type 2 materials in areas whereinstallation or curing of Type 1 materials is inprogress..5 Type 1: Materials and Finishes Materials andfinishes which have potential for short term levels ofoff gassing from chemicals inherent in theirmanufacturing process, or which are applied in a formrequiring vehicles or carriers for spreading whichrelease a high level of particulate matter in theprocess of installation and/or curing. Type 1 materialsand finishes include, but are not limited to thefollowing: Composite wood products, includingparticleboard and plywood from which millwork, woodpaneling, doors or furniture may be fabricated.Adhesives, sealants and glazing compounds. Woodpreservatives, wood finishes, primers and paints andpaint like wall finishes. Control and/or expansion jointfillers, firestopping materials and caulking. Hardfinishes requiring adhesives installation including, butnot limited to plastic laminate, linoleum and rubbertile. Gypsum board and associated finish processes andproducts.



.6 Type 2 Materials and Finishes Soft materials andfinishes which are woven, fibrous, or porous in natureand may absorb chemicals off gassed by Type 1 materialsand finishes, or may be adversely affected by airborneparticulate. These materials have the potential tobecome sinks for deleterious substances which may bereleased much later, or act as collectors ofcontaminates that may promote subsequent bacterialgrowth. Type 2 materials and finishes include, but arenot limited to the following: Carpet and underpadding,and other woven or fibrous floor finishes. Fabric wallcoverings. Insulation materials exposed to theairstream. Acoustic ceiling materials. Furnishings withfabric coverings.

.3 Erect appropriate noise and dust barriers where demolition orconstruction procedures are to occur adjacent to occupiedspace..1 Take necessary steps to minimize interference withoccupants..2 Obtain written approval from DCC Representative tooperate permanent HVAC systems during construction. Ifpermanent systems are used during construction install MERV-8filter media in accordance with ASHRAE 52.2 at return-airinlets.

.1 Replace air filters immediately prior to buildingair flush-out. Replacement air filters to be MERV-13 inaccordance with ASHRAE 52.2.

.4 Testing Before Occupancy..1 Conduct building air flush-out upon constructioncompletion with new air filters and 100% outdoor air. Replaceair filters after air flush-out. Replacement air filters tohave a MERV 13 according to ASHRAE 52.2..2 Conduct baseline indoor air quality testing programaccording to U.S. EPA Compendium for the Determination ofPollutants in Indoor air.

.1 Employ independent testing and inspecting agency toconduct IAQ testing.

.5 For building air handling units, replace air filters prior tooccupancy to have a MERV 13 according to ASHRAE 52.2.

National Defence UNCLASSIFIED Section 01 47 15 New ULCV & EATV Sustainable Requirements: Page 9 Storage Facility Construction Garrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29 Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

Control Structure

Observation Maintenance

required? Action Required Action Complete Date

Silt Fence

Silt at 1/3 height of fence? _ Yes _ No Properly Secured? _ Yes _ No Washout/Overtopping? _ Yes _ No

_Yes _ No

_Yes _ No

_Yes _ No

General Comments:

Schedule A – Site Maintenance and Inspection Report: Erosion and Sedimentation Controls

Site Maintenance and Inspection Report Erosion and Sedimentation Controls

Project ULCV & EATV

Inspector's Name Date and time of Inspection

Phase of Work Current weather

Precipitation since previous inspection (mm)

Forecast

Maintenance of Erosion and Sedimentation Controls

National Defence UNCLASSIFIED Section 01 47 15 New ULCV & EATV Sustainable Requirements: Page 10 Storage Facility Construction Garrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29 Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

Item Compliance Maintenance

Required Action

Required Action Complete Date

Are all disturbed areas not actively being worked properly stabilized?

_Yes _No _Yes _No

All Watercourses protected from sedimentation?

_Yes _No _Yes _No

Are perimeter controls adequately installed and maintained?

_Yes _No _Yes _No

Are discharge points and receiving waters from of any sediment deposits?

_Yes _No _Yes _No

Is the construction exit preventing sediment from being tracked into the street?

_Yes _No

_Yes _No

Is trash/litter from work areas collected and placed in dumpsters?

_Yes _No _Yes _No

Are materials that are potential stormwater contaminants stored inside or undercover?

_Yes _No

_Yes _No

Are non-stormwater discharges (e.g. sediment-laden water from excavations) properly controlled?

_Yes _No

_Yes _No

Are dusty conditions being controlled properly?

_Yes _No _Yes _No

Are stockpiled protected with secured covers?

_Yes _No _Yes _No

General Comments:

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Temporary Utilities Page 1Storage FacilityGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES

.1 U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) / Office of Water.1 EPA 832R92005, Storm Water Management for ConstructionActivities: Developing Pollution Prevention Plans and BestManagement Practices.



1.3 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

.1 Provide temporary utilities controls in order to execute workexpeditiously.

.2 Remove from site all such work after use.

1.4 WATER SUPPLY

.1 If required, provide Provide continuous supply of potablewater for construction use.

.2 Arrange for connection with appropriate utility company andpay costs for installation, maintenance and removal.

.3 Pay for utility charges at prevailing rates.

1.5 TEMPORARY HEATING AND VENTILATION

.1 Provide temporary heating required during construction perioduntil Substantial Completion, including attendance,maintenance and fuel.

.2 Construction heaters used inside building must be vented tooutside or be non-flameless type. Solid fuel salamanders arenot permitted.

.3 Provide temporary heat and ventilation in enclosed areas asrequired to:.1 Facilitate progress of Work..2 Protect Work and products against dampness and cold..3 Prevent moisture condensation on surfaces.



.4 Provide ambient temperatures and humidity levels forstorage, installation and curing of materials..5 Provide adequate ventilation to meet health regulationsfor safe working environment.

.4 Maintain temperatures of minimum 10 degrees C in areas whereconstruction is in progress.

.5 Ventilating:.1 Prevent accumulations of dust, fumes, mists, vapours orgases in areas occupied during construction..2 Provide local exhaust ventilation to prevent harmfulaccumulation of hazardous substances into atmosphere ofoccupied areas..3 Dispose of exhaust materials in manner that will notresult in harmful exposure to persons..4 Ventilate storage spaces containing hazardous orvolatile materials..5 Ventilate temporary sanitary facilities..6 Continue operation of ventilation and exhaust system fortime after cessation of work process to assure removal ofharmful contaminants.

.6 Permanent heating system of building, may not be used forconstruction heat.

.7 Pay costs for maintaining temporary heat, when usingpermanent heating system.

.8 Provide natural gas meter to monitor usage duringconstruction.

.9 Maintain strict supervision of operation of temporary heatingand ventilating equipment to:.1 Conform with applicable codes and standards..2 Enforce safe practices..3 Prevent abuse of services..4 Prevent damage to finishes..5 Vent direct-fired combustion units to outside.

.10 Be responsible for damage to Work due to failure in providingadequate heat and protection during construction.

.11 Electric heat shall not be used.

1.6 TEMPORARY POWER AND LIGHT

.1 Provide and pay for temporary power during construction fortemporary lighting and operating of power tools, to a maximumsupply of 230 volts 30 amps.



.2 Arrange for connection with appropriate utility company. Paycosts for installation, maintenance and removal.

.3 Temporary power for electric cranes and other equipmentrequiring in excess of above is responsibility of Contractor.

.4 Provide and maintain temporary lighting throughout project.Ensure level of illumination on all floors and stairs is notless than 162 lx.

.5 Electrical power and lighting systems installed under thisContract may be used for construction requirements only withprior approval of DCC Representative provided that guaranteesare not affected. Make good damage to electrical systemcaused by use under this Contract. Replace lamps which havebeen used for more than 3 months.

1.7 FIRE PROTECTION

.1 Provide and maintain temporary fire protection equipmentduring performance of Work required by insurance companieshaving jurisdiction and governing codes, regulations andbylaws.

.2 Burning rubbish and construction waste materials is notpermitted on site.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL

.1 Provide temporary erosion and sedimentation control measuresto prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing waterrunoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways,according sediment and erosion control drawings orrequirements of authorities having jurisdiction, whichever ismore stringent.

.2 Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion and sedimentationcontrol measures during construction until permanentvegetation has been established.



.3 Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore andstabilize areas disturbed during removal.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Construction Facilities Page 1Storage FacilityGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES

.1 Canadian Construction Documents Committee (CCDC).1 CCDC 2-1994, Stipulated Price Contract.

.2 Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB).1 CAN/CGSB 1.189-00, Exterior Alkyd Primer for Wood..2 CGSB 1.59-97, Alkyd Exterior Gloss Enamel.

.3 Canadian Standards Association (CSA International).1 CSA-A23.1/A23.2-14, Concrete Materials and Methods ofConcrete Construction/Methods of Test and Standard Practicesfor Concrete..2 CSA-0121-08(R2013), Douglas Fir Plywood..3 CAN/CSA-S269.2-M1987(R2003), Access Scaffolding forConstruction Purposes.

.4 Public Works Government Services Canada (PWGSC) StandardAcquisition Clauses and Conditions (SACC)-ID: R0202D, Title:General Conditions 'C', In Effect as of: May 14, 2004.

.5 U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) / Office of Water.1 EPA 832R92005, Storm Water Management for ConstructionActivities: Developing Pollution Prevention Plans and BestManagement Practices.




.1 Prepare site plan indicating proposed location and dimensionsof area to be fenced and used by Contractor, number oftrailers to be used, avenues of ingress/egress to fenced areaand details of fence installation.

.2 Identify areas which have to be gravelled to prevent trackingof mud.

.3 Indicate use of supplemental or other staging area.

.4 Provide construction facilities in order to execute workexpeditiously.




1.4 SCAFFOLDING

.1 Scaffolding in accordance with CAN/CSA-S269.2.

.2 Provide and maintain scaffolding and other related temporaryinfrastructure as required.

1.5 HOISTING

.1 Provide, operate and maintain hoists and/or cranes requiredfor moving of workers, materials and equipment. Makefinancial arrangements with Subcontractors for their use ofhoists.

.2 Hoists and/or cranes to be operated by qualified operator.

1.6 SITE STORAGE/LOADING

.1 Refer to CCDC 2, GC 3.12.

.2 Confine work and operations of employees by ContractDocuments. Do not unreasonably encumber premises withproducts.

.3 Do not load or permit to load any part of Work with weight orforce that will endanger Work.

1.7 CONSTRUCTION PARKING

.1 Parking will be permitted on site provided it does notdisrupt performance of Work.

.2 Provide and maintain adequate access to project site.

1.8 SECURITY

.1 Provide and pay for responsible security personnel to guardsite and contents of site after working hours and duringholidays.

1.9 OFFICES

.1 Provide office heated to 22 degrees C, lighted 750 lx andventilated, of sufficient size to accommodate site meetingsand furnished with drawing laydown table.



.2 Provide marked and fully stocked first-aid case in a readilyavailable location.

.3 Subcontractors to provide their own offices as necessary.Direct location of these offices.

1.10 EQUIPMENT, TOOL AND MATERIALS STORAGE

.1 Provide and maintain, in clean and orderly condition,lockable weatherproof sheds for storage of tools, equipmentand materials.

.2 Locate materials not required to be stored in weatherproofsheds on site in manner to cause least interference with workactivities.

1.11 SANITARY FACILITIES

.1 Provide sanitary facilities for work force in accordance withgoverning regulations and ordinances.

.2 Post notices and take precautions as required by local healthauthorities. Keep area and premises in sanitary condition.

1.12 PROTECTION AND MAINTENANCE OF TRAFFIC

.1 Provide access and temporary relocated roads as necessary tomaintain traffic.

.2 Maintain and protect traffic on affected roads duringconstruction period except as otherwise specifically directedby DCC Representative.

.3 Provide measures for protection and diversion of traffic,including provision of watch-persons and flag-persons,erection of barricades, placing of lights around and in frontof equipment and work, and erection and maintenance ofadequate warning, danger, and direction signs

.4 Protect travelling public from damage to person and property.

.5 Contractor's traffic on roads selected for hauling materialto and from site to interfere as little as possible withpublic traffic.

.6 Verify adequacy of existing roads and allowable load limit onthese roads. Contractor: responsible for repair of damage toroads caused by construction operations.



.7 Construct access and haul roads necessary.

.8 Haul roads: constructed with suitable grades and widths;sharp curves, blind corners, and dangerous cross trafficshall be avoided.

.9 Provide necessary lighting, signs, barricades, anddistinctive markings for safe movement of traffic.

.10 Dust control: adequate to ensure safe operation at all times.

.11 Location, grade, width, and alignment of construction andhauling roads: subject to approval by DCC Representative.

.12 Lighting: to assure full and clear visibility for full widthof haul road and work areas during night work operations.

.13 Provide snow removal during period of Work.

.14 Remove, upon completion of work, haul roads designated by DCCRepresentative.

1.13 CLEAN-UP

.1 Remove construction debris, waste materials, packagingmaterial from work site daily.

.2 Clean dirt or mud tracked onto paved or surfaced roadways.

.3 Store materials resulting from demolition activities that aresalvageable.

.4 Stack stored new or salvaged material not in constructionfacilities.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Temporary Barriers Page 1Storage Facility and EnclosuresGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 Barriers.

.2 Environmental Controls.

.3 Traffic Controls.

.4 Fire Routes.

1.2 PRECEDENCE



.1 Section 01 14 00 - Work Restrictions.


.2 Section 01 51 00 - Temporary Utilities.

.3 Section 01 52 00 - Construction Facilities.

1.4 REFERENCES

.1 Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB).1 CGSB 1-GP-189-2000, Primer, Alkyd, Wood, Exterior..2 CAN/CGSB-1.59-97, Alkyd Exterior Gloss Enamel.

.2 Canadian Standards Association (CSA International).1 CSA O121-08(R2013), Douglas Fir Plywood.National DefenceMattawa Plains Compound


.1 Provide temporary controls in order to execute Workexpeditiously.




1.6 CHAIN LINK CONSTRUCTION FENCE

.1 Contractor is responsible to supply, install, and removetemporary construction fencing, gate(s), and obstruction lightsto delineate Work area as indicated on the Contract Drawings..1 Chain link fencing

.1 Fabric.1 Steel, #9 Gauge..2 Size of wire: 4 mm..3 Size of mesh: 50 mm opening..4 Height: 1.8 m.

.2 Posts.1 Line posts: steel studded tee bar, 1200 mmlonger than height of fabric..2 Drive posts into ground as necessary to keepfence in good repair for duration of the work.

.3 Gates.1 Lockable, double vehicle crash gates, 8 m wide..2 Fabric: to meet chain link fencing requirements..3 Keys are to be provided to the DCCRepresentative.

.4 Erect fence and gates along lines indicated onContract Drawings or as directed by DCC Representative.

.2 Obstruction lighting.1 Mark gates with red, incandescent, steady-burn lightsplaced 3.0 m on centre for night-time operations. Thelights shall have an intensity of no less than 10 cd andbe solar powered.

.3 Move fence and barriers as necessary to accommodatephasing and as directed by DCC Representative. Refer to theCONOPs plan and the Contract Drawings for details..4 Maintain fence, gates and obstruction lighting in goodrepair and to satisfaction of DCC Representative for theduration of the work..5 Remove temporary fencing, gates and lights uponsubstantial completion of the work. Repair damage caused byinstallation and removal.

1.7 GUARD RAILS

.1 Provide secure, rigid guard rails and barricades around deepexcavations, open shafts, open stair wells, open edges offloors and roofs.

1.8 WEATHER ENCLOSURES

.1 Provide weather tight closures to unfinished door and windowopenings, tops of shafts and other openings in floors androofs.



.2 Close off floor areas where walls are not finished; seal offother openings; enclose building interior work for temporaryheat.

.3 Design enclosures to withstand wind pressure and snow loading.

1.9 DUST TIGHT SCREENS

.1 Provide dust tight screens or insulated partitions to localizedust generating activities, and for protection of workers,finished areas of Work and public.

.2 Maintain and relocate protection until such work is complete.

1.10 ACCESS TO SITE

.1 Provide and maintain access roads, sidewalk crossings, rampsand runways as may be required for access to Work.

1.11 PUBLIC TRAFFIC FLOW

.1 Provide and maintain competent signal flag operators, trafficsignals, barricades and flares, lights, or lanterns as requiredto perform Work and protect the public.

1.12 FIRE ROUTES

.1 Maintain access to property including overhead clearances foruse by emergency response vehicles.

1.13 PROTECTION FOR OFF-SITE AND PUBLIC PROPERTY

.1 Protect surrounding private and public property from damageduring performance of Work.

.2 Be responsible for damage incurred.

1.14 PROTECTION OF BUILDING FINISHES

.1 Provide protection for finished and partially finished buildingfinishes and equipment during performance of Work.

.2 Provide necessary screens, covers, and hoardings.

.3 Confirm with DCC Representative locations and installationschedule 3 days prior to installation.



.4 Be responsible for damage incurred due to lack of or improperprotection.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Common Product Page 1Storage Facility RequirementsGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 Product quality, availability, storage, handling, protection,and transportation.

.2 Manufacturer's instructions.

.3 Quality of Work, coordination and fastenings.

.4 Existing facilities.





1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

.1 Within text of each specifications section, reference may bemade to reference standards.

.2 Conform to these reference standards, in whole or in part asspecifically requested in specifications.

.3 If there is question as to whether any product or system is inconformance with applicable standards, DCC Representativereserves right to have such products or systems tested to proveor disprove conformance.

.4 Cost for such testing will be born by Owner in event ofconformance with Contract Documents or by Contractor in eventof non-conformance.

.5 Conform to latest date of issue of referenced standards ineffect on date of submission of Tenders, except where specificdate or issue is specifically noted.



1.4 QUALITY

.1 Products, materials, equipment and articles (referred to asproducts throughout specifications) incorporated in Work shallbe new, not damaged or defective, and of best quality(compatible with specifications) for purpose intended. Ifrequested, furnish evidence as to type, source and quality ofproducts provided.

.2 Defective products, whenever identified prior to completion ofWork, will be rejected, regardless of previous inspections.Inspection does not relieve responsibility, but is precautionagainst oversight or error. Remove and replace defectiveproducts at own expense and be responsible for delays andexpenses caused by rejection.

.3 Should any dispute arise as to quality or fitness of products,decision rests strictly with DCC Representative based uponrequirements of Contract Documents.

.4 Unless otherwise indicated in specifications, maintainuniformity of manufacture for any particular or like itemthroughout building.

.5 Permanent labels, trademarks and nameplates on products are notacceptable in prominent locations, except where required foroperating instructions, or when located in mechanical orelectrical rooms.

1.5 AVAILABILITY

.1 Immediately upon signing Contract, review product deliveryrequirements and anticipate foreseeable supply delays for anyitems. If delays in supply of products are foreseeable, notifyDCC Representative of such, in order that substitutions orother remedial action may be authorized in ample time toprevent delay in performance of Work.

.2 In event of failure to notify DCC Representative atcommencement of Work and should it subsequently appear thatWork may be delayed for such reason, DCC Representativereserves right to substitute more readily available products ofsimilar character, at no increase in Contract Price or ContractTime.

1.6 STORAGE, HANDLING AND PROTECTION

.1 Handle and store products in manner to prevent damage,adulteration, deterioration and soiling and in accordance withmanufacturer's instructions when applicable.



.2 Store packaged or bundled products in original and undamagedcondition with manufacturer's seal and labels intact. Do notremove from packaging or bundling until required in Work.

.3 Store products subject to damage from weather in weatherproofenclosures.

.4 Store cementitious products clear of earth or concrete floors,and away from walls.

.5 Keep sand, when used for grout or mortar materials, clean anddry. Store sand on wooden platforms and cover with waterprooftarpaulins during inclement weather.

.6 Store sheet materials, lumber on flat, solid supports and keepclear of ground. Slope to shed moisture.

.7 Store and mix paints in heated and ventilated room. Remove oilyrags and other combustible debris from site daily. Take everyprecaution necessary to prevent spontaneous combustion.

.8 Remove and replace damaged products at own expense and tosatisfaction of DCC Representative.

.9 Touch-up damaged factory finished surfaces to DCCRepresentative's satisfaction. Use touch-up materials to matchoriginal. Do not paint over name plates.

1.7 TRANSPORTATION

.1 Pay costs of transportation of products required in performanceof Work.

1.8 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS

.1 Unless otherwise indicated in specifications, install or erectproducts in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Do notrely on labels or enclosures provided with products. Obtainwritten instructions directly from manufacturers.

.2 Notify DCC Representative in writing, of conflicts betweenspecifications and manufacturer's instructions, so that DCCRepresentative may establish course of action.

.3 Improper installation or erection of products, due to failurein complying with these requirements, authorizes DCCRepresentative to require removal and re-installation at noincrease in Contract Price or Contract Time.



1.9 QUALITY OF WORK

.1 Ensure Quality of Work is of highest standard, executed byworkers experienced and skilled in respective duties for whichthey are employed. Immediately notify DCC Representative ifrequired Work is such as to make it impractical to producerequired results.

.2 Do not employ anyone unskilled in their required duties. DCCRepresentative reserves right to require dismissal from site,workers deemed incompetent or careless.

.3 Decisions as to standard or fitness of Quality of Work in casesof dispute rest solely with DCC Representative, whose decisionis final.

1.10 CO-ORDINATION

.1 Ensure cooperation of workers in laying out Work. Maintainefficient and continuous supervision.

.2 Be responsible for coordination and placement of openings,sleeves and accessories.

1.11 CONCEALMENT

.1 In finished areas, conceal pipes, ducts and wiring in floors,walls and ceilings, except where indicated otherwise.

.2 Before installation, inform DCC Representative if there isinterference. Install as directed by DCC Representative.

1.12 REMEDIAL WORK

.1 Perform remedial work required to repair or replace parts orportions of Work identified as defective or unacceptable.Coordinate adjacent affected Work as required.

.2 Perform remedial work by specialists familiar with materialsaffected. Perform in a manner to neither damage nor put at riskany portion of Work.

1.13 LOCATION OF FIXTURES

.1 Consider location of fixtures, outlets, and mechanical andelectrical items indicated as approximate.



.2 Inform DCC Representative of conflicting installation. Installas directed.

1.14 FASTENINGS

.1 Provide metal fastenings and accessories in same texture,colour and finish as adjacent materials, unless indicatedotherwise.

.2 Prevent electrolytic action between dissimilar metals andmaterials.

.3 Use non-corrosive hot dip galvanized steel fasteners andanchors for securing exterior work, unless stainless steel orother material is specifically requested in affectedspecification Section.

.4 Space anchors within individual load limit or shear capacityand ensure they provide positive permanent anchorage. Wood, orany other organic material plugs are not acceptable.

.5 Keep exposed fastenings to a minimum, space evenly and installneatly.

.6 Fastenings which cause spalling or cracking of material towhich anchorage is made are not acceptable.

1.15 FASTENINGS - EQUIPMENT

.1 Use fastenings of standard commercial sizes and patterns withmaterial and finish suitable for service.

.2 Use heavy hexagon heads, semi-finished unless otherwisespecified. Use No. 304 stainless steel for exterior areas.

.3 Bolts may not project more than one diameter beyond nuts.

.4 Use plain type washers on equipment, sheet metal and softgasket lock type washers where vibrations occur. Use resilientwashers with stainless steel.

1.16 PROTECTION OF WORK IN PROGRESS

.1 Prevent overloading of any part of building. Do not cut, drillor sleeve any load bearing structural member, unlessspecifically indicated without written approval of DCCRepresentative.



1.17 EXISTING UTILITIES

.1 When breaking into or connecting to existing services orutilities, execute Work at times directed by local governingauthorities, with minimum of disturbance to Work.

.2 Protect, relocate or maintain existing active services. Whenservices are encountered, cap off in manner approved byauthority having jurisdiction. Stake and record location ofcapped service.

1.18 PRODUCTS

.1 Contractor's options for selection of materials for bidding areas follows:.1 Materials specified by referenced standard, select anymaterial that meets or exceeds the specified standard..2 Material specified by "prescriptive" or "performance"specification, select any material meeting or exceedingspecification..3 Materials specified by naming one or more materials,select any material named. For the purpose of thesespecifications, the term "Acceptable Material" is deemed to bea complete and working commodity as described by manufacturer'sname, catalogue number, trade name and or any combinationthereof..4 When materials are specified by a standard, prescriptiveor performance specification, upon request of the DCCRepresentative, obtain from manufacturer an independent testinglaboratory report showing that the material or equipment meetsor exceeds the specified requirements..5 The design and drawings are based upon the acceptablematerials or products. The acceptable materials or products maynot be identified in all its aspects. A later claim by theContractor for an addition to the contract price because ofchanges to work necessitated by use of acceptable materials orproducts shall not be considered.

.2 Substitution and availability of materials:.1 The design and drawings are based upon the acceptablematerial or product unidentified, approved substitutions shallmeet the following paragraphs..2 Where documents stipulate a particular product, approvedsubstitutions will be considered by the DCC Representative upto 10 working days prior to tender closing date..3 When a request to substitute a product is made, the DCCRepresentative may approve substitution and an amendment willbe issued by DCC Representative a minimum of 5 working daysprior to closing date.



.4 In submission of substitutions to products specified,bidders shall include in their bid any changes required in workto accomodate such substitutions. A later claim for an additionto the contract price will not be considered.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Safety Requirements Page 1Storage FacilityGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUBMITTALS

.1 Submit to the DCC Representative copies of the followingdocuments, including updates issued:.1 Health and Safety Program as indicated in paragraph 1.9,prior to commencement of work on the work site..2 Reports or directions issued by authorities havingjurisdiction, immediately upon issuance from that authority..3 Accident or Incident Reports, within 24 hours ofoccurrence.

.2 Submit other data, information and documentation upon requestby the DCC Representative as stipulated elsewhere in thissection.

1.2 COMPLIANCE REQUIREMENTS

.1 Comply with the latest edition of the Ontario OccupationalHealth and Safety Act, and the Regulations made pursuant to theAct.

.2 Observe and enforce construction safety measures required by:.1 National Building Code of Canada (latest edition)..2 Workplace Safety Insurance Board..3 Municipal statutes and ordinances.

.3 In event of conflict between any provisions of aboveauthorities the most stringent provision shall apply.

.4 Provide and maintain Worker's Compensation Board coverage forall employees for the duration of the contract. Prior tocommencement of the work, at the time of Interim Completion andprior to final payment, provide to the DCC Representative aletter (certificate) of Clearance from the Worker'sCompensation Board indicating that the Contractor's account isin good standing..1 Should the Contractor be a sole proprietor, providedocumented proof in a form acceptable to the DCCRepresentative, of an alternative means of personal coveragethat meets or exceeds the requirements set out above forWorker's Compensation Board coverage.

.5 The successful Contractor is advised that prior to work, allpersonnel on site are required to attend a one hour unexplodedordnances safety briefing provided by DND, and will be arrangedby the DCC Representative.



1.3 RESPONSIBILITY

.1 The Contractor is responsible for safety of persons andproperty on the work site and for protection of federalemployees and the general public circulating adjacent to worksite operations to extent that they may be affected by conductof work.

.2 The Contractor is to enforce compliance by workers and otherpersons granted access to work site with safety requirements ofContract Documents, applicable federal, provincial and localstatues, regulations, and ordinances, and with the Contractor'sHealth and Safety Program.

.3 Should an unforeseen or peculiar safety related hazard orcondition become evident during performance of work,immediately take measures to rectify the situation and preventdamage or harm. Advise the DCC Representative verbally and inwriting of the hazard or condition.

.4 The successful Contractor is advised that prior to work, allpersonnel on site are required to attend a one hour unexplodedordnances safety briefing provided by DND, and will be arrangedby the DCC Representative.

1.4 SITE CONTROL AND ACCESS

.1 Control all work site access points and work site activities.Delineate and isolate the work site from adjacent andsurrounding areas by use of appropriate means to maintaincontrol of all work site access points..1 A sturdy metal fence of at least 1.8 metres in heightshall be constructed between the public way and the project,including any construction trailers and material storagecompounds..2 The site, including construction trailers and materialstorage compounds, will be delineated between the public wayand the project with snow fence. The erection of snow fencewill be with metal posts no further than 2.4 metres apart andhave a solid wooden top rail and wire to maintain its uprightposition and sturdiness. In areas where snow fence posts arenot practical due to pavement or concrete, a sturdy portablemetal fence of at least 1.8 metres in height shall beconstructed as a replacement, although attached to the adjacentsnow fence. If the contractor does not maintain a rigid snowfence, the DCC Representative will direct the contractor tostop work and replace the snow fence with a sturdy metal fenceof at least 1.8 metres in height at the cost of the Contractor.



.3 The site, including construction trailers and materialstorage compounds, will be delineated between the public wayand the project with snow fence. The erection of snow fencewill be with metal posts no further than 2.4 metres apart andhave a solid wooden top rail and wire to maintain its uprightposition and sturdiness. If the contractor does not maintain arigid snow fence, the engineer will direct the contractor tostop work and replace the snow fence with a sturdy metal fenceof at least 1.8 metres in height at the cost of the Contractor.

.2 Make provisions for granting permission to access onto worksite to all persons who require access. Procedures for grantingpermission to access are to be in accordance with the OntarioOccupational Health and Safety Act, and the Regulations madepursuant to the Act and the Contractor's Health and SafetyProgram.

.3 Ensure persons granted access to the work site are inpossession of and wear the minimum personal protectiveequipment (PPE) designated by the Contractor's Health andSafety Program. Ensure persons granted access to the work siteare provided with, trained in the use of, and wear, appropriatePPE that are required above and beyond the designated minimumspreviously noted and as specifically related to the work siteactivity that they are involved in. Be responsible for theefficacy of the PPE that is provided above and beyond thedesignated minimums.

.4 For the purpose of this contract, the following are activitiesthat will be required on the work site by DND forces, otherContractor(s), specific trades. Control of the work site accessand activities remain the responsibility of the Contractor asdetailed within this specification section..1 Name the DND group, other Contractor or trade if otherContractor is not known at the time that this contract tenderis initiated: list all..2 Expectation of schedule for involvement: identify where inthe progress of the work the DND group or otherContractor/trade requires to access for the purpose ofperforming their specific task..3 Erect signage at access points and at other strategiclocations around the work site clearly identifying the worksite area(s) as being "off-limits" to non authorized persons.Signage must be professionally made with well understoodgraphic symbols and is not to be used as advertising but forthe specific use as related to site safety and key contactinformation. The size of the signage is expected to be 0.6metres in height by 1.2m in length to clearly identify therequirements.

.1 Information to be provided on the signage is asfollows:

.1 Project Name/Description:



.2 Contractor Company Name:

.3 Project Superintendent's Name/Phone No.:

.4 DCC Point of Contact name/Phone No.:

.5 Secure the work site at all times to protect againstun-authorized access.

1.5 FILING OF NOTICE

.1 File Notice of Project and any other required Notices with theProvincial/Territorial Authorities prior to commencement of thework. Provide the DCC Representative with a copy of the filedNotice(s) prior to commencement of the work.

1.6 PERMITS

.1 Obtain permits, licenses and compliance certificates atappropriate times and frequencies as required by theauthorities having jurisdiction. Garrison generated permitswill be discussed with the DCC Representative, and be obtainedby the Contractor.

.2 Post all permits, licenses and compliance certificate on worksite and provide copies to the DCC Representative.

1.7 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS

.1 The following are the known hazardous substances and/orhazardous conditions at the work site which shall be consideredas health or environmental hazards and shall be properlymanaged should they be encountered as part of the work:.1 There are no known hazardous substances at the time oftender, although if the Contractor identifies any during thecourse of the project, the Contractor will immediately notifythe DCC Representative..2 Contractor is to be advised of the existence of potentialunexploded ordnances and will be required to work inconjunction with a UXO clearance Contractor before grubbing andduring foundation work. The UXO clearance Contractor servicewill be provided through a separate contract..3 Contractor is to be advised that Asbestos has beenidentified in the project. Refer to asbestos Abatement sectionfor Minimum Precautions..4 Contractor is to be advised that Mold has been identifiedin the project. Please refer to Mould remediation section forminimum precautions..5 Contractor is to be advised that Lead has been identifiedin the project. Please refer to the Lead remediation sectionfor minimum precautions.



.6 Contractor is to be advised that Silica has beenidentified in the project. Please refer to the Silicaremediation section for minimum precautions..7 Contractor is to be advised that Mercury has beenidentified in the project. Please refer to the Mercuryremediation section for minimum precautions..8 Contractor is to be advised that locations within the workarea are designated confined spaces and that they must followthe Provincial Confined Space Regulations for constructionprojects..9 Contractors are required to be aware of the knownhazardous substances and/or hazardous conditions and are toinclude in their tender price all work associated in workingwith, in and around the hazards.

.2 The above lists shall not be construed as being complete andinclusive of all safety and health hazards encountered as aresult of Contractor's operations during the course of work.Include above items into the hazard assessment programspecified herein.

1.8 MEETINGS

.1 Prior to commencement of work attend a pre-commencement meetingconducted by the DCC Representative. Ensure minimum attendanceby contractor's superintendent. DCC Representative will adviseof time, date and location of the meeting and will beresponsible for recording and distributing the minutes.

.2 Conduct site specific occupational health and safety meetingsas required by the Ontario Occupational Health and Safety Act,and the Regulations made pursuant to the Act.

.3 Record and post minutes of all meetings in plain view on thework site. Make copies available to the DCC Representative uponrequest.



1.9 HEALTH AND SAFETY PROGRAM

.1 Contractors are required under Ontario Occupational Health andSafety Act, and the Regulations made pursuant to the Act tohave in place a Health and Safety Program. Compliancerequirements for the content, detail and implementation of theprogram resides with the provincial authority. For the purposeof this contract the Health and Safety Program shall include asite-specific Health and Safety Plan that acknowledges,assesses and addresses the hazardous substances and/orhazardous conditions known and identified in paragraph 1.7above, and on-going hazard assessments performed during theprogress of work identifying and documenting new or potentialhealth risks and safety hazards not previously known andidentified.

.2 Provide one copy of the Health and Safety Program to the DCCRepresentative prior to commencement of work on the work site.The copy provided to the DCC Representative is for the purposeof review against the contract requirements related to theknown hazardous substances and/or hazardous conditions. Thereview is not to be construed to imply approval by the DCCRepresentative that the program is complete, accurate andlegislatively compliant with the Ontario Occupational Healthand Safety Act, and the Regulations made pursuant to the Act,and shall not relieve the Contractor of their legal obligationsunder such legislation.

1.10 ACCIDENT REPORTING

.1 Investigate and report incidents and accidents as required byOntario Occupational Safety and Health Act, and the Regulationsmade pursuant to the Act.

.2 For the purpose of this contract immediately investigate andprovide a report to the DCC Representative on incidents andaccidents that involve:.1 A resulting injury that may or may not require medical aidbut involves lost time at work by the injured person(s)..2 Exposure to toxic chemicals or substances..3 Property damage..4 Interruption to adjacent and/or integral infrastructureoperations with potential loss implications.

.3 In the investigations and reporting of incidents and accidents,the Contractor is required to respond in a timely fashion tocorrect the action that was deemed to have caused the incidentand/or accident and advise in writing on the action taken toprevent a re-occurrence of the incident and/or accident.



1.11 RECORDS ON SITE

.1 Maintain on site a copy of the safety documentation asspecified in this section and any other safety related reportsand documents issued to or received from the authorities havingjurisdiction.

.2 Upon request, make copies available to the DCC Representative.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Examination and Page 1Storage Facility PreparationGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 Field engineering survey services to measure and stake site.

.2 Survey services to establish and confirm inverts for Work.

.3 Recording of subsurface conditions found.





1.3 PRECEDENCE


1.4 REFERENCES

.1 Owner's identification of existing survey control points andproperty limits.

1.5 QUALIFICATION OF SURVEYOR

.1 Qualified registered land surveyor, licensed to practice inPlace of Work, acceptable to DCC Representative.

1.6 SURVEY REFERENCE POINTS

.1 Locate, confirm and protect control points prior to startingsite work. Preserve permanent reference points duringconstruction.

.2 Make no changes or relocations without prior written notice toDCC Representative.

.3 Report to DCC Representative when reference point is lost ordestroyed, or requires relocation because of necessary changesin grades or locations.



.4 Require surveyor to replace control points in accordance withoriginal survey control.

1.7 SURVEY REQUIREMENTS

.1 Establish two permanent bench marks on site, referenced toestablished bench marks by survey control points. Recordlocations, with horizontal and vertical data in Project RecordDocuments.

.2 Establish lines and levels, locate and lay out, byinstrumentation.

.3 Stake for grading and fill placement.

.4 Stake slopes.

.5 Establish pipe invert elevations and location of any exposedpipe not being removed under this contract.

.6 Record elevation and location of all existing and installed endcaps of abandoned underground services.


.1 Before commencing work, establish location and extent ofservice lines in area of Work and notify DCC Representative offindings.

1.9 LOCATION OF EQUIPMENT AND FIXTURES

.1 Location of equipment, fixtures and outlets indicated orspecified are to be considered as approximate.

.2 Locate equipment, fixtures and distribution systems to provideminimum interference and maximum unable space and in accordancewith manufacturer's recommendations for safety, access andmaintenance.

.3 Inform DCC Representative of impending installation and obtainapproval for actual location.

.4 Submit field drawings to indicate relative position of variousservices and equipment when required by DCC Representative.



1.10 RECORDS

.1 Maintain a complete, accurate log of control and survey work asit progresses.

.2 On completion of site works, prepare a certified survey showingdimensions, locations, angles and elevations of Work.

.3 Record locations of maintained, re-routed and abandoned servicelines.

1.11 SUBMITTALS

.1 Submit name and address of Surveyor to DCC Representative.

.2 On request of DCC Representative, submit documentation toverify accuracy of field engineering work.

.3 Submit certificate signed by surveyor certifying and notingthose elevations and locations of completed Work that conformwith Contract Documents.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Execution Page 1Storage Facility RequirementsGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 Requirements and limitations for cutting and patching the Work.


.1 Section 01 11 00 - Summary of Work.



.4 Individual product Sections: cutting and patching incidental towork of section. Advance notification to other sectionsrequired.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

.1 Submit written request in advance of cutting or alterationwhich affects:.1 Structural integrity of any element of Project..2 Integrity of weather-exposed or moisture-resistantelements..3 Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operationalelement..4 Visual qualities of sight-exposed elements..5 Work of DCC Representative or separate contractor.

.2 Include in request:.1 Identification of Project..2 Location and description of affected Work..3 Statement on necessity for cutting or alteration..4 Description of proposed Work, and products to be used..5 Alternatives to cutting and patching..6 Effect on Work of DCC Representative or separatecontractor..7 Written permission of affected separate contractor..8 Date and time work will be executed.

1.4 MATERIALS

.1 Required for original installation.

.2 Change in Materials: Submit request for substitution inaccordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.



1.5 PREPARATION

.1 Inspect existing conditions, including elements subject todamage or movement during cutting and patching.

.2 After uncovering, inspect conditions affecting performance ofWork.

.3 Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existingconditions.

.4 Provide supports to assure structural integrity ofsurroundings; provide devices and methods to protect otherportions of project from damage.

.5 Provide protection from elements for areas which may be exposedby uncovering work; maintain excavations free of water.

1.6 EXECUTION

.1 Execute cutting, fitting, and patching including excavation andfill, to complete Work.

.2 Fit several parts together, to integrate with other Work.

.3 Uncover Work to install ill-timed Work.

.4 Remove and replace defective and non-conforming Work.

.5 Provide openings in non-structural elements of Work forpenetrations of mechanical and electrical Work and as indicateson plans.

.6 Execute Work by methods to avoid damage to other Work, andwhich will provide proper surfaces to receive patching andfinishing.

.7 Employ original installer to perform cutting and patching forweather-exposed and moisture-resistant elements, andsight-exposed surfaces.

.8 Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumaticor impact tools not allowed on masonry work without priorapproval.

.9 Restore work with new products in accordance with requirementsof Contract Documents.

.10 Fit Work airtight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and otherpenetrations through surfaces.



.11 At penetration of fire rated wall, ceiling, or floorconstruction, completely seal voids with firestopping material,full thickness of the construction element.

.12 Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finishes: For continuoussurfaces refinish to nearest intersection; for an assembly,refinish entire unit.

.13 Conceal pipes, ducts and wiring in floor, wall and ceilingconstruction of finished areas except where indicatedotherwise.

1.7 SUB-DIVISION OF WORK

.1 The Specifications have generally been divided into Sectionsfor the purpose of ready reference, but a Section may consistof the Work of more than one trade Subcontractor or supplier.

.2 The responsibility for determining which Subcontractor orsupplier provides labour, material, equipment and services tocomplete the Work rests solely with Contractor.

.3 No extras will be allowed on grounds of differences ofinterpretation of Contract Documents as to which Subcontractoror supplier shall provide which labour, material, equipment orservice, including the taking of field measurement.

1.8 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES

.1 Ensure that Work erected is in compliance with ContractDocuments and shall be responsible for delays or costsresulting from failure to inspect or co-ordinate, and for anyreplacement or corrective Work required.

1.9 COMMISSIONING

.1 Ensure that testing, adjusting, balancing and certification ofmechanical and electrical installations and other automatedsystems or equipment are executed in compliance with ContractDocuments.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Cleaning Page 1Storage FacilityGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 Progressive cleaning.

.2 Final cleaning.

1.2 PRECEDENCE


1.3 RELATED SECTION



.3 Section 01 74 21 - Construction/Demolition Waste Management AndDisposal.

.4 Section 01 77 00 - Closeout Procedures.

1.4 PROJECT CLEANLINESS

.1 Maintain Work in tidy condition, free from accumulation ofwaste products and debris, other than that caused by Owner orother Contractors.

.2 Remove waste materials from site at regularly scheduled timesor dispose of as directed by DCC Representative. Do not burnwaste materials on site.

.3 Clear snow and ice from access to building, bank/pile snow indesignated areas only, as identified by DCC Representative.

.4 Make arrangements with and obtain permits from authoritieshaving jurisdiction for disposal of waste and debris.

.5 Provide on-site containers for collection of waste materialsand debris.

.6 Provide and use clearly marked separate bins for recycling.Refer to Section 01 74 21 - Construction/Demolition WasteManagement And Disposal.



.7 Remove waste material and debris from site and deposit in wastecontainer at end of each working day.

.8 Dispose of waste materials and debris at. an approved dumpingarea off site.

.9 Clean interior areas prior to start of finish work, andmaintain areas free of dust and other contaminants duringfinishing operations.

.10 Store volatile waste in covered metal containers, and removefrom premises at end of each working day.

.11 Provide adequate ventilation during use of volatile or noxioussubstances. Use of building ventilation systems is notpermitted for this purpose.

.12 Use only cleaning materials recommended by manufacturer ofsurface to be cleaned, and as recommended by cleaning materialmanufacturer.

.13 Schedule cleaning operations so that resulting dust, debris andother contaminants will not fall on wet, newly painted surfacesnor contaminate building systems.

1.5 FINAL CLEANING

.1 When Work is Substantially Performed, remove surplus products,tools, construction machinery and equipment not required forperformance of remaining Work.

.2 Remove waste products and debris other than that caused byothers, and leave Work clean and suitable for occupancy.

.3 Prior to final review, remove surplus products, tools,construction machinery and equipment.

.4 Remove waste products and debris other than including thatcaused by Owner or other Contractors.

.5 Remove waste materials from site at regularly scheduled timesor dispose of as directed by DCC Representative. Do not burnwaste materials on site.

.6 Make arrangements with and obtain permits from authoritieshaving jurisdiction for disposal of waste and debris.

.7 Clean and polish glass, mirrors, hardware, wall tile, stainlesssteel, chrome, porcelain enamel, baked enamel, plasticlaminate, and mechanical and electrical fixtures. Replacebroken, scratched or disfigured glass.



.8 Remove stains, spots, marks and dirt from decorative work,electrical and mechanical fixtures, furniture fitments, walls.

.9 Clean lighting reflectors, lenses, and other lighting surfaces.

.10 Vacuum clean and dust building interiors, behind grilles,louvres and screens.

.11 Inspect finishes, fitments and equipment and ensure specifiedworkmanship and operation.

.12 Broom clean and wash exterior walks, steps and surfaces; rakeclean other surfaces of grounds.

.13 Remove dirt and other disfiguration from exterior surfaces.

.14 Clean and sweep roofs, gutters, areaways, and sunken wells.

.15 Sweep and wash clean paved areas.

.16 Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition; clean orreplace filters of mechanical equipment.

.17 Clean roofs, downspouts, and drainage systems.

.18 Remove debris and surplus materials from crawl areas and otheraccessible concealed spaces.

.19 Remove snow and ice from access to building.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Construction/Demolition Page 1Storage Facility Waste Management andGarrison Petawawa, ON Disposal 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

.1 The project will generate as little construction waste aspossible Divert 75% or more of construction waste away fromlandfill.



.2 Section 01 82 60 - Standard Foundations.

.3 Section 01 82 65 - Slab-On-Grade.

.4 Section 01 83 45 - Prefabricated Buildings.


1.3 REQUIREMENTS

.1 At the beginning of the Project, the General Contractor isto develop and implement a Waste Reduction Workplan to divert75% of all construction waste away from landfill.

.2 All subcontractors shall submit to the General Contractor aWaste Audit that identifies anticipated amounts of waste thatwill be generated and addresses issues such as recycling ofconstruction materials.

.3 All subcontractors are to comply with the GeneralContractors commitment to Waste Reduction and projectspecific Waste Reduction Workplan, a copy of which shall beavailable at the General Contractors site office.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

.1 Construction/Demolition/Renovation (CDR) Waste: Solid wastestypically including but not limited to, building materials,packaging, trash, debris, and rubble resulting fromconstruction, re-modeling, repair and demolition operations.

.2 Disposed: Any waste material that is sent to a landfill,incinerator or similar facility.



.3 Generated: Waste generated should equal the total of wastereused, recycled and disposed.

.4 Materials Source Separation Program (MSSP): Consists ofseries of ongoing activities to separate reusable,recyclable, and disposable waste material into materialcategories from other types of waste at point of generation.

.5 Project: The Project means the total constructioncontemplated of which the Work may be the whole or a part.

.6 Recyclable: Ability of product or material to be recoveredat end of its life cycle and remanufactured into new productfor reuse by others.

.7 Recycle: Process by which waste and recyclable materials aretransformed or collected for purpose of being transferredinto new products..1 Recycling: Process of sorting, cleansing, treating andreconstituting solid waste and other discarded materials forpurpose of using in altered form. Recycling does not includeburning, incinerating, or thermally destroying waste.

.8 Reuse: Repeated use of product in same form but notnecessarily for same purpose. Reuse includes:.1 Salvaging reusable materials from re modelling projects,before demolition stage, for resale, reuse on current projector for storage for use on future projects..2 Returning reusable items including pallets or unusedproducts to vendors.

.9 Salvage: Removal of structural and non structural materialsfrom deconstruction/disassembly projects for purpose of reuseor recycling.

.10 Separate Condition: Refers to waste sorted into individualtypes.

.11 Source Separation: Acts of keeping different types of wastematerials separate beginning from first time they becamewaste.

.12 Waste: Surplus material, or material that has reached theend of its life in its intended-use form. Waste includessalvageable, returnable, recyclable, reusable, and disposablematerial.

.13 Waste Category: The categories used in your wastecomposition analysis (e.g. gypsum board, wood, concrete,etc). These categories will form the basis for your workplanand monitoring system.



.14 Waste Management Coordinator (WMC): Contractorrepresentative responsible for supervising waste managementactivities as well as coordinating related, requiredsubmittal and reporting requirements.

.15 Waste Reduction Workplan (WRW): Written report thataddresses opportunities for reduction, reuse, or recycling ofmaterials. WRW is based on information acquired from WA.

1.5 WASTE DIVERSION REQUIREMENTS

.1 Divert 75% or more of construction waste by weight or volumefrom landfill.

.2 Once a method of calculation has been selected (by weight orby volume), all subsequent calculations must be approachedconsistent.

1.6 WASTE REDUCTION WORKPLAN

.1 Waste Reduction Workplan: Within 30 days after award ofContract, or prior to any waste removal, whichever occurssooner, submit a Waste Reduction Workplan to the DCCRepresentative for review.

.2 Waste Reduction Workplan to contain the following:.1 Analysis of the proposed jobsite waste to be generated,including types and quantities, based on Waste Audit formsfrom all subcontractors..2 Landfill options: The name of the local landfillfacility, the applicable landfill tipping fees, and theprojected cost of disposing of all Project waste in thelandfill.

.3 Alternatives to Landfill: provide a list of each materialproposed to be salvaged, reused, or recycled during thecourse of the Project, and the proposed local market for eachmaterial. The following are some suggested inclusions:.1 Sale of recycled or salvaged materials, and.2 Materials diverted from landfill to include, at minimum,the following materials:

.1 Cardboard.

.2 Clean dimensional wood.

.3 Beverage containers.

.4 Land clearing debris.

.5 Concrete, Bricks, Concrete Masonry Units (CMU).

.6 Asphalt.



.7 Metals from banding, steel stud trim, ductwork,piping, rebar, roofing, other trim, steel, iron,galvanized sheet steel, stainless steel, aluminum,copper, zinc, lead, brass, and bronze..8 Gypsum board if recycling facilities exist..9 Plastic buckets; waste can be reduced by usingplastic lined cardboard dry packed materials instead ofpremixed moist packed materials where this option isavailable..10 Paint..11 Plastic sheeting and packaging, where recyclingprograms are available..12 Rigid plastic foam insulation, where recyclingprograms are available..13 Other, as designated by Contractor in compliancewith requirements.

.4 Develop Workplan in collaboration with all subcontractors toensure all waste management issues and opportunities areaddressed.

.5 Resources for development of Waste Reduction Workplan: Thefollowing information and suggestions may be useful indeveloping the draft Waste Reduction Workplan:.1 Recycling Haulers and Markets: Investigate local haulersand markets for recyclable materials, and incorporate intoWaste Reduction Workplan..2 Reduce construction waste during installation work.Undertake practices that minimize waste and optimize full useof new materials on site, such as:

.1 Use of a central cutting area to allow for easyaccess to off-cuts;.2 Use of off-cuts for blocking and bridgingelsewhere..3 Use of effective and strategically placedfacilities on site for storage and staging of left-overor partially cut materials (such as gypsum board,plywood, ceiling tiles, insulation etc...) to allow foreasy incorporation into work whenever possible avoidingunnecessary waste.

.3 Develop other strategies and innovative procedures toreduce waste, such as minimizing the extent of packaging usedfor delivery of materials to site, etc.

.6 DCC Representative will review Workplan and return toContractor. Contractor to resubmit within ten calendar days afinal Waste Reduction Workplan, containing the following:.1 Analysis of the proposed jobsite waste to be generated,including types and quantities..2 Alternatives to Landfill: A list of the waste materialsfrom the Project that will be separated for reuse, salvage,or recycling.



.3 Landfill options: The name of landfill facility to whichProject waste will be hauled if not diverted..4 Meetings: A description of the regular meetings to beheld to address waste management..5 Materials Handling Procedures: A description of themeans by which any waste materials identified for diversionwill be protected from contamination, and a description ofthe means to be employed in recycling the above materialsconsistent with requirements for acceptance by designatedfacilities..6 Transportation: A description of the means oftransportation of the recyclable materials, whether materialswill be site separated and self hauled to designated centres,or whether mixed materials will be collected by a wastehauler and removed from the site, and destination ofmaterials.

.7 Implement and manage all aspects of Waste Management Workplanfor duration of work.

.8 Review Plan as work progresses addressing new opportunitiesfor diversion of waste from landfill.

1.7 MATERIALS SOURCE SEPARATION PROGRAM (MSSP)

.1 Prepare MSSP and have ready for use prior to project startup.

.2 Implement MSSP for waste generated on project in compliancewith approved methods and as reviewed by DCC Representative.Provide on site facilities for collection, handling, andstorage of anticipated quantities of reusable, recyclable,and disposable materials.

.3 Provide and label containers to deposit reusable andrecyclable materials.

.4 Locate containers in locations, to facilitate deposit ofmaterials without hindering daily operations.

.5 Locate separated materials in area which minimize materialdamage.

.6 Collect, handle, store on site, and transport off site,salvaged materials in separate condition..1 Transport to approved and authorized recycling facility,and/or to users of material for recycling.

.7 Collect, handle, store on site, and transport off site,salvaged materials in combined condition..1 Ship materials to an approved recycling facility.



.2 Materials must be immediately separated into requiredcategories for reuse or recycling.

1.8 TRAINING AND SUPERVISION

.1 Provide adequate training to workforce, through meetings anddemonstrations, to emphasize purpose and workerresponsibilities in carrying out the Waste ManagementWorkplan.

.2 Waste Management Coordinator (WMC): designate full-timeperson on site, experienced in waste management and havingknowledge of the purpose and content of Waste ReductionWorkplan to:.1 Waste Reduction Workplan..2 Material Source Separation Plan..3 Blank waste tracking forms - Schedule A..4 Schedule A as completed for project - maintainedup-to-date.

1.9 SUBMITTALS

.1 Submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - SubmittalProcedures.

.2 Prepare and submit following prior to project start up..1 Submit 2 copies of completed Waste Reduction Workplan(WRW)..2 Submit 2 copies of Materials Source Separation program(MSSP) description.

.3 Submit before final payment summary of waste materialssalvaged for reuse, recycling or disposal by Project, plussupporting documentation..1 Provide receipts, scale tickets, certified weigh bills,and show quantities and types of materials reused, recycled,co mingled and separated off site, or disposed of,.2 For each material reused, sold or recycled from project,include amount in tonnes and the destination..3 For each material land filled from project, includeamount in tonnes of material and identity of landfill ortransfer station.


.1 Store, materials to be reused, recycled and salvaged inlocations as directed by DCC Representative.



.2 Unless specified otherwise, materials for removal becomeContractor's property.

.3 Separate non salvageable materials from salvaged items.Transport and deliver non salvageable items to licenseddisposal facility.

.4 Protect surface drainage, mechanical and electrical fromdamage and blockage.

.5 Prevent contamination of materials to be salvaged andrecycled and handle materials in accordance with requirementsfor acceptance by designated facilities..1 On site source separation is recommended..2 Remove co mingled materials to off site processingfacility for separation..3 provide waybills for separated materials.

1.11 DISPOSAL OF WASTES

.1 Keep records of construction waste including:.1 Number and size of bins..2 Waste type of each bin..3 Total tonnage or volume generated..4 Tonnage or volume reused or recycled..5 Reused or recycled waste destination.

.2 Record all material that leaves the site, or is re-usedon-site on Waste Tracking Forms - see attached Schedule A.

.3 Prepare project summary to verify destination and quantitieson a material by material basis as identified in materialaudit.

.4 General Contractor is responsible to research and locate waste diversion and service providers. Salvaged materialsare to be transported off site to approved and/or authorizedrecycling facilities or to users of materials for recycling.

1.12 SCHEDULING

.1 Coordinate Work with other activities at site to ensuretimely and orderly progress of Work.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

.1 Do Work in compliance with WRW and WSSP.

.2 Handle waste materials not reused, salvaged, or recycled inaccordance with appropriate regulations and codes.

3.2 CLEANING

.1 Remove tools and waste materials on completion of Work, andleave work area in clean and orderly condition.

.2 Clean up work area as work progresses.

.3 Source separate materials to be reused/recycled intospecified sort areas.

3.3 DIVERSION OF MATERIALS

.1 Divert minimum 75% of waste materials from landfill by weightor volume (use one unit of measure for all materials onProject). Separate materials from general waste stream andstockpile in separate piles or containers, as reviewed by DCCRepresentative..1 Mark containers or stockpile areas..2 Provide instruction on disposal practices.

3.4 WASTE TRACKING FORM

.1 Record all material that leaves the site, or is re-usedon-site on Schedule A: Refer to Schedule A, attached at endof this section.

3.5 CONTACT INFORMATION / RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE ENVIRONMENT

.1 All incidents to be reported to the Garrison PetawawaEnvironmental Officer first.



.1 Garrison Petawawa Environmental officer Phone:613-687-5511..2 Province of Ontario, Ministry of Environment andEnergy,135 St. Clair Avenue West, Toronto ON, M4V 1P5, Phone:418-643-3127 / 800-561-1616, Fax: 418-646-5974..3 Environment Canada, Toronto, ON, Phone: 416-734-4494.

National Defence UNCLASSIFIED Section 01 74 21 New ULCV & EATV Construction/Demolition Page 10 Storage Facility Waste Management and Garrison Petawawa, ON Disposal 2016-06-29 Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

3.1 SCHEDULE A - WASTE TRACKING FORM

Project: Date of Container removal: Waybill Number:

.1 Identify type and size of container:

Size of container:

cubic yard container, or pick up truck

Tandem 1 Ton truck Trailer dump 5 Ton truck (Other)

.2 Identify contents of container (either by % of load OR actual weight).

.3 Identify outcome for each material: i.e. Reused, Recycled, Fill on-site, Compost, Returned to shop, Other

Bin Contents Estimated % of

Load Actual Weight (if known)

Outcome*

Waste

Wood (clean)

Treated Wood

Metals

Concrete, masonry, asphalt and other aggregates

Plastic packaging

Gypsum Board

Cardboard

Paper

Other

National Defence UNCLASSIFIED Section 01 74 21 New ULCV & EATV Construction/Demolition Page 11 Storage Facility Waste Management and Garrison Petawawa, ON Disposal 2016-06-29 Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

.4 Identify total estimated weight (or actual weight if known): tonnes.

Destination: Comments: Recorded by:

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Closeout Procedures Page 1Storage FacilityGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 Administrative procedures preceding preliminary and finalinspections of Work.

1.2 PRECEDENCE






.4 Section 01 74 11 - Cleaning.

1.4 INSPECTION AND DECLARATION

.1 Contractor's Inspection: Contractor and all Subcontractorsshall conduct an inspection of Work, identify deficiencies anddefects, and repair as required to conform to ContractDocuments..1 Notify DCC Representative in writing of satisfactorycompletion of Contractor's Inspection and that corrections havebeen made..2 Request DCC Representative's Inspection.

.2 DCC Representative's Inspection: DCC Representative andContractor will perform inspection of Work to identify obviousdefects or deficiencies. Contractor shall correct Workaccordingly.

.3 Completion: submit written certificate that following have beenperformed:.1 Work has been completed and inspected for compliance withContract Documents..2 Defects have been corrected and deficiencies have beencompleted..3 Equipment and systems have been tested, adjusted andbalanced and are fully operational.


New ULCV & EATV Closeout Procedures Page 2Storage FacilityGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

.4 Certificates required by Fire Commissioner have beensubmitted..5 Operation of systems have been demonstrated to DCCRepresentative's personnel..6 Work is complete and ready for Final Inspection.

.4 Final Inspection: when items noted above are completed, requestfinal inspection of Work by DCC Representative, and Contractor.If Work is deemed incomplete by DCC Representative, completeoutstanding items and request reinspection.

1.5 FINAL CLEANING

.1 Clean in accordance with Section 01 74 11 - Cleaning..1 Remove surplus materials, excess materials, rubbish, toolsand equipment.

.2 Waste Management: separate waste materials for reuse andrecycling in accordance with Section 01 74 21 - Construction /Demolition Waste Management and Disposal.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Closeout Submittals Page 1Storage FacilityGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 As-built, samples, and specifications.

.2 Equipment and systems.

.3 Product data, materials and finishes, and related information.

.4 Operation and maintenance data.

.5 Spare parts, special tools and maintenance materials.

.6 Warranties and bonds.

.7 Final site survey.

1.2 PRECEDENCE






.4 Section 01 71 00 - Examination and Preparation.

.5 Section 01 77 00 - Closeout Procedures.

.6 Section 01 79 00 - Demonstration and Training.

1.4 SUBMISSION

.1 Prepare instructions and data using personnel experienced inmaintenance and operation of described products.

.2 Copy will be returned after final inspection, with DCCRepresentative's comments.

.3 Revise content of documents as required prior to finalsubmittal.



.4 Two weeks prior to Substantial Performance of the Work, submitto the DCC Representative, two hard final copies of operatingand maintenance manuals and two computerized copies of theoperating and maintenance manuals. The computerized copies ofthe manuals shall be in pdf format and on one memory stickeach. the pdf manuals shall also contain a table of contentsand bookmarks in a tree structure to ensure ease of navigationto all parts of the manual.

.5 Ensure spare parts, maintenance materials and special toolsprovided are new, undamaged or defective, and of same qualityand manufacture as products provided in Work.

.6 If requested, furnish evidence as to type, source and qualityof products provided.

.7 Defective products will be rejected, regardless of previousinspections. Replace products at own expense.

.8 Pay costs of transportation.

1.5 FORMAT

.1 Organize data in the form of an instructional manual.

.2 Provide a copy of every document in digital PDF format onCD-ROM.

.3 Binders: vinyl, hard covered, 3 'D' ring, loose leaf 219 x 279mm with spine and face pockets.

.4 When multiple binders are used, correlate data into relatedconsistent groupings. Identify contents of each binder onspine.

.5 Cover: Identify each binder with type or printed title 'ProjectRecord Documents'; list title of project and identify subjectmatter of contents.

.6 Arrange content by process flow, under Section numbers andsequence of Table of Contents.

.7 Provide tabbed fly leaf for each separate product and system,with typed description of product and major component parts ofequipment.

.8 Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or typewritten data.

.9 Drawings: provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind inwith text; fold larger drawings to size of text pages.



.10 Provide one hardcopy marked-up in red, "as built" drawings.

1.6 CONTENTS - EACH VOLUME

.1 Table of Contents: provide title of project;.1 date of submission; names,.2 addresses, and telephone numbers of DCC Representative andContractor with name of responsible parties;.3 schedule of products and systems, indexed to content ofvolume.

.2 For each product or system:.1 list names, addresses and telephone numbers ofsubcontractors and suppliers, including local source ofsupplies and replacement parts.

.3 Product Data: mark each sheet to clearly identify specificproducts and component parts, and data applicable toinstallation; delete inapplicable information.

.4 Drawings: supplement product data to illustrate relations ofcomponent parts of equipment and systems, to show control andflow diagrams.

.5 Typewritten Text: as required to supplement product data.Provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure,incorporating manufacturer's instructions specified in Section01 45 00 - Quality Control.

.6 Training: Refer to Section 01 79 00 - Demonstration andTraining.

1.7 AS-BUILTS AND SAMPLES

.1 In addition to requirements in General Conditions, maintain atthe site for DCC Representative one record copy of:.1 Contract Drawings..2 Specifications..3 Addenda..4 Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract..5 Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples..6 Field test records..7 Inspection certificates..8 Manufacturer's certificates.

.2 Store record documents and samples in field office apart fromdocuments used for construction. Provide files, racks, andsecure storage.



.3 Label record documents and file in accordance with Sectionnumber listings in List of Contents of this Project Manual.Label each document "PROJECT RECORD" in neat, large, printedletters.

.4 Maintain record documents in clean, dry and legible condition.Do not use record documents for construction purposes.

.5 Keep record documents and samples available for inspection byDCC Representative.

1.8 RECORDING ACTUAL SITE CONDITIONS

.1 Record information on set of black line opaque drawings, and incopy of Project Manual, provided by DCC Representative.

.2 Provide felt tip marking pens, maintaining separate colours foreach major system, for recording information.

.3 Record information concurrently with construction progress. Donot conceal Work until required information is recorded.

.4 Contract Drawings and shop drawings: legibly mark each item torecord actual construction, including:.1 Measured depths of elements of foundation in relation tofinish first floor datum..2 Measured horizontal and vertical locations of undergroundutilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surfaceimprovements..3 Measured locations of internal utilities andappurtenances, referenced to visible and accessible features ofconstruction..4 Field changes of dimension and detail..5 Changes made by change orders..6 Details not on original Contract Drawings..7 References to related shop drawings and modifications.

.5 Specifications: legibly mark each item to record actualconstruction, including:.1 Manufacturer, trade name, and catalogue number of eachproduct actually installed, particularly optional items andsubstitute items..2 Changes made by Addenda and change orders.

.6 Other Documents: maintain manufacturer's certifications,inspection certifications, field test records, required byindividual specifications sections.



1.9 FINAL SURVEY

.1 Submit final site survey certificate in accordance with Section01 71 00 - Preparation, certifying that elevations andlocations of completed Work are in conformance, ornon-conformance with Contract Documents.

.2 Final survey to be provided in hard and digital (CAD and PDF)formats. Digital survey data also to be provided in the form ofa "points" file for each import into CAD.

1.10 EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS

.1 Each Item of Equipment and Each System: include description ofunit or system, and component parts. Give function, normaloperation characteristics, and limiting conditions. Includeperformance curves, with engineering data and tests, andcomplete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceableparts.

.2 Panel board circuit directories: provide electrical servicecharacteristics, controls, and communications.

.3 Include installed colour coded wiring diagrams.

.4 Operating Procedures: include start-up, break-in, and routinenormal operating instructions and sequences. Includeregulation, control, stopping, shut-down, and emergencyinstructions. Include summer, winter, and any special operatinginstructions.

.5 Maintenance Requirements: include routine procedures and guidefor trouble-shooting; disassembly, repair, and reassemblyinstructions; and alignment, adjusting, balancing, and checkinginstructions.

.6 Provide servicing and lubrication schedule, and list oflubricants required.

.7 Include manufacturer's printed operation and maintenanceinstructions.

.8 Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer.

.9 Provide original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations,assembly drawings, and diagrams required for maintenance.

.10 Provide installed control diagrams by controls manufacturer.

.11 Provide Contractor's coordination drawings, with installedcolour coded piping diagrams.



.12 Provide charts of valve tag numbers, with location and functionof each valve, keyed to flow and control diagrams.

.13 Provide list of original manufacturer's spare parts, currentprices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage.

.14 Include test and balancing reports as specified in Section 0145 00 - Quality Control and 01 91 00 - Commissioning.

.15 Additional requirements: As specified in individualspecification sections.

1.11 MATERIALS AND FINISHES

.1 Building Products, Applied Materials, and Finishes: includeproduct data, with catalogue number, size, composition, andcolour and texture designations. Provide information forre-ordering custom manufactured products.

.2 Instructions for cleaning agents and methods, precautionsagainst detrimental agents and methods, and recommendedschedule for cleaning and maintenance.

.3 Moisture-protection and Weather-exposed Products: includemanufacturer's recommendations for cleaning agents and methods,precautions against detrimental agents and methods, andrecommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance.

.4 Additional Requirements: as specified in individualspecifications sections.

1.12 SPARE PARTS

.1 Provide spare parts, in quantities specified in individualspecification sections.

.2 Provide items of same manufacture and quality as items in Work.

.3 Deliver to site, location as directed; place and store.

.4 Receive and catalogue all items. Submit inventory listing toDCC Representative. Include approved listings in MaintenanceManual.

.5 Obtain receipt for delivered products and submit prior to finalpayment.



1.13 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

.1 Provide maintenance and extra materials, in quantitiesspecified in individual specification sections.

.2 Provide items of same manufacture and quality as items in Work.

.3 Deliver to site location as directed; place and store.


.5 Obtain receipt for delivered products and submit prior to finalpayment.

1.14 SPECIAL TOOLS

.1 Provide special tools, in quantities specified in individualspecification section.

.2 Provide items with tags identifying their associated functionand equipment.

.3 Deliver to site location as directed; place and store.



.1 Store spare parts, maintenance materials, and special tools inmanner to prevent damage or deterioration.

.2 Store in original and undamaged condition with manufacturer'sseal and labels intact.

.3 Store components subject to damage from weather in weatherproofenclosures.

.4 Store paints and freezable materials in a heated and ventilatedroom.

.5 Remove and replace damaged products at own expense and tosatisfaction of DCC Representative.



1.16 WARRANTIES AND BONDS

.1 Separate each warranty or bond with index tab sheets keyed toTable of Contents listing.

.2 List subcontractor, supplier, and manufacturer, with name,address, and telephone number of responsible principal.

.3 Obtain warranties and bonds, executed in duplicate bysubcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers, within ten daysafter completion of the applicable item of work.

.4 Except for items put into use with DCC Representative'spermission, leave date of beginning of time of warranty untilthe Date of Substantial Performance is determined.

.5 Verify that documents are in proper form, contain fullinformation, and are notarized.

.6 Co-execute submittals when required.

.7 Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Demonstration Page 1Storage Facility and TrainingGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

.1 Demonstrate scheduled operation and maintenance of equipmentand systems to DCC Representative's personnel two weeks priorto date of substantial performance.

.2 Owner will provide list of personnel to receive instructions,and will coordinate their attendance at agreed-upon times.

1.2 QUALITY CONTROL

.1 When specified in individual Sections, require manufacturerto provide authorized representative to demonstrate operationof equipment and systems, instruct DCC Representative'spersonnel, and provide written report that demonstration andinstructions have been completed.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

.1 Submit schedule of time and date for demonstration of eachitem of equipment and each system prior to designated dates,for DCC Representative's approval.

.2 Submit reports within one week after completion ofdemonstration, that demonstration and instructions have beensatisfactorily completed.

.3 Give time and date of each demonstration, with list ofpersons present.

1.4 CONDITIONS FOR DEMONSTRATIONS

.1 Equipment has been inspected and put into operation.

.2 Testing, adjusting, and balancing has been performed inaccordance with Section 01 91 13 - General Commissioning(Cx) Requirements and equipment and systems are fullyoperational.

.3 Provide copies of completed operation and maintenance manualsfor use in demonstrations and instructions.


New ULCV & EATV Demonstration Page 2Storage Facility and TrainingGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

1.5 PREPARATION

.1 Verify that conditions for demonstration and instructionscomply with requirements.

.2 Verify that designated personnel are present.

1.6 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS

.1 Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment,trouble-shooting, servicing, and maintenance of each item ofequipment at agreed upon times, at the designated location.

.2 Instruct personnel in all phases of operation and maintenanceusing operation and maintenance manuals as the basis ofinstruction.

.3 Review contents of manual in detail to explain all aspects ofoperation and maintenance.

.4 Prepare and insert additional data in operations andmaintenance manuals when the need for additional data becomesapparent during instructions.

1.7 TIME ALLOCATED FOR INSTRUCTIONS

.1 Ensure amount of time required for instruction of each itemof equipment is appropriate for the level of complexity ofthe system. Provide minimum instruction times as specified,in the project Commissioning Plan.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used.

END OF SECTION

National Defence UNCLASSIFIED Section 01 82 60 New ULCV & EATV Standard Foundations Page 1 Storage Facility Garrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29 Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 Section 01 82 65 – Slab-on-Grade.

.2 Section 01 83 45 – Prefabricated Buildings.

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 Canadian Standards Association (CSA)

.1 CSA-A23.1-14/A23.2-14, Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete Construction/Test Methods and Standard Practices for Concrete. .2 CSA-A23.3-04(2010), Design of Concrete Structures. .3 CSA-A3000-13, Cementitious Materials Compendium. .4 CSA-G30.18-09(R2014), Carbon Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. .5 CSA-G40.20-13/G40.21-13, General Requirements for Rolled or Welded Structural Quality Steel / Structural Quality Steel. .6 CSA-O86-14, Engineering Design in Wood. .7 CSA-W186-M1990, Welding of Reinforcing Bars in Reinforced Concrete Construction.

.2 Underwriters Laboratories Canada (ULC)

.1 CAN/ULC-S701-11, Standard for Thermal Insulation, Polystyrene, Boards and Pipe Covering.

.3 National Research Council (NRC)

.1 NBCC 2010, National Building Code of Canada.

1.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

.1 Section includes:

.1 Foundation Excavation, Backfill and Compaction.

.2 Wall Foundations.

.3 Column Foundations.

.4 Perimeter Insulation.

.5 Base Plates and Anchor Bolts.

.2 The Geotechnical Investigation report prepared by Golder Associates Ltd., report no. 13-1121-0174-3000 is provided for the bidder in the Appendix as a guide only. The geotechnical investigation is to provide general information on the site in order to assist the designer and builder to prepare the bid. Designer and Builder to determine adequacy of the provided information and formulate conclusions.


.1 Prior to detailed design of the facility, the Designer shall undertake additional detailed geotechnical investigations as required to carry out proper design and installation of building foundations, slab on grade and civil work suitable to existing site conditions and to minimize total and differential settlement. Designer to provide any additional Geotechnical Investigations in the form of a report to the DCC Representative. Designer to cover the costs of additional detailed geotechnical investigations.

.3 All footings are to be founded either on undisturbed or engineered soil. The Geotechnical Investigation Report included in appendix has classified the existing site as Class D for seismic site response. Designer’s geotechnical engineer to verify the site classification in additional Detailed Geotechnical Investigations.

.4 Co-ordinate foundation design with the requirements for site services.

.5 Submit coordinated construction documents, including drawings and specifications of the foundations. Construction documents submitted to bear the stamp and signature of a qualified Professional Engineer licensed to practice in the Province of Ontario.

.6 Submit shop drawings for record purposes. Shop drawings submitted to bear the stamp and signature of a qualified Professional Engineer licensed to practice in the Province of Ontario. Coordinate foundation openings, penetrations, equipment, loading etc. with relevant disciplines and with Section 01 82 65 – Slab-on-Grade and 01 83 45 – Prefabricated Buildings.

.7 Submit shop drawings for record purposes. Each shop drawing submitted to bear the stamp and signature of a Qualified Professional Engineer licensed to practice in the Province of Ontario as required by local authorities.

.8 All items, materials, products and equipment provided for this project shall be new, purpose made for the intended use, specifically designed and constructed to suit the requirements of this project.

1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

.1 Design foundations in accordance with the most stringent recommendations from the Geotechnical Investigations, and with the National Building Code of Canada, latest edition at time of tender, errata and revisions as well as requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction for:


.1 Critical combination of design loads imposed by superstructure. .2 Local soil conditions. .3 Local environmental and climatic conditions. .4 Protection of footings against frost action: Soil cover minimum 1.8 m for all footings. .5 Live loads as required due to use and occupancy. .6 Seismic Forces: Design foundations to transfer seismic forces to the prepared subsurface. Refer to the requirements of NBCC and OBC Subsection 4.1.8 and Section 4.2. Coordinate seismic forces with relevant disciplines and Section 01 83 45 – Prefabricated Buildings.

.1 Earthquake importance factor, 1E. 1.0. .7 Dead loads and Live loads: severest of 1) as specified in the National Building Code of Canada, errata and revisions and 2) as specified in the Room Data Schedules.

.2 Design foundations for reinforced concrete in accordance with:

.1 Design concrete and reinforcing in accordance with CSA-A23.3. .2 Design welding in accordance with CSA-W186. .3 Design formwork to conform to CSA-269.1 and CSA-269.3.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 BACKFILL

.1 Backfill free draining granular material in accordance with OPSS as per the most stringent of recommendations from: the Geotechnical Investigation Report included as appendix, any additional Detailed Geotechnical Investigations performed by the Geotechnical Engineer, or as otherwise specified here within.

.2 Provide 75 mm thick, 20 MPa concrete mud-slab under all continuous wall footings and spread footings on prepared and compacted bearing surfaces.

2.2 WALL FOUNDATIONS

.1 Continuous Footings:

.1 Concrete: Cast-in-Place; type and strength which will support superimposed loads; to CSA-A23.1. Minimum 28 day compressive strength of 25 MPa. .2 Cement type conforming to CSA-A3000.


.3 All concrete mix designs to maximize the content of Class “F” fly ash or approved supplementary cementing material (SCM) as a substitute for Portland Cement. .4 Reinforcing: deformed steel billet bars to CSA-G30.18. Grade: 400 MPa. .5 Formwork: dimensional lumber and plywood formwork to CSA-A23.1 and CSA-O86.

2.3 WALLS (INCLUDING RETAINING WALLS)

.1 Concrete: Cast-in-Place: Type and strength that will support superimposed loads to CSA-A23.1. Minimum 28 day compressive strength of 25 MPa.

.2 Cement Type conforming to CSA-A3000.

.3 All concrete mix designs to maximize the content of Class “F” fly ash or approved SCM as a substitute for Portland Cement.

.4 Reinforcing: deformed steel billet bars to CSA-G30.18. Grade 400 MPa.

.5 Formwork: Dimensional lumber and plywood to CSA-A23.1 and CSA-O86.

.6 Formwork Ties: For concrete not designated 'Architectural', use removable or snap-off metal ties, fixed or adjustable length, free of devices leaving holes larger than 25 mm diameter in concrete surface. Holes are to be filled with non-shrink grout. Patch all form tie holes and finish surface to remove all evidence of tie holes and/or patching.

.7 Finish: Architect’s finish schedule.

2.4 COLUMN FOUNDATIONS

.1 Spread Footings:

.1 Concrete: Cast-in-Place. Type and strength that will support superimposed loads to CSA A23.1. Minimum 28 compressive strength of 25 MPa. .2 Cement Type conforming to CSA-A3000. .3 All concrete mix designs to maximize the content of Class “F” fly ash or approved SCM as a substitute for Portland Cement. .4 Reinforcing: Deformed steel billet bars to CSA-G30.18. Grade: 400 MPa. .5 Formwork: Dimensional lumber and plywood to CSA-A23.1 and CSA-O86.

.2 Column Piers:


.1 Concrete: Type and strength that will support superimposed loads to CSA A23.1. Minimum 28 day compressive strength of 25 MPa. .2 All concrete mix designs to maximize the content of Class “F” fly ash as a substitute for Portland Cement. .3 Cement Type conforming to CSA-A3000. .4 Reinforcing: Deformed steel billet bars to CSA-G30.18. Grade: 400 MPa. .5 Formwork: Dimensional lumber and plywood to CSA-A23.1 and CSA O86.

2.5 PERIMETER INSULATION

.1 Insulation: To CAN/ULC-S701. Type 4, extruded polystyrene insulation. Minimum compressive strength of 210 kPa.

.2 Perimeter Insulation: concrete protection board below and above grade. Fiberglass tape to joints, acrylic finish. Install as per manufacturer’s specifications.

2.6 ANCHORING PLATES AND BOLTS

.1 Steel: structural steel plates and bolts to CSA-G40.20/G40.21.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS EXTERIOR ELEMENTS, FOUNDATIONS AND PADS

.1 Provide concrete foundations for the following elements. All exterior concrete to have minimum 28 day compressive strength of 35 MPa:

.1 Light standards.

.2 Exterior concrete filled steel protection bollards.

.3 Ground-mounted exterior signage, antennas, flagpoles.

.4 Transformer pad.

.5 Mechanical and electrical equipment.

.6 Excavation de-watering system.

.7 Communication Manhole.

.8 Sewage Lift, etc.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

.1 Carry out the installation of foundations under the supervision of a Qualified Professional Geotechnical Engineer licensed in the Province of Ontario as required by local Authorities, and in accordance with NBC and CSA-A23.1.


3.2 FOUNDATION EXCAVATION, BACKFILL AND COMPACTION

.1 Undertake foundation excavation, backfill and compaction as per the most stringent of recommendations from: the Geotechnical Investigation Report included as appendix, any additional Detailed Geotechnical Investigations performed by the Geotechnical Engineer.

3.3 CONTINUOUS FOOTINGS & FOUNDATION WALLS

.1 Place footings/mudslab on undisturbed or properly compacted sub-soils prepared as per the most stringent of recommendations from: the Geotechnical Investigation Report included as appendix, any additional Detailed Geotechnical Investigations performed by the Contractor’s Geotechnical Engineer. The bearing surface must be checked and approved in writing, prior to placement of concrete by a geotechnical engineer.

.2 Construct footings and walls from reinforced concrete in accordance with the following:

.1 Do concrete work, formwork and reinforcing work in accordance with CSA-A23.1. Note hot and cold weather requirements. .2 Do welding in accordance with CSA-W186, except where noted otherwise. .3 Do testing in accordance with CSA-A23.2. .4 Fabricate reinforcing in accordance with CSA-A23.1 and Reinforcing Manual of Standard Practice. .5 Coordinate locations of underground services with Mechanical & Civil contractors or appropriate sub trade and provide openings in foundation walls as necessary. Where required, step down wall footings to allow for piping penetrations through foundation walls.

.1 Step footing to drop no more than 600 mm in elevation. Distance between footing steps to be no less than 1000 mm.

3.4 COLUMN FOUNDATIONS

.1 Place column foundations/mudslabs on undisturbed or properly compacted sub-soils prepared as per the most stringent of recommendations from: the Geotechnical Investigation Report included as appendix, any additional Detailed Geotechnical Investigations performed by the contractor’s Geotechnical Engineer. The bearing surface must be checked and approved in writing by a geotechnical engineer prior to placement of concrete.

.2 Construct column foundations from reinforced concrete in accordance with the following:


.1 Do concrete work, formwork, and reinforcing work in accordance with CSA-A23.1. Note hot and cold weather requirements. .2 Do welding in accordance with CSA-W186, except where noted otherwise. .3 Do concrete testing in accordance with CSA-A23.2. .4 Fabricate reinforcing in accordance with CSA-A23.1 and Reinforcing Manual of Standard Practice.


.1 Apply rigid insulation to the exterior of perimeter foundation elements. Extend insulation vertically from underside of slab to top of footing or 1800 mm, whichever is less, and protect insulation with concrete board. Install as per manufacturer’s specifications.

3.6 ANCHORING PLATES AND BOLTS

.1 Install base plates and anchor bolts in foundation elements to accommodate framing elements of structure above.

3.7 DEWATERING

.1 Keep excavations free of water while work is in progress.

.2 Submit for the DCC Representative's review details of proposed dewatering.

.3 Avoid excavation below groundwater table if quick condition or heave is likely to occur. Prevent piping or bottom heave of excavations by groundwater lowering, sheet pile cut-offs, or other means.

.4 Protect open excavations against flooding and damage due to surface run-off.

.5 Provide siltation traps to remove suspended solids in drainage courses or ditches prior to discharging surface runoff into low lying drainage areas or existing waterways.

.6 Coordinate discharge of de-watering system with local authority and the DCC Representative

END OF SECTION

National Defence UNCLASSIFIED Section 01 82 65 New ULCV & EATV Slab-On-Grade Page 1 Storage Facility 2016-06-29 CFB Petawawa, ON Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 Section 01 82 60 – Standard Foundations.

.2 Section 01 83 45 – Prefabricated Buildings.

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 ASTM International

.1 ASTM A48-03(R2012), Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings. .2 ASTM C920-14a, Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. .3 ASTM D1709-15a, Standard Test Methods for Impact Resistance of Plastic Film by the Free-Falling Dart Method. .4 ASTM D1751-04(R2013), Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types). .5 ASTM D2240-15, Standard Test Method for Rubber property – Durometer Hardness. .6 ASTM E96-15, Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.


.1 CSA-A23.1-14/A23.2-14, Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete Construction/Test Methods and Standard Practices for Concrete. .2 CSA-A23.3-04(2010), Design of Concrete Structures. .3 CSA-G30.18-09(R2014), Carbon Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. .4 CSA-G40.20-13/G40.21-13, General Requirements for Rolled or Welded Structural Quality Steel / Structural Quality Steel. .5 CSA-G164-M92(R2003), Hot Dip Galvanizing of Irregularly Shaped Articles, Metals and Metal Products. .6 CSA-O86-14, Engineering Design in Wood. .7 CSA-O121-08, Douglas Fir Plywood. .8 CSA-W59-13, Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding). .9 CSA-W186-M1990, Welding of Reinforcing Bars in Reinforced Concrete Construction.


.3 Canadian General Services Board (CGSB)

.1 CAN/CGSB 19.24-M90, Multi-Component, Chemical-Curing Sealing Compound. .2 CAN/CGSB 51-GP-51M-1981, Standard for Polyethylene Sheet for Use in Building Construction. .3 CAN/CGSB 51.20-M87, Thermal Insulation, Polystyrene Boards and Pipe Coverings.

.4 Underwriters Laboratories Canada (ULC)

.1 CAN/ULC-S701-11, Standard for Thermal Insulation, Polystyrene, Boards and Pipe Covering.


.1 Section includes:

.1 Standard Slabs-on-Grade.

.2 Inclined Slabs-on-Grade.

.3 Structural Slabs-on-Grade.

.4 Trenches.

.5 Pits and Bases.

.6 Subdrainage System.

.7 Perimeter Insulation.

.8 Other Slabs-on-Grade.

.2 The Geotechnical Investigation report prepared by Golder Associates Ltd., report no. 13-1121-0174-3000, is provided for the bidder in the Appendix as a guide only. The geotechnical investigation is to provide general information on the site in order to assist the designer and builder to prepare the bid. Designer and Builder to determine adequacy of the provided information and formulate conclusions.

.1 Prior to detailed design of the facility, the Designer shall undertake additional detailed geotechnical investigations as required to carry out proper design and installation of building foundations, slab on grade and civil work suitable to existing site conditions and to minimize total and differential settlement. Designer to provide any additional Geotechnical Investigations in the form of a report to the DCC Representative. Designer to cover the costs of additional detailed geotechnical investigations.

.3 Submit coordinated construction documents, including drawings and specifications of the concrete slab-on-grade. Construction documents submitted to bear the stamp and signature of a qualified Professional Engineer licensed to practice in the Province of Ontario. Coordinate slab


openings, penetrations, equipment, loading, etc. with relevant disciplines and with Sections 01 82 60 – Standard Foundations and 01 83 45 – Prefabricated Buildings.

.4 Submit shop drawings for record purposes. Shop drawings submitted to bear the stamp and signature of a qualified Professional Engineer licensed to practice in the Province of Ontario. Coordinate slab openings, penetrations, equipment, loading etc. with relevant disciplines and with Sections 01 82 60 – Standard Foundations and 01 83 45 – Prefabricated Buildings.

.5 All items, materials, products, and equipment provided for this project shall be new; purpose made for the intended use, specifically designed, constructed to suit requirements of this project.

.6 Submit proposed concrete mix designs to the DCC Representative for review.


.1 Design Slabs-on-Grade in accordance with CSA-A23.3 and as per the most stringent recommendations from the Geotechnical Investigations:

.1 Design loads imposed by superstructure.

.2 Local soil conditions.

.3 Local environmental and climatic conditions.

.4 Live Loads as per building code requirements and as indicated in Section 1.4.10.

.2 Design Slabs-on-Grade for the various building uses and occupancies and in accordance with load requirements of the National Building Code of Canada and as recommended by the Portland Cement Association publication EB075 “Concrete Floors on Ground”.

.3 Minimum slab thickness and reinforcing:

.1 Slab-on-grade shall be min. 200 mm thick under vehicle areas and reinforced with min. 15M rebar located in the top-third of the concrete slab and spaced at 200 mm max. each way.

.4 Design and do all work in accordance with National Building Code of Canada, latest edition at time of tender, errata and revisions as well as the requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.

.5 Design interior Slabs-on-Grade to accommodate future relocation of non load-bearing masonry partitions. Use uniform slab thickness instead of thickening the slab under partitions.


.6 Accommodate floor grates. Coordinate trench drains and sumps with mechanical. Slope floors to drain as follows:

.1 Maximum 2.0%.

.7 Depress slabs for special floor finishes and as required for fixtures.

.8 Provide 100 mm high concrete housekeeping pads for mechanical and electrical floor mounted equipment. Provide sleeves, raceways and integrate mechanical and electrical requirements. Provide reinforcing bars in the pads and dowel pads into the concrete floor.

.9 Construction to mitigate vibration caused by mechanical equipment. Provide proof of specific measures to mitigate vibration.

.10 Design Criteria:

.1 Slab-on-grade to be designed for the most stringent of the following conditions:

.1 Design vehicles loading as provided by DCC Representative to be based on the following minimum loads:

.1 Polaris Dagor, gross vehicle weight plus payload of 5000 kg (11,000 lbs). .2 Mack Defense Kerax 8X8, gross vehicle weight (excludes payload) of 42,100 kg (92,600 lbs).

.2 12 kPa minimum uniform live load.

.3 Minimum concentrated live load of 60 kN over an area of 250 mm x 600 mm at each wheel location, based on the configuration of the Mack Defense Kerax 8x8 design vehicle. .4 Refer to Room Data Schedules and relevant disciplines drawings and specifications for additional special live load requirements. .5 Heavy usage, exposure to de-icing agents and freeze-thaw conditions.

.11 Design joint between interior/exterior slabs and foundation wall at door openings to inhibit thermal bridging and provide concealed, architecturally pleasing joint.

.12 Provide control joints and isolation joints in Slabs-on-Grade to eliminate uncontrolled shrinkage cracking. Sawcut control joints; maximum spacing: 7000 mm. Accommodate changes in floor finishes and finish types.

.13 Prevent vertical shift between exterior foundation and interior slab on grade at door locations.


.14 Accommodate changes in floor finishes and finish types. Locate control joints to conform to bay spacing wherever possible.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

.1 Grout: non-shrink, non-metallic, flowable, 24h, 35 MPa, pull-out strength 7.9 MPa to CSA-A23.1.

.2 Steel sections and plates: to CSA-G40.20/G40.21, Grade 350W.

.3 Hot Dip Galvanizing: to CSA-G164.

.4 Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding): to CSA-W59.

.5 Formwork: dimensional lumber and plywood to CSA-O121 and CSA-O86.

.6 Reinforcing steel: billet steel, deformed bars to CSA-G30.18. Grade: 400.

.7 Formed construction joints: select Alternate 1 or Alternate 2 for formed construction joints as suitable to meet slab design requirements:

.1 Alternate 1: Use plain round bars as slip dowels in concrete. Paint portion of dowel intended to move within hardened concrete with one coat of asphalt paint. When paint is dry, apply a thick even film of mineral lubricating grease. .2 Alternate 2: Use diamond shaped load plates and pocket former as slip dowels in concrete. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Use installation templates.

.8 Concrete: Cast-in-Place, type and strength which will support superimposed loads to CSA-A23.1, minimum 28 day compressive strength of 35 MPa, class ‘C-1’ as per CSA-A23.1/A23.2.

.9 All concrete mix designs to use maximum content of Class “F” fly ash or approved SCM as a substitute for Portland Cement. Percentage of fly ash in the slab-on-grade mix design to be compatible with floor finishes.

.10 Joint filler: for control and construction joints: two component, 100% solids semi-rigid epoxy or polyurea with minimum Shore A hardness of 80 as per ASTM D2240.

.11 Joint sealants: for control and construction joints; two component, self levelling elastomeric sealant to ASTM C920, Type M, Grade P, Class 25, use T.


.12 Pre-moulded Joint filler: bituminous impregnated fibreboard to ASTM D1751.

.13 Polyethylene film: to CGSB 51-GP-51M. Minimum 15 mil. Maximum practical width. Puncture Resistance: 3000 grams to ASTM D1709.

.14 Membrane tape as recommended by membrane manufacturer to seal all joints.

.15 Dampproofing membrane: to ASTM E96, premoulded membrane, Method B, 0 transmission rate.

.16 Accessories: Saw-cut control joints, construction joints, trench drains.

.17 Insulation: 50 mm thick, extruded, expanded polystyrene boards to CAN/CGSB-51.20, Type 4. Minimum compressive strength of 210 MPa.

.18 Sub-base material: free draining granular material in accordance with recommendations from the Geotechnical Investigations.

2.2 TRENCH DRAINS

.1 Sub-base: As recommended by the Geotechnical Investigations.

.2 Finish Grade Tolerances: plus or minus 12 mm in 3000 mm.

.3 Moisture Barrier: Ref Section 2.1. Approved vapor barrier conforming to requirements of National Building Code or Ontario Building Code, whichever is the most stringent. Min thickness 15 mil.

.4 Reinforcing: deformed steel bars, Grade: 400 MPa.

.5 Trench Drain Frames: Fabricate frames from steel, L51 x 51 x 6.4 frame. Grade: 300 MPa. Finish: galvanized.

.6 Prefabricated, trench drain systems: precast concrete trench drains with galvanized steel covers.

2.3 PITS AND BASES

.1 Moisture Barrier: Ref Section 2.1. Approved vapor barrier conforming to requirements of National Building Code or Ontario Building Code, whichever is the most stringent. Min thickness 15 mil.

.2 Frames: Fabricate frames from weldable steel, L51 x 51 x 6.4 frame. Grade: 300 MPa. Finish: galvanized

.3 Covers: Grey iron to ASTM A48. Class B Steel, fabricate from 6 mm thick raised pattern plate. Supply covers in maximum 1200 mm removable lengths. Finish: galvanized.



.1 Insulation: 50 mm thick rigid insulation boards to CAN/ULC-S701, Type 4. Minimum compressive strength: 210 kPa.

Part 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SUBGRADE AND FINISHED GRADE

.1 Finished Grade: Tolerances: plus or minus 12 mm in 3000 mm.

.2 Install moisture barrier under concrete Slabs-on-Grade inside building. Install shear mat underside of slabs at doorways, to extend 600 mm horizontally from exterior foundation wall.

.3 Thermal separation between exterior Slab-on-Grade and building perimeter and slab edge to be supported along building.


.1 Insulation: install to inside face of exterior foundation elements. Extend insulation horizontally below slab, 2000 mm in from face of exterior foundation elements, continuous around perimeter of building.

3.3 SLABS-ON-GRADE

.1 Construct concrete work in accordance with CSA-A23.1. Note hot and cold weather requirements.

.2 Do formwork in accordance with CSA-A23.1 and CSA A23.3.

.3 Fabricate reinforcing in accordance with CSA-A23.1 and Reinforcing Steel Manual of Standard Practice.

.4 Do welding of reinforcing bars in accordance with CSA-W186M, except where otherwise noted.

3.4 FINISHES

.1 Finish surface of slabs to receive applied finishes as follows:

.1 Carpet, tile, sheet roll goods: steel trowel.

.2 Tile and other ceramic floorings: depress slab to accommodate tile and mortar bed thickness. Finish slab steel trowel.

.2 Finish surface of slabs that do not receive an applied floor finish and colouring agents as follows:

.1 Apply sealer as per Section 01 84 70 – Interior Floor Finishes.


.3 Co-ordinate surface treatment with type of finishes as specified in Section 01 84 70 – Interior Floor Finishes.

.4 Finish surface of exterior slabs as follows:

.1 Ramps: coarse broom finish.

.2 Landings: medium broom texture to CSA-A23.1.

.5 Finish flat work in accordance with timing and procedures in CSA-A23.1. Flatness and levelness to be in accordance with CSA-A23.1 Table 22, Class C for interior slabs and Class A or B for exterior slabs depending on type of use.

.6 Perform testing of concrete in accordance with CSA-A23.2.

.7 Fill control joint with two component self-leveling epoxy joint sealant for load bearing joints, complete with closed cell non-extruding PVC foam joint filler backup.

3.5 CURING

.1 Cure concrete in accordance with CSA-A23.1/A23.2.

.2 Ensure that freshly placed concrete is protected from freezing, dehydration, mechanical shock and contact with injurious substances.

.3 Slab-on-grade shall undergo a seven (7) day water cure. Water cure shall be done in accordance with CSA-A23.1/A23.2.

END OF SECTION

National Defence UNCLASSIFIED Section 01 83 45 New ULCV & EATV Prefabricated Page 1 Storage Facility Buildings 2016-06-29 Garrison Petawawa, ON Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures

.2 Section 01 74 21 – Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal

.3 Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals

.4 Section 01 82 60 – Standard Foundations.

.5 Section 01 82 65 – Slab-On-Grade.

.6 Section 07 21 31 – Sprayed Insulation – Polyurethane Foam

.7 Section 07 92 00 – Sealants

.8 Section 08 11 00 – Metal Doors and Frames

.9 Section 08 36 13 – Sectional Overhead Doors

.10 Section 08 71 10 - Door Hardware

.11 Section 09 91 99 - Painting

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 ASTM International

.1 ASTM A 307-14, Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile. .2 ASTM A 325M-14, Specification for High-Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints Metric. .3 ASTM A525-93, Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process. .4 ASTM A653/A653M-15, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. .5 ASTM A792-10(R2015), Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process. .6 ASTM C920-14a, Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. .7 ASTM D523-14, Standard Test Method for Specular Gloss.


.8 ASTM D822-13, Standard Practice for Filtered Open-Flame Carbon-Arc Exposures of Paint and Related Coatings.


.1 CSA-A23.1-14/A23.2-14, Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete Construction/Test Methods and Standard Practices for Concrete. .2 CSA-A23.3-04(2010), Design of Concrete Structures. .3 CSA-A660-10, Certification of Manufacturers of Steel Building Systems. .4 CSA-B35.3-1962, Tapping and Drive Screws (Slotted and Recessed Head, Thread Forming and Thread Cutting Screws, and Metallic Drive Screws). .5 CSA-G30.18-09, Carbon Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. .6 CSA-G40.20-13/G40.21-13, General Requirements for Rolled or Welded Structural Quality Steel/Structural Quality Steel. .7 CAN/CSA-G164-M92, Hot dip Galvanizing of Irregularly Shaped Articles. .8 CSA-S16-09, Design of Steel Structures. .9 CSA-S136-12, North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members. .10 CSA-W59-13, Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding).

.3 Canadian Sheet Steel Building Institute (CSSBI)

.1 CSSBI 30M-06, Standard for Steel Building Systems.

.2 CSSBI B15B-15, Serviceability Design Criteria for Low Rise Steel Building Systems.

.4 National Research Council (NRC)

.1 NBCC 2010, National Building Code of Canada.

.5 Ontario Ministry of Municipal Affairs and Housing

.1 OBC 2012, Ontario Building Code Compendium.


.1 Prefabricated assembly by single manufacturer consisting of above grade building structure, roof and wall envelopes:

.1 Type: beam and column

.2 Roof slope: 1:12

.3 Wall system: sandwich panel

.4 Roof system: lapped seam single skin panels

.2 Provide building structure and enclosure to physical dimensions shown on drawings. Provide interior slab-on-


grade, foundations, housekeeping pads, gutters, downspouts, etc.

.3 Building occupancy as defined by National Building Code of Canada is Group F, Division 3.

.4 Generally, building is intended to serve as a storage facility.


.1 Apply the more stringent of the National Building Code of Canada and Ontario Building Code requirements. Design building structure and elements in accordance with CSA-S16 and CSA-S136 requirements.

.1 Use the most severe climatic data from the National Building Code of Canada and Ontario Building Code for Petawawa, ON.

.1 Minimum Snow Load, 1/50: .1 Ss = 2.6 kPa .2 Sr = 0.4 kPa.

.2 Minimum Hourly Wind Pressures, 1/50: .1 q = 0.35 kPa.

.3 Minimum Seismic Design Parameters, 1/50: .1 Sa(0.2) = 0.66. .2 Sa(0.5) = 0.320. .3 Sa(1.0) = 0.130. .4 Sa(2.0) = 0.043. .5 PGA = 0.420.

.4 Importance Category: normal. .2 Minimum service life for storage facility is to be 25 years.

.2 Design steel building system to withstand dead loads and live loads, mechanical and electrical systems. Design loads for wind loading and seismic shall follow those given in the most recent edition of the National Building Code of Canada and its supplement and of the Ontario Building Code. In addition to uniform live load, design for full live load on leeward half of building frame and zero live load on windward half.

.3 Design building to allow for thermal movement of component materials caused by ambient temperature range of 100°C without causing buckling, failure of joint seals, undue stress on fasteners or other detrimental effects.

.4 Design building enclosure elements to accommodate movement in wall and structural movements without permanent


distortion, damage to infills, racking of joints, breakage of seals, water penetration or glass breakage.

.5 Building interior environment shall be maintained at minimum 12 degrees Celsius.

.6 Building shall be watertight.

.7 Provide for positive drainage to exterior of condensation occurring within wall construction and water entering at joints.

.8 Design, assemble and secure building elements to building frame to ensure stresses in sealants and seals are within sealant manufacturer's recommendations.

.9 Design building assembly to permit easy replacement of components.

.10 Allow for ceiling, piping, conduit and other interior equipment supported on this structure.

.11 Structural steel design shall be in accordance with CSA-S16.

.12 Cold-formed steel structural members shall be in accordance with CSA-S136.

.13 Cast-in-place concrete shall be in accordance with CSA-A23.3. Concrete reinforcing in accordance with CSA-G30.18.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

.1 Buildings shall be the design of the manufacturer who is a member in good standing of the CSSBI and is regularly engaged in the fabrication of pre-engineered structures conforming to the CSSBI. The Fabricator shall, in accordance with the layout of the Contract documents, design and detail the total pre-engineered structure including all connections, girts, permanent bracing and temporary bracing.

1.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

.1 Provide certification from steel building systems manufacturer that erector is qualified to erect system.

1.7 CERTIFICATION

.1 Submit the following documents in accordance with CSSBI 30M:

.1 Four copies of certification that building is in accordance with this Specification, the National Building Code of Canada and CSSBI 30M. Certification shall be in accordance with the Certificate of Design and Manufacturing Conformance for the Building System described and shall be


stamped by a Professional Engineer practicing in the Province of Ontario, Canada. .2 Certification stating design criteria used and loads assumed in design and placing sole responsibility for design of building components with steel building systems manufacturer.

1.8 FOUNDATIONS & SLAB-ON-GRADE

.1 It is the Contractor's responsibility to retain a Structural Engineer to design building foundations and slab-on-grade. The designer shall be a Professional Engineer licensed in the Province of Ontario, Canada.

.2 Design foundations and slab-on-grade in accordance with building code requirements to permissible soil loads indicated by the Geotechnical Investigations and loads provided by superstructure designer.

.3 Foundations to the requirements of Section 01 82 60 – Standard Foundations.

.1 Minimum strip and spread footing thickness shall be 250 mm. .2 Minimum foundation wall thickness shall be 200 mm. .3 Minimum wall and footing reinforcement (in both directions) shall be 0.002 Ag. .4 Footings shall be designed to support all vertical and horizontal forces from building frames and columns. Transfer of forces through the slab is not permitted. Hair pins, cross ties between footings, etc. are not permitted.

.4 Slab-on-Grade to the requirements of Section 01 82 65 – Slab-on-Grade.

.1 Slab-on-grade shall be min. 200 mm thick under typical vehicle areas and reinforced with min. 15M rebar located in the top-third of the concrete slab and spaced at 200 mm max. each way. .2 Slab-on-grade to be designed for minimum loading conditions as indicated in Section 01 82 65 – Slab-on-Grade. Coordinate slab-on-grade loading with interior partitions as indicated on Architectural drawings.

1.9 PERFORMANCE

.1 Serviceability design criteria are to be based on the recommendations provided in CSSBI B15B. Coordinate deflection requirements with drawings. Unless stricter requirements are indicated on the drawings or from CSSBI B15B:


.1 Maximum vertical deflection for roof cladding and framing under full specified live or snow load: Areas with no interior finish: 1/180 of clear span. Areas with interior finish susceptible to cracking: 1/360 of clear span. .2 Maximum horizontal deflection for exterior cladding and framing under full specified exterior wind induced loads: Areas with no interior finish: 1/90 of clear span. Areas with interior finish susceptible to cracking: 1/240 of clear span.

.2 Maintain following tolerances for building structure and enclosure elements.

.1 Maximum variation from plane or location shown on shop drawings: 1 mm/1 m of length and up to 1 mm/5 m maximum. .2 Maximum offset from true alignment between two adjacent members abutting end to end, in line: 0.75 mm.

1.10 SUBMITTALS

.1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.

.2 Submitted drawings to bear signature and seal of Professional Engineer registered in the Province of Ontario, Canada for fabricator designed assemblies, components and connections, foundations, and slabs-on-grade.

.3 Indicate plans and grid lines, structural members and connection details, bearing and anchorage details, roof cladding, wall cladding, framed openings, accessories, schedule of materials and finishes, camber and loadings, fasteners and welds, sealant locations and details.

.4 Provide plans for foundations indicating all sizes, reinforcement, loading, materials, anchor bolts, connections and assembly details.

.5 Describe requirements of other systems and components related to this work but provided by others. Obtain necessary information required to detail this work including methods of integration and securing.

.6 Submit erection drawings for approval by the DCC Representative, before construction.

.7 Indicate shop and erection details including cuts, copes, connections, holes, threaded fasteners, rivets and welds.

.8 Submit description of methods and sequence of erection and type of equipment proposed for use in erecting structural frame.


.9 Indicate on shop drawings related provisions required for mechanical, electrical and other work.

1.11 STORAGE AND PROTECTION

.1 Protect prefinished steel sheet during fabrication, transportation, site storage and installation in accordance with CSSBI Bulletin No.9.

.2 Handle and protect galvanized materials from damage to zinc coating. During storage, space surfaces of galvanized materials to permit free circulation of air.

1.12 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

.1 Provide operation and maintenance data in accordance with Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.

1.13 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

.1 Collect, separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 21 – Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal.

1.14 WARRANTY

.1 For work of this section 01 83 45 - Prefabricated Buildings:

.1 Provide a manufacturer’s standard warranty for materials and workmanship for minimum period of 1 year from substantial completion. .2 Provide a manufacturer’s limited warranty for weather tightness of building system for minimum period of 10 years from shipment date.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Prefabricated steel building structure shall be rigid frame type with interior row of columns as per drawings. Supplier shall be certified to CSA-A660.

.2 Fire resistive building elements: in accordance with the building code for use and occupancy specified.

.3 Exterior and interior wall cladding panels: manufacturer’s standard pre-finished steel panel type material.

.1 Prefinished Exterior Sheet: At exterior locations sheet shall be coil coated (pre-painted) galvanized steel formed of material coated in coil form with colours of proven durability for exterior exposure. Base material shall be zinc coated steel sheet conforming to ASTM A653


minimum Grade A. The minimum zinc coating designation shall be Z275 as defined in ASTM A653. .2 Gauge: base steel nominal thickness shall be as required to withstand design criteria specified. Minimum 26 gauge. .3 Colour: to be selected by DCC Representative from standard colour range. .4 Profiles: unless specified or indicated otherwise on discipline drawings and specifications, to be selected by DCC Representative from standard profiles. Acceptable metal wall cladding manufacturers include:

.1 Aqway Metals.

.2 VicWest.

.3 Westman Steel. .5 Flashings and Trim: shall be fabricated from similar material and shall be same finish and colour as exterior sheets. Flashings shall include, but shall not necessarily be limited to the following:

.1 Parapet cap flashings;

.2 Drip flashings;

.3 Internal and external corner flashings;

.4 Base and penetration flashings

.5 Trim, copings and closures for head, jamb, sill and corners of openings.

.6 Insulation: as required to meet code and as required from related disciplines. .7 Subgirts: minimum AZ180 Galvalum or equal Aluminum/zinc coating in accordance with ASTM A792, minimum 1.21mm (MSG18 gauge) base metal thickness. .8 Fasteners and Hidden Clips: shall be supplied in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendation to meet the load requirements specified and maintain a weathertight installation, and shall be hot dipped galvanized. .9 Exterior screws where applicable shall be stainless steel 300 series, complete with snap-on vinyl cap. Colour to match exterior sheet with interlocking stainless steel and neoprene conforming to CSA-B35.3. .10 Cell Closure: shall be metal or composition closure to manufacturer’s standard. Composition closures shall be made of closed-cell neoprene. Unless specified elsewhere, Rubatex Compound, Grade G207 or equivalent. .11 Joint Sealant: shall be one part silicone, or two part multi-component to ASTM C920, Grade NS, Class 50: Unless specified elsewhere, Dow Corning 790 or 795; GE SCS 2000 Silpruf or GE SCS1200; Tremco Dymeric 240 or 240FC; or equivalent.


.12 Sealant backer shall be extruded polyethylene foam, unless specified elsewhere, backer rod shall be placed in joints not less than 75 percent of its original size. .13 Coordinate interior walls with discipline drawings and specifications. Unless specified elsewhere, interior walls to be concrete block, 190 mm wide.

.4 Exterior and interior roofing panels: manufacturer's standard pre-finished metal roofing panels.

.1 Profile: standing seam roofing profile for exterior sheet. Standard liner panel for interior sheet. .2 Fasteners: concealed. .3 Gauge base steel nominal thickness shall be as required to withstand design criteria specified. Minimum 24 gauge. .4 Colour: to be selected by DCC Representative from standard colour range. .5 Clips: thermally broken stand-off clips from steel substructure. .6 Exterior panel finish to be min 0.53 mm thick galvalume (AL-Zn) alloy coating (55% Al and 45% Zn by weight). Colour to be selected by DCC Representative. .7 Sub-girts and clips: factory preformed steel sheet, zinc coated, sized to suit design loads. .8 Wrapped insulation within cavity, with minimum 50 mm airspace to underside of roofing panels. .9 Accessories: All components to match roofing panels, fascia and edge panels, drip edge, snow and ice guards, exterior eave gutter and rainwater leader.

.5 Sealants: to relevant Architectural specification and as indicated on drawings. For proper application on exterior walls, exterior windows, roofs and exterior doors, refer to Architectural and prefabricated building manufacturer requirements.

.6 Thermal Insulation: roof and exterior wall insulation to be polyethylene wrapped batt and blanket material fibre for steel buildings to CAN/ULC-S702, and in accordance with related drawings and specifications. RSI 0.60/25 mm thickness, with polyester blend facer and air vapour retarder/air barrier.

.1 Wall ‘W1’: R23.

.2 Roof ‘R1’: R31.

.7 Structural steel: to CSA-G40.21, shop primed.

.8 Bolts: to ASTM A307 or ASTM A325M, complete with nuts and washers.


.9 Welding materials: to CSA-W59.

2.2 FABRICATION

.1 Fabricate structural members in accordance with shop drawings and to CSA-S16.

.1 Tolerance not to exceed those specified in CSSBI 30M.

.2 Provide holes for attachment of other work, as indicated.

.3 Reinforce openings to maintain design strength.

.4 Provide for blocking and reinforcing within assemblies to accept installations for entrance doors, overhead doors, roof penetrations, etc.

.5 Provide and maintain air and vapour barrier throughout building enclosure elements.

.6 Enclosure assembly shall be complete including exterior skin and doors.

.7 Accurately fit and rigidly frame together joints, corners and mitres. Match components carefully to produce continuity of line and design. Make joints and connections toward exterior weathertight. Materials in contact shall have hairline joints. Coordinate location of visible joints to the approval of the DCC Representative.

2.3 FINISHES

.1 Prefinished steel with factory applied polyvinylidene fluoride, unless specified otherwise in Architectural specifications and drawings.

.1 Class F1S.

.2 Colours: colour to be selected by the DCC Representative. .3 Specular gloss: 30 units +/- 5 in accordance with ASTM D523. .4 Coating thickness: dry film thickness of 1.0 mil ±. .5 Resistance to accelerated weathering for 0.1 mm chalk rating of 8, colour fade 5 units or less and erosion rate less than 20 % to ASTM D822 as follows:

.1 Humidity resistance exposure period 1000 hours.

.2 Building roofing colour: as per 2.3.1.

2.4 FOUNDATIONS/CONCRETE WORK

.1 Do cast-in-place concrete and formwork in accordance with Section 01 82 60 – Standard Foundations and 01 82 65 – Slab-on-Grade and applicable CSA standards.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ERECTION

.1 Do prefabricated metal building work to CSSBI 30M.

.2 Erect structural frame in accordance with shop drawings and to CSA-S16.

.1 Erection tolerances not to exceed those specified in CSSBI 30M.

.3 Obtain written permission from DCC Representative prior to field cutting or altering of structural members.

.4 Touch up with shop primer bolts, rivets, welds and burned or scratched surfaces where exposed at completion of erection.

.5 Provide insulation around wall connections.

.6 Continuously seal air and vapour barrier connections between panels.

.7 Ensure continuity of vapour retarder/air barrier by tying into door and window openings.

.1 Lap and seal liner flaps.

.2 Patch holes in liner using same type of material as liner.

.8 Provide for air and vapor barrier membrane connection for roofing and other project related work.

.9 Install interior and exterior wall cladding panels at joints of panel sections ensuring completed installation.

.10 Secure wall fabrications to structural supports.

.11 Install necessary closures, gaskets, caulking sealants and flashings.

.12 Provide for necessary transition membranes to provide continuity of air and vapour barrier systems to roof and foundation assemblies.

3.2 CLEANING

.1 Remove excess sealant by moderate use of mineral spirits or other solvent acceptable by sealant manufacturer.

.2 Clean surfaces.


3.3 PROTECTION

.1 Provide protection to finished surfaces with stripable coatings, stripable wrappers, plywood or sheet materials as required before acceptance of work.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV UXO Clearance Support Page 1Storage Facility to ConstructionGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

.1 Contractor is to be advised of the presence of unexplodedexplosive ordnance (UXO) and will be required to work inconjunction with a UXO clearance contractor before grubbingor during any site excavations. The UXO clearance contractorservice will be provided through a separate contract arrangedby and paid for by the DCC Representative.

.2 Contractors are required to be aware of the UXO clearancerequirements and are to include in their tender price allcosts associated in working with the UXO clearancecontractor.

.3 The Contractor shall note that the cleared area for UXO isonly valid for a limited depth below the surface as definedby the UXO Clearance contractor. The Contractor shall notexcavate into a lower surface without a further UXO clearancefrom the UXO clearance contractor.

1.2 UNEXPLODED EXPLOSIVE ORDNANCE (UXO)

.1 Work areas shall be cleared of unexploded ordnance (UXO)before any excavation work begins in specifically designatedwork area(s).

.2 UXO clearance to a depth required based on design ofunderground services and installations with a minimum of:.1 150 mm over footings area..2 1500 mm at trench area..3 Deeper clearances may be required due to existing gradevariability.

.3 The DCC Representative will allow work to proceed only afterthe UXO clearance has been completed.

.4 UXO Clearance technicians are limited to 10 working hours perday. Contractor to confirm their availability with the DCCRepresentative.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used.


New ULCV & EATV UXO Clearance Support Page 2Storage Facility to ConstructionGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 UXO CLEARANCE AND EXCAVATIONS

.1 Progression of project with respect to clearing unexplodedexplosive ordnance (UXO) shall be as follows:.1 The site is cleared of unexploded explosive ordnance toa depth of 450 mm for specifically designated work area(s)based on a phased clearance plan prepared by the contractors..2 The first 450 mm depth of excavation is completed..3 Excavation areas are again cleared of unexplodedordnance to further depth of 450 mm (900 mm total depth)..4 The next 450 mm depth excavation is completed..5 Process repeats until the full depth of excavation iscompleted..6 Contractor to work in conjunction with the UXO clearanceas coordinated by the DCC Representative.

3.2 UXO DISPOSAL OPERATIONS

.1 There is a requirement to regularly dispose of UXO bydetonation. ALL personnel not directly involved in thedisposal operation shall be evacuated from the work site(s)and will not be permitted to return until the UXO clearancecontractor has given the "all clear".

.2 It is anticipated that disposal operations will be scheduledto occur once per week for a period of up to four hours.Efforts will be made to provide 5 working days notice. Thiswill occur for the duration of the contract while UXOclearance operations are conducted adjacent to the projectsite.

.3 In the event that a UXO is encountered that cannot be safelyremoved from the project site, it may be necessary todesignate the area surrounding the UXO "Out of Bounds" to allpersonnel. The UXO clearance contractor will put in blastmitigation measures in place around the UXO. This "Out ofBounds" area of up to 50 meters around the UXO may have toremain in place for up to 5 working days. Efforts will bemade to minimize disruption to construction and airfieldoperations.

3.3 UXO CLEARANCE RATE

.1 UXO clearances will be completed at a rate of approximately1000m2 per team per day. Contractor to confirm number ofteams available with DCC Representative.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV General Commissioning (Cx) Page 1Storage Facility RequirementsGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 Section 01 32 16.07 - Construction Progress Schedule - Bar(GANTT) Chart.


.3 Section 01 91 31 - Commissioning Plan.

.4 Section 01 91 41 - Commissioning - Training.

.5 Section 01 91 51 - Building Management Manual (BMM).

1.2 SUMMARY

.1 Section Includes:.1 General requirements relating to commissioning ofproject's components and systems, specifying generalrequirements to PV of components, equipment, sub-systems,systems, and integrated systems.

.2 References:.1 ASHRAE Guideline 0-2005 - The Commissioning Process..2 ASHRAE Guideline 4-2008 - Preparation of Operating andMaintenance Documentation for Building Systems..3 ASHRAE Std 202-2013 - Commissioning Process forBuildings and Systems..4 NIBS Guideline 3-2012 - Building Enclosure..5 CSA Z320-11 - Building Commissioning Standard & CheckSheets..6 CSA Z318.0-05 - Commissioning of Health Care Facilities..7 CSA Z8001-13 - Commissioning of Health Care Facilities(Check Sheets)..8 NFPA 3-2012 - Recommended Practice for Commissioning ofFire Protection and Life Safety Systems.

.3 Acronyms:.1 BMM - Building Management Manual..2 CM - Construction Manager..3 CxA - Commissioning Authority..4 Cx - Commissioning..5 EMCS - Energy Monitoring and Control Systems..6 DCAE - Directorate of Corporate Architecture andEngineering..7 DCC - Defence Construction Canada..8 DND - Department of National Defence..9 O&M - Operation and Maintenance..10 TAB - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing.



.4 Definitions:.1 Commissioning (aka commissioning process) - a systematicverification, documentation and training process applied toall activities during the design , construction, staticverification, start up and functional performance testing, ofequipment and systems in a facility to ensure that thefacility operates in conformity with the owners projectrequirements and the basis of design in accordance with thecontract documents.

.1 Commissioning Authority - an individual or companyidentified by an owner to lead the commissioning team toimplement the commissioning process. Note: thecommissioning authority can be an owner or a thirdparty. The commissioning authority could also be acommissioning provider..2 Commissioning Check Sheets - the forms used todocument the inspections, tests, etc. performed duringthe commissioning process..3 Commissioning Provider - an individual or companyresponsible for planning, coordinating, and carrying outthe commissioning process. Note: commissioning providercan be an individual employed by the provider.

.2 Consultant - an individual who provides specializedresources and skills..3 Contractor - an individual or company that enters into acontract with an owner or authorized consultant to undertakea project..4 Control system - a local system that controls theoperation of a stand-alone mechanical system or mechanicalequipment. A control system comprises controlled devices(e.g., valves), controlling devices (e.g., thermostats),control wiring, a power supply, and a control air system(i.e., pneumatics)..5 Designer - any special consultant who is involved in theplanning and design process..6 Design intent - the performance that a design isintended to achieve in order to meet the OPR and basis ofdesign. This master plan for the systems is sometimesreferred to as the design concept. The design intent isrecorded in a design intent manual and guides the preparationof the contract documents The design intent documentationshould cover the following, for each system, major component,facility and area:

.1 General system description.

.2 Objectives and functional use of the system,equipment or facility..3 General quality of materials and construction..4 Occupancy requirements..5 Indoor environmental quality, IEQ (spacetemperature, relative humidity, indoor air quality,noise level, illumination level, etc).



.6 Performance criteria (general efficiency, energyand tolerances of the IEQ objectives, etc)..7 Budget and considerations and limitations..8 Restrictions and limitations of system or facility.

.7 Functional Performance Testing - a full range of testsunder actual load, conducted to verify specific systems,subsystems, components, and interfaces between systems thatconform to a given criteria. These tests are typically usedto verify that a sequence of operations is correctlyimplemented and that the design intent has been met. They aretypically done after equipment is placed in full operation..8 Inspection - a service traditionally provided as part ofthe normal scope of a designer's work. Inspection includes areview of building systems and equipment, or parts thereof..9 Integration - making diverse components and buildingsystems work together under all potential operatingconditions..10 Maintenance and data manual - a detailed document thatprovides the operating and maintenance requirements andassociated data for the safe and efficient operation ofspecific pieces of equipment and systems..11 Operations manual (aka systems operation manual) - adocument that describes, in lay terms, the operation of allsystems and equipment in a facility. An operations manualdetails modes of operation and includes associated diagramsthat illustrate the sequences of operation for each systemand interaction between individual systems..12 Optimization - adjusting the building systems to runsmoothly and operate in the most effective and efficientcondition when a facility is being used as intended..13 Owner - the entity that represents the interests of thefacility, which may include private sector, public sector andquasi public sector (i.e. Universities, colleges,institutions).14 Owners Project Requirements (OPR) - is a dynamicdocument that provides the explanation of the ideas, conceptsand criteria that are considered to be very important to theowner. The OPR should cite specific measurable goals for eachowners objective to the greatest extent possible..15 Project manager - the individual or company responsiblefor coordinating a construction project, the project managercan be the owner or a third party..16 Testing agency - a regulatory authority or other agency,individual, or contractor authorized and/or charged by afacility owner, designer, or contractor with theresponsibility for carrying out Functional performancetesting and/or verification of building systems andequipment, or parts thereof.



.17 Mock-up - a model, either full size or to scale, of aconstruction system or assembly used to analyze constructiondetails, strength, appearance, functionality and performance. It can be built on site as part of the finished work or in ashop environment..18 Operational commissioning - the installation andcommissioning of owners supplied systems and equipment.Notes: It brings the facility to a fully operationalcondition and includes staff orientation and training. It iscarried out after the building commissioning has beencompleted..19 Commissioning authority - will be an independent thirdparty hired by the Project Manger who leads, plans, andcoordinates the commissioning team to implement theCommissioning Process and produce the Cx report..20 Commissioning team - will be an independent third partyhired by the Project Manger who leads, plans, and coordinatesthe commissioning team to implement the Commissioning Processand produce the Cx report..21 Data sheets - pre-start-up checklist, refer to DNDsample data sheets for minimum content. These sheets areprovided by the CxA and completed by the Contractor. The CxAand DND may jointly approve a substitute form..22 Test procedure - A written protocol that definesmethods, personnel, and expectations for tests conducted oncomponents, equipment, assemblies, systems, and interfacesamong systems..23 Validate - For start-up and performance testing: towitness and confirm proper and complete performance testingand record all deficiencies and report to owner and designconsultant; when the instructed corrections have beencompleted re-validate all the deficiencies; and to providefull and detailed documentation for the Consultantcertification..24 Verify - The CxA's witnessing of the specifiedperformance tests. The contractor shall attend allverifications, and record all deficiencies to be handed outto the CxA for inclusion in final Cx report.

1.3 GENERAL

.1 Cx is a planned program of tests; procedures, documentationand checks carried out systematically on systems andintegrated systems of the project. Cx is performed aftersystems are completely installed, functional and contractor'sperformance verification responsibilities have been completedand approved by authority having jurisdiction.

.2 Objectives:



.1 To verify installed equipment, systems and integratedsystems operate in accordance with contract documents anddesign criteria and intent..2 To bring mechanical, electrical, and buildingarchitectural systems and components from a state of staticcompletion to a state of dynamic operation..3 To support quality management and verifying contractconformance through documented monitoring, checking andvalidation of the installation..4 To minimize issues which occur during the hand over of abuilding from contractor to owner..5 Optimize the operations and maintenance by performdesign reviews, testing and verification process, andensuring comprehensive training is provided to owner's staffto enable them to optimize the everyday function of afacility..6 To make certain that with performing seasonalcommissioning to systems, their performance under varyingoperating conditions do meet the specifications..7 To confirm installations meet requirements of contractdocuments..8 To provide all testing documents and records..9 To ensure completed facility meets user statedrequirements..10 To provide a Cx report to assist operators in optimizingand maintaining the Facility..11 Ensure appropriate documentation is compiled into theBMM..12 Effectively train O&M staff..13 Assure that accurate and useful historical records suchas as-built drawings and O&M/BMM manuals are handed over tothe owner.

1.4 COMMISSIONING OVERVIEW

.1 CxA is to be an independent identity from the Contractor,Contract Manager and Consultant and should be hired by DND.

.2 During Design Stage the CxA should review Constructiondocuments ensuring:.1 Adequacy of provisions for commissioning;.2 Aspects of design and installation consider Cxactivities;.3 Ensure design is considering owner's requirements ofenergy efficient facilities that are easily maintainable.

.3 CxA is to maintain and update the Cx Plan throughout theproject and at the end this living document should besubmitted to the Owner as part of the Final CommissioningReport.



.4 Cx activities supplement field quality and testing procedurein relevant technical sections.

1.5 NON-CONFORMANCE TO PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION REQUIREMENTS

.1 Should equipment, system components, and associated controlsbe incorrectly installed or malfunction during Cx, correctdeficiencies, re-verify equipment and components within theunfunctional system, including related systems as deemedrequired by DCC Representative, to ensure effectiveperformance.

.2 Costs for corrective work, additional tests, inspections, todetermine acceptability and proper performance of such itemsto be borne by Contractor. Above costs to be in form ofprogress payment reductions or hold-back assessments.

1.6 PRE-CX REVIEW

.1 Before Construction:.1 Review contract documents, confirm by writing to DCCRepresentative.

.1 Adequacy of provisions for Cx.

.2 Aspects of design and installation pertinent tosuccess of Cx.

.2 During Construction:.1 Co-ordinate provision, location and installation ofprovisions for Cx.

.3 Before start of Cx:.1 Have completed Cx Plan up-to-date..2 Ensure installation of related components, equipment,sub-systems, systems is complete..3 Fully understand Cx requirements and procedures..4 Have Cx documentation shelf-ready..5 Understand completely design criteria and intent andspecial features..6 Submit complete start-up documentation to DCCRepresentative..7 Have Cx schedules up-to-date..8 Ensure systems have been cleaned thoroughly..9 Complete TAB procedures on systems, submit TAB reportsto DCC Representative for review and approval..10 Ensure "As-Built" system schematics are available.

.4 Inform DCC Representative in writing of discrepancies anddeficiencies on finished works.



1.7 CONFLICTS

.1 Report conflicts between requirements of this section andother sections to DCC Representative before start-up andobtain clarification.

.2 Failure to report conflict and obtain clarification willresult in application of most stringent requirement.


.1 Submittals: in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - SubmittalProcedures..1 Submit no later than 4 weeks after award of Contract:

.1 Name of Contractor's Cx agent.

.2 Draft Cx documentation.

.3 Preliminary Cx schedule..2 Request in writing to DCC Representative for changes tosubmittals and obtain written approval at least 8 weeks priorto start of Cx..3 Submit proposed Cx procedures to DCC Representativewhere not specified and obtain written approval at least 8weeks prior to start of Cx..4 Provide additional documentation relating to Cx processrequired by DCC Representative.

1.9 COMMISSIONING DOCUMENTATION

.1 Refer to Section 01 91 33 - Commissioning (Cx) Forms:Installation Check Lists and Product Information (PI) /Performance Verification (PV) Forms for requirements andinstructions for use.

.2 DCC Representative to review and approve Cx documentation.

.3 Provide completed and approved Cx documentation to DCCRepresentative.

1.10 COMMISSIONING SCHEDULE

.1 Provide detailed Cx schedule as part of construction schedulein accordance with Section 01 32 16.07 - ConstructionProgress Schedules - Bar (GANTT) Chart.

.2 Provide adequate time for Cx activities prescribed intechnical sections and commissioning sections including:.1 Approval of Cx reports..2 Verification of reported results..3 Repairs, retesting, re-commissioning, re-verification.



.4 Training.

1.11 COMMISSIONING MEETINGS

.1 Convene Cx meetings following project meetings: Section01 32 16.07 - Construction Progress Schedules - Bar (GANTT)Chart and as specified herein.

.2 Purpose: to resolve issues, monitor progress, identifydeficiencies, relating to Cx.

.3 Continue Cx meetings on regular basis until commissioningdeliverables have been addressed.

.4 At 60% construction completion stage. Section 01 32 16.07 -Construction Progress Schedules - Bar (GANTT) Chart. DCCRepresentative to call a separate Cx scope meeting to reviewprogress, discuss schedule of equipment start-up activitiesand prepare for Cx. Issues at meeting to include:.1 Review duties and responsibilities of Contractor andsubcontractors, addressing delays and potential problems..2 Determine the degree of involvement of trades andmanufacturer's representatives in the commissioning process.

.5 Thereafter Cx meetings to be held until project completionand as required during equipment start-up and functionaltesting period.

.6 Meeting will be chaired by Construction Manager, who willrecord and distribute minutes.

.7 Ensure subcontractors and relevant manufacturerrepresentatives are present at 60% and subsequent Cx meetingsand as required.

1.12 STARTING AND TESTING

.1 Contractor assumes liabilities and costs for inspections.Including disassembly and re-assembly after approval,starting, testing and adjusting, including supply of testingequipment.

1.13 WITNESSING OF STARTING AND TESTING

.1 Provide 14 days notice prior to commencement.

.2 DCC Representative to witness of start-up and testing.



.3 Contractor's Cx Agent to be present at tests performed anddocumented by sub-trades, suppliers and equipmentmanufacturers.

1.14 MANUFACTURER'S INVOLVEMENT

.1 Factory testing: manufacturer to:.1 Coordinate time and location of testing..2 Provide testing documentation for approval by DCCRepresentative..3 Arrange for DCC Representative to witness tests..4 Obtain written approval of test results anddocumentation from DCC Representative before delivery tosite.

.2 Obtain manufacturers installation, start-up and operationsinstructions prior to start-up of components, equipment andsystems and review with DCC Representative..1 Compare completed installation with manufacturer'spublished data, record discrepancies, and review withmanufacturer..2 Modify procedures detrimental to equipment performanceand review same with manufacturer before start-up.

.3 Integrity of warranties:.1 Use manufacturer's trained start-up personnel wherespecified elsewhere in other divisions or required tomaintain integrity of warranty..2 Verify with manufacturer that testing as specified willnot void warranties.

.4 Qualifications of manufacturer's personnel:.1 Experienced in design, installation and operation ofequipment and systems..2 Ability to interpret test results accurately..3 To report results in clear, concise, logical manner.

1.15 PROCEDURES

.1 Verify that equipment and systems are complete, clean, andoperating in normal and safe manner prior to conductingstart-up, testing and Cx.

.2 Conduct start-up and testing in following distinct phases:.1 Included in delivery and installation:

.1 Verification of conformity to specification,approved shop drawings and completion of PI reportforms..2 Visual inspection of quality of installation.

.2 Start-up: follow accepted start-up procedures.



.3 Operational testing: document equipment performance.

.4 System PV: include repetition of tests after correctingdeficiencies..5 Post-substantial performance verification: to includefine-tuning.

.3 Correct deficiencies and obtain approval from DCCRepresentative after distinct phases have been completed andbefore commencing next phase.

.4 Document require tests on approved PV forms.

.5 Failure to follow accepted start-up procedures will result inre-evaluation of equipment by an independent testing agencyselected by DCC Representative. If results reveal thatequipment start-up was not in accordance with requirements,and resulted in damage to equipment, implement following:.1 Minor equipment/systems: implement corrective measuresapproved by DCC Representative..2 Major equipment/systems: if evaluation report concludesthat damage is minor, implement corrective measures approvedby DCC Representative..3 If evaluation report concludes that major damage hasoccurred, DCC Representative shall reject equipment.

.1 Rejected equipment to be remove from site andreplace with new..2 Subject new equipment/systems to specified start-upprocedures.

1.16 START-UP DOCUMENTATION

.1 Assemble start-up documentation and submit to DCCRepresentative for approval before commencement ofcommissioning.

.2 Start-up documentation to include:.1 Factory and on-site test certificates for specifiedequipment..2 Pre-start-up inspection reports..3 Signed installation/start-up check lists..4 Start-up reports,.5 Step-by-step description of complete start-upprocedures, to permit DCC Representative to repeat start-upat any time.

1.17 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS

.1 After start-up, operate and maintain equipment and systems asdirected by equipment/system manufacturer.



.2 With assistance of manufacturer develop written maintenanceprogram and submit DCC Representative for approval beforeimplementation.

.3 Operate and maintain systems for length of time required forcommissioning to be completed.

.4 After completion of commissioning, operate and maintainsystems until issuance of certificate of interim acceptance.

1.18 TEST RESULTS

.1 If start-up, testing and/or PV produce unacceptable results,repair, replace or repeat specified starting and/or PVprocedures until acceptable results are achieved.

.2 Provide manpower and materials, assume costs forre-commissioning.

1.19 START OF COMMISSIONING

.1 Notify DCC Representative at least 21 days prior to start ofCx.

.2 Start Cx after elements of building affecting start-up andperformance verification of systems have been completed.

1.20 INSTRUMENTS / EQUIPMENT

.1 Submit to DCC Representative for review and approval:.1 Complete list of instruments proposed to be used..2 Listed data including, serial number, currentcalibration certificate, calibration date, calibration expirydate and calibration accuracy.

.2 Provide the following equipment as required:.1 2-way radios..2 Ladders..3 Equipment as required to complete work.

1.21 COMMISSIONING PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION

.1 Carry out Cx:.1 Under actual operating conditions, over entire operatingrange, in all modes..2 On independent systems and interacting systems.



.2 Cx procedures to be repeatable and reported results are to beverifiable.

.3 Follow equipment manufacturer's operating instructions.

.4 EMCS trending to be available as supporting documentation forperformance verification.

1.22 WITNESSING COMMISSIONING

.1 DCC Representative to witness activities and verify results.

1.23 AUTHORITIES HAVING JURISDICTION

.1 Where specified start-up, testing or commissioning proceduresduplicate verification requirements of authority havingjurisdiction, arrange for authority to witness procedures soas to avoid duplication of tests and to facilitate expedientacceptance of facility.

.2 Obtain certificates of approval, acceptance and compliancewith rules and regulation of authority having jurisdiction.

.3 Provide copies to DCC Representative within 5 days of testand with Cx report.

1.24 COMMISSIONING CONSTRAINTS

.1 Since access into secure or sensitive areas will be verydifficult after occupancy it is necessary to complete Cx ofoccupancy, weather, and seasonal sensitive equipment andsystems in these areas before issuance of the InterimCertificate, using, if necessary, simulated thermal loads.

1.25 EXTRAPOLATION OF RESULTS

.1 Where Cx of weather, occupancy, or seasonal-sensitiveequipment or systems cannot be conducted under near-rated ornear-design conditions, extrapolate part-load results todesign conditions when approved by DCC Representative inaccordance with equipment manufacturer's instructions, usingmanufacturer's data, with manufacturer's assistance and usingapproved formulae.

1.26 EXTENT OF VERIFICATION

.1 Laboratory areas:



.1 Provide manpower and instrumentation to verify up to 100% of reported results.

.2 Elsewhere:.1 Provide manpower and instrumentation to verify up to 30% of reported results, unless specified otherwise in othersections.

.3 Number and location to be at discretion of DCCRepresentative.

.4 Conduct tests repeated during verification under sameconditions as original tests, using same test equipment,instrumentation.

.5 Review and repeat commissioning of systems if inconsistenciesfound in more than 20% of reported results.

.6 Perform additional commissioning until results are acceptableto DCC Representative.

1.27 REPEAT VERIFICATIONS

.1 Assume costs incurred by DCC Representative for third andsubsequent verifications where:.1 Verification of reported results fail to receive DCCRepresentative's approval..2 Repetition of second verification again fails to receiveapproval..3 DCC Representative deems Contractor's request for secondverification was premature.

1.28 SUNDRY CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS

.1 Make adjustments and changes which become apparent as Cxproceeds.

.2 Perform static and operational checks as applicable and asrequired.

1.29 DEFICIENCIES, FAULTS, DEFECTS

.1 Correct deficiencies found during start-up and Cx tosatisfaction of DCC Representative.

.2 Report problems, faults or defects affecting Cx to DCCRepresentative in writing. Stop Cx until problems arerectified. Proceed with written approval from DCCRepresentative.



1.30 COMPLETION OF COMMISSIONING

.1 Upon completion of Cx leave systems in normal operating mode.

.2 Except for warranty and seasonal verification activitiesspecified in Cx specifications, complete Cx prior to issuanceof Interim Certificate of Completion.

.3 Cx to be considered complete when contract Cx deliverableshave been submitted and accepted by DCC Representative.

1.31 ACTIVITIES UPON COMPLETION OF COMMISSIONING

.1 When changes are made to baseline components or systemsettings established during Cx process, provide updated Cxform for affected item.

1.32 TRAINING

.1 In accordance with Section 01 91 41 - Commissioning (Cx) -Training.

1.33 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS, SPARE PARTS, SPECIAL TOOLS

.1 Supply, deliver, and document maintenance materials, spareparts, and special tools as specified in contract.

1.34 OCCUPANCY

.1 Cooperate fully with DCC Representative during stages ofacceptance and occupancy of facility.

1.35 INSTALLED INSTRUMENTATION

.1 Use instruments installed under Contract for TAB and PV if:.1 Accuracy complies with these specifications..2 Calibration certificates have been deposited with DCCRepresentative.

.2 Calibrated EMCS sensors may be used to obtain performancedata provided that sensor calibration has been completed andaccepted.

1.36 PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION TOLERANCES

.1 Application tolerances:



.1 Specified range of acceptable deviations of measuredvalues from specified values or specified design criteria.Except for special areas, to be within +/- 10% of specifiedvalues.

.2 Instrument accuracy tolerances:.1 To be of higher order of magnitude than equipment orsystem being tested.

.3 Measurement tolerances during verification:.1 Unless otherwise specified actual values to be within+/- 2 % of recorded values.

1.37 OWNER'S PERFORMANCE TESTING

.1 Performance testing of equipment or system by DCCRepresentative will not relieve Contractor from compliancewith specified start-up and testing procedures.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Commissioning (Cx) Plan Page 1Storage FacilityGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

.1 Section Includes:.1 Description of overall structure of Cx Plan and rolesand responsibilities of Cx team.

.2 Related Sections:.1 Section 01 32 16.07 - Construction Progress Schedule -Bar (GANTT) Chart..2 Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.3 Section 01 91 13 - General Commissioning (Cx)Requirements.4 Section 01 91 33 - Commissioning Forms.5 Section 01 91 41 - Commissioning - Training.6 Section 01 91 51 - Building Management Manual (BMM)

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 American Water Works Association (AWWA)

.2 National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).1 NFPA-13-16, Installation of Sprinkler Systems Handbook..2 NFPA-14-16, Automatic Sprinkler Systems Handbook..3 NFPA-20-16, Standard for the Installation of StationaryFire Pumps for Fire Protection.

.3 ASHRAE Guideline 0-2005 - The Commissioning Process

.4 ASHRAE Guideline 4-2008 - Preparation of Operating andMaintenance Documentation for Building Systems

.5 ASHRAE Std 202-2013 - Commissioning Process for Buildings andSystems

.6 NIBS Guideline 3-2012 - Building Enclosure CommissioningProcess BECx

.7 CSA Z320-11 - Building Commissioning Standard & Check Sheets

.8 CSA Z318.0-05 - Commissioning of Health Care Facilities

.9 CSA Z8001-13 - Commissioning of Health Care Facilities (CheckSheets)

.10 NFPA 3-2012 - Recommended Practice for Commissioning of FireProtection and Life Safety Systems

.11 Underwriters' Laboratories of Canada (ULC)



1.3 GENERAL

.1 Contractor and Sub-contractors to cooperate fully with CxAuthority in execution of commissioning plan to provide afully functional facility:.1 Systems, equipment and components meet user's functionalrequirements before date of acceptance, and operateconsistently at peak efficiencies and within specified energybudgets under normal loads..2 Facility user and O&M personnel have been fully trainedin aspects of installed systems..3 Optimized life cycle costs..4 Complete documentation relating to installed equipmentand systems.

.2 Term "Cx" in this section means "Commissioning".

.3 Use Cx Plan as master planning document for Cx:.1 Outlines organization, scheduling, allocation ofresources, documentation, pertaining to implementation of Cx..2 Communicates responsibilities of team members involvedin Cx Scheduling, documentation requirements, andverification procedures..3 Sets out deliverables relating to O&M, process andadministration of Cx..4 Describes process of verification of how built worksmeet design requirements..5 Produces a complete functional system prior to issuanceof Certificate of Occupancy..6 Management tool that sets out scope, standards, rolesand responsibilities, expectations, deliverables, andprovides:

.1 Overview of Cx.

.2 General description of elements that make up CxPlan..3 Process and methodology for successful Cx.

.4 Acronyms:.1 Cx - Commissioning..2 BMM - Building Management Manual..3 EMCS - Energy Monitoring and Control Systems..4 MSDS - Material Safety Data Sheets..5 PI - Product Information..6 PV - Performance Verification..7 TAB - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing..8 WHMIS - Workplace Hazardous Materials InformationSystem..9 CxA - Commissioning Authority/Agent.

.5 Commissioning terms used in this Section:.1 Bumping: short term start-up to prove ability to startand prove correct rotation.



.2 Deferred Cx - Cx activities delayed for reasons beyondContractor's control due to lack of occupancy, weatherconditions, need for heating/cooling loads.

1.4 DEVELOPMENT OF 100% CX PLAN

.1 Template Cx Plan detailing minimum requirements for Cx Planprovided in project specification Appendices.

.2 Review and request any modifications to the Template Cx Planwithin 4 weeks of award of contract to Cx Authority for DNDCx supervisor review and approval.

.3 Cx Authority shall modify Template Cx Plan to suit projectrequirements and 100% Cx Plan shall be completed within 10weeks of award of contract taking into account:.1 Approved shop drawings and product data..2 Approved modifications to Template Cx Plan..3 Approved changes to contract..4 Contractor's project schedule..5 Cx schedule..6 Contractor's, sub-contractor's, suppliers' requirements..7 Project construction team's and Cx team's requirements.

.4 Submit completed Cx Plan to DND Cx Supervisor, DND Cx Team,Base Representatives, DCC Representative and Consultant andobtain written approval.

.5 The 100% Cx Plan is to be included as part of the contract.

1.5 REFINEMENT OF CX PLAN

.1 During construction phase, Cx Authority shall revise, refineand update Cx Plan to include:.1 Changes resulting from Client program modifications..2 Approved design and construction changes.

.2 Cx Authority shall revise, refine and update every 6 weeksduring construction phase. At each revision, indicaterevision number and date.

.3 Cx Authority shall submit each revised Cx Plan to DND CxSupervisor, DND Cx Team, DCC Representative and Consultantfor review and obtain written approval.

.4 Include testing parameters at full range of operatingconditions and check responses of equipment and systems.



.5 All Cx documents will be placed into the Cx plan and at theend of the project the updated Cx plan will be submitted asthe final Cx report. This will be reviewed by theConsultant, DND, Base Representatives and DCC Representativebefore the commissioning is accepted.

1.6 ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF CX TEAM

.1 Refer to 01 91 13 - General Commissioning (Cx) Requirementsand Template Cx Plan in specification Appendices.

1.7 CX PARTICIPANTS

.1 Refer to Section 01 91 13 - General Commissioning (Cx)Requirements and Template Cx Plan in project specificationAppendices.

1.8 EXTENT OF CX

.1 Cx Structural and Architectural Systems:.1 Architectural and structural:

.1 Beam and slab deflection

.2 Exterior systems.

.3 Raised floor systems.

.4 Accessibility and operational safety.

.5 Vertical transportation systems:.1 Passenger elevators..2 Freight elevators.

.6 Equipment:.1 Dock levellers..2 Kitchen equipment installed under contract..3 Hospital Laboratory equipment installed undercontract.

.7 Doors, windows, related hardware:.1 Special doors in laboratories as identifiedherein:.2 New door and window hardware.

.2 Commission mechanical systems and associated equipment:.1 Plumbing systems:

.1 Domestic CWS and HWS.

.2 Regular sanitary waste systems.

.3 Sewage pumps.

.4 Laboratory waste systems and waste treatmentsystems..5 Storm water systems..6 Sump pumps..7 Laboratory services..8 Pneumatic tube conveying systems.



.2 HVAC and exhaust systems:.1 HVAC systems..2 General exhaust systems..3 Exhaust systems and related systems..4 Laboratory fume hoods and related systems..5 Heat recovery systems..6 Smoke control systems installed is contract..7 Stair shaft pressurization systems..8 Dynamic Barrier Zone (DBZ).

.3 Fire and life safety systems:.1 Special fire suppression systems identified herein:.2 Fire pumps, including transfer switches andcontrollers..3 Wet pipe sprinkler systems..4 Dry pipe sprinkler systems..5 Standpipe and hose systems..6 Total flooding fire extinguishing systems..7 Fire extinguishers.

.4 Noise and vibration control systems for mechanicalsystems..5 Seismic restraint and control measures..6 IAQ environmental control systems:

.1 Indoor conditions.

.2 Indoor air quality (IAQ).

.3 Environmental control systems..7 EMCS Systems..8 Energy metering systems.

.3 Commission electrical systems and equipment:.1 High voltage:

.1 High voltage switch gear and transformationequipment..2 High voltage distribution systems.

.2 Low voltage below 750 V:.1 Low voltage equipment..2 Low voltage distribution systems..3 Central clock systems..4 Voice communications systems..5 Audio/visual systems to following areas:.6 Electronic data and communications informationsystems..7 Simultaneous translation systems..8 MP's call systems..9 Messenger call systems..10 Division bells systems.

.3 Emergency power generation systems:.1 Generators..2 Fuel systems..3 Transfer switchgear and controllers..4 Uninterruptible power systems.

.4 Lighting systems:.1 Lighting equipment.



.2 Distribution systems.

.3 Emergency lighting systems, including batterypacks..4 Fire exit emergency signage.

.5 Fire alarm systems, equipment:.1 Annunciators..2 Control panels..3 Fire alarm battery banks.

.6 Other systems and equipment:.1 Intrusion and access security and safety systems..2 Lightning protection systems..3 Watchman's tour system.

1.9 DELIVERABLES RELATING TO O&M PERSPECTIVES

.1 General requirements:.1 Compile English documentation..2 Documentation to be computer-compatible format ready forinputting for data management.

.2 Provide deliverables:.1 Warranties..2 Project record documentation..3 Inventory of spare parts, special tools and maintenancematerials..4 Maintenance Management System (MMS) identificationsystem used..5 WHMIS information..6 MSDS data sheets..7 Electrical Panel inventory containing detailed inventoryof electrical circuitry for each panel board. Duplicate ofinventory inside each panel.

1.10 DELIVERABLES RELATING TO THE CX PROCESS

.1 General:.1 Start-up, testing and Cx requirements, conditions foracceptance and specifications form part of relevant technicalsections of these specifications.

.2 Definitions:.1 Cx as used in this section includes:

.1 Cx of components, equipment, systems, subsystems,and integrated systems..2 Factory inspections and performance verificationtests.

.3 Deliverables: provide:.1 Startup, pre-Cx activities and documentation forsystems, and equipment.



.2 Completed installation checklists (ICL).

.3 Completed product information (PI) report forms.

.4 Completed performance verification (PV) report forms.

.5 Results of Performance Verification Tests andInspections..6 Description of Cx activities and documentation..7 Description of Cx of integrated systems anddocumentation..8 Tests performed by Owner/User..9 Training Plans..10 Cx Reports..11 Prescribed activities during warranty period.

.4 Cx Authority/Agent to witness and certify tests and reportsof results provided to DCC Representative, DND Cx Team andConsultant.

1.11 PRE-CX, START-UP AND CX ACTIVITIES AND RELATED DOCUMENTATION

.1 Activities, submittals, reports, preparation, procedures andother responsibilities shall be listed in the 100% Cx Planmodified by Cx Authority and approved by DND Cx supervisorfrom the Template Commissioning Plan of the projectspecification Appendices.

1.12 INSTALLATION CHECK LISTS (ICL)

.1 Refer to Section 01 91 33 - Commissioning (Cx) Forms.

1.13 PRODUCT INFORMATION (PI) REPORT FORMS

.1 Refer to Section 01 91 33 - Commissioning (Cx) Forms.

1.14 PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION (PV) REPORT

.1 Refer to Section 01 91 33 - Commissioning (Cx) Forms:

1.15 DELIVERABLES RELATING TO ADMINISTRATION OF CX

.1 General:.1 Because of risk assessment, complete Cx of occupancy,weather and seasonal-sensitive equipment and systems in theseareas before building is occupied.



1.16 CX SCHEDULES

.1 Prepare detailed Cx Schedule as part of the constructionschedule in accordance with Section 01 32 16.07 -Construction Progress Schedule - Bar (GANTT) Chart.Contractor to submit to DCC Representative and Cx Authorityfor review and approval. Include:.1 Milestones, testing, documentation, training and Cxactivities of components, equipment, subsystems, systems andintegrated systems, including:

.1 Design criteria, design intents.

.2 Pre-TAB review: 28 days after contract award, andbefore construction starts..3 Cx Co-ordinators' credentials: 60 days before startof Cx..4 Cx procedures: 3 months after award of contract..5 Cx Report format: 3months after contract award..6 Discussion of heating/cooling loads for Cx: 3months before start-up..7 Submission of list of instrumentation with relevantcertificates: 21 days before start of Cx..8 Notification of intention to start TAB: 21 daysbefore start of TAB..9 TAB: after successful start-up, correction ofdeficiencies and verification of normal and safeoperation..10 Notification of intention to start Cx: 14 daysbefore start of Cx..11 Notification of intention to start Cx of integratedsystems: after Cx of related systems is completed 14daysbefore start of integrated system Cx..12 Identification of deferred Cx..13 Implementation of training plans..14 Cx of smoke management/control systems: after Cx ofrelated systems is completed and 7 days before proposeddate of Cx these systems..15 Cx stair shaft pressurization systems: beforeissuance of occupancy certificate at same time asemergency evacuation exercises..16 Cx reports: immediately upon successful completionof Cx..17 Emergency evacuation exercises: after 80% occupancyand at same time as Cx of stair shaft pressurizationsystems.

.2 Detailed training schedule to demonstrate no conflictswith testing, completion of project and hand-over to DNDProject Manager and DCC Representative..3 6 months in Cx schedule for verification of performancein all seasons and wear conditions..4 As specified in Section 01 91 13 - GeneralCommissioning(Cx) Requirements.



.2 After approval, incorporate Cx Schedule into ConstructionSchedule.

.3 Consultant, Contractor, Cx Authority, and DCC Representativewill review and monitor progress of Cx against this schedule.

1.17 CX REPORTS

.1 Submit reports of tests, witnessed and certified by CxAuthority to DND Cx Team, DCC Representative and Consultantwho will verify reported results.

.2 Include completed and certified PV reports in properlyformatted Cx Reports.

.3 Before reports are accepted, reported results to be subjectto verification Cx Authority.

1.18 ACTIVITIES DURING WARRANTY PERIOD

.1 Cx activities must be completed before issuance of InterimCertificate, it is anticipated that certain Cx activities maybe necessary during Warranty Period, including:.1 Fine tuning of HVAC systems..2 Adjustment of ventilation rates to promote good indoorair quality and reduce deleterious effects of VOCs generatedby off-gassing from construction materials and furnishings..3 Full-scale emergency evacuation exercises.

1.19 TRAINING

.1 Refer to Section 01 91 41 - Commissioning (Cx) - Training andSection 01 91 13 - General Commissioning (Cx) Requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Commissioning Forms Page 1Storage FacilityGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

.1 Section Includes:.1 Commissioning forms to be completed for equipment,system and integrated system.

.2 Related Sections:.1 Section 01 32 16.07 - Construction Progress Schedule -Bar (GANTT) Chart..2 Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures..3 Section 01 91 13 - General Commissioning (Cx)Requirements..4 Section 01 91 31 - Commissioning (Cx) Plan..5 Section 01 91 41 - Commissioning - Training..6 Section 01 91 51 - Building Management Manual.

1.2 INSTALLATION/ START-UP CHECK LISTS

.1 Include the following data:.1 Product manufacturer's installation instructions andrecommended checks..2 Special procedures as specified in relevant technicalsections..3 Items considered good installation and engineeringindustry practices deemed appropriate for proper andefficient operation.

.2 Equipment manufacturer's installation/start-up check listsare acceptable for use. As deemed necessary by Cx Authority,DCC Representative and Consultant. Supplemental additionaldata lists will be required for specific project conditions.

.3 Use check lists for equipment installation. Document checklist verifying checks have been made, indicate deficienciesand corrective action taken.

.4 Installer to sign check lists upon completion, certifyingstated checks and inspections have been performed. Returncompleted check lists to Cx Authority. Check lists will berequired during Commissioning and will be included inBuilding Maintenance Manual (BMM) at completion of project.

.5 Use of check lists will not be considered part ofcommissioning process but will be stringently used forequipment pre-start and start-up procedures.



1.3 PRODUCT INFORMATION (PI) REPORT FORMS

.1 Product Information (PI) forms compiles gathered data onitems of equipment produced by equipment manufacturer,includes nameplate information, parts list, operatinginstructions, maintenance guidelines and pertinent technicaldata and recommended checks that is necessary to prepare forstart-up and functional testing and used during operation andmaintenance of equipment. This documentation is included inthe BMM at completion of work.

.2 Prior to Performance Verification (PV) of systems completeitems on PI forms related to systems and obtain DCCRepresentative's, Consultant's and DND Cx Team's approval.

1.4 PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION (PV) FORMS

.1 PV forms to be used for checks, running dynamic tests andadjustments carried out on equipment and systems to ensurecorrect operation, efficiently and function independently andinteractively with other systems as intended with projectrequirements.

.2 PV report forms include those developed by Contractor recordsmeasured data and readings taken during functional testingand Performance Verification procedures.

.3 Prior to PV of integrated system, complete PV forms ofrelated systems and obtain DCC Representative's, Consultant'sand DND Cx Team's approval.

1.5 SAMPLES OF COMMISSIONING FORMS

.1 Sample commissioning forms are provided with Template Cx Planin project specification Appendices. Cx Authority will revisecommissioning forms to suit project requirements and provideto Contractor required project-specific Commissioning formsin electronic format complete with specification data.

.2 Samples of Commissioning forms and a complete index ofproduced to date are provided with Template Cx Plan inproject specification Appendices.

1.6 CHANGES AND DEVELOPMENT OF NEW REPORT FORMS

.1 When additional forms are required, but are not availabledevelop appropriate verification forms and submit to DCCRepresentative, Consultant and DND Cx Team for approval priorto use.



.1 Additional commissioning forms to be in same format asprovided by Cx Authority.

1.7 COMMISSIONING FORMS

.1 Use Commissioning forms to verify installation and recordperformance when starting equipment and systems.

.2 Strategy for Use:.1 Cx Authority provides Contractor project-specificCommissioning forms with Specification data included..2 Contractor will provide required shop drawingsinformation and verify correct installation and operation ofitems indicated on these forms..3 Confirm operation as per design criteria and intent..4 Identify variances between design and operation andreasons for variances..5 Verify operation in specified normal and emergency modesand under specified load conditions..6 Record analytical and substantiating data..7 Verify reported results..8 Form to bear signatures of recording technician andreviewed and signed off by relevant Cx Team members and Cxparticipants..9 Submit immediately after tests are performed..10 Reported results in true measured SI unit values..11 Provide Cx Authority with originals of completed forms..12 Maintain copy on site during start-up, testing andcommissioning period..13 Forms to be both hard copy and electronic format withtyped written results in Building Management Manual inaccordance with Section 01 91 51 - Building Management Manual(BMM).

1.8 LANGUAGE

.1 To suit the language profile of the awarded contract.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Commissioning: Training Page 1Storage FacilityGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

.1 Section Includes:.1 This Section specifies roles and responsibilities ofCommissioning Training.

.2 Related Sections:.1 Section 01 32 16.07 - Construction Progress Schedule -Bar (GANTT) Chart..2 Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures..3 Section 01 91 13 - General Commissioning (Cx)Requirements..4 Section 01 91 31 - Commissioning (Cx) Plan..5 Section 01 91 33 - Commissioning Forms..6 Section 01 91 51 - Building Management Manual (BMM).

1.2 GENERAL

.1 Refer to Section 01 91 13 - General Commissioning (Cx)Requirements and Template Cx Plan in specification Appendicesfor additional training requirements.

1.3 TRAINEES

.1 Trainees: personnel selected for operating and maintainingthis facility. Includes Facility Manager, building operators,maintenance staff, security staff, and technical specialistsas required.

.2 Trainees will be available for training during later stagesof construction for purposes of familiarization with systems.

1.4 INSTRUCTORS

.1 DCC Representative and Consultant will provide:.1 Descriptions of systems..2 Instruction on design philosophy, design criteria, anddesign intent.

.2 Contractor and certified factory-trained manufacturers'personnel: to provide instruction on the following:.1 Start-Up, operation, shut-down of equipment, componentsand systems..2 Control features, reasons for, results of, implicationson associated systems of, adjustment of set points of controland safety devices.



.3 Instructions on servicing, maintenance and adjustment ofsystems, equipment and components.

.3 Contractor and equipment manufacturer to provide instructionon:.1 Start-up, operation, maintenance and shut-down ofequipment they have certified installation, started up andcarried out PV tests.

.4 Cx Authority shall have the right to approve instructorsbased on their qualifications.

1.5 TRAINING OBJECTIVES

.1 Training to be detailed and duration to ensure:.1 Safe, reliable, cost-effective, energy-efficientoperation of systems in normal and emergency modes under allconditions..2 Effective on-going inspection, measurements of systemperformance..3 Proper preventive maintenance, diagnosis andtrouble-shooting..4 Ability to update documentation..5 Ability to operate equipment and systems under emergencyconditions until appropriate qualified assistance arrives.

1.6 TRAINING MATERIALS

.1 Instructors to be responsible for content and quality.

.2 Training materials to include:.1 "As-Built" Contract Documents..2 Operating Manual..3 Maintenance Manual..4 Management Manual..5 TAB and PV Reports.

.3 DND Project Manager, DND Cx Team, Consultant, Cx Authorityand Facility Manager will review training manuals.

.4 Training materials to be in a format that permits futuretraining procedures to same degree of detail.

.5 Supplement training materials:.1 Transparencies for overhead projectors..2 Multimedia presentations..3 Manufacturer's training videos..4 Equipment models.



1.7 SCHEDULING

.1 Include in Commissioning Schedule time for training.

.2 Deliver training during regular working hours.

.3 Training to be completed prior to acceptance of facility.

1.8 RESPONSIBILITIES

.1 Be responsible for:.1 Implementation of training activities,.2 Coordination among instructors,.3 Quality of training, training materials,

.2 Cx Authority, DND Cx Team and Consultant will evaluatetraining and materials.

.3 Upon completion of training, provide written report, signedby Instructors, witnessed by Cx Authority.

1.9 TRAINING CONTENT

.1 Training to include demonstrations by Instructors using theinstalled equipment and systems.

.2 Content includes:.1 Review of facility and occupancy profile..2 Functional requirements..3 System philosophy, limitations of systems and emergencyprocedures..4 Review of system layout, equipment, components andcontrols..5 Equipment and system start-up, operation, monitoring,servicing, maintenance and shut-down procedures..6 System operating sequences, including step-by-stepdirections for starting up, shut-down, operation of valves,dampers, switches, adjustment of control settings andemergency procedures..7 Maintenance and servicing..8 Trouble-shooting diagnosis..9 Inter-Action among systems during integrated operation..10 Review of O&M documentation.

.3 Provide specialized training as specified in relevantTechnical Sections of the construction specifications.



1.10 VIDEO-BASED TRAINING

.1 Manufacturer's videotapes to be used as training tool with CxAuthority's, DND Cx Team's and Consultant's review andwritten approval 3 months prior to commencement of scheduledtraining.

.2 On-Site training videos:.1 Videotape training sessions for use during futuretraining..2 To be performed after systems are fully commissioned..3 Organize into several short modules to permitincorporation of changes.

.3 Production methods to be professional quality.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Building Management Manual Page 1Storage Facility (BMM)Garrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

.1 Section Includes:.1 This section is limited to portions of the BuildingManagement Manual (BMM) provided to Cx Authority byContractor.

.2 Related Sections:.1 Section 01 32 16.07 - Construction Progress Schedule -Bar (GANTT) Chart..2 Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures..3 Section 01 91 13 - General Commissioning (Cx)Requirements..4 Section 01 91 31 - Commissioning (Cx) Plan..5 Section 01 91 41 - Commissioning - Training..6 Section 01 91 51 - Building Management Manual (BMM).

.3 Acronyms:.1 BMM - Building Management Manual..2 Cx - Commissioning..3 HVAC - Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning..4 PI - Product Information..5 PV - Performance Verification..6 TAB - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing..7 WHMIS - Workplace Hazardous Materials InformationSystem.


.1 Standard letter size paper 216 mm x 279 mm.

.2 Methodology used to facilitate updating.

.3 Drawings, diagrams and schematics to be professionallydeveloped.

.4 Electronic copy of data to be in a format accepted andapproved by Cx Authority, DND Cx Team and Consultant.

1.3 APPROVALS

.1 Prior to commencement, co-ordinate requirements forpreparation, submission and approval with Cx Authority.



1.4 GENERAL INFORMATION

.1 Provide Cx Authority the following for insertion intoappropriate Part and Section of BMM:.1 Complete list of names, addresses, telephone and faxnumbers of contractor, sub-contractors that participated indelivery of project - as indicated in Section 1.2 of BMM..2 Summary of architectural, structural, fire protection,mechanical and electrical systems installed and commissioned- as indicated in Section 1.4 of BMM.

.1 Including sequence of operation as finalized aftercommissioning is complete as indicated in Section 2.0 ofBMM.

.3 Description of building operation under conditions ofheightened security and emergencies as indicated in Section2.0 of BMM..4 System, equipment and components Maintenance ManagementSystem (MMS) identification - Section 2.1 of BMM...5 Information on operation and maintenance ofarchitectural systems and equipment installed andcommissioned - Section 2.0 of BMM..6 Information on operation and maintenance of fireprotection and life safety systems and equipment installedand commissioned - Section 2.0 of BMM..7 Information on operation and maintenance of mechanicalsystems and equipment installed and commissioned - Section2.0 of BMM..8 Operating and maintenance manual - Section 3.2 of BMM..9 Final commissioning plan as actually implemented..10 Completed commissioning checklists..11 Commissioning test procedures employed..12 Completed and approved Product Information (PI) andPerformance Verification (PV) report forms..13 Commissioning reports.

1.5 CONTENTS OF OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

.1 For detailed requirements refer to Section 01 78 00 -Closeout Submittals.

.2 Cx Authority, DND Cx Team and Consultant to review andapprove format and organization within 12 weeks of award ofcontract.

.3 Include original manufactures brochures and writteninformation on products and equipment installed on thisproject.

.4 Record and organize for easy access and retrieval ofinformation contained in BMM.



.5 Include completed PI report forms, data and information fromother sources as required.

.6 Inventory directory relating to information on installedsystems, equipment and components.

.7 Approved project shop-drawings, product and maintenance data.

.8 Manufacturer's data and recommendations relating:manufacturing process, installation, commissioning, start-up,O&M, shutdown and training materials.

.9 Inventory and location of spare parts, special tools andmaintenance materials.

.10 Warranty information.

.11 Inspection certificates with expiration dates, which requireon-going re-certification inspections.

.12 Maintenance program supporting information including:.1 Recommended maintenance procedures and schedule..2 Information to removal and replacement of equipmentincluding, required equipment, points of lift and means ofentry and egress.

1.6 SUPPORTING DOCUMENTATION FOR INSERTION INTO SUPPORTINGAPPENDICES

.1 Provide Cx Authority supporting documentation relating toinstalled equipment and system, including:.1 General:

.1 Finalized commissioning plan.

.2 WHMIS information manual.

.3 Approved "as-built" drawings and specifications.

.4 Procedures used during commissioning.

.5 Cross-Reference to specification sections..2 Architectural and structural:

.1 Inspection certificates, construction permits.

.2 Roof anchor log books.

.3 PV reports..3 Fire prevention, suppression and protection:

.1 Test reports.

.2 Smoke test reports.

.3 PV reports..4 Mechanical:

.1 Installation permits, inspection certificates.

.2 Piping pressure test certificates.

.3 Ducting leakage test reports.

.4 TAB and PV reports.

.5 Charts of valves and steam traps.



.6 Copies of posted instructions..5 Electrical:

.1 Installation permits, inspection certificates.

.2 TAB and PV reports.

.3 Electrical work log book.

.4 Charts and schedules.

.5 Locations of cables and components.

.6 Copies of posted instructions.

.2 Assist Cx Authority with preparation of BMM.

1.7 IDENTIFICATION OF FACILITY

.1 When submitting information to Cx Authority for incorporationinto BMM, use following system for identification ofdocumentation reviewed and approved by Cx Authority, DND CxTeam, and Consultant.

1.8 USE OF CURRENT TECHNOLOGY

.1 Use current technology for production of documentation.Emphasis on ease of accessibility at all times, maintain inup-to-date state, compatibility with user's requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Selective Site Demolition Page 1Storage FacilityGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 Methods and procedures for demolishing, salvaging, recyclingand removing sitework items designated to be removed in wholeor in part, and for backfilling resulting trenches andexcavations.



1.3 REFERENCES

.1 Definitions:.1 Demolition: rapid destruction of structure followingremoval of hazardous materials..2 Hazardous Materials: dangerous substances, dangerousgoods, hazardous commodities and hazardous products, mayinclude but not limited to: asbestos PCB's, CFC's, HCFC'spoisons, corrosive agents, flammable substances, ammunition,explosives, radioactive substances, or other material thatcan endanger human health or well being or environment ifhandled improperly..3 Waste Audit (WA): detailed inventory of materials inbuilding. Indicates quantities of reuse, recycling andlandfill.

.1 Involves quantifying by volume/weight amounts ofmaterials and wastes generated during construction,demolition, deconstruction, or renovation project..2 Indicates quantities of reuse, recycling andlandfill.

.4 Waste Management Coordinator (WMC): contractorrepresentative responsible for supervising waste managementactivities as well as coordinating related, requiredsubmittal and reporting requirements..5 Waste Reduction Workplan (WRW): written report whichaddresses opportunities for reduction, reuse, or recycling ofmaterials. WRW is based on information acquired from WA.

.2 Reference Standards:.1 Canadian Council of Ministers of the Environment (CCME)

.1 PN1326, Environmental Code of Practice forAboveground and Underground Storage Tank SystemsContaining Petroleum and Allied Petroleum Products.

.2 Health Canada/Workplace Hazardous Materials InformationSystem (WHMIS)

.1 Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).



.3 Transport Canada (TC).1 Transportation of Dangerous Goods Act, 1992 (TDGA),c. 34.

1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

.1 Site Meetings..1 Convene pre-demolition meeting one week prior tobeginning work of this Section in accordance with Section01 32 16.07 - Construction Progress Schedules - Bar (GANTT)Chart to:

.1 Verify project requirements.

.2 Review installation and substrate conditions.

.3 Co-ordination with other building subtrades.

.4 Review manufacturer's installation instructions andwarranty requirements.

.2 Arrange for site visit with DCC Representative toexamine existing site conditions adjacent to demolition work,prior to start of Work..3 Hold project meetings every week..4 Ensure key personnel attend..5 Reporting Requirements: WMC to complete..6 WMC must provide written report on status of wastediversion activity at each meeting..7 DCC Representative will provide written notification ofchange of meeting schedule established upon contract award 24hours prior to scheduled meeting.

.2 Scheduling: meet project time lines without compromisingspecified minimum rates of material diversion..1 Notify DCC Representative in writing when unforeseendelays occur.



.2 Shop Drawings:.1 Submit drawings stamped and signed by professionalengineer registered or licensed in Province of Ontario,Canada..2 Submit for approval drawings, diagrams or detailsshowing sequence of demolition work and supporting structuresand underpinning, where required by authorities havingjurisdiction.

.3 Hazardous Materials:



.1 Provide description of Hazardous Materials andNotification of Filing with proper authorities prior tobeginning of Work as required.

.4 Waste Reduction Workplan:.1 Prior to beginning of Work on site submit detailed WasteReduction Workplan in accordance with Section 01 74 21 -Construction/Demolition Waste Management And Disposal andindicate:

.1 Descriptions of and anticipated quantities inpercentages of materials to be salvaged reused, recycledand landfilled..2 Schedule of selective demolition..3 Number and location of dumpsters..4 Anticipated frequency of tippage..5 Name and address of haulers and waste facilities.

.5 Certificates:.1 Submit copies of certified weigh bills or bills oflading or receipts from authorized disposal sites and reuseand recycling facilities for material removed from site onweekly basis upon request of DCC Representative..2 Written authorization from DCC Representative isrequired to deviate from haulers and facilities listed inWaste Reduction Workplan.

.6 Design Submittals:.1 Construction Waste Management:

.1 Submit project Waste Management Plan and WasteReduction Workplan highlighting recycling and salvagerequirements..2 Submit calculations on end-of-project recyclingrates, salvage rates, and landfill rates demonstratingthat 75% of construction wastes were recycled orsalvaged.

.2 Erosion and Sedimentation Control: submit copy oferosion and sedimentation control plan in accordance withauthorities having jurisdiction.


.1 Regulatory Requirements: ensure Work is performed incompliance with CEPA, CEAA, TDGA, and applicable Provincialregulations.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

.1 Store and manage hazardous materials in accordance withSection 01 35 43 - Environmental Procedures..



.2 Storage and Protection..1 Protect in accordance with Section 31 23 33.01 -Excavating, Trenching and Backfilling..2 Protect existing items designated to remain and itemsdesignated for salvage. In event of damage to such items,immediately replace or make repairs to approval of DCCRepresentative and at no cost to DCC Representative..3 Remove and store materials to be salvaged, in manner toprevent damage..4 Store and protect in accordance with requirements formaximum preservation of material..5 Handle salvaged materials as new materials.

.3 Develop Construction Waste Management Plan Waste ReductionWorkplan related to Work of this Section.

.4 Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return bymanufacturer of pallets, crates, padding, and packagingmaterials as specified in Construction Waste Management Planand Waste Reduction Workplan in accordance with Section01 74 21 - Construction/Demolition Waste Management andDisposal.

1.8 SITE CONDITIONS

.1 Site Environmental Requirements..1 Perform work in accordance with Section 01 35 43 -Environmental Procedures..2 Ensure that selective demolition work does not adverselyaffect adjacent watercourses, groundwater and wildlife, orcontribute to excess air and noise pollution..3 Do not dispose of waste of volatile materials includingbut not limited to, mineral spirits, oil, petroleum basedlubricants, or toxic cleaning solutions into watercourses,storm or sanitary sewers.

.1 Ensure proper disposal procedures are maintainedthroughout the project.

.4 Do not pump water containing suspended materials intowatercourses, storm or sanitary sewers or onto adjacentproperties..5 Control disposal or runoff of water containing suspendedmaterials or other harmful substances in accordance withlocal authorities or as directed by DCC Representative..6 Protect trees, plants and foliage on site and adjacentproperties where indicated.

.2 Existing Conditions.



.1 Remove contaminated or hazardous materials as defined byauthorities having jurisdiction as directed by DCCRepresentative from site, prior to start of demolition Work,and dispose of at designated disposal facilities in safemanner in accordance with TDGA and other applicableregulatory requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT

.1 Leave machinery running only while in use, except whereextreme temperatures prohibit shutting machinery down.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

.1 Inspect site with DCC Representative and verify extent andlocation of items designated for removal, disposal,alternative disposal, recycling, salvage and items to remain.

.2 Locate and protect utilities. Preserve active utilitiestraversing site in operating condition.

.3 Notify and obtain approval of utility companies beforestarting demolition.

.4 Disconnect and Cap Designated Mechanical Services..1 Natural Gas Supply Lines: Contact utility company toarrange for removal as directed by DCC Representative..2 Sewer and Water Lines: remove to limit as indicated byDCC Representative and securely plug to form watertight seal..3 Other Underground Services: remove and dispose of asindicated or as directed by DCC Representative..4 Underground Storage Tanks: remove and dispose of inaccordance with CCME PN1326 and directions of DCCRepresentative.

3.2 REMOVAL OF HAZARDOUS WASTES

.1 Remove contaminated or dangerous materials defined byauthorities having jurisdiction, relating to environmentalprotection, from site and dispose of in safe manner tominimize danger at site or during disposal.



3.3 REMOVAL OPERATIONS

.1 Remove items as indicated.

.2 Do not disturb items designated to remain in place.

.3 Removal of pavements, curbs and gutters:.1 Square up adjacent surfaces to remain in place by sawcutting or other method approved by DCC Representative..2 Protect adjacent joints and load transfer devices..3 Protect underlying and adjacent granular materials.

.4 Prevent contamination with base course aggregates, whenremoving asphalt pavement for subsequent incorporation intohot mix asphalt concrete paving,

.5 Excavate at least 300 mm below pipe invert, when removingpipes under existing or future pavement area.

.6 Decommission water wells and monitoring wells in accordancewith Provincial regulations.

.7 Remove designated trees during demolition..1 Obtain written approval of DCC Representative prior toremoval of trees not designated.

.8 Sell trees designated for removal and identified by DCCRepresentative to be marketable..1 Grind, chip, or shred other vegetation for mulching andcomposting, or use as mill pulp or process fuel.

.9 Stockpile topsoil for final grading and landscaping:.1 Provide erosion control and seeding if not immediatelyused.

.10 Salvage:.1 Items to be salvaged: TBD..2 Dismantle items containing materials for salvage andstockpile salvaged materials at locations approved by DCCRepresentative.

.11 Disposal of Material:.1 Dispose of materials not designated for salvage or reuseon site as instructed by DCC Representative at authorizedfacilities approved in Waste Reduction Workplan..2 Trim disposal areas to approval of DCC Representative.

.12 Backfill:.1 Backfill in areas as indicated and in accordance withSection 31 23 33.01 - Excavating, Trenching and Backfilling.



3.4 STOCKPILING

.1 Label stockpiles, indicating material type and quantity.

.2 Designate appropriate security resources/measures to preventvandalism, damage and theft.

.3 Locate stockpiled materials convenient for use in newconstruction to eliminate double handling wherever possible.

.4 Stockpile materials designated for alternate disposal inlocation which facilitates removal from site and examinationby potential end markets, and which does not impededisassembly, processing, or hauling procedures.

3.5 REMOVAL FROM SITE

.1 Remove stockpiled material as directed by DCC Representative,when it interferes with operations of project.

.2 Remove stockpiles of like materials by alternate disposaloption once collection of materials is complete.

.3 Transport material designated for alternate disposal usingapproved haulers and facilities listed in Waste ReductionWorkplan and in accordance with applicable regulations..1 Written authorization from DCC Representative isrequired to deviate from haulers and facilities listed inWaste Reduction Workplan.

.4 Dispose of materials not designated for alternate disposal inaccordance with applicable regulations..1 Disposal Facilities: approved and listed in WasteReduction Workplan..2 Written authorization from DCC Representative isrequired to deviate from disposal facilities listed in WasteReduction Workplan.

3.6 RESTORATION

.1 Restore areas and existing works outside areas of demolitionto conditions that existed prior to beginning of Work matchcondition of adjacent, undisturbed areas.

.2 Use soil treatments and procedures which are not harmful tohealth, are not injurious to plants, and do not endangerwildlife, adjacent water courses or ground water.



3.7 CLEANING

.1 Progress Cleaning: clean in accordance with Section 01 74 11- Cleaning..1 Leave Work area clean at end of each day..2 Remove debris, trim surfaces and leave work site clean,upon completion of Work.3 Use cleaning solutions and procedures which are notharmful to health, are not injurious to plants, and do notendanger wildlife, adjacent water courses or ground water.



3.8 PROTECTION

.1 Repair damage to adjacent materials or property caused byselective site demolition.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Concrete Forming and Page 1Storage Facility AccessoriesGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 Division 01 - General Requirements.

.2 Section 03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcing.

.3 Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.

.4 Section 07 92 00 - Sealants.

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 Canadian Standards Association (CSA International).1 CSA-A23.1-14/A23.2-14, Concrete Materials and Methods ofConcrete Construction/Methods of Test and Standard Practicesfor Concrete..2 CSA-O86-14, Engineering Design in Wood..3 CSA O121-08(R2013), Douglas Fir Plywood..4 CSA O151-09, Canadian Softwood Plywood..5 CSA O153-13, Poplar Plywood..6 CSA S269.1-1975(R2003), Falsework for ConstructionPurposes..7 CAN/CSA-S269.3-M92(R2013), Concrete Formwork.

.2 Council of Forest Industries of British Columbia (COFI).1 COFI Exterior Plywood for Concrete Formwork.

.3 Underwriters' Laboratories of Canada (ULC)..1 CAN/ULC-S701-11, Standard for Thermal Insulation,Polystyrene, Boards and Pipe Covering.



.2 Submit shop drawings for formwork and falsework stamped andsigned by professional engineer registered or licensed inProvince of Ontario, Canada if requested by DCCRepresentative.

.3 Submit WHMIS MSDS - Material Safety Data Sheets in accordancewith Section 01 35 43 - Environmental Procedures.

.4 Co-ordinate submittal requirements and provide submittalsrequired by related sections.



.5 Indicate method and schedule of construction, shoring,stripping and re-shoring procedures, materials, arrangementof joints, special architectural exposed finishes, ties,liners, and locations of temporary embedded parts. Complywith CSA S269.1, for falsework drawings Comply withCAN/CSA-S269.3 for formwork drawings.

.6 Indicate formwork design data: permissible rate of concreteplacement, and temperature of concrete, in forms.

.7 Indicate sequence of erection and removal offormwork/falsework as directed by DCC Representative.


.1 Store and manage hazardous materials in accordance withSection 01 35 43 - Environmental Procedures.

.2 Waste Management and Disposal:.1 Separate waste materials for reuse and recycling inaccordance with Section 01 74 21 - Construction/DemolitionWaste Management and Disposal..2 Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic indesignated containers..3 Divert wood materials from landfill to a recyclingfacility as approved by DCC Representative..4 Divert plastic materials from landfill to a recyclingfacility as approved by DCC Representative..5 Divert unused form release material from landfill to anofficial hazardous material collections site as approved byDCC Representative.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Formwork materials:.1 For concrete without special architectural features, usewood and wood product formwork materials to CSA-O121,CAN/CSA-O86 and CSA-A23.1/A23.2..2 Rigid insulation board: to CAN/ULC-S701.

.2 Form ties:.1 For concrete not designated 'Architectural', useremovable or snap-off metal ties, fixed or adjustable length,free of devices leaving holes larger than 25 mm diameter inconcrete surface.

.3 Form release agent: non-toxic biodegradable, low VOC.



.4 Form stripping agent: colourless mineral oil, non-toxic,biodegradable, low VOC, free of kerosene, with viscositybetween 15 to 24 mm2 /s at 40 degrees C, open cup.

.5 Falsework materials: to CSA-S269.1.

.6 Sealant: to Section 07 92 00 - Sealants.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FABRICATION AND ERECTION

.1 Verify lines, levels and column centres before proceedingwith formwork/falsework and ensure dimensions agree withdrawings.

.2 Obtain DCC Representative's approval for use of earth formsand framing openings not indicated on drawings.

.3 Hand trim sides and bottoms and remove loose earth from earthforms before placing concrete.

.4 Fabricate and erect falsework in accordance with CSA S269.1and COFI exterior plywood for concrete formwork.

.5 Refer to architectural drawings for concrete membersrequiring architectural exposed finishes.

.6 Do not place shores and mud sills on frozen ground.

.7 Provide site drainage to prevent washout of soil supportingmud sills and shores.

.8 Fabricate and erect formwork in accordance withCAN/CSA-S269.3 to produce finished concrete conforming toshape, dimensions, locations and levels indicated withintolerances required by CSA-A23.1/A23.2.

.9 Align form joints and make watertight..1 Keep form joints to minimum.

.10 Locate horizontal form joints for walls and pilasters belowtop of finished grade.

.11 Use 25 mm chamfer strips on external corners and 25 mmfillets at interior corners, joints, unless specifiedotherwise.



.12 Form chases, slots, openings, drips, recesses, expansion andcontrol joints as indicated.

.13 Build in anchors, sleeves, and other inserts required toaccommodate Work specified in other sections..1 Ensure that anchors and inserts will not protrude beyondsurfaces designated to receive applied finishes, includingpainting.

.14 Clean formwork in accordance with CSA A23.1/A23.2 beforeplacing concrete.

.15 During cold weather, remove ice and snow from within forms.Do not use de-icing salts. Do not use water to clean outcompleted forms, unless formwork and concrete constructionproceed within a heated enclosure.

3.2 REMOVAL AND RESHORING

.1 Leave formwork in place for following minimum periods of timeafter placing concrete..1 24 hours for footings and foundation walls.

.2 Remove formwork when concrete has reached 40% of its designstrength or minimum period noted above, whichever comeslater.

.3 Provide necessary reshoring of members where early removal offorms may be required or where members may be subjected toadditional loads during construction as required.

.4 Re-use formwork and falsework subject to requirements ofCSA-A23.1/A23.2.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Concrete Reinforcing Page 1Storage FacilityGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL



.2 Section 03 10 00 - Concrete Forming and Accessories.


1.2 REFERENCES

.1 CSA International.1 CSA-A23.1-14/A23.2-14, Concrete Materials and Methods ofConcrete Construction/Test Methods and Standard Practices forConcrete..2 CSA-A23.3-14, Design of Concrete Structures..3 CSA G30.3-M1983, Cold-Drawn Steel Wire for ConcreteReinforcement..4 CSA-G30.18-09, Carbon Steel Bars for ConcreteReinforcement..5 CSA-G40.20-13/G40.21-13, General Requirements for Rolledor Welded Structural Quality Steel/Structural Quality Steel..6 CAN/CSA-G164-M92(R2003), Hot Dip Galvanizing ofIrregularly Shaped Articles..7 CSA W186-M1990(R2012), Welding of Reinforcing Bars inReinforced Concrete Construction.

.2 Reinforcing Steel Institute of Canada (RSIC).1 RSIC-2004, Reinforcing Steel Manual of StandardPractice.



.2 Prepare reinforcement drawings in accordance with RSICReinforcing Steel Manual of Standard Practice. GeneralContractor to sign drawings indicating coordination withother trades.

.3 Shop Drawings:.1 Indicate placing of reinforcement and:

.1 Bar bending details.

.2 Lists.

.3 Quantities of reinforcement.



.4 Sizes, spacings, locations of reinforcement andmechanical splices if approved by DCC Representative,with identifying code marks to permit correct placementwithout reference to structural drawings..5 Indicate sizes, spacings and locations of chairs,spaces and hangers.

.2 Detail lap lengths and bar development lengths toCSA-A23.3, unless otherwise indicated.

.1 Provide type B tension lap splices, unlessotherwise indicated.


.1 Submit in accordance with Section 01 45 00 - Quality Controland as described in PART 2 - SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL..1 Mill Test Report: provide DCC Representative withcertified copy of mill test report of reinforcing steel,minimum 4 weeks prior to beginning reinforcing work..2 Submit in writing to DCC Representative proposed sourceof reinforcement material to be supplied.


.1 Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance withSection 01 61 00 - Common Product Requirements and withmanufacturer's written instruction.

.2 Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: deliver materials tosite in original factory packaging, labelled withmanufacturer's name and address.

.3 Storage and Handling Requirements:.1 Store materials off ground, in dry location and inaccordance with manufacturer's recommendations in clean, dry,well-ventilated area..2 Replace defective or damaged materials with new.

.4 Waste Management and Disposal: in accordance with Section 0174 21 - Construction/Demolition Waste Management andDisposal.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Substitute different size bars only if permitted in writingby DCC Representative.



.2 Reinforcing steel: billet steel, grade 400, deformed bars toCSA-G30.18, unless indicated otherwise.

.3 Cold-drawn annealed steel wire ties: to CSA G30.3.

.4 Chairs, bolsters, bar supports, spacers: to CSA-A23.1/A23.2,non staining and of adequate strength for support ofreinforcing during construction conditions.

.5 Mechanical splices: subject to approval of DCCRepresentative.

.6 Plain round bars: to CSA-G40.20/G40.21, Grade 260 W, orapproved alternative, unless indicated otherwise.

2.2 FABRICATION

.1 Fabricate reinforcing steel in accordance withCSA-A23.1/A23.2 and Reinforcing Steel Manual of StandardPractice by Reinforcing Steel Institute of Canada.

.2 Obtain DCC Representative's written approval for locations ofreinforcement splices other than those shown on placingdrawings.

.3 Upon approval of DCC Representative, weld reinforcement inaccordance with CSA-W186.

.4 Ship bundles of bar reinforcement, clearly identified inaccordance with bar bending details and lists.


.1 Upon request, provide DCC Representative with certified copyof mill test report of reinforcing steel, showing physicaland chemical analysis, minimum 4 weeks prior to commencingreinforcing work.

.2 Upon request inform DCC Representative of proposed source ofmaterial to be supplied.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

.1 Examine work related to this section and report discrepanciesto DCC Representative.



.2 Commencement of work shall imply acceptance of conditions.

3.2 FIELD BENDING

.1 Do not field bend or field weld reinforcement except whereindicated or authorized by DCC Representative.

.2 When field bending is authorized, bend without heat, applyinga slow and steady pressure.

.3 Replace bars, which develop cracks or splits.

3.3 PLACING REINFORCEMENT

.1 Place reinforcing steel as indicated on reviewed placingdrawings and in accordance with CSA-A23.1/A23.2.

.2 Use plain round bars as slip dowels in concrete..1 Paint portion of dowel intended to move within hardenedconcrete with one coat of asphalt paint..2 When paint is dry, apply a thick even film of minerallubricating grease.

.3 Prior to placing concrete, obtain DCC Representative'sapproval of reinforcing material and placement.

.4 Ensure cover to reinforcement is maintained during concretepour.

.5 Place chairs for support of reinforcing as required.

3.4 CLEANING


.2 Final Cleaning: upon completion remove surplus materials,rubbish, tools and equipment in accordance with Section 01 7411 - Cleaning.

.3 Waste Management: separate waste materials for reuse andrecycling in accordance with Section 01 74 21 -Construction/Demolition Waste Management.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Cast-in-Place Concrete Page 1Storage FacilityGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL



.2 Section 03 10 00 - Concrete Forming and Accessories.

.3 Section 03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcing.

.4 Section 07 21 13 - Board Insulation.


.6 All mechanical sections.

.7 All electrical sections.

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 Abbreviations and Acronyms:.1 Portland Cement: hydraulic cement, blended hydrauliccement (XXb - b denotes blended) and Portland-limestonecement.

.1 Type GU, GUb and GUL - General use cement.

.2 Type MS and MSb - Moderate sulphate-resistantcement..3 Type MH, MHb and MHL - Moderate heat of hydrationcement..4 Type HE, HEb and HEL - High early-strength cement..5 Type LH, LHb and LHL - Low heat of hydrationcement..6 Type HS and HSb - High sulphate-resistant cement.

.2 Fly ash:.1 Type F - with CaO content less than 15%..2 Type CI - with CaO content ranging from 15 to 20%..3 Type CH - with CaO greater than 20%..4 GGBFS - Ground, granulated blast-furnace slag.

.2 Reference Standards:.1 ASTM International

.1 ASTM C109/C109M-16a, Standard Test Method forCompressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars (Using2-in. or 50-mm Cube Specimens)..2 ASTM C260/C260M-10a, Standard Specification forAir-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete..3 ASTM C309-11, Standard Specification for LiquidMembrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete..4 ASTM C494/C494M-15a, Standard Specification forChemical Admixtures for Concrete.



.5 ASTM C920/C920M-14a, Standard Specification forElastomeric Joint Sealants..6 ASTM C939/C939M-16, Standard Test Method for Flowof Grout for Preplaced-Aggregate Concrete (Flow ConeMethod)..7 ASTM C1017/C1017M-13, Standard Specification forChemical Admixtures for Use in Producing FlowingConcrete..8 ASTM D412-15a, Standard Test Methods for VulcanizedRubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers-Tension..9 ASTM D624-00 (2012), Standard Test Method for TearStrength of Conventional Vulcanized Rubber andThermoplastic Elastomer..10 ASTM D1751-04 (2013) E1, Standard Specification forPreformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving andStructural Construction (nonextruding and ResilientBituminous Types)..11 ASTM D2240-15, Standard Test Method for RubberProperty - durometer Hardness..12 ASTM G180-13, Standard Test Method for CorrosionInhibiting Admixtures for Steel in Concrete byPolarization Resistance in Cementitious Slurries..13 ASTM G109-07 (2013), Standard Specification forDetermining Effects of Chemical Admixtures on Corrosionof Embedded Steel Reinforcement in Concrete Exposed toChloride Environments.

.2 Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB).1 CAN/CGSB-51.34-M86(R1988), Vapour Barrier,Polyethylene Sheet for Use in Building Construction.

.3 CSA International.1 CSA A23.1-14/A23.2-14, Concrete Materials andMethods of Concrete Construction/Methods of Test andStandard Practices for Concrete..2 CSA A283-06(R2016), Qualification Code for ConcreteTesting Laboratories..3 CSA A3000-13, Cementitious Materials Compendium


.1 Pre-installation Meeting: convene pre-installation meetingminimum fifteen (15) days prior to beginning concrete worksto review mix designs, verify project requirements anddiscuss proposed methods and procedures to achieve requiredconcrete properties. Send pre-installation meeting agenda toattendees ten (10) days prior to scheduled date of meeting.

.2 Ensure key personnel and representatives of all partiesconcerned with concrete work attend, including but notlimited to:.1 Contractor's site superintendent.



.2 Representative from laboratory responsible for concretemix design..3 Representative from laboratory responsible for fieldquality control..4 Concrete subcontractor..5 Ready mix concrete producer..6 Admixture manufacturer supplier..7 Concrete pumping contractor..8 Project structural engineer..9 DCC Representative.

.3 Verify project requirements.

.4 Record minutes of meeting and distribute within five (5) daysof meeting.


.1 Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 -Submittal procedures.

.2 Provide testing inspection results and reports for review byDCC Representative and do not proceed without writtenapproval when deviations from mix design or parameters arefound.

.3 Concrete pours: provide accurate records of poured concreteitems indicating date and location of pour, quality, airtemperature and test samples taken as described in PART 3 -FIELD QUALITY CONTROL.

.4 Concrete hauling time: provide for review by DCCRepresentative deviations exceeding maximum allowable time of120 minutes for concrete to be delivered to site of Work anddischarged after batching.

.5 Provide two copies of WHMIS MSDS in accordance with Section01 70 12 - Safety Requirements and Section 01 35 43 -Environmental Procedures.


.1 Quality Assurance: in accordance with Section 01 45 00 -Quality Control.

.2 Provide DCC Representative, minimum 4 weeks prior to startingconcrete work, with valid and recognized certificate fromplant delivering concrete.



.1 Provide test data and certification by qualifiedindependent inspection and testing laboratory that materialsand mix designs used in concrete mixture will meet specifiedrequirements.

.3 Minimum 4 weeks prior to starting concrete work, submitproposed quality control procedures for review by DCCRepresentative on following items:.1 Falsework erection..2 Hot weather concrete..3 Cold weather concrete..4 Curing..5 Finishes..6 Formwork removal..7 Joints.

.4 Quality Control Plan: provide written report to DCCRepresentative verifying compliance that concrete in placemeets performance requirements of concrete as established inPART 2 - PRODUCTS.


.1 Delivery and Acceptance Requirements:.1 Concrete hauling time: deliver to site of Work anddischarged within 120 minutes maximum after batching.

.1 Do not modify maximum time limit without receipt ofprior written agreement from DCC Representative andconcrete producer as described in CSA A23.1/A23.2..2 Deviations to be submitted for review by DCCRepresentative.

.2 Concrete delivery: ensure continuous concrete deliveryfrom plant meets CSA A23.1/A23.2.

.2 Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return bymanufacture packaging materials in accordance with Section 0174 21 - Construction/Demolition Waste Management andDisposal.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DESIGN CRITERIA

.1 Alternative 1 - performance: to CSA-23.1/A23.2, and asdescribed in MIXES of PART 2 - PRODUCTS.



2.2 PERFORMANCE CRITERIA

.1 Quality Control Plan: ensure concrete supplier meetsperformance criteria of concrete as established by DCCRepresentative and provide verification of compliance asdescribed in PART 1 - QUALITY ASSURANCE.

2.3 MATERIALS

.1 Portland cement: to CSA A3001, Type GU.

.2 Blended hydraulic cement: Type GUb to CSA A3001.

.3 Supplementary cementing materials: Type "F" fly ash or slagreplacement by mass of total cementitious materials to CSAA3001. Content as per Table 2.1 MIXES.

.4 Water: to CSA-A23.1.

.5 Aggregates: to CSA-A23.1/A23.2.

.6 Admixtures:.1 Air entraining admixture: to ASTM C260..2 Chemical admixture: to ASTM C494 or ASTM C1017. DCCRepresentative to approve accelerating or set retardingadmixtures during cold and hot weather placing..3 Corrosion-inhibiting admixture: to ASTM G108 or ASTMG190.

.7 Shrinkage compensating grout: premixed compound consisting ofnon-metallic aggregate, Portland Cement, water-reducing andplasticizing agents to CSA-A23.1/A23.2..1 Compressive strength: 50 MPa at 28 days..2 Net shrinkage at 28 days: maximum 2%.

.8 Non premixed dry pack grout: composite of non metallicaggregate Portland Cement with sufficient water for mixtureto retain its shape when made into ball by hand and capableof developing compressive strength of 50 MPa at 28 days.

.9 Curing compound: to CSA-A23.1/A23.2 and ASTM C309, low VOC,water based..1 Curing compound to be compatible with applied finishes.

.10 Premoulded joint fillers:.1 Bituminous impregnated fiber board: to ASTM D175.

.11 Weep hole tubes: plastic.

.12 Dammproof membrane:.1 Polyethylene membrane:



.1 Reinforced: two .10 mm thick polyethylene filmsbonded each side of asphalt treated creped kraft paper,reinforced with 13 x 13 mm fibreglass scrim..2 Membrant adhesive: as recommended by membranemanufacturer.

.2 Bitumen impregnated protection board.

.3 Cavity drainage board.

.13 Dampproofing:.1 Emulsified asphalt, mineral colloid type, unfilled: toCAN/CGSB-37.2, and to Section 07 13 52 - Air/MoistureMembrane.

.14 Polyethylene film: 10 mil, thickness to CAN/CGSB-51.34.

.15 Concrete floor sealer:.1 Acceptable products include:

.1 Euco Diamond Hard by Euco.

.2 Liquid-Hard by W.R. Meadows.

.3 Planiseal WR40 by MAPEI.

.4 Approved Alternative.

.16 Joint fillers: for control and construction joints: twocomponent, 100% solids semi-rigid epoxy or polyurea withminimum Shore A hardness of 80 as per ASTM D1140.

.17 Joint sealants: for control and construction joints: twocomponent, self levelling elastomeric sealant to ASTM C920,Type M, Grade P, Class 25, use T.

2.4 MIXES

.1 Alternative 1 - performance Method for specifying concrete:to meet performance criteria to CSA A23.1/A23.2, specified inTable 2.1..1 Ensure concrete supplier meets performance criteria asestablished below and provide verification of compliance asin Quality Control Plan..2 Provide quality management plan to ensure verificationof concrete quality to specified performance..3 Concrete supplier's certification: both batch plant andmaterials meet CSA A23.1 requirements.

.2 Slump values given are before addition of plasticizer. Addplasticizer as approved by DCC Representative to achieveworkability. Contractor to pay for admixtures required toachieve workability. Do not increase water content aboveamount specified.

National Defence UNCLASSIFIED Section 03 30 00 New ULCV & EATV Cast-In-Place Page 7 Storage Facility Concrete Garrison Petawawa, ON Project No.: L-P90-2500/029 2016-06-29

Table 2.1

Mix Type

Mud slabs, thrust

blocks and fill

concrete

Interior and Exterior

Footings, foundation

walls, pilasters

Exterior sidewalks,

ramps, pads,

hardstands, aprons and

concrete pavement

Interior Slabs-on-

grade***

Ductbanks

Minimum compressive strength at 28 days

20 MPa 25 MPa 35 MPa 35 MPa 25 MPa

Exposure Classification N F-2 C-1 C-1 F-2 Portland Cement Type GU GU GU GU GU Maximum W/C ratio 0.65 0.55 0.40 0.40 0.55 Slump at time of discharge

To CSA A23.1

75 mm ±20 mm

75 mm ±20 mm

75 mm ±20 mm

To CSA A23.1

Nominal size of coarse aggregate

10 mm 20 mm 20 mm 20 mm 10 mm

Air content Not required

5-8% 5-8% Not required

5-8%

Type F Flyash Replacement by mass of total cementitious material

15% min 25% max

10% min, 20% max.

10% min for concrete containing corrosion inhibitor

10% min 20% max

15% min, 25% max.

** Read in conjunction with Part 2.4 – Mixes for additional requirements. *** Concrete mixes for interior slabs on grade subject to vehicle parking to contain a corrosion inhibitor admixture protection system to CSA 413.



.3 Submit concrete mix designs to DCC Representative forapproval, one (1) month prior to commencing concrete work. Noconcrete shall be placed before mix designs are approved.

.4 Provide quality management plan to ensure verification ofconcrete quality to specified performance.

.5 Concrete supplier's certification: both batch plant andmaterials meet CSA A23.1 requirements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

.1 Obtain DCC Representative's approval before placing concrete..1 Provide 24 hours minimum notice prior to placing ofconcrete.

.2 Place concrete reinforcing in accordance with Section 03 2000 - Concrete Reinforcing.

.3 During concreting operations:.1 Development of cold joints not allowed..2 Ensure concrete delivery and handling facilitatesplacing with minimum of re-handling, and without damage toexisting structure or Work.

.4 Pumping of concrete is permitted only after approval ofequipment and mix.

.5 Ensure reinforcement and inserts are not disturbed duringconcrete placement. Secure anchor bolts with templates.

.6 Prior to placing of concrete obtain DCC Representative'sapproval of proposed method for protection of concrete duringplacing and curing in adverse weather.

.7 Protect previous work from staining.

.8 Clean and remove stains prior to application for concretefinishes.

.9 Maintain accurate records of poured concrete items toindicate date, location of pour, quality, air temperature andtest samples taken.

.10 Do not place load upon new concrete until authorized by DCCRepresentative.



.11 Bond fresh concrete to hardened concrete to CSA A23.1 Clause7.2.

3.2 INSTALLATION/APPLICATION

.1 Do cast-in-place concrete work to CSA-A23.1/A23.2.

.2 Sleeves and inserts:.1 Do not permit penetrations sleeves, ducts, pipes orother openings to pass through pilasters, footing, joists,beams, column capitals or columns, except where indicated orapproved by DCC Representative..2 Where approved by DCC Representative, set sleeves, ties,pipe hangers and other inserts and openings as indicated orspecified elsewhere..3 Sleeves and openings greater than 100 x 100 notindicated, must be approved by DCC Representative..4 Do not eliminate or displace reinforcement toaccommodate hardware. If inserts cannot be located asspecified, obtain approval of modifications from DCCRepresentative before placing of concrete..5 Confirm locations and sizes of sleeves and openingsshown on drawings..6 Set special inserts for strength testing as indicatedand as required by non-destructive method of testingconcrete.

.3 Anchor bolts:.1 Set anchor bolts to templates in co-ordination withappropriate trade prior to placing concrete.

.4 Drainage holes and weep holes:.1 Form weep holes and drainage holes in accordance withSection 03 10 00 - Concrete Forming and FrameworkAccessories.

.5 Grout under base plates and machinery using procedures inaccordance with manufacturer's recommendations which resultin 100% contact over grouted area. Place grout to coversteel shims.

.6 Finishing and curing:.1 Finish concrete to CSA-A23.1/A23.2..2 Cure concrete to CSA-A23.1/A23.2..3 Use curing compounds compatible with applied finish onconcrete surfaces. Provide written declaration that compoundsused are compatible. Moisture cure where finishes areincompatible with curing compound. Wet cure slab-on-grade..4 Protect concrete from adverse conditions such aspremature drying and temperature extremes. Cure attemperature of at least 10°C for minimum three (3) days.



.5 Curing Type in accordance with specified exposureclassification unless more stringent requirements notedotherwise..6 Concrete slab-on-grade: Curing Type 2, wet cure forminimum seven (7) days at 10°C or greater for time necessaryto obtain 70% of specified concrete strength using:

.1 Non-staining absorptive mat or fabric keptcontinuously wet..2 Curing mats shall be thoroughly wet when appliedand kept continuously wet in full contact with concretesurface for duration of required curing period. Matsshall cover entire concrete surface with lapped joints.Place mats on concrete immediately after disappearanceof surface water sheen after final finishing pass..3 Lap joints minimum 75 mm and seal with waterprooftape or adhesive. Immediately repair holes or tearsduring curing period using cover material and waterprooftape..4 Remove curing cover and allow concrete to air dryfor at least twelve (12) hours prior to applying liquiddensifier/ sealer.

.7 Apply floor sealer as per manufacturer's recommendationsto areas specified in finish schedule..8 Prior to application of non-breathable floorfinishes/coatings test for moisture content in compliancewith ASTM D 4263..9 Apply concrete floor hardener as per manufacturer'srecommendations to areas as specified in finish schedule..10 Keep foot traffic off concrete for minimum 1 day..11 Keep vehicle traffic off concrete for minimum 7 days.

.7 Saw cut control joints:.1 Saw cut by early entry dry-cut method as early aspracticable or alternatively by conventional wet-cut methodbetween 4-12 hours after concrete placement. Ensure thatreinforcement and work of other sections are located belowcutting line..2 Use white or light grey chalk for chalk-lining sawcuts.Do not use red, blue or any colour with a dye that may stainfloor.

.8 Joint filling:.1 Furnish filler for each joint in single piece for depthand width required for joint, unless otherwise authorized byDCC Representative..2 When more than one piece is required for a joint, fastenabutting ends and hold securely to shape by stapling or otherpositive fastening..3 Locate and form isolation, construction and expansionjoints as indicated..4 Install joint filler.



.5 Use 12 mm thick joint filler to separate slab-on-gradefrom vertical surfaces and extend joint filler from bottom ofslab to within 12 mm of finished slab surface unlessindicated otherwise..6 Fill interior saw-cut control and construction joints inslab-on-grade with joint filler and joint sealants asspecified in Part 2.3 - Materials. Minimum concrete age priorto installation: greater of 120 days or Manufacturers'recommendation for best performance. Clean dust and debrisfrom saw cuts and adjacent area. Place joint filler to fulldepth of joint and shave to 6 mm below slab surface oncejoint filler has cured sufficiently. Place joint sealant toflush with slab surface. Tape joint sides to prevent slabdiscolouration and to ease overfill removal.

.9 Dampproof membrane:.1 Install dampproof membrane under concrete slab-on-gradeinside building..2 Lap dampproof membrane minimum 150 mm at joints andseal..3 Extend membrane up edges to top of slab at junctionswith vertical construction elements, foundation walls andpits..4 Seal punctures in dampproof membrane before placingconcrete. Use patching material at least 150 mm larger thanpuncture and seal..5 Seal membrane to pipe and conduit penetration.

3.3 SURFACE TOLERANCE

.1 Concrete tolerance to CSA-A23.1/A23.2.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

.1 Inspection and testing of concrete and concrete materialswill be carried out by a Testing Laboratory designated andpaid by DCC Representative in accordance withCSA-A23.1/A23.2.

.2 For compressive strength testing of concrete a minimum of 3cylinders and 2 field cured cylinders are required for:.1 Each day's pour..2 Each type of grade of concrete..3 Each change of supplier..4 Each 50 cubic meter or fraction thereof for footings andfoundation walls..5 Additional test specimen shall be taken wheneverrequested by the DCC Representative to verify the concretequality.



.6 Additional test specimen shall be taken during coldweather concreting.

.3 Cure cylinders on job site under same conditions as concretewhich they represent.

.4 Non-destructive Methods for Testing Concrete shall be inaccordance with CSA-A23.1/A23.2.

.5 Inspection and testing by testing laboratory will not augmentor replace contractor quality control nor relieve contractorof contractor responsibility.

3.5 CLEANING

.1 Clean in accordance with Section 01 74 11 - Cleaning.

.2 Waste management: separate waste materials for reuse andrecycling in accordance with Section 01 74 21 -Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal..1 Divert unused concrete materials from landfill to localfacility after receipt of written approval from DCCRepresentative..2 Provide appropriate area on joint site where concretetrucks can be safely washed..3 Divert unused admixtures and additive materials(pigments, fibres) from landfill to official hazardousmaterial collections site as approved by DCC Representative..4 Do not dispose of unused admixtures and additivematerials into sewer systems, into lakes, streams, ontoground or in other location where it will pose health orenvironmental hazard..5 Prevent admixtures and additive materials from enteringdrinking water supplies or streams..6 Using appropriate safety precautions, collect liquid orsolidify liquid with inert, noncombustible material andremove for disposal..7 Dispose of waste in accordance with applicable local,Provincial/Territorial and National regulations.

3.6 DEFECTIVE WORK

.1 Repairs and classification of defective concrete to CSAA23.1/A23.2.

.2 Remove defective concrete and embedded debris and repair asdirected by DCC Representative.

.3 Excessive honeycomb or embedded debris in concrete shall deemit defective. Remove and replace defective concrete.



.4 Remove to bare concrete curing compounds detrimental toapplication of specified finishes.

.5 Supply concrete at minimum strength requirement at 28 days.Tests indicating strengths lower than specified willnecessitate further testing as required by DCCRepresentative. Cost for additional testing to be atContractor's expense. Should further tests confirm lowvalues, DCC Representative has right to require strengtheningof affected area or removal and replacing of weak concrete atContractor's expense.

.6 Repair shrinkage cracks in completed concrete work employinga suitable epoxy injection technique acceptable to DCCRepresentative to completely seal cracks.

END OF SECTION

National Defence UNCLASSIFIED Section 04 05 00 New ULCV & EATV Common work results Page 1 Storage Facility For masonry Garrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29 Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 GENERAL


.1 Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures

.2 Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control

.3 Section 01 74 11 – Cleaning


.5 Section 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 Canadian Standards Association (CSA).

.1 CSA-A165 Series-14, Standards on Concrete Masonry Units.

.2 CSA A179-14, Mortar and Grout for Unit Masonry.

.3 CSA-A371-14, Masonry Construction for Buildings.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

.1 Product Data.

.1 Submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and data sheet in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.


.1 Test Reports.

.1 Certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance characteristics and physical properties.

.2 Submit laboratory test reports to DCC Representative.

.3 Submit laboratory test reports certifying compliance of masonry units and mortar ingredients.

.2 Certificates: product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying materials comply with specified performance characteristics and criteria and physical requirements.

.3 Mock-ups.

.1 Construct mock-ups in accordance with Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control.

.2 Construct mock-up at outside corner where directed. Mock-up to be comprised of minimum 4 courses in height and extend minimum 1.5m from each side of corner. Mock-up to include, completed wall substrate, wall and through-wall flashings, weep holes, anchors, mortar and mortar control.


.3 Allow 24 hours for inspection of mock-up by DCC Representative before proceeding with work.

.4 When accepted by DCC Representative, mock-up will demonstrate minimum standard for this work. Mock-up may remain as part of finished work.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

.1 Deliver, store, handle and protect materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 - Common Product Requirements.

.2 Deliver materials to job site in dry condition.


.3 Remove from site and dispose of packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities.

1.7 SITE CONDITIONS

.1 Site Environmental Requirements.

.1 Cold weather requirements. .1 Supplement Clause 5.15.2 of CSA-A371 with following

requirements. .1 Maintain temperature of mortar between 5 degrees

C and 50 degrees C until batch is used or becomes stable.

.2 Maintain ambient temperature between 5 degrees C and 50 degrees C and protect site from windchill.

.2 Hot weather requirements. .1 Protect freshly laid masonry from drying too

rapidly, by means of waterproof, non-staining coverings.

.2 Keep masonry dry using waterproof, non-staining coverings that extend over walls and down sides sufficient to protect walls from wind driven rain, until masonry work is completed and protected by flashings or other permanent construction.

Part 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Masonry materials are specified in Related Sections.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 Manufacturer's Instructions

.1 Compliance: comply with manufacturer's written data, including product technical bulletins, product catalogue installation instructions, product carton installation instructions, and data sheets.

3.2 PREPARATION

.1 Provide temporary bracing of masonry work during and after erection until permanent lateral support is in place.

3.3 INSTALLATION

.1 Do masonry work in accordance with CSA-A371 except where specified otherwise.

.2 Build masonry plumb, level, and true to line, with vertical joints in alignment.

.3 Layout coursing and bond to achieve correct coursing heights, and continuity of bond above and below openings, with minimum of cutting.

3.4 CONSTRUCTION

.1 Exposed masonry.

.1 Remove chipped, cracked, and otherwise damaged units, in accordance with CSA A165, Clause 82.1, in exposed masonry and replace with undamaged units.

.2 Jointing.

.1 Allow joints to set just enough to remove excess water, then tool with round jointer to provide smooth, joints true to line, compressed, uniformly concave joints where concave joints, typical unless noted otherwise.

.2 Allow joints to set just enough to remove excess water, then rake joints uniformly to 6 mm depth and compress with square tool to provide smooth, compressed, raked joints of uniform depth where raked joints are indicated.

.3 Strike flush joints concealed in walls and joints in walls to receive plaster, tile, insulation, or other applied material except paint or similar thin finish coating.

.3 Cutting.

.1 Cut out for electrical switches, outlet boxes, and other recessed or built-in objects.

.2 Make cuts straight, clean, and free from uneven edges.

.4 Building-In.


.1 Build in items required to be built into masonry.

.2 Prevent displacement of built-in items during construction. Check plumb, location and alignment frequently, as work progresses.

.3 Brace door jambs to maintain plumb. Fill spaces between jambs and masonry with mortar.

.5 Support of loads.

.1 Use grout to CSA A179 where grout is used in lieu of solid units.

.2 Install building paper below voids to be filled with grout; keep paper 25 mm back from faces of units.

.6 Provision for movement.

.1 Leave 3 mm space below shelf angles.

.2 Leave 6 mm space between top of non-load bearing walls and partitions and structural elements. Do not use wedges.

.3 Built masonry to tie in with stabilizers, with provision for vertical movement.

.7 Loose steel lintels.

.1 Install loose steel lintels. Centre over opening width.

.8 Control joints.

.1 Construct continuous control joints as indicated.

.9 Expansion joints.

.1 Build-in continuous expansion joints as indicated.

.10 Interface with other work.

.1 Cut openings in existing work as indicated.

.2 Make good existing work. Use materials to match existing.

3.5 SITE TOLERANCES

.1 Tolerances in notes to Clause 5.3 of CSA A371 apply.


.1 Inspection and testing will be carried out by Testing Laboratory designated by DCC Representative.

3.7 CLEANING

.1 Perform cleaning after installation to remove construction and accumulated environmental dirt.

.2 Upon completion of installation, remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment barriers.


3.8 PROTECTION

.1 Protect masonry and other work from marking and other damage. Protect completed work from mortar droppings. Use non-staining coverings.

END OF SECTION

National Defence UNCLASSIFIED Section 04 05 12 New ULCV & EATV Mortar and masonry grout Page 1 Storage Facility Garrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29 Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 GENERAL







.6 Section 04 05 00 - Common Work Results for Masonry.


.1 Canadian Standards Association (CSA).

.1 CSA A179-14, Mortar and Grout for Unit Masonry.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

.1 Product Data.

.1 Submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and data sheets.

.2 Manufacturer's Instructions.

.1 Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.


.1 Test Reports: certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance characteristics and physical properties.


.3 Pre-Installation Meetings: conduct pre-installation meeting to verify project requirements, manufacturer's installation instructions and manufacturer's warranty requirements.


.1 Separate waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 21 - Waste Management and Disposal

National Defence UNCLASSIFIED Section 04 05 12 New ULCV & EATV Mortar and masonry grout Page 2 Storage Facility Garrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29 Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.2 MATERIALS

.1 Mortar and grout: CSA A179, table 3.

.2 Use aggregate passing 1.18 mm sieve where ¼ inch (6 mm) thick joints are indicated.

.3 Colour: ground coloured natural aggregates or metallic oxide pigments.

.4 Mortar for interior masonry.

.1 Loadbearing: type S based on Proportion specifications.

.2 Non-Loadbearing: type N based on Proportion specifications.

.5 Following applies regardless of mortar types and uses specified above:

.1 Mortar for grouted reinforced masonry: type S based on Proportion specifications.

.2 Mortar for pointing: type N based on Proportion specifications.

.6 Coloured mortar: use colouring admixture not exceeding 10% of cement content by mass, or integrally coloured masonry cement, to produce coloured mortar to match approved sample.

.7 Non-Staining mortar: use non-staining masonry cement for cementitious portion of specified mortar type.

.8 Grout: to CSA A179, Table 3.

PART 3 EXECUTION



3.2 CONSTRUCTION

.1 Do masonry mortar and grout work in accordance with CSA A179 except where specified otherwise.

3.3 CLEANING


END OF SECTION

National Defence UNCLASSIFIED Section 04 05 19 New ULCV & EATV Masonry anchorage and Page 1 Storage Facility Reinforcing Garrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29 Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 GENERAL







1.2 REFERENCES

.1 Canadian Standards Association (CSA International).

.1 CAN/CSA-A23.1/A23.2-14, Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete Construction/Methods of Test for Concrete.

.2 CSA-A370-14, Connectors for Masonry.

.3 CSA-A371-14, Masonry Construction for Buildings.

.4 CSA-S304.1-04, Masonry Design for Buildings.

.5 CSA W186-M1990, Welding of Reinforcing Bars in Reinforced Concrete Construction.

.6 CSA A179-14, Mortar and Grout For Unit Masonry.

.7 CSA G30.18-09, Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement

.2 ASTM International, (ASTM):

.1 ASTM A82/A82M-07, Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement.

.2 ASTM A615/A615M-15AE1, Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

1. Product Data:

.1 Submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and data sheet in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.

.2 Submit two copies of WHMIS MSDS.

.2 Shop Drawings:

.1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.

.2 Shop drawings consist of bar bending details, lists and placing drawings.


.3 On placing drawings, indicate sizes, spacing, location and quantities of reinforcement and connectors.

.3 Manufacturer's Instructions:






.1 Separate waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 21 - Waste Management and Disposal.

Part 2 PRODUCTS

2.2 CONNECTORS:

.1 Connectors: to CSA-A370 and CSA-S304.

.2 Finish: All steel components hot dip galvanized as per A370.

2.3 MATERIALS

.1 Bar reinforcement: to CSA-A371 and CSA G30.18, Grade 400.

.2 Wire reinforcement: to CSA-A371, truss type.

.3 Connectors: to CSA-A370 and CSA-S304.

.4 Corrosion protection: to CSA-S304, galvanized to CSA-S304 and CSA-A370.

.5 Concrete: to Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete.

2.4 FABRICATION

.1 Fabricate reinforcing in accordance with CAN/CSA-A23.1 and Reinforcing Steel Manual of Standard Practice by the Reinforcing Steel Institute of Canada.

.2 Fabricate connectors in accordance with CSA-A370.

.3 Obtain DCC Representative’s approval for locations of reinforcement splices other than shown on placing drawings.


.4 Upon approval of DCC Representative, weld reinforcement in accordance with CSA W186.

.5 Ship reinforcement and connectors, clearly identified in accordance with drawings.


.1 Upon request, provide DCC Representative with certified copy of mill test reports of reinforcement steel and connectors, showing physical and chemical analysis, minimum 5 weeks prior to commencing reinforcement work.

.2 Upon request inform DCC Representative of proposed source of material to be supplied.

Part 3 EXECUTION



3.2 GENERAL

.1 Supply and install masonry connectors and reinforcement in accordance with CSA-A370, CSA-A371, CAN/CSA-A23.1 and CSA-S304.1 unless indicated otherwise.

.2 Prior to placing concrete or grout, obtain DCC Representative's approval of placement of reinforcement and connectors.

.3 Supply and install additional reinforcement to masonry as indicated.

3.3 REINFORCED LINTELS, BOND BEAMS, AND MASONRY CORES

.1 Reinforce masonry lintels and bond beams as indicated.

.2 Place reinforcement in accordance with CSA-S304.1, CSA-A371, and CSA-A179. Place concrete in accordance with CSA A23.2 and Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete.

.3 Refer to structural Drawings for size and type of lintels.

.4 Fill lintels, bond beams with concrete having a 28-day strength of 20 MPa.


.5 Install L102x89x9.5 LLV each side masonry loose lintel support over openings in existing walls, up to 2.5 m wide. Provide 8 inch (200 mm) bearing each end.

.6 Fill masonry cores as indicated on the structural Drawings.

3.4 GROUTING

.1 Grout masonry in accordance with CSA-S304.1, CSA-A371 and CSA-A179 and as indicated.

3.5 REINFORCEMENT

.1 Install vertical steel bar reinforcement as indicated.

.2 Install horizontal wire truss reinforcement in accordance with CSA 371.

3.6 ANCHORS

.1 Supply and install metal anchors as indicated.

3.7 LATERAL SUPPORT AND ANCHORAGE

.1 Supply and install lateral support and anchorage in accordance with CSA-S304.1 and as indicated.

3.8 CONTROL JOINTS

.1 Terminate reinforcement 1 inch (25 mm) short of each side of control joints unless otherwise indicated.

3.9 MOVEMENT JOINTS

.1 Reinforcement shall not be continuous across movement joints unless otherwise indicated.

3.10 FIELD BENDING

.1 Do not field bend reinforcement and connectors except where indicated or authorized by DCC Representative.

.2 When field bending is authorized, bend without heat, applying a slow and steady pressure.

.3 Replace bars and connectors which have developed cracks or splits.

3.11 FIELD TOUCH-UP

.1 Touch up damaged and cut ends of epoxy coated or galvanized reinforcement steel and connectors with compatible finish to provide continuous coating.


3.12 CLEANING


END OF SECTION

National Defence UNCLASSIFIED Section 04 05 23 New ULCV & EATV Masonry Accessories Page 1 Storage Facility Garrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29 Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 GENERAL






.5 Section 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals.

.6 Section 04 22 00 - Concrete Unit Masonry


1.2 REFERENCES

.1 American Standards and Testing Agency (ASTM) .1 ASTM A153/A153M-16, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware.

.2 Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CAN/CSA A371-14, Masonry Construction for Buildings.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

.1 Provide in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures

.2 Product Data: .1 Provide manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and datasheets. Include product characteristics, performance criteria, and limitations.

.3 Samples: Provide masonry accessory samples: .1 Weep hole vents. .2 Mortar dropping control .3 Wall anchors .4 Two flashing material samples, illustrating finish, size, shape, and profile.

National Defence UNCLASSIFIED Section 04 05 23 New ULCV & EATV Masonry Accessories Page 2 Storage Facility Garrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29 Project No.: L-P90-2500/029


.1 Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 21 – Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Mechanical fasteners: recommended by flashing manufacturer to suit project requirements, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A153.

.2 Movement joints: sealant and backer rod in accordance with Section 07 92 00.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

.1 Manufacturer's Instructions: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations, including product technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and datasheets.

3.2 INSTALLATION: MATERIALS

.1 Install continuous movement joint fillers in all movement joints in accordance with Section 07 92 00.

.2 Mechanical fasteners: install fasteners to suit application and in accordance with manufacturer's written installation instructions.

END OF SECTION

National Defence UNCLASSIFIED Section 04 22 00 New ULCV & EATV Concrete Unit Masonry Page 1 Storage Facility Garrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29 Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 GENERAL







1.2 REFERENCES

.1 Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CAN3 A165 SERIES-14, CSA Standards on Concrete Masonry Units .2 CSA A179-14, Mortar and Grout for Unit Masonry. .3 CSA A370-14, Connectors for Masonry. .4 CSA A371-14, Masonry Construction for Buildings. .5 CAN/CSA G30.18-09, Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. .6 CSA S304-14, Masonry Design for Buildings.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

.1 Submit samples in accordance with Sections 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.

.2 Product Data: .1 Submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and data sheets

.3 Shop Drawings: .1 Shop drawings consist of bar bending details, lists and placing drawings. .2 Provide details for seismic reinforcing and lateral restraint connectors to meet NBC design loads. .3 On placing drawings, indicate sizes, spacing, location and quantities of reinforcement and connectors. .4 Shop drawings to bear seal of Professional Engineer licensed to practice in the Province of Ontario


1.4 STORAGE AND HANDLING

.1 Protect on site stored or installed material from moisture damage in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MASONRY UNITS

.1 Standard concrete block units: to CAN3-A165 Series (CAN3-A165.1). .1 Size: metric modular. .2 Special shapes: provide rounded corner units for exposed corners. Provide purpose-made shapes for lintels and bond beams. Provide additional special shapes as indicated.

.2 Lightweight concrete block units for 1-hour rated installations: to CAN3-A165 Series (CAN3-A165.1)

.1 Size: metric modular.

.2 Average density: 1750kg/m3 for 200mm units

.3 Special shapes: provide rounded corner units for exposed corners. Provide purpose-made shapes for lintels and bond beams. Provide additional special shapes as indicated

2.2 REINFORCEMENT AND CONNECTORS

.1 Bar reinforcement: to CSA-A371 and CAN/CSA G30.18, Grade 400.

.2 Wire reinforcement: to CSA-A371 and CSA G30.14, truss type.

.3 Connectors to be corrosion resistant: to CSA-A370 and CSA-S304.

2.3 MORTAR AND GROUT

.1 Mortar: to CSA A179. .1 Use aggregate passing 1.18 mm sieve where 6 mm thick joints are indicated. .2 Colour: ground coloured natural aggregates or metallic oxide pigments.

.2 Mortar Type: S based on property specifications.

.3 Grout: to CSA A179, Table 3.


2.4 ACCESSORIES

.1 Nailing Inserts: 0.5 mm minimum thickness, galvanized.

.2 Bolts: 12 mm diameter x 150 mm long with ends bent 50 mm at 90 degrees.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Do masonry work in accordance with CSA A371 except where specified otherwise.

.1 Bond: running stretcher bond with vertical joints in perpendicular alignment and centred on adjacent stretchers above and below. .2 Coursing height: 200 mm for one block and one joint. .3 Jointing: tool where exposed or where paint or other finish coating is specified to provide smooth compressed concave surface.

.2 Build masonry plumb, level, and true to line, with vertical joints in alignment.

.3 Layout coursing and bond to achieve correct coursing heights, and continuity of bond above and below openings, with minimum of cutting.

3.2 CONSTRUCTION

.1 Exposed masonry: .1 Remove chipped, cracked, and otherwise damaged units, in exposed masonry and replace with undamaged units. .2 Cut out for electrical switches, outlet boxes, and other recessed or built-in objects. Make cuts straight, clean, and free from uneven edges. .3 Provide bullnose blocks for all outside corner installations.

.2 Building-In: .1 Install masonry connectors and reinforcement where indicated on drawings. .2 Build in items required to be built into masonry. .3 Prevent displacement of built-in items during construction. Check plumb, location and alignment frequently, as work progresses. .4 Brace door jambs to maintain plumb. Fill spaces between jambs and masonry with mortar. .5 Install loose steel lintels over openings where indicated.


.3 Concrete block lintels: .1 Install reinforced concrete block lintels over openings in masonry where steel or reinforced concrete lintels are not indicated. .2 End bearing: not less than 200 mm or as indicated on drawings.

.4 Support of loads: .1 Use grout to CSA A179 where grout is used in lieu of solid units. .2 Install building paper below voids to be filled with grout; keep paper 25 mm back from faces of units.

.5 Provision for movement: .1 Leave 6 mm space below shelf angles. .2 Leave 25 mm space between top of non-load bearing walls and partitions and structural elements. Do not use wedges. .3 Build masonry to tie in with stabilizers, with provision for vertical movement.

3.3 REINFORCING AND CONNECTING

.1 Install masonry connectors and reinforcement in accordance with CSA-A370, CSA-A371 and CSA-S304.1 unless indicated otherwise.

.2 Install seismic and lateral reinforcement in accordance with reviewed shop drawings.

.3 Prior to placing grout in load-bearing walls, obtain DCC Representative's approval of placement of reinforcement and connectors.

3.4 REINFORCED LINTELS AND BOND BEAMS

.1 Reinforce masonry lintels and bond beams as indicated.

.2 Place and grout reinforcement in accordance with CSA-S304.1, CSA-A371, and CSA-A179.

3.5 GROUTING

.1 Grout masonry in accordance with CSA-S304.1, CSA-A371 and CSA-A179 and as indicated.

3.6 ANCHORS

.1 Supply and install metal anchors as indicated.

3.7 LATERAL SUPPORT AND ANCHORAGE

.1 Supply and install lateral support and anchorage in accordance with CSA-S304 and as indicated.


3.8 SITE TOLERANCES

.1 Tolerances in notes to Clause 5.3 of CSA-A371 apply.


.1 Inspection and testing will be carried out by Testing Laboratory designated by DCC Representative

.2 Shop drawing Engineer required per 1.3.3 of this Section to review and accept installation.

3.10 CLEANING

.1 In accordance with Section 01 74 11 – Cleaning



3.11 PROTECTION

.1 Protect masonry and other work from marking and other damage. Protect completed work from mortar droppings. Use non-staining coverings.

END OF SECTION

National Defence UNCLASSIFIED Section 05 50 00 New ULCV & EATV Metal Fabrications Page 1 Storage Facility Garrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29 Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 RELATED SECTION






.6 Section 09 91 99 – Painting

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 American Society for Testing and Materials International, (ASTM) .1 ASTM A53/A53M-12, Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded and Seamless. .2 ASTM A269/A269M-15A, Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service. .3 ASTM A307-14, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength.

.2 Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CSA G40.20-04/G40.21-13, General Requirements for Rolled or Welded Structural Quality Steel/Structural Quality Steel .2 CSA-S16-14, Design of Steel Structures. .3 CSA W48-14, Filler Metals and Allied Materials for Metal Arc Welding. .4 CSA W59-13, Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding).

1.3 SUBMITTALS

.1 Submissions in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures

.2 Shop Drawings .1 Indicate materials, core thicknesses, finishes, connections, joints, method of anchorage, number of anchors, supports, reinforcement, details, and accessories. .2 Shop drawings for indicated items to bear seal of structural engineer licensed to practice in the Province of Ontario.


.3 Provide operation and maintenance data in accordance with Section 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals.


.1 Test Reports: Certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance characteristics and physical properties.

.2 Certificates: Product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying materials comply with specified performance characteristics and criteria and physical requirements.


.1 Storage and Protection: .1 Cover exposed stainless steel surfaces with pressure sensitive heavy protection paper or apply strippable plastic coating, before shipping to job site. .2 Leave protective covering in place until final cleaning of building. Provide instructions for removal of protective covering.


.1 Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 21 – Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Steel sections and plates: to CSA-G40.20/G40.21.

.2 Steel pipe: to ASTM A53/A53M standard weight, black and galvanized finish.

.3 Welding materials: to CSA W59.

.4 Welding electrodes: to CSA W48 Series.

.5 Bolts and anchor bolts: to ASTM A307.

.6 Aluminum sheet: proprietary utility sheet, 2.0 mm minimum thickness, brushed satin finish.

.7 Stainless steel tubing: to ASTM A269, Type 302 or 304 Commercial grade seamless welded with AISI No. 4, brushed satin finish

.8 Grout: non-shrink, non-metallic, flowable, 15 MPa at 24 hours.


2.2 FABRICATION

.1 Fabricate work square, true, straight and accurate to required size, with joints closely fitted and properly secured.

.2 Use self-tapping shake-proof flat headed screws on items requiring assembly by screws or as indicated.

.3 Where possible, fit and shop assemble work, ready for erection.

.4 Ensure exposed welds are continuous for length of each joint. File or grind exposed welds smooth and flush.

2.3 FINISHES

.1 Galvanizing: hot dipped galvanizing with zinc coating 600 g/m².

.2 Shop coat primer: low VOC type.

.3 Zinc primer: zinc rich, low VOC.

2.4 ISOLATION COATING

.1 Isolate aluminum from following components, by means of bituminous paint:

.1 Dissimilar metals except stainless steel, zinc, or white bronze of small area. .2 Concrete, mortar and masonry. .3 Wood.

2.5 SHOP PRIMING

.1 Apply one shop coat of primer to metal items, with exception of galvanized, concrete encased or factory finished items.

.2 Use primer unadulterated, as prepared by manufacturer. Paint on dry surfaces, free from rust, scale, grease. Do not paint when temperature is lower than 7 degrees C.

.3 Clean surfaces to be field welded; do not paint.

2.6 ANGLE LINTELS

.1 Steel angles: sizes and profiles indicated for openings. Provide 150 mm minimum bearing at ends.

.2 Finish: shop primed.


2.7 BOLLARDS

.1 6mm thick x 200mm diameter or larger diameter as indicated, hollow structural steel round section. 1200mm exposed above grade and 1800mm unexposed below grade.

.2 Finish: galvanized.

.3 Bollard Cover: High-visibility reflective yellow plastic cover, ribbed body, resistant to fading, impacts and cracking with domed top.

2.8 CHANNEL FRAMES AND SUPPORTS

.1 Fabricate frames from steel, sizes of channel and opening as indicated, 6mm minimum thickness.

.2 Weld channels together to form continuous frame for jambs and head of openings, sizes as indicated. Weld in supports as required to complete installation of overhead, coiling and counter doors

.3 Fabricate in accordance with engineered shop drawings

.4 Finish: prime coat painted for exposed installations, galvanized for cast-in-place installations.

2.9 THRESHOLDS

.1 6mm thick stainless steel checker plate face angle to profiles indicated. Chamfer all edges 45 degrees

2.10 CAGE LOCKERS

.1 Cage bodies to be 2mm thick plate steel for back and sides. Reinforce corners to support design load of minimum 150kg each for top, shelf and bottom loads

.2 Bi-parting Cage doors to be diamond grid cage, nominal 6mm x 9mm openings, fabricated of 3mm woven steel rod with 50mm wide X 19mm deep X 2mm wall thickness HSS perimeter frame. Provide continuous hinges for each door

.3 Adjustable steel shelf for complete width of unit, capable of supporting minimum 150kg

.4 Hasp and gate latch for each bi-parting pair of doors

.5 lockers to be 3m height X approximately 3.3m width. Locker widths sizes where pair of lockers fit within 50mm of column flanges between column grid.


.6 Finish: shop primed.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 ERECTION

.1 Do welding work in accordance with CSA W59 unless specified otherwise.

.2 Erect metalwork square, plumb, straight, and true, accurately fitted, with tight joints and intersections.

.3 Provide suitable means of anchorage acceptable to DCC Representative such as dowels, anchor clips, bar anchors, expansion bolts and shields, and toggles.

.4 Exposed fastening devices to match finish and be compatible with material through which they pass.

.5 Provide components for building by other sections in accordance with shop drawings and schedule.

.6 Make field connections with bolts to CSA S16, or weld.

.7 Hand items over for casting into concrete or building into masonry to appropriate trades together with setting templates.

.8 Touch-up rivets, field welds, bolts and burnt or scratched surfaces after completion of erection with primer.

.9 Touch-up galvanized surfaces with zinc rich primer where burned by field welding.

3.2 FINISHING

.1 Finish all exposed interior and exterior metal fabrications in accordance with Section 09 91 99 – Painting.

3.3 ANGLE LINTELS

.1 Install as indicated. Locate loose lintels above masonry openings to carry superimposed loads.

3.4 BOLLARDS

.1 Install bollards as indicated.

.2 Fill core with concrete and cove top to permit free drainage of water from bollard core.


3.5 CHANNEL FRAMES AND SUPPORTS

.1 Provide frames at jambs and heads of overhead sectional, coiling, counter and roll-up doors, and other openings as indicated and as required.

.2 Install to full thicknesses of walls and secured to substrate with concealed anchors welded to backs of frames.

.3 Claims for extras to the Contract Price for the supply and installation of metal fabrications associated with overhead sectional, coiling, counter and roll-up door installation will not be considered.

3.6 THRESHOLDS

.1 Install at opening edges as indicated. Secure to substrate with flush mechanical fasteners

3.7 CAGE LOCKERS

.1 Fabricate lockers in accordance with reviewed shop drawings

.2 Paint finished all exposed surfaces in safety yellow in accordance with Section 09 91 99 - Painting

3.8 CLEANING



END OF SECTION

National Defence UNCLASSIFIED Section 06 10 10 New ULCV & EATV Rough Carpentry Page 1 Storage Facility Garrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29 Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 GENERAL



.2 Section 01 74 21 - Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal


1.2 REFERENCES

.1 Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CSA B111-1974, Wire Nails, Spikes and Staples. .2 CAN/CSA G164-M92, Hot Dip Galvanizing of Irregularly Shaped Articles. .3 CSA O121-08, Douglas Fir Plywood. .4 CSA O141-05, Softwood Lumber. .5 CSA O151-09, Canadian Softwood Plywood. .6 CAN/CSA O325-07, Construction Sheathing.

.2 National Lumber Grades Authority (NLGA) .1 Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber 2014.


.1 Lumber identification: by grade stamp of an agency certified by Canadian Lumber Standards Accreditation Board.

.2 Plywood identification: by grade mark in accordance with applicable CSA standards.

.3 Plywood, OSB and wood based composite panel construction sheathing identification: by grade mark in accordance with applicable CSA standards.


.1 Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 21 - Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 LUMBER MATERIAL

.1 Lumber: unless specified otherwise, softwood, S4S, moisture content 19% or less in accordance with following standards:

.1 CAN/CSA O141.


.2 NLGA Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber.

.3 Forest Stewardship Council (FSC) certified.

.2 Furring, blocking, nailing strips, grounds, rough bucks, cants, curbs, fascia backing and sleepers:

.1 S2S is acceptable for blocking and accessory support.

.2 Board sizes: "Standard" or better grade.

.3 Dimension sizes: "Standard" light framing or better grade.

.4 Post and timbers sizes: "Standard" or better grade.

.5 Forest Stewardship Council (FSC) certified

2.2 PANEL MATERIALS

.1 Douglas fir plywood (DFP): to CSA O121, standard construction and good-one-side types.

.1 Urea-formaldehyde free.

.2 Forest Stewardship Council (FSC) certified

.2 Canadian softwood plywood (CSP): to CSA O151, standard construction. .1 Urea-formaldehyde free. .2 Forest Stewardship Council (FSC) certified

.3 Plywood, OSB and wood based composite panels: to CAN/CSA O325. .1 Urea-formaldehyde free. .2 Forest Stewardship Council (FSC) certified

2.3 ACCESSORIES

.1 Nails, spikes and staples: to CSA B111.

.2 Bolts: 12.5 mm diameter unless indicated otherwise, complete with nuts and washers.

.3 Proprietary fasteners: toggle bolts, expansion shields and lag bolts, screws and lead or inorganic fibre plugs, explosive actuated fastening devices, recommended for purpose by manufacturer.

2.4 FINISHES

.1 Galvanizing: to CAN/CSA G164, use galvanized fasteners for exterior work and interior highly humid areas.

.2 Fire-resistive finishes in accordance with Section 09 91 99

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Comply with requirements of NBC, supplemented by the following paragraphs.


.2 Install furring and blocking as required to space-out and support casework, cabinets, wall and ceiling finishes, facings, fascia, soffit, siding and other work as required.

.3 Align and plumb faces of furring and blocking to tolerance of 1:600.

.4 Install rough bucks, nailers and linings to rough openings as required to provide backing for frames and other work.

.5 Install wood cants, fascia backing, nailers, curbs and other wood supports as required and secure using galvanized fasteners.

.6 Install nominal 16mm thick good one side douglas fir plywood to all walls of Communication Rooms, from finished floor to minimum height of 2400mm. Paint finish all exposed surfaces with intumescent paint

3.2 ERECTION

.1 Frame, anchor, fasten, tie and brace members to provide necessary strength and rigidity.

.2 Countersink bolts where necessary to provide clearance for other work.

END OF SECTION

National Defence UNCLASSIFIED Section 07 13 52 New ULCV & EATV Air/Moisture Membrane Page 1 Storage Facility Garrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29 Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 GENERAL





1.2 REFERENCES

.1 ASTM International Inc. .1 ASTM E96/E96M-15, Standard Test Methods for Water Vapour Transmission of Materials. .2 ASTM E283-04, Standard Test Method for Determining Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

.1 Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures

.2 Product Data: .1 Provide two copies of most recent technical waterproofing components data sheets describing materials' physical properties and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations.


.1 Provide and maintain in dry, off-ground weatherproof storage and in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions.


.1 Provide information required in accordance with Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals



1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS

.1 Do not install waterproofing when temperature remains below -5


degrees C.

.2 Install waterproofing on dry substrates, free of snow and ice. Use only dry materials and apply only during weather that will not introduce moisture into waterproofing system.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE CRITERIA

.1 Waterproofing System: capable of providing continuity of air and vapour barrier systems of adjacent materials, components and assemblies.

.2 Compatibility between components of waterproofing system is essential. Provide written declaration to DCC Representative stating that materials and components, as assembled in system, meet this requirement.

2.2 MEMBRANE

.1 Air/Vapour Barrier: .1 Self-adhering membrane consisting of an SBS rubberized asphalt compound integrally laminated to cross-laminated polyethylene film.

.1 Thickness: minimum 1mm

.2 Air leakage: maximum 0.01 L/s.m2 @ 75Pa in accordance with ASTM E283 .3 Water vapour transmission: maximum 2 ng/Pa.s.m2 in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M. .4 Acceptable products:

.1 Blueskin SA by Henry

.2 Sopraseal stick 1100T by Soprema

.3 3015 by 3M

.4 Air-Shield by WR Meadows

2.3 PRIMERS

.1 Water-based primer by membrane manufacturer.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS

.1 Install all products in strict accordance with manufacturer’s printed literature.

3.2 INSTALLATION


.1 All surfaces to be clean of oil, dust, dirt and excess mortar.

.2 Apply primer to all surfaces for self-adhesive membrane prior to membrane installation.

.3 Apply membrane to primed surfaces while primer still tacky and press firmly in place avoiding bubbles, fishmouths and gaps.

.4 Overlap all joints minimum 50mm.

.5 Apply liquid applied membrane around all penetrations of air barrier membrane to ensure continuity of air barrier system.

3.3 CLEANING

.1 Remove bituminous markings from finished surfaces.

.2 In areas where finished surfaces are soiled caused by work of this section, consult manufacturer of surfaces for cleaning advice and complying with their documented instructions.

.3 Repair or replace defaced or disfigured finishes caused by work of this section.

END OF SECTION

National Defence UNCLASSIFIED Section 07 21 13 New ULCV & EATV Board Insulation Page 1 Storage Facility Garrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29 Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 GENERAL




1.2 REFERENCES

.1 Underwriters Laboratories of Canada (ULC) .1 CAN/ULC 704-11, Standard for Thermal Insulation, Polystyrene, Boards and Pipe Covering.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

.1 Submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures

.2 Product Data: .1 Submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and data sheet



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 INSULATION

.1 Below slab-on-grade and foundation walls: extruded polystyrene (XPS): to CAN/ULC S701

.1 Type: 4.

.2 Thermal resistance: minimum RSI of 0.87 @ 24C per 25mm thickness

.3 Compressive strength: minimum 400kPa.

.4 Thickness: as indicated.

.5 Edges: shiplapped.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

.1 Insulation clips: impale type, perforated 50 x 50 mm cold rolled carbon steel 0.8 mm thick, adhesive back, spindle of 2.5 mm diameter annealed steel, length to suit insulation, 25 mm diameter washers of self locking type.


PART 3 EXECUTION



3.2 WORKMANSHIP

.1 Install insulation after building substrate materials are dry.

.2 Install insulation to maintain continuity of thermal protection to building elements and spaces.

.3 Fit insulation tight around electrical boxes, plumbing and heating pipes and ducts, around exterior doors and windows and other protrusions.

.4 Keep insulation minimum 75 mm from heat emitting devices such as recessed light fixtures.

.5 Cut and trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Butt joints tightly, offset vertical joints. Use only insulation boards free from chipped or broken edges. Use largest possible dimensions to reduce number of joints.

.6 Offset both vertical and horizontal joints in multiple layer applications.

.7 Do not enclose insulation until it has been inspected and approved by DCC Representative.

3.3 EXAMINATION

.1 Prior to commencement of work ensure: .1 Substrates are firm, straight, smooth, dry, free of snow, ice or frost, and clean of dust and debris.

3.4 FOUNDATION WALL INSULATION

.1 Exterior application: extend boards vertically below finished grade as indicated, installed on outside face of perimeter foundation walls.

.2 Secure to foundation walls with adhesive.

3.5 BELOW FLOOR SLAB INSTALLATIONS


.1 Install boards horizontally on graded granular backfill prior to application of concrete floor slab placement.

.2 Extend boards from perimeter of foundation wall as indicated. Lay boards on level compacted fill.

3.6 CLEANING


END OF SECTION

National Defence UNCLASSIFIED Section 07 21 31 New ULCV & EATV Sprayed Insulation Page 1 Storage Facility Polyurethane Foam Garrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29 Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 GENERAL



.2 Section 01 45 00 – Quality Control



1.2 REFERENCES

.1 Canadian Urethane Foam Contractors' Association Inc. (CUFCA)

.2 Underwriters' Laboratories of Canada (ULC) .1 CAN/ULC S705.1-01, Standard for Thermal Insulation - Spray Applied Rigid Polyurethane Foam, Medium Density, Material Specification. .2 CAN/ULC S705.2-05, Standard for Thermal Insulation - Spray Applied Rigid Polyurethane Foam, Medium Density, Application.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

.1 Provide submittals in accordance with Section

.2 Product Data: .1 Submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and datasheet and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations.


.1 Qualifications: .1 Installer: person specializing in sprayed insulation installations recognized by manufacturer.

1.5 SITE CONDITIONS

.1 Protect adjacent surfaces and equipment from damage by overspray, fall-out, and dusting of insulation materials.

.2 Apply insulation only when surfaces and ambient temperatures are within manufacturers' prescribed limits.


National Defence UNCLASSIFIED Section 07 21 31 New ULCV & EATV Sprayed Insulation Page 2 Storage Facility Polyurethane Foam Garrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29 Project No.: L-P90-2500/029


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Insulation: closed cell spray polyurethane to CAN/ULC S705.1. .1 Density: minimum 30 kg/m3 (ASTM D1622) .2 Water absorption: maximum 20% by volume (ASTM D2842) .3 Thermal resistance: minimum RSI 1.1 per 25mm after 180 days (ASTM C518) .4 Air leakage: system result maximum 0.005 l/s/m2 @ 75Pa

PART 3 EXECUTION


.1 Compliance: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations or specifications, including product technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and datasheets.

3.2 APPLICATION

.1 Protect other items from over spray application prior to commencing work.

.2 Use only spray equipment recommended by sprayed foam manufacturer.

.3 Apply insulation to clean surfaces in accordance with CAN/ULC S705.2 and manufacturer's printed instructions.

.4 Apply sprayed foam insulation in thickness to completely fill depth and width of complete perimeter voids.

3.3 CLEANING

.1 On completion and verification of performance of installation, remove surplus materials, excess materials, rubbish, tools and equipment.

END OF SECTION

National Defence UNCLASSIFIED Section 07 62 00 New ULCV & EATV Sheet Metal Flashing And Trim Page 1 Storage Facility Garrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29 Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 GENERAL





1.2 REFERENCES

.1 American Society for Testing and Materials International (ASTM) .1 ASTM A606/A606M-15, Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, High-Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled, with Improved Atmospheric Corrosion Resistance. .2 ASTM A653/A653M-15E1, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. .3 ASTM A792/A792M-10, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process. .4 ASTM D523-08, Standard Test Method for Specular Gloss.

.2 Canadian Roofing Contractors Association (CRCA) .1 Roofing Specifications Manual 2012.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


.2 Product Data: .1 Submit manufacturer's printed product literature for sheet metal flashing systems materials, specifications and datasheet and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations.

.3 Samples: .1 Submit duplicate 50 x 50 mm samples of each type of sheet metal material, finishes and colours.



PART 2 PRODUCTS


2.1 SHEET METAL MATERIALS

.1 Zinc coated steel sheet: minimum 0.76 mm base steel thickness, commercial quality to ASTM A653/A653M, with G90 designation zinc coating, prepared for pre-finish coating.

2.2 PREFINISHED STEEL SHEET

.1 Prefinished steel with factory applied coating .1 Series 10,000 colour selection. A total of 6 colours will be selected by DCC Representative from complete range.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

.1 Isolation coating: alkali resistant bituminous paint.

.2 Sealants: in accordance with Section 07 92 00 - Sealants

.3 Cleats: of same material, and temper as sheet metal, minimum 50 mm wide. Thickness same as sheet metal being secured.

.4 Fasteners: flat head screws of same material as sheet metal, thickness suitable for metal flashing application.

.5 Washers: of same material as sheet metal, 1 mm thick with rubber packings.

.6 Touch-up paint: as recommended by prefinished material manufacturer.

2.4 FABRICATION

.1 Fabricate metal flashings and other sheet metal work as indicated.

.2 Form pieces in 2400 mm maximum lengths. Make allowance for expansion at joints.

.3 Hem exposed edges on underside 12 mm. Mitre and seal corners with sealant.

.4 Form sections square, true and accurate to size, free from distortion and other defects detrimental to appearance or performance.

.5 Apply isolation coating to metal surfaces to be embedded in concrete or mortar.

2.5 METAL FLASHINGS

.1 Form flashings, copings and fascias to profiles indicated.

2.6 CAP FLASHINGS

.1 Form exposed metal cap flashings as detailed


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Install sheet metal work in accordance with CRCA FL series details

.2 Install pre-finished sheet steel at all general areas indicated. Install aluminum sheet metal at all areas adjacent to aluminum framing components such as windows and doors.

.3 Use concealed fastenings except where approved before installation.

.4 Provide underlay under sheet metal. Secure in place and lap joints 100 mm

.5 Counter flash bituminous flashings at intersections of roof with vertical surfaces and curbs.

.1 Flash joints using S-lock joints forming tight fit over hook strips.

.6 Lock end joints and caulk with sealant.

.7 Insert metal flashing under cap flashing to form weather tight junction.

3.2 CLEANING

.1 Leave work areas clean, free from grease, finger marks and stains.

END OF SECTION

National Defence UNCLASSIFIED Section 07 81 00 New ULCV & EATV Applied Fireproofing Page 1 Storage Facility Garrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29 Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 GENERAL







1.2 REFERENCES

.1 American Society for Testing and Materials International, (ASTM) .1 ASTM E605-93 (2015)E1, Standard Test Methods for Thickness and Density of Sprayed Fire-Resistive Material (SFRM) Applied to Structural Members. .2 ASTM E736-00(2015)E1, Standard Test Method for Cohesion/Adhesion of Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials Applied to Structural Members.

.2 Underwriter's Laboratories of Canada (ULC) .1 CAN/ULC S101-07, Standard Methods of fire Endurance Tests of Building Construction and Materials. .2 CAN/ULC 102-1, Method of Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials and Assemblies.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

.1 Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.

.2 Product Data: .1 Submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and datasheet and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations.

.3 Quality assurance submittals: .1 Test Reports:

.1 Submit product data including certified copies of test reports verifying fireproofing applied to substrate as constructed on project will meet or exceed project requirements. .2 Submit test results in accordance with CAN/ULC S101 for


fire endurance and CAN/ULC S102 for surface burning characteristics. .3 For assemblies not tested and rated, submit proposals based on related designs using accepted fireproofing design criteria. .4 Manufacturer's Instructions: submit manufacturer's installation instructions and special handling criteria, installation sequence and cleaning procedures. .5 Shop drawing submittal to include relevant ULC design number. Test reports to be provided as per ASTM E605.


.1 Qualifications: .1 Installer: company specializing in sprayed-on fireproofing and intumescent painting application recognized by manufacturer.

.2 Mock-ups: .1 Apply intumescent fireproofing to first 2 meters of one column selected by DCC Representative. .2 Mock-up will be used:

.1 To judge workmanship, substrate preparation, operation of equipment and material application.

.3 Allow 24 hours for inspection of mock-up by DCC Representative before proceeding with fireproofing work. .4 When accepted, mock-up will demonstrate minimum standard of quality required for this work. Approved mock-up may remain as part of finished work.


.1 Packing, shipping, handling and unloading: .1 Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. .2 Deliver packaged materials in original unopened containers, marked to indicate brand name, manufacturer and ULC or CUL markings.

.2 Storage and Protection: .1 Store materials indoors in dry location. .2 Store and protect materials from exposure to harmful weather conditions and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by manufacturer. .3 Damaged or opened containers will be rejected. .4 Packaging to indicate shelf-life and materials to be applied prior to expiration of shelf-life. .5 Provide temporary enclosures to prevent spray from contaminating air beyond application area. .6 Protect adjacent surfaces and equipment from damage by overspray, fall-out, and dusting of fireproofing materials.




1.7 AMBIENT CONDITIONS

.1 Maintain relative humidity and temperature within limits recommended by fireproofing manufacturer.

.2 Ensure that ventilation to properly dry fireproofing during and subsequent to its application is provided.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Cementitious fireproofing: .1 Sprayed fireproofing: ULC or cUL certified, asbestos-free cementitious sprayed fireproofing with minimum attributes:

.1 Density: 230 kg/m3

.2 Ratings: 1 hour .2 Accessories:

.1 Galvanized reinforcing mesh where sprayed fireproofing installed to primed steel surfaces. Unprimed steel surfaces do not require reinforcing mesh. .2 Spray applied latex-based elastomeric surface sealer/hardener

.2 Intumescent coating .1 Single component, water based, factory mixed, asbestos free, intumescent material blended for uniform texture. .2 Primer: type recommended by intumescent paint manufacturer to adhere to structural steel. .3 System type recommended by fireproofing manufacturer for 1 hour rated assemblies. .4 Finish coat: coloured finish coat in colours as selected by DCC Representative.

PART 3 EXECUTION


.1 Compliance: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations or specifications, including product technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and datasheets.


3.2 PREPARATION

.1 Substrate: free of material which would impair bond. Where primed steel surfaces are present, install reinforcing mesh in accordance with fireproofing manufacturer’s instructions.

.2 Verify that painted substrates are compatible and have suitable bonding characteristics to receive fireproofing.

.3 Ensure that items required to penetrate fireproofing are placed before installation of fireproofing.

.4 Ensure that ducts, piping, equipment, or other items which would interfere with application of fireproofing are not positioned until fireproofing work is completed.

3.3 APPLICATION

.1 Apply fireproofing to correspond with tested assemblies.

.2 Apply fireproofing over substrate, building up to required thickness to cover substrate with monolithic coating of uniform density and texture.

.3 Apply fireproofing to correspond with tested assemblies, or acceptable calculation procedures to provide following fire resistance ratings.

.1 Floor assemblies: Fire resistant rating as indicated.

.2 Supporting elements for floors and occupied roof areas: Fire resistant rating to match supported floor/roof assembly or as indicated otherwise.

.4 Apply fireproofing over substrate, building up to required thickness to cover substrate with monolithic coating of uniform density and texture

.5 Where exposed, finish intumescent fireproofing for finished painting applications in accordance with Section 09 91 99 - Painting

.6 Where exposed, finish cementitious fireproofing with sealer/hardener

3.4 PATCHING

.1 Patch damage to fireproofing caused by testing or by other trades before fireproofing is concealed, or if exposed, before final inspection.


3.5 CLEANING

.1 On completion and verification of performance of installation, remove surplus materials, excess materials, rubbish, tools and equipment.

END OF SECTION

National Defence UNCLASSIFIED Section 07 92 00 New ULCV & EATV Sealants Page 1 Storage Facility Garrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29 Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 GENERAL






1.2 REFERENCES

.1 American Society for Testing and Materials International, (ASTM) .1 ASTM C919-12, Standard Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications. .2 ASTM C920-14a, Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants

.2 Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB) .1 CGSB 19-GP-17M, One Component, Paintable Acrylic. .2 CAN/CGSB 19.13-M87, Sealing Compound, One-component, Polyurethane, Moisture Curing. .3 CAN/CGSB 19.13-M87, Sealing Compound, One-component, Silicone, Moisture Curing. .4 CAN/CGSB 19.21-M87, One Component, Non-Skinning, Non-Hardening, Acoustical grade sealant.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

.1 Submit product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures

.2 Manufacturer's product to describe. .1 Caulking compound. .2 Primers. .3 Sealing compound, each type, including compatibility when different sealants are in contact with each other.

.3 Submit duplicate samples of each type of material and colour.

.4 Submit manufacturer's instructions to include installation instructions for each product used.



.1 Provide operation and maintenance data in accordance with Section 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals


.1 Deliver and store materials in original wrappings and containers with manufacturer's seals and labels, intact. Protect from freezing, moisture, water and contact with ground or floor.


.1 Perform the work by experienced and skilled mechanics thoroughly trained and competent in the use of caulking and sealing equipment and the specified materials with at least five years’ experience.



1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS

.1 Environmental Limitations: .1 Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under following conditions:

.1 When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint sealant manufacturer or are below 5 degrees C. .2 When joint substrates are wet.

.2 Joint-Width Conditions: .1 Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for applications indicated.

.3 Joint-Substrate Conditions: .1 Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion are removed from joint substrates.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SEALANT MATERIAL DESIGNATIONS

.1 Colours: multiple colours to be selected by DCC Representative from manufacturer’s complete range.

.2 All sealants in accordance with ASTM C920.


.3 Type A: Urethanes one part .1 Non-sag, low VOC .2 Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT, T, M, A, O .3 Minimum service temperature range: -40 to +80 degrees C

.4 Type B: Silicones One Part. .1 Non-sag .2 Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT, G, A, O .3 Minimum service temperature range: -40 to +80 degrees C

.5 Type C: Acrylic Latex One Part. .1 Type OP, Grade -18*C

.6 Preformed Compressible and Non-Compressible back-up materials (backer rod).

.1 Polyethylene, Urethane, Neoprene or Vinyl Foam. .1 Extruded open cell foam backer rod. .2 Size: oversize 30 to 50 %.

.7 Bond Breaker Tape. .1 Polyethylene bond breaker tape which will not bond to sealant.

2.2 SEALANT SELECTION

.1 Perimeters of exterior openings where frames meet exterior facade of building: Sealant type: A.

.2 Expansion and control joints in exterior surfaces of masonry veneers: Sealant type: A.

.3 Control and rainscreen joints in exterior surfaces of cladding systems: Sealant type: B.

.4 Sheet metal flashing and trim joints: Sealant type: B.

.5 Seal interior perimeters of exterior openings as detailed on drawings: Sealant type: C.

.6 Perimeters of interior frames, as detailed and itemized: Sealant type: C.

.7 Interior masonry vertical control joints: Sealant type: A.

.8 Perimeter of bath fixtures (e.g. sinks, tubs, urinals, stools, water closets, basins, vanities): Sealant type: B.

.9 Joints and seams of vapour retarder membrane: Sealant type D.


2.3 JOINT CLEANER

.1 Non-corrosive and non-staining type, compatible with joint forming materials and sealant recommended by sealant manufacturer.

.2 Primer: as recommended by manufacturer.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PROTECTION

.1 Protect installed Work of other trades from staining or contamination.

3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION

.1 Examine joint sizes and conditions to establish correct depth to width relationship for installation of backup materials and sealants.

.2 Clean bonding joint surfaces of harmful matter substances including dust, rust, oil grease, and other matter which may impair Work.

.3 Do not apply sealants to joint surfaces treated with sealer, curing compound, water repellent, or other coatings unless tests have been performed to ensure compatibility of materials. Remove coatings as required.

.4 Ensure joint surfaces are dry and frost free.

.5 Prepare surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's directions.

3.3 PRIMING

.1 Where necessary to prevent staining, mask adjacent surfaces prior to priming and caulking.

.2 Prime sides of joints in accordance with sealant manufacturer's instructions immediately prior to caulking.

3.4 BACKUP MATERIAL

.1 Apply bond breaker tape where required to manufacturer's instructions.

.2 Install backup material in all joints to achieve correct joint depth and shape, with approximately 30% compression.


3.5 APPLICATION

.1 Sealant. .1 Mix and apply sealant in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. .2 Mask edges of joint where irregular surface or sensitive joint border exists to provide neat joint. .3 Apply sealant in continuous beads. .4 Apply sealant using gun with proper size nozzle. .5 Use sufficient pressure to fill voids and joints solid. .6 Form surface of sealant with full bead, smooth, free from ridges, wrinkles, sags, air pockets, embedded impurities. .7 Tool exposed surfaces before skinning begins to give slightly concave shape. .8 Remove excess compound promptly as work progresses and upon completion.

.2 Curing. .1 Cure sealants in accordance with sealant manufacturer's instructions. .2 Do not cover up sealants until proper curing has taken place.

.3 Cleanup. .1 Clean adjacent surfaces immediately and leave Work neat and clean. .2 Remove excess and droppings, using recommended cleaners as work progresses.

END OF SECTION

National Defence UNCLASSIFIED Section 08 00 00 New ULCV & EATV Door And Frame Schedule Page 1 Storage Facility Garrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29 Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL NOTES

.1 All steel doors and frames to be painted.

.2 Door sizes are frame rebate sizes.

.3 If applicable, glass for hollow metal screens shall be the same as the doors within the screens.

.4 All hollow metal frames in masonry or concrete walls shall be

filled with grout.

.5 Where doors are fire rated or ULC-labeled, door frames and hardware shall match.

.6 Provide sealant around perimeter of all hollow metal

frames, both sides.

.7 Refer to mechanical drawings/schedules for door grille types, sizes and locations. Grilles are to be centred on the door leaf. The bottom edge of the louvre flange frame is to be 25mm above the kick plate.

END OF SECTION

Door No. Room Name Frame Type ThroatDim Finish Details

Door Type Width Height Finish

LabelMin.

Hardware No. Remarks

101.1 Parking space 101 IMF-1 175 P DETAIL 2 IMD-1 1050 2150 P 1 EXIT DEVICE

101.2 Parking space 101 OVERHEAD DOOR N/A PREF DETAIL 3 IOHD-1 3350 3700 PRE-

FINISH N/A INSULATED OVERHEAD DOOR & FRAME

101.3 Parking space 101 OVERHEAD DOOR N/A PREF DETAIL 3 IOHD- 1 3350 3700 PRE-



101.5 Parking space 101 IMF-1 P DETAIL 2 IMD-1 1050 2150 P 3 EXIT DEVICE

101.6 Parking space 101 OVERHEAD DOOR N/A PREF DETAIL 3 IMD-1 3350 3700 PRE-


101.7 Parking space 101 OVERHEAD DOOR N/A PREF. DETAIL 3 ST-RS 3350 3700 PRE-


101.8 Parking space 101 IMF-1 175 PREF. DETAIL 2 IMD-1 1050 2150 P 4 EXIT DEVICE


102.1 Mechanical room 102.1 IMF-2 175 P DETAIL 2 IMD-2 2X 1050 2150 P 7

102.2 Mechanical room 102.2 HMF.1 190 P DETAIL1 HMD-1 1050 2150 P 45 8

103.1 Electrical room 103 HMF-1 190 P DETAIL1 HMD-1 1050 2150 P 45 9

104.1 Sprinkler room 104 IMF-1 175 P DETAIL 3 IMD-1 1050 2150 P 6

105.1 Washroom 105 HMF-1 190 P DETAIL1 HMD-1 1050 2150 P 10

LEGEND:

IMD PREF. Prefinished HMF OHD Insulated overhead door

IMF P HMF Hollow Metal Frame

MAIN FLOOR LEVEL

Insulated Metal DoorHollow Metal Door

Insulated Metal Frame Paint

New ULCV EATV Storage facility Petawawa Job No. L-P90-2500/029 DOOR SCHEDULE

Section 08 00 00Page 1

June 29, 2016.

National Defence UNCLASSIFIED Section 08 11 00 New ULCV & EATV Metal Doors and Frames Page 1 Storage Facility Garrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29 Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 GENERAL





.4 Section 07 21 31 – Sprayed Insulation – Polyurethane Foam


.6 Section 08 71 10 - Door Hardware

.7 Section 08 80 50 - Glazing


1.2 REFERENCES

.1 American Society for Testing and Materials International (ASTM) .1 ASTM A653/A53M-145E1, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. .2 ASTM E90-09, Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements.

.2 Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CSA G40.20-13/G40.21-13, General Requirements for Rolled or Welded Structural Quality Steel/Structural Quality Steel. .2 CSA W59-13, Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding).

.3 Canadian Steel Door Manufacturers' Association (CSDMA)

.4 National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) .1 NFPA 252-12, Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. .2 NFPA 80-16, Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives.

.5 Underwriters' Laboratories of Canada (ULC) .1 CAN/ULC 702-14, Standard for Thermal Insulation Mineral Fibre, for Buildings .2 CAN/ULC 704-11, Standard for Thermal Insulation, Polyurethane and Polyisocyanurate Boards, Faced.


.3 ULC 104-10, Standard Method for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. .4 ULC 105-09, Standard Specification for Fire Door Frames Meeting the Performance Required by ULC CAN4-S104.


.1 Provide fire labelled frames and doors for openings requiring fire protection or acoustical ratings. Test products for fire rating in conformance with CAN4-S104 and listed by nationally recognized agency having factory inspection services. Test products for acoustical rating in conformance with ASTM E90.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


.2 Provide shop drawings: .1 Indicate each type of door, material, steel core thicknesses, mortises, reinforcements, location of exposed fasteners, glazed and louvred openings, arrangement of hardware, fire ratings and finishes. .2 Indicate each type frame material, core thickness, reinforcements, glazing stops, location of anchors and exposed fastenings, reinforcing, fire ratings and finishes .3 Include schedule identifying each unit, with door marks and numbers relating to numbering on drawings and door schedule. .4 Submit test and engineering data, and installation instructions.


.1 Provide operation and maintenance data in accordance with Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Hot dipped galvanized steel sheet: to ASTM A 653M, ZF75 for interior installations, Z275 for exterior and secure door installations, minimum nominal base steel thickness of 1.6mm.


.2 Reinforcement channel: to CSA G40.20/G40.21, Type 44W, coating designation to ASTM A653M, ZF75

2.2 DOOR CORE MATERIALS

.1 Honeycomb core

.2 Stiffened with insulated core.

.3 Stiffeners: minimum 0.91mm thick Z-bars

.4 Fibreglass: to CAN/ULC S702, semi-rigid, minimum density 24 kg/m³.

.5 Exterior doors: Polyurethane: to CAN/ULC S704 rigid, modified polyurethane, closed cell board. Density 32 kg/m³.

2.3 ADHESIVES

.1 Honeycomb and steel stiffened cores and steel components: heat resistant, resin reinforced neoprene/rubber (polychloroprene) based, low viscosity, contact cement.

.2 Polyurethane cores: heat resistant, epoxy resin based, low viscosity, contact cement.

2.4 PRIMER

.1 Low VOC type recommended by door and frame manufacturer.

2.5 PAINT

.1 Field paint steel doors and frames in accordance with Section 09 91 99 - Painting. Provide final finish free of scratches or other blemishes.

2.6 ACCESSORIES

.1 Door silencers: single stud rubber/neoprene type.

.2 Exterior top cap: rigid polyvinylchloride extrusion conforming to CGSB 41-GP-19Ma.

.3 Fabricate glazing stops for door slabs as formed primed channels for paint-finish, nominal 25mm exposed face, accurately fitted and fastened to frame sections with counter-sunk oval head sheet metal screws.

.1 Provide glazing stops for all indicated glazing sizes with


custom rounded corners of nominal 100mm radius.

.4 Metallic paste filler: to manufacturer's standard.

.5 Fire labels: metal riveted.

.6 Sealant: in accordance with Section 07 92 00 - Sealants

.7 Glazing: in accordance with Section 08 80 50 - Glazing

.8 Make provisions for side lite glazing as indicated and provide necessary glazing stops.

.1 Provide removable primed steel glazing beads for use with glazing tapes and compounds and secured with countersunk stainless steel screws .2 Design exterior glazing stops to be tamperproof.

2.7 FRAMES FABRICATION GENERAL

.1 Fabricate frames in accordance with CSDMA specifications.

.2 Fabricate frames to profiles and maximum face sizes as indicated.

.3 Exterior frames: 1.6 mm welded thermally broken type construction.

.4 Interior frames: 1.6 mm welded type construction.

.5 Factory blank, reinforce, drill and tap frames for surface, recessed, mortised, templated and electronic hardware as required using templates provided by finish hardware supplier.

.6 Provide factory installed boxes for fire rated frames complete with conduit connectors to suit electrified hardware installations.

.7 Protect mortised cut outs with steel guard boxes.

.8 On site modifications are not acceptable.

.9 Prepare frame for door silencers, 3 for single door, 2 at head for double door.

.10 Manufacturer's nameplates on frames and screens are not permitted.

.11 Conceal fastenings except where exposed fastenings are indicated.

.12 Provide factory-applied touch up primer at areas where zinc coating has been removed during fabrication.

.13 Insulate exterior frame components with polyurethane insulation.


2.8 FRAME ANCHORAGE

.1 Provide appropriate anchorage to floor and wall construction.

.2 Locate each wall anchor immediately above or below each hinge reinforcement on hinge jamb and directly opposite on strike jamb.

.3 Provide 2 anchors for rebate opening heights up to 1520 mm and 1 additional anchor for each additional 760 mm of height or fraction thereof.

.4 Locate anchors for frames in existing openings not more than 150 mm from top and bottom of each jambs and intermediate at 660 mm on centre maximum.

2.9 FRAMES: WELDED TYPE

.1 Welding in accordance with CSA W59.

.2 Accurately mitre or mechanically joint frame product and securely weld on inside of profile.

.3 Cope accurately and securely weld butt joints of mullions, transom bars, centre rails and sills.

.4 Grind welded joints and corners to a flat plane, fill with metallic paste and sand to uniform smooth finish.

.5 Securely attach floor anchors to inside of each jamb profile.

.6 Weld in 2 temporary jamb spreaders per frame to maintain proper alignment during shipment.

2.10 DOOR FABRICATION GENERAL

.1 Doors: swing type, flush, with provision for glass and/or louvre openings as indicated.

.1 Overall nominal thickness: 44mm

.2 Exterior doors: polyurethane insulated core.

.3 Interior doors: steel stiffened core, honeycomb or insulated core.

.4 Seam treatment: fabricate doors with longitudinal edges spot welded at 100mm centres, finished flush and smooth.

.5 Factory blank, reinforce, drill and tap doors for surface, recessed, mortised, templated and electrified hardware as required using templates provided by finish hardware supplier.

.6 On site modifications are not acceptable.


.7 Factory reinforce doors as required for hardware. Provide flush PVC top caps to exterior doors.

.8 Provide factory-applied touch-up primer at areas where zinc coating has been removed during fabrication.

.9 Provide fire labelled doors for those openings requiring fire protection ratings, as scheduled. Test such products in conformance with CAN4 S104 or NFPA 252 and list by nationally recognized agency having factory inspection service and construct as detailed in Follow-Up Service Procedures/Factory Inspection Manuals issued by listing agency to individual manufacturers.

.10 Manufacturer's nameplates on doors are not permitted.

2.11 EXTERIOR DOORS AND FRAMES

.1 Fabricate doors by using insulated core.

.2 Thermal break for frames: rigid polyvinylchloride extrusion conforming to CGSB 41-GP-19Ma.

.3 Fabricate thermally broken frames separating exterior parts form interior parts with continuous interlocking thermal break.

.4 Apply spray-urethane foam insulation continuously within frame adjacent to substrate in accordance with Section 07 21 31 – Sprayed Insulation – Polyurethane Foam

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION GENERAL

.1 Install labelled steel fire rated doors and frames to NFPA 80 except where specified otherwise.

.2 Install doors and frames to CSDMA Installation Guide.

3.2 FRAME INSTALLATION

.1 Set frames plumb, square, level and at correct elevation.

.2 Secure anchorages and connections to adjacent construction.

.3 Brace frames rigidly in position while building-in. Install temporary horizontal wood spreader at third points of door opening to maintain frame width. Provide vertical support at centre of head for openings over 1200 mm wide. Remove temporary spreaders after frames are built-in.


.4 Make allowances for deflection of structure to ensure structural loads are not transmitted to frames.

.5 Caulk perimeter of frames between frame and adjacent material.

3.3 DOOR INSTALLATION

.1 Install doors and hardware in accordance with hardware templates and manufacturer's instructions and Section 08 71 10

.2 Provide even margins between doors and jambs and doors and finished floor surface as follows.

.1 Hinge side: 1.0 mm.

.2 Latchside and head: 1.5 mm.

.3 Finished floor surface: 13 mm.

.3 Adjust operable parts for correct function.

.4 Install louvers and glazing as required.

3.4 FINISH REPAIRS

.1 Fill exposed frame anchors and surfaces with imperfections with metallic paste filler and sand to a uniform smooth finish.

END OF SECTION

National Defence UNCLASSIFIED Section 08 37 13 New ULCV & EATV Sectional Overhead Doors Page 1 Storage Facility Garrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29 Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 GENERAL





.4 Section 08 80 50 - Glazing

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 American Society for Testing and Materials International, (ASTM). .1 ASTM A1008/A1008M-15, Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable.

.2 Canadian Standards Association (CSA International). .1 CAN/CSA G164-M92, Hot Dip Galvanizing of Irregularly Shaped Articles.


.1 Design Requirements. .1 Design exterior door assembly to withstand wind load of 2 kPa with a maximum horizontal deflection of 1/180 of opening width. .2 Design door panel assemblies with minimum thermal insulation factor 3 RSI. .3 Design door assembly to withstand minimum 50,000 cycles per annum, and 5 years total life cycle.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

.1 Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.

.2 Product Data: .1 Submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and data sheet.

.3 Shop Drawings .1 Indicate sizes, service rating, types, materials, operating mechanisms, glazing locations and details, hardware and accessories, required clearances and electrical connections.


.4 Manufacturer's Instructions: .1 Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.


.1 Provide operation and maintenance data for overhead door hardware for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals



.2 Pre-Installation Meetings: conduct pre-installation meeting to verify project requirements, manufacturer's installation instructions and manufacturer's warranty requirements.



1.8 MAINTENANCE

.1 Extra Materials. .1 Provide spare parts in accordance with Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals .2 Provide spare parts for doors as follows:

.1 Door hinges: 10.

.2 Weatherstripping: 2 complete perimeter sets .3 Store where directed. Identify each part and reference to appropriate door.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Steel Tube: ASTM A513 and ASTM A500/A500M.

.2 Steel Sheets: Steel sheets of commercial quality, complying with ASTM A1011/A1011M hot-rolled steel sheet.

2.2 FABRICATION

.1 Acceptable products: .1 Upwardor Thermalex 2000 TX500, 50mm thickness with 26 gauge face sheets. .2 Thermastop Mark II, 50mm thick with 26 gauge face sheets.


.3 Wayne Dalton Thermospan 200, 50mm thickness with 27 gauge face sheets.

.2 Fabricate all components to dimensions, square in all directions with maximum deviation of 3mm in 6m for bow, warp or out of plane in both vertical and horizontal.

.3 Factory finish: Door panels and tube frames finished with manufacturer’s standard epoxy primer and polyurethane top coat. Standard colour to be selected by DCC Representative.

.4 Hardware: manufacturer's commercial grade tracks and brackets, wheels, guides.

.5 Weatherstripping: manufacturer's standard adjustable and replaceable weatherstripping for jambs, head and sill of each opening.

2.3 ELECTRICAL OPERATOR

.1 overhead mounted electro-mechanical drive unit for high cycle operation. Operator comprised of electric motor, gear reducer and rotating drive arm.

.2 Operator to be instantly reversible, open and close rapidly and start and stop gradually. Operator to be adjustable to fully clear opening, automatically lock door in closed position and equipped with disengaging mechanism to convert to free wheeling mode for manual operation.

.3 Electric motor of sufficient size to operate doors under normal operating conditions at no more than 75% of rated capacity.

.4 Electric Controls: Controls furnished by door manufacturer complete for each door in accordance with the NEMA standards. Incoming electrical: 208/230VAC 3-phase.

.5 Operation: .1 Pushbuttons (interior) for each door with one (1) momentary pressure three-button push-button station marked “OPEN”, “CLOSE” and “STOP”. Push button enclosures to be NEMA 4. .2 Limit switches to stop the travel of door in fully open or fully closed position .3 Safety edges: electric safety edges on leading edge of all doors to reverse door upon contact with obstruction .4 Photo eyes: One (1) exterior jamb mounted, thru-beam type photo eyes, NEMA 4 rated

.6 Mounting brackets: galvanized steel, size and gauge to suit conditions.


PART 3 EXECUTION



3.2 INSTALLATION

.1 Rigidly support rail and operator and secure to supporting structure.

.2 Touch-up steel doors with VOC-compliant finish where original finish damaged during fabrication or installation.

.3 Install operator including electrical motors, controller units, pushbutton stations, relays and other electrical equipment required for door operation.

.4 Lubricate and adjust door operating components to ensure smooth opening and closing of doors.

.5 Adjust weather stripping to form a weather tight seal.

.6 Adjust doors for smooth operation.

3.3 CLEANING


.2 Remove traces of primer, caulking; clean doors and frames.

END OF SECTION

National Defence UNCLASSIFIED Section 08 71 10 New ULCV & EATV Door Hardware Page 1 Storage Facility Garrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29 Project No.: L-P90-2500/029 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED SECTIONS .1 Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures .2 Section 01 74 21 – Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal .2 Section 08 11 00 Metal Doors and Frames 1.2 REFERENCES .1 Canadian Steel Door and Frame Manufacturers’ Association CSDFMA). .2 CSDFMA Canadian Metric Guide for Steel Doors and Frames (Modular Construction): standard hardware location dimensions, or as indicated for special conditions. .4 American National Standards Institute / Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association. 1.3 SUBMITTALS .1 Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures .2 Product Data: .1 Submit manufacturer’s printed product literature, specifications and data sheets indicating hardware proposed, including ANSI function where ANSI used in this specification, grade, type, series, BHMA finish, fire label listing .3 Hardware List: .1 Indicate specified hardware, including make, model, base material, function, size, finish and other pertinent information. .2 When preparing the Finish Hardware schedule to submit for approval review specifications and drawings, confirming quantities and detailing, .4 Manufacturer’s Instructions: .1 Submit manufacturer’s installation instructions. .5 Closeout Submittals: .1 Provide operation, maintenance data, parts list and manufacturer’s instructions for each type of locksets, fire exit hardware, door closers, door operators and door holders for incorporation into closeout manual

National Defence UNCLASSIFIED Section 08 71 10 New ULCV & EATV Door Hardware Page 2 Storage Facility Garrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29 Project No.: L-P90-2500/029 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING .1 Packing, Shipping, Handling and Unloading: .1 Store finishing hardware in locked, clean and dry area. .2 Package each item of hardware including fastenings, separately or in like groups of hardware, label each package as to item definition and location. 1.5 WASTE DISPOSAL AND MANAGEMENT .1 Remove and recycle or dispose of packaging materials in accordance with Section 01 74 21 – Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal 1.6 MAINTENANCE .1 Extra Materials: .1 Provide maintenance materials in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. .2 Supply two sets of wrenches for locksets, exit devices, door closers and door operators. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 HARDWARE ITEMS .1 Door hardware, as specified, to be certified to ANSI/BHMA standards. .2 Use one manufacturer’s products only for all similar items. 2.2 DOOR HARDWARE .1 Butts and Hinges to ANSI/BHMA A156.1 .1 Full mortise, anti-friction concealed ball bearing. .2 NRP - non removable pin. .2 Continuous Hinges to ANSI/BHMA A156.26 .1 Continuous hinges shall be of aluminum material, edge mount (concealed leaf), heavy duty, no inset, minimum thirty- two thrust bearings, staggered screw holes. Factory cut to length required for door height. .3 Bored and Preassembled Locks and Latches shall comply with ANSI/BHMA A156.2 .1 Heavy duty cylindrical locksets. Lever handle design to be flat face(127mm long) with end returning to 8mm from face of door .2 Provide dust boxes behind all strikes. .3 Functions as specified. .4 Mortise Locks and Latches, Series 1000 to ANSI/BHMA A156.13

National Defence UNCLASSIFIED Section 08 71 10 New ULCV & EATV Door Hardware Page 3 Storage Facility Garrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29 Project No.: L-P90-2500/029 .1 Heavy duty mortise type. Series 1000, grade 1. Lever handle design to be flat face(127mm long) with end returning to 8mm from face of door. .2 Provide dust boxes behind all strikes. .3 Functions as specified. .5 Auxiliary Locks and Associated Products. Cylinders to ANSI/BHMA A156.5 .6 Exit Devices to ANSI/BHMA A156.3 .7 Architectural Door Trim. Door pulls to ANSI/BHMA A156.6 .1 25.4mm flat face, radius back, “D” shape, 228.6mm centres on 101.6mm x 406.4mm x .050 rectangular backplate. Type 304 stainless steel material. .8 Door Controls - Closers to ANSI/BHMA A156.4 .1 Heavy duty. Full rack and pinion hydraulic action. Cast iron cylinder body. Adjustable spring power and back check. Full plastic cover. Provide adapter plates as required. .2 DEL - delayed action EDA - extra duty arm .9 Architectural Door Trim. Push, Kick and Armor Plates to ANSI/BHMA A156.6 .1 1.27mm material type 304 stainless steel. Bevelled edges. Height as specified x length to suit .10 Door Control - Overhead Stops and Holders to ANSI/BHMA A156.8 .11 Auxiliary Hardware. Floor/Wall Stops to ANSI/BHMA A156.16 .1 Cast brass/bronze material except where specified zinc die cast. .2 Rear portion of one piece cast base shall have a stud to prevent rotation. Rise to suit door undercut. .3 Wall stops to have a metal backplate secured to wall with (2) screws and shields. Housing and rubber insert fits over backplate and is secured with inconspicuous set screw. No screws or holes shall be visible on face of bumper. .12 Threshold to ANSI/BHMA A156.21 .1 Extruded thermally broken aluminum. Slope and height to meet barrier free accessible requirements. Width to suit jamb and floor conditions. Oversized in length to allow coping around pressed steel frame faces. .13 Door Gasketing and Edge Seal Systems. Door Sweeps to ANSI/BHMA A156.22 .1 Aluminum extrusion c/w black nylon bristles. Applied to bottom exterior face of door. Predrilled with oblong screw holes for adjustment.

National Defence UNCLASSIFIED Section 08 71 10 New ULCV & EATV Door Hardware Page 4 Storage Facility Garrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29 Project No.: L-P90-2500/029 .14 Door Gasketing and Edge Seal Systems. Weatherstripping to ANSI/BHMA A156.22 .1 Extruded aluminum with silicone rubber insert. Predrilled with oblong screw holes for adjustment. Designed to provide continuous weather seal at head and jambs. Surface hardware to be attached to frame through weatherstrip section. Confirm frame stop width sufficient to support 38.1±mm wide extrusion. Provide shim as required. .2 Extruded aluminum c/w silcone insert. Predrilled with oblong screw holes for adjustment. 2.3 FASTENINGS .1 All hardware is to be installed using manufactures’ supplied fasteners. .2 Supply screws, bolts, expansion shields and other fastening devices required for satisfactory installation and operation of hardware. .3 Exposed fastening devices to match finish hardware. .4 Where pull is scheduled on one side of door and push plate on other side, supply fastening devices, and install so pull can be secured through door from reverse side. Install push plate to cover fasteners. .5 Push and kick plates shall be supplied with countersunk, oval head, flush mounting socket screws to suit door material. 2.4 KEYING .1 Prepare a detailed keying schedule in co-operation with and to approval of the DCC Representative. .2 All permanent cylinders are to be supplied keyed into keying system as follows: - master keyed - keyed alike or different .3 All permanent keys are to be delivered directly to the DCC Representative .4 All cylinders are to be supplied with cams / tailpieces suitable for specified lock functions. Supply all compression rings, trim collars and blocking rings to suit. .5 The Contractor is responsible for providing cylinders as required for his own us during the period of construction.

National Defence UNCLASSIFIED Section 08 71 10 New ULCV & EATV Door Hardware Page 5 Storage Facility Garrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29 Project No.: L-P90-2500/029 2.5 FINISHES .1 Recommended Practices for Materials and Finishes: Hinges 628 clear anodized aluminum 630 stainless steel metal, satin 652 satin chromium plating on steel Locksets 626 satin chromium plated Exit Devices 626 chromium plated 689 spray painted aluminum Door Pulls 628 satin aluminum, clear anodized 630 stainless steel, satin Flushbolts 626 satin chromium plated Door Closers 689 spray painted aluminum SRI special rust inhibitor Door Operators CLR ANO clear anodized aluminum Push/Kick plates 630 stainless steel, satin Overhead stops 630 stainless steel, satin Floor/Wall Stop 626 satin chromium Threshold & AL W/Stripping clear anodized aluminum 2.6 ABBREVIATIONS HMD hollow metal door INS. HMD insulated hollow metal door PSF pressed steel frame LH left hand RH right hand LHR left hand reverse RHR right hand reverse MS machine screw WS wood screw HR/FR hour/fire rated T.B. thermally broken (threshold) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS .1 Compliance: comply with manufacturer’s written data, including product technical bulletins, product catalogue installation instructions, product carton installation instructions and data sheets. .2 When requested, furnish metal door and frame manufacturers with complete instructions and templates for preparation of their work to receive hardware. .3 Furnish manufacturer’s instructions for proper installation of each hardware component.

National Defence UNCLASSIFIED Section 08 71 10 New ULCV & EATV Door Hardware Page 6 Storage Facility Garrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29 Project No.: L-P90-2500/029 3.2 INSTALLATION .1 Install hardware to standard hardware location dimensions in accordance with Canadian Metric Guide for Steel Doors and Frames (Modular Construction) prepared by Canadian Steel Door and Frame Manufacturers’ Association, or as indicated for special conditions. .2 Provide backboxes and conduits with pull wires and power supply for all access control systems and related hardware. .3 Kick plates are to be installed 6.35mm maximum up from the bottom edge of door push side, with the exception of doors where a lip threshold is being used. Then install kick plates to clear threshold not greater than a 6.35mm. On single doors install in the centre of the door equally spaced to clear between the frame jamb stops and/or weatherstripping. On pairs of doors install 6.35mm maximum from meeting edge of doors and the correct distance away from hinge edge of door to clear frame jamb stop and/or weatherstripping. .4 Ensure walls are properly blocked to prevent damage wherever surface mounted hardware i.e. wall stops are to be used. .5 Thresholds are to be extended from masonry opening to masonry opening and are to be coped around the pressed steel frames. Installer to caulk threshold base to ensure proper seal. .6 Weatherstripping and surface smoke seals are not to be installed until final coat of paint has been applied to the door and frame and is completely dry. .7 Door Supplier, when templating, must consider surface mounted weatherstripping thickness. Exit device strikes, door closer parallel arm brackets and overhead stop/holder brackets will mount on top of the weatherstripping. .8 All existing door hardware and fasteners removed and not being re-used is to be turned over to the DCC Representative. 3.3 ADJUSTING .1 Adjust door hardware for optimum, smooth operating condition, safety and for weather tight closure. .2 Lubricate hardware, operating equipment and other moving parts. .3 Adjust door hardware to provide tight fit at contact points with frames. 3.4 CLEANING .1 Perform cleaning after installation to remove construction and accumulated environmental dirt.

National Defence UNCLASSIFIED Section 08 71 10 New ULCV & EATV Door Hardware Page 7 Storage Facility Garrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29 Project No.: L-P90-2500/029 .2 Clean hardware with damp cloth and approved non-abrasive cleaner. Polish hardware in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. .3 Remove protective material from hardware items where present. .4 Upon completion of installation, remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment barriers. 3.5 HARDWARE SCHEDULE .1 Hardware schedule as follows: GROUND FLOOR ITEM # 1 1 SGL DOOR 101.1 ITEM # 2 1 SGL DOOR 101.4 ITEM # 3 1 SGL DOOR 101.5 ITEM # 4 1 SGL DOOR 101.8 ITEM # 5 1 SGL DOOR 101.9 1050mm x 2150mm x 45mm DOOR TYPE: IMD-1; DETAIL 2. INSULATED METAL DOOR/ INSULATED METAL FRAME

3 EACH HINGES TA386 5 X 4 NRP C32D 1 EACH LOCK GUARD M930LGSS C32D 1 EACH EXIT DEVICE 8910 C32D 1 EACH DOOR CLOSER 351 P3 EN 1 EACH KICKPLATE GSH80A 200MM X 40MM LDW

C32D TAPE 1 EACH WEATHERSTRIP 290APK AL 1 EACH OVERHEAD STOP 590SC26D 1 EACH THRESHOLD 2005AT 1 EACH DOOR SWEEP 18100CNB

ITEM # 6 1 SGL DOOR 104.1 1050mm x 2150mm x 45mm DOOR TYPE: IMD-1; DETAIL 2. INSULATED METAL DOOR/ INSULATED METAL FRAME 3 EACH HINGES TA386 5 X 4 NRP C32D

1 EACH LOCK GUARD M930LGSS C32D 1 EACH DOOR CLOSER 351 P3 EN 1 EACH KICKPLATE GSH80A 200MM X 40MM LDW

C32D TAPE 1 EACH WEATHERSTRIP 290APK AL 1 EACH OVERHEAD STOP 590SC26D 1 EACH THRESHOLD 2005AT 1 EACH DOOR SWEEP 18100CNB

National Defence UNCLASSIFIED Section 08 71 10 New ULCV & EATV Door Hardware Page 8 Storage Facility Garrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29 Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

ITEM # 7 1 PAIR DOORS 102.1

2/1050mm x 2150mm x 45mm DOOR TYPE: IMD-2; DETAIL 2. INSULATED METAL DOOR/ INSULATED METAL FRAME 6 EACH HINGES TA386 5 X 4 NRP C32D 2 EACH FLUSH BOLT GSH 401 C26D

1 EACH MORTISE STOREROOM 8204 LNJ C26D LOCKSET

1 EACH LOCK GUARD M930LGSS C32D 1 EACH ABLOY MORTISE CY415N ASSEMBLED CYLINDER CYLINDER 1 EACH KEYING GMK TO BUILDING SYSTEM 2 EACH DOOR CLOSER 351 P3 EN 2 EACH KICKPLATE GSH80A 200MM X 40MM LDW C32D TAPE 1 EACH WEATHERSTRIP 290APK AL 2 EACH OVERHEAD STOP 590SC26D 1 EACH THRESHOLD 2005AT 2 EACH DOOR SWEEP 18100CNB 1 SET DOOR GASKET S88BL ASTRAGAL SEAL 1 EACH BY OTHERS/ASTRAGAL BY DOOR SUPPLIER

ITEM # 8 1 SGL DOOR 102.2 ITEM # 9 1 SGL DOOR 103.1 1050mm x 2150mm x 45mm DOOR TYPE: HMD-1; DETAIL 1. HOLLOW METAL DOOR/HOLLOW METAL FRAME ¾ HR Fire Label

3 EACH CONCEALED BEARING TA714 4.5 X NRP C26D HINGE 1 EACH MORTISE CLASSROOM 8237 LNJ C26D LOCKSET 1 EACH ABLOY MORTISE CY415N ASSEMBLED CYLINDER CYLINDER 1 EACH KEYING GMK TO BUILDING SYSTEM 1 EACH DOOR CLOSER 1431 PS EN – SURFACE MOUNTED 1 EACH KICKPLATE GSH80A 200MM X 40MM LDW C32D TAPE

National Defence UNCLASSIFIED Section 08 71 10 New ULCV & EATV Door Hardware Page 9 Storage Facility Garrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29 Project No.: L-P90-2500/029 ITEM # 10 1 SGL DOOR 105.1

1050mm x 2150mm x 45mm DOOR TYPE: HMD-1; DETAIL 1. HOLLOW METAL DOOR/HOLLOW METAL FRAME

3 EACH CONCEALED BEARING TA714 4.5 X 4 NRP C26D

HINGE 1 EACH MORTISE PRIVACY 8265 LNJ C26D SET 1 EACH OCCUPANCY INDICATOR 185P C26D C/W EMERGENCY RELEASE

1 EACH HOOK GSH307 C26D 1 EACH FLOOR STOP GSH 209 C26D

END OF SECTION

National Defence UNCLASSIFIED Section 09 91 99 New ULCV & EATV Painting Page 1 Storage Facility Garrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29 Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 GENERAL





1.2 REFERENCES

.1 Master Painters Institute (MPI) .1 MPI Architectural Painting Specifications Manual, 2015.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

.1 Submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures

.2 Product Data: .1 Submit product data and instructions for each paint and

coating product to be used.


.1 Provide operation and maintenance data in accordance with Section 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals.

.2 Provide additional unopened 1 litre can of each paint formula and colour used in project. Store where directed by DCC Representative.

1.5 STORAGE AND HANDLING

.1 Storage and Protection: .1 Provide and maintain dry, temperature controlled, secure

storage. .2 Store materials and supplies away from heat generating

devices. .3 Store materials and equipment in well ventilated area

within temperature as recommended by manufacturer.


.1 Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 21 – Waste Management and Disposal


1.7 SITE CONDITIONS

.1 Lighting: .1 Provide minimum lighting level of 323 Lux on surfaces to be

painted.

.2 Temperature, Humidity and Substrate Moisture Content Levels: .1 Apply paint finishes when ambient air and substrate

temperatures at location of installation can be satisfactorily maintained during application and drying process, within MPI and paint manufacturer's prescribed limits.

.2 Test concrete, masonry and plaster surfaces for alkalinity as required.

.3 Apply paint to adequately prepared surfaces, when moisture content is below paint manufacturer's prescribed limits.

.3 Additional application requirements: .1 Apply paint finish in areas where dust is no longer being

generated by related construction operations or when wind or ventilation conditions are such that airborne particles will not affect quality of finished surface.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Paint materials listed in the MPI Approved Products List (APL) are acceptable for use on this project.

.2 Provide paint materials for paint systems from single manufacturer.

.3 Conform to latest MPI requirements for all painting work including preparation and priming.

.4 Materials (primers, paints, coatings, varnishes, stains, lacquers, fillers, thinners, solvents, etc.) in accordance with MPI - Architectural Painting Specification Manual and MPI - Maintenance Repainting Manual "Approved Product" listing.

2.2 COLOURS

.1 Colour schedule will be based upon selection of 20 base colours and 12 accent colours.


2.3 MIXING AND TINTING

.1 Perform colour tinting operations prior to delivery of paint to site, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

.2 Use and add thinner in accordance with paint manufacturer's recommendations. Do not use kerosene or similar organic solvents to thin water-based paints.

.3 Thin paint for spraying in accordance with paint manufacturer's instructions.

.4 Re-mix paint in containers prior to and during application to ensure break-up of lumps, complete dispersion of settled pigment, and colour and gloss uniformity.

2.4 GLOSS/SHEEN RATINGS

.1 Paint gloss/sheen to be defined in accordance with MPI values. Gloss/Sheens to be selected after award of contract. Provide for a total of 3 different gloss/sheens for each painting formula.

2.5 EXTERIOR PAINTING

.1 Structural Steel and Metal Fabrications: .1 EXT 5.1D - Alkyd finish.

.2 Exposed mechanical pipe installations: .1 EXT 5.1D - Alkyd finish

.3 Galvanized Metal: .1 EXT 5.3A - Latex finish.

2.6 INTERIOR PAINTING

.1 Concrete masonry units: .1 INT 4.2D – High performance architectural latex .2 INT 4.2F - Epoxy, water-based or 100% solids .3 Concrete block filler prep base, Latex to MPI Product 4

.2 Structural Steel and Metal Fabrications: .1 INT 5.1S Institutional Low-Odour, Low VOC

.3 Exposed metal pipe installations: .1 INT 5.1CC – water based dryfall over shop applied primer

or; .2 INT 5.1C – water based dryfall for unprimed surfaces

.4 Exposed steel deck, joists, beams, mechanical and electrical


installations .1 INT 5.3H – Latex Dryfall

.5 Galvanized Metal, including, but not limited to, exposed ducts, pipes, metalworks, doors and frames, etc…: .1 INT 5.3A- Acrylic finish over cementitious primer.

.6 Floor line painting: .1 Epoxy in accordance with Section 09 67 16 - Epoxy Flooring

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

.1 Compliance: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations or specifications, including product technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and data sheet.

.2 Perform preparation and operations for interior painting in accordance with MPI - Architectural Painting Specifications Manual and MPI - Maintenance Repainting Manual except where specified otherwise.

3.2 EXAMINATION

.1 Investigate existing substrates for problems related to proper and complete preparation of surfaces to be painted. Report to DCC Representative; damages, defects, unsatisfactory or unfavourable conditions before proceeding with work.

.2 Conduct moisture testing of surfaces to be painted using properly calibrated electronic moisture meter, except test concrete floors for moisture using simple "cover patch test". Do not proceed with work until conditions fall within acceptable range as recommended by manufacturer.

3.3 PREPARATION

.1 Protection: .1 Protect existing building surfaces and adjacent structures

from paint spatters, markings and other damage by suitable non-staining covers or masking. If damaged, clean and restore surfaces as directed by DCC Representative.

.2 Protect factory finished products and equipment.

.2 Surface Preparation: .1 Remove electrical cover plates, light fixtures, surface

hardware on doors, bath accessories and other surface


mounted equipment, fittings and fastenings prior to undertaking painting operations. Identify and store items in secure location and re-installed after painting is completed.

.2 Move and cover furniture and portable equipment as necessary to carry out painting operations. Replace as painting operations progress.

.3 Place "WET PAINT" signs in occupied areas as painting operations progress.

.3 Clean and prepare surfaces in accordance with MPI - Architectural Painting Specification Manual specific requirements and coating manufacturer's recommendations.

.4 Prevent contamination of cleaned surfaces by salts, acids, alkalis, other corrosive chemicals, grease, oil and solvents before prime coat is applied and between applications of remaining coats. Apply primer, paint, or pretreatment as soon as possible after cleaning and before deterioration occurs.

.5 Where possible, prime non-exposed surfaces of interior wood surfaces before installation. Always prime every surface, exposed and concealed, of exterior wood surfaces prior to application. .1 Apply vinyl sealer to MPI #36 over knots, pitch, sap and

resinous areas. .2 Apply wood filler to nail holes and cracks.

.6 Sand and dust between coats as required to provide adequate adhesion for next coat and to remove defects visible from a distance up to 1000 mm.

.7 Clean metal surfaces to be painted by removing rust, loose mill scale, welding slag, dirt, oil, grease and other foreign substances in accordance with MPI requirements.

.8 Touch up of shop primers with primer as specified.

.9 Do not apply paint until prepared surfaces have been inspected by DCC Representative.

3.4 APPLICATION

.1 Conform to manufacturer's application instructions unless specified otherwise.

.2 Apply coats of paint continuous film of uniform thickness. Repaint thin spots or bare areas before next coat of paint is applied.


.3 Allow surfaces to dry and properly cure after cleaning and between subsequent coats for minimum time period as recommended by manufacturer.

.4 Sand and dust between coats to remove visible defects.

.5 Apply minimum one coat of primer and 2 coats of finish colour and gloss/sheen to all areas unless indicated otherwise.

.6 Where clear finishes or stains indicated, apply minimum 2 coats of stain and minimum 3 coats of clear finishing product.

.7 Finish surfaces both above and below sight lines as specified for surrounding surfaces, including such surfaces as tops of interior cupboards and cabinets and projecting ledges.

.8 Finish closets and alcoves as specified for adjoining rooms.

.9 Finish top, bottom, edges and cutouts of doors after fitting as specified for door surfaces.

3.5 MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

.1 Paint conduits, piping, hangers, ductwork and other mechanical and electrical equipment exposed in finished areas, to match adjacent surfaces, except as indicated.

.2 Do not paint over nameplates or pre-finished equipment.

.3 Keep sprinkler heads free of paint.

.4 Paint disconnect switches for fire alarm system and exit light systems in red enamel.

.5 Paint natural gas piping to match adjacent surface finish, except on roof which is to be safety yellow.

.6 Paint both sides and edges of backboards for telephone and electrical equipment before installation with ULC fire-resistive coating.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Traffic Signage Page 1Storage FacilityGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 This section specifies requirements for supplying, installingand painting roadside and overhead signs.



1.3 REFERENCES

.1 American Association of State Highway and TransportationOfficials (AASHTO).1 Standard Specifications for Structural Supports forHighway Signs, Luminaires and Traffic Signals, (5th Edition).

.2 ASTM International.1 ASTM A 123/A 123M-13, Standard Specification for Zinc(Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products..2 ASTM A 276-13a, Standard Specification for StainlessSteel Bars and Shapes..3 ASTM B 209M-10, Standard Specification for Aluminum andAluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate Metric..4 ASTM B 210M-12, Standard Specification forAluminum-Alloy Drawn Seamless Tubes Metric..5 ASTM B 211M-12E1, Standard Specification for Aluminumand Aluminum-Alloy Bar, Rod and Wire Metric.

.3 Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB).1 CGSB 62-GP-9M-80, Prefabricated Markings, Positionable,Exterior, for Aircraft Ground Equipment and Facilities..2 CGSB 62-GP-11M-78, Marking Material, Retroreflective,Enclosed Lens, Adhesive Backing and Amendment.

.4 CSA International.1 CSA G40.20/G40.21-13, General Requirements for Rolled orWelded Structural Quality Steel/Structural Quality Steel..2 CAN/CSA O80 Series-08(R2012), Wood Preservation..3 CSA O121-08(R2013), Douglas Fir Plywood..4 CSA W47.2-11, Certification of Companies for FusionWelding of Aluminum..5 CAN/CSA-Z809-08(R2013), Sustainable Forest Management.

.5 Forest Stewardship Council (FSC).1 FSC-STD-01-001-2004, FSC Principle and Criteria forForest Stewardship.



.6 Green Seal Environmental Standards (GS).1 GS-11-11, Paints and Coatings.

.7 Transportation Association of Canada (TAC).1 Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Services, LatestEdition (MUTCD).

.8 South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD),California State, Regulation XI. Source Specific Standards.1 SCAQMD Rule 1113-A2011, Architectural Coatings.

.9 Sustainable Forestry Initiative (SFI).1 SFI-2010-2014 Standard.

.10 The Master Painters Institute (MPI).1 Architectural Painting Specification Manual - currentedition.



.2 Product Data:.1 Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed productliterature and data sheets for traffic signage, includingproduct characteristics, performance criteria, physical size,finish and limitations.

.3 Sustainable Design Submittals:.1 Construction Waste Management:

.1 Submit project Waste Management Plan WasteReduction Workplan highlighting recycling and salvagerequirements..2 Submit calculations on end-of-project recyclingrates, salvage rates, and landfill rates demonstratingthat 75 % of construction wastes were recycled orsalvaged

.2 Erosion and Sedimentation Control: submit copy oferosion and sedimentation control plan in accordance with EPA832/R-92-005 authorities having jurisdiction..3 Wood Certification: submit vendor's manufacturer'sChain-of-Custody Certificate number for CAN/CSA-Z809 or FSCor SFI certified wood..4 Construction IAQ Management Plan: submit Indoor AirQuality (IAQ) Plan for construction and pre-occupancy phasesof building..5 Low-Emitting Materials:



.1 Submit listing of adhesives and sealants andpaints and coatings used in building, comply with VOCand chemical component limits or restrictionsrequirements..2 Submit listing of composite wood products used inbuilding, stating that they contain no addedurea-formaldehyde resins, and laminate adhesives used inbuilding, stating that they contain nourea-formaldehyde.


.1 Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance withSection 01 61 00 - Common Product Requirements and withmanufacturer's written instructions.


.3 Storage and Handling Requirements:.1 Store materials off ground in dry location and inaccordance with manufacturer's recommendations in clean, dry,well-ventilated area..2 Replace defective or damaged materials with new.

.4 Develop Construction Waste Management Plan Waste ReductionWorkplan related to Work of this Section.

.5 Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return bymanufacturer of pallets, crates, padding, and packagingmaterials as specified in Construction Waste Management PlanWaste Reduction Workplan in accordance with Section 01 74 21- Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Sign supports:.1 Steel posts: to CSA G40.21, 4 m long, flanged "U" shapedin cross section, measuring 65 mm wide x 30 mm deep. Metalthickness: 4.5 mm. Hot dipped galvanized: toASTM A 123/A 123M..2 Standard tubular supports for small signs: toASTM B 210M..3 Anchor and connecting bolts, 'U' clamps andmiscellaneous hardware for overhead sign installations.



.4 Fasteners: bolts, nuts, washers and other hardware forroadside signs to be cast aluminum alloy, or galvanizedsteel.

.2 Signboards:.1 Aluminum sheet: to ASTM B 209M, precut to requireddimensions.

.1 Thickness for signboards up to 750 mm wide: 1.6 mmminimum..2 Thickness for signboards 750-1200 mm wide: 2.1 mmminimum.

.2 Aluminum extrusions: to ASTM B 211M, 150 mm or 300 mmpanels suitable for bolting together..3 T-shape stiffeners for signboards: to ASTM B 210M..4 Connecting straps and brackets: to ASTM B 209M..5 Aluminum materials: to ASTM B 209M..6 Xylene thinner: to..7 Chemical conversion coating for aluminum:..8 Primer for aluminum: to MPI # 8 , VOC limit of 250 g/Lto GS-11..9 Silk screen ink:

.1 Transparent or opaque colours: in accordance withMUTCD.

.10 Reflective sheeting and tape: to CGSB 62-GP-11M.Adhesive, class of reflectivity and colour in accordance withMUTCD..11 Transparent tape: flexible, smooth-surfaced, moistureresistant tape with pressure sensitive adhesive..12 Clear varnish protective coat: MPI-EXT 6.4H VOC limit of350 g/L to SCAQMD Rule 1113.

.3 Sign identification:.1 Apply sign number and date of installation with 25 mmhigh stencil painted black letters on lower left back face ofeach signboard.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Sign bridge:.1 Erect sign bridge as indicated. Permissible tolerance:12 mm maximum departure from vertical.

.2 Sign support:



.1 Erect supports as indicated. Permissible tolerance: 50mm maximum departure from vertical for direct buriedsupports. Where separate concrete footings have been placed,erect posts with base plates resting on levelling nuts andrestrained with nuts and washers. Permissible tolerance: 12mm maximum departure from vertical..2 Coat underside of base plate with corrosion protectivepaint before installation. Connect shoe base to shaft withinside and outside fillet welds..3 Close open aluminum tubes and posts with aluminum cap.Cut oblong holes in shoe bases to drain condensation. Installaluminum bolt cover on each base plate restraining nut..4 Erect posts plumb and square to details as indicated..5 Single channel steel posts:

.1 Drive to required depth without damage to posts.

.2 If rock or concrete is encountered, drill hole torequired depth and set post in sand..3 In finished concrete surfaces, backfill withconcrete or grout. Protect from adverse conditions untilcured.

.3 Signboard:.1 Fasten signboards to supporting posts and brackets asindicated..2 Fasten lane markers to signboard..3 Use strapping with crimped or bolted connections wheresigns fastened to utility poles or light poles..4 Use T-shape aluminum stiffeners to join portions of signpanel on site. Cover face of T-stiffener with materialidentical to face of sign panel.

3.2 CORRECTING DEFECTS

.1 Correct defects, identified by DCC Representative, in signmessage, consistency of reflectivity, colour or illumination.Correct angle of signboard and adjust luminaire aiming anglefor optimum performance during night conditions to approvalof DCC Representative.

3.3 CLEANING





.3 Waste Management: separate waste materials for reuse andrecycling in accordance with Section 01 74 21 -Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal..1 Carefully dismantle and salvage wood, aluminum and steelmaterials for reuse and recycling.

3.4 PROTECTION

.1 Protect installed products and components from damage duringconstruction.

.2 Repair damage to adjacent materials caused by traffic signageinstallation and salvage operations.

END OF SECTION

National Defence UNCLASSIFIED Section 10 28 10 New ULCV & EATV Toilet and Bath Accessories Page 1 Storage Facility Garrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29 Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 GENERAL





1.2 REFERENCES

.1 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) .1 ASTM A167-99 (2009), Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. .2 ASTM B456-03 (2009), Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Copper Plus Nickel Plus Chromium and Nickel Plus Chromium. .3 ASTM A653/A653M-09a, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

.2 Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB) .1 CAN/CGSB 1.81-M90, Air Drying and Baking Alkyd Primer for Vehicles and Equipment. .2 CAN/CGSB 1.88-92, Gloss Alkyd Enamel, Air Drying and Baking. .3 CAN/CGSB 12.5-M86, Mirrors, Silvered. (Withdrawn) .4 CGSB 31-GP-107Ma, Non-inhibited Phosphoric Acid Base Metal Conditioner and Rust Remover.

.3 Canadian Standards Association (CSA) .1 CAN/CSA G164-M92 (R2003), Hot Dip Galvanizing of Irregularly Shaped Articles.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

.1 Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.

.2 Shop Drawings: .1 Indicate size and description of components, base material, surface finish inside and out, hardware and locks, attachment devices, description of rough-in-frame, building-in details of anchors for grab bars.


.1 Provide operation and maintenance data in accordance with Section 01


78 00 - Closeout Submittals.


.1 Separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 21 – Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal.

1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS

.1 Provide special tools required for accessing, assembly/disassembly or removal for toilet and bath accessories in accordance with requirements specified in Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Sheet steel: to ASTM A653/A653M with ZF001 designation zinc coating.

.2 Stainless steel sheet metal: to ASTM A167, Type 304, with satin finish.

.3 Stainless steel tubing: Type 304, satin finished commercial grade, seamless welded, 1.2 mm wall thickness.

.4 Fasteners: concealed screws and bolts hot dip galvanized, exposed fasteners to match face of unit. Expansion shields fibre, lead or rubber as recommended by accessory manufacturer for component and its intended use.

2.2 COMPONENTS

.1 Toilet tissue dispenser: break-resistant plastic body for double side-by-side jumbo tissue rolls of nominal 230mm diameter, front loading and a sliding panel to control tissue roll access. Overall dimensions approximately 300m wide X 480mm height X 130mm deep.

.2 Waste receptacle: surface mounted wall unit, interior of 0.8 mm galvanized steel, exterior of 0.8 mm stainless steel, satin finish. Removable 60L capacity galvanized steel waste receptacle, removable front panel lockable towel compartment access door with continuous full height stainless steel hinge.

.3 Paper towel dispenser: break-resistant plastic body for 1 paper roll of 244m length and 1 paper roll of 91m length, manual feed operator at edge of unit to permit paper feed by hand or arm. Overall dimensions approximately 375mm height X 290mm width X 240mm deep.

.4 Grab bars: 38 mm diameter x 1.6 mm wall tubing of stainless steel,


76 mm diameter wall flanges, concealed screw attachment, flanges welded to tubular bar, provided with steel back plates and all accessories. Knurl bar at area of hand grips. Grab bar material and anchorage to withstand downward pull of 2.2 kN.

.5 Soap dispenser: break-resistant plastic body with removable soap reservoir of minimum 950mL capacity, push cover dispenser activation at base of unit.

2.3 FABRICATION

.1 Weld and grind joints of fabricated components flush and smooth. Use mechanical fasteners only where approved.

.2 Wherever possible form exposed surfaces from one sheet of stock, free of joints.

.3 Brake form sheet metal work with 1.5 mm radius bends.

.4 Form surfaces flat without distortion. Maintain flat surfaces without scratches or dents.

.5 Back paint components where contact is made with building finishes to prevent electrolysis.

.6 Hot dip-galvanize concealed ferrous metal anchors and fastening devices to CSA G164.

.7 Shop assemble components and package complete with anchors and fittings.

.8 Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to job site at appropriate time for building-in. Provide templates, details and instructions for building in anchors and inserts.

.9 Provide steel anchor plates and components for installation on studding and building framing.

2.4 FINISHES

.1 Chrome and nickel plating: to ASTM B456, satin polished finish.

.2 Baked enamel: condition metal by applying one coat of metal conditioner to CGSB 31-GP-107Ma, apply one coat Type 2 primer to CAN/CGSB 1.81 and bake, apply two coats Type 2 enamel to CAN/CGSB 1.88 and bake to hard, durable finish. Sand between final coats. Colour selected from standard range by DCC Representative.

.3 Manufacturer's or brand names on face of units not acceptable.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Install and secure accessories rigidly in place as follows: .1 Stud walls: install steel back-plate to stud prior to plaster or drywall finish. Provide plate with threaded studs or plugs. .2 Hollow masonry units or existing plaster/drywall: use toggle bolts drilled into cell/wall cavity. Solid masonry, marble, stone or concrete: use bolt with lead expansion sleeve set into drilled hole.

.3 Install grab bars on built-in anchors provided by bar manufacturer.

.4 Use tamper proof screws/bolts for fasteners.

.5 Fill units with necessary supplies shortly before final acceptance of building.

.6 Install mirrors by concealed mounting in accordance with manufacturer`s printed instructions.

3.2 SCHEDULE

.1 Locate accessories where indicated and as follows. Exact locations determined by DCC Representative.

.2 Toilet tissue dispenser: one adjacent to each toilet.

.3 Waste receptacle: minimum one in each washroom or as indicated.

.4 Paper towel dispenser: adjacent to lavatory in rooms with only 1 water closet.

.5 Grab bar: two in each barrier free washroom and in each shower. Install in accordance with NBC requirements.

.6 Soap dispenser: one at each lavatory.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Fire Extinguuishers and Page 1Storage Facility Safety BlanketsGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES

.1 Health Canada/Workplace Hazardous Materials InformationSystem (WHMIS).1 Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).

.2 National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).1 NFPA 10-2013, Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers.



.2 Product Data:.1 Submit manufacturer's printed product literature anddatasheet and include product characteristics, performancecriteria, physical size, finish and limitations..2 Submit two copies WHMIS MSDS - Material Safety DataSheets.

.3 Provide shop drawings.

.4 Quality control submittals: submit following in accordancewith Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control..1 Manufacturer's Instructions: submit manufacturer'sinstallation instructions and special handling criteria,installation sequence and cleaning procedures.

.5 Closeout Submittals:.1 Provide operation and maintenance data for incorporationinto manual specified in Section 01 78 00 - CloseoutSubmittals.


.1 Waste Management and Disposal:.1 Separate waste materials for reuse and recycling inaccordance with Section 01 74 21 - Construction/DemolitionWaste Management and Disposal.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MULTI-PURPOSE DRY CHEMICAL EXTINGUISHERS

.1 Stored pressure rechargeable type with hose and shut-offnozzle, ULC labelled for A, B and C class protection..1 Sizes as indicated.

2.2 EXTINGUISHER BRACKETS

.1 Type recommended by extinguisher manufacturer.

2.3 CABINETS

.1 Flush surface or semi-recessed type as indicated, constructedof 1.6 mm thick steel, 180 degrees opening door of 2.5 mmthick steel with latching device.

.2 Cabinet to maintain fire resistive rating of construction inwhich they occur.

.3 Cabinet door: with 5 mm full glass panel metal panel.

.4 Finish:.1 Tub: prime coated..2 Door and frame: No.4 satin finish Type 304 stainlesssteel.

2.4 IDENTIFICATION

.1 Identify extinguishers in accordance with recommendations ofANSI/NFPA 10 and CAN/ULC-S508.

.2 Attach bilingual tag or label to extinguishers, indicatingmonth and year of installation. Provide space for servicedates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


.1 Compliance: comply with manufacturer's writtenrecommendations, including product technical bulletins,handling, storage and installation instructions, anddatasheets.



3.2 INSTALLATION

.1 Install or mount extinguishers in cabinets or on brackets asindicated in accordance with NFPA 10.

END OF SECTION

National Defence UNCLASSIFIED Section 10 51 13 New ULCV & EATV Metal Lockers Page 1 Storage Facility Garrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29 Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 GENERAL





1.2 SUBMITTALS

.1 Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures

.2 Indicate type and class of locker, thicknesses of metal, fabricating and assembly methods, assembled banks of lockers, tops rods hooks shelves bases, trim, numbering, filler panels, end/back panels doors handles locking method ventilation method finishes.


.1 Provide operation and maintenance data in accordance with Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals


.1 Separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 21 – Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS

.1 Lockers: prefinished with baked enamel, freestanding. .1 Size: nominal 860 x 860 x 1650mm .2 Assembly: fully welded construction. .3 Double wall 18 gauge construction .4 minimum 150kg shelf capacity .5 Recessed paddle handles .6 Continuous piano hinge .7 Adjustable levelling feet .8 Lock: Minimum 2.7 mm hasp, tamperproof, permitting recessed pad locking. .9 Meets NFPA standards-self closing to comply with NFPA 1 fire code

National Defence UNCLASSIFIED Section 10 51 13 New ULCV & EATV Metal Lockers Page 2 Storage Facility Garrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29 Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

.10 Colour: Yellow- for aerosols, gasoline and flammable liquids.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Prefabricated lockers units to be welded by locker manufacturer

.2 Assemble and install lockers in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

.3 Securely fasten lockers to grounds and nailing strips.

.4 Set lockers on bases.

.5 Install wall trim around locker banks within finished wall assemblies.

.6 Install filler panels (false fronts) where required and where obstructions occur.

.7 Install finished end back panels to exposed ends backs of locker banks.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Common Work Results Page 1Storage Facility for MechanicalGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUBMITTALS

.1 Submittals: in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - SubmittalProcedures.

.2 Shop drawings; submit drawings stamped and signed byprofessional engineer registered or licensed in Province ofOntario, Canada, where requested.

.3 Shop drawings to show:.1 Mounting arrangements..2 Operating and maintenance clearances.

.4 Shop drawings and product data accompanied by:.1 Detailed drawings of bases, supports, and anchor bolts..2 Acoustical sound power data, where applicable..3 Points of operation on performance curves..4 Manufacturer to certify current model production..5 Certification of compliance to applicable codes.

.5 Closeout Submittals:.1 Provide operation and maintenance data for incorporationinto manual specified in Section 01 78 00 - CloseoutSubmittals..2 Operation and maintenance manual approved by, and finalcopies deposited with, DCC Representative before finalinspection..3 Operation data to include:

.1 Control schematics for systems includingenvironmental controls..2 Description of systems and their controls..3 Description of operation of systems at various loadstogether with reset schedules and seasonal variances..4 Operation instruction for systems and component..5 Description of actions to be taken in event ofequipment failure..6 Valves schedule and flow diagram..7 Colour coding chart.

.4 Maintenance data to include:.1 Servicing, maintenance, operation andtrouble-shooting instructions for each item of equipment..2 Data to include schedules of tasks, frequency, toolsrequired and task time.

.5 Performance data to include:.1 Equipment manufacturer's performance datasheets withpoint of operation as left after commissioning iscomplete..2 Equipment performance verification test results..3 Special performance data as specified.



.4 Testing, adjusting and balancing reports as specifiedin Section 23 05 93 - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing forHVAC.

.6 Approvals:.1 Submit 3 copies of draft Operation and MaintenanceManual to DCC Representative for approval. Submission ofindividual data will not be accepted unless directed byDCC Representative..2 Make changes as required and re-submit as directed byDCC Representative.

.7 Additional data:.1 Prepare and insert into operation and maintenancemanual additional data when need for it becomes apparentduring specified demonstrations and instructions.

.8 Site records:.1 Provide sets of white prints as required for eachphase of work. Mark changes as work progresses and aschanges occur...2 Transfer information weekly to reproducibles,revising reproducibles to show work as actually installed..3 Use different colour waterproof ink for each service..4 Make available for reference purposes and inspection.

.9 As-built drawings:.1 Prior to start of Testing, Adjusting and Balancingfor HVAC, finalize production of as-built drawings..2 Identify each drawing in lower right hand corner inletters at least 12 mm high as follows: - "AS BUILTDRAWINGS: THIS DRAWING HAS BEEN REVISED TO SHOW MECHANICALSYSTEMS AS INSTALLED" (Signature of Contractor) (Date)..3 Submit to DCC Representative for approval and makecorrections as directed..4 Perform testing, adjusting and balancing for HVACusing as-built drawings..5 Submit completed reproducible as-built drawings withOperating and Maintenance Manuals.

.10 Submit copies of as-built drawings for inclusion in finalTAB report.


.1 Quality Assurance: in accordance with Section 01 45 00 -Quality Control.

.2 Health and Safety Requirements: do construction occupationalhealth and safety in accordance with Section 01 70 12 - SafetyRequirements.



1.3 MAINTENANCE

.1 Furnish spare parts in accordance with Section 01 78 00 -Closeout Submittals as required by equipment specificationsections.

.2 Provide one set of special tools required to service equipmentas recommended by manufacturers and in accordance with Section01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.


.1 Waste Management and Disposal:.1 Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal:separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordancewith Section 01 74 21 - Construction/Demolition WasteManagement and Disposal.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Materials and products in accordance with Section 01 47 15 -Sustainable Requirements: Construction.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PAINTING REPAIRS AND RESTORATION

.1 Do painting in accordance with Section 09 91 99 - Painting.

.2 Prime and touch up marred finished paintwork to match original.

.3 Restore to new condition, finishes which have been damaged.

3.2 CLEANING

.1 Clean interior and exterior of all systems including strainers.Vacuum interior of ductwork and air handling units.


.1 Manufacturer's Field Services:



.1 Obtain written report from manufacturer verifyingcompliance of Work, in handling, installing, applying,protecting and cleaning of product and submit Manufacturer'sField Reports as described in PART 1 - SUBMITTALS..2 Provide manufacturer's field services consisting ofproduct use recommendations and periodic site visits forinspection of product installation in accordance withmanufacturer's instructions..3 Schedule site visits, to review Work, as directed in PART1 - QUALITY ASSURANCE.

3.4 DEMONSTRATION

.1 DCC Representative will use equipment and systems for testpurposes prior to acceptance. Supply labour, material, andinstruments required for testing.

.2 Supply tools, equipment and personnel to demonstrate andinstruct operating and maintenance personnel in operating,controlling, adjusting, trouble-shooting and servicing of allsystems and equipment during regular work hours, prior toacceptance.

.3 Use operation and maintenance manual, as-built drawings, andaudio visual aids as part of instruction materials.

.4 Instruction duration time requirements as specified inappropriate sections.

.5 Contractor to video all commissioning/training for Owner'sfuture reference.

3.5 PROTECTION

.1 Protect equipment and systems openings from dirt, dust, andother foreign materials with materials appropriate to system.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Dry Pipe Sprinkler Page 1Storage Facility SystemsGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 Section 23 05 48 - Vibration and Seismic Controls.

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 American National Standards Institute/National FireProtection Association (ANSI/NFPA).1 ANSI/NFPA 13-2016, Standard for the Installation ofSprinkler Systems..2 ANSI/NFPA 25-2014, Standard for the Inspection, Testing,and Maintenance of Water-Based Fire Protection Systems..3 ANSI/NFPA 291-2016, Recommended Practice for Fire FlowTesting and Marking of Hydrants.

.2 Underwriter's Laboratories of Canada (ULC).1 CAN/ULC S543-09, Internal Lug Quick Connect Coupling forFire Hose.

.3 Canadian Forces Fire Marshall (CFFM) Directive FMD 4003.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

.1 Product Data:.1 Submit manufacturer's printed product literature,specifications and datasheet in accordance with Section 01 3300 - Submittal Procedures.

.1 Submit 2 copies of Workplace Hazardous MaterialsInformation System (WHMIS) Material Safety Data Sheets(MSDS) in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - SubmittalProcedures.

.2 Shop Drawings:.1 Submit shop drawings and product data to complywith NFPA 13 and in accordance with Section 01 33 00 -Submittal Procedures. Shop drawings to be stamped byProfessional Engineer licensed to practice in Provinceof Ontario, Canada..2 Indicate;

.1 Materials.

.2 Finishes.

.3 Supports.

.4 Reinforcements.

.5 Accessories.

.6 System layouts..3 Samples:

.1 Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00- Submittal procedures.



.2 Submit samples of following:.1 Each type of sprinkler head..2 Signs and valve tags.

.4 Quality assurance submittals: submit following inaccordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.

.1 Test reports:.1 Test and submit certificates as required inNFPA 13.

.2 Certificates:.1 Submit certificates signed by manufacturercertifying that materials comply with specifiedperformance characteristics and physicalproperties.

.3 Instructions:.1 Submit manufacturer's installationinstructions.

.4 Manufacturer's Field Reports: manufacturer's fieldreports specified..5 Closeout Submittals:

.1 Provide maintenance data for incorporationinto manual specified in Section 01 78 00 -Closeout Submittals..2 Provide detailed hydraulic calculationsincluding: summary sheet, Contractor's Materialsand Test Certificate for piping, as well as otherdeliverables for incorporation into manualspecified in Section 01 78 00 - CloseoutSubmittals, and in accordance with ANSI/NFPA 13.


.1 Qualifications:.1 Installer: certified sprinkler installer licensed inOntario, in accordance with Ontario Provincial requirements.

.2 Health and Safety:.1 Do construction occupational health and safety inaccordance with Section 01 70 12 - Safety Requirements.

1.5 ENGINEERING DESIGN CRITERIA

.1 Automatic dry pipe fire suppression sprinkler system designedin accordance with requirements and advisory provisions ofANSI/NFPA 13 and Canadian Forces Fire Marshal Directive FMD4003, using following parameters:.1 Hazard:

.1 To suit occupancy as indicated.

.2 Pipe size and layout:.1 Hydraulic design. Hydraulic designs shallinclude a minimum 34.5 kPa (5 psi) safety factor.



.2 Sprinkler head layout: to ANSI/NFPA 13 or asdirected by authority having jurisdiction,whichever is more stringent.

.3 Water supply:.1 Conduct flow and pressure test of water supplyin vicinity of project to obtain criteria for basesof design in accordance with ANSI/ NFPA 13.

.4 Zoning:.1 System zoning as indicated.

.2 Water supply data for hydraulic design shall be no more than12 months old.

.3 Devices and equipment for fire protection service: ULCapproved for use in dry pipe sprinkler systems.

.4 Drainage:.1 Sprinkler system shall have proper drainage (toexterior) as per NFPA 13.

.5 Seismic restraints for fire protection system to comply withNFPA 13 and in accordance with Section 23 05 48 - Vibrationand Seismic Controls.

.6 Include with each system materials, accessories, andequipment inside and outside building to provide each systemcomplete and ready for use.

.7 Design and provide each system to give full consideration toblind spaces, piping, electrical equipment, ducts, and otherconstruction and equipment in accordance with detailed shopdrawings.

.8 Location of Sprinkler Heads:.1 Locate heads in relation to ceiling and spacing ofsprinkler heads not to exceed that permitted by NFPA 13..2 Uniformly space sprinklers on branch..3 Locate sprinkler heads in consistent pattern.

.9 Water Distribution:.1 Make distribution uniform throughout the area in whichsprinkler heads will open..2 Discharge from individual heads in hydraulically mostremote area to be 100% of specified density.

.10 Density of Application of Water:.1 Size pipe to provide specified density when system isdischarging specified total maximum required flow.

.11 Sprinkler Discharge Area:.1 Area: hydraulically most demanding area as defined inNFPA 13.



.12 Outside Hose allowances:.1 Include allowance in hydraulic calculations for outsidehose streams.

.13 Installing contractor shall allow for flow testing ofavailable water supply from nearest hydrant to water entry inaccordance with NFPA 291.


.1 Packing, shipping, handling and unloading: Deliver, store andhandle in accordance with Section 01 61 00 - Common ProductRequirements.

.2 Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance withmanufacturer's written instructions.

.3 Storage and Protection:.1 Store materials indoors in dry location..2 Store and protect materials from exposure to harmfulweather conditions and at temperature and humidity conditionsrecommended by manufacturer.


.1 Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal:separate waste materials for recycling.

1.8 MAINTENANCE

.1 Extra Materials:.1 Provide maintenance materials in accordance with Section01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.

.2 Provide spare sprinklers and tools as required by ANSI/NFPA13.

1.9 APPROVALS

.1 Sprinkler Contractor shall send all documents to DCCRepresentative for approval by CFFM and design consultant.

.2 Sprinkler system and shop drawings shall be submitted to CFFMas a complete package, after review and comments are providedby the design consultant.



.3 After shop drawing review by CFFM, comments from both CFFMand design consultant shall be addressed prior to orderingand installing any equipment.

.4 CFFM shall witness testing and perform testing withassistance from sprinkler contractor.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPE, FITTINGS AND VALVES

.1 Pipe:.1 Ferrous: to ANSI/NFPA 13..2 Copper tube: to ANSI/NFPA 13.

.2 Fittings and joints to ANSI/NFPA 13:.1 Ferrous: screwed, flanged or roll grooved.

.1 Grooved joints designed with two ductile ironhousing segments, flush seal gasket for dry service, andzine-electroplated steel bolts and nuts. Cast withoffsetting angle-pattern bolt pads for rigidity andvisual pad-to-pad offset contact..2 Copper tube: screwed, soldered, brazed, grooved..3 Fittings: ULC approved for use in dry pipesprinkler systems.

.3 Auxiliary valves:.1 ULC listed for fire protection service..2 Up to NPS 2: bronze, screwed ends, OS & Y gate..3 NPS 2-1/2 and over: cast iron or ductile, flanged orroll grooved ends, indicating butterfly valve..4 Swing or spring-actuated check valves..5 Ball drip..6 Tamper devices wired back to fire alarm panel..7 A ULC listed double check valve assembly with OS&Yvalves on inlet and outlet shall be provided for the fireprotection water supply..8 Provide supervisory switches on shut-off valves.

.4 Pipe hangers:.1 ULC listed for fire protection services.

.5 Seismic bracing per requirements of NFPA 13 on piping.

2.2 SPRINKLER HEADS

.1 General: to ANSI/NFPA 13 and ULC listed for fire services.



2.3 SPRINKLER HEAD TYPE A

.1 Upright bronze, glass bulb type.

2.4 SPRINKLER HEAD TYPE C

.1 pendant chrome glass bulb type.

2.5 SPRINKLER TYPE F

.1 Side wall chrome link and level type.

2.6 SUPERVISORY SWITCHES

.1 General: to ANSI/NFPA 13 and ULC listed for fire service.

.2 Valves:.1 Mechanically attached to valve body, with normally openand normally closed contacts and supervisory capability.

.3 Pressure alarm switch:.1 With normally open and normally closed contacts a ndsupervisory capacity.

.4 Flow switch type:.1 With normally open and normally closed contracts andsupervisory capability.

2.7 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION

.1 To ANSI/NFPA 13 and ULC listed, Siamese type, location asindicated. connection specifications to be compatible withlocal fire department.

.2 Polished bronze, recessed, with identifying sign cast onplate. Threaded metal caps and chains.

.3 Install a 90-degree elbow with drain connection at low-pointnear each fire department connection to allow for systemdrainage to prevent freezing.

2.8 DRY PIPE VALVE

.1 ULC listed.

.2 Cast iron or ductile, flanged or grooved end type, sized tosuit water main.



.3 Components:.1 Accelerator..2 Air maintenance device with low pressure alarm..3 Alarm pressure switch with supervisory capability..4 Pressure gauges..5 Drain valve..6 Test valve with associated piping..7 Shut off valve - OS&Y with tamper-proof device wiredback to fire alarm panel..8 Quick-opening device.

2.9 COMPRESSED AIR SUPPLY

.1 Automatic Air Compressor, complete with reservoir and airmaintenance device.

.2 ULC listed.

.3 Capacity:.1 To restore normal air pressure in system within 30minutes..2 To provide air pressure in accordance with instructionsheet furnished with dry pipe valve.

.4 Piping: ferrous, NPS 3/4 screwed joints and fittings, toANSI/NFPA 13.

2.10 PRESSURE GAUGES

.1 ULC listed for fire protection service.

.2 Maximum limit of not less than twice normal working pressureat point where installed.

2.11 RELIEF VALVES

.1 ULC listed.

2.12 SPARE PARTS CABINET

.1 For storage of maintenance materials, spare sprinkler headsand special tools. Number and types of extra sprinkler headsas specified in NFPA 13.

.2 Construct to sprinkler head manufacturers standard.



2.13 SIGNS

.1 Signage to be to ANSI/NFPA 13.

.2 Permanently fix hydraulic design data nameplates to riser foreach system.

2.14 PIPE SLEEVES

.1 Provide pipe sleeves where piping passes through walls,floors, and roofs.

.2 Secure sleeves in position and location during construction.

.3 Provide sleeves of sufficient length to pass through entirethickness of walls, floors, and roofs.

.4 Provide 2.5 cm minimum clearance between exterior of pipingand interior of sleeve or core-drilled hole..1 Firmly pack space with mineral wool insulation..2 Seal space at both ends of sleeve or core-drilled holewith plastic waterproof cement which will dry to firm butpliable mass, provide mechanically adjustable segmentedelastomeric seal..3 Fire stopping of sleeves to be provided as per Section07 81 00 - Applied Fireproofing.

.5 Sleeves in Masonry and Concrete Walls, Floors and Roofs:.1 provide hot-dip galvanized steel, ductile-iron,cast-iron sleeves..2 Core drilling of masonry and concrete may be provided inlieu of pipe sleeves when cavities in core-drilled hole arecompletely grouted smooth.

.6 Sleeves in Other Than masonry and Concrete Walls, Floors, andRoofs:.1 Provide 0.61 mm thick galvanized steel sheet.

2.15 INSPECTOR'S TEST CONNECTION

.1 Locate inspector's test connection at hydraulically mostremote part of each system, provide test connectionsapproximately 3 m above floor for each sprinkler system orportion of each sprinkler system equipped with alarm device.

.2 Provide test connection piping to location where dischargewill be readily visible and where water may be dischargedwithout property damage.



.3 Provide discharge orifice of same size as correspondingsprinkler orifice.

2.16 BACKFLOW PREVENTOR

.1 ULC listed, double security check assembly with OS&Y valveson inlet and outlet.

.2 Ductile iron body.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


.1 Compliance: comply with manufacturer's writtenrecommendations or specifications, including producttechnical bulletins, handling, storage and installationinstructions, and datasheet.

3.2 INSTALLATION

.1 Install, inspect and test to acceptance in accordance withANSI/NFPA 13. CFFM FMD 4003 and NFPA 25.

.2 Testing to be witnessed by Canadian Forces Fire Marshal.

.3 Install fire department connections as indicated.

.4 Install spare parts cabinet as indicated or in locationapproved by DCC Representative.

.5 Pressure gauges:.1 Location:

.1 On water side and air side of dry pipe valve.

.2 At air receiver.

.3 In each independent pipe from air supply to drypipe valve..4 At exhausters and accelerators..5 As required by NFPA 13.

.2 Install to permit removal.

.3 Locate so as not subjected to freezing.

.6 Valve identification:.1 Identify drain valve, by-pass valves and main shut-offvalve and all auxiliary valves.




.1 Site test, inspection:.1 Perform test to determine compliance with specifiedrequirements in presence of DCC Representative..2 Test, inspect, and approve piping before covering orconcealing..3 Preliminary Tests:

.1 Hydrostatically test each system at 200 psig for a2 hour period with no leakage or reduction in pressure..2 Flush piping with potable water in accordance withNFPA 13..3 Piping above suspended ceilings: tested, inspected,and approved before installation of ceilings..4 Test alarms and other devices..5 Test water flow alarms by flowing water throughinspector's test connection. when tests have beencompleted and corrections made, submit signed and datedcertificate in accordance with NFPA 13.

.4 Formal Test and Inspections:.1 Do not submit request for formal test andinspection until preliminary test and corrections arecompleted and approved..2 Submit written request for formal inspection atleast 15 days prior to inspection date..3 Repeat required tests as directed..4 Correct defects and make additional tests untilsystems comply with contract requirements..5 Furnish appliances, equipment, instruments,connecting devices, and personnel for tests..6 Authority of Jurisdiction, will witness formaltests and approve systems before they are accepted.

.2 Manufacturer's Field Services:.1 Obtain written report from manufacturer verifyingcompliance of Work, in handling, installing, applying,protecting and cleaning of product and submit Manufacturer'sField Reports as described in PART 1 - SUBMITTALS..2 Provide manufacturer's field services consisting ofproduct use recommendations and periodic site visits forinspection of product installation in accordance withmanufacturer's instructions..3 Schedule site visits, to review Work, as directed inPART 1 - QUALITY ASSURANCE.

.3 Site Tests:.1 Conduct full-scale flow testing on dry pipe sprinklersystem to requirements of NFPA 13 and authority havingjurisdiction, whichever is more stringent..2 Testing to be witnessed by Canadian Forces Fire Marshal..3 Develop, with DCC Representative assistance, detailedinstructions for O&M of this installation.



.4 Drain dry pipe sprinkler system, pressurize and leavefully functional at conclusion of testing.

3.4 PIPE INSTALLATION

.1 Install piping straight and true to bear evenly on hangersand supports. Do not hang piping from plaster ceilings.

.2 Keep interior and ends of new piping and existing pipingthoroughly cleaned of water and foreign matter.

.3 Keep piping systems clean during installation by means ofplugs or other approved methods. When work is not inprogress, securely close open ends of piping to prevent entryof water and foreign matter.

.4 Inspect piping before placing into position.

.5 Install seismic bracing per requirements of NFPA 13 on drypipe sprinkler piping.

3.5 CLEANING

.1 Proceed in accordance with Section 01 74 11 - Cleaning.

.2 Upon completion and verification of performance ofinstallation, remove surplus materials, excess materials,rubbish, tools and equipment.

3.6 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

.1 Provide electrical work associated with this section underSection 26 05 00 - Common Work Results For Electrical.

.2 Provide fire alarm system under Section 28 31 00.01 -Multiplex Fire Alarm System.

.3 Provide control, valve supervisory switch, and fire alarmwiring, including connections to fire alarm systems, inaccordance with National Electrical Code.

.4 Provide wiring in rigid metal conduit or intermediate metalconduit.

3.7 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING WATER SUPPLY SYSTEMS

.1 Notify DCC Representative in writing at least 15 days priorto connection date.



.2 Use tappping or drilling machine valve and mechanical jointtype sleeves for connections to be made under pressure.

.3 Bolt sleeves around main piping.

.4 Bolt valve to branch connection. Open valve, attach drillingmachine, make tap, close valve, and remove drilling machine,without interruption of service.

.5 Furnish materials required to make connections into existingwater supply systems, and perform excavating, backfilling,and other incidental labour as required.

.6 Underground piping to be tested in accordance withappropriate section of NFPA 13.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Domestic Water Pipe Page 1Storage Facility CopperGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 Materials and installation for copper domestic water serviceused in the following:.1 Copper incoming domestic water service, up to NPS 2 1/2..2 Hard drawn copper domestic hot and cold water services

inside building..3 Soft copper tubing inside building..4 Tempered water service inside the building.



.2 Section 01 47 15 - Sustainable Requirements: Construction


.4 Section 01 91 13- General Commissioning (Cx) Requirements.

.5 Section 21 05 01 - Common Work Results for Mechanical

.6 Section 23 05 05 - Installation of Pipework

.7 Section 23 05 23.01 - Valves - Bronze

.8 Section 23 05 23.02 Valves - Cast Iron: Gate, Globe, Check

.9 Section 33 11 16 - Incoming Site Water Utility DistributionPiping

.10 Section 23 05 93 - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC

1.3 REFERENCES

.1 American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/American Societyof Mechanical Engineers International (ASME)..1 ANSI/ASME B16.15-2013, Cast Bronze Threaded Fittings,

Classes 125 and 250..2 ANSI/ASME B16.18-2012, Cast Copper Alloy Solder

Joint Pressure Fittings..3 ANSI/ASME B16.22-2013, Wrought Copper and Copper

Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings..4 ANSI/ASME B16.24-2011, Cast Copper Alloy Pipe Flanges

and Flanged Fittings, Class 150, 300, 400, 600, 900,1500 and 2500.



.2 American Society for Testing and Materials International,(ASTM)..1 ASTM A 307-14, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel

Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength..2 ASTM B 88M-13, Standard Specification for Seamless

Copper Water Tube (Metric)..3 ASTM F 492-95, Standard Specification for Propylene and

Polypropylene (PP) Plastic-Lined Ferrous Metal Pipe andFittings.

.3 American Water Works Association (AWWA)..1 AWWA C111-02, Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron

Pressure Pipe and Fittings.

.4 Canadian Standards Association (CSA International)..1 CSA B242-05(R2016), Groove and Shoulder Type MechanicalPipe Couplings.

.5 Department of Justice Canada (Jus)..1 Canadian Environmental Protection Act, 1999, c. 33

(CEPA).

.6 Health Canada/Workplace Hazardous Materials InformationSystem (WHMIS)..1 Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).

.7 Manufacturer's Standardization Society of the Valve andFittings Industry (MSS)..1 MSS-SP-67-11, Butterfly Valves..2 MSS-SP-70-11, Cast Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Ends.Threaded.3 MSS-SP-71-11, Cast Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and

Threaded Ends..4 MSS-SP-80-13, Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check

Valves.

.8 National Research Council (NRC)/Institute for Research inConstruction..1 NRCC 38728, National Plumbing Code of Canada (NPC) -2015.

.9 Transport Canada (TC)..1 Transportation of Dangerous Goods Act, 1992, c. 34

(TDGA).

1.4 SUBMITTALS


.2 Submit product data for following: valves.



1.5 WASTE MANAGEMENT & DISPOSAL

.1 Collect, separate and recycle all site generated wastematerials in accordance with Section 01 74 21 -Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING

.1 Domestic hot, cold and recirculation systems, tempered watersystems, within building..1 Above ground: copper tube, hard drawn, type L: to

ASTM B 88M..2 Buried or embedded: copper tube, soft annealed, type K:

to ASTM B 88M, in long lengths and with no buriedjoints.

2.2 FITTINGS

.1 Bronze pipe flanges and flanged fittings, Class 150 and 300:to ANSI/ASME B16.24.

.2 Cast bronze threaded fittings, Class 125 and 250: toANSI/ASME B16.15.

.3 Cast copper, solder type: to ANSI/ASME B16.18.

.4 Wrought copper and copper alloy, solder type: to ANSI/ASMEB16.22.

.5 NPS 2 and larger: roll grooved to CSA B242.

2.3 JOINTS

.1 Rubber gaskets, latex-free 1.6 mm thick: to AWWA C111.

.2 Bolts, nuts, hex head and washers: to ASTM A 307, heavyseries.

.3 Solder: 95/5 tin copper alloy.

.4 Teflon tape: for threaded joints.

.5 Grooved couplings: designed with angle bolt pads to providerigid joint, complete with EPDM flush seal gasket.



.6 Dielectric connections between dissimilar metals: dielectricfitting to ASTM F 492, complete with thermoplastic liner.

2.4 GATE VALVES

.1 NPS 2 and under, soldered:.1 Rising stem: to MSS-SP-80, Class 125, 860 kPa, bronze

body, screw-in bonnet, solid wedge disc as specifiedSection 23 05 23.01 - Valves - Bronze.

.2 NPS 2 and under, screwed:.1 Rising stem: to MSS-SP-80, Class 125, 860 kPa, bronze

body, screw-in bonnet, solid wedge disc as specifiedSection 23 05 23.01 - Valves - Bronze.

2.5 GLOBE VALVES

.1 NPS2 and under, soldered:.1 To MSS-SP-80, Class 125, 860 kPa, bronze body, renewable

composition disc, screwed over bonnet as specifiedSection 23 05 23.01 - Valves - Bronze.

.2 Lockshield handles: as indicated.

.2 NPS 2 and under, screwed:.1 To MSS-SP-80, Class 150, 1 MPa, bronze body, screwedover bonnet, renewable composition disc as specifiedSection 23 05 23.01 - Valves - Bronze..2 Lockshield handles: as indicated.

2.6 SWING CHECK VALVES

.1 NPS 2 and under, soldered:.1 To MSS-SP-80, Class 125, 860 kPa, bronze body, bronze

swing disc, screw in cap, regrindable seat as specifiedSection 23 05 23.01 - Valves - Bronze.

.2 NPS 2 and under, screwed:.1 To MSS-SP-80, Class 125, 860 kPa, bronze body, bronze

swing disc, screw in cap, regrindable seat as specifiedSection 23 05 23.01 - Valves - Bronze.

2.7 BALL VALVES

.1 NPS 2 and under, screwed:.1 Class 150.



.2 Bronze body, chrome plated brass stainless steel ball,PTFE adjustable packing, brass gland and PTFE BunaNseat, steel lever handle as specified Section23 05 23.01 - Valves - Bronze.

.2 NPS 2 and under, soldered:.1 To ANSI/ASME B16.18, Class 150..2 Bronze body, chrome plated brass stainless steel ball,

PTFE adjustable packing, brass gland and PTFE BunaNseat, steel lever handle, with NPT to copper adaptors asspecified Section 23 05 23.01 - Valves - Bronze.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Install in accordance with NPC Province(s) Plumbing Code andlocal authority having jurisdiction.

.2 Install pipe work in accordance with Section 23 05 05 -Installation of Pipework, supplemented as specified herein.

.3 Assemble piping using fittings manufactured to ANSIstandards.

.4 Install CWS piping below and away from HWS and HWC and otherhot piping so as to maintain temperature of cold water as lowas possible.

.5 Connect to fixtures and equipment in accordance withmanufacturer's written instructions unless otherwiseindicated.

.6 Buried tubing:.1 Lay in well compacted washed sand in accordance withAWWA Class B bedding..2 Bend tubing without crimping or constricting. Minimizeuse of fittings.

.7 Slope piping towards low points of system and install hosebibbs at low points for system drainage.

3.2 VALVES

.1 Isolate equipment, fixtures and branches with ball valves.



3.3 PRESSURE TESTS

.1 Conform to requirements of Section 21 05 01 - Common WorkResults for Mechanical.

.2 Test pressure: greater of 1 times maximum system operatingpressure or 860 kPa.

3.4 FLUSHING AND CLEANING

.1 Flush entire system for 8 h. Ensure outlets flushed for 2 h.Let stand for 24 h, then draw one sample off longest run.Submit to testing laboratory to verify that system is cleancopper to Provincial Federal potable water guidelines. Letsystem flush for additional 2 h, then draw off another samplefor testing.

3.5 PRE-START-UP INSPECTIONS

.1 Systems to be complete, prior to flushing, testing andstart-up.

.2 Verify that system can be completely drained.

.3 Ensure that pressure booster systems are operating properly.

.4 Ensure that air chambers, expansion compensators areinstalled properly.

3.6 DISINFECTION

.1 Flush out, disinfect and rinse system to approval of DCCRepresentative.

.2 Coordinate with Section 33 11 16 - Site Water UtilityDistribution Piping and Section 33 11 16 - Incoming SiteWater Utility Distribution Piping.

.3 Upon completion, provide laboratory test reports on waterquality for DCC Representative's approval.

3.7 START-UP

.1 Timing: Start up after:.1 Pressure tests have been completed..2 Disinfection procedures have been completed..3 Certificate of static completion has been issued..4 Water treatment systems operational.



.2 Provide continuous supervision during start-up.

.3 Start-up procedures:.1 Establish circulation and ensure that air is eliminated..2 Check pressurization to ensure proper operation and toprevent water hammer, flashing and/or cavitation..3 Bring HWS storage tank up to design temperature slowly..4 Monitor piping HWS and HWC piping systems for freedom ofmovement, pipe expansion as designed..5 Check control, limit, safety devices for normal and safeoperation.

.4 Rectify start-up deficiencies.

3.8 PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION

.1 Timing:.1 After pressure and leakage tests and disinfectioncompleted, and certificate of completion has been issued byauthority having jurisdiction.

.2 Procedures:.1 In accordance with Section 01 91 13 - GeneralCommissioning (Cx) Requirements..2 Confirm water quality consistent with supply standards,verifying that no residuals remain as a result of flushingand/or cleaning.

.3 Reports:.1 In accordance with Section 01 91 13 - GeneralCommissioning (Cx) Requirements..2 Include certificate of water flow and pressure testsconducted on incoming water service, demonstrating adequacyof flow and pressure.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Drainage Waste and Vent Page 1Storage Facility Piping - Cast Iron andGarrison Petawawa, ON Copper 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES

.1 ASTM International Inc..1 ASTM B 32-08(R2014), Standard Specification for SolderMetal..2 ASTM B 306-13, Standard Specification for CopperDrainage Tube (DWV)..3 ASTM C 564-14, Standard Specification for Rubber Gasketsfor Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings.

.2 Canadian Standards Association (CSA International)..1 CSA B67-1972(R1996), Lead Service Pipe, Waste Pipe,Traps, Bends and Accessories..2 CAN/CSA-B70-12, Cast Iron Soil Pipe, Fittings and Meansof Joining..3 CAN/CSA-B125.3-12, Plumbing Fittings.



.2 Product Data:.1 Provide manufacturer's printed product literature anddatasheets for adhesives, and include productcharacteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finishand limitations.


.1 Deliver, store and handle in accordance with Section 01 61 00- Common Product Requirements.

.2 Deliver materials to site in original factory packaging,labelled with manufacturer's name, address.

.3 Packaging Waste Management: in accordance with Section01 74 21 - Construction/Demolition Waste Management andDisposal.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUSTAINABLE MATERIAL

.1 Sustainable Requirements: materials and products inaccordance with Section 01 47 15 Sustainable Requirements:Construction.

2.2 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

.1 Above ground Type DWV to: ASTM B 306..1 Fittings.

.1 Cast brass: to CAN/CSA-B125.3.

.2 Wrought copper: to CAN/CSA-B125.3..2 Solder: lead free, tin-antimony or silver, to ASTM B 32.

2.3 CAST IRON PIPING AND FITTINGS

.1 Buried sanitary, storm and vent minimum NPS 3, to:CAN/CSA-B70, with one layer of protective coating of epoxy..1 Joints:

.1 Mechanical joints:.1 Neoprene or butyl rubber compression gaskets:to CAN/CSA-B70. ASTM C564 or.2 Stainless steel clamps.

.2 Above ground: to CAN/CSA-B70..1 Joints:

.1 Mechanical joints:.1 Neoprene or butyl rubber compression gasketswith stainless steel clamps.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

.1 Manufacturer's Instructions: comply with manufacturer'swritten recommendations, including product technicalbulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions,and datasheets.

3.2 INSTALLATION

.1 In accordance with Section 23 05 05 - Installation ofPipework.



.2 Install in accordance with National Plumbing Code ProvincialPlumbing Code, and local authority having jurisdiction.

3.3 TESTING

.1 Pressure test buried systems before backfilling.

.2 Hydraulically test to verify grades and freedom fromobstructions.


.1 Cleanouts:.1 Ensure accessible and that access doors are correctlylocated..2 Open, cover with linseed oil and re-seal..3 Verify that cleanout rods can probe as far as the nextcleanout, at least.

.2 Test to ensure traps are fully and permanently primed.

.3 Storm water drainage:.1 Verify domes are secure..2 Ensure weirs are correctly sized and installedcorrectly..3 Verify provisions for movement of roof system.

.4 Ensure that fixtures are properly anchored, connected tosystem and effectively vented.

.5 Affix applicable label (storm, sanitary, vent, pump dischargeetc.) c/w directional arrows every floor or 4.5 m (whicheveris less).

3.5 CLEANING

.1 Clean in accordance with Section 01 74 11 - Cleaning.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Drainage Waste and Vent Page 1Storage Facility Piping - PlasticGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES

.1 ASTM International Inc..1 ASTM D 2235-04(2011), Standard Specification for SolventCement for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Plastic Pipeand Fittings..2 ASTM D 2564-12, Standard Specification for SolventCements for Poly(Vinyl-Chloride) (PVC) Plastic PipingSystems.

.2 Canadian Standards Association (CSA International).1 CAN/CSA-Series B1800-11, Thermoplastic Nonpressure PipeCompendium - B1800 Series.

.3 Green Seal Environmental Standards (GSES).1 Standard GS-36-13, Commercial Adhesives.




.2 Product Data:.1 Provide manufacturer's printed product literature anddatasheets for piping and adhesives, and include productcharacteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finishand limitations..2 Provide WHMIS MSDS - Material Safety Data Sheets inaccordance with Section 01 70 12 - Safety Requirements01 35 43 - Environmental Procedures.


.1 Deliver, store and handle in accordance with Section 01 61 00- Common Product Requirements.


.3 Store at temperatures and conditions recommended bymanufacturer.



.4 Packaging Waste Management: in accordance with Section01 74 21 - Construction/Demolition Waste Management andDisposal.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING AND FITTINGS

.1 For buried and aboveground DWV piping to:.1 ABS or PVC to CAN/CSA B1800.

.2 For buried and aboveground Industrial and Oily waste pipingto:.1 PVC to CAN/CSA B1800.

2.2 JOINTS

.1 Solvent weld for PVC: to ASTM D 2564.

.2 Solvent weld for ABS: to ASTM D 2235.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

.1 Manufacturer's Instructions: comply with manufacturer'swritten recommendations, including product technicalbulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions,and datasheets.

3.2 INSTALLATION

.1 In accordance with Section 23 05 05 - Installation ofPipework.

.2 Install in accordance with National Plumbing Code ProvincialPlumbing Code, and local authority having jurisdiction.

3.3 TESTING

.1 Pressure test buried systems before backfilling.

.2 Hydraulically test to verify grades and freedom fromobstructions.




.1 Cleanouts:.1 Ensure accessible and that access doors are correctlylocated..2 Open, cover with linseed oil and re-seal..3 Verify cleanout rods can probe as far as the nextcleanout, at least.

.2 Test to ensure traps are fully and permanently primed.

.3 Storm water drainage:.1 Verify domes are secure..2 Ensure weirs are correctly sized and installedcorrectly..3 Verify provisions for movement of roof system.

.4 Ensure fixtures are properly anchored, connected to systemand effectively vented.

.5 Affix applicable label (storm, sanitary, vent, pumpdischarge) c/w directional arrows every floor or 4.5 m(whichever is less).

3.5 CLEANING

.1 Clean in accordance with Section 01 74 11 - Cleaning..1 Remove surplus materials, excess materials, rubbish,tools and equipment.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Domestic Water Page 1Storage Facility HeatersGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL




.3 Section 23 05 19.01 - Thermometers and Pressure Gauges -Piping Systems.

.4 Section 23 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping andEquipment.

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 Canadian Standards Association (CSA International).1 CSA B51-14, Boiler, Pressure Vessel, and Pressure PipingCode..2 CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 110-94(R2014), Construction and Testof Electric Storage Tank Water Heaters..3 CAN/CSA C191-13, Performance of Electric Storage TankWater Heaters for Household Service..4 CAN/CSA C309-M90(R2014), Performance Requirements forGlass-Lined Storage Tanks for Household Hot Water Service.

.2 Canadian Standards Association (CSA International).1 CSA B51-14, Boiler, Pressure Vessel, and Pressure PipingCode..2 CSA C309-M90(R2014), Performance Requirements forGlass-Lined Storage Tanks for Household Hot Water Service.

1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS

.1 Submit shop drawings for review.

.2 Indicate:.1 Equipment, including connections, fittings, controlassemblies and ancillaries, identifying factory and fieldassembled.


.1 Provide maintenance and engineering data for incorporationinto manual.



1.5 WARRANTY

.1 For the Work of this Section 22 30 05 - Domestic WaterHeaters, the 12 months warranty period prescribed insubsection GC 32.1 of General Conditions "C" is extended tonumber of years specified for each product.


.1 Collect, separate and recycle all site generated wastematerials in accordance with Section 01 74 21 - Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ELECTRIC WATER HEATER

.1 To CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 110, CAN/CSA C191 and CAN/CSA C309 forglass-lined storage tanks, with 1 immersion type element,1500 W, and surface mounted or immersion type adjustablethermostats.

.2 Tank: 75 L, glass lined steel, 50 mm mineral wool orfiberglass insulation, enamelled steel jacket, 3 yearwarranty certificate.

2.2 TRIM AND INSTRUMENTATION

.1 Drain valve: NPS 1 with hose end.

.2 Thermometer: 100 mm dial type with red pointer and thermowellfilled with conductive paste.

.3 Pressure gauge: 75 mm dial type with red pointer, syphon, andshut-off cock.

.4 Thermowell filled with conductive paste for control valvetemperature sensor.

.5 ASME rated temperature and pressure relief valve sized forfull capacity of heater having discharge terminating overfloor drain and visible to operators.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations andauthority having jurisdiction.

.2 Provide insulation between tank and supports.

.3 Provide structural steel for horizontal mounted tank.


.1 Manufacturer's factory trained, certified DCC Representativeand DCC Commissioning Agent to start up and commission DHWheaters.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Plumbing Specialties Page 1Storage Facility and AccessoriesGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

.1 Section Includes:.1 Materials and installation for plumbing specialties and

accessories.

.2 Related Sections:.1 Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.2 Section 01 47 15 - Sustainable Requirements:Construction.3 Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.4 Section 01 91 13 - General Commissioning (Cx)Requirements.

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 American Society for Testing and Materials International(ASTM)..1 ASTM A 126-04(2014), Specification for Gray IronCastings or Valves, Flanges and Pipe Fittings..2 ASTM B620-15, Specification for Composition Bronze orOunce Metal Castings.

.2 American Water Works Association (AWWA)..1 AWWA C700-15, Cold Water Meters-Displacement Type,Bronze Main Case..2 AWWA C701-15, Cold Water Meters-Turbine Type forCustomer Service..3 AWWA C702-1-15, Cold Water Meters-Compound Type.

.3 Canadian Standards Association (CSA International)..1 CSA-B64 Series-11, Backflow Preventers and VacuumBreakers..2 CSA-B79-08(R2013), Floor, Area and Shower Drains, andCleanouts for Residential Construction..3 CSA-B356-10(R2015), Water Pressure Reducing Valves forDomestic Water Supply Systems.

.4 Plumbing and Drainage Institute (PDI)..1 PDI-WH201-92, Water Hammer Arresters Standard.



.2 Product Data:



.2 Product Data:.1 Submit manufacturer's printed product literature,

specifications and datasheet for fixtures and equipment..2 Indicate dimensions, construction details and materials

for specified items.

.3 Shop Drawings:.1 Submit shop drawings to indicate materials, finishes,

method of anchorage, number of anchors, dimensionsconstruction and assembly details.

.4 Certificates: submit certificates signed by manufacturercertifying that materials comply with specified performancecharacteristics and physical properties.

.5 Instructions: submit manufacturer's installationinstructions.

.6 Manufacturers' Field Reports: manufacturers' field reportsspecified.

.7 Closeout submittals: submit maintenance and engineering datafor incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00 -Closeout Submittals, include:.1 Description of plumbing specialties and accessories,

giving manufacturers name, type, model, year andcapacity.

.2 Details of operation, servicing and maintenance.

.3 Recommended spare parts list.


.1 Collect, separate and recycle all site generated wastematerials in accordance with Section 01 74 21 ConstructionWaste Management.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FLOOR DRAINS

.1 Floor Drains and Trench Drains: to CSA B79.

.2 FD-1: general duty; cast iron body round, adjustable head,nickel bronze adjustable strainer, integral seepage pan, trapprimer, and clamping collar.

.3 FD-2: heavy-duty; 200 mm square cast-iron body, integralseepage pan, clamping collar, secured nickel bronze grate,trap primer connection.



.3 FD-2: heavy-duty; 200 mm square cast-iron body, integralseepage pan, clamping collar, secured nickel bronze grate,trap primer connection.

.4 FFD-1: general duty; cast iron body round, adjustable head,nickel bronze combination strainer, integral oval funnel,trap primer, and clamping collar.

2.2 TRENCH DRAINS

.1 Pre-Cast Trench Segments:.1 General: Precast polymer concrete sections in standard2m length, with 0.5m and 1m lengths available..2 Each segment is 203 mm wide trench with radius bottomand 292.3 mm grate seat width. Invert slope is perapplication requirement.

.2 Rails:.1 Steel components: post fabrication hot dipped galvanized

63.50 mm x 6.35 mm A-36 steel angle rails. Rail length2.0 m standard with 1.0 m and 0.5 m long available.

.2 Grate rails to provide a minimum of 2.0 square inchesconcrete bearing area per inch of trench length.

.3 Grate retainers and rails to withstand the followingloads:.1 Vertical up - 2000 lbs..2 Transverse - 10000 lbs..3 Longitudinal - 10000 lbs..4 Grate retainer performance is not to degrade with

service loads or thermal cycling..5 Galvanizing: ASTM A123-89a..6 Steel: ASTM A 36/A36M-93a.

.3 Grates:.1 Ductile iron: ASTM A 536-84 (1993)..2 Grates to have a minimum of 84% open area and be flush

with top of rails..3 Trench and catch pit grating as well as trench and catch

pit body to be F900 Load Class rating in accordance withthe BS EN 1433: 2002.

.4 Pre-manufactured Catch Pits:.1 General: 12 gauge steel construction with entire

fabricated assembly hot dipped galvanized or precastpolymer concrete construction.

.2 Cover per section 2.3.3 Grates by trench drain supplier.

.3 Dimensions as indicated on plans, depth as indicated.Inlet and outlet dimensions to be coordinated withcontractor.

.4 Accessories: removable stainless steel trashbucket/strainers.



.4 Accessories: removable stainless steel trashbucket/strainers.

2.3 CLEANOUTS

.1 Cleanout Plugs: heavy cast iron male ferrule with brassscrews and threaded brass or bronze plug. Sealing-caulkedlead seat or neoprene gasket.

.2 Access Covers:.1 Wall Access: face or wall type, polished nickel bronze

round cover with flush head securing screws, bevellededge frame complete with anchoring lugs.

.2 Floor Access: round cast iron body and frame withadjustable secured nickel bronze top and:.1 Plugs: bolted bronze with neoprene gasket..2 Cover: nickel bronze, round, gasket, vandal-proof

screws.

2.4 NON-FREEZE WALL HYDRANTS

.1 Recessed with integral vacuum breaker, NPS 3/4 hose outlet,removable operating key. Polished bronze finish.

2.5 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS

.1 Copper construction, bellows or piston type: to PDI-WH201.

2.6 BACKFLOW PREVENTER DOUBLE-CHECK TYPE

.1 Preventers: to CSA B-64-Series-01 Series, double checkassembly type, consisting of two spring-loaded check valvesand two OS&Y gate valves for shutoff, and a strainer on theassembly inlet.

.2 Body: epoxy coated cast iron.

.3 Seats: bronze.

.4 Trim: stainless steel.

.5 Maximum working temperature and pressure: 1220 kPa at 43°C.

.6 Standard of Acceptance:.1 Watts Series 709..2 Walkins..3 Febco.



2.7 BACK FLOW PREVENTERS-REDUCED PRESSURE PRINCIPAL TYPE

.1 Preventers: to CSA B64-Series-01 Series, reduced pressureprincipal assembly type consisting of two spring-loaded checkvalves with intermediate relief valve assembly, two OS&Y gatevalves for shut-off, and a strainer on the assembly inlet.

.2 Body: epoxy coated cast iron.

.3 Seals: bronze.

.4 Trim: stainless steel.

.5 Test cocks: bronze.

.6 Discs: rubber.

.7 Relief valves: bronze.

.8 Maximum working temperature and pressure: 1220 kPa at 60°C.

.9 Standard of Acceptance:.1 Watts Series 909..2 Wilkins..3 Febco.

2.8 VACUUM BREAKERS

.1 Breakers: to CSA-B64 Series, vacuum breaker atmospheric hoseconnection laboratory faucet intermediate.

2.9 PRESSURE REGULATORS

.1 For main water entrance capacity:.1 Inlet pressure: 1034 kPa..2 Outlet pressure: 517 kPa.

.2 Up to NPS1-1/2 bronze bodies, screwed: to ASTM B 62.

.3 NPS2 and over, semi-steel bodies, Class 125, flanged: toASTM A 126, Class B.

.4 Semi-steel spring chambers with bronze trim.

2.10 HOSE BIBBS AND SEDIMENT FAUCETS

.1 Bronze construction complete with integral back flowpreventer, hose thread spout, replaceable composition disc,and chrome plated in finished areas.




.1 Bronze construction complete with integral back flowpreventer, hose thread spout, replaceable composition disc,and chrome plated in finished areas.

2.11 WATER METERS

.1 Displacement type to ANSI/AWWA C700-2002 for potable waterservice, accuracy within +/- 1.5%.

.2 2 Capacities:.1 Main incoming water meter: Normal flow range from 2 to100 usgpm continuous with 1.5% accuracy, NPS 1.5 flangedconnections.

.3 Continuous readout on meter pace (cu. m) and electronic pulseoutput for monitoring by BAS.

.4 Acceptable material:.1 Neptune..2 Hersey..3 Amco.

2.12 TRAP SEAL PRIMERS

.1 TP-1: Electronic Trap Primer.1 24 VAC solenoid valve with integral strainer, normallyclosed..2 Manual over ride switch/test button..3 20 mm FNPT connection..4 Calibrated manifold for equal water distribution..5 15 mm outlet compression fittings..6 Air gap backflow prevention..7 Surface mount on wall in galvanized steel enclosure..8 120 V Transformer with fuse and disconnect.

.2 TP-2:.1 Use with exposed flushometers..2 One piece, chrome plated flush connection, water

deflector to control the amount of water diverted fromthe flush.

.3 10 mm elbow and flex-bend tube connection from vacuumbreaker to wall, diverter wall flange and fittings.

.4 Chrome plated wall flange and fitting to connect to 15mm NPT pipe.



2.13 STRAINERS

.1 860 kPa, Y type with 20 mesh, monel, bronze or stainlesssteel removable screen.

.2 NPS2 and under, bronze body, screwed ends, with brass cap.

.3 NPS2 1/2 and over, cast iron body, flanged ends, with boltedcap.

2.14 OIL INTERCEPTORS (OWS)

.1 Acid resistant coated interior and exterior fabricated steeloil interceptor, with a fiberglass sensor box containing anelectronic oil level sensor, a fiberglass display box withone green power light, one yellow and red dual oil levellights, audio alarm and junction box. Complete with bronzecleanout plug and visible double wall trap seal removablecombination pressure equalizing/flow diffusing baffle andsediment bucket, horizontal baffle, and vent connectionseither side. Secured gasket nonskid cover complete with flowcontrol fitting. Regularly furnished with inlet and outlet inhigh position.

.2 Capacity: as indicated in schedule.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


.1 Compliance: comply with manufacturer's writtenrecommendations or specifications, including producttechnical bulletins, handling, storage and installationinstructions, and data sheet.

3.2 INSTALLATION

.1 Install in accordance with National Plumbing Code of Canadaprovincial codes, and local authority having jurisdiction or

.2 Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and asspecified.



3.3 CLEANOUTS

.1 Install cleanouts at base of soil and waste stacks, andrainwater leaders, at locations required by code, and asindicated.

.2 Bring cleanouts to wall or finished floor unless serviceablefrom below floor.

.3 Building drain cleanout and stack base cleanouts: line sizeto maximum NPS4.

3.4 NON-FREEZE WALL HYDRANTS

.1 Install 600 mm above finished grade unless otherwiseindicated.

3.5 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS

.1 Install on branch supplies to fixtures or group of fixtureswhere indicated.

3.6 BACK FLOW PREVENTORS

.1 Install in accordance with CSA-B64 Series, where indicatedand elsewhere as required by code.

.2 Pipe discharge to terminate over nearest drain and or servicesink, or outside where indicated.


.1 Install at bottom of risers, at low points to drain systems,

3.8 TRAP SEAL PRIMERS

.1 Install for floor drains and hub drains.

.2 Install on cold water supply to nearest frequently usedplumbing fixture, in concealed space with access panel, toapproval of DCC Representative.

.3 Install soft copper or plastic tubing to floor drain.

.4 Install electronic type to serve drains in non-washroomareas.



3.9 STRAINERS

.1 Install with sufficient room to remove basket.

3.10 WATER METERS

.1 Install water meter as indicated and connect to EMCS.

3.11 TRENCH DRAINS

.1 Non-sloping channel sections shall be distributed evenlyalong the length of the trench drain to provide gradual slopeas required.

3.12 START-UP

.1 General:.1 In accordance with Section 01 91 13 - GeneralCommissioning (Cx) Requirements.

.2 Timing: start-up only after:.1 Pressure tests have been completed..2 Disinfection procedures have been completed..3 Certificate of static completion has been issued..4 Water treatment systems operational.

.3 Provide continuous supervision during start-up.

3.13 TESTING AND ADJUSTING

.1 General:.1 In accordance with Section 01 91 13 - GeneralCommissioning (Cx) Requirements.

.2 Timing:.1 After start-up deficiencies rectified..2 After certificate of completion has been issued byauthority having jurisdiction.

.3 Application tolerances:.1 Pressure at fixtures: +/- 70 kPa..2 Flow rate at fixtures: +/- 20%.

.4 Adjustments:.1 Verify that flow rate and pressure meet design criteria..2 Make adjustments while flow rate or withdrawal is (1)maximum and (2) 25% of maximum and while pressure is (1)maximum and (2) minimum.



.2 Make adjustments while flow rate or withdrawal is (1)maximum and (2) 25% of maximum and while pressure is (1)maximum and (2) minimum.

.5 Floor drains:.1 Verify operation of trap seal primer..2 Prime, using trap primer. Adjust flow rate to suit siteconditions..3 Check operations of flushing features..4 Check security, accessibility, removeability ofstrainer..5 Clean out baskets.

.6 Vacuum breakers, backflow preventers, backwater valves:.1 Test tightness, accessibility for O&M of cover and ofvalve..2 Simulate reverse flow and back-pressure conditions totest operation of vacuum breakers, backflow preventers..3 Verify visibility of discharge from open ports.

.7 Access doors:.1 Verify size and location relative to items to beaccessed.

.8 Cleanouts:.1 Verify covers are gas-tight, secure, yet readilyremovable.

.9 Water hammer arrestors:.1 Verify proper installation of correct type of waterhammer arrester.

.10 Wall, Ground hydrants:.1 Verify complete drainage, freeze protection..2 Verify operation of vacuum breakers.

.11 Pressure regulators, PRV assemblies:.1 Adjust settings to suit locations, flow rates, pressureconditions.

.12 Strainers:.1 Clean out repeatedly until clear..2 Verify accessibility of cleanout plug and basket..3 Verify that cleanout plug does not leak.

.13 Commissioning Reports:.1 In accordance with Section 01 91 13 - GeneralCommissioning (Cx) Requirements.

.14 Training:.1 In accordance with Section 01 91 41 - Commissioning:Training.



.1 In accordance with Section 01 91 41 - Commissioning:Training..2 Demonstrate full compliance with Design Criteria.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Washroom Fixtures Page 1Storage FacilityGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

.1 Section Includes:.1 The Supply and Installation of Washroom Fixtures andTrim.

.2 Related Sections:.1 Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.2 Section 01 47 15 - Sustainable Requirements:Construction.3 Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 Canadian Standards Association (CSA International).1 CAN/CSA-B45S1-04(R2013), Plumbing Fixtures.2 CAN/CSA-B125-01, Plumbing Fittings.3 CAN/CSA-B651-04(R2010), Barrier-Free Design

1.3 SUBMITTALS


.2 Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance withSection 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.

.3 Indicate fixtures and trim:.1 Dimensions, construction details, roughing-indimensions..2 Factory-set water consumption per flush at recommendedpressure..3 (For water closets, urinals): minimum pressure andmaximum pressure required for flushing.

.4 Closeout Submittals:.1 Provide maintenance data including monitoringrequirements for incorporation into manuals specified inSection 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals..2 Include:

.1 Description of fixtures and trim, givingmanufacturer's name, type, model, year, capacity..2 Details of operation, servicing, maintenance..3 List of recommended spare parts.




.1 Collect, separate and recycle all site generated wastematerials in accordance with Section 01 74 21 ConstructionWaste Management.

.2 Ensure the following forms, included at the end of Section 0174 21 Waste Management and Disposal, are completed andsubmitted to the Construction Manager.

.1 Waste Audit (WA) Sheet - Schedule A

.2 Waste Tracking Form - Schedule B

.3 Coordinate all work related to Section 01 74 21 -Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal withConstruction Manager.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


.1 Fixtures: manufacture in accordance with CAN/CSA-B45 series.

.2 Trim, fittings: manufacture in accordance with CAN/CSA-B125.

.3 Exposed plumbing brass to be chrome plated.

.4 Number, locations: architectural drawings to govern.

.5 Fixtures in any one location to be product of onemanufacturer and of same type.

.6 Trim in any one location to be product of one manufacturerand of same type.

.7 Water Closet Flush Valves:.1 Manual toilet flush valve 4.8 lpf. Exposed quietdiaphragm-type, self-cleaning brass piston valve withintegral wiper spring in refill orifice to prevent clogging.Does not need reset after loss of water pressure. Cast brassvalve body and polished chrome finish with vandal resistantstop cap. High back pressure vacuum breaker and angle stopwith back-flow protection, ADA Compliant.

.8 Water Closet Seats:.1 Seat: white, elongated, open front, moulded solidplastic, less cover except for unit in barrier free stalls,stainless steel check hinges, stainless steel insert post..2 Acceptable material:

.1 Olsonite

.2 Bemis



.3 American Standard

.9 LAV-2: Wall Hung Basin Barrier Free:.1 Vitreous china to CSA B45, front overflows D-shaped,self draining deck area, faucet ledge, concealed supports.521 mm x 464 mm x 165 mm deep..2 Trim: 200 mm centers, cast brass construction, 1.9 LPM,aerator spray outlet, ADA compliant, ceramic disc valvecartridges, pressure compensating spray, wrist blade handles..3 Fixture piping: Hot and cold water supplies to fixture.Chrome plated flexible supply pipes to each with screwdriverstop, reducers, escutcheon..4 Waste fitting: open grid drain, chrome plated cast brassone piece top, 32 mm tailpiece. Offset trap for barrier free..5 Acceptable Material:


.2 Delta

.3 Sloan.6 Acceptable Trim Material:


.2 Delta

.3 Sloan

.10 WC-1 Wall-Hung, Flush Valve, Barrier Free Design:.1 Bowl: vitreous china, syphon jet action, elongated rim,4.8 L flush consumption, 38 mm top spud connection..2 Heavy Duty water closet seat, open front solid plasticwith stainless steel hinges, posts and cover..3 Acceptable material:

.1 Zurn Z5615-BWL.

.2 American Standard.

.3 Crane.

.11 Group Wash Fountains:.1 WF-1: semi-circular bowl.

.1 914 mm diameter, 304 stainless steel, colour asselected by DCC Representative.

.1 Trim: segmented foot controlled, chrome platedbrass sprayhead, stop valves, horizontal swingcheck valves..2 Soap dispenser: liquid powder electronicmounted on sprayhead complete with 2 soap valvesand vandal proof filler caps..3 Pedestal: rustproofed steel with removablestainless steel scuff base..4 Provide with mixing valve to mix hot and coldwater.

.12 Chair Carriers:.1 Factory manufactured floor-mounted carrier systems forwall mounted fixtures.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Mounting heights:.1 Standard: to comply with manufacturer's recommendationsunless otherwise indicated or specified..2 Physically handicapped: to comply with most stringent ofeither NBCC or CAN/CSA B651.

3.2 ADJUSTING

.1 Conform to water conservation requirements specified thissection.

.2 Adjustments:.1 Adjust water flow rate to design flow rates..2 Adjust pressure to fixtures to ensure no splashing atmaximum pressures..3 Adjust flush valves to suit actual site conditions.

.3 Checks:.1 Water closets, urinals: flushing action..2 Aerators: operation, cleanliness..3 Vacuum breakers, backflow preventers: operation underall conditions.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Installation of Page 1Storage Facility PipeworkGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 Section 01 74 21 - Construction/Demolition Waste Management andDisposal.

.2 Section 01 74 11 - Cleaning.

.3 Section 07 81 00 - Applied Fireproofing.

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB).1 CAN/CGSB-1.181-99, Ready-Mixed Organic Zinc-Rich Coating.


.1 Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section01 74 21 - Construction/Demolition Waste Management AndDisposal.

.2 Remove from site and dispose of packaging materials atappropriate recycling facilities.

.3 Collect and separate for disposal paper, plastic, polystyreneand corrugated cardboard packaging material in appropriateon-site for recycling in accordance with Waste Management Plan.

.4 Divert unused metal materials from landfill to metal recyclingfacility approved by DCC Representative.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONNECTIONS TO EQUIPMENT

.1 In accordance with manufacturer's instructions unless otherwiseindicated.



.2 Use valves and either unions or flanges for isolation and easeof maintenance and assembly.

.3 Use double swing joints when equipment mounted on vibrationisolation and when piping subject to movement.

3.2 CLEARANCES

.1 Provide clearance around systems, equipment and components forobservation of operation, inspection, servicing, maintenanceand as recommended by manufacturer.

.2 Provide space for disassembly, removal of equipment andcomponents as recommended by manufacturer or as indicated(whichever is greater) without interrupting operation of othersystem, equipment, components.

3.3 DRAINS

.1 Install piping with grade in direction of flow except asindicated.

.2 Install drain valve at low points in piping systems, atequipment and at section isolating valves.

.3 Pipe each drain valve discharge separately to above floordrain. Discharge to be visible.

.4 Drain valves: NPS 3/4 ball valves unless indicated otherwise,with hose end male thread, cap and chain.

3.4 AIR VENTS

.1 Install automatic air vents at high points in closed looppiping systems.

.2 Install isolating valve at each automatic air vent.

.3 Install drain piping from vent to approved location andterminate where discharge is visible.

3.5 DIELECTRIC COUPLINGS

.1 General: Compatible with system, to suit pressure rating ofsystem.

.2 Locations: Where dissimilar metals are joined.



.3 NPS 2 and under: isolating unions or bronze valves.

.4 Over NPS 2: Isolating flanges.

3.6 PIPEWORK INSTALLATION

.1 Protect openings against entry of foreign material.

.2 Install to isolate equipment and allow removal withoutinterrupting operation of other equipment or systems.

.3 Assemble piping using fittings manufactured to ANSI standards.

.4 Saddle type branch fittings may be used on mains if branch lineis no larger than half the size of main..1 Hole saw (or drill) and ream main to maintain full insidediameter of branch line prior to welding saddle.

.5 Install exposed piping, equipment, rectangular cleanouts andsimilar items parallel or perpendicular to building lines.

.6 Install concealed pipework to minimize furring space, maximizeheadroom, conserve space.

.7 Slope piping, except where indicated, in direction of flow forpositive drainage and venting.

.8 Install, except where indicated, to permit separate thermalinsulation of each pipe.

.9 Group piping wherever possible and as indicated.

.10 Ream pipes, remove scale and other foreign material beforeassembly.

.11 Use eccentric reducers at pipe size changes to ensure positivedrainage and venting.

.12 Provide for thermal expansion.

.13 Valves:.1 Install in accessible locations..2 Remove interior parts before soldering..3 Install with stems above horizontal position unlessotherwise indicated..4 Valves accessible for maintenance without removingadjacent piping..5 Install globe valves in bypass around control valves..6 Use ball or butterfly valves at branch take-offs forisolating purposes except where otherwise specified.



.7 Install butterfly valves between weld neck flanges toensure full compression of liner..8 Install ball valves for glycol service..9 Use chain operators on valves NPS 2-1/2 and larger whereinstalled more than 2400 mm above floor in Mechanical Rooms.

.14 Check Valves:.1 Install swing check valves in horizontal lines, ondischarge of pumps, and elsewhere as indicated.

3.7 SLEEVES

.1 General: Install where pipes pass through masonry, concretestructures, fire rated assemblies, and elsewhere as indicated.

.2 Material: Schedule 40 black steel pipe.

.3 Construction: Foundation walls and where sleeves extend abovefinished floors to have annular fins continuously welded on atmid-point.

.4 Sizes: 6 mm minimum clearance between sleeve and uninsulatedpipe or between sleeve and insulation.

.5 Installation:.1 Concrete, masonry walls, concrete floors on grade:Terminate flush with finished surface..2 Other floors: Terminate 25 mm above finished floor..3 Before installation, paint exposed exterior surfaces withheavy application of zinc-rich paint to CAN/CGSB-1.181.

.6 Sealing:.1 Foundation walls and below grade floors: Fire retardant,waterproof non-hardening mastic..2 Elsewhere: Provide space for firestopping. Maintain firerating integrity..3 Sleeves installed for future use: Fill with lime plasteror other easily removable filler..4 Ensure no contact between copper pipe or tube and sleeve.

3.8 ESCUTCHEONS

.1 Install on pipes passing through walls, partitions, floors, andceilings in finished areas.

.2 Construction: One piece type with set screws. Chrome or nickelplated brass or type 302 stainless steel.



.3 Sizes: Outside diameter to cover opening or sleeve. Insidediameter to fit around pipe or outside of insulation if soprovided.

3.9 PREPARATION FOR FIRESTOPPING

.1 Material and installation within annular space between pipes,ducts, insulation and adjacent fire separation to Section07 81 00 - Applied Fireproofing.

.2 Uninsulated unheated pipes not subject to movement: No specialpreparation.

.3 Uninsulated heated pipes subject to movement: Wrap withnon-combustible smooth material to permit pipe movement withoutdamaging firestopping material or installation.

.4 Insulated pipes and ducts: Ensure integrity of insulation andvapour barriers.

3.10 FLUSHING OUT OF PIPING SYSTEMS

.1 Before start-up, clean interior of piping systems in accordancewith requirements of Section 01 74 11 - Cleaning supplementedas specified in relevant sections of Division 21, 22 and/or 23.

.2 Preparatory to acceptance, clean and refurbish equipment andleave in operating condition, including replacement of filtersin piping systems.

3.11 PRESSURE TESTING OF EQUIPMENT AND PIPEWORK

.1 Advise DCC Representative 48 hours minimum prior to performanceof pressure tests.

.2 Pipework: Test as specified in relevant sections of Divisions21, 22 and 23. In absence of specific requirements, test pipingto the greater of 860 kPa or 1-1/2 times the required systempressure.

.3 Maintain specified test pressure without loss for 4 hoursminimum unless specified for longer period of time in relevantsections of Divisions 21, 22 or 23.

.4 Prior to tests, isolate equipment and other parts which are notdesigned to withstand test pressure or media.

.5 Conduct tests in presence of DCC Representative.



.6 Pay costs for repairs or replacement, retesting, and makinggood. DCC Representative to determine whether repair orreplacement is appropriate.

.7 Insulate or conceal work only after approval and certificationof tests by DCC Representative.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Common Motor Requirements Page 1Storage Facility for HVAC EquipmentGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES

.1 American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air-ConditioningEngineers (ASHRAE).1 ASHRAE 90.1-13, Energy Standard for Buildings ExceptLow-Rise Residential Buildings (IESNA cosponsored; ANSIapproved; Continuous Maintenance Standard).

.2 Electrical Equipment Manufacturers' Association Council(EEMAC).

.3 Health Canada/Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System(WHMIS).1 Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).



.2 Product Data:.1 Submit manufacturer's printed product literature,specifications and datasheet in accordance withSection 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. Include productcharacteristics, performance criteria, and limitations.

.3 Quality Control: in accordance with Section 01 45 00 - QualityControl..1 Certificates: submit certificates signed by manufacturercertifying that materials comply with specified performancecharacteristics and physical properties..2 Instructions: submit manufacturer's installationinstructions.

.4 Closeout Submittals.1 Provide maintenance data for motors, drives and guards forincorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00 -Closeout Submittals.


.1 Regulatory Requirements: work to be performed in compliancewith CEPA, CEAA, TDGA, and applicable Provincial /Territorialregulations.



.2 Health and Safety Requirements: do construction occupationalhealth and safety in accordance with Section 01 70 12 - SafetyRequirements.


.1 Packing, shipping, handling and unloading:.1 Deliver, store and handle in accordance with Section01 61 00 - Common Product Requirements..2 Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance withmanufacturer's written instructions.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUSTAINABLE REQUIREMENTS


2.2 GENERAL

.1 Motors: high efficiency, in accordance with local electricalpower company standards and to ASHRAE 90.1.

2.3 MOTORS

.1 Provide motors for mechanical equipment as specified.

.2 Motors under 373 W (1/2 HP): speed as indicated, continuousduty, built-in overload protection, resilient mount, singlephase, 120 V, unless otherwise specified or indicated.

.3 Motors 373 W (1/2 HP) and larger: EEMAC Class B, squirrel cageinduction, speed as indicated, continuous duty, drip proof,ball bearing, maximum temperature rise 40 degrees C, 3 phase,575 V, unless otherwise indicated.

.4 Provide inverter duty motors for variable speed applications.



.5 Motors 25 HP and larger shall have reduced voltage starters.This applies to any starters supplied by Division 23 as part ofpackaged systems that do not have VFD's.

2.4 TEMPORARY MOTORS

.1 If delivery of specified motor will delay completion orcommissioning work, install motor approved by DCCRepresentative for temporary use. Work will only be acceptedwhen specified motor is installed.

2.5 BELT DRIVES

.1 Fit reinforced belts in sheave matched to drive. Multiple beltsto be matched sets.

.2 Use cast iron or steel sheaves secured to shafts with removablekeys unless otherwise indicated.

.3 For motors under 7.5 kW (10 HP): standard adjustable pitchdrive sheaves, having plus or minus 10% range. Use mid-positionof range for specified r/min.

.4 For motors 7.5 kW (10 HP) and over: sheave with split taperedbushing and keyway having fixed pitch unless specificallyrequired for item concerned. Provide sheave of correct size tosuit balancing.

.5 Correct size of sheave determined during commissioning.

.6 Minimum drive rating: 1.5 times nameplate rating on motor. Keepoverhung loads within manufacturer's design requirements onprime mover shafts.

.7 Motor slide rail adjustment plates to allow for centre lineadjustment.

.8 Supply one set of spare belts for each set installed inaccordance with Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.

2.6 DRIVE GUARDS

.1 Provide guards for unprotected drives.

.2 Guards for belt drives;.1 Expanded metal screen welded to steel frame..2 Minimum 1.2 mm thick sheet metal tops and bottoms..3 38 mm dia holes on both shaft centres for insertion oftachometer.



.3 38 mm dia holes on both shaft centres for insertion oftachometer..4 Removable for servicing.

.3 Provide means to permit lubrication and use of test instrumentswith guards in place.

.4 Install belt guards to allow movement of motors for adjustingbelt tension.

.5 Guard for flexible coupling:.1 "U" shaped, minimum 1.6 mm thick galvanized mild steel..2 Securely fasten in place..3 Removable for servicing.

.6 Unprotected fan inlets or outlets:.1 Wire or expanded metal screen, galvanized, 19 mm mesh..2 Net free area of guard: not less than 80% of fan openings..3 Securely fasten in place..4 Removable for servicing.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


.1 Compliance: comply with manufacturer's written recommendationsor specifications, including product technical bulletins,handling, storage and installation instructions, and datasheet.

3.2 INSTALLATION

.1 Fasten securely in place.

.2 Make removable for servicing, easily returned into andpositively in position.

.3 Associated VFD devices to be installed remote from motor orvibrating equipment.


.1 Verification requirements in accordance with Section 01 47 15- Sustainable Requirements: Construction.

3.4 CLEANING




3.4 CLEANING


END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Expansion Fittings and Page 1Storage Facility Loops for HVAC PipingGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 Materials and installation for flexible connections,expansion joints, anchors and guides for building servicespiping.



.2 Section 01 74 21 - Construction/Demolition Waste ManagementAnd Disposal.




.6 Section 23 08 01 - Performance Verification Mechanical PipingSystems.

1.3 REFERENCES

.1 American Society for Testing and Materials International,(ASTM).1 ASTM A 53/A53M-12, Standard Specification for Pipe,

Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded andSeamless.

.2 ASTM A 105/A105M-14, Standard Specification for CarbonSteel Forgings, for Piping Applications.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


.2 Submit product data and indicate for items as applicable:.1 Manufacturer, model number, line contents, pressure and

temperature rating..2 Movement handled, axial, lateral, angular and the

amounts of each..3 Nominal size and dimensions including details of

construction and assembly.



.3 Submit maintenance data in accordance with Section 01 78 00 -Closeout Submittals.

.4 Data to include:.1 Servicing requirements, including special requirements,

stuffing box packing, lubrication and recommendedprocedures.

1.5 HEALTH AND SAFETY

.1 Do construction occupational health and safety in accordancewith Section 01 70 12 - Safety Requirements.


.1 Separate waste materials for reuse and recycling inaccordance with Section 01 74 21 - Construction/DemolitionWaste Management And Disposal.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FLEXIBLE CONNECTION

.1 Application: to suit traverse and longitudinal motion.

.2 Minimum length in accordance with manufacturer'srecommendations to suit offset.

.3 Inner hose: bronze or stainless steel, corrugated.

.4 Braided wire mesh, stainless steel outer jacket.

.5 Diameter and type of end connection: NPS 2 and under:threaded, NPS 2-1/2 and above: flanged.

.6 Operating conditions:.1 Working pressure: 1034 kPa..2 Working temperature: 100 degrees C..3 To match system requirements.

2.2 ANCHORS AND GUIDES

.1 Anchors:.1 Steel: Provide supplementary steel channel and angle

iron welded to building steel structure.

.2 Alignment guides:



.1 Provide as indicated.

.2 To accommodate specified thickness of insulation.

.3 Vapour barriers, jackets to remain uninterrupted.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Install flexible connections in accordance withmanufacturer's instructions. Install flexible connections onall rotating or vibrating equipment piping connections.

.2 Install pipe anchors and guides. Anchors to withstand 150% ofaxial thrust.

3.2 ALIGNMENT GUIDE SPACING

.1 Alignment guide spacing to be in accordance with expansionjoint manufacturers recommendations, and in accordance withthe following charts:.1 Spacing for steel piping alignment guides:

Nominal Pipe First Guide Guide SpacingSize Dist. from After First

Anchors Guide Expansion

Joints

1-1/2 0.5m 3.0m2-1/2 0.8m 5.0m3 1.0m 6.3m4 1.4m 7.8m6 2.0m 11.8m8 2.8m 5.2m

.2 Spacing for FRP piping alignment guides:.1 First pipe guide distance from anchors, expansionjoints: 4 pipe diameters..2 Second pipe guide distance from anchors, expansionjoints: 14 pipe diameters.


.1 In accordance with Section 23 08 01 - PerformanceVerification: Mechanical Piping Systems.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Pipe Welding Page 1Storage FacilityGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 Section 01 74 21 - Construction/Demolition Waste ManagementAnd Disposal.

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 American National Standards Institute/American Society ofMechanical Engineers (ANSI/ASME).1 ANSI/ASME B31.1-2014, Power Piping..2 ANSI/ASME B31.3-2014, Process Piping Addenda A..3 ANSI/ASME B31.3-2014, Process Piping Addenda B..4 ANSI/ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code-1998:

.1 Section I: Power Boilers.

.2 Section V: Nondestructive Examination.

.3 Section IX: Welding and Brazing Qualifications.

.2 American National Standards Institute/American Water WorksAssociation (ANSI/AWWA).1 ANSI/AWWA C206-11, Field Welding of Steel Water Pipe.

.3 American Welding Society (AWS).1 AWS c1.1-2000(R2012), Recommended Practices forResistance Welding..2 AWS Z49.1-2012, Safety Welding, Cutting and AlliedProcess..3 AWS W1-2015, Welding Inspection Handbook.

.4 Canadian Standards Association (CSA International).1 CSA W47.2-11(R2015), Certification of Companies forFusion Welding of Aluminum..2 CSA W48-14, Filler Metals and Allied Materials for MetalArc Welding..3 CSA B51-14, Boiler, Pressure Vessel and Pressure PipingCode..4 CSA B117.2-12, Safety in Welding, Cutting and AlliedProcesses..5 CSA W178.1-14, Certification of Welding InspectionOrganizations..6 CSA W178.2-14, Certification of Welding Inspectors.

1.3 QUALIFICATIONS

.1 Welders:.1 Welding qualifications in accordance with CSA B51.



.2 Use qualified and licensed welders possessingcertificate for each procedure performed from authorityhaving jurisdiction..3 Furnish welder's qualifications to DCC Representative..4 Each welder to possess identification symbol issued byauthority having jurisdiction.

.2 Inspectors:.1 Inspectors qualified to CSA W178.2.


.1 Registration of welding procedures in accordance with CSAB51.

.2 Copy of welding procedures available for inspection.

.3 Safety in welding, cutting and allied processes in accordancewith CSA-W117.2.


.1 Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance withSection 01 74 21 - Construction/Demolition Waste ManagementAnd Disposal, and with the Waste Reduction Workplan.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ELECTRODES

.1 Electrodes: in accordance with CSA W48 Series.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 WORKMANSHIP

.1 Welding: in accordance with ANSI/ASME B31.1 B31.3, ANSI/ASMEBoiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Sections I and IX andANSI/AWWA C206, using procedures conforming to AWS B3.0, AWSC1.1, and special procedures specified elsewhere in Divisions21 and 23, and applicable requirements of provincialauthority having jurisdiction.



3.2 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

.1 Identify each weld with welder's identification symbol.

.2 Backing rings:.1 Where used, fit to minimize gaps between ring and pipe.2 Do not install at orifice flanges.

.3 Fittings:.1 NPS 2 and smaller: install welding type sockets..2 Branch connections: install welding tees or forged.

3.3 INSPECTION AND TESTS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

.1 Review weld quality requirements and defect limits ofapplicable codes and standards with DCC Representative beforework is started.

.2 Formulate "Inspection and Test Plan" in co-operation with DCCRepresentative. This will form part of "Quality Plan".

.3 Do not conceal welds until they have been inspected, testedand approved by inspector.

.4 Provide for inspector to visually inspect welds during earlystages of welding procedures in accordance with WeldingInspection Handbook. Repair or replace defects as required bycodes and as specified.

3.4 SPECIALIST EXAMINATIONS AND TESTS

.1 General.1 Perform examinations and tests by specialist qualifiedin accordance with CSA W178.1 and CSA W178.2 and approved byDCC Representative..2 To ANSI/ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessels Code, SectionV, CSA B51 and requirements of authority having jurisdiction..3 Inspect 100% and test 10% of welds in accordance with"Inspection and Test Plan" by non-destructive visualexamination and spot magnetic particle or dye penetrantmethod.

.2 Hydrostatically test welds to requirements of ANSI/ASMEB31.1, and to requirements of steam systems.

.3 Failure of visual examinations:



.1 Upon failure of welds by visual examination, performadditional testing as directed by DCC Representative of up toan additional 30% of all welds, selected at random by DCCRepresentative by radiographic tests. If failed welds areidentified as common to a specific welder than test 100% ofall welds performed by that welder..2 All failed welds shall be repaired at Contractor'sexpense..3 If it is determined, in the opinion of the DCCRepresentative, that an excess of welds have failed to passinspection, 100% of all welds shall be inspected visually andmay require additional tests, at the Contractor's expense upto a maximum of 100% of all welds.

3.5 DEFECTS CAUSING REJECTION

.1 As described in ANSI/ASME B31.1 and ANSI/ASME Boiler andPressure Vessels Code.

3.6 REPAIR OF WELDS WHICH FAILED TESTS

.1 Re-inspect and re-test repaired or re-worked welds atContractor's expense.

3.7 CLAIMS FOR DELAYS

.1 Claims against the Owner or DCC Representative for delays incompletion of project will not be entertained for reasons offailure of welds to pass examinations and tests.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Thermometers and Pressure Page 1Storage Facility Gauges - Piping SytemsGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 Materials and installation for thermometers and pressuregauges in piping systems.




.3 Section 23 05 53.01 - Mechanical Identification.

1.3 REFERENCES

.1 American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)..1 ASME B40.100-2013, Pressure Gauges and GaugeAttachments..2 ASME B40.200-2013, Thermometers, Direct Reading andRemote Reading.



.2 Submit shop drawings and product data.

.3 Submit manufacturer's product data for following items:.1 Thermometers..2 Pressure gauges..3 Stop cocks..4 Syphons..5 Wells.

1.5 HEALTH AND SAFETY




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

.1 Design point to be at mid point of scale or range.

.2 Ranges: as required. Where pressure gauges are across pumps,etc, both pressure values shall fall within scale or range.

2.2 DIRECT READING THERMOMETERS

.1 Industrial, variable angle type, liquid filled, 125 mm scalelength: to CAN/CGSB 14.4 ASME B40.200.

2.3 REMOTE READING THERMOMETERS

.1 100 mm diameter mercury-free liquid filled activated dialtype: to CAN/CGSB-14.5 ASME B40.200, accuracy within onescale division, brass movement, stainless steel capillary,stainless steel spiral armour, stainless steel bulb andpolished brass or stainless steel case for wall mounting.

2.4 THERMOMETER WELLS

.1 Copper pipe: copper or bronze.

.2 Steel pipe: brass or stainless steel.

2.5 PRESSURE GAUGES

.1 112 mm, dial type: to ASME B40.100, Grade 2A, stainless steelor phosphor bronze bourdon tube having 0.5% accuracy fullscale unless otherwise specified.

.2 Provide:.1 Snubber for pulsating operation..2 Gasketted pressure relief back with solid front..3 NPS 1/4 ball valves for gauge isolation..4 Oil filled for high vibration applications.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

.1 Install so they can be easily read from floor or platform. Ifthis cannot be accomplished, install remote reading units.

.2 Install between equipment and first fitting or valve.

3.2 THERMOMETERS

.1 Install in wells on piping. Provide heat conductive materialinside well.

.2 Install in locations as indicated and on inlet and outlet of:.1 Heat exchangers..2 DHW tanks.

.3 Use extensions where thermometers are installed throughinsulation.

3.3 PRESSURE GAUGES

.1 Install in following locations:.1 Across suction and discharge of pumps..2 Upstream and downstream of PRV's..3 Upstream and downstream of control valves..4 Inlet and outlet of coils..5 In other locations as indicated.

.2 Install gauge cocks for shut off purposes, elsewhere asindicated.

.3 Use extensions where pressure gauges are installed throughinsulation.

3.4 NAMEPLATES

.1 Install engraved lamicoid nameplates as specified in Section23 05 53.01 - Mechanical Identification, identifying medium.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Valves - Bronze Page 1Storage FacilityGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

.1 Related Sections:.1 Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures..2 Section 01 74 21 - Construction/Demolition WasteManagement And Disposal..3 Section 01 47 15 - Sustainable Requirements: Construction..4 Section 01 70 12 - Safety Requirements..5 Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals..6 Section 23 05 05 - Installation of Pipework.

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/ American Societyof Mechanical Engineers (ASME)..1 ANSI/ASME B1.20.1-2013, Pipe Threads, General Purpose(Inch)..2 ANSI/ASME B16.18-2012, Cast Copper Alloy Solder JointPressure Fittings.

.2 American Society for Testing and Materials International,(ASTM)..1 ASTM A 276-16, Specification for Stainless Steel Bars andShapes..2 ASTM B 62-15, Specification for Composition Bronze orOunce Metal Castings..3 ASTM B 283-14a, Specification for Copper and Copper AlloyDie Forgings (Hot-Pressed)..4 ASTM B 505/B 505M-14, Specification for Copper-Base AlloyContinuous Castings.

.3 Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and FittingsIndustry, Inc. (MSS)..1 MSS-SP-25-2013, Standard Marking System for Valves,Fittings, Flanges and Unions..2 MSS-SP-80-2013, Bronze Gate Globe, Angle and Check Valves..3 MSS-SP-110-2010, Ball Valves, Threaded, Socket-Welding,Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends.






.3 Submit data for valves specified in this section.

.4 Closeout Submittals:.1 Submit maintenance data for incorporation into manualspecified in Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.



1.5 DELIVERY STORAGE AND DISPOSAL


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Sustainable Requirements:.1 Materials and resources in accordance with Section 01 4715 - Sustainable Requirements: Construction.

.2 Valves:.1 Except for specialty valves, to be single manufacturer..2 All products to have CRN registration numbers.

.3 End Connections:.1 Connection into adjacent piping/tubing:

.1 Steel pipe systems: Screwed ends to ANSI/ASMEB1.20.1..2 Copper tube systems: Solder ends to ANSI/ASME B16.18.

.4 Lockshield Keys:.1 Where lockshield valves are specified, provide 10 keys ofeach size: malleable iron cadmium plated.

.5 Gate Valves:.1 Requirements common to gate valves, unless specifiedotherwise:

.1 Standard specification: MSS SP-80.

.2 Bonnet: union with hexagonal shoulders.

.3 Connections: screwed with hexagonal shoulders.

.4 Inspection and pressure testing: to MSS SP-80. Teststo be hydrostatic.



.5 Packing: non-asbestos.

.6 Handwheel: non-ferrous.

.7 Handwheel Nut: bronze to ASTM B 62..2 NPS 2 and under, non-rising stem, solid wedge disc, Class125.

.1 Body: with long disc guides, screwed bonnet with stemretaining nut..2 Operator: Handwheel.

.3 NPS 2 and under, rising stem, split wedge disc, Class 125:.1 Body: with long disc guides, screwed bonnet..2 Disc: split wedge, bronze to ASTM B 283, looselysecured to stem..3 Operator: Handwheel Lockshield.

.4 NPS 2 and under, rising stem, solid wedge disc, Class 125:.1 Body: with long disc guides, screwed bonnet..2 Operator: Handwheel.

.6 Globe Valves:.1 Requirements common to globe valves, unless specifiedotherwise:


.2 Bonnet: union with hexagonal shoulders.

.3 Connections: screwed with hexagonal shoulders.

.4 Pressure testing: to MSS SP-80. Tests to behydrostatic..5 Stuffing box: threaded to bonnet with gland follower,packing nut, high grade non-asbestos packing..6 Handwheel: non-ferrous..7 Handwheel Nut: bronze to ASTM B 62.

.2 NPS 2 and under, PTFE disc, Class 125:.1 Body and bonnet: screwed bonnet..2 Disc and seat: renewable rotating PTFE disc,regrindable bronze seat, loosely secured to bronze stem toASTM B 505..3 Operator: Handwheel, except lock shield on normallyclosed bypass valves.

.3 NPS 2 and under, plug disc, Class 150, screwed ends:.1 Body and bonnet: union bonnet..2 Disc and seat ring: tapered plug type with disc stemring of AISI S420 stainless steel to ASTM A 276, looselysecured to stem..3 Operator: Handwheel.

.7 Check Valves:.1 Requirements common to check valves, unless specifiedotherwise:


.2 Connections: screwed with hexagonal shoulders..2 NPS 2 and under, swing type, bronze disc, Class 125:

.1 Body: Y-pattern with integral seat at 45 degrees,screw-in cap with hex head.



.2 Disc and seat: renewable rotating disc, two-piecehinge disc construction; seat: regrindable.

.8 Ball Valves:.1 NPS 2 and under:

.1 Body and cap: cast high tensile bronze to ASTM B 62.

.2 Pressure rating: Class 125.

.3 Connections: Screwed ends to ANSI B1.20.1 and withhexagonal shoulders, or solder ends to ANSI or asrequired..4 Stem: tamperproof ball drive..5 Stem packing nut: external to body..6 Ball and seat: replaceable stainless steel or hardchrome solid ball and teflon seats..7 Stem seal: TFE with external packing nut..8 Operator: removable lever handle.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Install rising stem valves in upright position with stem abovehorizontal.

.2 Remove internal parts before soldering.

.3 Install valves with unions at each piece of equipment arrangedto allow servicing, maintenance, and equipment removal.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Valves - Cast Iron Page 1Storage FacilityGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL






.5 Section 21 05 01 - Common Work Results - Mechanical.

.6 Section 23 05 05 - Installation of Pipework.

.7 Section 23 05 23.01 - Valves - Bronze.

.8 Section 23 05 23.02 - Valves - Cast Iron.

.9 Section 23 05 93 - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC.

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/American Societyof Mechanical Engineers (ASME)..1 ANSI/ASME B16.1-2015, Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and FlangedFittings.

.2 American Society for Testing and Materials International(ASTM)..1 ASTM A 49-12, Specification for Heat-Treated Carbon SteelJoint Bars..2 ASTM A 126-04(2014), Specification for Gray Iron Castingsfor Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings..3 ASTM B 61-15, Specification for Steam or Valve BronzeCastings..4 ASTM B 62-09, Specification for Composition Bronze orOunce Metal Castings..5 ASTM B 85-09, Specification for Aluminum-Alloy DieCastings..6 ASTM B 209-14, Specification for Aluminum andAluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.

.3 Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and FittingsIndustry, Inc. (MSS)..1 MSS SP-70-2011, Cast Iron Gate Valves, Flanged andThreaded Ends.



.2 MSS SP-71-2011, Grey Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged andThreaded Ends..3 MSS SP-85-2011, Cast Iron Globe and Angle Valves, Flangedand Threaded Ends.




.3 Submit data for valves specified in this section.





.1 Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section01 74 21 - Construction/Demolition Waste Management And

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIAL

.1 Sustainable Requirements:.1 Materials and resources in accordance with Section 01 4715 - Sustainable Requirements: Construction

.2 Valves:.1 Except for specialty valves, to be of single manufacturer.

.3 Standard specifications:.1 Gate valves: MSS SP-70..2 Globe valves: MSS SP-85..3 Check valves: MSS SP-71.

.4 Requirements common to valves, unless specified otherwise:



.1 Body, bonnet: cast iron to ASTM B 209 Class B.

.2 Connections: flanged ends plain face to ANSI B16.1.

.3 Inspection and pressure testing: to MSS SP-82.

.4 Bonnet gasket: non-asbestos.

.5 Stem: to have precision-machined Acme or 60 degrees Vthreads, top screwed for handwheel nut..6 Stuffing box: non-galling two-piece ball-jointed packinggland, gland bolts and nuts..7 Gland packing: non-asbestos..8 Handwheel: Die-cast aluminum alloy to ASTM B 85 ormalleable iron to ASTM A 49. Nut of bronze to ASTM B 62..9 Identification tag: with catalogue number, size, otherpertinent data.

.5 All products to have CRN registration numbers.

2.2 GATE VALVES

.1 NPS 2 1/2-8, outside screw and yoke (OS&Y), bronze trim, solidwedge disc:.1 Body and multiple-bolted bonnet: with bosses in body andbonnet for taps and drains, full length disc guides designed toensure correct re-assembly, yoke, yoke hub, yoke sleeve andnut. Class 125..2 Disc: solid offset taper wedge, bronze to ASTM B 62 up toNPS 3, cast iron with bronze disc rings on other sizes, securedto stem through integral forged T-head disc-stem connection..3 Seat rings: renewable bronze screwed into body..4 Stem: nickel-plated steel manganese-bronze..5 Seat rings: integral with body..6 Stem: nickel-plated steel..7 Pressure-lubricated operating mechanism..8 Operator: Handwheel..9 Bypass: complete with union and NPS 1 globe valve inaccordance with Section 23 05 23.01 - Valves - Bronze.

2.3 UNDERWRITERS APPROVED GATE VALVE

.1 NPS 2 1/2 - 14, OS&Y:.1 Approvals: ULC approved for fire service..2 ULC Label: on valve yoke..3 Body, Bonnet: cast iron to ASTM A 126 Class B. Wallthicknesses to ANSI B16.1 and ULC 262 (B)..4 Bonnet bushing, yoke sleeve: bronze, to FM requirements..5 Packing gland: bronze..6 Stem: manganese bronze. Diameter to ULC C-262 (B)..7 Stuffing box dimensions, gland bolt diameter: to ULC C-262(B)..8 Bosses for bypass valve, drain: on NPS 4 and over.



.9 Disc: solid taper wedge. Up to NPS 3: bronze. NPS 4 andover: cast iron with bronze disc rings..10 Disc seat ring: self-aligning, Milwood undercut on NPS 3 -12..11 Pressure rating:

.1 NPS 2-1/2 - 12: 1.7 Mpa CWP.

.2 NPS 14: 1.2 MPa CWP..12 Operator: handwheel..13 Bypass: complete with union and NPS gate globe valve asSection 23 05 23.01 - Valves - Bronze.

2.4 GLOBE VALVES

.1 NPS 2 1/2 - 10, OSY:.1 Body: with multiple-bolted bonnet..2 WP: 860 kPa steam, 1.4 MPa CWP..3 Bonnet-yoke gasket: non-asbestos..4 Disc: bronze to ASTM B 62, fully guided from bottom,securely yet freely connected to stem for swivel action andaccurate engagement with disc..5 Seat ring: renewable, regrindable, screwed into body..6 Stem: bronze to ASTM B 62..7 Operator: Handwheel..8 Bypass: complete with union and NPS 1 globe valve asSection 23 05 23.01 - Valves - Bronze, paragraph.

2.5 BYPASSES FOR GATE AND GLOBE VALVES

.1 Locations: on valves as indicated.

.2 Position of bypass valve on main valves: as recommended bymanufacturer.

.3 Size of bypass valve: NPS 1.

.4 Type of bypass valves:.1 On gate valve: globe, with PTFE disc, bronze trim, toSection 23 05 23.01 - Valves - Bronze. Pressure rating to matchmain valve..2 On globe valve: globe, with PTFE disc, bronze trim, toSection 23 05 23.01 - Valves - Bronze. Pressure rating to matchmain valve.

2.6 VALVE OPERATORS

.1 Install valve operators as follows:.1 Handwheel: on valves except as specified.



.2 Handwheel with chain operators: on valves installed morethan 2400 mm above floor in boiler rooms and mechanicalequipment rooms.

2.7 CHECK VALVES

.1 Swing check valves, Class 125:.1 Body and bolted cover: with tapped and plugged opening oneach side for hinge pin. Flanged ends: plain faced with smoothfinish.

.1 Up to NPS 16: cast iron to ASTM A 126 Class B..2 Ratings:

.1 NPS 2 1/2 - 12: 860 kPa steam; 1.4 MPa CWP..3 Disc: rotating for extended life.

.1 Up to NPS 6: bronze to ASTM B 62.

.2 NPS 8 and over: bronze-faced cast iron..4 Seat rings: renewable bronze to ASTM B 62 screwed intobody..5 Hinge pin, bushings: renewable bronze to ASTM B 62.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Install rising stem valves in upright position with stem abovehorizontal.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Butterfly Valves Page 1Storage FacilityGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

.1 Related Sections:.1 Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures..2 Section 01 74 21 - Construction/Demolition WasteManagement And Disposal..3 Section 01 47 15 - Sustainable Requirements: Construction.4 Section 01 70 12 - Safety Requirements..5 Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/American Societyof Mechanical Engineers (ASME)..1 ANSI/ASME B1.20.1-2013, Pipe Threads, General Purpose(Inch)..2 ANSI/ASME B16.1-2015, Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and FlangedFittings..3 ANSI/ASME B16.5-2013, Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings..4 ANSI/ASME B16.11-2011, Forged Fittings, Socket-Welding andThreaded..5 ANSI/ASME B16.25-1997, Buttwelding Ends..6 ANSI/ASME B16.34-2013, Valves - Flanged, Threaded andWelding Ends.

.2 American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/American PetroleumInstitute (API)..1 ANSI/API 609-2016, Lug- and Water-Type Butterfly Valves.

.3 American Society for Testing and Materials International,(ASTM)..1 ASTM A 126-04(R2014), Specification for Gray Iron Castingsfor Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings..2 ASTM B 62-15, Specification for Composition Bronze orOunce Metal Castings..3 ASTM B 209M-14, Specification for Aluminum andAluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.

.4 Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and FittingsIndustry, Inc. (MSS)..1 MSS SP-67-2011, Butterfly Valves.






.3 Submit product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00 -Submittal Procedures.

.4 Submit data for valves specified this section.





.1 Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section01 74 21 - Construction/Demolition Waste Management AndDisposal

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIAL

.1 Sustainable Requirements:.1 Materials and resources in accordance with Section 01 4715 - Sustainable Requirements: Construction.

2.2 BUTTERFLY VALVES - RESILIENT SEAT - 200 PSIG

.1 Except for specialty valves, to be of single manufacturer.

.2 To be suitable for dead-end service.

.3 CRN registration number required for products.

.4 Sizes: Lug type: NPS 2 to 30.

.5 Pressure rating for tight shut-off at temperatures up tomaximum for seat material..1 NPS 2 - 12: 200 psig (1380 kPa).

.6 Minimum seat temperature ratings to 135 degrees C.



.7 Application: on-off operation.

.8 Full lug body (threaded).

.9 Operators:.1 NPS 2 - 6: Handles capable of locking in any of ten (10)positions - 0 degrees to 90 degrees. Handle and release trigger- ductile iron. Return spring and hinge pin: carbon steel.Latch plate and mounting hardware: cadmium plated carbon steel.Standard coating: black laquer..2 NPS 8 - 30: Manual enclosed gear operator..3 Motorized actuators on valves indicated.

.10 Designed to comply with MSS SP-67 and API 609.

.11 Compatible with ANSI Class 125/Class 150 flanges.

.12 Construction:.1 Body ductile iron..2 Disc: aluminum bronze..3 Seat: EPDM..4 Shaft: 316 or 416 stainless steel..5 Taper pin: 316 SS..6 Key: stainless..7 O-Ring: Buna-N..8 Bushings: Teflon.

2.3 MOUNTING FLANGES

.1 Class 150 steel to B16.5 pipe flanges.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

.1 Valve and mating flange preparation..1 Inspect adjacent pipeline, remove rust, scale, weldingslag, other foreign material..2 Ensure that valve seats and pipe flange faces are free ofdirt or surface irregularities which may disrupt flange seatingand cause external leakage..3 Install butterfly valves with disc in almost closedposition..4 Inspect valve disc seating surfaces and waterway andeliminate dirt or foreign material.



3.2 INSTALLATION OF VALVES

.1 Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

.2 Do not use gaskets between pipe flanges and valves unlessinstructed otherwise by valve manufacturer.

.3 Verify suitability of valve for application by inspection ofidentification tag.

.4 Mount actuator on to valve prior to installation.

.5 Handle valve with care so as to prevent damage to disc and seatfaces.

.6 Valves in horizontal pipe lines should be installed with stemin horizontal position to minimize liner and seal wear.

.7 Ensure that valves are centered between bolts before bolts aretightened and then opened and closed to ensure unobstructeddisc movement. If interference occurs due, for example to pipewall thickness, taper bore adjacent piping to removeinterference.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Hangers and Supports for Page 1Storage Facility HVAC Piping and EquipmentGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES

.1 American National Standards Institute/American Society ofMechanical Engineers (ANSI/ASME).1 ANSI/ASME B31.1-2010, Power Piping.

.2 American Society for Testing and Materials International (ASTM).1 ASTM A 125-96(2013)e1, Specification for Steel Springs,Helical, Heat-Treated..2 ASTM A 307-14, Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts andStuds, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength..3 ASTM A 563-15, Specification for Carbon and Alloy SteelNuts.

.3 Factory Mutual (FM)


.5 Manufacturer's Standardization Society of the Valves andFittings Industry (MSS).1 MSS SP 58-2009, Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials,Design and Manufacture.

.6 Underwriter's Laboratories of Canada (ULC)


.1 Design Requirements:.1 Construct pipe hanger and support to manufacturer'srecommendations utilizing manufacturer's regular productioncomponents, parts and assemblies..2 Base maximum load ratings on allowable stresses prescribedby MSS SP 58 or ASME B31.1..3 Ensure that supports, guides, anchors do not transmitexcessive quantities of heat to building structure..4 Design hangers and supports to support systems underconditions of operation, allow free expansion and contraction,prevent excessive stresses from being introduced into pipeworkor connected equipment..5 Provide for vertical adjustments after erection and duringcommissioning. Amount of adjustment in accordance with MSSSP 58.





.2 Submit shop drawings and product data for following items:.1 Bases, hangers and supports..2 Connections to equipment and structure..3 Structural assemblies.

.3 Quality assurance submittals: submit following in accordancewith Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures..1 Certificates: submit certificates signed by manufacturercertifying that materials comply with specified performancecharacteristics and physical properties..2 Instructions: submit manufacturer's installationinstructions.

.4 Closeout Submittals:.1 Provide maintenance data for incorporation into manualspecified in Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.






PART 2 - PRODUCTS


.1 Materials and products in accordance with Section 01 47 15 -Sustainable Requirements: Construction



2.2 GENERAL

.1 Fabricate hangers, supports and sway braces in accordance withANSI B31.1 and MSS SP 58.

.2 Use components for intended design purpose only. Do not use forrigging or erection purposes.

2.3 PIPE HANGERS

.1 Finishes:.1 Pipe hangers and supports: galvanized after manufacture..2 Use electro-plating galvanizing process or hot dippedgalvanizing process..3 Ensure steel hangers in contact with copper piping arecopper plated or have method to isolate copper form steel.

.2 Upper attachment structural: suspension from lower flange ofI-Beam:.1 Cold piping NPS 2 maximum: malleable iron C-clamp withhardened steel cup point setscrew, locknut and carbon steelretaining clip.

.1 Rod: 13 mm FM approved..2 Cold piping NPS 2 1/2 or greater, hot piping: malleableiron beam clamp, eye rod, jaws and extension with carbon steelretaining clip, tie rod, nuts and washers, ULC listed andapproved to MSS-SP 58 and MSS-SP 69.

.3 Upper attachment structural: suspension from upper flange ofI-Beam:.1 Cold piping NPS 2 maximum: ductile iron top-of-beamC-clamp with hardened steel cup point setscrew, locknut andcarbon steel retaining clip, ULC listed and approved to MSSSP 69..2 Cold piping NPS 2 1/2 or greater, hot piping: malleableiron top-of-beam jaw-clamp with hooked rod, spring washer,plain washer and nut ULC listed and approved.

.4 Upper attachment to concrete:.1 Ceiling: carbon steel welded eye rod, clevis plate, clevispin and cotters with weldless forged steel eye nut. Ensure eye6 mm minimum greater than rod diameter..2 Concrete inserts: wedge shaped body with knockoutprotector plate ULC listed and approved to MSS SP 69.

.5 Shop and field-fabricated assemblies:.1 Trapeze hanger assemblies: as indicated.

.6 Hanger rods: threaded rod material to MSS SP 58:.1 Ensure that hanger rods are subject to tensile loadingonly.



.2 Provide linkages where lateral or axial movement ofpipework is anticipated..3 Do not use 22 mm or 28 mm rod.

.7 Pipe attachments: material to MSS SP 58:.1 Attachments for steel piping: carbon steel black..2 Attachments for copper piping: copper plated black steel..3 Use insulation shields for hot pipework..4 Oversize pipe hangers and supports.

.8 Adjustable clevis: material to MSS SP 69 UL listed FM approved,clevis bolt with nipple spacer and vertical adjustment nutsabove and below clevis..1 Ensure "U" has hole in bottom for rivetting to insulationshields.

.9 Yoke style pipe roll: carbon steel yoke, rod and nuts with castiron roll, to MSS SP 69.

.10 U-bolts: carbon steel to MSS SP 69 with 2 nuts at each end toASTM A 563..1 Finishes for steel pipework: black..2 Finishes for copper, glass, brass or aluminum pipework:black, with formed portion plastic coated.

.11 Pipe rollers: cast iron roll and roll stand with carbon steelrod to MSS SP 69.

2.4 RISER CLAMPS

.1 Steel or cast iron pipe: black, carbon steel to MSS SP 58, type42, UL listed, FM approved.

.2 Copper pipe: carbon steel copper plated to MSS SP 58, type 42.

.3 Bolts: to ASTM A 307.

.4 Nuts: to ASTM A 563.

2.5 INSULATION PROTECTION SHIELDS

.1 Insulated cold piping:.1 64 kg/m3 density insulation plus insulation protectionshield to: MSS SP 69, galvanized sheet carbon steel. Lengthdesigned for maximum 3 m span.



2.6 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

.1 Fabricate equipment supports not provided by equipmentmanufacturer from structural grade steel meeting requirementsof Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications. Submit calculationswith shop drawings.

2.7 EQUIPMENT ANCHOR BOLTS AND TEMPLATES

.1 Provide templates to ensure accurate location of anchor bolts.

2.8 PLATFORMS AND CATWALKS

.1 To Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications.

2.9 HOUSE-KEEPING PADS

.1 Provide 100 mm high concrete housekeeping pads for base-mountedequipment; size pads 100 mm larger than equipment; chamfer padedges.

.2 Concrete: to Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-place Concrete.

2.10 OTHER PIPING AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

.1 Fabricate other piping and equipment supports from structuralgrade steel meeting requirements of Section 05 50 00 - MetalFabrications.

.2 Submit structural calculations with shop drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION



3.2 INSTALLATION

.1 Install in accordance with:.1 Manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.

.2 Vibration Control Devices:



.1 Install on piping systems at pumps, and as indicated.

.3 Clamps on riser piping:.1 Support independent of connected horizontal pipework usingriser clamps and riser clamp lugs welded to riser..2 Bolt-tightening torques to industry standards..3 Steel pipes: install below coupling or shear lugs weldedto pipe..4 Cast iron pipes: install below joint.

.4 Clevis plates:.1 Attach to concrete with 4 minimum concrete insets, one ateach corner.

.5 Provide supplementary structural steelwork where structuralbearings do not exist or where concrete inserts are not incorrect locations.

3.3 HANGER SPACING

.1 Plumbing piping: to Canadian Plumbing Code or authority havingjurisdiction.

.2 Fire protection: to applicable fire code.

.3 Gas and fuel oil piping: up to NPS 1/2: every 1.8 m.

.4 Copper piping: up to NPS 1/2: every 1.5 m.

.5 Flexible joint roll groove pipe: in accordance with tablebelow, but not less than one hanger at joints. Table listingsare for straight runs without concentrated loads and where fulllinear movement is not required.

.6 Within 300 mm of each elbow.

Maximum Pipe Maximum MaximumSize: NPS Spacing Steel Spacing Copper

up to 1-1/4 2.1 m 1.8 m1-1/2 2.7 m 2.4 m2 3.0 m 2.7 m2-1/2 3.6 m 3.0 m3 3.6 m 3.0 m3-1/2 3.9 m 3.3 m4 4.2 m 3.6 m5 4.8 m6 5.1 m8 5.7 m10 6.6 m12 6.9 m



.7 Pipework greater than NPS 12: to MSS SP69.

3.4 HANGER INSTALLATION

.1 Install hanger so that rod is vertical under operatingconditions.

.2 Adjust hangers to equalize load.

.3 Support from structural members. Where structural bearing doesnot exist or inserts are not in suitable locations, providesupplementary structural steel members.

3.5 HORIZONTAL MOVEMENT

.1 Angularity of rod hanger resulting from horizontal movement ofpipework from cold to hot position not to exceed 4 degrees fromvertical.

.2 Where horizontal pipe movement is less than 13 mm, offset pipehangers and support so that rod hangers is vertical in the hotposition.

3.6 FINAL ADJUSTMENT

.1 Adjust hangers and supports:.1 Ensure that rod is vertical under operating conditions..2 Equalize loads.

.2 Adjustable clevis:.1 Tighten hanger load nut securely to ensure proper hangerperformance..2 Tighten upper nut after adjustment.

.3 C-clamps:.1 Follow manufacturer's recommended written instructions andtorque values when tightening C-clamps to bottom flange ofbeam.

.4 Beam clamps:.1 Hammer jaw firmly against underside of beam.


.1 Site Test: conduct following tests in accordance with Section01 45 00 - Quality Control and submit report as described inPART 1 - SUBMITTALS.



.2 Manufacturer's Field Services:.1 Obtain written report from manufacturer verifyingcompliance of Work, in handling, installing, applying,protecting and cleaning of product and submit Manufacturer'sField Reports as described in PART 1 - SUBMITTALS..2 Provide manufacturer's field services consisting ofproduct use recommendations and periodic site visits forinspection of product installation in accordance withmanufacturer's instructions..3 Schedule site visits, to review Work, as directed in PART1 - QUALITY ASSURANCE.

END OF SECTION

National Defence UNCLASSIFIED Vibration and Section 23 05 48

New ULCV & EATV Seismic Control for HVAC Page 1Storage Facility Piping and EquipmentGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 Section 21 13 16 - Dry Pipe Sprinkler Systems.

1.2 REFERENCES


.2 National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).1 NFPA 13-2015, Standard for the Installation of SprinklerSystems.

.3 National Building Code of Canada (NBC) - 2015


.1 Submittals: in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - SubmittalProcedures..1 Submit manufacturer's printed product literature,specifications and datasheet in accordance withSection 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. Include productcharacteristics, performance criteria, and limitations.

.2 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00 -Submittal Procedures..1 Submit shop drawings stamped and signed by professionalengineer registered or licensed in Province of Ontario, Canada..2 Provide separate shop drawings for each isolated systemsystem shop drawings complete with performance and productdata..3 Provide detailed drawings of seismic control measures forall equipment, piping and duct..4 Indicate interior bases and locate vibration isolators,with static and dynamic loads on each.

.3 Quality assurance submittals: submit following in accordancewith Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures..1 Certificates: submit certificates signed by manufacturercertifying that materials comply with specified performancecharacteristics and physical properties..2 Instructions: submit manufacturer's installationinstructions..3 Manufacturer's Field Reports: manufacturer's field reportsspecified.



.4 Provide calculations for selection of seismic restraints andattachments, certified by a qualified professional engineerlicensed in the Province of Ontario, Canada. Designcalculations shall use the following parameters:.1 Building site classification for seismic site response isClass D..2 Earthquake importance factor for the building, IS, is 1.0(normal)..3 Spectral response acceleration for short periods,Sa(0.2),is: 0.63..4 Spectral response acceleration for 1-second periods,Sa(1.0), is: 0.13..5 Importance factor for wind load, IW, is 1.0..6 The reference hourly wind velocity pressure, q(1/50), inkPa, is 0.35.

.5 Product Data: Provide schedule of vibration isolator type andseismic restraint type with location and load on each.

.6 Record actual locations of seismic restraints includingattachment points on drawings and provide to DCCRepresentative.

.7 At completion of project, the seismic restraint engineer shallreview the installations with DCC Representative, and shallprovide a written report with a sealed letter, certifying thatthe installations have been completed in accordance with theirdesign and shop drawings.








PART 2 - PRODUCTS



2.2 GENERAL

.1 A single supplier shall provide seismic design, isolation andseismic restraints.

.2 Seismic restraints are to be provided for all operational andfunctional components of building services in accordance withcurrent requirements of the National Building Code of Canada -2015.

.3 Cable restraint systems, rod stiffener clamps and seismicisolator capacities shall be verified by an independent testlaboratory.

.4 Connection materials shall be selected by and site specificdesigns to be prepared by a Seismic Engineer.

.5 All isolators are to be seismic rated or to be used with abracing or snubber system.

.6 Acceptable materials:.1 Vibro-acoustics.2 Kinetics Noise.3 Korfund/VMC Group

.7 Colour code springs for load carrying capacity - colourstripping is not acceptable.

.8 Outdoor springs and housings to be corrosion resistant.

.9 It shall be understood that the requirements of this seismicrestraint section are in addition to other requirements asspecified elsewhere for the support and attachment of equipmentand mechanical services, and for the vibration isolation ofsame equipment. Nothing on the project drawings orspecifications shall be interpreted as justification to waivethe requirements of this seismic restraint section.

2.3 ELASTOMERIC PADS

.1 Type EP1 - neoprene waffle or ribbed; 10 mm minimum thick; 50durometer; maximum loading 350 kPa.



.2 Type EP2 - rubber waffle or ribbed 10 mm minimum thick; 30durometer natural rubber; maximum loading 415 kPa.

.3 Type EP3 - neoprene-steel-neoprene; 9 mm minimum thick neoprenebonded to 1.71 mm steel plate; 50 durometer neoprene, waffle orribbed; holes sleeved with isolation washers; maximum loading350 kPa.

.4 Type EP4 - rubber-steel-rubber; 9 mm minimum thick rubberbonded to 1.71 mm steel plate; 30 durometer natural rubber,waffle or ribbed; holes sleeved with isolation washers; maximumloading 415 kPa.

2.4 ELASTOMERIC MOUNTS

.1 Type M1 - colour coded; neoprene in shear; maximum durometer of60; threaded insert and two bolt-down holes; ribbed top andbottom surfaces.

2.5 SPRINGS

.1 Design stable springs: ratio of lateral to axial stiffness isequal to or greater than 1.2 times ratio of static deflectionto working height. Select for 50% travel beyond rated load.Units complete with levelling devices.

.2 Ratio of height when loaded to diameter of spring between 0.8to 1.0.

.3 Cadmium plate for outdoor and 100% relative humidityinstallations.

.4 Colour code springs.

2.6 SPRING MOUNT

.1 Zinc or cadmium plated hardware; housings coated with rustresistant paint.

.2 Type M3 - stable open spring: 6 mm minimum thick ribbedneoprene or rubber friction and acoustic pad, bonded underisolator and on isolator top plate; levelling bolt for rigidlymounting to equipment.

.3 Type M4 - restrained stable open spring: supported on bonded 6mm minimum thick ribbed neoprene or rubber friction andacoustic pad; built-in resilient limit stops, removable spacerplates.



.4 Type M5 - enclosed spring mounts with snubbers for isolation upto 950 kg maximum.

.5 Performance: 50 mm static deflection unless noted otherwise.

2.7 HANGERS

.1 Colour coded springs, rust resistant, painted box type hangers.Arrange to permit hanger box or rod to move through a 30degrees arc without metal to metal contact.

.2 Type H2 - stable spring, elastomeric washer, cup with mouldedisolation bushing which passes through hanger box.

.3 Type H3 - stable spring, elastomeric element, cup with mouldedisolation bushing which passes through hanger box.

.4 Performance: as required.

2.8 ACOUSTIC BARRIERS FOR ANCHORS AND GUIDES

.1 Acoustic barriers: between pipe and support, consisting of 25mm minimum thick heavy duty neoprene isolation material.

2.9 HORIZONTAL THRUST RESTRAINT

.1 Spring and elastomeric element housed in box frame; assemblycomplete with rods and angle brackets for equipment andductwork attachment; provision for adjustment to limit maximumstart and stop movement to 9 mm.

.2 Arrange restraints symmetrically on either side of unit andattach at centerline of thrust.

2.10 ROOF CURB ISOLATION RAILS

.1 General: complete factory assembled without need for sub-base

.2 Lower member: continuous rectangular steel tube or extrudedaluminum channel.

.3 Upper member: continuous rectangular steel tube or extrudedaluminum channel to provide continuous support for equipment,complete with all-directional neoprene snubber bushings 6 mmthick to resist wind and seismic forces.



.4 Springs: steel, adjustable, removable, selected for 25 mmmaximum static deflection plus 50% additional travel to solid,cadmium plated, sized and positioned to ensure uniformdeflection.

.5 High frequency isolation: 6 mm minimum thick continuous gasketon top and bottom of complete assembly or pads on top andbottom of each spring. Material: closed cell neoprene.

.6 Weatherproofing: continuous flexible counterflashing to curband providing access to springs. Material: aluminum neoprene.

.7 Hardware: cadmium plated or galvanized.

PART 3 - EXECUTION



3.2 INSTALLATION

.1 Seismic control measures to meet requirements of NBC and NFPA.

.2 Install vibration isolation equipment in accordance withmanufacturers instructions and adjust mountings to levelequipment.

.3 Ensure piping, ducting and electrical connections to isolatedequipment do not reduce system flexibility. Ensure that piping,conduit and ducting passage through walls and floors do nottransmit vibrations. A maximum of 25 mm clearance shall beallowed between the penetrating element and the entireperimeter of the penetration. The clearance shall be packedwith fiberglass and sealed with non-hardening mastic on bothsides.

.4 Unless indicated otherwise, support piping connected toisolated equipment with spring mounts or spring hangers with 25mm minimum static deflection as follows:.1 Up to NPS 4: first 3 points of support. NPS 5 to NPS 8:first 4 points of support. NPS 10 and Over: first 6 points ofsupport..2 First point of support: static deflection of twicedeflection of isolated equipment, but not more than 50 mm..3 All hangers are to be installed such that mounting rodsand springs are axially aligned.



.5 Where isolation is bolted to floor use vibration isolationrubber washers.

.6 All bases shall be blocked and shimmed level so that allductwork and piping connections can be made to a rigid system,at operating level, before the isolation adjustment is made.The clearance shall be checked by the Contractor to ensure thatno scraps have been left to short circuit the vibrationisolators. Ensure that there is no physical connection betweenisolated equipment and the building structure.


.1 Inspection and Certification:.1 Experienced and competent sound and vibration testingprofessional engineer to take vibration measurement for HVACsystems after start up and TAB of systems to Section 23 05 93 -Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC..2 Take vibration measurements for all rotating equipment..3 Provide DCC Representative with notice 24 h in advance ofcommencement of tests..4 Establish adequacy of equipment isolation andacceptability of noise levels in occupied areas and whereappropriate, remedial recommendations (including sound curves)..5 Submit complete report of test results including soundcurves.

3.4 CLEANING



END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Mechanical Identification Page 1Storage FacilityGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES

.1 Canadian Gas Association (CGA).1 CSA/CGA B149.1-05, Natural Gas and Propane InstallationCode.

.2 Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB).1 CAN/CGSB-24.3-92, Identification of Piping Systems.

.3 National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).1 NFPA 13-2015, Standard for the Installation of SprinklerSystems..2 NFPA 14-2015, Standard for the Installation of Standpipeand Hose Systems.


.1 Product Data.


.3 Product data to include paint colour chips, other productsspecified in this section.

.4 Samples:.1 Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00 -Submittal Procedures..2 Samples to include nameplates, labels, tags, lists ofproposed legends.


.1 Quality assurance submittals: submit following in accordancewith Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.



.1 Packing, shipping, handling and unloading:.1 Deliver, store and handle in accordance with Section01 61 00 - Common Product Requirements.





PART 2 - PRODUCTS


.1 Materials and products in accordance with Section 01 47 15 -Sustainable Requirements: Construction

2.2 MANUFACTURER'S EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATES

.1 Metal or plastic laminate nameplate mechanically fastened toeach piece of equipment by manufacturer.

.2 Lettering and numbers raised or recessed.

.3 Information to include, as appropriate:.1 Equipment: manufacturer's name, model, size, serialnumber, capacity..2 Motor: voltage, Hz, phase, power factor, duty, frame size.

2.3 SYSTEM NAMEPLATES

.1 Colours:.1 Hazardous: red letters, white background..2 Elsewhere: black letters, white background (except whererequired otherwise by applicable codes).

.2 Construction:.1 3 mm thick laminated plastic or white anodized aluminum,matte finish, with square corners, letters accurately alignedand machine engraved into core.

.3 Sizes:.1 Conform to following table:



Size # mm Sizes (mm) No. of Height of Lines Letters

(mm)1 10 x 50 1 32 13 x 75 1 53 13 x 75 2 34 20 x 100 1 85 20 x 100 2 56 20 x 200 1 87 25 x 125 1 128 25 x 125 2 89 35 x 200 1 20

.2 Use maximum of 25 letters/numbers per line.

.4 Locations:.1 Terminal cabinets, control panels: use size # 5..2 Equipment in Mechanical Rooms: use size # 9.

2.4 PIPING SYSTEMS GOVERNED BY CODES

.1 Identification:.1 Natural gas: to CSA/CGA B149.1 authority havingjurisdiction..2 Sprinklers: to NFPA 13..3 Standpipe and hose systems: to NFPA 14..4 Other fire protection systems: in accordance withapplicable codes and standards, and in accordance withauthority having jurisdiction.

2.5 IDENTIFICATION OF PIPING SYSTEMS

.1 Identify contents by background colour marking, pictogram (asnecessary), legend; direction of flow by arrows. To CAN/CGSB24.3 except where specified otherwise.

.2 Pictograms:.1 Where required: Workplace Hazardous Materials InformationSystem (WHMIS) regulations.

.3 Legend:.1 Block capitals to sizes and colours listed in CAN/CGSB24.3.

.4 Arrows showing direction of flow:.1 Outside diameter of pipe or insulation less than 75 mm:100 mm long x 50 mm high.



.2 Outside diameter of pipe or insulation 75 mm and greater:150 mm long x 50 mm high..3 Use double-headed arrows where flow is reversible.

.5 Extent of background colour marking:.1 To full circumference of pipe or insulation..2 Length to accommodate pictogram, full length of legend andarrows.

.6 Materials for background colour marking, legend, arrows:.1 Pipes and tubing 20 mm and smaller: waterproof andheat-resistant pressure sensitive plastic marker tags..2 Other pipes: pressure sensitive vinyl with protectiveovercoating, waterproof contact adhesive undercoating, suitablefor ambient of 100% RH and continuous operating temperature of150 degrees C and intermittent temperature of 200 degrees C.

.7 Colours and Legends:.1 Where not listed, obtain direction from DCCRepresentative..2 Colours for legends, arrows: to following table:

Background colour: Legend arrows:Yellow BLACKGreen WHITERed WHITE

.3 Background colour marking and legends for piping systems:

Contents Background colour Legendmarking

Rain water Green RAIN WATERDomestic hot water supply Green DOM. HW SUPPLYDomestic cold water supply Green DOM. CWSStorm water Green STORMSanitary Green SANPlumbing vent Green SAN. VENTNatural gas to CodesGas regulator vents to CodesFire protection water Red FIRE PROT. WTRSprinklers Red SPRINKLERS

2.6 IDENTIFICATION DUCTWORK SYSTEMS

.1 50 mm high stencilled letters and directional arrows 150 mmlong x 50 mm high.

.2 Colours: black, or co-ordinated with base colour to ensurestrong contrast.



2.7 VALVES, CONTROLLERS

.1 Brass tags with 12 mm stamped identification data filled withblack paint.

.2 Include flow diagrams for each system, of approved size,showing charts and schedules with identification of each taggeditem, valve type, service, function, normal position, locationof tagged item.

2.8 CONTROLS COMPONENTS IDENTIFICATION

.1 Identify all systems, equipment, components, controls, sensorswith system nameplates specified in this section.

.2 Inscriptions to include function and (where appropriate)fail-safe position.

.3 BAS wiring colour and conduit markings: refer to Division 25.

2.9 LANGUAGE

.1 Identification in English.

PART 3 - EXECUTION



3.2 TIMING

.1 Provide identification only after painting specified Section 0991 99 - Painting has been completed.

3.3 INSTALLATION

.1 Perform work in accordance with CAN/CGSB-24.3 except asspecified otherwise.

.2 Provide ULC and or CSA registration plates as required byrespective agency.



3.4 NAMEPLATES

.1 Locations:.1 In conspicuous location to facilitate easy reading andidentification from operating floor.

.2 Standoffs:.1 Provide for nameplates on hot and/or insulated surfaces.

.3 Protection:.1 Do not paint, insulate or cover.

3.5 LOCATION OF IDENTIFICATION ON PIPING AND DUCTWORK SYSTEMS

.1 On long straight runs in open areas in boiler rooms, equipmentrooms, galleries, tunnels: at not more than 17 m intervals andmore frequently if required to ensure that at least one isvisible from any one viewpoint in operating areas and walkingaisles.

.2 Adjacent to each change in direction.

.3 At least once in each small room through which piping orductwork passes.

.4 On both sides of visual obstruction or where run is difficultto follow.

.5 On both sides of separations such as walls, floors, partitions.

.6 Where system is installed in pipe chases, ceiling spaces,galleries, confined spaces, at entry and exit points, and ataccess openings.

.7 At beginning and end points of each run and at each piece ofequipment in run.

.8 At point immediately upstream of major manually operated orautomatically controlled valves, and dampers. Where this is notpossible, place identification as close as possible, preferablyon upstream side.

.9 Identification easily and accurately readable from usualoperating areas and from access points..1 Position of identification approximately at right anglesto most convenient line of sight, considering operatingpositions, lighting conditions, risk of physical damage orinjury and reduced visibility over time due to dust and dirt.



3.6 VALVES, CONTROLLERS

.1 Valves and operating controllers, except at plumbing fixtures,radiation, or where in plain sight of equipment they serve:Secure tags with non-ferrous chains or closed "S" hooks.

.2 Install one copy of flow diagrams, valve schedules mounted inframe behind non-glare glass where directed by DCCRepresentative. Provide one copy (reduced in size if required)in each operating and maintenance manual.

.3 Number valves in each system consecutively.

3.7 CLEANING

.1 Proceed in accordance with Section 01 74 11 - Cleaning


END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Testing, Adjusting and Page 1Storage Facility Balancing For HVACGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL

.1 TAB means to test, adjust and balance to perform in accordancewith requirements of Contract Documents and to do other work asspecified in this section.

1.2 QUALIFICATIONS OF TAB PERSONNEL

.1 Names of personnel it is proposed to perform TAB to besubmitted to and approved by DCC Representative within 90 daysof award of contract.

.2 Provide documentation confirming qualifications, successfulexperience.

1.3 PURPOSE OF TAB

.1 Test to verify proper and safe operation, determine actualpoint of performance, evaluate qualitative and quantitativeperformance of equipment, systems and controls at design,average and low loads using actual or simulated loads

.2 Adjust and regulate equipment and systems so as to meetspecified performance requirements and to achieve specifiedinteraction with other related systems under normal andemergency loads and operating conditions.

.3 Balance systems and equipment to regulate flow rates to matchload requirements over full operating ranges.

1.4 EXCEPTIONS

.1 TAB of systems and equipment regulated by codes, standards tobe to satisfaction of authority having jurisdiction.

1.5 CO-ORDINATION

.1 Schedule time required for TAB (including repairs, re-testing)into project construction and completion schedule so as toensure completion before acceptance of project.

.2 Do TAB of each system independently and subsequently, whereinterlocked with other systems, in unison with those systems.



1.6 PRE-TAB REVIEW

.1 Review contract documents before project construction isstarted and confirm in writing to DCC Representative adequacyof provisions for TAB and other aspects of design andinstallation pertinent to success of TAB.

.2 Review specified standards and report to DCC Representative inwriting all proposed procedures which vary from standard.

.3 During construction, co-ordinate location and installation ofTAB devices, equipment, accessories, measurement ports andfittings.

1.7 START-UP

.1 Follow start-up procedures as recommended by equipmentmanufacturer unless specified otherwise.

.2 Follow special start-up procedures specified elsewhere inDivisions 22 and 23.

1.8 OPERATION OF SYSTEMS DURING TAB

.1 Operate systems for length of time required for TAB and asrequired by DCC Representative for verification of TAB reports.

1.9 START OF TAB

.1 Notify DCC Representative 7 days prior to start of TAB.

.2 Start TAB when building is essentially completed, including:

.3 Installation of ceilings, doors, windows, other constructionaffecting TAB.

.4 Application of weatherstripping, sealing, caulking.

.5 All pressure, leakage, other tests specified elsewhereDivisions 22 and 23.

.6 All provisions for TAB installed and operational.

.7 Start-up, verification for proper, normal and safe operation ofmechanical and associated electrical and control systemsaffecting TAB including but not limited to:.1 Proper thermal overload protection in place for electricalequipment..2 Air systems:



.1 Filters in place, clean.

.2 Duct systems clean.

.3 Ducts, air shafts, ceiling plenums are airtight towithin specified tolerances..4 Correct fan rotation..5 Fire, smoke, volume control dampers installed andopen..6 Coil fins combed, clean..7 Access doors, installed, closed..8 Outlets installed, volume control dampers open.

.3 Liquid systems:.1 Flushed, filled, vented..2 Correct pump rotation..3 Strainers in place, baskets clean..4 Isolating and balancing valves installed, open..5 Calibrated balancing valves installed, at factorysettings.

1.10 APPLICATION TOLERANCES

.1 Do TAB to following tolerances of design values:.1 HVAC systems: plus 5%, minus 5%.

1.11 ACCURACY TOLERANCES

.1 Measured values to be accurate to within plus or minus 2% ofactual values.

1.12 INSTRUMENTS

.1 Prior to TAB, submit to DCC Representative list of instrumentsto be used together with serial numbers.

.2 Calibrate in accordance with requirements of most stringent ofreferenced standard for either applicable system or HVACsystem.

.3 Calibrate within 3 months of TAB. Provide certificate ofcalibration to DCC Representative.

1.13 SUBMITTALS

.1 Submit, prior to commencement of TAB:

.2 Proposed methodology and procedures for performing TAB ifdifferent from referenced standard.



1.14 PRELIMINARY TAB REPORT

.1 Submit for checking and approval of DCC Representative, priorto submission of formal TAB report, sample of rough TAB sheets.Include:.1 Details of instruments used..2 Details of TAB procedures employed..3 Calculations procedures..4 Summaries.

1.15 TAB REPORT

.1 Format to be in accordance with referenced standard.

.2 TAB report to show results in SI units and to include:.1 Project record drawings..2 System schematics.

.3 Submit 6 copies of TAB Report to DCC Representative forverification and approval, in English in D-ring binders,complete with index tabs.

1.16 VERIFICATION

.1 Reported results subject to verification by DCC Representative.

.2 Provide manpower and instrumentation to verify up to 30 % ofreported results.

.3 Number and location of verified results to be at discretion of.DCC Representative.

.4 Bear costs to repeat TAB as required to satisfaction of DCCRepresentative.

1.17 SETTINGS

.1 After TAB is completed to satisfaction of DCC Representative,replace drive guards, close access doors, lock devices in setpositions, ensure sensors are at required settings.

.2 Permanently mark settings to allow restoration at any timeduring life of facility. Markings not to be eradicated orcovered in any way.



1.18 COMPLETION OF TAB

.1 TAB to be considered complete when final TAB Report receivedand approved by DCC Representative.

1.19 AIR SYSTEMS

.1 Standard: TAB to be to most stringent of this section or TABstandards of AABC or NEBB.

.2 Do TAB of systems, equipment, components, controls specified inDivisions 22 and 23.

.3 Qualifications: personnel performing TAB to be current memberin good standing of AABC or NEBB.

.4 Quality assurance: Perform TAB under direction of supervisorqualified by AABC or NEBB.

.5 Measurements: to include, but not limited to, following asappropriate for systems, equipment, components, controls: airvelocity, static pressure, flow rate, pressure drop (or loss),temperatures (dry bulb, wet bulb, dewpoint), ductcross-sectional area, RPM, electrical power, voltage, noise,vibration.

.6 Locations of equipment measurements: To include, but not belimited to, following as appropriate:.1 Inlet and outlet of dampers, filter, coil, fan, otherequipment causing changes in conditions..2 At controllers, controlled device.

.7 Locations of systems measurements to include, but not belimited to, following as appropriate: Main ducts, main branch,sub-branch, run-out (or grille, register or diffuser).

1.20 DOMESTIC HWC SYSTEMS AND NON-POTABLE WATER SYSTEMS

.1 Meet requirements as specified for hydronic systems.

.2 Location of equipment measurements: to include, but not belimited to, the following as appropriate: inlet and outlet ofheaters, DHW tank, at controllers and controlled devices.

.3 Locations of systems measurements to include, but not belimited to, the following, as appropriate: main, main-branch,branch, sub-branch.



1.21 OTHER SYSTEMS

.1 Plumbing systems:.1 TAB procedures:

.1 Flush valves: adjust to suit project pressureconditions..2 Pressure booster systems: test for capacity andpressures under all conditions and at all times..3 Pumped sanitary and storm water systems: test forproper operation at all possible flow rates.

.2 Refrigeration systems forming part of HVAC systems.

.3 Sprinkler system in accordance with authority havingjurisdiction and ANSI/NFPA 13-2002.

1.22 OTHER TAB REQUIREMENTS

.1 General requirements applicable to work specified thisparagraph:.1 Qualifications of TAB personnel: as for air systemsspecified this section..2 Quality assurance: as for air systems specified thissection.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Pressure Testing Of Page 1Storage Facility Ducted Air SystemsGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

.1 Related Sections:.1 Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures..2 Section 01 32 16.07 - Construction Progress Schedules -Bar (GANTT) Chart..3 Section 01 70 12 - Safety Requirements..4 Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control..5 Section 01 47 15 - Sustainable Requirements: Construction.6 Section 01 74 21 - Construction/Demolition WasteManagement and Disposal..7 Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals..8 Section 01 91 13 - General Commissioning (Cx)Requirements.

1.2 REFERENCES


.2 Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's NationalAssociation (SMACNA).1 SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual, 2012.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

.1 Make submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - SubmittalProcedures.

.2 Test Reports: submit certified test reports from approvedindependent testing laboratories indicating compliance withspecifications for specified performance characteristics andphysical properties. Include pressure test information andresults as follows:.1 Submit proposed report form and test report format to DCCRepresentative for approval at least three months beforeproposed date of first series of tests. Do not start testsuntil approval received in writing from DCC Representative..2 Prepare report of results and submit to DCC Representativewithin 24 hours of completion of tests. Include:

.1 Schematic of entire system.

.2 Schematic of section under test showing test site.

.3 Required and achieved static pressures.

.4 Orifice differential pressure at test sites.

.5 Permissible and actual leakage flow rate (L/s) fortest sites.



.6 Witnessed certification of results..3 Include test reports in final TAB report..4 Certificates: submit certificates signed by manufacturercertifying that materials comply with specified performancecharacteristics and physical properties..5 Instructions: submit manufacturer's installationinstructions..6 Manufacturer's field reports specified.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TEST INSTRUMENTS

.1 Test apparatus to include:.1 Fan capable of producing required static pressure..2 Duct section with calibrated orifice plate mounted andaccurately located pressure taps..3 Flow measuring instrument compatible with the orificeplate..4 Calibration curves for orifice plates used..5 Flexible duct for connecting to ductwork under test..6 Smoke bombs for visual inspections.

.2 Test apparatus: accurate to within +/- 3 % of flow rate andpressure.

.3 Submit details of test instruments to be used to DCCRepresentative at least three months before anticipated startdate.

.4 Test instruments: calibrated and certificate of calibrationdeposited with DCC Representative no more than 28 days beforestart of tests.

.5 Re-calibrated every six months thereafter.

2.2 EQUIPMENT LEAKAGE TOLERANCES

.1 Equipment and system components such as VAV boxes, duct heatingleakage: 2%.



PART 3 - EXECUTION



3.2 TEST PROCEDURES

.1 Maximum lengths of ducts to be tested consistent with capacityof test equipment.

.2 Section of duct to be tested to include:.1 Fittings, branch ducts, tap-ins.

.3 Repeat tests until specified pressures are attained. Bear costsfor repairs and repetition to tests.

.4 Base partial system leakage calculations on SMACNA HVAC AirDuct Leakage Test Manual.

.5 Seal leaks that can be heard or felt, regardless of theircontribution to total leakage.

3.3 SITE TOLERANCES

.1 System leakage tolerances specified are stated as percentage oftotal flow rate handled by system. Pro-rate specified systemleakage tolerances. Leakage for sections of duct systems: notto exceed total allowable leakage.

.2 Leakage tests on following systems not to exceed specifiedleakage rates..1 Small duct systems up to 250 Pa: leakage 2%..2 Large low pressure duct systems up to 500 Pa: leakage 2%.

.3 Evaluation of test results to use surface area of duct andpressure in duct as basic parameters.

3.4 TESTING

.1 Test ducts before installation of insulation or other forms ofconcealment.

.2 Test after seals have cured.



.3 Test when ambient temperature will not affect effectiveness ofseals, and gaskets.

.4 Flexible connections to VAV boxes.


.1 Performance Verification:.1 DCC Representative to witness tests and to verify reportedresults..2 To be certified by same TAB agency approved by DCCRepresentative to undertake TAB on this project.

3.6 CLEANING


END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Duct Insulation Page 1Storage FacilityGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL




.3 Section 23 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping andEquipment.

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air ConditioningEngineers (ASHRAE).1 ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2013, SI; Energy Standard forBuildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings.

.2 American Society for Testing and Materials International,(ASTM).1 ASTM B 209M-14, Specification for Aluminum and AluminumAlloy Sheet and Plate (Metric)..2 ASTM C 335-10e1, Test Method for Steady State HeatTransfer Properties of Horizontal Pipe Insulation..3 ASTM C 411-11, Test Method for Hot-Surface Performance ofHigh-Temperature Thermal Insulation..4 ASTM C 449/C 449-07(R2013), Standard Specification forMineral Fiber-Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating andFinishing Cement..5 ASTM C 547-15, Specification for Mineral Fiber PipeInsulation..6 ASTM C 553-13, Specification for Mineral Fiber BlanketThermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications..7 ASTM C 612-14, Specification for Mineral Fiber Block andBoard Thermal Insulation..8 ASTM C 795-08(R2013), Specification for Thermal Insulationfor Use with Austenitic Stainless Steel..9 ASTM C 921-10(R2015), Standard Specification for ThermalInsulation for Use in Contact with Austenitic Stainless Steel.

.3 Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB).1 CGSB 51-GP-52MA, Vapour Barrier, Jacket and FacingMaterial for Pipe, Duct and Equipment Thermal Insulation.

.4 Thermal Insulation Association of Canada (TIAC): NationalInsulation Standards (R1999).

.5 Underwriters Laboratories of Canada (ULC)



.1 CAN/ULC-S102-11, Surface Burning Characteristics ofBuilding Materials and Assemblies..2 CAN/ULC-S701-05, Thermal Insulation Polyotrene, Boards andPipe Covering.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

.1 For purposes of this section:.1 "CONCEALED" - insulated mechanical services and equipmentin suspended ceilings and non-accessible chases and furred-inspaces..2 "EXPOSED" - will mean "not concealed" as defined herein..3 Insulation systems - insulation material, fasteners,jackets, and other accessories.

.2 TIAC Codes:.1 CRD: Code Round Ductwork,.2 CRF: Code Rectangular Finish.

1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS

.1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00 -Submittal Procedures.

.2 Submit for approval manufacturer's catalogue literature relatedto installation, fabrication for duct jointing recommendations.

1.5 MANUFACTURERS' INSTRUCTIONS

.1 Submit manufacturer's installation instructions in accordancewith Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.

.2 Installation instructions to include procedures used, andinstallation standards achieved.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

.1 Installer: specialist in performing work of this section, andhave at least 3 years successful experience in this size andtype of project, member of TIAC.



.2 Protect from weather and construction traffic.



.3 Protect against damage from any source.

.4 Store at temperatures and conditions recommended bymanufacturer.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FIRE AND SMOKE RATING

.1 In accordance with CAN/ULC-S102:.1 Maximum flame spread rating: 25..2 Maximum smoke developed rating: 50.

2.2 INSULATION

.1 Mineral fibre: as specified includes glass fibre, rock wool,slag wool.

.2 Thermal conductivity ("k" factor) not to exceed specifiedvalues at 24° C mean temperature when tested in accordance withASTM C 335.

.3 TIAC Code C-1: Rigid mineral fibre board to ASTM C 612, withfactory applied vapour retarder jacket to CGSB 51-GP-52Ma (asscheduled in PART 3 of this Section).

.4 TIAC Code C-2: Mineral fibre blanket to ASTM C 553 faced withfactory applied vapour retarder jacket to CGSB 51-GP-52Ma (asscheduled in PART 3 of this section)..1 Mineral fibre: to ASTM C 553..2 Jacket: to CGSB 51-GP-52Ma..3 Maximum "k" factor: to ASTM C 553.

2.3 JACKETS

.1 Canvas:.1 220 gm/m2 cotton, plain weave, treated with dilute fireretardant lagging adhesive to ASTM C 921.

.2 Lagging adhesive: Compatible with insulation.



2.4 ACCESSORIES

.1 Vapour retarder lap adhesive:.1 Water based, fire retardant type, compatible withinsulation.

.2 Indoor Vapour Retarder Finish:.1 Vinyl emulsion type acrylic, compatible with insulation.

.3 Insulating Cement: hydraulic setting on mineral wool, to ASTMC449.

.4 ULC Listed Canvas Jacket:.1 220 gm/m2 cotton, plain weave, treated with dilute fireretardant lagging adhesive to ASTM C 921.

.5 Outdoor Vapour Retarder Mastic:.1 Vinyl emulsion type acrylic, compatible with insulation..2 Reinforcing fabric: Fibrous glass, untreated 305 g/m2.

.6 Tape: self-adhesive, aluminum, plain, 50 mm wide minimum.

.7 Contact adhesive: quick-setting

.8 Canvas adhesive: washable.

.9 Tie wire: 1.5 mm stainless steel.

.10 Banding: 12 mm wide, 0.5 mm thick stainless steel.

.11 Facing: 25 mm stainless steel hexagonal wire mesh stitched onone face.

.12 Fasteners: 2 mm diameter pins with 35 mm square clips, lengthto suit thickness of insulation.

.13 Surfaces clean, dry, free from foreign material.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PRE-INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

.1 Pressure testing of ductwork systems complete, witnessed andcertified.




3.2 INSTALLATION

.1 Install in accordance with TIAC National Standards.

.2 Apply materials in accordance with manufacturers instructionsand as indicated.

.3 Use two layers with staggered joints when required nominalthickness exceeds 75 mm.

.4 Maintain uninterrupted continuity and integrity of vapourretarder jacket and finishes..1 Hangers, supports to be outside vapour retarder jacket.

.5 Supports, Hangers in accordance with Section 23 05 29 - Hangersand Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment..1 Apply high compressive strength insulation whereinsulation may be compressed by weight of ductwork.

.6 Fasteners: At 300 mm oc in horizontal and vertical directions,maximum two rows each side.

3.3 DUCTWORK INSULATION SCHEDULE

.1 Insulation types and thicknesses: Conform to following table:

TIAC Code Vapour Thickness Retarder (mm)

Rectangular C-1 yes 50cold anddualtemperaturesupply,airducts

Round cold C-2 yes 50temperatureand dualsupplyair ducts

Supply, nonereturn andexhaustductsexposed inspace

Outside C-1 yes 50air,



to mixingplenum,packaged airhandlingor heatrecoveryequipment

Exhaust C-1 no 50 duct between dampers and louvres or outside vent

Acoustically nonelined ducts

Round C-2 yes 25combustionair ducting

.2 Finishes: conform to following table:

Rectangular RoundIndoor none noneconcealed

Indoor Canvas Canvasexposed

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Thermal Insulation For Page 1Storage Facility PipingGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES

.1 American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and AirConditioning Engineers (ASHRAE).1 ASHRAE Standard 90.1-15, Energy Standard for BuildingsExcept Low-Rise Residential Buildings (IESNA co-sponsored;ANSI approved; Continuous Maintenance Standard).

.2 American Society for Testing and Materials International(ASTM).1 ASTM B209M-14, Standard Specification for Aluminum andAluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate Metric..2 ASTM C335-10e1, Standard Test Method for Steady StateHeat Transfer properties of Horizontal Pipe Insulation..3 ASTM C411-05, Standard Test Method for Hot-SurfacePerformance of High-Temperature Thermal Insulation..4 ASTM C449/C449M-00, Standard Specification for MineralFiber-Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating and FinishingCement..5 ASTM C533-09, Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe ThermalInsulation..6 ASTM C547e1, Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation..7 ASTM C795-08, Standard Specification for ThermalInsulation for Use in Contact With Austenitic StainlessSteel..8 ASTM C921-10(R2015), Standard Practice for Determiningthe Properties of Jacketing Materials for Thermal Insulation.

.3 Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB).1 CGSB 51-GP-52Ma, Vapour Barrier, Jacket and FacingMaterial for Pipe, Duct and Equipment Thermal Insulation..2 CAN/CGSB-51.53-95, Poly (Vinyl Chloride) JacketingSheet, for Insulated Pipes, Vessels and Round Ducts.

.4 Department of Justice Canada (Jus).1 Canadian Environmental Assessment Act (CEAA), 1995,C.37..2 Canadian Environmental Protection Act (CEPA), 1999,c.33..3 Transportation of Dangerous Goods Act (TDGA), 1992,C.34.


.6 Manufacturer's Trade Associations.1 Thermal Insulation Association of Canada (TIAC):

National Insulation Standards (Revised 2004).



.7 Underwriters' Laboratories of Canada (ULC).1 CAN/ULC-S102-10, Surface Burning Characteristics ofBuilding Materials and Assemblies..2 CAN/ULC-S701-11, Thermal Insulation, Polystyrene, Boardsand Pipe Covering..3 CAN/ULC-S702-2014, Thermal Insulation, Mineral Fibre,for Buildings..4 CAN/ULC-S702.2-2010, Thermal Insulation, Mineral Fibre,for Buildings, Part 2: Application Guidelines.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

.1 For purposes of this section:.1 'CONCEALED" - insulated mechanical services in suspendedceilings non-accessible chases, furred-in spaces, and tunnelsor trenches..2 "EXPOSED" - will mean "not concealed" as specified.

.2 TIAC ss:.1 CRF: Code Rectangular Finish..2 CPF: Code Piping Finish.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


.2 Product Data:.1 Submit manufacturer's printed product literature,specifications and datasheet in accordance with Section 01 0033 - Submittal Procedures. Include product characteristics,performance criteria, and limitations.

.1 Submit two copies of Workplace Hazardous MaterialsInformation System (WHMIS) Material Safety Data Sheets(MSDS) in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - SubmittalProcedures.

.3 Shop Drawings:.1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00- Submittal Procedures.

.1 Shop drawings: submit drawings stamped and signedby Professional Engineer registered or licensed inProvince of Ontario, Canada.

.4 Quality assurance submittals: submit following in accordancewith Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures..1 Certificates: submit certificates signed by manufacturercertifying that materials comply with specified performancecharacteristics and physical properties.





.1 Qualifications:

.2 Installer: specialist in performing work of this Section, andhave at least 3 years successful experience in this size andtype of project, qualified to standards member of TIAC.



.1 Packing, shipping, handling and unloading:.1 Deliver, store and handle in accordance withmanufacturer's written instructions and Section 01 61 00 -Common Product Requirements..2 Deliver materials to site in original factory packaging,labelled with manufacturer's name, address.

.2 Storage and Protection:.1 Protect from weather, construction traffic..2 Protect against damage..3 Store at temperatures and conditions required bymanufacturer.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS



2.2 FIRE AND SMOKE RATING

.1 In accordance with CAN/ULC-S102..1 Maximum flame spread rating: 25..2 Maximum smoke developed rating: 50



2.3 INSULATION

.1 Mineral fibre specified includes glass fibre, rock wool, slagwool.

.2 Thermal conductivity ("k" factor) not to exceed specifiedvalues at 24 degrees C mean temperature when tested inaccordance with ASTM C 335.

.3 TIAC Code A-1: rigid moulded mineral fibre without factoryapplied vapour retarder jacket..1 Mineral fibre: to CAN/ULC-S702..2 Maximum "k" factor: to CAN/ULC-S702.

.4 TIAC Code A-3: rigid moulded mineral fibre with factoryapplied vapour retarder jacket..1 Mineral fibre: to CAN/ULC-S702..2 Jacket: to CGSB 51-GP-52Ma..3 Maximum "k" factor: to CAN/ULC-S702.

.5 TIAC Code C-2: mineral fibre blanket faced with factoryapplied vapour retarder jacket (as scheduled in PART 3 ofthis section)..1 Mineral fibre: to CAN/ULC-S702..2 Jacket: to CGSB 51-GP-52Ma..3 Maximum "k" factor: to CAN/ULC-S702.

.6 TIAC Code A-6: flexible unicellular tubular elastomer..1 Insulation: with vapour retarder jacket..2 Jacket: to CGSB 51-GP-52Ma..3 Maximum "k" factor: standard of acceptance: Armaflex..4 Certified by manufacturer: free of potential stress

corrosion cracking corrodants.

2.4 INSULATION SECUREMENT

.1 Tape: self-adhesive, aluminum, plain reinforced, 50 mm wideminimum.

.2 Contact adhesive: quick setting.

.3 Canvas adhesive: washable.

.4 Tie wire: 1.5 mm diameter stainless steel.

.5 Bands: stainless steel, 19 mm wide, 0.5 mm thick.

2.5 CEMENT

.1 Thermal insulating and finishing cement:



.1 Hydraulic setting or air drying on mineral wool, to ASTMC449/C449M.

2.6 VAPOUR RETARDER LAP ADHESIVE

.1 Water based, fire retardant type, compatible with insulation.

2.7 INDOOR VAPOUR RETARDER FINISH

.1 Vinyl emulsion type acrylic, compatible with insulation.

2.8 OUTDOOR VAPOUR RETARDER FINISH

.1 Vinyl emulsion type acrylic, compatible with insulation.

.2 Reinforcing fabric: fibrous glass, untreated 305 g/m2.

2.9 JACKETS

.1 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC):.1 One-piece moulded type and sheet to CAN/CGSB-51.23 withpre-formed shapes as required..2 Colours: to match adjacent finish paint by DCCRepresentative..3 Minimum service temperatures: -20 degrees C..4 Maximum service temperature: 65 degrees C..5 Moisture vapour transmission: 0.02 perm..6 Thickness: 0.5 mm..7 Fastenings:

.1 Use solvent weld adhesive compatible withinsulation to seal laps and joints..2 Tacks..3 Pressure sensitive vinyl tape of matching colour.

.8 Special requirements:.1 Outdoor: UV rated material at least 0.5 mm thick.

.2 Canvas:.1 220 and 120 gm/m2 cotton, plain weave, treated withdilute fire retardant lagging adhesive to ASTM C921..2 Lagging adhesive: compatible with insulation.



PART 3 - PRODUCTS



3.2 PRE-INSTALLATION REQUIREMENT

.1 Pressure testing of piping systems and adjacent equipment tobe complete, witnessed and certified.


3.3 INSTALLATION

.1 Install in accordance with TIAC National Standards.

.2 Apply materials in accordance with manufacturers instructionsand this specification.

.3 Use two layers with staggered joints when required nominalwall thickness exceeds 75 mm.

.4 Maintain uninterrupted continuity and integrity of vapourretarder jacket and finishes..1 Install hangers, supports outside vapour retarderjacket.

.5 Supports, Hangers:.1 Apply high compressive strength insulation, suitable forservice, at oversized saddles and shoes where insulationsaddles have not been provided.

3.4 REMOVABLE, PRE-FABRICATED, INSULATION AND ENCLOSURES

.1 Application: at expansion joints, valves, primary flowmeasuring elements flanges and unions at equipment.

.2 Design: to permit movement of expansion joint and to permitperiodic removal and replacement without damage to adjacentinsulation.

.3 Insulation:.1 Insulation, fastenings and finishes: same as system.



.2 Jacket: aluminum, SS, PVC or high temperature fabricconsistent with system.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF ELASTOMERIC INSULATION

.1 Insulation to remain dry. Overlaps to manufacturersinstructions. Ensure tight joints.

.2 Provide vapour retarder as recommended by manufacturer.

3.6 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULES

.1 Includes valves, valve bonnets, strainers, flanges andfittings unless otherwise specified.

.2 TIAC Code: A-1..1 Securements: SS wire bands, Tape at 300 mm on centre..2 Seals: lap seal adhesive, lagging adhesive. Insulation:TIAC Code 1501-H.

.3 TIAC Code: A-3..1 Securements: SS wire bands, Tape at 300 mm on centre..2 Seals: VR lap seal adhesive, VR lagging adhesive.Insulation: TIA Code: 1501-C.

.4 TIAC Code: A-6..1 Insulation securements: as recommended by manufacturer..2 Seals: lap seal adhesive, lagging adhesive..3 Installation: TIAC Code:.

.5 TIAC Code: C-2 with without vapour retarder jacket..1 Insulation securements: as recommended by manufacturer..2 Seals: lap seal adhesive, lagging adhesive. Insulation:TIAC Code: 1501-C.

.6 TIAC Code: A-2..1 Insulation securements: as recommended by manufacturer..2 Seals: lap seal adhesive, lagging adhesive.Installation: TIAC Code: 1501-H.

.7 Thickness of insulation as listed in following table..1 Run-outs to individual units and equipment not exceeding4000 mm long..2 Do not insulate exposed runouts to plumbing fixtures,chrome plated piping, valves, fittings.



Appli- Temp TIAC Pipe sizes (NPS) and insulation thicknesscation degrees code (mm) C Run to 1 1 1/4 2 1/2 5 8 & out to 2 to 4 to 6 over

Domestic A-1 25 25 25 38 38 38hot watersupply andrecirc,temperedwater

Domestic A-3 25 25 25 25 25 25coldwater

Above A-3 25 25 25 25 25 25groundstorm,non-potable

.8 Finishes:.1 Exposed indoors: PVC jacket..2 Exposed in mechanical rooms: PVC jacket except aluminumor SS on steam, condensate and diesel exhaust..3 Concealed, indoors: canvas on valves, fittings. Nofurther finish..4 Use vapour retarder jacket on TIAC code A-3 insulationcompatible with insulation..5 Finish attachments: SS screws bands, at 150 mm oncentre. Seals: wing closed..6 Insulation: to appropriate TIAC code CRF/1 throughCPF/5.

3.7 CLEANING



END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Performance Verification Page 1Storage Facility Mechanical Piping SystemsGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 GASEOUS FUEL SYSTEMS

.1 Operation tests:.1 Measure gas pressure at gas regulator outlet and atburner manifold..2 Verify details of temperature and pressure compensationat meter..3 Verify settings, operation, venting of high and lowpressure cut-outs, alarms..4 Check terminals of vents for gas pressure regulators.

1.2 POTABLE WATER SYSTEMS

.1 When cleaning is completed and system filled:.1 Verify performance of equipment and systems as specified

elsewhere in Division 22..2 Check for proper operation of water hammer arrestors.

Run one outlet for 10 seconds, then shut of waterimmediately. If water hammer occurs, replace water hammerarrestor or recharge air chambers. Repeat for each outletand flush valve.

.3 Confirm water quality consistent with supply standards,verifying that no residuals remain resulting fromflushing and/or cleaning.

1.3 WET AND DRY PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEM, STANDPIPE AND HOSE SYSTEMS

.1 Cleaning, testing, start-up, performance verification ofequipment, systems, components, and devices is specifiedelsewhere in Division 21.

.2 Verification of controls, detection devices, alarm devices isspecified Division 26.

.3 Verify operation of interlocks between HVAC systems and firealarm systems.

1.4 SANITARY AND STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEMS

.1 Buried systems: perform tests prior to back-filling. Performhydraulic tests to verify grades and freedom fromobstructions.

.2 Ensure that traps are fully and permanently primed.


New ULCV & EATV Performance Verification Page 2Storage Facility Mechanical Piping SystemsGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

.3 Ensure that fixtures are properly anchored, connected tosystem.

.4 Operate flush valves, tank and operate each fixture to verifydrainage and no leakage.

.5 Cleanouts: refer to Section 22 42 01 - Plumbing Specialtiesand Accessories.

.6 Roof drains:.1 Refer to Section 22 42 01 - Plumbing Fixtures..2 Remove caps as required.

1.5 REPORTS

.1 In accordance with Section 01 91 13 - General Commissioning(Cx) Requirements: Reports, supplemented as specified herein.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Facility Natural Page 1Storage Facility Gas PipingGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

.1 Related Sections.1 Section 01 32 16.07 - Construction Progress Schedules -Bar (GANTT) Chart..2 Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures..3 Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control..4 Section 01 47 15 - Sustainable Requirements: Construction.5 Section 01 74 21 - Construction/Demolition WasteManagement and Disposal..6 Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals..7 Section 23 05 05 - Installation of Pipework..8 Section 23 08 01 - Performance Verification of MechanicalPiping Systems.

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME).1 ASME B16.5-2013, Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings..2 ASME B16.18-2012, Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint PressureFittings..3 ASME B16.22-2013, Wrought Copper and Copper AlloySolder-Joint Pressure Fittings..4 ASME B18.2.1-2012, Square and Hex Bolts and Screws InchSeries.

.2 American Society for Testing and Materials International (ASTM).1 ASTM A 47/A 47M-99(2014), Standard Specification forFerritic Malleable Iron Castings..2 ASTM A 53/A 53M-12, Standard Specification for Pipe,Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc Coated, Welded and Seamless..3 ASTM B 75M-11, Standard Specification for Seamless CopperTube Metric..4 ASTM B 837-10, Standard Specification for Seamless CopperTube for Natural Gas and Liquified Petroleum (LP) Gas FuelDistribution Systems.

.3 Canadian Standards Association (CSA International).1 CSA W47.1-09(R2014), Certification of Companies for FusionWelding of Steel.

.4 Canadian Standards Association (CSA)/Canadian Gas Association(CGA).1 CAN/CSA B149.1-15, Natural Gas and Propane InstallationCode Handbook..2 CAN/CSA B149.2-10(R2015), Propane Storage and HandlingCode.




1.3 SUBMITTALS


.2 Product Data:.1 Submit manufacturer's printed product literature,specifications and datasheet for piping, fittings andequipment..2 Indicate on manufacturers catalogue literature following:valves, regulators, meters, pressure reducing valves..3 Submit WHMIS MSDS in accordance with Section 01 47 15 -Sustainable Requirements: Construction. Indicate VOC's foradhesive and solvents during application and curing.

.3 Test Reports: submit certified test reports from approvedindependent testing laboratories indicating compliance withspecifications for specified performance characteristics andphysical properties.


.5 Instructions: submit manufacturer's installation instructions.

.6 Closeout Submittals: submit maintenance and engineering datafor incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00 -Closeout Submittals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS


2.2 PIPE

.1 Steel pipe: to ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, seamless asfollows:.1 NPS 1/2 to 2, screwed..2 NPS2 1/2 and over, plain end.



.2 Copper tube: to ASTM B 837.

2.3 JOINTING MATERIAL

.1 Screwed fittings: teflon approved for natural gas.

.2 Welded fittings: to CSA W47.1.

.3 Flange gaskets: nonmetallic flat.

.4 Brazing: to ASTM B 837.

2.4 FITTINGS

.1 Steel pipe fittings, screwed, flanged or welded:.1 Malleable iron: screwed, banded, Class 150..2 Steel pipe flanges and flanged fittings: to ASME B16.5..3 Welding: butt-welding fittings..4 Unions: malleable iron, brass to iron, ground seat, toASTM A 47/A 47M..5 Bolts and nuts: to ASME B18.2.1..6 Nipples: schedule 40, to ASTM A 53/A 53M.

.2 Copper pipe fittings, screwed, flanged or soldered:.1 Cast copper fittings: to ASME B16.18..2 Wrought copper fittings: to ASME B16.22.

2.5 VALVES

.1 Provincial Code approved, lubricated plug type.

.2 NPS 2 and under, screwed.

.3 NPS 2-1/2 and over, flanged.

.4 Suitable for the temperature to which exposed.

.5 Certified by Canadian Gas Association (CGA).

2.6 PIPE GUIDES

.1 Roller-bearing pipe support for roof mounted gas lines.

.2 Self-lubricating roller and non-corrosive rod and roller.

.3 Pipe support base shall be hot-dip galvanized steel.

.4 Sized to suit pipe.



.5 Roller shall be "W" shape to keep pipe centered on support.

.6 Adjustable height bases. Contractor to ensure all supports areadjusted to keep the pipe line level.

.7 Install on a galvanized steel deck plate to manufacturer'sspecifications.

2.7 GAS METERS

.1 In accordance with CSA B149.1-2015, Natural Gas and PropaneInstallation Code.

.2 In accordance with local gas utility and authority havingjurisdiction guidelines/requirements and regulations.

.3 Meter shall be of Diaphragm type, one piece diaphragm,lubrication free, built in pressure taps, top entry adjustmentand capable of operating in temperature between -34°C to 49°C,maximum operating pressure to 68 kPa. Meter shall be capable ofproviding a pulse signal to the BAS or compatible with a meterreading system that can send a pulse signal. Supplier toprovide meter reading system.

.4 Performance +/-1.0% accuracy at rated capacity. Flow capacity,allowable pressure drop and connection size as indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION



3.2 PIPING

.1 Install in accordance with Section 23 05 05 - Installation ofPipework, and CAN/CSA B149.1, CAN/CSA B149.2.

.2 Install drip points:.1 At low points in piping system..2 At connections to equipment.

.3 Ream pipe ends. Clear scale and dirt, inside and outside beforeand after assembly.



.4 Slope piping down in direction of flow to low point.

.5 Use eccentric reducers at pipe size change installed to providepositive drainage.

.6 Use dielectric type fittings where buried service enters andconnects to building piping.

.7 Joints:.1 Gas service inside building - screw or weld NPS 2 andunder. Weld NPS 2-1/2 and over..2 Gas service in ceiling plenums - weld all sizes..3 Gas service outside building - weld all sizes belowground. Weld all sizes NPS 2-1/2 and over about ground.

3.3 VALVES

.1 Install valves with stems upright or horizontal unlessotherwise approved by DCC Representative.

.2 Install valves at branch take-offs to isolate pieces ofequipment, and as indicated.

.3 Install valve on the main gas service entering the building.Valve to have locking lugs.


.1 Site Tests/Inspection:.1 Test system in accordance with CAN/CSA B149.1 andrequirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

.2 Obtain reports within 3 days of review and submit immediatelyto DCC Representative.

.3 Submit final gas inspection certification to DCCRepresentative.

.4 Performance Verification:.1 Refer to Section 23 08 01 - Performance Verification ofMechanical Piping Systems.

.5 PV procedures:.1 Test performance of components.

3.5 ADJUSTING

.1 Purging: purge after pressure test in accordance with CAN/CSAB149.1.



.2 Pre-Start-Up Inspections:.1 Check vents from regulators, control valves, terminateoutside building in approved location through roof, andprotected against blockage, damage..2 Check gas trains, entire installation is approved byauthority having jurisdiction.

3.6 CLEANING

.1 Cleaning: in accordance with CAN/CSA B149.1-15.


END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Metal Ducts - Low Page 1Storage Facility Pressure To 500 PaGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

.1 Section Includes:.1 Materials and installation of low-pressure metallicductwork, joints and accessories.

.2 Related Sections:.1 Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures..2 Section 01 70 12 - Safety Requirements..3 Section 01 74 21 - Construction/Demolition WasteManagement and Disposal..4 Section 07 81 00 - Applied Fireproofing..5 Section 23 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for HVAC Pipingand Equipment..6 Section 23 05 94 - Pressure Testing of Ducted Air Systems.

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-ConditioningEngineers, Inc. (ASHRAE).

.2 American Society for Testing and Materials International,(ASTM)..1 ASTM A 480/A 480M-16, Standard Specification for GeneralRequirements for Flat-Rolled Stainless and Heat-Resisting SteelPlate, Sheet and Strip..2 ASTM A 635/A 635M-15, Standard Specification for Steel,Sheet and Strip, Heavy-Thickness Coils, Carbon, Hot Rolled..3 ASTM A 653/A 653M-15, Standard Specification for SteelSheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy Coated(Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

.3 Department of Justice Canada (Jus)..1 Canadian Environmental Protection Act (CEPA), 1999, c. 33.

.4 Health Canada/Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System(WHMIS)..1 Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).

.5 National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)..1 NFPA 90A-15, Standard for the Installation ofAir-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems..2 NFPA 90B-15, Standard for the Installation of Warm AirHeating and Air-Conditioning Systems.

.6 Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' NationalAssociation (SMACNA).



.1 SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal andFlexible, 2nd Edition 1995 and Addendum No. 1, 1997..2 SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual, 1985, 1stEdition..3 IAQ Guideline for Occupied Buildings Under Construction1995, 1st Edition.

.7 Transport Canada (TC)..1 Transportation of Dangerous Goods Act (TDGA), 1992, c. 34.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


.2 Product Data: submit WHMIS MSDS - Material Safety Data Sheetsin accordance with Section 01 47 15 - Sustainable Requirements:Construction:.1 Sealants..2 Tape..3 Proprietary Joints.

.3 Submit Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) Management Plan in accordancewith Section 01 47 15 - Sustainable Requirements: Construction.


.1 Certification of Ratings:.1 Catalogue or published ratings shall be those obtainedfrom tests carried out by manufacturer or independent testingagency signifying adherence to codes and standards.

.2 Health and Safety: In accordance with 01 70 12 - SafetyRequirements.

.3 Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) Management Plan..1 Develop and implement an Indoor Air Quality (IAQ)Management Plan in accordance with Section 01 47 15 -Sustainable Requirements: Construction. for construction andpreoccupancy phases of building..2 During construction meet or exceed the requirements ofSMACNA IAQ Guideline for Occupied Buildings under Construction.


.1 Protect on site stored or installed absorptive material frommoisture damage.



.2 Store and manage hazardous materials in accordance with Section01 47 15 - Sustainable Requirements: Construction.

.3 Waste Management and Disposal:.1 Separate waste materials for reuse and recycling inaccordance with Section 01 47 15 - Sustainable Requirements:Construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


.1 Materials and resources in accordance with Section 01 47 15 -Sustainable Requirements: Construction.

2.2 SEAL CLASSIFICATION

.1 Classification as follows:

Maximum Pressure Pa SMACNA Seal Class 500 C250 C125 C

.2 Seal classification:.1 Class A: longitudinal seams, transverse joints, duct wallpenetrations and connections made airtight with sealant andtape..2 Class B: longitudinal seams, transverse joints andconnections made airtight with sealant, tape or combinationthereof..3 Class C: transverse joints and connections made air tightwith gaskets, sealant, tape or as indicated. Longitudinal seamsunsealed.

2.3 SEALANT

.1 Sealant: oil resistant, water borne, polymer type flameresistant duct sealant. Temperature range of minus 30 degrees Cto plus 93 degrees C.

2.4 TAPE

.1 Tape: polyvinyl treated, open weave fiberglass tape, 50 mmwide.



2.5 DUCT LEAKAGE

.1 In accordance with SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual

2.6 FITTINGS

.1 Fabrication: to SMACNA.

.2 Radiused elbows..1 Rectangular: Centreline radius: 1.5 times width of ductunless noted otherwise..2 Round: smooth radius or five piece if required. Centrelineradius: 1.5 times diameter.

.3 Mitred elbows, rectangular:.1 To 400 mm: with single thickness turning vanes..2 Over 400 mm: with double thickness turning vanes.

.4 Branches:.1 Rectangular main and branch: with 45 degrees entry onbranch..2 Round main and branch: enter main duct at 45 degrees withconical connection..3 Provide volume control damper in branch duct nearconnection to main duct..4 Main duct branches: with splitter damper.

.5 Transitions:.1 Diverging: 20 degrees maximum included angle..2 Converging: 30 degrees maximum included angle.

.6 Offsets:.1 Full radiused elbows.

.7 Obstruction deflectors: maintain full cross-sectional area..1 Maximum included angles: as for transitions.

2.7 FIRE STOPPING

.1 Retaining angles around duct, on both sides of fire separationin accordance with Section 07 81 00 - Applied Fireproofing.

.2 Fire stopping material and installation must not distort duct.

2.8 GALVANIZED STEEL

.1 Lock forming quality: to ASTM A 653/A 653M, Z90 zinc coating.

.2 Thickness, fabrication and reinforcement: to SMACNA.



.3 Joints: to SMACNA or proprietary manufactured duct joint.Proprietary manufactured flanged duct joint to be considered tobe a class A seal.

2.9 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

.1 Hangers and Supports: in accordance with Section 23 05 29 -Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment..1 Strap hangers: of same material as duct but next sheetmetal thickness heavier than duct.

.1 Maximum size duct supported by strap hanger: 500..2 Hanger configuration: to ASHRAE and SMACNA..3 Hangers: galvanized steel angle with galvanized steel rodsto the following table:

Duct Size Angle Size Rod Size (mm) (mm) (mm)up to 750 25 x 25 x 3 6751 to 1050 40 x 40 x 3 61051 to 1500 40 x 40 x 3 101501 to 2100 50 x 50 x 3 102101 to 2400 50 x 50 x 5 102401 and over 50 x 50 x 6 10

.4 Upper hanger attachments:.1 For concrete: manufactured concrete inserts..2 For steel joist: manufactured joist clamp or steelplate washer..3 For steel beams: manufactured beam clamps.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

.1 Do work in accordance with NFPA 90A, NFPA 90B, ASHRAE, SMACNAand as indicated.

.2 Do not break continuity of insulation vapour barrier withhangers or rods..1 Insulate strap hangers 100 mm beyond insulated duct.Ensure diffuser is fully seated.

.3 Support risers in accordance with SMACNA.

.4 Install breakaway joints in ductwork on sides of fireseparation.



.5 Install proprietary manufactured flanged duct joints inaccordance with manufacturer's instructions.

.6 Manufacture duct in lengths and diameter to accommodateinstallation of acoustic duct lining.

3.2 HANGERS

.1 Strap hangers: install in accordance with SMACNA.

.2 Angle hangers: complete with locking nuts and washers.

.3 Hanger spacing: in accordance with ASHRAE, SMACNA and asfollows:Duct Size Spacing(mm) (mm)to 1500 30001501 and over 2500

3.3 WATERTIGHT DUCT

.1 Provide watertight duct for:.1 Fresh air intakes including combustion air systems..2 Exhaust stacks from base of riser upwards..3 Elsewhere as indicated.

.2 Form bottom of horizontal duct without longitudinal seams..1 Weld joints of bottom and side sheets..2 Seal other joints with duct sealer.

3.4 SEALING AND TAPING

.1 Apply sealant to outside of joint to manufacturer'srecommendations.

.2 Bed tape in sealant and recoat with minimum of one coat ofsealant to manufacturers recommendations.

3.5 DUCT MATERIALS

.1 Duct shall be constructed of the following materials unlessindicated otherwise:.1 Interior duct systems: galvanized steel..2 Exterior duct systems and components: stainless steel oraluminum.



3.6 LEAKAGE TESTS

.1 Refer to Section 23 05 94 - Pressure Testing of Ducted AirSystems.

.2 In accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Leakage Test Manual.

.3 Do leakage tests in sections.

.4 Make trial leakage tests as instructed to demonstrateworkmanship.

.5 Do not install additional ductwork until trial test has beenpassed.

.6 Test section minimum of 30 m long with not less than threebranch takeoffs and two 90 degrees elbows.

.7 Complete test before performance insulation or concealmentWork.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Air Duct Accessories Page 1Storage FacilityGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

.1 Related Sections:.1 Section 01 32 16.07 - Construction Progress Schedules -Bar (GANTT) Chart..2 Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures..3 Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control..4 Section 01 47 15 - Sustainable Requirements: Construction.5 Section 01 70 12 - Safety Requirements..6 Section 01 74 21 - Construction/Demolition WasteManagement and Disposal..7 Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.

1.2 REFERENCES


.2 Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' NationalAssociation (SMACNA)..1 SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal andFlexible, 95.



.2 Product Data:.1 Submit manufacturer's printed product literature,specifications and data sheet. Indicate the following:

.1 Flexible connections.

.2 Duct access doors.

.3 Turning vanes.

.4 Instrument test ports..2 Submit WHMIS MSDS in accordance with Section 01 47 15 -Sustainable Requirements: Construction. Indicate VOC's foradhesive and solvents during application and curing.

.3 Test Reports: submit certified test reports from approvedindependent testing laboratories indicating compliance withspecifications for specified performance characteristics andphysical properties.



.1 Certification of ratings: catalogue or published ratingsto be those obtained from tests carried out by manufacturer orindependent testing agency signifying adherence to codes andstandards.


.5 Instructions: submit manufacturer's installation instructions.

.6 Manufacturer's Field Reports: manufacturer's field reportsspecified.

.7 Closeout submittals: submit maintenance and engineering datafor incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00 -Closeout Submittals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Materials and resources in accordance with Section 01 47 15 -Sustainable Requirements: Construction.

2.2 GENERAL

.1 Manufacture in accordance with SMACNA - HVAC Duct ConstructionStandards.

2.3 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS

.1 Frame: galvanized sheet metal frame mm thick with fabricclenched by means of double locked seams.

.2 Material:.1 Fire resistant, self extinguishing, neoprene coated glassfabric, temperature rated at minus 40 degrees C to plus 90degrees C, density of 1.3 kg/m2.

2.4 ACCESS DOORS IN DUCTS

.1 Non-Insulated Ducts: sandwich construction of same material asduct, one sheet metal thickness heavier, minimum 0.6 mm thickcomplete with sheet metal angle frame.



.2 Insulated Ducts: sandwich construction of same material asduct, one sheet metal thickness heavier, minimum 0.6 mm thickcomplete with sheet metal angle frame and 25 mm thick rigidglass fibre insulation.

.3 Gaskets: neoprene foam rubber.

.4 Hardware:.1 Up to 300 x 300 mm: two sash locks complete with safetychain..2 301 to 450 mm: four sash locks complete with safety chain..3 451 to 1000 mm: piano hinge and minimum two sash locks..4 Doors over 1000 mm: piano hinge and two handles operablefrom both sides..5 Hold open devices.

2.5 TURNING VANES

.1 Factory or shop fabricated single thickness double thickness orwith trailing edge, to recommendations of SMACNA and asindicated.

2.6 INSTRUMENT TEST

.1 1.6 mm thick steel zinc plated after manufacture.

.2 Cam lock handles with neoprene expansion plug and handle chain.

.3 28 mm minimum inside diameter. Length to suit insulationthickness.

.4 Neoprene mounting gasket.

PART 3 - EXECUTION



3.2 INSTALLATION

.1 Flexible Connections:.1 Install in following locations:

.1 Inlets and outlets to supply air units and fans.



.2 Inlets and outlets of exhaust and return air fans.

.3 Elsewhere, as indicted..2 Length of connection: 100 mm..3 Minimum distance between metal parts when system inoperation: 75 mm..4 Install in accordance with recommendations of SMACNA..5 When fan is running:

.1 Ducting on sides of flexible connection to be inalignment..2 Ensure slack material in flexible connection.

.2 Access Doors and Viewing Panels:.1 Size:

.1 900 x 900 mm for person size entry.

.2 750 x 450 mm for servicing entry.

.3 300 x 300 mm for viewing..2 Locations:

.1 Fire and smoke dampers.

.2 Control dampers.

.3 Devices requiring maintenance.

.4 Required by code.

.5 Reheat coils.

.6 Elsewhere as indicated.

.3 Instrument Test Ports:.1 General:

.1 Install in accordance with recommendations of SMACNAand in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

.2 Locate to permit easy manipulation of instruments.

.3 Install insulation port extensions as required.

.4 Locations:.1 For traverse readings.

.1 Ducted inlets to roof and wall exhausters.

.2 Inlets and outlets of other fan systems.

.3 Main and sub-main ducts.

.4 And as indicated..2 For temperature readings.

.1 At outside air intakes.

.2 In mixed air applications in locations asapproved by DCC Representative..3 At inlet and outlet of coils..4 Downstream of junctions of two converging airstreams of different temperatures..5 And as indicated.

.4 Turning vanes:.1 Install in accordance with recommendations of SMACNA andas indicated.



3.3 CLEANING

.1 Perform cleaning operations as specified in Section and inaccordance with manufacturer's recommendations.


END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Dampers - Balancing Page 1Storage FacilityGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

.1 Section Includes:.1 Balancing dampers for mechanical forced air ventilationand air conditioning systems.

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning National Association (SMACNA).1 SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal andFlexible-1985.




.1 Indicate the following:.1 Pressure drop.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS



2.2 GENERAL

.1 Manufacture to SMACNA standards.

2.3 SINGLE BLADE DAMPERS

.1 Fabricate from same material as duct, but one sheet metalthickness heavier. V-groove stiffened.



.2 Size and configuration to recommendations of SMACNA, exceptmaximum height 100 mm.

.3 Locking quadrant with shaft extension to accommodate insulationthickness.

.4 Inside and outside bronze end bearings.

.5 Channel frame of same material as adjacent duct, complete withangle stop.

2.4 MULTI-BLADED DAMPERS

.1 Factory manufactured of material compatible with duct.

.2 Opposed blade: configuration, metal thickness and constructionto recommendations of SMACNA.

.3 Maximum blade height: 100 mm.

.4 Bearings: self-lubricating nylon.

.5 Linkage: shaft extension with locking quadrant.

.6 Channel frame of same material as adjacent duct, complete withangle stop.

.7 Maximum leakage : 4 % at 1000 Pa.

PART 3 - EXECUTION



3.2 INSTALLATION

.1 Install where indicated.

.2 Install in accordance with recommendations of SMACNA and inaccordance with manufacturer's instructions.

.3 Locate balancing dampers in each branch duct, for supply,return and exhaust systems.



.4 Runouts to registers and diffusers: install single blade damperlocated as close as possible to main ducts.

.5 Dampers: vibration free.

.6 Ensure damper operators are observable and accessible.

.7 Corrections and adjustments conducted by DCC Representative.

3.3 CLEANING



END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Dampers - Operating Page 1Storage FacilityGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES

.1 American Society for Testing and Materials International (ASTM).1 ASTM A 653/A 653M-13, Standard Specification for SteelSheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated(Galvannealed) by Hot-Dip Process.


.3 American National Standards Institute (ANSI).1 ANSI/AMCA Standard 500-D-12, Laboratory Methods of TestingDampers for Rating.

1.2 SUBMITTALS



.2 Indicate the following:.1 Performance data..2 Leakage..3 Pressure drop..4 Torque required.


.3 Closeout Submittals.1 Provide maintenance data for incorporation into manualspecified in Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS



2.2 MULTI-LEAF DAMPERS

.1 Opposed for modulating service and parallel blade type forisolating.

.2 Extruded aluminum, interlocking blades, complete with extrudedvinyl seals, spring stainless steel side seals, structurallyformed and welded galvanized steel frame.

.3 Pressure fit self-lubricated bronze bearings.

.4 Linkage: plated steel tie rods, brass pivots and plated steelbrackets, complete with plated steel control rod.

.5 Performance:.1 Leakage: in closed position less than 2% of rated air flowat 1000 Pa differential across damper..2 Pressure drop: at full open position less than 25 Padifferential across damper at 5 m/s.

.6 Insulated aluminum dampers for all fresh air and exhaust airapplications:.1 Frames: insulated with extruded polystyrene foam with RSI0.88..2 Blades: constructed from aluminum extrusions with internalhollows insulated with polyurethane or polystyrene foam, RSI0.88.

2.3 BACK DRAFT DAMPERS

.1 Automatic gravity operated, multi or single leaf, steelconstruction with nylon bearings, centre pivoted.

PART 3 - EXECUTION





3.2 INSTALLATION

.1 Install where indicated.

.2 Install in accordance with recommendations of SMACNA andmanufacturer's instructions.

.3 Seal multiple damper modules with silicon sealant.

.4 Install access door adjacent to each damper. See Section23 33 00 - Air Duct Accessories.

.5 Ensure dampers are observable and accessible.

3.3 CLEANING



END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Dampers - Fire and Page 1Storage Facility SmokeGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES

.1 American National Standards Institute/National Fire ProtectionAssociation (ANSI/NFPA).1 ANSI/NFPA 90A-15, Standard for the Installation of AirConditioning and Ventilating Systems.

.2 NFPA 80: Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives.


.4 Underwriters Laboratories of Canada (ULC).1 CAN4-S112-2010, Fire Test of Fire Damper Assemblies..2 CAN4-S112.2-M84, Standard Method of Fire Test of CeilingFirestop Flap Assemblies..3 ULC-S505-1974, Fusible Links for Fire Protection Service.

1.2 SUBMITTALS



.2 Indicate the following:.1 Fire dampers..2 Smoke dampers..3 Fire stop flaps..4 Operators..5 Fusible links..6 Design details of break-away joints.


.3 Closeout Submittals:



.1 Provide maintenance data for incorporation into manualspecified in Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.


.1 Certificates:.1 Catalogue or published ratings those obtained from testscarried out by manufacturer or those ordered by manufacturerfrom independent testing agency signifying adherence to codesand standards.

1.4 MAINTENANCE

.1 Extra Materials:.1 Provide maintenance materials in accordance with Section01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals..2 Provide following:

.1 6 fusible links of each type.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS



2.2 FIRE DAMPERS

.1 Fire dampers: arrangement Type B or C, bear label of ULC, meetrequirements of CFFM and ANSI/NFPA 90A. Fire damper assembliesfire tested in accordance with CAN4-S112.



.2 Mild steel, factory fabricated for fire rating requirement tomaintain integrity of fire wall and/or fire separation..1 Fire dampers: ratings to match fire rated separation..2 Fire dampers: automatic operating type and have dynamicrating suitable for maximum air velocity and pressuredifferential to which it will be subjected.

.3 Top hinged: offset, round or square; multi-blade hinged orinterlocking type; roll door type; sized to maintain full ductcross section.

.4 Fusible link actuated, lock in closed position when releasedand having spring-closing operator.

.5 40 x 40 x 3 mm retaining angle iron frame, on full perimeter offire damper, on both sides of fire separation being pierced.

.6 Equip fire dampers with steel sleeve or frame installed inorder not to disrupt ductwork or impair damper operation.

.7 Equip sleeves or frames with perimeter mounting angles attachedon both sides of wall or floor opening. Construct ductwork infire-rated floor-ceiling or roof-ceiling assembly systems withair ducts that pierce ceiling to conform with ULC.

.8 Design and construct dampers to not reduce duct or air transferopening cross-sectional area.

.9 Dampers shall be installed so that the centerline of the damperdepth or thickness is located in the centerline of the wall,partition of floor slab depth or thickness.

.10 Unless otherwise indicated, the installation details given inSMACNA Install Fire Damp HVAC and in manufacturer'sinstructions for fire dampers shall be followed.

.11 3 hour rated walls require fire dampers which are actuated byheat from either side of the wall.

.12 Construct of minimum 1.5 mm thick sheet steel with 1.6 mm thicknon-asbestos ULC listed insulation and corrosion-resistant pinsand hinges.

.13 Flaps held open with fusible link conforming to ULC-S505 andclose at 74 degrees C or as indicated.



PART 3 - EXECUTION



3.2 INSTALLATION

.1 Install in accordance with ANSI/NFPA 90A and in accordance withconditions of ULC listing.

.2 Maintain integrity of fire separation.

.3 Before restraining angles are installed, have expansionclearances inspected and verified by authority havingjurisdiction.

.4 After completion and prior to concealment obtain approvals ofcomplete installation from authority having jurisdiction.

.5 Install access door adjacent to each damper. See Section23 33 00 - Air Duct Accessories. Identify access door (accesspanel) with red identifying label per NFPA 80.

.6 Co-ordinate with installer of firestopping.

.7 Ensure access doors/panels, fusible links, damper operators areeasily observed and accessible.

.8 Install break-away joints of approved design on each side offire separation.

3.3 TESTING

.1 All fire damper shall be inspected and tested as per NFPA 80.

.2 Each fire damper shall be tagged following testing, and the tagshall identify the date of testing.

.3 Testing to be conducted with DCC Representative present.

3.4 CLEANING





END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV HVAC Fans Page 1Storage FacilityGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES

.1 Air Conditioning and Mechanical Contractors (AMCA).1 AMCA Publication 99-2003, Standards Handbook..2 AMCA 300-2014, Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testingof Fans..3 AMCA 301-14, Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratingsfrom Laboratory Test Data.

.2 American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/American Societyof Mechanical Engineers (ASME).1 ANSI/AMCA 210-07, Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans forAerodynamic Performance Rating.



.1 Performance Requirements:.1 Catalogued or published ratings for manufactured items:obtained from tests carried out by manufacturer or thoseordered by manufacturer from independent testing agencysignifying adherence to codes and standards in force..2 Capacity: flow rate, external static pressure, bhp,efficiency, revolutions per minute, power, model, size, soundpower data and as indicated on schedule..3 Fans: statically and dynamically balanced, constructed inconformity with AMCA 99..4 Sound ratings: comply with AMCA 301, tested to AMCA 300..5 Performance ratings: based on tests performed inaccordance with ANSI/AMCA 210. Supply unit with AMCA certifiedrating seal, except for propeller fans smaller than 300 mmdiameter.






.2 Shop Drawings:.1 Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance withSection 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.

.3 Provide :.1 Fan performance curves showing point of operation, kW andefficiency..2 Sound rating data at point of operation.

.4 Indicate:.1 Motors, sheaves, bearings, shaft details..2 Minimum performance achievable with variable speedcontrollers as appropriate.


.6 Closeout Submittals:.1 Provide operation and maintenance data for incorporationinto manual specified in Section 01 78 00 - CloseoutSubmittals.

1.4 MAINTENANCE

.1 Extra Materials:.1 Provide maintenance materials in accordance with Section01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.

.1 Spare parts to include:.1 Matched sets of belts.

.2 Furnish list of individual manufacturer's recommendedspare parts for equipment, include:

.1 Bearings and seals.

.2 Addresses of suppliers.

.3 List of specialized tools necessary for adjusting,repairing or replacing.






PART 2 - PRODUCTS



2.2 FANS GENERAL

.1 Motors:.1 In accordance with Section 23 05 13 - Common MotorsRequirements for HVAC Equipment supplemented as specifiedherein..2 For use with variable speed controllers where indicated..3 Sizes as indicated.

.2 Accessories and hardware: matched sets of V-belt drives,adjustable slide rail motor bases, belt guards and couplingguards. Specified in Section 23 05 13 - Common MotorRequirements for other accessories as indicated.

.3 Factory primed before assembly in colour standard tomanufacturer.

.4 Provide scroll casing drains.

.5 Bearing lubrication systems plus extension lubrication tubeswhere bearings are not easily accessible.

.6 Vibration isolation: to Section 23 05 48 - Vibration andSeismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment..1 Suspended fans: Type H3 spring hanger, minimum 50 mmstatic deflection..2 Base mounted: Type M3 spring mounts, minimum 38 mm staticdeflection.

.7 Flexible connections: to Section 23 33 00 - Air DuctAccessories. Provide on inlet and discharge.

.8 Acceptable Materials:.1 Greenheck..2 Loren Cook.



.3 Penn Barry.

2.3 CABINET FANS - GENERAL PURPOSE

.1 Fan characteristics and construction: as centrifugal fans.

.2 Cabinet hung single or multiple wheel with DWDI forward curvedwheel centrifugal fans in factory fabricated casing completewith vibration isolators and seismic control measures, motor,V-belt drive and guard inside casing.

.3 Fabricate casing of zinc coated or phosphate treated steel of1.6 mm thickness reinforced and braced for rigidity. Provideremovable panels for access to interior. Paint uncoated, steelparts with corrosion resistant paint to CAN/CGSB 1.181. Finishinside and out, over prime coat, with rust resistant enamel.Internally line cabinet with 25 mm thick rigid acousticinsulation, pinned and cemented, complete with metal nosings onexposed edges.

2.4 SEQUENCES OF OPERATIONS

.1 Refer to the Flow Diagrams and Controls drawings for schematicsand sequences of operations.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


.1 Compliance: comply with manufacturer's written recommendationsor specifications, including product technical bulletins,handling, storage and installation instructions, and datasets.

3.2 FAN INSTALLATION

.1 Install fans as indicated, complete with resilient mountingsspecified in Section 23 05 48 - Vibration and Seismic Controlsfor HVAC Piping and Equipment, flexible electrical leads andflexible connections in accordance with Section 23 33 00 - AirDuct Accessories. Use vibration isolators as indicated.

.2 Provide sheaves and belts required for final air balance.

.3 Bearings and extension tubes to be easily accessible.

.4 Access doors and access panels to be easily accessible.



3.3 CLEANING



END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Packaged Roof and Wall Page 1Storage Facility ExhaustersGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL




.3 Section 01 74 21 - Construction/Demolition Waste ManagementSystem.


.5 Section 01 91 13 - Commissioning (Cx) General Requirements.

.6 Section 23 05 13 - Common Motor Requirements for HVACEquipment.

.7 Section 23 33 15 - Dampers - Operating.

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 Air Movement and Control Association (AAMC).1 AMCA Publication 99-10, Standards Handbook (Revised2003)..2 AMCA 300-14, Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testingof Fans..3 AMCA 301-14, Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratingsfrom Laboratory Test Data.

.2 American National Standards Institute (ANSI).1 ANSI/AMCA 210-07, Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans forAerodynamic Performance Rating.



.2 Include:.1 Fan performance curves showing specified point ofoperation..2 Sound rating data..3 Electrical requirements including wiring diagrams forinterlock and control wiring.




.1 Provide operation and maintenance data for incorporation intomanual specified in Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.

1.5 CERTIFICATIONS

.1 Catalogued or published ratings shall be those obtained fromtests carried out by manufacturer or those ordered fromindependent testing agency signifying adherence to codes andstandards in force.

.2 Provide confirmation of testing.

1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS

.1 Provide maintenance materials in accordance with Section 0178 00 - Closeout Submittals.

.2 Furnish list of individual manufacturer's recommended spareparts for equipment such as bearings and seals, and addressesof suppliers, together with list of specialized toolsnecessary for adjusting, repairing or replacing, forplacement into operating manual.

.3 Include manufacturer's installation instructions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS



2.2 FANS GENERAL

.1 Capacity: flow rate, static pressure Pa, r/min, Wattage, andsound ratings as indicated on schedule.

.2 Statically and dynamically balanced. Constructed inconformity with AMCA 99.

.3 Sound ratings: comply with AMCA 301-06, tested to AMCA300-08. Unit shall bear AMCA certified sound rating seal.



.4 Performance ratings: based on tests performed in accordancewith ANSI/ASHRAE 51/AMCA 210, unit to bear AMCA certifiedrating seal.

.5 Bearings: Bearings shall be selected for a minimum (L10) lifein excess of 100,000 hours at maximum catalogued operatingspeeds.

2.3 ROOF EXHAUSTERS

.1 Roof exhausters shall be centrifugal, spun aluminum beltdriven type..1 The fan wheel shall be centrifugal backward inclined,constructed of aluminum and shall include a wheel conematched to the inlet cone for precise running tolerances..2 Wheels shall be statically and dynamically balanced..3 A disconnect switch shall be provided within fanhousing..4 The fan housing shall be uniquely spun from a cylinderof heavy gauge aluminum and mounted to a high strength steelframe..5 The windbank shall be 100% continuously welded to theone piece aluminum curb cap. High wind load braces shallconnect the curb cap to the windband.

.2 Motors and Drives:.1 Motors shall be heavy-duty permanently lubricated type,matched to the fan load, and furnished mounted to the steeldrive frame at the specified voltage, phase, and enclosure asshown on the schedule and drawings. Refer to Section 23 05 13- Common Motor requirement for HVAC Equipment..2 Motors and drives shall be mounted on vibrationisolators and have seismic restraints in accordance withSection 23 05 48 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVACPiping and Equipment..3 Motors and drives shall be readily accessible formaintenance..4 Drives shall be sized for a minimum of 150% of drivenhorsepower..5 Pulleys shall be of the cast type, keyed and securelyattached to the wheel and motor shafts..6 Motor pulleys shall be adjusted for final systembalancing..7 Provide OSHA motor/fan guard for all fans..8 Accessories:

.1 Provide 120 V motorized dampers for fan asindicated on schedule. Dampers to be in accordance withSection 23 33 15 - Dampers: Operating..2 Insulated Roof Curbes: 400 mm high curbs of samemanufacturers fan and built to suit model specified.



.3 Other accessories as indicated.

2.4 SEQUENCES OF OPERATION

.1 Refer to the Flow Diagrams and Controls drawings forschematics and sequences of operations.

PART 3 - EXECUTION



3.2 Installation

.1 Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and inaccordance with Section 23 05 48 - Vibration and SeismicControls for HVAC Piping and Equipment.

3.3 ANCHOR BOLTS AND TEMPLATES

.1 Size anchor bolts to withstand seismic acceleration andvelocity forces as specified in Section 23 05 48 - Vibrationand Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Diffusers, Registers Page 1Storage Facility and GrillesGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 Performance Requirements:.1 Catalogued or published ratings for manufactured items:obtained from tests carried out by manufacturer or thoseordered by manufacturer from independent testing agencysignifying adherence to codes and standards.


.1 Product Data:.1 Submit manufacturer's printed product literature,specifications and datasheet in accordance withSection 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. Include productcharacteristics, performance criteria, and limitations..2 Indicate following:

.1 Capacity.

.2 Throw and terminal velocity.

.3 Noise criteria.

.4 Pressure drop.

.5 Neck velocity.







1.4 MAINTENANCE

.1 Extra Materials:.1 Provide maintenance materials in accordance with Section01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals..2 Include:

.1 Keys for volume control adjustment.

.2 Keys for air flow pattern adjustment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS



2.2 GENERAL

.1 To meet capacity, pressure drop, noise level, neck velocity asfollows:.1 Noise: NC 25 to 35..2 Pressure drop: 12 to 20 Pa..3 Capacity: as indicated.

.2 Frames:.1 Full perimeter gaskets..2 Plaster frames where set into plaster or gypsum board andas specified..3 Concealed fasteners.

.3 Concealed manual volume control damper operators.

.4 Colour: as directed by DCC Representative or as indicated.

.5 Acceptable Material: EH Price, Nailor, Titus.


.1 Grilles, registers and diffusers of same generic type, productsof one manufacturer.

2.4 DIFFUSERS, GRILLES AND REGISTERS

.1 General: with opposed blade dampers.



.2 Drum diffuser: Heavy gauge aluminum or steel. High capacity;long throw. Drum shall rotate up and down minimum 25 degreesfrom center line c/w individually adjustable blades. 32 mmborder. Opposed blade damper. Finish: white powder coat.

.3 Size and construction as indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION



3.2 INSTALLATION

.1 Install in accordance with manufacturers instructions.

.2 Install with flat head cadmium plated screws in countersunkholes where fastenings are visible.

.3 Provide concealed safety chain on each grille, register anddiffuser.

3.3 CLEANING



END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Louvres, Intakes and Page 1Storage Facility VentsGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES

.1 American Society for Testing and Materials International (ASTM).1 ASTM E 90-09, Standard Test Method for LaboratoryMeasurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of BuildingPartitions and Elements.


.3 Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' NationalAssociation (SMACNA).

.4 Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE).


.1 Performance Requirements:.1 Catalogued or published ratings for manufactured items:obtained from tests carried out by manufacturer or thoseordered by manufacturer from independent testing agencysignifying adherence to codes and standards.




.2 Indicate following:.1 Pressure drop..2 Face area..3 Free area.




.3 Test Reports:.1 Submit certified data from independent laboratorysubstantiating acoustic and aerodynamic performance toASTM E 90.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS



2.2 FIXED LOUVRES - ALUMINUM

.1 Construction: welded with exposed joints ground flush andsmooth.

.2 Material: extruded aluminum alloy 6063-T5.

.3 Blade: drainable blade stormproof pattern, reinforcing bossesand maximum blade length of 1500 mm.

.4 Frame, head, sill and jamb: 150 mm deep one piece extrudedaluminum, minimum 3 mm thick with approved caulking slot,integral to unit.

.5 Mullions: at 1500 mm maximum centres.

.6 Fastenings: stainless steel SAE-194-8F with SAE-194-SFB nutsand resilient neoprene washers between aluminum and head ofbolt, or between nut, ss washer and aluminum body.



.7 Screen: 12 mm exhaust 19 mm intake mesh, 2 mm diameter wirealuminum birdscreen on inside face of louvres in formedU-frame.

.8 Finish: prime coated with anodized colour finish. Colour: toDCC Representative's approval.

.9 Acceptable Material: Airolite, Ruskin, Ventex.

.10 Provide AMCA certified ratings for pressure drop, free area andwater penetration.

.11 Free area velocity and pressure drop beginning point of waterpenetration per AMCA Standard 511: 375 m/min and 57 Pa.

.12 Provide extended sill, 14 GA aluminum.

PART 3 - EXECUTION



3.2 INSTALLATION

.1 In accordance with manufacturer's and SMACNA recommendations.

.2 Reinforce and brace.

.3 Anchor securely into opening. Seal with caulking to ensureweather tightness.

.4 Secure roof hood, as recommended by manufacturer.

3.3 CLEANING



END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV HVAC Air Filtration Page 1Storage FacilityGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES

.1 American National Standards Institute/National Fire PreventionAssociation (ANSI/NFPA).1 ANSI/NFPA 96-2014, Ventilation Control and Fire Protectionof Commercial Cooking Operations.

.2 American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air-ConditioningEngineers (ASHRAE).1 ASHRAE 52.2-2002, Method of Trsting General Ventilationair-Cleaning Devices for Removal Efficiency by particle Size.

.3 Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB).1 CAN/CGSB-115.13-85, Filter Media, Automatic Roll.


.5 Underwriters' Laboratories of Canada.1 ULC-S111-2013, Standard Method of Fire Tests for AirFilter Units..2 ULC-S649-06, Exhaust Hoods and Related Controls forCommercial and Institutional Kitchens.




.2 Shop Drawings:.1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00 -Submittal Procedures..2 Indicate following: efficiencies, pressure drop.





.4 Closeout Submittals.1 Provide maintenance data for incorporation into manualspecified in Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.




1.4 MAINTENANCE

.1 Extra Materials:.1 Provide maintenance materials in accordance with Section01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals..2 Furnish list of individual manufacturer's recommendedspare parts for equipment such as frames and filters, addressesof suppliers, list of specialized tools necessary foradjusting, repairing or replacing for inclusion in operatingmanual..3 Spare filters: in addition to filters installedimmediately prior to acceptance by DCC Representative, supply 1complete set of filters for each filter unit or filter bank inaccordance with section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals..4 Commissioning filters: provide additional set of filtersfor commissioning process.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS





2.2 GENERAL

.1 Media: suitable for air at 100% RH and air temperatures betweenminus 40 and 50 degrees C.

.2 Number of units, size and thickness of panels, overalldimensions of filter bank, configuration and capacities: toequipment manufacturer's standards and to limit pressure drops.

.3 Pressure drop when clean and dirty, maximum 62 pa clean and 200pa dirty.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

.1 Holding frames: permanent "T" section or channel sectionconstruction of same material as casing/hood, 1.6 mm thick,except where specified.

.2 Seals: to ensure leakproof operation.

.3 Blank-off plates: as required, to fit all openings and of samematerial as holding frames.

.4 Access and servicing: through doors/panels on each side and/orfrom downstream face of filter bank.

2.4 FIBROUS GLASS PANEL FILTERS (MERV 8)

.1 Disposable fibrous glass media: to CAN/CGSB-115.10 withadhesive.

.2 Holding frame: 1.2 mm minimum thick galvanized steel with 3 mmdiameter hinged wire mesh screen.

.3 Performance: minimum average synthetic dust weight arrestance70% to ASHRAE 52.1. Minimum efficiency reporting value toASHRAE 52.5: MERV 8.

.4 Fire rated: to ULC -S111.

.5 Nominal thickness: 50 mm.

2.5 CARTRIDGE TYPE FILTERS, 80-85 % EFFICIENCY (MERV 13)

.1 Media: deep pleated, disposable, high efficiency, toCAN/CGSB-115.14.

.2 Holding frame: galvanized steel with bracing.



.3 Media support : welded wire grid.

.4 Performance: average atmospheric dust spot efficiency 80-85 %to ASHRAE 52.1. Minimum efficiency reporting value to ASHRAE52.5: MERV 12.

.5 Fire rated: to ULC-S111.

2.6 FILTER GAUGES - DIAL TYPE

.1 Diaphragm actuated, direct reading.

.2 Range: 0 to 2 times initial pressure.

.3 Indicate clean/dirty filter range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION




.1 Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations andwith adequate space for access, maintenance and replacement.

3.3 REPLACEMENT MEDIA

.1 Replace media with new upon acceptance.

.2 Filter media new and clean, as indicated by pressure gauge, attime of acceptance.

3.4 FILTER GAUGES

.1 Install across each filter bank (pre-filter and final filter)in approved and easy readable location.

.2 Mark each filter gauge with value of pressure drop for cleancondition and manufacturer's recommended replacement (dirty)value.



3.5 CLEANING



END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Breeching, Chimneys and Page 1Storage Facility StacksGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

.1 Related Sections:.1 Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures..2 Section 01 61 00 - Common Product Requirements..3 Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals..4 Section 23 73 11 - Packaged Air Handling Units.

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors NationalAssociation (SMACNA).

.2 Underwriters' Laboratories of Canada (ULC).





.2 Shop Drawings:.1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00 -Submittal Procedures.

.1 Submit drawings stamped and signed by professionalengineer registered or licensed in Province of Ontario,Canada.

.2 Indicate following:.1 Methods of sealing sections..2 Methods of expansion..3 Details of thimbles..4 Bases/Foundations..5 Supports..6 Guy details..7 Exit fittings..8 Clearance to combustibles.



.3 Include supporting calculations of manufacturer'srecommended size..4 Shop drawings to indicate full, vent system design, basedon layout in design drawings.


.4 Closeout Submittals.1 Submit operation and maintenance data for incorporationinto manual specified in Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals


.1 Regulatory Requirements: work to be performed in compliancewith CEPA, CEAA, TDGA, and applicable Provincial/Territorialregulations.


.3 Certificates:.1 Catalogued or published ratings: obtained from testscarried out by independent testing agency or manufacturersignifying adherence to codes and standards.


.1 Packing, shipping, handling and unloading:.1 Deliver, store and handle in accordance withmanufacturer's written instructions and Section 01 61 00 -Common Product Requirements.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

.1 Products shall be in accordance with CSA B149.1-2015.



2.2 TYPE B GAS VENT - DIRECT

.1 ULC labelled, 288 degrees C rating maximum.

.2 Double and single wall galvanized steel or stainless steelmaterial. Material and thickness in accordance with CSAB149.1-2015. Seal seams and joints in accordance withmanufacturers instructions and recommendations.

.3 Accessories: side-wall concentric vent termination adapterassembly kit, vent termination cap, inlet air guard andthimble.

2.3 TYPE A GAS CHIMNEY/VENT AND BREECHING

.1 ULC labelled, 760 degrees C rated, Type A gas vent.

.2 Sectional, prefabricated, double wall with 50 mm fiberinsulation between inner and outer pipe and mated fittings,coupling and adapters..1 Liner/Inner wall: Type 304 stainless steel..2 Shell/Outer wall: Type 304 stainless steel..3 Outer/Inner seals between sections: to suit applicationand in accordance with manufacturer instructions andrecommendations and CSA B149.1-15.

.3 The materials and construction of the modular sections andaccessories shall be as specified by the terms of the productsULC listing.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

.1 Cleanouts: bolted, gasketted type, full size of breeching.

.2 Hangers and supports: in accordance with recommendations ofSheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors NationalAssociation Inc. (SMACNA) and recommended by chimney and stackmanufacturer.

.3 Guy wire: 316 stainless steel wire rope.

.4 Expansion sleeves with heat resistant caulking, held in placeas required.

.5 Provide supplementary supports and structural steel as requiredfor supporting vent from building structure.

.6 Provide pre-fabricated thimble at roof/wall penetrationsuitable for passing through wall/roofing system.



.7 Base tee with drain or internal drain section with drain.

.8 Rain cap.

PART 3 - EXECUTION



3.2 INSTALLATION - GENERAL

.1 Follow manufacturer's installation recommendations.

.2 Suspend breeching at 1.5 m centres and at each joint.

.3 Support chimneys at bottom, roof and intermediate levels.

.4 Install thimbles where penetrating roof, floor, ceiling, wall.Pack annular space with heat resistant caulking.

.5 Install flashings on vents penetrating roofs/walls.

.6 Install exit cones, round tops and cleanouts.

3.3 CLEANING



END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Air Handling Units Page 1Storage Facility - PackagedGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL





.4 Section 23 05 13 - Common Motor Requirement.

.5 Section 23 05 48 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVACPiping and Equipment.

.6 Section 23 33 00 - Air Duct Accessories.


.8 Section 25 30 02 - EMCS: Field Control Devices.

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 American National Standards Institute/Air-Conditioning andRefrigeration Institute (ANSI/ARI).1 ANSI/ARI 430-99, Central Station Air Handling Units.

.2 Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB).1 CAN/CGSB 1.181-99, Ready-Mixed Organic Zinc-Rich Coating.



.2 Indicate following: fan, fan curves showing point of operation,motor drive, bearings, filters, mixing box, dampers, VAV, coil;include performance data.

.3 Indicate shipping splits and lift requirements.

.4 Include with submitted construction plan showing installationof units.




.1 Provide maintenance data for incorporation into manualspecified in Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.

.2 Include following: fan, bearings, motor, damper, VAV control,air volume, total cooling, sensible cooling, EDB, heating EWB,OAT.

1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS

.1 Provide maintenance materials in accordance with Section01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.

.2 Provide one spare sets of filters.

.3 Provide list of individual manufacturer's recommended spareparts for equipment such as bearings and seals, and addressesof suppliers, together with list of specialized tools necessaryfor adjusting, repairing or replacing, for placement intooperating manual.

.4 Spare filters: in addition to filters installed immediatelyprior to acceptance by DCC Representative, supply 1 completeset of filters for each filter unit or filter bank for turnoverto DCC Representative.

1.6 ON-SITE STORAGE

.1 Ensure units are stored in a dry enclosed area when they arriveon site.

.2 Units covered with tarps exposed to elements is not acceptable.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

.1 Factory assembled components to form units supplying air atdesigned conditions, as indicated.

.2 Certify ratings: to ARI 430 with ARI seal.

.3 Horizontal type, as indicated, having air tight modularcomponents, consisting of components indicated. Componentsinclude: casing, supply and return fan sections with motor anddrive, filter sections, heat recovery (heat pipe) section,filter section, dampers, indirect natural gas heating section.



.4 The air handling unit to be shipped in pieces which don'texceed maximum shipping dimensions. All equipment shall wherespecified and applicable, be pre-wired, and factory certifiedby an approved testing agency such as cETL, UL, CSA prior toshipment.

.5 Fans and drives shall be balanced to limit vibration atoperating speeds.

.6 Maximum dimensions: as indicated. Note that site specificmaximum dimensions as indicated on the drawings are not to beexceeded.

.7 The air handling units shall be power wired for a single pointconnection. All power loads to be wired to one point of powersource entrance. Provide complete with all auxiliarysub-electrical system, transformers, power converter,disconnect and protection devices required.

.8 Pre-wired air handling units shall bear an approved label withall the necessary identification marks, electrical data, andany necessary cautions as required by the Ontario ElectricalSafety Code. All internal wiring to be in conduit.

.9 The air handling unit and major components shall be products ofmanufacturers regularly engaged in the production of suchequipment and with a minimum of fifteen continuous years ofproven production experience.

.10 Controls: By division 25 EMCS. Coordinate with Division 25 andthe controls schematics in the contract drawings. Providespecialty controllers for operation of heat pipe if utilizingheat pipe tilt for frost control.

.11 Acceptable material:.1 Engineered Air..2 York..3 Trane.

2.2 CASINGS

.1 Unit shall have double wall, 50.8 mm insulated panels forwalls, roof and floor..1 Exterior skin will be galvanized sheet steel. Interiorliner will be perforated aluminum or galvanized. Minimumperforated panel thermal resistance will be 1.76 m2K/W.

.2 Casings shall be galvanized steel. 1.6 mm thickness reinforcedand braced for rigidity.



.1 Walk-in access doors: provide access for maintenance ofinternal parts..2 Paint steel parts, where not galvanized, with corrosionresistant paint to CGSB 1-GP-181M..3 Finish entire units, inside and out, with rust resistantenamel..4 Provide 250 mm x 250 mm viewing windows in access door forfan sections. Window to be reinforced tempered glass.

.3 Units shall be provided with access doors to the followingcomponents: fans and motors, filters, dampers and operators,heat exchanger, access plenums, electrical control panels, andcoil compartments. Access doors shall be large enough for easyaccess for man entry. Removal of screwed wall panels will notbe acceptable.

.4 Units shall be provided with hinged access doors, with extrudedneoprene gasket, fully lined, and a minimum of two Leverlokhandles, operable from both sides for all units. Doors locatedon sections with positive pressure shall be hinged access doorsin welded steel frames and shall open inward against pressure.

.5 Provide marine lights with Lexan bulb covers with metalprotective cage in each section provided with an access door.Lights shall be compact fluorescent type and wired in liquidtight flex conduit to a switch with pilot light. Lights arepowered from local control panel.

2.3 DRAIN PANS

.1 Comply with the guidelines of ASHRAE 62.

.2 Construction: stainless steel. Rounded corners 50 mm deep.

.3 Insulation: external foam type, minimum 13 mm thick.

.4 Drain connection: in bottom at low point.

.5 Installation: pan bottom cross broken in two direction to slopewithout sag minimum 1% to ensure no standing water at any timeor at any point.

.6 Dimensions: minimum 75 mm from upstream face of coil to 150 mmbeyond downstream face of coil or eliminator and to includereturn bends and headers.

.7 Provide drain pan:.1 Heat Recovery Sections.



2.4 FANS

.1 Cabinet hung Free standing AMCA-rated for sound and performancecentrifugal fans with backward inclined or air foil wheels,selected to operate in stable part of performance curve attimes and heavy duty 200,000 hours service self aligning splitpillow block bearings..1 Provide internally mounted motor on adjustable base unlessindicated otherwise as complete with adjustable V-belt driveand guard..2 Motor: as indicated..3 Provide flexible fan connection to cabinet.

.2 Maximum sound power levels: Lwa not to exceed 90, 88, 86 at250, 500, 1000 Hg frequency on inlet or outlet of fan unlessindicated otherwise.

.3 Internally mounted motor and fan.

2.5 VARIABLE VOLUME DEVICES

.1 Variable speed drives - variable frequency drives (VFD): toSection 26 29 20 - Adjustable Speed Drives, factory installedin electrical enclosure.

.2 Speed drive to be complete with native BACnet communicationcapability for interface to the EMCS.

.3 Provide variable speed drives packaged with air handling unitfor all equipment indicated with VSD Motors on equipmentschedules.

.4 Mount variable speed drives on the external AHU casing,isolated from fan vibration, do not mount internally.

2.6 VIBRATION ISOLATION

.1 Flexible connections at inlet and outlet of fan section: toSection 23 33 00 - Air Duct Accessories.

.2 Vibration isolators on fan section: spring mounted Type M3 withminimum 38 mm static deflection to Section 23 05 48 - Vibrationand Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment.

2.7 FILTER BOX

.1 Provide blank-off plates and gaskets to prevent air bypass.



.2 Filters: Provide MERV 8 pre-filter section to Section 23 44 00- HVAC Air Filtration.

.3 Provide filter bank in supply and return air stream upstream ofall heat recovery equipment.

2.8 GAS HEATER - INDIRECT FIRED

.1 General:.1 Heating units shall be indirect natural gas fired,approved for both sea level and high altitude areas. Theentire package including damper controls, fan controls, andall other miscellaneous controls and accessories shall beapproved by an independent testing authority and carry theapproval label of that authority as a complete operatingpackage..2 Operating natural gas pressure at units manifold shall be1.75 kPa (7" w.c.)..3 Gas fired units shall be approved for operation down to 31.0°C. Packaged controls to allow operation below 31.0°Cthat shutdown at 31.0°C by control package is not acceptable..4 All gas piping shall enter the unit at a single location.Gas entry shall be capable through side for unit.

.2 Heat Exchanger/Burner Assembly:.1 Heat exchanger shall be a primary cylindrical drum ofwelded titanium stainless steel with multi-tube stainlesssteel secondary complete with multi-plane metal turbulators. Heat exchanger must utilize a floating suspension system toallow free thermal expansion and contraction without stress. Heat exchanger shall be provided with condensate drainconnection. The heat exchanger casing shall have 25 mm (1")of insulation between the outer cabinet and heat reflectivegalvanized steel inner liner. Diamond shaped heat exchangersare not acceptable. Dual or triple blower assemblies shall beprovided, as required, to ensure even air distribution acrossthe heat exchangers. Blower location shall be engineered toimprove the required air flow pattern around the heatexchanger. Using duct type furnaces and closed coupledblowers are not acceptable..2 The heat exchanger/burner assembly shall be a blow throughpositive pressure type. Units incorporating the high turndowncontrol module shall have an interrupted pilot ignition systemto provide a high seasonal efficiency. Units incorporatingcontinuous or intermittent pilots are not acceptable..3 Flame surveillance shall be with a solid state programmedflame relay complete with flame rod. The burner and gas trainshall be in a cabinet enclosure. Atmospheric burners or burnersrequiring power assisted venting re not acceptable..4 Heat exchanger/burner assembly shall have a fullymodulating 20:1 turndown heating capacity.



.3 Factory Testing - Indirect Fired Gas Heating:.1 Tests shall be performed after complete final unitassembly, just prior to shipping to job site. The tests shallbe performed in accordance with C-ETL to CGA 3.2.

.1 Heat exchanger shall be clocked with a dedicatedcalibrated gas meter to insure proper set up of the gasmanifold..2 High and low input flue gas combustion analysisusing a calibrated combustion analyzer including O2 and COto provide proper air fuel ratio throughout the entireoperating range.

.4 Venting:.1 Installation and venting provisions must be in accordancewith CAN/CSA Standard B149.1, ANSI Z223.1-NFPA 54, and localauthorities having jurisdiction. Type A, L, and/or PS ventingis required on indoor units.

.5 Controls - Natural Gas:.1 Electronic controls (Modulating Fuel w/ ModulatingCombustion Air) shall be complete with proportional andintegral control and with a discharge air sensor to maintainset point temperature and provide rapid response toincremental changes in discharge air temperature. Controllersshall include the following standard features.

.1 Service analyzer with diagnostic lights for ease ofset-up and service..2 Self check on start-up to make sure air proving anddischarge air sensors are operating within designtolerances to make sure air switches are not shorted orjumped..3 -31.0°C minimum operating ambient temperature..4 Built in pre-purge..5 Maintained purge to decrease temperature cycles..6 Built in post purge..7 Interrupted pilot..8 Low fire start..9 Inlet damper control..10 Economizer enable control..11 Built-in alternate blower and damper functions andset back temperatures for unoccupied mode operation usinga single room thermostat..12 Damper contact that allows fan to start after dampersopens, damper to close after fan stops and damper toclose on flame failure. .13 Ambient reset and night setback features..14 Non-recycling auto bypass low limit with alarmcontacts and built in sensor checking..15 Blower contact that starts fan after burnerpre-purge..16 Controlled burner start-up and shut-down.



.17 Built in electronic linearization of the combustionair damper and gas valve producing higher efficienciesand reduced inputs..18 Separate gas and air actuators independentlycontrolled to give the correct air to fuel ratio thoughout the entire firing range. Single operator withmechanical linkage is not acceptable.

.2 Heating control function shall be modulating discharge aircomplete with 0-10VDC BMS reset. Minimum discharge air setpoint is 10°C (50°F) if BMS control signal fails..3 Controllers for heating only units to incorporate lowlimit features..4 Discharge air sensor shall be shipped loose and fieldmounted by the mechanical contractor in supply ductwork as permanufacturer's instructions.

2.9 HEAT RECOVERY

.1 The heat pipe shall be the sole responsibility of the unitmanufacturer. The manufacturer shall guarantee the performanceof the pipe as to its total heat transfer capacity, and itsoperation. alternate reclaim devices shall meet or exceed theperformance noted in the schedules, without exceeding the fanpower requirements specified.

.2 The heat recover device shall be an air-to-air heat pipeexchanger.

.3 The heat exchanger core shall be of 5/8" seamless aluminumtubing permanently expanded into aluminum fins. Each tube shallbe an individually sealed heat pipe filled with a working fluidconforming to Group 1 in the American National Standard SafetyCode for Mechanical Refrigeration. Serpentine coils andheadered tubes will not be considered equal.

.4 The secondary surface shall be continuous plate aluminum finsof flat corrugated design to produce maximum heat transferefficiency and minimum air pressure drop and reduce the frostthreshold of the unit.

.5 Heat pipe tubes must be wicked. The capillary work of each heatpipe shall be integral part of the inner wall of the tube to beprovided a completely wetted surface for maximum heat pipecapacity with minimum heat transfer resistance. Non wicked heatpipes will not be considered as an equal, unless they have aminimum of 20% additional rows, and are increased in face areato provide a pressure drop equal to or less than that specifiedfor the heat pipes.



.6 A partition shall be provided to isolate the exhaust and supplyair streams from each other to prevent cross-contamination. Thepartition between individual supply and exhaust tubes shall bestandard single piece sheet metal divider. Each tube shall beexpanded to fill the entire opening in the divider to form apositive seal against air leakage.

.7 Standard control for the heat pipe coil shall be a solid-statededicated device. Operation shall be to effectively tilt theheat pipe to achieve the following:.1 Accurate supply air temperature control..2 Summer/winter operation changeover..3 Frost prevention on the exhaust leaving side of thereclaim coil during cold weather..4 In conditions when the exhaust air could provide more heatthan is required to achieve supply air setpoint. The tilt angleof the heat pipe is varied by the controller in order to limitheat transfer, and maintain supply air at setpoint..5 When the exhaust temperature is below the supply airsetpoint, the tilt angle is reversed in order to cause heattransfer from supply air to exhaust air and pre-cool the supplyair.

2.10 DAMPERS

.1 To Section 23 33 15 - Dampers - Operating.

.2 Provide at all exhaust air, supply air, fresh air and returnair unit opening, unless indicated as remote on flow diagramsand control sheets.

.3 All exhaust air and fresh air dampers to be thermally insulatedtype.

.4 Dampers external to units supplied and installed by Division23, actuator and wiring by Division 25.

2.11 FACTORY WIRING

.1 Provide a system of motor control, including all necessaryterminal blocks, motor contactors, motor overload protection,grounding lugs, control transformers, auxiliary contactors andterminals for the connection of external control devices orrelays.

.2 Fire alarm circuits (where required) shall be powered from arelay in unit circuitry.

.3 Provide unit factory installed electrical disconnect switch.



.4 Motors above 25 hp and larger shall be provided with a reducedvoltage starter.

2.12 SEQUENCES OF OPERATIONS

.1 Refer to the Flow Diagrams and Controls drawings for schematicsand sequences of operations.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 provide appropriate protection apparatus.

.2 Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructionsand as indicated.

.3 Ensure adequate clearance for servicing and maintenance.

.4 Restrain AHU to housekeeping pads with elastomeric type pads toSection 23 05 48.

3.2 FANS

.1 Install fan sheaves required for final air balance.

.2 Install flexible connections at fan inlet and fan outlets.

.3 Install vibration isolators.

3.3 DRIP PANS

.1 Install deep seal P-traps and trap seal primer on drip lines..1 Depth of water seal to be 1.5 times static pressure atthis point.

3.4 START-UP AND PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION

.1 In accordance with Section 01 91 13 - General Commissioning(Cx) Requirements: General Requirements, supplemented asspecified herein.

.2 Report forms as specified Section 01 91 13 - GeneralCommissioning (Cx) Requirements: General Requirements: reportforms and schematics.



.3 Manufacturer's on-site services to be provided with factorytrained personnel..1 Provide on-site service to perform equipment start-ups..2 Provide additional on-site service during commissioningphase. Allow 4 hour minimum site time to participate in formalperformance testing..3 There is no Internet access available/permitted for remoteoff-site access to equipment/controllers.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Unit Heaters Page 1Storage FacilityGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL





.3 Section: 25 09 23.82.39 - Integrated Automation - Stick-BuiltDevice Controls -Unit Heaters (All Types)..1 "Stick Built Device Controls" means that Division 25 shallsupply and/or install controls for this device. See the abovereferenced Division 25 section and Responsibility Matrix forWork responsibilities.

1.2 PRODUCT DATA


.2 Submit product data sheets for unit heaters. Include:.1 Product characteristics..2 Performance criteria..3 Mounting methods..4 Physical size..5 kW rating, voltage, phase..6 Cabinet material thicknesses..7 Limitations..8 Colour and finish.

.3 Manufacturer's Instructions: Provide to indicate specialhandling criteria, installation sequence, cleaning procedures.

1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS


.2 Indicate:.1 Equipment, capacity and piping connections..2 Dimensions, internal and external construction details,recommended method of installation with proposed structuralsteel support, sizes and location of mounting bolt holes.




.1 Provide operation and maintenance data for unit heaters forincorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00 -Closeout Submittals.


.1 Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section01 74 21 - Construction/Demolition Waste Management AndDisposal, and with Waste Reduction Workplan.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GAS-FIRED, SEPARATED COMBUSTION UNIT HEATERS

.1 Acceptable manufacturers:.1 Reznor..2 Trane..3 Modine.

.2 General:.1 Provide high-efficiency, separated-combustion, powervented, gas-fired unit heaters. Gas connection shall beexternal to the cabinet.

.3 Heat Exchanger:.1 The heater shall be equipped with a multi-cell, 4 passserpentine style steel heat exchanger. Heat exchanger tubesshall be press fabricated of 316 stainless steel. All heatexchangers shall be designed with an aerodynamic cross sectionto provide maximum airflow.

.4 Burner:.1 The units shall incorporate a single, one piece burnerassembly with a single orifice. The burner shall have acontinuous wound close pressed stainless steel ribbonseparating the flame from the burner interior. All units shallhave a single venturi tube and orifice supplying fuel to aone-piece burner housing. Each heat exchanger cell shall usebalanced draft induction to maintain optimum flame control.

.5 Controls:



.1 Controls shall include a two-stage gas valve: direct sparkmulti-try ignition with electronic flame supervision with 100%lockout integrally controlled via a printed circuit controlboard. The control board shall also incorporate diagnosticlights. DIP switches for fan overrun settings, a relay for fanonly operation. All units shall be equipped with a safety limitswitch..2 All controls shall be enclosed in the sealed controlcompartment to protect them from accidental damage, dust, andatmospheric corrosion..3 Each unit heater will have a control module that shall beconnected to the BAS.

.6 Combustion Air and Venting:.1 The unit shall have a factory-installed power venterdevice to draw combustion air from outside of the building. Theoutside air shall enter the unit through a factory-installedround inlet air terminal on the rear of the heater. The controlcompartment shall be sealed and the access door shall begasketted to prevent dirt, lint, dust or other contaminantspresent in the heater space from entering the unit. The controlcompartment door shall be equipped with a safety interlockswitch to prevent operation when the door is open..2 The combustion air supply pipe and flue exhaust pipe shallbe run in parallel from the heater to a factory suppliedconcentric adapter assembly, which allows for a single wallpenetration, to the horizontal air inlet and vent terminal..3 The combustion air/venting system shall include avibration isolated power venter motor and wheel assembly and acombustion air pressure switch.

.7 Electrical:.1 Operation shall be controlled by a integrated circuitboard that included LED diagnostic indicator lights. Allinternal wiring, both line and control voltages, shall beterminated by insulated terminal connectors to minimize shockhazard during service..2 Each unit shall be equipped for use with 115/1 volt powersupply..3 All units will be equipped with a built-in disconnectswitch.

.8 Cabinet:.1 The cabinet shall be provided with a pre-coat or powdercoat RAL 1001 white paint finish. Finish shall be a minimum 80gloss on G30 galvanized steel..2 The cabinet shall be equipped with horizontal louvers.Louvers shall be spring held and adjustable for directingairflow.

.9 Capacity: as indicated.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

.2 Provide double swing pipe joints.

.3 Provide supplementary suspension steel as required.

.4 Before acceptance, set discharge patterns and fan speeds tosuit requirements.

.5 Suspend horizontal unit heaters from angle iron bracket securedto wall or column and in accordance with manufacturer'srecommendations.

.6 Install high mount oscillating unit heaters using spring hangermounts with minimum static deflection of 50 mm, as specified inSection 23 05 48 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVACPiping and Equipment.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Unit Heaters - Electric Page 1Storage FacilityGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 REFERENCES

.1 CSA International.1 CSA C22.2 No.46-13, Electric Air-Heaters.

.2 National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).1 NEMA 250-08, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 VMaximum).



.2 Product Data:.1 Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed productliterature and data sheets for unit heaters and include:

.1 Product characteristics.

.2 Performance criteria.

.3 Mounting methods.

.4 Physical size.

.5 kW rating, voltage, phase.

.6 Cabinet material thicknesses.

.7 Limitations.

.8 Colour and finish.

.3 Manufacturer's Instructions: provide to indicate specialhandling criteria, installation sequence and cleaningprocedures.


.1 Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 00 - CloseoutSubmittals.

.2 Operation and Maintenance Data: submit operation andmaintenance data for unit heaters for incorporation intomanual.






.3 Storage and Handling Requirements:.1 Store materials indoors, in dry location and inaccordance with manufacturer's recommendations in clean, dry,well-ventilated area..2 Store and protect unit heaters from nicks, scratches,and blemishes..3 Replace defective or damaged materials with new.

.4 Develop Construction Waste Management Plan Waste ReductionWorkplan related to Work of this Section and in accordancewith Section 01 74 21 - Construction/Demolition WasteManagement and Disposal.

.5 Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse as specified inConstruction Waste Management Plan Waste Reduction Workplanin accordance with Section 01 74 21 - Construction/DemolitionWaste Management and Disposal.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 UNIT HEATERS

.1 Unit heater: to CSA C22.2 No.46, horizontal dischargecomplete with adjustable louvers finished to match cabinet.

.2 Fan type unit heaters with built-in high-heat limitprotection.

.3 Fan motor: permanently lubricated ball bearing with resilientmount..1 Built-in fan motor thermal overload protection.

.4 Hangers: as indicated.

.5 Elements: aluminum.

.6 Cabinet: aluminum, fitted with brackets for rod or wallmounting..1 Phosphatized and finished with 2 coats air-dry bakedenamel.



2.2 CONTROLS

.1 Built in thermostat and support controls.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

.1 Verification of Conditions: verify that conditions ofsubstrate previously installed under other Sections orContracts are acceptable for unit heaters installation inaccordance with manufacturer's written instructions..1 Visually inspect substrate in presence of DCCRepresentative..2 Inform DCC Representative of unacceptable conditionsimmediately upon discovery..3 Proceed with installation only after unacceptableconditions have been remedied and after receipt of writtenapproval to proceed from DCC Representative.

3.2 INSTALLATION

.1 Suspend unit heaters from ceiling.

.2 Install thermostats in locations indicated.

.3 Make power and control connections.


.1 Perform tests in accordance with Section 26 05 00 - CommonWork Results for Electrical.

.2 Test cut-out protection when air movement is obstructed.

.3 Test fan delay switch to assure dissipation of heat afterelement shut down.

.4 Test unit cut-off when fan motor overload protection hasoperated.

.5 Ensure heaters and controls operate correctly.

3.4 CLEANING

.1 Progress Cleaning: clean in accordance with Section 01 74 11- Cleaning.



.1 Leave Work area clean at end of each day.



3.5 PROTECTION


.2 Repair damage to adjacent materials caused by unit heatersinstallation.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Radiant Heaters Page 1Storage Facility - Electric InfraredGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL




.3 Section 01 91 13 - General Commissioning (Cx) Requirements.

.4 Section 26 05 00 - Common work Results For Electrical.



.2 Show mounting methods and reflector details.



.2 Operation and Maintenance Data: submit operation andmaintenance data for radiant heaters for incorporation intomanual.


.1 Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance withSection 01 74 21 - Construction/Demolition Waste Managementand Disposal, and with the Waste Reduction Workplan.


.3 Collect and separate for disposal paper, plastic,polystyrene, corrugated cardboard, packaging material inappropriate on-site bins for recycling in accordance withWaste Management Plan.

.4 Divert unused metal and wiring materials from landfill tometal recycling facility approved by Owner's Representative.

National Defence UNCLASSIFIED Sect 23 83 00.01New ULCV & EATV Radiant Heaters Page 2Storage Facility - Electric InfraredGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INFRARED RADIANT HEATERS

.1 High density radiant panel heater designed for chain -suspended horizontal installation, hung from roof supports.

.2 1/4 - 20 Drilled and tapped holes shall provide fastening foreye bolts to support chain on each end of radiant panel.

.3 Anodized aluminum finish.

.4 Incoloy stainless steel tubular element with 60° radiationangle.

.5 Electrical: 1500 W, 208 V/1/60.

.6 Installation height: 2.4 to 3.0 m.

.7 1-Year warranty against defects.

2.2 CONTROLS

.1 Programmable electric thermostat (with locking tamper guard)

Electrical: 11.5 A at 208 V.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Install infrared heaters and controls as indicated and inaccordance with manufacturer's instructions.

.2 Ensure that manufacturer's mounting instructions , includingminimum distances from floor, walls or combustible materials,are followed.

.3 Make power and control connections.

.4 Unit to be hung via chains/eyebolts from roof supports.

.5 Connect heating circuits to wall mounted thermostats asindicated.


New ULCV & EATV Radiant Heaters Page 3Storage Facility - Electric InfraredGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

3.2 COMMISSIONING

.1 Perform tests in accordance with Section 26 05 00 - CommonWork Results For Electrical and Section 01 91 13 - GeneralCommissioning (Cx) Requirements.

.2 with all circuits connected and prior to waterproofing andsealing, perform resistance tests on each circuit with anohmmeter. Measured resistance must equal calculatedresistance using the following formula:

Resistance (ohms) = (Design Voltage)2

Total Wattage

.3 Recheck all connections and re-do as necessary until measuredresistance is equal to calculated resistance.

.4 Waterproof and seal all connections according tomanufacturer's instructions.

.5 Recheck resistance measurements to ensure resistance is thesame as previously measured.

.6 Notify Owner's Representative immediately if any discrepancyis found.

.7 Check and confirm satisfactory operation of radiant heatingsystem.

3.3 QUALIFIED INSTALLER

.1 The entire installation, wiring and testing shall be done bythe factory trained installer.

END OF SECTION

National Defence UNCLASSIFIED EMCS: Section 25 01 11

New ULCV & EATV Start-up, Verification and Page 1Storage Facility CommissioningGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

.1 Section Includes.1 Methods and procedures for start-up, verification andcommissioning, for building Energy Monitoring and ControlSystem (EMCS) and includes:

.1 Start-up testing and verification of systems.

.2 Check out demonstration or proper operation ofcomponents..3 On-site operational tests.

.2 Related Sections..1 Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures..2 Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals..3 Section 01 91 13 - General Commissioning (Cx)Requirements. .4 Section 01 79 00 - Demonstration and Training..5 Section 25 05 01 - EMCS: General Requirements.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

.1 For additional acronyms and definitions refer to Section25 05 01 - EMCS: General Requirements.

.2 AEL: ratio between total test period less any system downtimeaccumulated within that period and test period.

.3 Downtime: results whenever EMCS is unable to fulfill requiredfunctions due to malfunction of equipment defined underresponsibility of EMCS contractor. Downtime is measured byduration, in time, between time that Contractor is notifiedof failure and time system is restored to proper operatingcondition. Downtime not to include following:.1 Outage of main power supply in excess of back-up powersources, provided that:

.1 Automatic initiation of back-up was accomplished.

.2 Automatic shut-down and re-start of components wasas specified.

.2 Failure of communications link, provided that:.1 Controller automatically and correctly operated instand-alone mode..2 Failure was not due to failure of any specifiedEMCS equipment.

.3 Functional failure resulting from individual sensorinputs or output devices, provided that:

.1 System recorded said fault.

.2 Equipment defaulted to fail-safe mode.



.3 AEL of total of all input sensors and outputdevices is at least 99 % during test period.


.1 Confirm with DCC Representative that Design Criteria andDesign Intents are still applicable.

.2 Commissioning personnel to be fully aware of and qualified tointerpret Design Criteria and Design Intents.



.2 Final Report: submit report to DCC Representative..1 Include measurements, final settings and certified testresults..2 Bear signature of commissioning technician andsupervisor.3 Report format to be approved by DCC Representativebefore commissioning is started..4 Revise "as-built" documentation, commissioning reportsto reflect changes, adjustments and modifications to EMCS asset during commissioning and submit to DCC Representative inaccordance with Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals..5 Recommend additional changes and/or modifications deemedadvisable in order to improve performance, environmentalconditions or energy consumption.


.1 Provide documentation, O&M Manuals, and training of O&Mpersonnel for review of DCC Representative before interimacceptance in accordance with Section 01 78 00 - CloseoutSubmittals.

1.6 COMMISSIONING

.1 Do commissioning in accordance with Section 01 91 13 -General Commissioning (Cx) Requirements.

.2 Carry out commissioning under direction of DCC Representativein presence of DCC Representative.



.3 Inform, and obtain approval from, DCC Representative inwriting at least 14 days prior to commissioning or each test.Indicate:.1 Location and part of system to be tested orcommissioned..2 Testing/commissioning procedures, anticipated results..3 Names of testing/commissioning personnel.

.4 Correct deficiencies, re-test in presence of DCCRepresentative until satisfactory performance is obtained.

.5 Acceptance of tests will not relieve Contractor fromresponsibility for ensuring that complete systems meet everyrequirement of Contract.

.6 Load system with project software.

.7 Perform tests as required.

1.7 COMPLETION OF COMMISSIONING

.1 Commissioning to be considered as satisfactorily completedwhen objectives of commissioning have been achieved andreviewed by DCC Representative.

1.8 ISSUANCE OF FINAL CERTIFICATE OF COMPLETION

.1 Final Certificate of Completion will not be issued untilreceipt of written approval indicating successful completionof specified commissioning activities including receipt ofcommissioning documentation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT

.1 Provide sufficient instrumentation to verify and commissionthe installed system. Provide two-way radios.

.2 Instrumentation accuracy tolerances : higher order ofmagnitude than equipment or system being tested.

.3 Independent testing laboratory to certify test equipment asaccurate to within approved tolerances no more than 2 monthsprior to tests.

.4 Locations to be approved, readily accessible and readable.



.5 Application: to conform to normal industry standards.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PROCEDURES

.1 Test each system independently and then in unison with otherrelated systems.

.2 Commission each system using procedures prescribed by theCommissioning Manager or DCC Representative.

.3 Commission integrated systems using procedures prescribed byCommissioning Manager or DCC Representative.

.4 Debug system software.

.5 Optimize operation and performance of systems by fine-tuningPID values and modifying CDLs as required.

.6 Test full scale emergency evacuation and life safetyprocedures including operation and integrity of smokemanagement systems under normal and emergency powerconditions as applicable.


.1 Pre-Installation Testing..1 General: consists of field tests of equipment just priorto installation..2 Testing may be on site or at Contractor's premises asapproved by DCC Representative..3 Configure major components to be tested in samearchitecture as designed system. Include BECC equipment and 2sets of Building Controller's including MCU's, LCU's, andTCU's..4 Equip each Building Controller with sensor andcontrolled device of each type (AI, AO, DI, DO)..5 Additional instruments to include:

.1 DP transmitters.

.2 VAV supply duct SP transmitters.

.3 DP switches used for dirty filter indication andfan status.

.6 In addition to test equipment, provide inclinedmanometer, digital micro-manometer, milli-amp meter, sourceof air pressure infinitely adjustable between 0 and 500 Pa,to hold steady at any setting and with direct output tomilli-amp meter at source and to BECC.



.7 After setting, test zero and span in 10 % incrementsthrough entire range while both increasing and decreasingpressure..8 DCC Representative to mark instruments tracking within0.5 % in both directions as "approved for installation"..9 Transmitters above 0.5 % error will be rejected..10 DP switches to open and close within 2% of setpoint.

.2 Completion Testing..1 General: test after installation of each part of systemand after completion of mechanical and electrical hook-ups,to verify correct installation and functioning..2 Include following activities:

.1 Test and calibrate field hardware includingstand-alone capability of each controller..2 Verify each A-to-D convertor..3 Test and calibrate each AI using calibrated digitalinstruments..4 Test each DI to ensure proper settings andswitching contacts..5 Test each DO to ensure proper operation and lagtime..6 Test each AO to ensure proper operation ofcontrolled devices. Verify tight closure and signals..7 Test operating software..8 Test application software and provide samples oflogs and commands..9 Verify each CDL including energy optimizationprograms..10 Debug software..11 Blow out flow measuring and static pressurestations with high pressure air at 700 kPa..12 Provide point verification list in table formatincluding point identifier, point identifier expansion,point type and address, low and high limits andengineering units. Include space on list forcommissioning technician and DCC Representativeapproval. This document will be used in final startuptesting.

.3 Final Startup Testing: Upon satisfactory completion oftests, perform point-by-point test of entire system underdirection of DCC Representative or Commissioning Manager andprovide:

.1 2 technical personnel capable of re-calibratingfield hardware and modifying software..2 Detailed daily schedule showing items to be testedand personnel available..3 DCC Representative's acceptance signature to be onexecutive and applications programs..4 Commissioning to commence during final startuptesting.



.5 O&M personnel to assist in commissioning proceduresas part of training..6 Commissioning to be supervised by qualifiedsupervisory personnel and DCC Representative..7 Commission systems considered as life safetysystems before affected parts of the facility areoccupied..8 Operate systems as long as necessary to commissionentire project..9 Monitor progress and keep detailed records ofactivities and results.

.4 Final Operational Testing: to demonstrate that EMCSfunctions in accordance with contract requirements.

.1 Prior to beginning of 30 day test demonstrate thatoperating parameters (setpoints, alarm limits, operatingcontrol software, sequences of operation, trends,graphics and CDL's) have been implemented to ensureproper operation and operator notification in event ofoff-normal operation.

.1 Repetitive alarm conditions to be resolved tominimize reporting of nuisance conditions.

.2 Test to last at least 30 consecutive 24 hour days.

.3 Tests to include:.1 Demonstration of correct operation ofmonitored and controlled points..2 Operation and capabilities of sequences,reports, special control algorithms, diagnostics,software.

.4 System will be accepted when:.1 EMCS equipment operates to meet overallperformance requirements. downtime as defined inthis Section must not exceed allowable timecalculated for this site..2 Requirements of Contract have been met.

.5 In event of failure to attain specified AEL duringtest period, extend test period on day-to-day basisuntil specified AEL is attained for test period..6 Correct defects when they occur and before resumingtests.

.5 Commissioning Manager or DCC Representative to verifyreported results.

3.3 ADJUSTING

.1 Final adjusting: upon completion of commissioning as reviewedby DCC Representative, set and lock devices in final positionand permanently mark settings.



3.4 DEMONSTRATION

.1 Demonstrate to Commissioning manager or DCC Representativeoperation of systems including sequence of operations inregular and emergency modes, under normal and emergencyconditions, start-up, shut-down interlocks and lock-outs inaccordance with Section 01 79 00 - Demonstration andTraining.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV EMCS: Training Page 1Storage FacilityGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

.1 Section Includes..1 Requirements and procedures for training program,instructors and training materials, for building EnergyMonitoring and Control System (EMCS) Work.

.2 Related Sections..1 Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures..2 Section 25 05 01 - EMCS: General Requirements.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

.1 CDL - Control Description Logic.



.1 Submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - SubmittalProcedures, supplemented and modified by requirements of thisSection.

.2 Submit training proposal complete with hour-by-hour scheduleincluding brief overview of content of each segment to DCCRepresentative 30 days prior to anticipated date of beginningof training..1 List name of trainer, and type of visual and audio aidsto be used..2 Show co-ordinated interface with other EMCS mechanicaland electrical training programs.

.3 Submit reports within one week after completion of Phase 1and Phase 2 training program that training has beensatisfactorily completed.


.1 Provide bilingual,competent instructors thoroughly familiarwith aspects of EMCS installed in facility.

.2 DCC Representative reserves right to approve instructors.



1.5 INSTRUCTIONS

.1 Provide instruction to designated personnel in adjustment,operation, maintenance and pertinent safety requirements ofEMCS installed.

.2 Training to be project-specific.

1.6 TIME FOR INSTRUCTION

.1 Number of days of instruction to be as specified in thissection (1 day = 8 hours including two 15 minute breaks andexcluding lunch time).

1.7 TRAINING MATERIALS

.1 Provide equipment, visual and audio aids, and materials forclassroom training.

.2 Supply manual for each trainee, describing in detail dataincluded in each training program..1 Review contents of manual in detail to explain aspectsof operation and maintenance (O&M).

.3 Provide videographer services to product digital video offield training.

1.8 TRAINING PROGRAM

.1 To be in 2 phases over 1 month period.

.2 Phase 1: 1 day program to begin before 30 day test period attime mutually agreeable to Contractor, DCC Representative andCommissioning Manager..1 Train O&M personnel in functional operations andprocedures to be employed for system operation..2 Supplement with on-the-job training during 30 day testperiod..3 Include overview of system architecture, communications,operation of computer and peripherals, report generation..4 Include detailed training on operator interfacefunctions for control of mechanical systems, CDL's for eachsystem, and elementary preventive maintenance.

.3 Phase 2: 15 day program to begin 8 weeks after acceptance foroperators, equipment maintenance personnel and programmers..1 Provide multiple instructors on pre-arranged schedule.Include at least following:



.1 Operator training: 1 day program to provideoperating personnel, maintenance personnel andprogrammers with condensed version of Phase 1 training..2 Equipment maintenance training: provide personnelwith 1 days training within 5 day period in maintenanceof EMCS equipment, including general equipment layout,trouble shooting and preventive maintenance of EMCScomponents, maintenance and calibration of sensors andcontrols..3 Programmers: provide personnel with 1 days trainingwithin 5 day period in following subjects in approximatepercentages of total course shown:

.1 Application programs: 15%.

.2 Software and architecture: 10%.

.3 programming: 50%.

.4 Trouble shooting and debugging:10%.

.5 Colour graphic generation: 15%

1.9 ADDITIONAL TRAINING

.1 List courses offered by name, duration and approximate costper person per week. Note courses recommended for trainingsupervisory personnel.

1.10 MONITORING OF TRAINING

.1 DCC Representative to monitor training program and may modifyschedule and content.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV EMCS: General Page 1Storage Facility RequirementsGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

.1 Section Includes:.1 General requirements for building Energy Monitoring andControl System (EMCS) that are common to NMS EMCS Sections.

.2 Related Sections:.1 Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures..2 Section 01 70 12 - Safety Requirements..3 Section 01 74 21 - Waste Management And Disposal..4 Section 25 05 02 - EMCS: Shop Drawings, Product Data andReview Process..5 Section 25 05 54 - EMCS: Identification..6 Section 25 90 01 - EMCS: Site Requirements Applicationsand Systems Sequences of Operation.

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/TheInstrumentation, Systems and Automation Society (ISA)..1 ANSI/ISA 5.5-1985, Graphic Symbols for Process Displays.

.2 American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/ Institute ofElectrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)..1 IEEE 260.1-1993, American National Standard Letter SymbolsUnits of Measurement (SI Units, Customary Inch-Pound Units, andCertain Other Units).

.3 American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-ConditioningEngineers, Inc. (ASHRAE)..1 ASHRAE STD 135-R2001, BACNET - Data Communication Protocolfor Building Automation and Control Network.

.4 Canadian Standards Association (CSA International)..1 CAN/CSA-Z234.1-00(R2006), Canadian Metric Practice Guide.

.5 Consumer Electronics Association (CEA)..1 CEA-709.1-B-2002, Control Network Protocol Specification.


.7 Transport Canada (TC)..1 Transportation of Dangerous Goods Act (TDGA), 1992, c. 34.



1.3 ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS

.1 Acronyms used in EMCS:.1 AEL - Average Effectiveness Level..2 AI - Analog Input..3 AIT - Agreement on International Trade..4 AO - Analog Output..5 BACnet - Building Automation and Control Network..6 BC(s) - Building Controller(s)..7 BECC - Building Environmental Control Center..8 CAD - Computer Aided Design..9 CDL - Control Description Logic..10 CDS - Control Design Schematic..11 COSV - Change of State or Value..12 CPU - Central Processing Unit..13 DI - Digital Input..14 DO - Digital Output..15 DP - Differential Pressure..16 ECU - Equipment Control Unit..17 EMCS - Energy Monitoring and Control System..18 HVAC - Heating, Ventilation, Air Conditioning..19 IDE - Interface Device Equipment..20 I/O - Input/Output..21 ISA - Industry Standard Architecture..22 LAN - Local Area Network..23 LCU - Local Control Unit..24 MCU - Master Control Unit..25 NAFTA - North American Free Trade Agreement..26 NC - Normally Closed..27 NO - Normally Open..28 OS - Operating System..29 O&M - Operation and Maintenance..30 OWS - Operator Work Station..31 PC - Personal Computer..32 PCI - Peripheral Control Interface..33 PCMCIA - Personal Computer Micro-Card Interface Adapter..34 PID - Proportional, Integral and Derivative..35 RAM - Random Access Memory..36 SP - Static Pressure..37 ROM - Read Only Memory..38 TCU - Terminal Control Unit..39 USB - Universal Serial Bus..40 UPS - Uninterruptible Power Supply..41 VAV - Variable Air Volume.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

.1 Point: may be logical or physical..1 Logical points: values calculated by system such assetpoints, totals, counts, derived corrections and may include,but not limited to result of and statements in CDL's.



.2 Physical points: inputs or outputs which have hardwarewired to controllers which are measuring physical properties,or providing status conditions of contacts or relays whichprovide interaction with related equipment (stop, start) andvalve or damper actuators.

.2 Point Name: composed of two parts, point identifier and pointexpansion..1 Point identifier: comprised of three descriptors, "area"descriptor, "system" descriptor and "point" descriptor, forwhich database to provide 25 character field for each pointidentifier. "System" is system that point is located on.

.1 Area descriptor: building or part of building wherepoint is located..2 System descriptor: system that point is located on..3 Point descriptor: physical or logical pointdescription. For point identifier "area", "system" and"point" will be shortforms or acronyms. Database mustprovide 25 character field for each point identifier.

.2 Point expansion : comprised of three fields, one for eachdescriptor. Expanded form of shortform or acronym used in"area", "system" and "point" descriptors is placed intoappropriate point expansion field. Database must provide 32character field for each point expansion.

.3 Point Object Type: points fall into following object types:.1 AI (analog input)..2 AO (analog output)..3 DI (digital input)..4 DO (digital output)..5 Pulse inputs.

.4 Symbols and engineering unit abbreviations utilized indisplays: to ANSI/ISA S5.5..1 Printouts: to IEEE 260.1-1993..2 Refer also to Section 25 05 54 - EMCS: Identification.


.1 Refer to control schematics for system architecture.

.2 Work covered by sections referred to above consists of fullyoperational EMCS, including, but not limited to, following:.1 Building Controllers..2 Control devices..3 Interconnection to existing EMCS front end in BuildingS-111..4 Data communications equipment necessary to effect EMCSdata transmission system..5 Field control devices..6 Software/Hardware complete with full documentation.



.7 Complete operating and maintenance manuals.

.8 Training of personnel.

.9 Acceptance tests, technical support during commissioning,full documentation..10 Wiring interface co-ordination of equipment supplied byothers..11 Miscellaneous work as specified in these sections and asindicated..12 Updating of front-end graphics in Building S-111 toaddress all systems provided this contract. Level of graphicpresentation and method of information display and operatorinterface with graphics to be consistent with existing.

.3 Design Requirements:.1 Design and provide conduit and wiring linking elements ofsystem..2 Supply sufficient programmable controllers of types tomeet project requirements. Quantity and points contents asreviewed by DCC Representative prior to installation..3 Location of controllers as reviewed by DCC Representativeprior to installation..4 Provide utility power to EMCS..5 Metric references: in accordance withCAN/CSA-Z234.1-00(R2006).

.4 Language Operating Requirements: English


.1 Make submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - SubmittalProcedures and 25 05 02 - EMCS: Shop Drawings, Product Data andReview Process.

.2 Submit for review:.1 Equipment list and systems manufacturers within 10 daysafter award of contract..2 List existing field control devices to be re-used includedin bid tender, along with unit price.

.3 Quality Control:.1 Provide equipment and material from manufacturer's regularproduction, CSA certified, manufactured to standard quoted plusadditional specified requirements..2 Where CSA certified equipment is not available submit suchequipment to inspection authorities for special inspection andapproval before delivery to site..3 Submit proof of compliance to specified standards withshop drawings and product data in accordance with Section25 05 02 - EMCS: Shop Drawings, Product Data and ReviewProcess. Label or listing of specified organization isacceptable evidence.



.4 In lieu of such evidence, submit certificate from testingorganization, approved by DCC Representative, certifying thatitem was tested in accordance with their test methods and thatitem conforms to their standard/code..5 For materials whose compliance with organizationalstandards/codes/specifications is not regulated by organizationusing its own listing or label as proof of compliance, furnishcertificate stating that material complies with applicablereferenced standard or specification..6 Permits and fees: in accordance with general conditions ofcontract..7 Submit certificate of acceptance from authority havingjurisdiction to DCC Representative..8 Existing devices intended for re-use: submit test report.


.1 Have local office within 200 km of project staffed by trainedpersonnel capable of providing instruction, routine maintenanceand emergency service on systems,

.2 Provide record of successful previous installations submittingtender showing experience with similar installations utilizingcomputer-based systems.

.3 Have access to local supplies of essential parts and provide 7year guarantee of availability of spare parts afterobsolescence.

.4 Ensure qualified supervisory personnel continuously direct andmonitor Work and attend site meetings.



.1 Material Delivery Schedule: provide DCC Representative withschedule within 2 weeks after award of Contract.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT

.1 The EMCS is to be procured from either one of the followingpresent EMCS's at Garrison Petawawa:.1 Honeywell

.1 EBI R410.2 SP1 Building Manager Software

.2 Fibre Optic provision

.3 Cat 5 Ethernet

.4 BACnet capability.2 Johnson Controls

.1 ADX Software, Metasys Version MS-ADX10SQL-6.5


.3 BACnet capability..3 Siemens Westinghouse Building Technologies

.1 Apogee Data Mate

.2 Insight Software


.4 BACnet capability

.2 Complete list of equipment and materials to be used on projectand forming part of tender documents by adding manufacturer'sname, model number and details of materials, and submit forapproval.

2.2 ADAPTORS

.1 Provide adaptors between metric and imperial components.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Installation: to manufacturer's recommendations.

.2 Conduit/piping and wiring must be performed by licensedelectricians.

.3 Programming must be performed by one of the three manufacturersrepresentatives indicated in Paragraph 2.1.1. Nosub-contractors are permitted to perform programming.

3.2 PAINTING

.1 Painting: in accordance with Section 09 91 99 - Painting,supplemented as follows:



.1 Clean and touch up marred or scratched surfaces of factoryfinished equipment to match original finish..2 Restore to new condition, finished surfaces tooextensively damaged to be primed and touched up to make good..3 Clean and prime exposed hangers, racks, fastenings, andother support components..4 Paint unfinished equipment installed indoors to EEMAC2Y-1..5 All controls pipe and boxes to be painted orange bycontrol contractor, and must be seen after painter iscompleted.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV EMCS: Submittals and Page 1Storage Facility Review ProcessGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

.1 Section Includes..1 Methods and procedures for shop drawings submittals,preliminary and detailed review process including reviewmeetings, for building Energy Monitoring and Control System(EMCS).

.2 Related Sections..1 Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures..2 Section 25 05 01 - EMCS: General Requirements..3 Section 25 01 11 - EMCS: Start-up, Verification andCommissioning.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

.1 Acronyms and definitions: refer to Section 25 05 01 - EMCS:General Requirements.


.1 Preliminary Design Review: to contain following contractorand systems information..1 Location of local office..2 Description and location of installing and servicingtechnical staff..3 Location and qualifications of programming design andprogramming support staff..4 List of spare parts..5 Location of spare parts stock..6 Names of sub-contractors and site-specific keypersonnel..7 Sketch of site-specific system architecture..8 Specification sheets for each item including memoryprovided, programming language, speed, type of datatransmission..9 Descriptive brochures..10 Sample CDL and graphics (systems schematics)..11 Response time for each type of command and report..12 Item-by-item statement of compliance..13 Proof of demonstrated ability of system to communicateutilizing BACnet.




.1 Submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - SubmittalProcedures and coordinate with requirements in this Section.

.2 Submit preliminary design document within 5 working daysafter tender closing and before contract award, for review byDCC Representative.

.3 Shop Drawings to consist of 3 hard copies and 1 soft copy ofdesign documents, shop drawings, product data and software.

.4 Hard copy to be completely indexed and coordinated package toassure compliance with contract requirements and arranged insame sequence as specification and cross-referenced tospecification section and paragraph number.

.5 Soft copy to be in Autocad - latest version, WordPerfectlatest version or Microsoft Word latest version, structuredusing menu format for easy loading and retrieval on OWS.

1.5 PRELIMINARY SHOP DRAWING REVIEW

.1 Submit preliminary shop drawings within 30 working days ofaward of contract and include following:.1 Specification sheets for each item. To includemanufacturer's descriptive literature, manufacturer'sinstallation recommendations,specifications, drawings,diagrams, performance and characteristic curves, cataloguecuts, manufacturer's name, trade name, catalogue or modelnumber, nameplate data, size, layout, dimensions, capacity,other data to establish compliance..2 Detailed system architecture showing all pointsassociated with each controller including, signal levels,pressures where new EMCS ties into existing controlequipment..3 Spare point capacity of each controller by number andtype..4 Controller locations..5 Auxiliary control cabinet locations..6 Single line diagrams showing cable routings, conduitsizes, spare conduit capacity between control centre, fieldcontrollers and systems being controlled..7 Valves: complete schedule listing including followinginformation: designation, service, manufacturer, model, pointID, design flow rate, design pressure drop, required Cv,Valve size, actual Cv, spring range, pilot range, requiredtorque, actual torque and close off pressure (required andactual).



.8 Dampers: sketches showing module assembly,interconnecting hardware, operator locations, operator springrange, pilot range, required torque, actual torque..9 Flow measuring stations: complete schedule listingdesignation, service, point ID, manufacturer, model, size,velocity at design flow rate, manufacturer, model and rangeof velocity transmitter..10 Compressor schematic and sizing data.

1.6 DETAIL SHOP DRAWING REVIEW

.1 Submit detailed shop drawings within 30 working days afteraward of contract and before start of installation andinclude following:.1 Corrected and updated versions (hard copy only) ofsubmissions made during preliminary review..2 Wiring diagrams..3 Piping diagrams and hook-ups..4 Interface wiring diagrams showing terminationconnections and signal levels for equipment to be supplied byothers..5 Shop drawings for each input/output point, sensors,transmitters, showing information associated with eachparticular point including:

.1 Sensing element type and location.

.2 Transmitter type and range.

.3 Associated field wiring schematics, schedules andterminations..4 Complete Point Name Lists..5 Setpoints, curves or graphs and alarm limits (highand low, 3 types critical, cautionary and maintenance),signal range..6 Software and programming details associated witheach point..7 Manufacturer's recommended installationinstructions and procedures..8 Input and output signal levels or pressures wherenew system ties into existing control equipment.

.6 Control schematics, narrative description, CDL's fullyshowing and describing automatic and manual procedurerequired to achieve proper operation of project, includingunder complete failure of EMCS..7 Graphic system schematic displays of air and watersystems with point identifiers and textual description ofsystem, and typical floor plans as specified..8 Complete system CDL's including companion Englishlanguage explanations on same sheet but with different fontand italics. CDL's to contain specified energy optimizationprograms..9 Listing and example of specified reports..10 Listing of time of day schedules.



.11 Mark up to-scale construction drawing to detail controlroom showing location of equipment and operator work space..12 Type and size of memory with statement of spare memorycapacity..13 Full description of software programs provided..14 Sample of "Operating Instructions Manual" to be used fortraining purposes..15 Outline of proposed start-up and verificationprocedures. Refer to Section 25 01 11 - EMCS: Start-up,Verification and Commissioning.


.1 Preliminary Design Review Meeting: Convene meeting within 45working days of award of contract to:.1 Undertake functional review of preliminary designdocuments, resolve inconsistencies..2 Resolve conflicts between contract document requirementsand actual items (e.g.: points list inconsistencies)..3 Review interface requirements of materials supplied byothers..4 Review "Sequence of Operations".

.2 Contractor's programmer to attend meeting.

.3 DCC Representative retains right to revise sequence orsubsequent CDL prior to software finalization without cost toDCC Representative.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used.

PART 3 - EXECUTIION

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV EMCS: Project Record Page 1Storage Facility DocumentsGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

.1 Section Includes..1 Requirements and procedures for final control diagramsand operation and maintenance (O&M) manual, for buildingEnergy Monitoring and Control System (EMCS) Work.

.2 Related Sections..1 Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals..2 Section 25 05 01 - EMCS: General Requirements..3 Section 25 05 02 - EMCS: Submittals and Review Process..4 Section 25 01 11 - EMCS: Start-up, Verification andCommissioning.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

.1 BECC - Building Environmental Control Centre.

.2 OWS - Operator Work Station.



.1 Submittals in accordance with Section 01 78 00 - CloseoutProcedures, supplemented and modified by requirements of thisSection.

.2 Submit Record Documents As-built drawings Operation andMaintenance Manual to DCC Representative in English.

.3 Provide soft copies and hard copies in hard-back, 50 mm 3ring, D-ring binders..1 Binders to be 2/3 maximum full..2 Provide index to full volume in each binder..3 Identify contents of each manual on cover and spine..4 Provide Table of Contents in each manual..5 Assemble each manual to conform to Table of Contentswith tab sheets placed before instructions covering subject.

1.4 AS-BUILTS

.1 Provide 1 copy of detailed shop drawings generated in Section25 05 02 - EMCS: Submittals and Review Process and include:



.1 Changes to contract documents as well as addenda andcontract extras..2 Changes to interface wiring..3 Routing of conduit, wiring and control air linesassociated with EMCS installation..4 Locations of obscure devices to be indicated ondrawings..5 Listing of alarm messages..6 Panel/circuit breaker number for sources ofnormal/emergency power..7 Names, addresses, telephone numbers of eachsub-contractor having installed equipment, localrepresentative for each item of equipment, each system..8 Test procedures and reports: provide records of start-upprocedures, test procedures, checkout tests and finalcommissioning reports as specified in Section 25 01 11 -EMCS: Start-up, Verification and Commissioning..9 Basic system design and full documentation on systemconfiguration.

.2 Submit for final review by DCC Representative.

.3 Provide before acceptance 4 Hard and 1 soft copyincorporating changes made during final review.

1.5 O&M MANUALS

.1 Custom design O&M Manuals (both hard and soft copy) tocontain material pertinent to this project only, and toprovide full and complete coverage of subjects referred to inthis Section.

.2 Provide 2 complete sets of hard and soft copies prior tosystem or equipment tests

.3 Include complete coverage in concise language, readilyunderstood by operating personnel using common terminology offunctional and operational requirements of system. Do notpresume knowledge of computers, electronics or in-depthcontrol theory.

.4 Functional description to include:.1 Functional description of theory of operation..2 Design philosophy..3 Specific functions of design philosophy and system..4 Full details of data communications, including datatypes and formats, data processing and disposition data linkcomponents, interfaces and operator tests or self-test ofdata link integrity.



.5 Explicit description of hardware and software functions,interfaces and requirements for components in functions andoperating modes..6 Description of person-machine interactions required tosupplement system description, known or establishedconstraints on system operation, operating procedurescurrently implemented or planned for implementation inautomatic mode.

.5 System operation to include:.1 Complete step-by-step procedures for operation of systemincluding required actions at each OWS..2 Operation of computer peripherals, input and outputformats..3 Emergency, alarm and failure recovery..4 Step-by-step instructions for start-up, back-upequipment operation, execution of systems functions andoperating modes, including key strokes for each command sothat operator need only refer to these pages for keystrokeentries required to call up display or to input command.

.6 Software to include:.1 Documentation of theory, design, interface requirements,functions, including test and verification procedures..2 Detailed descriptions of program requirements andcapabilities..3 Data necessary to permit modification, relocation,reprogramming and to permit new and existing software modulesto respond to changing system functional requirements withoutdisrupting normal operation..4 Software modules, fully annotated source code listings,error free object code files ready for loading via peripheraldevice.5 Complete program cross reference plus linkingrequirements, data exchange requirements, necessarysubroutine lists, data file requirements, other informationnecessary for proper loading, integration, interfacing,program execution..6 Software for each Controller and single sectionreferencing Controller common parameters and functions.

.7 Maintenance: document maintenance procedures includinginspection, periodic preventive maintenance, fault diagnosis,repair or replacement of defective components, includingcalibration, maintenance, repair of sensors, transmitters,transducers, controller and interface firmware's, plusdiagnostics and repair/replacement of system hardware.

.8 System configuration document:.1 Provisions and procedures for planning, implementing andrecording hardware and software modifications required duringoperating lifetime of system.



.2 Information to ensure co-ordination of hardware andsoftware changes, data link or message format/contentchanges, sensor or control changes in event that systemmodifications are required.

.9 Programmer control panel documentation: provide where panelsare independently interfaced with BECC, including interfacingschematics, signal identification, timing diagrams, fullycommented source listing of applicable driver/handler.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV EMCS: Identification Page 1Storage FacilityGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

.1 Section Includes..1 Requirements and procedures for identification ofdevices, sensors, wiring tubing, conduit and equipment, forbuilding Energy Monitoring and Control System (EMCS) Work andnameplates materials, colours and lettering sizes.

.2 Related Sections..1 Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures..2 Section 25 05 01 - EMCS: General Requirements.

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 Canadian Standards Association (CSA International)..1 CSA C22.1-09, The Canadian Electrical Code, Part I (19thEdition), Safety Standard for Electrical Installations.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

.1 For acronyms and definitions refer to Section 25 05 01 -EMCS: General Requirements.


.1 Language Operating Requirements: provide identification forcontrol items in English.


.1 Submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - SubmittalProcedures supplemented and modified by requirements of thisSection.

.2 Submit to DCC Representative for approval samples ofnameplates, identification tags and list of proposed wording.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 NAMEPLATES FOR PANELS

.1 Identify by Plastic laminate, 3 mm thick Melamine, mattewhite finish, black core, square corners, letteringaccurately aligned and engraved into core.

.2 Sizes: 25 x 67 mm minimum.

.3 Lettering: minimum 7 mm high, black.

.4 Inscriptions: machine engraved to identify function.

2.2 NAMEPLATES FOR FIELD DEVICES

.1 Identify by plastic encased cards attached by chain plastictie.

.2 Sizes: 50 x 100 mm minimum.

.3 Lettering: minimum 5 mm high produced from laser printer inblack.

.4 Data to include: point name and point address.

.5 Companion cabinet: identify interior components using plasticenclosed cards with point name and point address.

2.3 NAMEPLATES FOR ROOM SENSORS

.1 Identify by stick-on labels using point identifier.

.2 Location: as directed by DCC Representative.

.3 Letter size: to suit, clearly legible.

2.4 WARNING SIGNS

.1 Equipment including motors and starters under remoteautomatic control: supply and install orange coloured signswarning of automatic starting under control of EMCS.

.2 Sign to read: "Caution: This equipment is under automaticremote control of EMCS" as reviewed by DCC Representative.



2.5 WIRING

.1 Supply and install numbered tape markings on wiring atpanels, junction boxes, splitters, cabinets and outlet boxes.

.2 Colour coding: to CSA C22.1-09. Use colour coded wiring incommunications cables, matched throughout system.

.3 Power wiring: identify circuit breaker panel/circuit breakernumber inside each EMCS panel.

2.6 PNEUMATIC TUBING

.1 Numbered tape markings on tubing to provide uninterruptedtracing capability.

2.7 CONDUIT

.1 Colour code EMCS conduit.

.2 Pre-paint box covers and conduit fittings.

.3 Coding: use fluorescent orange paint and confirm colour withDCC Representative during "Preliminary Design Review".

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 NAMEPLATES AND LABELS

.1 Ensure that manufacturer's nameplates, CSA labels andidentification nameplates are visible and legible at alltimes.

3.2 ABOVE SUSPENDED CEILINGS

.1 Provide orange round sticker on ceiling grid or ceilingaccess hatch identifying location of controllers above.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV EMCS: Warranty and Page 1Storage Facility MaintenanceGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

.1 Section Includes..1 Requirements and procedures for warranty and activitiesduring warranty period and service contracts, for buildingEnergy Monitoring and Control System (EMCS).

.2 Related Sections..1 Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures..2 Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals..3 Section 25 05 01 - EMCS: General Requirements.

.3 References..1 Canada Labour Code (R.S. 1985, c. L-2)/Part I -Industrial Relations..2 Canadian Standards Association (CSA International).

.1 CSA Z204-94(R1999), Guidelines for Managing IndoorAir Quality in Office Buildings.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

.1 BC(s) - Building Controller(s).

.2 OWS - Operator Work Station.




.2 Submit detailed preventative maintenance schedule for systemcomponents to DCC Representative.

.3 Submit detailed inspection reports to DCC Representative.

.4 Submit dated, maintenance task lists to DCC Representativeand include the following sensor and output point detail, asproof of system verification:.1 Point name and location..2 Device type and range..3 Measured value..4 System displayed value..5 Calibration detail.6 Indication if adjustment required,



.7 Other action taken or recommended.

.5 Submit network analysis report showing results with detailedrecommendations to correct problems found.

.6 Records and logs: in accordance with Section 01 78 00 -Closeout Submittals..1 Maintain records and logs of each maintenance task onsite..2 Organize cumulative records for each major component andfor entire EMCS chronologically..3 Submit records to DCC Representative, after inspectionindicating that planned and systematic maintenance have beenaccomplished.

.7 Revise and submit to DCC Representative in accordance withSection 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals "As-built drawings"documentation and commissioning reports to reflect changes,adjustments and modifications to EMCS made during warrantyperiod.

1.4 MAINTENANCE SERVICE DURING WARRANTY PERIOD

.1 Provide services, materials, and equipment to maintain EMCSfor specified warranty period. Provide detailed preventativemaintenance schedule for system components as described inSubmittal article.

.2 Emergency Service Calls:.1 Initiate service calls when EMCS is not functioningcorrectly..2 Qualified control personnel to be available duringwarranty period to provide service to "CRITICAL" componentswhenever required at no extra cost..3 Furnish DCC Representative with telephone number whereservice personnel may be reached at any time..4 Service personnel to be on site ready to service EMCSwithin 4 hours after receiving request for service..5 Perform Work continuously until EMCS restored toreliable operating condition.

.3 Operation: foregoing and other servicing to provide propersequencing of equipment and satisfactory operation of EMCSbased on original design conditions and as recommended bymanufacturer.

.4 Work requests: record each service call request, whenreceived separately on approved form and include:.1 Serial number identifying component involved..2 Location, date and time call received..3 Nature of trouble.



.4 Names of personnel assigned.

.5 Instructions of work to be done.

.6 Amount and nature of materials used.

.7 Time and date work started.

.8 Time and date of completion.

.5 Provide system modifications in writing..1 No system modification, including operating parametersand control settings, to be made without prior writtenapproval of DCC Representative.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


.1 Perform as minimum (3) three minor inspections and one majorinspection (more often if required by manufacturer) per year.Provide detailed written report to DCC Representative asdescribed in Submittal article.

.2 Perform inspections during regular working hours, 0800 to1630 h, Monday through Friday, excluding statutory holidays.

.3 Following inspections are minimum requirements and should notbe interpreted to mean satisfactory performance:.1 Perform calibrations using test equipment havingtraceable, certifiable accuracy at minimum 50% greater thanaccuracy of system displaying or logging value..2 Check and Calibrate each field input/output device inaccordance with Canada Labour Code - Part I and CSAZ204-94(R1999)..3 Provide dated, maintenance task lists, as described inSubmittal article, as proof of execution of complete systemverification.

.4 Minor inspections to include, but not limited to:.1 Perform visual, operational checks to BC's, peripheralequipment, interface equipment and other panels..2 Check equipment cooling fans as required..3 Visually check for mechanical faults, air leaks andproper pressure settings on pneumatic components.



.4 Review system performance with DCC Representative todiscuss suggested or required changes.

.5 Major inspections to include, but not limited to:.1 Minor inspection..2 Clean OWS(s) peripheral equipment, BC(s), interface andother panels, micro-processor interior and exterior surfaces..3 Check signal, voltage and system isolation of BC(s),peripherals, interface and other panels..4 Verify calibration/accuracy of each input and outputdevice and recalibrate or replace as required..5 Provide mechanical adjustments, and necessarymaintenance on printers..6 Run system software diagnostics as required..7 Install software and firmware enhancements to ensurecomponents are operating at most current revision for maximumcapability and reliability.

.6 Rectify deficiencies revealed by maintenance inspections andenvironmental checks.

.7 Continue system debugging and optimization.

.8 Testing/verification of occupancy and seasonal-sensitivesystems to take place during four (4) consecutive seasons,after facility has been accepted, taken over and fullyoccupied..1 Test weather-sensitive systems twice: first at nearwinter design conditions and secondly under near summerdesign conditions.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV EMCS: Local Area Network Page 1Storage Facility (LAN)Garrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES

.1 Canadian Standards Association (CSA International)..1 CSA T529-95(R2000), Telecommunications Cabling Systemsin Commercial Buildings (Adopted ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-A withmodifications)..2 CSA T530-99(R2004), Commercial Building Standard forTelecommunications Pathways and Spaces (AdoptedANSI/TIA/EIA-569-A with modifications).

.2 Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers(IEEE)/Standard for Information technology -Telecommunications and information exchange between systems -Local and metropolitan area networks - Specific requirements..1 IEEE Std 802.3TM -2012, Part 3: Carrier sense multipleaccess with collision detection (CSMA/CD) access method andphysical layer specifications.

.3 Telecommunications Industries Association (TIA)/ElectronicIndustries Alliance (EIA).1 TIA/EIA-568-August 2012, Commercial BuildingTelecommunications Cabling Standards Set, Part 1 GeneralRequirements Part 2 Balanced Twisted-Pair Cabling ComponentsPart 3 Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard..2 TIA/EIA-569-A-April 2012, Commercial Building Standardfor Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces..3 TIA-862-A - April 2011, Building Automation systemsCabling Standard.

.4 Treasury Board Information Technology Standard (TBITS)..1 TBITS 6.9-2000, Profile for the TelecommunicationsWiring System in Government Owned and Leased Buildings -Technical Specifications.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

.1 Acronyms and definitions: refer to Section 25 05 01 - EMCS -General Requirements.


.1 Data communication network to link Operator Workstations andMaster Control Units (MCU) in accordance with CSA T529 andCSA T530 and TBITS 6.9 and TIA-862-A..1 Provide reliable and secure connectivity of adequateperformance between different sections (segments) of network.



.2 Allow for future expansion of network, with selection ofnetworking technology and communication protocols.

.2 Data communication network to include, but not limited to:.1 EMCS-LAN..2 Network interface cards..3 Network management hardware and software..4 Network components necessary for complete network.


.1 EMCS Local Area Network (EMCS-LAN)..1 High speed, high performance, local area network overwhich MCUs and OWSs communicate with each other directly onpeer to peer basis in accordance with IEEE 802.3/EthernetStandard..2 EMCS-LAN to: BACnet..3 Each EMCS-LAN to be capable of supporting at least 50devices..4 Support of combination of MCUs and OWSs directlyconnected to EMCS-LAN..5 High speed data transfer rates for alarm reporting,quick report generation from multiple controllers,upload/download information between network devices. Bit rateto be 10 Megabits per second minimum..6 Detection and accommodation of single or multiplefailures of either OWSs, MCUs or network media. Operationalequipment to continue to perform designated functionseffectively in event of single or multiple failures..7 Commonly available, multiple sourced, networkingcomponents and protocols to allow system to co-exist withother networking applications including office automation.

.2 Dynamic Data Access..1 LAN to provide capabilities for OWSs, either networkresident or connected remotely, to access point status andapplication report data or execute control functions forother devices via LAN..2 Access to data to be based upon logical identificationof building equipment.

.3 Network Medium..1 Network medium: shielded twisted cable, or fibre opticcable compatible with network protocol to be used withinbuildings. Fibre optic cable to be used between buildings.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV EMCS: Building Page 1Storage Facility ControllersGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

.1 Section Includes:.1 Materials and installation for building automationcontrollers including:

.1 Master Control Unit (MCU).

.2 Local Control Unit (LCU).

.3 Equipment Control Unit (ECU).

.4 Terminal Control Unit (TCU).

.2 Related Sections:.1 Section 25 05 01 - EMCS: General Requirements..2 Section 25 05 02 - EMCS: Shop Drawings, Product Data andReview Process..3 Section 25 05 03 - EMCS: Project Record Documents..4 Section 25 30 02 - EMCS: Field Control Devices..5 Section 25 90 01 - EMCS: Site Requirements Applicationsand Systems Sequences of Operation.

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 American Society of Heating, Refrigeration andAir-Conditioning Engineers, Inc. (ASHRAE)..1 ASHRAE 2011, Applications Handbook, SI Edition.

.2 Canadian Standards Association (CSA International)..1 C22.2 No.205-M1983(R2009), Signal Equipment.

.3 Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)..1 IEEE C37.90.1-2012, Surge Withstand Capabilities (SWC)Tests for Relays and Relay Systems Associated with ElectricPower Apparatus.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

.1 Acronyms and definitions: refer to Section 25 05 01 - EMCS:General Requirements.


.1 General: Network of controllers comprising of MCU('s),LCU('s), ECU('s) or TCU('s) to be provided to supportbuilding systems and associated sequence(s) of operations asdetailed in these specifications..1 Provide sufficient controllers to meet intents andrequirements of this section.



.2 Controller quantity, and point contents to be approvedby DCC Representative at time of preliminary design review..3 Controller to communicate over a BACnet network

.2 Controllers: stand-alone intelligent Control Units..1 Incorporate programmable microprocessor, non-volatileprogram memory, RAM, power supplies, as required to performspecified functions..2 Incorporate BACnet communication interface ports forcommunication to LANs to exchange information with otherControllers..3 Capable of interfacing with operator interface device..4 Execute its logic and control using primary inputs andoutputs connected directly to its onboard input/output fieldterminations or slave devices, and without need to interactwith other controller. Secondary input used for reset such asoutdoor air temperature may be located in otherController(s).

.1 Secondary input used for reset such as outdoor airtemperature may be located in other Controller(s).


.1 To include:.1 Scanning of AI and DI connected inputs for detection ofchange of value and processing detection of alarm conditions..2 Perform On-Off digital control of connected points,including resulting required states generated throughprogrammable logic output..3 Perform Analog control using programmable logic,(including PID) with adjustable dead bands and deviationalarms..4 Control of systems as described in sequence ofoperations..5 Execution of optimization routines as listed in thissection..6 Capability to create, delete and support BACnet objects.

.2 Total spare capacity for MCUs and LCUs: at least 25 % of eachpoint type distributed throughout the MCUs and LCUs.

.3 Field Termination and Interface Devices:.1 To: CSA C22.2 No. 205..2 Electronically interface sensors and control devices toprocessor unit..3 Include, but not be limited to, following:

.1 Programmed firmware or logic circuits to meetfunctional and technical requirements..2 Power supplies for operation of logics devices andassociated field equipment..3 Lockable wall cabinet.



.4 Required communications equipment and wiring (ifremote units)..5 Leave controlled system in "fail-safe" mode inevent of loss of communication with, or failure of,processor unit..6 Input Output interface to accept as minimum AI, AO,DI, DO functions as specified..7 Wiring terminations: use conveniently located screwtype or spade lug terminals.

.4 AI interface equipment to:.1 Convert analog signals to digital format with 12bit analog-to-digital resolution..2 Provide for following input signal types andranges:

.1 4 - 20 mA;

.2 0 - 10 V DC;

.3 100/1000 ohm RTD input;.3 Meet IEEE C37.90.1 surge withstand capability..4 Have common mode signal rejection greater than 60dB to 60 Hz..5 Where required, dropping resistors to be certifiedprecision devices which complement accuracy of sensorand transmitter range specified.

.5 AO interface equipment:.1 Convert digital data from controller processor toacceptable analog output signals using 12 bitdigital-to-analog resolution..2 Provide for following output signal types andranges:

.1 4 - 20 mA.

.2 0 - 10 V DC..3 Meet IEEE C37.90.1 surge withstand capability.

.6 DI interface equipment:.1 Able to reliably detect contact change of sensedfield contact and transmit condition to controller..2 Meet IEEE C37.90.1 surge withstand capability..3 Accept pulsed inputs up to 2 kHz.

.7 DO interface equipment:.1 Respond to controller processor output, switchrespective outputs. Each DO hardware to be capable ofswitching up to 0.5 amps at 24 V AC..2 Switch up to 5 amps at 220 V AC using optionalinterface relay.

.4 Controllers and associated hardware and software: operate inconditions of 0 degrees C to 44 degrees C and 20 % to 90 %non-condensing RH.

.5 Controllers (MCU, LCU): mount in wall mounted cabinet withhinged, keyed-alike locked door..1 Provide for conduit entrance from top, bottom or sidesof panel.



.2 ECUs and TCUs to be mounted in equipment enclosures orseparate enclosures..3 Mounting details as approved by DCC Representative forceiling mounting.

.6 Cabinets to provide protection from water dripping fromabove, while allowing sufficient airflow to prevent internaloverheating.

.7 Provide surge and low voltage protection for interconnectingwiring connections.


.1 Make submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 -Submittal Procedures and Section 25 05 02 - EMCS: ShopDrawings, Product Data and Review Process..1 Submit product data sheets for each product itemproposed for this project.

1.7 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES

.1 Provide manufacturers recommended maintenance procedures forinsertion in Section 25 05 03 - EMCS: Project RecordDocuments.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MASTER CONTROL UNIT (MCU)

.1 General: primary function of MCU is to provide co-ordinationand supervision of subordinate devices in execution ofoptimization routines such as demand limiting or enthalpycontrol.

.2 Include high speed communication LAN Port for Peer to Peercommunications with OWS(s) and other MCU level devices..1 MCU must support BACnet.

.3 Central Processing Unit (CPU)..1 Processor to consist of minimum 32 bit microprocessorcapable of supporting software to meet specifiedrequirements..2 CPU idle time to be more than 30 % when systemconfigured to maximum input and output with worst caseprogram use.



.3 Minimum addressable memory to be at manufacturer'sdiscretion but to support at least performance and technicalspecifications to include but not limited to:

.1 Non-volatile EEPROM to contain operating system,executive, application, sub-routine, otherconfigurations definition software. Tape media notacceptable..2 Battery backed (72 hour minimum capacity) RAM (toreduce the need to reload operating data in event ofpower failure) to contain CDLs, application parameters,operating data or software that is required to bemodifiable from operational standpoint such asschedules, setpoints, alarm limits, PID constants andCDL and hence modifiable on-line through operator panelor remote operator's interface. RAM to be downlineloadable from OWS.

.4 Include uninterruptible clock accurate to plus or minus5 secs/month, capable of derivingyear/month/day/hour/minute/second, with rechargeablebatteries for minimum 72 hour operation in event of powerfailure.

.4 Local Operator Terminal (OT): Provide OT for each MCU unlessotherwise specified in Section 25 90 01 - EMCS: SiteRequirements, Applications and System Sequences of Operation..1 Mount access/display panel in MCU or in suitableenclosure beside MCU as approved by DCC Representative..2 Support operator's terminal for local command entry,instantaneous and historical data display, programs,additions and modifications..3 Display simultaneously minimum of 16 point identifiersto allow operator to view single screen dynamic displaysdepicting entire mechanical systems. Point identifiers to bein English..4 Functions to include, but not be limited to, following:

.1 Start and stop points.

.2 Modify setpoints.

.3 Modify PID loop parameters.

.4 Override PID control.

.5 Change time/date.

.6 Add/modify/start/stop weekly scheduling.

.7 Add/modify setpoint weekly scheduling.

.8 Enter temporary override schedules.

.9 Define holiday schedules.

.10 View analog limits.

.11 Enter/modify analog warning limits.

.12 Enter/modify analog alarm limits.

.13 Enter/modify analog differentials.



.5 Provide access to real and calculated points incontroller to which it is connected or to other controller innetwork. This capability not to be restricted to subset ofpredefined "global points" but to provide totally openexchange of data between OT and other controller in network..6 Operator access to OTs: same as OWS user password andpassword changes to automatically be downloaded tocontrollers on network..7 Provide prompting to eliminate need for user to remembercommand format or point names. Prompting to be consistentwith user's password clearance and types of points displayedto eliminate possibility of operator error..8 Identity of real or calculated points to be consistentwith network devices. Use same point identifier as at OWS'sfor access of points at OT to eliminate cross-reference orlook-up tables.

2.2 LOCAL CONTROL UNIT (LCU)

.1 Provide multiple control functions for typical built-up andpackage HVAC systems, hydronic systems and electricalsystems.

.2 Minimum of 16 I/O points of which minimum be 4 AOs, 4 AIs, 4DIs, 4 DOs.

.3 Points integral to one Building System to be resident on onlyone controller.

.4 Microprocessor capable of supporting necessary software andhardware to meet specified requirements as listed in previousMCU article with following additions:.1 Include minimum 2 interface ports for connection oflocal computer terminal..2 Design so that shorts, opens or grounds on input oroutput will not interfere with other input or output signals..3 Physically separate line voltage (70V and over) circuitsfrom DC logic circuits to permit maintenance on eithercircuit with minimum hazards to technician and equipment..4 Include power supplies for operation of LCU andassociated field equipment..5 In event of loss of communications with, or failure of,MCU, LCU to continue to perform control. Controllers that usedefaults or fail to open or close positions not acceptable..6 Provide conveniently located screw type or spade lugterminals for field wiring.



2.3 TERMINAL/EQUIPMENT CONTROL UNIT (TCU/ECU)

.1 Microprocessor capable of supporting necessary software andhardware to meet TCU/ECU functional specifications..1 TCU/ECU definition to be consistent with those definedin ASHRAE HVAC Applications Handbook section 45.

.2 Controller to be connected to the BACnet network and provideaccess from EMCS OWS for setting occupied and unoccupiedspace temperature setpoints, flow setpoints, and associatedalarm values, permit reading of sensor values, field controlvalues (% open) and transmit alarm conditions to EMCS OWS.

.3 VAV or other Air Terminal Controller..1 Microprocessor based controller with integral flowtransducer, including software routines to execute PIDalgorithms, calculate airflow for integral flow transducerand measure temperatures as per I/O Summary required inputs.Sequence of operation to ASHRAE HVAC Applications Handbook..2 Controller to support point definition; in accordancewith Section 25 05 01 - EMCS: General Requirements..3 Controller to operate independent of network in case ofcommunication failure..4 Controller to include damper actuator and terminationsfor input and output sensors and devices.

2.4 SOFTWARE

.1 General..1 Include as minimum: operating system executive,communications, application programs, operator interface, andsystems sequence of operation - CDL's..2 Include "firmware" or instructions which are programmedinto ROM, EPROM, EEPROM or other non-volatile memory..3 Include initial programming of Controllers, for entiresystem.

.2 Program and data storage..1 Store executive programs and site configuration data inROM, EEPROM or other non-volatile memory..2 Maintain CDL and operating data including setpoints,operating constants, alarm limits in battery-backed RAM orEEPROM for display and modification by operator.

.3 Programming languages..1 Program Control Description Logic software (CDL) usingEnglish like or graphical, high level, general controllanguage.



.2 Structure software in modular fashion to permit simplerestructuring of program modules if future software additionsor modifications are required. GO TO constructs not allowedunless approved by DCC Representative.

.4 Operator Terminal interface..1 Operating and control functions include:

.1 Multi-level password access protection to allowuser/manager to limit workstation control..2 Alarm management: processing and messages..3 Operator commands..4 Reports..5 Displays..6 Point identification.

.5 Pseudo or calculated points..1 Software to provide access to value or status incontroller or other networked controller in order to defineand calculate pseudo point. When current pseudo point valueis derived, normal alarm checks must be performed or valueused to totalize..2 Inputs and outputs for process: include data fromcontrollers to permit development of network-wide controlstrategies. Processes also to permit operator to use resultsof one process as input to number of other processes (e.g.cascading).

.6 Control Description Logic (CDL):.1 Capable of generating on-line project-specific CDLswhich are software based, programmed into RAM or EEPROM andbacked up to OWS. Owner must have access to these algorithmsfor modification or to be able to create new ones and tointegrate these into CDLs on BC(s) from OWS..2 Write CDL in high level language that allows algorithmsand interlocking programs to be written simply and clearly.Use parameters entered into system (e.g. setpoints) todetermine operation of algorithm. Operator to be able toalter operating parameters on-line from BC(s) to tune controlloops..3 Perform changes to CDL on-line..4 Control logic to have access to values or status ofpoints available to controller including global or commonvalues, allowing cascading or inter-locking control..5 Energy optimization routines including enthalpy control,supply temperature reset, to be LCU or MCU resident functionsand form part of CDL..6 MCU to be able to perform following pre-tested controlalgorithms:

.1 Two position control.

.2 Proportional Integral and Derivative (PID) control.



.7 Control software to provide ability to define timebetween successive starts for each piece of equipment toreduce cycling of motors..8 Provide protection against excessive electrical-demandsituations during start-up periods by automaticallyintroducing time delays between successive start commands toheavy electrical loads..9 Power Fail Restart: upon detection of power failuresystem to verify availability of Emergency Power asdetermined by emergency power transfer switches and analyzecontrolled equipment to determine its appropriate statusunder Emergency power conditions and start or stop equipmentas defined by I/O Summary. Upon resumption of normal power asdetermined by emergency power transfer switches, MCU toanalyze status of controlled equipment, compare with normaloccupancy scheduling, turn equipment on or off as necessaryto resume normal operation.

.7 Event and Alarm management: use management by exceptionconcept for Alarm Reporting. This is system wide requirement.This approach will insure that only principal alarms arereported to existing OWS. Events which occur as direct resultof primary event to be suppressed by system and only eventswhich fail to occur to be reported. Such event sequence to beidentified in I/O Summary and sequence of operation. Examplesof above are, operational temperature alarms limits which areexceeded when main air handler is stopped, or General Firecondition shuts air handlers down, only Fire alarm statusshall be reported. Exception is, when air handler which issupposed to stop or start fails to do so under eventcondition.

.8 Energy management programs: include specific summarizingreports, with date stamp indicating sensor details whichactivated and or terminated feature..1 MCU in coordination with subordinate LCU, TCU, ECU toprovide for the following energy management routines:

.1 Time of day scheduling.

.2 Calendar based scheduling.

.3 Holiday scheduling.

.4 Temporary schedule overrides.

.5 Optimal start stop.

.6 Night setback control.

.7 Enthalpy (economizer) switchover.

.8 Peak demand limiting.

.9 Temperature compensated load rolling.

.10 Fan speed/flow rate control.

.11 Heating and cooling mediums temperature reset.

.12 Night purge..2 Programs to be executed automatically without need foroperator intervention and be flexible enough to allowcustomization.



.3 Apply programs to equipment and systems as specified orrequested by the DCC Representative.

.9 Function/Event Totalization: features to provide predefinedreports which show daily, weekly, and monthly accumulatingtotals and which include high rate (time stamped) and lowrate (time stamped) and accumulation to date for month..1 MCUs to accumulate and store automatically run-time forbinary input and output points..2 MCU to automatically sample, calculate and storeconsumption totals on daily, weekly or monthly basis foruser-selected analog or binary pulse input-type points..3 MCU to automatically count events (number of times pumpis cycled off and on) daily, weekly or monthly basis..4 Totalization routine to have sampling resolution of 1min or less for analog inputs..5 Totalization to provide calculations and storage ofaccumulations up to 99,999.9 units (e.g. kWH, litres, tonnes,etc.)..6 Store event totalization records with minimum of9,999,999 events before reset..7 User to be able to define warning limit and generateuser-specified messages when limit reached.

2.5 LEVELS OF ADDRESS

.1 Upon operator's request, EMCS to present status of any single'point', 'system' or point group, entire 'area', or entirenetwork on printer or OWS as selected by operator..1 Display analog values digitally to 1 place of decimalswith negative sign as required..2 Update displayed analog values and status when newvalues received..3 Flag points in alarm by blinking, reverse video,different colour, bracketed or other means to differentiatefrom points not in alarm..4 Updates to be change-of-value (COV)-driven or if pollednot exceeding 2 second intervals.

2.6 POINT NAME SUPPORT

.1 Controllers (MCU, LCU) to support point naming convention asdefined in Section 25 05 01 - EMCS: General Requirements.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 LOCATION

.1 Location of Controllers to be approved by DCC Representative.

3.2 INSTALLATION

.1 Install Controllers in secure locking enclosures as indictedor as directed by DCC Representative.

.2 Provide necessary power from local 120 V branch circuit panelfor equipment. Division 26 will designate panel for by EMCS.EMCS contractor to confirm with Division 26 panel is onemergency power prior to connecting.

.3 Install tamper locks on breakers of circuit breaker panel.

.4 Use uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) and emergency powerwhen equipment must operate in emergency and co-ordinatingmode.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV EMCS: Field Control Page 1Storage Facility DevicesGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

.1 Section Includes:.1 Control devices integral to the Building EnergyMonitoring and Control System (EMCS): transmitters,sensors,controls, meters, switches, transducers, dampers,damper operators, valves, and valve actuators..2 Power wiring from 120V power panels to EMCS fieldpanels, step-down transformers,DC power supplies as requiredfor control devices..3 Related Sections:

.1 Section 01 73 00 - Execution Requirements.

.2 Section 07 81 00 - Applied Fireproofing.


.4 Section 25 01 11 - EMCS: Start-Up, Verification andCommissioning..5 Section 25 05 01 - EMCS: General Requirements..6 Section 25 05 02 - EMCS: Shop Drawings, ProductData and Review Process..7 Section 25 05 54 - EMCS: Identification..8 Section 25 90 01 - EMCS: Site RequirementsApplications and Systems Sequences of Operation..9 Section 26 05 00 - Common Work Results -Electrical..10 Section 26 27 26 - Wiring Devices.

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 American National Standards Institute (ANSI)..1 ANSI C12.7-1993(R1999), Requirements for Watt hour MeterSockets..2 ANSI/IEEE C57.13-1993, Standard Requirements forInstrument Transformers.

.2 American Society for Testing and Materials International,(ASTM)..1 ASTM B 148-97(2009), Standard Specification forAluminum-Bronze Sand Castings.

.3 National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA)..1 NEMA 250-03, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000Volts Maximum).

.4 Air Movement and Control Association, Inc. (AMCA)..1 AMCA Standard 500-D-98, Laboratory Method of TestingDampers For Rating.

.5 Canadian Standards Association (CSA International).



.1 CSA-C22.1-09, Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1 (21thEdition), Safety Standard for Electrical Installations.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

.1 Acronyms and Definitions: refer to Section 25 05 01 - EMCS:General Requirements.


.1 Submit shop drawings and manufacturer's installationinstructions in accordance with Section 25 05 02 - EMCS:Submittals and Review Process.

.2 Pre-Installation Tests..1 Submit samples at random from equipment shipped, asrequested by DCC Representative for testing beforeinstallation. Replace devices not meeting specifiedperformance and accuracy.

.3 Manufacturer's Instructions:.1 Submit manufacturer's installation instructions forspecified equipment and devices.

1.5 EXISTING CONDITIONS

.1 Not used.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

.1 Control devices of each category to be of same type andmanufacturer.

.2 External trim materials to be corrosion resistant. Internalparts to be assembled in watertight, shockproof,vibration-proof, heat resistant, assembly.

.3 Operating conditions: 0 - 32 degrees C with 10 - 90 % RH(non-condensing) unless otherwise specified.

.4 Terminations: use standard conduit box with slot screwdrivercompression connector block unless otherwise specified.

.5 Transmitters and sensors to be unaffected by externaltransmitters including walkie talkies.



.6 Account for hysteresis, relaxation time, maximum and minimumlimits in applications of sensors and controls.

.7 Outdoor installations: use weatherproof construction in NEMA4 enclosures.

.8 Devices installed in user occupied space not exceed NoiseCriteria (NC) of 35. Noise generated by any device must notbe detectable above space ambient conditions.

.9 Range: including temperature, humidity, pressure, asindicated in I/O summary in Section 25 90 01 - EMCS: SiteRequirements, Applications and System Sequences of Operation.

2.2 TEMPERATURE SENSORS

.1 General: except for room sensors to be resistance orthermocouple type to following requirements:.1 Thermocouples: limit to temperature range of 200 degreesC and over..2 RTD's: 100 or 1000 ohm at 0 degrees C (plus or minus 0.2ohms) platinum element with strain minimizing construction, 3integral anchored leadwires. Coefficient of resistivity:0.00385 ohms/ohm degrees C..3 Sensing element: hermetically sealed..4 Stem and tip construction: copper or type 304 stainlesssteel..5 Time constant response: less than 3 seconds totemperature change of 10 degrees C..6 Immersion wells: NPS 3/4, stainless steel spring loadedconstruction, with heat transfer compound compatible withsensor. Insertion length 100 150 mm as indicated.

.2 Room temperature sensors and display wall modules..1 Room temperature sensing and display wall module.

.1 LCD display to show space temperature ed andtemperature setpoint..2 Buttons for occupant selection of temperaturesetpoint and occupied/unoccupied mode..3 Jack connection for plugging in laptop personalcomputer contractor supplied zone terminal unitcontractor supplied palm compatible handheld device foraccess to zone bus..4 Integral thermistor sensing element 10,000 ohm at24 degrees..5 Accuracy 0.2 degrees C over range of 0 to 70degrees C..6 Stability 0.02 degrees C drift per year..7 Separate mounting base for ease of installation.



.3 Duct temperature sensors:.1 General purpose duct type: suitable for insertion intoducts at various orientations, insertion length 460 mm or asindicated..2 Averaging duct type: incorporates numerous sensorsinside assembly which are averaged to provide one reading.Minimum insertion length 6000 mm. Bend probe at fieldinstallation time to 100 mm radius at point along probewithout degradation of performance.

.4 Outdoor air temperature sensors:.1 Outside air type: complete with probe length 100 - 150mm long, non-corroding shield to minimize solar and windeffects, threaded fitting for mating to 13 mm conduit,weatherproof construction in NEMA 4 enclosure.

2.3 TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTERS

.1 Requirements:.1 Input circuit: to accept 3-lead, 100 or 1000 ohm at 0degrees C, platinum resistance detector type sensors..2 Power supply: 24 V DC into load of 575 ohms. Powersupply effect less than 0.01 degrees C per volt change..3 Output signal: 4 - 20 mA into500 ohm maximum load..4 Input and output short circuit and open circuitprotection..5 Output variation: less than 0.2 % of full scale forsupply voltage variation of plus or minus 10 %..6 Combined non-linearity, repeatability, hysteresiseffects: not to exceed plus or minus 0.5 % of full scaleoutput..7 Maximum current to 100 or 1000 ohm RTD sensor: not toexceed 25 mA..8 Integral zero and span adjustments..9 Temperature effects: not to exceed plus or minus 1.0 %of full scale/ 50 degrees C..10 Long term output drift: not to exceed 0.25 % of fullscale/ 6 months..11 Transmitter ranges: select narrowest range to suitapplication from following:

.1 Minus 50 degrees C to plus 50 degrees C, plus orminus 0.5 degrees C..2 0 to 100 degrees C, plus or minus 0.5 degrees C..3 0 to 50 degrees C, plus or minus 0.25 degrees C..4 0 to 25 degrees C, plus or minus 0.1 degrees C..5 10 to 35 degrees C, plus or minus 0.25 degrees C.

2.4 HUMIDITY SENSORS

.1 Room and Duct Requirements:



.1 Range: 5 - 90 % RH minimum.

.2 Operating temperature range: 0 - 60 degrees C.

.3 Absolute accuracy: .. Duct sensors: plus or minus 3 % ..Room sensors: plus or minus 2 %.4 Sheath: stainless steel with integral shroud forspecified operation in air streams of up to 10 m/s..5 Maximum sensor non-linearity: plus or minus 2% RH withdefined curves..6 Room sensors: locate in air stream near RA grille wallmounted as indicated..7 Duct mounted sensors: locate so that sensing element isin air flow in duct.

.2 Outdoor Humidity Requirements:.1 Range: 0 - 100 % RH minimum..2 Operating temperature range: -40 - 50 degrees C..3 Absolute accuracy: plus or minus 2 %..4 Temperature coefficient: plus or minus 0.03%RH/ degreesC over 0 to 50 degrees C..5 Must be unaffected by condensation or 100% saturation..6 No routine maintenance or calibration is required.

2.5 HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS

.1 Requirements:.1 Input signal: from RH sensor..2 Output signal: 4 - 20 mA onto 500 ohm maximum load..3 Input and output short circuit and open circuitprotection..4 Output variations: not to exceed 0.2 % of full scaleoutput for supply voltage variations of plus or minus 10 %..5 Output linearity error: plus or minus 1.0% maximum offull scale output..6 Integral zero and span adjustment..7 Temperature effect: plus or minus 1.0 % full scale/ 6months..8 Long term output drift: not to exceed 0.25 % of fullscale output/ 6 months.

2.6 PRESSURE TRANSDUCERS

.1 Requirements:.1 Combined sensor and transmitter measuring pressure.

.1 Internal materials: suitable for continuous contactwith industrial standard instrument air, compressed air,water, steam, as applicable.

.2 Output signal: 4 - 20 mA into 500 ohm maximum load.

.3 Output variations: less than 0.2 % full scale for supplyvoltage variations of plus or minus 10 %.



.4 Combined non-linearity, repeatability, and hysteresiseffects: not to exceed plus or minus 0.5 % of full scaleoutput over entire range..5 Temperature effects: not to exceed plus or minus 1.5 %full scale/ 50 degrees C..6 Over-pressure input protection to at least twice ratedinput pressure..7 Output short circuit and open circuit protection..8 Accuracy: plus or minus 1 % of Full Scale.

2.7 STATIC PRESSURE SENSORS

.1 Requirements:.1 Multipoint element with self-averaging manifold.

.1 Maximum pressure loss: 160 Pa at 10 m/s. (Airstream manifold).

.2 Accuracy: plus or minus 1 % of actual duct staticpressure.

2.8 STATIC PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS

.1 Requirements:.1 Output signal: 4 - 20 mA linear into 500 ohm maximumload..2 Calibrated span: not to exceed 150 % of duct staticpressure at maximum flow..3 Accuracy: 0.4 % of span..4 Repeatability: within 0.5 % of output..5 Linearity: within 1.5 % of span..6 Deadband or hysteresis: 0.1 % of span..7 External exposed zero and span adjustment..8 Unit to have 12.5 mm N.P.T. conduit connection.Enclosure to be integral part of unit

2.9 VELOCITY PRESSURE SENSORS

.1 Requirements:.1 Multipoint static and total pressure sensing elementwith self-averaging manifold with integral air equalizer andstraightener section..2 Maximum pressure loss: 37 Pa at 10 m/s..3 Accuracy: plus or minus 1 % of actual duct velocity.

2.10 VELOCITY PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS

.1 Requirements:.1 Output signal: 4 - 20 mA linear into 500 ohm maximumload.



.2 Calibrated span: not to exceed 125 % of duct velocitypressure at maximum flow..3 Accuracy: 0.4 % of span..4 Repeatability: within 0.1 % of output..5 Linearity: within 0.5 % of span..6 Deadband or hysteresis: 0.1 % of span..7 External exposed zero and span adjustment..8 Unit to have 12.5 mm N.P.T. conduit connection.Enclosure to be integral part of unit.

2.11 PRESSURE AND DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCHES

.1 Requirements:.1 Internal materials: suitable for continuous contact withcompressed air, water, steam, etc., as applicable..2 Adjustable setpoint and differential..3 Switch: snap action type, rated at 120V, 15 amps AC or24 V DC..4 Switch assembly: to operate automatically and resetautomatically when conditions return to normal. Over-pressureinput protection to at least twice rated input pressure..5 Accuracy: within 2 % repetitive switching..6 Provide switches with isolation valve and snubber, wherecode allows, between sensor and pressure source.

2.12 TEMPERATURE SWITCHES

.1 Requirements:.1 Operate automatically. Reset automatically, except asfollows:

.1 Low temperature detection: manual reset.

.2 High temperature detection: manual reset..2 Adjustable setpoint and differential..3 Accuracy: plus or minus 1 degrees C..4 Snap action rating: 120V, 15 amps or 24V DC as required.Switch to be DPST for hardwire and EMCS connections..5 Type as follows:

.1 Room: for wall mounting on standard electrical boxwith without protective guard as indicated..2 Duct, general purpose: insertion length = 460 mm..3 Thermowell: stainless steel, with compressionfitting for NPS 3/4 thermowell. Immersion length: 100mm..4 Low temperature detection: continuous element with6000 mm insertion length, duct mounting, to detectcoldest temperature in any 30 mm length..5 Strap-on: with helical screw stainless steel clamp.



2.13 SOLID STATE RELAYS

.1 General:.1 Relays to be socket or rail mounted..2 Relays to have LED Indicator.3 Input and output Barrier Strips to accept 14 to 28 AWGwire..4 Operating temperature range to be -20 degrees C to 70degrees C..5 Relays to be CSA Certified..6 Input/output Isolation Voltage to be 4000 VAC at 25degrees C for 1 second maximum duration..7 Operational frequency range, 45 to 65 HZ.

.2 Input:.1 Control voltage, 3 to 32 VDC..2 Drop out voltage, 1.2 VDC..3 Maximum input current to match AO (Analog Output) board.

.3 Output..1 AC or DC Output Model to suit application.

2.14 CURRENT TRANSDUCERS

.1 Requirements:

.2 Purpose: combined sensor/transducer, to measure line currentand produce proportional signal in one of following ranges:.1 4-20 mA DC..2 0-1 volt DC..3 0-10 volts DC..4 0-20 volts DC.

.3 Frequency insensitive from 10 - 80 hz.

.4 Accuracy to 0.5% full scale.

.5 Zero and span adjustments. Field adjustable range to suitmotor applications.

.6 Adjustable mounting bracket to allow for secure/safe mountinginside MCC.

2.15 CURRENT SENSING RELAYS

.1 Requirements:.1 Suitable to detect belt loss or motor failure..2 Trip point adjustment, output status LED..3 Split core for easy mounting..4 Induced sensor power.



.5 Relay contacts: capable of handling 0.5 amps at 30 VAC /DC. Output to be NO solid state..6 Suitable for single or 3 phase monitoring. For 3-Phaseapplications: provide for discrimination between phases..7 Adjustable latch level.

2.16 CONTROL DAMPERS

.1 Construction: blades, 152 mm wide, 1219 mm long, maximum.Modular maximum size, 1219 mm wide x 1219 mm high. Three ormore sections to be operated by jack shafts.

.2 Materials:.1 Frame: 2.03 mm minimum thickness extruded aluminum(6063T5). For outdoor air and exhaust air applications,frames to be insulated with polystrofoam, R factor of 5..2 Blades: extruded aluminum. For outdoor air/exhaust airapplications, blades to be internally insulated,interlocking, R factor of 5..3 Bearings: maintenance free, synthetic type of material..4 Linkage and shafts: aluminum, zinc and nickel platedsteel..5 Seals: extruded silicon, mechanically locked into bladeedges.

.1 Frame seals: extruded silicon, mechanically lockedinto frame sides.

.3 Performance: minimum damper leakage meet or exceed AMCAStandard 500-D ratings..1 Size/Capacity: refer to damper schedule.2 21.1 L/s/m2 maximum allowable leakage against 1000 Pastatic pressure for outdoor air and exhaust air applications..3 Temperature range: minus 40 degrees C to plus 100degrees C.

.4 Arrangements: dampers mixing warm and cold air to be parallelblade, mounted at right angles to each other, with bladesopening to mix air stream.

.5 Jack shafts:.1 25 mm diameter solid shaft, constructed of corrosionresistant metal complete with required number of pillow blockbearings to support jack shaft and operate dampers throughouttheir range..2 Include corrosion resistant connecting hardware toaccommodate connection to damper actuating device..3 Install using manufacturers installation guidelines..4 Use same manufacturer as damper sections.

.6 Acceptable material: TAMCO and TAMCO 9000 SC series forinsulated units.



2.17 ELECTRONIC CONTROL DAMPER ACTUATORS

.1 Requirements:.1 Direct mount proportional type as indicated..2 Spring return for "fail-safe" in Normally Open orNormally Closed position as indicated..3 Operator: size to control dampers against maximumpressure and dynamic closing/opening pressure, whichever isgreater..4 Power requirements: 5 VA maximum at 24 V AC..5 Operating range: 0 - 10 V DC or 4 - 20 mA DC..6 For VAV box applications floating control type actuatorsmay be used..7 Damper actuator to drive damper from full open to fullclosed in less than 120 seconds.

2.18 CONTROL VALVES

.1 Body: globe style or characterized ball..1 Flow characteristic as indicated on control valveschedule: linear, equal percentage, quick opening..2 Flow factor (KV) as indicated on control valve schedule:CV in imperial units..3 Normally open Normally closed, as indicated..4 Two or three ports as indicated..5 Leakage rate ANSI class IV, 0.01% of full open valvecapacity..6 Packing easily replaceable..7 Stem, stainless steel..8 Plug and seat, stainless steel, brass, bronze..9 Disc, replaceable, material to suit application..10 NPS 2 and under:

.1 Screwed National Pipe Thread (NPT) tapered femaleconnections..2 Valves to ANSI Class 250, valves to bear ANSI mark..3 Rangeability 50:1 minimum.

.11 NPS 2½ and larger:.1 Flanged connections..2 Valves to ANSI Class 150 or 250 as indicated,valves to bear ANSI mark..3 Rangeability 100:1 minimum.

.2 Butterfly Valves NPS 2 and larger:.1 Body and ratings: to Section 23 05 23.05 BUTTERFLYVALVES..2 End connections: flanges, ANSI Class 150..3 Extended stem neck to provide adequate clearance forflanges and insulation..4 Pressure limit: bubble tight sealing to 170 kilopascals..5 Disc/vane: 316 stainless steel, aluminum bronze toASTM B 148.



.6 Seat: for service on chilled water PTFE(polytetrafluoroethylene), EPDM (ethylene propylene dienemonomer). For service on steam and heating water PTFE, RTFE(reinforced PTFE)..7 Stem: 316 stainless steel..8 Flow factor (KV) as indicated on control valve schedule:CV in imperial units..9 Flow characteristic linear..10 Maximum flow requirement as indicated on control valveschedule..11 Maximum pressure drop as indicated on control valveschedule: pressure drop not to exceed one half of inletpressure..12 Normally open Normally closed, as indicated..13 Valves are to be provided complete with mounting platefor installation of actuators.

2.19 ELECTRONIC / ELECTRIC VALVE ACTUATORS

.1 Requirements:.1 Construction: steel, cast iron, aluminum..2 Control signal: 0-10V DC or 4-20 mA DC..3 Positioning time: to suit application. 90 sec maximum..4 Fail to normal position as indicated..5 Scale or dial indication of actual control valveposition..6 Size actuator to meet requirements and performance ofcontrol valve specifications..7 For interior and perimeter terminal heating and coolingapplications floating control actuators are acceptable..8 Minimum shut-off pressure: refer to control valveschedule.

2.20 SURFACE WATER DETECTORS

.1 Not used.

2.21 PANELS

.1 Free-standing wall mounted enamelled steel cabinets withhinged and key-locked front door.

.2 Multiple panels as required indicated to handle requirementswith additional space to accommodate 25% additional capacityas required by DCC Representative without adding additionalcabinets.

.3 Panels to be lockable with same key.



2.22 GAS DETECTION SYSTEM

.1 General: Gas detection system consisting of multi-zonecentral monitoring and alarm panel and multiple remotesensors for carbon monoxide and nitrogen dioxide.

.2 Control Panel:.1 Enclosure: steel, wall-mounted NEMA 1 enclosure 210 mmhigh x 210 mm wide x 102 mm deep..2 Status readouts: LED display indicating the following:

.1 Power (green)

.2 Warning (amber)

.3 Alarm (red)

.4 Sensor status - Normal (green)

.5 Sensor status - Abnormal (red).3 Digital readouts: 4-digit LED display, indicatingchannel # and concentration..4 Alarms:

.1 Visual: red strobe, mounted on control panel,manual reset..2 Audible: audible alarm, 93 dB at 0.3 m with solidor warbling user-selected options, manual reset.

.5 Inputs: minimum eight N02 sensor channels and eight COsensor channels, compatible with sensor output signals..6 Outputs:

.1 4-20 mA warning signal and alarm signal to EMCS.

.2 4-20 mA alarm signal to fire alarm system..7 Electrical requirements: 120/1/60..8 Acceptable Materials:

.1 MSA International

.2 Edwards

.3 Armstrong

.3 Gas sensors:.1 Enclosure: plastic, wall or beam-mounted NEMA 4xenclosure, 216 mm high x 266 mm wide x 114 mm deep..2 Sensors: plug-in electrochemical sensing elements,minimum 15% full scale accuracy, carbon monoxide and nitrogendioxide sensors, minimum carbon monoxide range 0-100 ppm,minimum nitrogen dioxide ranges 0-10 ppm, factory calibrated..3 Outputs: RS-485 4-wire connection, or 4-20 mA 3-wireconnection, compatible with gas sensor control panel..4 Acceptable Material:

.1 MSA International

.2 Edwards

.3 Armstrong

2.23 WIRING

.1 As per requirement of Division 26 where ever more stringent.



.2 For wiring under 70 volts use FT6 rated wiring where wiringis not run in conduit. Other cases use FT4 wiring.

.3 For 70V and above copper conductor with chemicallycross-linked thermosetting polyethylene insulation rated RW90and 6 2.28 V. Colour code to CSA 22.1.

.4 Wiring must be continuous without joints.

.5 Sizes:.1 Field wiring to digital device: #18AWG 20AWG strandedtwisted pair..2 Analog input and output: shielded #18 minimum solidcopper #20 minimum stranded twisted pair..3 120V Power supply: to match or exceed breaker, size #12minimum..4 Wiring for safeties/interlocks for starters, motorcontrol centres, to be stranded, #14 minimum.

.6 All wiring to be in rigid conduit, flexible and liquid tightflexible metal conduit to the requirement of Division 26.

2.24 AUXILIARY CONTROL DEVICES

.1 Controls Transformers..1 Control transformers: 60 Hz, primary voltage to suitsupply, 120 V single phase secondary, VA rating to suit loadplus 20% margin.

.2 DC Power supplies: To controls vendor requirements, CSAapproved.

2.25 THERMOSTATS

.1 Low-voltage space thermostat shall be 24V, bimetal-operated,cury-switch type, with either adjustable or fixedanticipation eater, concealed setpoint adjustment, 13°C to30°C setpoint range, 1°C maximum differential, and vented ABSplastic cover.

.2 Line-voltage space thermostat shall be bimetal-actuated, opencontact or bellows-actuated, enclosed, snap-switch type, orequivalent solid-state type, with heat anticipator. UL listedfor electrical rating, concealed setpoint adjustment, 13°C to30°C setpoint range, 1°C maximum differential, and vented ABSplastic cover.



.3 Low-limit thermostats shall be vapour pressure type with anelement 6 m minimum length. Element shall respond to thelowest temperature sensed by a 30 cm section. The low-limitthermostat shall be manual reset only and be supplied asDPST.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Install equipment, components so that manufacturer's and CSAlabels are visible and legible after commissioning iscomplete.

.2 Install field control devices in accordance withmanufacturers recommended methods, procedures andinstructions.

.3 Temperature transmitters, humidity transmitters,current-to-pneumatic transducers, solenoid air valves,controllers, relays: install in NEMA I enclosure or asrequired for specific applications. Provide for electrolyticisolation in cases when dissimilar metals make contact.

.4 Support field-mounted panels, transmitters and sensors onpipe stands or channel brackets.

.5 Fire stopping: provide space for fire stopping in accordancewith Section 07 81 00 - Applied Firestopping. Maintain firerating integrity.

.6 Electrical:.1 Complete installation in accordance with Section26 05 00 - Common Work Results - Electrical..2 Refer to control schematics and Sequences of Operationon drawings..3 Terminate wires with screw terminal type connectorssuitable for wire size, and number of terminations..4 Install communication wiring in conduit.

.1 Provide complete conduit system to link BuildingControllers, field panels and OWS(s)..2 Conduit sizes to suit wiring requirements and toallow for future expansion capabilities specified forsystems..3 Maximum conduit fill not to exceed 40%..4 Design drawings do not show conduit layout.



.5 Install all 120v power wiring to field control devices,control transformers, controllers and control panels asrequired for complete system operation. 120 V power tooriginate from reserved circuits in electrical power panels.Coordinate with Division 26 for location of reservedcircuits..6 Do not run exposed conduits in normally occupied spacesunless otherwise indicated or unless impossible to dootherwise. DCC Representative to review before starting Work.All wiring must be in conduit.

.7 Mechanical: supply and install;.1 Pipe Taps..2 Wells, Control Valves and meters..3 Air flow stations, dampers, and other devices.

.8 VAV Terminal Units: supply, install and adjust as required..1 Air probe, actuator and associated vav controls..2 Tubing from air probe to dp sensor as well asinstallation and adjustment of air flow sensors andactuators..3 Co-ordinate air flow adjustments with balancing trade.

3.2 TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY SENSORS

.1 Stabilize to ensure minimum field adjustments orcalibrations.

.2 Readily accessible and adaptable to each type of applicationto allow for quick easy replacement and servicing withoutspecial tools or skills.

.3 Outdoor installation:.1 Protect from solar radiation and wind effects bynon-corroding shields..2 Install in NEMA 4 enclosures.

.4 Duct installations:.1 Do not mount in dead air space..2 Locate within sensor vibration and velocity limits..3 Securely mount extended surface sensor used to senseaverage temperature..4 Thermally isolate elements from brackets and supports torespond to air temperature only..5 Support sensor element separately from coils, filterracks.

.5 Averaging duct type temperature sensors.



.1 Install averaging element horizontally across theductwork starting 300 mm from top of ductwork. Eachadditional horizontal run to be no more than 300 mm from oneabove it. Continue until complete cross sectional area ofductwork is covered. Use multiple sensors where single sensordoes not meet required coverage..2 Wire multiple sensors in series for low temperatureprotection applications..3 Wire multiple sensors separately for temperaturemeasurement..4 Use software averaging algorithm to derive overallaverage for control purposes.

.6 Thermowells: install for piping installations..1 Locate well in elbow where pipe diameter is less thanwell insertion length..2 Thermowell to restrict flow by less than 30%..3 Use thermal conducting paste inside wells.

3.3 PANELS

.1 Arrange for conduit and tubing entry from top, bottom oreither side.

.2 Wiring and tubing within panels: locate in trays orindividually clipped to back of panel.

.3 Identify wiring and conduit clearly.

3.4 MAGNEHELIC PRESSURE INDICATORS

.1 Install adjacent to fan system static pressure sensor andduct system velocity pressure sensor as reviewed by DCCRepresentative.

.2 Locations: as indicted as specified.

3.5 PRESSURE AND DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCHES AND SENSORS

.1 Install isolation valve and snubber on sensors between sensorand pressure source where code allows..1 Protect sensing elements on steam and high temperaturehot water service with pigtail syphon between valve andsensor.



3.6 GAS DETECTION SYSTEM

.1 Install control panel and sensors in accordance withmanufacturer's recommendations.

.2 Locations: as indicated.

3.7 IDENTIFICATION

.1 Identify field devices in accordance with Section 25 05 54 -EMCS: Identification.

3.8 AIR FLOW MEASURING STATIONS

.1 Protect air flow measuring assembly until cleaning of ductsis completed.

3.9 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

.1 Calibrate and test field devices for accuracy and performancein accordance with Section 25 01 11 - EMCS: Start-up,Verification and Commissioning.

3.10 TANK LEVEL SENSORS

.1 Install as indicated and in accordance with manufacturer'srecommendations.

END OF SECTION

National Defence UNCLASSIFIED EMCS: Site Section 25 90 01

New ULCV & EATV Requirements, and Systems Page 1Storage Facility Sequences of OperatioGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 BUILDING OCCUPANCY MODES

.1 The following are the modes of building use with their designintention and initial setpoints..1 High Occupancy Mode: Representing peak periods ofactivity within building..2 Low Occupancy Mode: Represent interim periods betweenHigh Occupancy Mode. Building may have limited number ofoccupants..3 Unoccupied Mode: This mode represents scheduledovernight hours and other days of no occupancy and willnormally incorporate setpoint setbacks..4 Pre-Occupancy Mode: Representing period of recovery fromUnoccupied Period setpoints.

1.2 SEQUENCING - GENERAL

.1 Refer to control schematic drawings for general sequence ofoperation for each system under control or monitoring by theEMCS. General sequences are to be supplemented by detailedsequence requirements of this section.

.2 Scheduled Operation:.1 The EMCS shall reset zone heating and cooling setpoints,ventilation and auxiliary systems based on building operatingmode. The operating modes are adjustable on a 365 day, 24hour basis and shall be initially scheduled in conjunctionwith input received from DCC Representative.

.3 General Alarms:.1 The EMCS shall alarm if any setpoint (excluding high orlow limits) is exceeded by a value and sustained over a timedelay. Initial values and time delays set as follows asapplicable unless noted otherwise:

.1 Space/Return Humidity: 15% RH, 30 minutes.

.2 Space temperature: 2C, 30 minutes.

.3 Space differential pressures: 25 Pa, 15 minutes.

.4 HVAC equipment air temperatures: 3C, 15 minutes.

.5 HVAC equipment differential air pressures: 20% ofsetpoint, 15 minutes..6 Amperage: 20% of setpoint, 5 minutes..7 Air flows: 15% of setpoint, 15 minutes..8 Valve and damper positioning: 15% from commanded, 5minutes.

.2 Provide optimization of time delays and permissibledeviations to suit conditions realized during testing andcommissioning.



.3 The above delays for space temperature and humidity arefurther increased by 60 minutes during switchover fromunoccupied to pre-occupancy and occupied modes.

.4 All setpoints referenced in the control sequence shall beoperator adjustable.

.5 This sequence of operation requires various time delays. ineach instance, provide separate delays for starting andstopping, enabling or disabling, etc. in all cases, aninitial delay period is identified and shall be used as theinitial setting for both time delay inputs unless notedotherwise. Unless specifically noted otherwise, all timedelay periods are to be operator adjustable from the DDCsystem operating console.

.6 AHU Critical Alarms and Limits:.1 To be in effect during any mode. The occurrence to causeunit to perform a controlled shutdown and issue of criticalalarm. Automatic rest to occur on clearing of event as noted.Items included but are not necessarily limited to are:

.1 Low limit protection: Supply air sensed below 5Cfor a period exceeding 120 seconds. To automaticallyreset on recovery of temperature..2 High limit protection: Supply air sensed above 50Cfor period exceeding 60 seconds..3 Excess supply duct pressurization exceeding 500 Pa..4 Loss of supply or return fan operation..5 Fire alarm shutdown: to automatically reset onclearing of alarm.

.2 Automatic reset shall allow the unit to restart. Limitsuccessive restart with a 10 minute delay. After more than 4successive restarts disable auto reset and issue criticalalarm.

.7 Space/Zone Critical alarms: To be in effect during any mode.the occurrence to cause issuance of critical alarm to mainOWS..1 Space temperature below 5C for sustained period of 15minutes..2 Space temperature above 40C..3 High-high tank level alarms..4 Gas detection..5 Water consumption: in excess of 20x normal daily use..6 Other critical alarms noted in schematic drawingsequences.

.8 Manual Operator Overrides:.1 Where a control sequence requires or permits manualoperator action this shall be accomplished by through screengraphic button interface located on the appropriate systemgraphic screen or sub-set screen as space permits.



1.3 SEQUENCES - COMMON

.1 These sequences supplement specific system sequencesindicated on the control diagrams and flow sheets.

.2 Optimum Start/Stop:.1 Application: All package equipment and terminal HVACunits that normally follow Occupied and Unoccupied buildingschedules..2 The EMCS shall provide and adaptive learning sequence todetermine optimum start/stop times to place system inPre-Occupancy Modes such that they are able to recover fromUnoccupied Mode conditions and meet Occupied Mode setpointsat start of actual Occupied Mode. The program shall basestart times on differentials of polled space conditions tosetpoints and a rolling two week trend of actual time elapsedto reach setpoint versus differentials..3 Optimum start time shall occur no earlier than 3 hoursprior to occupancy for heating and 1 hour prior for cooling..4 Once a system is place in Pre-Occupancy Mode the unitshall stay in this mode until the Occupied Mode time isreached.

.3 Consumption metering:.1 For power, fluid and gas meters: provide meter screenpage(s) for dynamic display for, meter totalized reading,consumption for current month to date and consumption ofprevious month. On click request provide display of 24 monthtrailing history for each meter..2 Engineering units for consumption display.

.1 Water: Cu.m.

.2 Electrical: kWh and peak demand kW.

.3 Gas: Cu.m.

.4 Other units as requested by the DCC Representative.

1.4 SEQUENCES - DETAILED

.1 Detailed sequences indicated on control diagrams and flowsheets.

1.5 PACKAGED EQUIPMENT WITH BACNET

.1 The following is a minimum list of vendor equipment specifiedwith a PACnet for interface to the EMCS:.1 All VFDs for AHU..2 Electrical Power Meters..3 Other Division 25 supplied devices.



.2 Refer to the technical specification sections for minimumobject list associated with each piece of equipment. Allobjects listed are to be mapped to the EMCS for use in activecontrol and monitoring.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.

END OF SECTION

DEPARTMENT OF NATIONAL DEFENCE

SPECIFICATIONS

UNCLASSIFIED

Ultra Light Combat Vehicle & Enhanced All Terrain Vehicle (ULCV & EATV Storage Facility), Garrison Petawawa ON

100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS

VOLUME 2 OF 2

SNC-LAVALIN INC. Halifax, Nova Scotia

Project No.: L-P90-2500/029 2016-06-29

635500-0001-T-31-SPE-000-0001 C02

Ultra Light Combat Vehicle & Enhanced All Terrain Vehicle

(ULCV & EATV Storage Facility), Garrison Petawawa ON DCC Contract No.: 53073

100% Construction Documents

UNCLASSIFIED

June 2016

Prepared for: National Defence Headquarters

101 Colonel By Drive Ottawa, ON

Canada K1A 0K2

Prepared by: SNC-LAVALIN INC.

Suite 200, Park Lane Terraces 5657 Spring Garden Road

Halifax, Nova Scotia B3J 3R4

Ph: (902) 492-4544, Fx: (902) 492-4540

Revision: Prepared By: / initials Reviewed By: / initials

Approved By: / initials

Date (y/m/d):

B01 Carla Yeadon Sandy McClearn Sandy McClearn 2016-05-30 C01 Carla Yeadon Sandy McClearn Sandy McClearn 2016-06-29 C02 C Yeadon / C DeCoste Sandy McClearn Sandy McClearn 2016-08-04


Section Title Pages VOLUME 1 OF 2 Division 01 - General Requirements 01 11 00 Summary of Work 4 01 14 00 Work Restrictions 2 01 29 83 Payment Procedures: Testing Laboratory 2 01 31 19 Project Meetings 3 01 32 16.07 Construction Progress Schedule - Bar (GANTT) Chart 12 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures 5 01 35 00.06 Special Procedures for Traffic Control 3 01 35 35 DND Fire Safety Requirements 4 01 35 43 Environmental Procedures 5 01 35 45 Environmental Protection Refueling Vehicles 3 01 41 00 Regulatory Requirements 1 01 41 00.01 Quality Management System 12 01 42 00 References 6 01 45 00 Quality Control 4 01 47 15 Sustainable Requirements: Constructions 10 01 51 00 Temporary Utilities 4 01 52 00 Construction Facilities 4 01 56 00 Temporary Barriers and Enclosures 4 01 61 00 Common Product Requirements 7 01 70 12 Safety Requirements 7 01 71 00 Examination and Preparation 3 01 73 00 Execution Requirements 4 01 74 11 Cleaning 3 01 74 21 Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal 11 01 77 00 Closeout Procedures 2 01 78 00 Closeout Submittals 8 01 79 00 Demonstration and Training 2 01 82 60 Standard Foundations 7 01 82 65 Slab-On-Grade 8 01 83 45 Prefabricated Buildings 12 01 89 83 UXO Clearance Support to Construction 2 01 91 13 General Commissioning (Cx) Requirements 15 01 91 31 Commissioning (Cx) Plan 9 01 91 33 Commissioning Forms 4 01 91 41 Commissioning: Training 4 01 91 51 Building Management Manual (BMM) 4 Division 02 - Existing Conditions 02 41 13 Selective Site Demolition 8


Division 03 – Concrete 03 10 00 - Concrete Forming and Accessories 4 03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcing 4 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete 13 Division 04 – Masonry 04 05 00 Common Work Results 5 04 05 12 Mortar and Masonry Grout 2 04 05 19 Masonry Anchorage and Reinforcing 5 04 05 23 Masonry Accessories 2 04 22 00 Concrete Unit Masonry 5 Division 05 – Metals 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications 6 Division 06 – Wood and Plastics 06 10 10 Rough Carpentry 3 Division 07 - Thermal and Moisture Protection 07 13 52 Air/Moisture Membrane 3 07 21 13 Board Insulation 3 07 21 31 Sprayed Insulation – Polyurethane Foam 2 07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 3 07 81 00 Applied Fireproofing 5 07 92 00 Sealants 5 Division 08 – Openings 08 00 00 Door and Frame Schedule 1 Door and Hardware Schedule 4 08 11 00 Metal doors and Frames 7 08 37 13 Folding Sectional Doors 4 08 71 10 Door Hardware 9 Division 09 – Finishes 09 91 99 Painting 6 Division 10 - Specialties 10 14 53 Traffic Signage 6 10 28 10 Toilet and Bath Accessories 4 10 44 16.19 Fire Extinguishers and Safety Blankets 3 10 51 13 Metal Lockers 2 Division 21 - Fire Suppression 21 05 01 Common Work Results for Mechanical 4 21 13 16 Dry Pipe Sprinkler Systems 12


Division 22 - Plumbing 22 11 18 Domestic Water Pipe Copper 7 22 13 17 Drainage Waste and Vent Piping - Cast Iron and Copper 3 22 13 18 Drainage Waste and Vent Piping - Plastic 3 22 30 05 Domestic Water Heaters 3 22 42 01 Plumbing Specialties and Accessories 10 22 42 03 Washroom Fixtures 4 Division 23 - Heating, Ventilating and Air-Conditioning (HVAC) 23 05 05 Installation of Pipework 6 23 05 13 Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment 5 23 05 16 Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping 3 23 05 17 Pipe Welding 4 23 05 19.01 Thermometers and Pressure Gauges - Piping Systems 3 23 05 23.01 Valves - Bronze 4 23 05 23.02 Valves - Cast Iron 5 23 05 23.05 Butterfly Valves 4 23 05 29 Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment 8 23 05 48 Vibration and Seismic Control for HVAC Piping and Equipment 7 23 05 53.01 Mechanical Identification 7 23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing For HVAC 6 23 05 94 Pressure Testing Of Ducted Air Systems 4 23 07 13 Duct Insulation 6 23 07 15 Thermal Insulation For Piping 8 23 08 01 Performance Verification Mechanical Piping Systems 2 23 11 23 Facility Natural Gas Piping 6 23 31 13.01 Metal Ducts - Low Pressure To 500 Pa 7 23 33 00 Air Duct Accessories 5 23 33 14 Dampers - Balancing 3 23 33 15 Dampers - Operating 3 23 33 16 Dampers - Fire and Smoke 5 23 34 00 HVAC Fans 5 23 34 25 Packaged Roof and Wall Exhausters 4 23 37 13 Diffusers, Registers and Grilles 3 23 37 20 Louvres, Intakes and Vents 3 23 44 00 HVAC Air Filtration 5 23 51 00 Breeching, Chimneys and Stacks 4 23 73 11 Air Handling Units – Packaged 11 23 82 39 Unit Heaters 4 23 82 39.01 Unit Heaters - Electric 4 23 83 00.01 Radiant Heaters – Electric Infrared 3 Division 25 - Integrated Automation 25 01 11 EMCS: Start-up, Verification and Commissioning 7 25 01 12 EMCS: Training 3 25 05 01 EMCS: General Requirements 7


25 05 02 EMCS: Submittals and Review Process 4 25 05 03 EMCS: Project Record Documents 4 25 05 54 EMCS: Identification 3 25 08 20 EMCS: Warranty and Maintenance 4 25 10 01 EMCS: Local Area Network (LAN) 3 25 30 01 EMCS: Building Controllers 11 25 30 02 EMCS: Field Control Devices 17 25 90 01 EMCS: Site Requirements, and Systems Sequences of Operation 4 VOLUME 2 OF 2 Division 26 - Electrical 26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical 11 26 05 01 Arc Flash Hazard Protection 2 26 05 14 Power Cable (15000 V) 5 26 05 20 Wire and Box Connectors (0-1000 V) 2 26 05 21 Wires and Cables (0-1000 V) 3 26 05 22 Connectors and Terminations 3 26 05 27 Grounding - Primary 4 26 05 28 Grounding - Secondary 4 26 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 3 26 05 31 Splitters, Junction, Pull Boxes and Cabinets 2 26 05 32 Outlet Boxes, Conduit Boxes and Fittings 3 26 05 34 Conduits, Conduit Fastenings and Conduit Fittings 4 26 05 43.01 Installation of Cables in Trenches and in Ducts 4 26 09 23.01 Metering and Switchboard Instruments 7 26 09 23.02 Lighting Control Devices - Photoelectric 3 26 09 43 Lighting Control Devices - Low Voltage 4 26 12 16.01 Dry Type Transformers up to 600 V Primary 3 26 12 19 Pad Mounted, Liquid Filled, Medium Voltage Transformers 6 26 24 16.01 Panelboards Breaker Type 4 26 27 26 Wiring Devices 3 26 28 13.01 Fuses - Low Voltage 2 26 28 16.02 Moulded Case Circuit Breakers 2 26 28 20 Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters - Class "A" 4 26 28 23 Disconnect Switches - Fused And Non-Fused 2 26 29 01 Contactors 2 26 29 03 Control Devices 5 26 29 10 Motor Starters To 600 V 5 26 29 20 Variable Frequency Drives 8 26 41 00.01 Primary Lightning Arresters 2 26 41 00.03 Surge Protection Devices 4 26 42 01 Surge Protection Devices Up To 600 V 3 26 50 00 Lighting 3 26 52 00 Emergency Lighting 3 26 53 00 Exit Lights 3


Division 27 - Communications 27 05 26 Grounding And Bonding For Communications 4 27 05 28 Pathways For Communications Systems 3 27 10 05 Structured Cabling For Communication 4

Division 28 - Electronic Safety and Security 28 13 00 Access Control 9 28 31 00.01 Multiplex Fire Alarm System 14 28 31 02 Gas Detection Systems 5

Division 31 - Earthwork 31 05 16 Aggregate Materials 6 31 11 00 Clearing and Grubbing 6 31 14 13 Soil Stripping and Stockpiling 3 31 22 13 Rough Grading 4 31 23 33.01 Excavating, Trenching and Backfilling 13 31 24 13 Roadway Embankments 7 31 25 05 Erosion and Sedimentation Control 6 31 32 19.01 Geotextiles 4 31 37 00 Rip-Rap 4

Division 32 - Exterior Improvements 32 11 16.01 Granular Sub-Base 6 32 11 23 Aggregate Base Courses 6 32 15 60 Roadway Dust Control 4 32 91 19.13 Topsoil Placement and Grading 6 32 92 19 Seeding 4

Division 33 - Utilities 33 05 16 Maintenance Holes and Catch Basin Structures 8 33 11 16 Site Water Utility Distribution Piping 18 33 31 13 Public Sanitary Utility Sewerage Piping 11 33 41 00 Storm Utility Drainage Piping 8 33 65 73 Concrete Encased Duct Bank and Manholes 6

Appendix A: Geotechnical Report


List of Drawings L-P90-2500/029-101 – Existing Conditions and Removals L-P90-2500/029-102 – Siting Plan L-P90-2500/029-310 – Roof Plan & Ground Floor Plans L-P90-2500/029-320 – Sections L-P90-2500/029-330 – Elevations L-P90-2500/029-400 – Mechanical Legend and Notes L-P90-2500/029-401 – Drainage Plan L-P90-2500/029-411 – Plumbing Plan L-P90-2500/029-421 – Mechanical Piping Plan L-P90-2500/029-431 – Ventilation Plan L-P90-2500/029-451 – Fire Suppression Plan L-P90-2500/029-471 – Mechanical Details – Sheet 1 L-P90-2500/029-472 – Mechanical Details – Sheet 2 L-P90-2500/029-481 – Flow Diagrams and Schematics L-P90-2500/029-491 – Mechanical Schedule L-P90-2500/029-500 – Legend and General Notes L-P90-2500/029-501 – Electrical Site Plan and Demolition L-P90-2500/029-502 – Power Distribution Single Line Diagram L-P90-2500/029-503 – Hazardous Area Classification and Detail L-P90-2500/029-510 – Grounding Plan and Details L-P90-2500/029-511 – Power Plan L-P90-2500/029-512 – Systems Plan Layout and Fire Alarm Riser L-P90-2500/029-520 – Lighting Plan and Luminaire Schedule L-P90-2500/029-521 – Lighting Control Diagrams L-P90-2500/029-530 – Typical Site Details Sheet 1 L-P90-2500/029-531 – Typical Site Details Sheet 2 L-P90-2500/029-532 – Typical Site Details Sheet 3 L-P90-2500/029-533 – Typical Site Details Sheet 4 L-P90-2500/029-590 – Equipment Schedule L-P90-2500/029-591 – Panel Schedules and Schematics L-P90-2500/029-600 – Civil Legend and General Notes L-P90-2500/029-601 – Erosion and Sedimentation Control Plan L-P90-2500/029-610 – Grading Plan L-P90-2500/029-611 – Site Utilities Plan L-P90-2500/029-620 – Water and Sanitary Plan and Profile L-P90-2500/029-621 – Driveway Plan and Profile L-P90-2500/029-622 – Ditch Plan and Profile L-P90-2500/029-623 – Pond 5 Plan and Profile L-P90-2500/029-630 – Details

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Common Work Results for Page 1Storage Facility ElectricalGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 GENERAL

.1 This section covers items common to Division 26. This sectionsupplements requirements of Division 1.

1.3 CODES AND STANDARDS

.1 Perform the complete installation in accordance with theOntario Electrical Safety Code 2015, except where specifiedotherwise in the Contract Documents.

.2 Construct overhead and underground systems in accordance withrespectively CSA C22.3 No. 1-10 and No. 7-10 except wherespecified otherwise in the Contract Documents.

.3 CAN/CSA Z462.12 Workplan Electrical Safety as applicable toinformation regarding Arc Flash Hazard Category (0 to 4) anddefinition of Flash Protection Boundary.

1.4 CARE, OPERATION AND START-UP

.1 Instruct DCC Representative and operating personnel in theoperation, care and maintenance of systems, system equipmentand components.

.2 Arrange and pay for services of manufacturer's factoryservice, Representative to supervise start-up ofinstallation, check, adjust, balance and calibrate componentsand instruct operating personnel.

.3 Provide these services for such period, and for as manyvisits as necessary to put equipment in operation, and ensurethat operating personnel are conversant with all aspects ofits care and operation.

1.5 VOLTAGE RATINGS

.1 Operating voltages: to CAN3-C235-83(R2010).



.2 Motors, electric heating, control and distribution devicesand equipment to operate satisfactorily at 60 Hz withinnormal operating limits established by above standard.Equipment to operate in extreme operating conditionsestablished in above standard without damage to equipment.

1.6 PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTION

.1 Pay associated fees for Electrical Permit.

.2 Notify DCC Representative of changes required by ElectricalInspection Department prior to making changes.

.3 Furnish Certificates of Acceptance from Electrical InspectionDepartment on completion of work to DCC Representative.

1.7 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

.1 Provide materials and equipment in accordance with Section 0161 00 - Common Product Requirements.

.2 Equipment and materials to be CSA certified. Where there isno alternative to supplying equipment which is not CSAcertified, obtain special approval from Electrical InspectionDepartment.

.3 Factory assemble control panels and component assemblies.

1.8 ELECTRIC EQUIPMENT AND CONTROLS

.1 Supplier and installer responsibility is indicated inEquipment Schedule on electrical drawings.

1.9 FINISHES

.1 Shop finish metal enclosure surfaces; by application of rustresistant primer inside and outside, and at least two coatsof finish enamel..1 Paint indoor switchgear and distribution enclosureslight grey to EEMAC 2Y-1-1958..2 Paint outdoor switchgear equipment green.

.2 Clean and touch up surfaces of shop-painted equipmentscratched or marred during shipment or installation, to matchoriginal paint.

.3 Clean and prime exposed non-galvanized hangers, racks andfastenings to prevent rusting.



.3 Clean and prime exposed non-galvanized hangers, racks andfastenings to prevent rusting.

1.10 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

.1 Identify electrical equipment with nameplates as follows:

.2 Nameplates:.1 Lamicoid 3 mm thick plastic engraving sheet, white face,black core for normal power, red core for emergency power.

.3 Lettering on lamicoid nameplates shall not start nor endnearer than 3/8" from either, or both end of plates.

NAMEPLATE SIZES HEIGHT LENGTHSize 1 10 mm As Required 1 line 5 mm high lettersSize 2 13 mm " " 1 line 6 mm high lettersSize 3 16 mm " " 2 lines 5 mm high lettersSize 4 20 mm " " 1 line 10 mm high lettersSize 5 25 mm " " 2 lines 6 mm high lettersSize 6 25 mm " " 1 line 12 mm high lettersSize 7 30 mm " " 2 lines 12 mm high letters

.4 Lamicoid plates to be affixed to concrete, concrete blocks,brick, etc. with two nylon inserts and No. 6 panhead sheetmetal screws.

.5 Lamicoid plates are to be affixed to all "metal" surfaceswith steel type pop rivets.

.6 Lamicoid plates to be affixed to other types of surfaces withcontact type cement. Contact type cement is to be applied tocomplete rear side of plate.

.7 Lamicoid plates are to be affixed to building exteriorsurfaces with nylon inserts and self- tapping screws unlessindicated otherwise.

.8 Wording on nameplates to be approved by DCC Representativeprior to manufacture.

.9 Allow for average of fifty (50) letters per nameplate.

.10 Identification to be English.

.11 Nameplates for terminal cabinets and junction boxes toindicate system and/or voltage characteristics.



.12 Panels, transformers, disconnects, starters, contactors,frequency converters, indicate type, voltage, phase, current,point of supply and load controlled. For distribution panels,provide nameplates for each breaker listing breaker ratingand load controlled.

.13 Terminal cabinets and pull boxes: indicate system andvoltage.

.14 Receptacles: indicate power panel and branch circuit number.Locate on wall immediately above receptacle.

.15 Sprinkler flow switches, foam flow switches and end of linedevices shall be labelled.

1.11 WIRING IDENTIFICATION

.1 Identify wiring with permanent indelible identifyingmarkings, either numbered or coloured plastic tapes, on bothends of phase conductors of feeders and branch circuitwiring.

.2 Maintain phase sequence and colour coding throughout.

.3 Colour code: to Ontario Electrical Safety Code 2015.

.4 Use colour coded wires in communication cables, matchedthroughout system.

1.12 CONDUIT AND CABLE IDENTIFICATION

.1 Colour code conduits and boxes.

.2 Code with plastic tape or paint at points where conduit orcable enters wall, ceiling, or floor, and at 15 m intervals.

.3 Colours: 25 mm wide prime colour and 20 mm wide auxiliarycolour.up to 250 V Yellow

up to 600 V Yellow Green

up to 25 kV Yellow Red

Telecom Green

Other Green BlueCommunicationSystems



Fire Alarm Red

Other Red YellowSecurity systems

1.13 WIRING TERMINATIONS

.1 Lugs, terminals, screws used for termination of wiring to besuitable for copper conductors.

1.14 MANUFACTURERS AND CSA LABELS

.1 Visible and legible, after equipment is installed.

1.15 WARNING SIGNS

.1 As specified and to meet requirements of Ontario ElectricalSafety Authority and DCC Representative.

.2 Aluminum composite decal signs, minimum size 175 x 250 mm.

1.16 SINGLE LINE ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS

.1 Provide and submit single line electrical diagram laminatedas follows:.1 Site electrical distribution system: locate inside eachswitchgear..2 Single line diagram is to represent as-built conditions..3 Confirm approval of submittal prior to placement withinaforementioned locations.

.2 Provide and submit single line electrical diagram underplexiglass as follows:.1 Building electrical distribution system: locate in Mainand satellite electrical rooms..2 Grounding riser diagram: locate in Main and satelliteelectrical rooms..3 Single line diagram is to represent as-built conditions..4 Confirm approval of submittal prior to placement withinaforementioned locations.

.3 Provide revised fire alarm riser diagram, plan and zoning ofbuilding under plexiglass at fire alarm control panel andannunciator. For diagram, use silkscreen applied to acrylicsign. Install as directed by DCC Representative.

.4 Provide communications riser diagram in MTR.



.5 Drawings: 600 x 600 mm minimum size.

1.17 LOCATION OF OUTLETS

.1 Do not install outlets back-to-back in wall; allow minimum150 mm horizontal clearance between boxes.

.2 Change location of outlets at no extra cost or credit,providing distance does not exceed 3000 mm, and informationis given before installation.

.3 Locate light switches on latch side of doors.

1.18 MOUNTING HEIGHTS

.1 Mounting height of equipment is from finished floor or gradeto centreline of equipment unless specified or indicatedotherwise.

.2 If mounting height of equipment is not specified orindicated, verify before proceeding with installation.

.3 Install electrical equipment at following heights unlessindicated otherwise..1 Local switches: 1200 mm..2 Wall receptacles:

.1 General: 300 mm in service rooms and 1200 mm inservice spaces and shops unless noted otherwise..2 Wall receptacles and communication data/voiceoutlet shall be installed at 300 mm above finish raisedfloor..3 Above top of continuous baseboard heater: 200 mm..4 Above top of counters or counter splash backs: 175mm..5 Exterior 600 mm.

.3 Panelboards: as required by Code or as indicated.

.4 Telecom outlets: 1200 mm in service spaces and shopsunless noted otherwise..5 Wall mounted voice outlets: 1200 mm..6 Fire alarm pull stations..7 Fire alarm audible/visual devices 2100 mm..8 All receptacles shall be installed with the ground pindown.



1.19 LOAD BALANCE

.1 Measure phase current to panelboards with normal loads(lighting) operating at time of acceptance. Adjust branchcircuit connections as required to obtain best balance ofcurrent between phases and record changes.

.2 Measure phase voltages at loads. Advise DCC Representative ifvoltage is not within 2% of rated voltage of equipment.

.3 Submit, at completion of work, report listing phase andneutral currents on panelboards, operating under normal load.State hour and date on which each load was measured, andvoltage at time of test.

1.20 CONDUIT AND CABLE INSTALLATION

.1 Install conduit and sleeves prior to pouring of concrete.Sleeves through concrete: schedule 40 steel pipe, sized forfree passage of conduit, and protruding 50 mm.

.2 If plastic sleeves are used in fire rated walls or floors,remove before conduit installation.

.3 Install cables, conduits and fittings to be embedded orplastered over, neatly and close to building structure sofurring can be kept to minimum.

.4 Conduit for the receptacles and lighting shall be, ifpossible, installed within or on the outside of thecommunication room walls. If conduit must be run inside thecommunications room, vertical runs shall be installed in thecorners of the room and horizontal runs shall be 150 mm fromand parallel to the floor.


.1 All electrical work to be carried out by qualified, licensedelectricians or apprentices as per the conditions of theProvincial Act respecting manpower vocational training andqualification. Employees registered in a provincialapprentices program shall be permitted, under the directsupervision of a qualified licensed electrician, to performspecific tasks - the activities permitted shall be determinedbased on the level of training attained and the demonstrationof ability to perform specific duties.

.2 The work of this division to be carried out by a contractorwho holds a valid Electrical Contractor license as issued bythe Province where the work is being constructed.



.2 The work of this division to be carried out by a contractorwho holds a valid Electrical Contractor license as issued bythe Province where the work is being constructed.

.3 Conduct and pay for following tests:.1 Power distribution system including phasing, voltage,grounding and load balancing..2 Circuits originating from branch distribution panels..3 Lighting and its control..4 Motors and associated control equipment includingsequenced operation of systems where applicable..5 Systems: fire alarm system, public address system..6 Power generation including diesel generator andautomatic transfer switch.

.4 Furnish manufacturer's certificate or letter confirming thatentire installation as it pertains to each system has beeninstalled to manufacturer's instructions.

.5 Insulation resistance testing..1 Megger circuits, feeders and equipment up to 350 V witha 500 V instrument..2 Megger circuits, feeders and equipment up to 600 V witha 1000 V instrument..3 Check resistance to ground before energizing.

.6 Carry out tests in presence of DCC Representative.

.7 Provide instruments, meters, equipment and personnel requiredto conduct tests during and at conclusion of project.

.8 Submit test results for DCC Representative's review.

1.22 CO-ORDINATION OF PROTECTIVE DEVICES

.1 Ensure circuit protective devices such as overcurrent trips,relays and fuses are installed to required values andsettings.

1.23 COORDINATION, ARC FLASH AND SHORT CIRCUIT STUDIES

.1 Provide short circuit, protection devices coordination, andarc flash hazard study and labels in accordance with Section26 05 01 - Arc Flash Hazard Protection. Contractors Engineermust visit site to gather information to conduct studies.

.2 A Professional Engineer licensed to practice in Ontario shallstamp the Short Circuit, Coordination and Arc Flash StudyReport.



1.24 INFRARED THERMOGRAPHY

.1 An infrared thermography analysis shall be implemented forthe complete electrical system during the commissioningphase. The analysis shall be carried out after equipment hasbeen in operation at full load for 12 hours. Any defects andanomalies are to be noted and rectified. The analysis is tobe witnessed by the DCC Representative and results includedin commissioning documentation.

1.25 TESTING

.1 The Contractor shall engage the services of a certifiedElectrical Field Service Firm with specialization in thefield of Electrical Power and Grounding systems to do acomplete testing of the installed system during thecommissioning phase. Commissioning personnel must have thefollowing qualifications:.1 Must be factory trained on OEM equipment..2 Must be familiar with the installation, commissioningand start-up of equipment on this project..3 Must have carried out similar projects with medium(above 1000 V) and low (up to 1000 V) voltages equipment..4 Must have appropriate commissioning equipment..5 Must have carried out five years of similar experience..6 Must have a Company Construction Safety Plan..7 The following systems/equipment shall be tested:

.1 Primary switchgear.

.2 Padmount transformers.

.3 Secondary service equipment.

.4 Primary grounding.

.5 Primary cables and terminations.

.6 Site lighting including obstruction lights..8 Site CCTV system

1.26 SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS

.1 Design SRS (Seismic Restraint Systems) for 100% of NBCrecommendations for CFB Petawawa. Hire and pay for theservices of a Professional Engineer registered in theProvince the work is being performed in and specializing indesign of SRS.

.2 The objective of seismic restraint is to provide for areasonable level of life safety by concentrating the effortson restraining heavy equipment in place, maintainingessential life safety related systems and protecting thebuilding escape routes.



.3 Electrical equipment and associated services requiringseismic restraints shall include but not necessarily bylimited to the following items. Compare with the drawings,and other specifications, and add to the list as applicable..1 Electrical equipment:

.1 All floor mounted, static electric equipmentincluding but not necessarily limited to the following,shall be suitably anchored and braced to ensure that itdoes not topple over:

.1 Distribution panels.

.2 Transformers.

.3 Motor control centre.

.4 Control panels..2 All pad mounted, static electric equipmentincluding but not necessarily limited to thefollowing,shall be suitably anchored and braced toensure that it does not topple over:

.1 Distribution panels.

.2 Primary switchgear..2 For these systems, the following requirements apply:

.1 Equipment must be installed in accordance with thecriteria indicated above..2 Conduit installations for these systems willgenerally be installed securely on the slab, withexpansion couplings to cross building joints and wherethese are terminated into equipment that is likely tovibrate or move, the connection is to be flexibleconduit..3 Lighting fixtures in T-Bar ceilings are to besupported by vertical chains..4 To maintain the continuity of Fire Alarm System,suitable materials and methods to provide fire rating aswell as seismic restraint are required.

.3 Escape route requirements: To maintain accessibility inescape routes, the pertinent electrical installations must beseismically restrained. These shall include but notnecessarily be limited to:

.1 Conduit.

.2 Light Fixtures..4 Treatment of conduit and light fixtures is to be asalready described above..5 Refer to and comply with the requirements of Section 2305 48 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping andEquipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Arc Flash Hazard Page 1Storage Facility ProtectionGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

.1 Electrical equipment shall conform to Ontario ElectricalSafety Code - 2015 requirements for electrical shock and arcflash hazard warning labels. Undertake electrical shock andarc flash study and analysis per CSA Z462 WorkplaceElectrical Safety 2015 to define Hazard Category and FlashProtection Boundary information.

.2 Install warning label(s). Warning label(s) to be selfadhesive type in highly visible locations.

.3 Scope:.1 Accurate electrical system single-line diagram asrequired by CSA Z462. Include the following on the singleline diagram:

.1 Nameplate data for electrical components (e.g.transformers, etc.)..2 Cable sizes, types and lengths between electricalequipment components..3 Utility source data..4 Verified overcurrent device settings.

.2 Short Circuit Study in accordance with ANSI standard C37and IEEE standard 141-1993 (Red Book).

.4 Coordination Study in accordance with IEEE 242-2001 (BuffBook)to determine the proper overcurrent device settings thatwill balance system reliability through selectivecoordination while minimizing the magnitude of an electricalarc flash hazard incident.

.5 Incident Energy Study in accordance with the IEEE 1584-2004a,"IEEE guide for Performing Arc Flash Hazard Calculations" inorder to quantify the hazard for selection of personalprotective equipment (PPE). Tables that assume fault currentlevels and clearing time for proper PPE selection are notacceptable.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

.1 Comprehensive report that includes:.1 Report summary with analysis methodology, findings andrecommendations..2 Summary of input data for utility source, equipment andcables..3 Available fault current at each equipment location withcomparison to equipment rating.


New ULCV & EATV Arc Flash Hazard Page 2Storage Facility ProtectionGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

.4 Overcurrent device settings (e.g. pick-up, time delay,curve)..5 Incident energy level (calories/cm2) for each equipmentlocation and recommended PPE..6 Overcurrent device coordination curve including relatedsection of the single-line diagram.

.2 Labels:.1 Installed warning labels (orange <40 cal/cm2) or dangerlabel (red > 40 cal/cm2) in accordance with ANSI Z535.4-2002.The label must be readable in both indoor and outdoorenvironments for at least 3 years and contain the followinginformation:

.1 Arc hazard boundary (centimeters).

.2 Working distance (centimeters).

.3 Arc flash incident energy at the working distance(calories/cm2)..4 PPE category and description including the gloverating..5 Voltage rating of the equipment..6 Limited approach distance (centimeters)..7 Restricted approach distance (centimeters)..8 Prohibited approach distance (centimeters)..9 Equipment/bus name..10 Date prepared..11 Arc flash hazard study preparer name and address.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


.1 Provide all necessary material, equipment, labour, andtechnical supervision to perform the arc flash hazardanalysis.

.2 Utilize engineers and technicians that are experienced andregularly perform electrical power system testing.

.3 Personnel performing the arc flash analysis shall be trainedand experienced in accordance with NEMA TrainingSpecification concerning the apparatus and systems beingevaluated.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Power Cable (15000 V) Page 1Storage FacilityGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 Section 26 05 22 - Connectors and Terminations.

.2 Section 26 05 43.01 - Installation of Cables in Trenches andin Ducts.

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 Canadian Standards Association (CSA).1 CAN/CSA-C68.5-13, shielded and Concentric Neutral PowerCable for Distribution Utilities.

.2 IEEE.1 IEEE 386-2006, Separable Insulated Connector Systems forPower Distribution Above 600 V..2 ANSI/ICEA S-94-649..3 CEA WCWG-02 and AEIC CS-8..4 ASTM Be and ASTM B496.



.2 Provide product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00 -Submittal Procedures..1 provide manufacturer's printed product literature,specifications, data sheet and include productcharacteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finishand limitations.



.2 Waste management and Disposal:.1 Separate waste materials for recycling in accordancewith Section 01 74 21 - Construction/Demolition WasteManagement and Disposal.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONCENTRIC NEUTRAL UNDERGROUND DISTRIBUTION CABLES 15000 V

.1 Concentric neutral type UD underground distribution cable: toCSA C68.3, ANSI/ICEA S-94-649, CEA WCWG-02 and AEIC CS-8.

.2 Single copper conductor, size as indicated, compact roundstranding per ASTM Be and ASTM B496..1 All strand interstices to be filled during strandingoperation and each wire and successive layers of wires to besealed with approved sealing compound.

.3 Semi-conducting XLPE conductor shield.

.4 Insulation of tree-retardant cross-linked thermo-settingpolyethylene (TR-XLPE) rated 90°C and 15 kV to AEIC CS8,ANSI/ICEA S-94-649 and CSA C-68.3 for 100% voltage level.

.5 Insulation shield of semi-conducting thermo-setting XLPEapplied as a co-extrusion with the insulation and theconductor shield..1 Semi-conducting insulation shield to be marked with thewords "SEMICONDUCTING - REMOVE WHEN SPLICING OR TERMINATING".

.6 Conductor shield, insulation and insulation shield to beextruded and cured together in a closed, dry curing process.

.7 Copper neutral wires applied helically over insulation shieldequivalent to 33% full capacity.

.8 Jacket: encapsulating linear low-density polyethylene(LLDPE).

.9 Acceptable Materials: Aetna, Pirelli, General Cable, Nexans.

2.2 DEADBREAK ELBOW CONNECTORS___

.1 Deadbreak elbow connectors 600 A, 15 kV, to IEEE Std 386,consisting of:.1 Semi-conducting shield, precision moulded peroxide-cured, provides ground shield continuity and meets IEEE Std592..2 Compression connector..3 EPDM insulation..4 Cable adapter, moulded, provides stress relief for theterminated cable..5 Insulating plug cap..6 Insulating plug..7 Semi-conducting insert.



.8 Capacitive test point.

.9 Drain wire tab.

.10 Acceptable materials: Elastimold, Cooper Power System,3M.

2.3 CABLE SEALING KIT

.1 Cold shrink tube to seal cable at point of entry to loadbreakelbow.

.2 Provides waterproof seal over exposed semiconductive portionof cable, end of elbow boot and cable jacket.

.3 Rubber mastic sealing strips to seal around concentricneutral wires.

2.4 JACKETED CONCENTRIC NEUTRAL CABLE TERMINATIONS

.1 Single piece outdoor cable terminator 15 kV, 110 kV BIL toIEEE 48-1996 Standard for Cable Terminations..1 Insulation - moulded silicone rubber, high dielectricconstant material..2 Cold shrink tube type termination..3 Suitable to terminate jacketed concentric neutral typecable..4 Moulded silicone size skirted type insulator..5 Positive seal on aerial lug and at base of termination..6 Copper compression connector to terminate conductor..7 Aerial lug - eyebolt style..8 Mounting bracket c/w ground connection stud.

2.5 DEADBREAK JUNCTION

.1 The 600 A, 15 kV Class Deadbreak Junction shall provide four15.2/26.3 kV deadbreak interfaces that are internally busedtogether and meet all requirements of IEEE Standard 386 -Separable Insulated Connector Systems.

.2 The junction shall have a continuous solid current path ofall copper alloy. It shall have an ablative arc interrupterwith excellent de-ironizing properties. The body shall bemolded of high quality peroxide cured EPDM insulation andhave a molded semiconductive peroxide molded semiconductiveperoxide cured EPDM shield.

.3 The deadbreak junction shall be available with an adjustablestainless steel bracket for mounting at various operatingangles on flat or curved surfaces. Stainless steel "U" strapsshall be available for direct wall mounting.



.4 Production Tests:.1 Tests shall be conducted in accordance with IEEEStandard 386.

.1 AC 60 Hz 1 Minute Withstand - 45 kV.

.2 Minimum corona extinction Voltage level - 21.5 kV.

.3 Physical Inspection.

.4 Periodic Dissection.

.5 Periodic X-ray Analysis.

.5 Voltage Ratings and Characteristics:.1 Standard Voltage Class: 25 kV..2 Phase-to-Phase: 28 kV..3 Maximum Rating Phase-to-Ground: 16.2 kV..4 AC 60 Hz 1 Minute Withstand: 45 kV..5 DC 15 Minute Withstand: 84 kV..6 BIL and Full Wave Crest: 140 kV..7 Minimum corona extinction Voltage Level: 21.5 kV.

.6 Current Ratings and Characteristics:.1 Continuous: 600 A rms..2 Fault Closure: 25,000 A rms symmetrical for 10 cycles.

.7 Enclosure:.1 Welded tamper resistant construction, free standing selfsupporting for pad mounting..2 Panel grade sheet steel 11 gauge..3 Heavy duty stainless steel hinges and hinge pins..4 Doors full height gasketted, door handle and padlockpocket..5 Weather and corrosion resistant finish..6 Provisions for cable entrance through the bottom..7 Bushing wells and inserts on terminals to accommodate600 A elbow terminator on underground cable.

.8 Parking stand and 15 kV stand off insulator adjacent to eachcable termination position to accommodate parking of primarycable elbow terminator when disconnected from bushing.

.9 15 kV, 600 A, protective caps for all unused bushings.

.10 Ground ring for each cable termination to allow convenientgrounding of concentric neutral cable.

.11 Finish four step baked on, phosphetizing, conductive zinccoating, corrosion resistant primer, polyester top coat CEMAY Green.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Install primary cables in ducts in accordance with Section 2605 43.01 - Installation of Cables in Trenches and in Ducts.

.2 Terminate cables with elbow connectors or, cable terminatorsas indicated and where necessary to complete the primarydistribution system. Install all cable terminations tomanufacturers specifications and instructions.

.3 Install sealing kit on all cable entry points to load breakelbows.

.4 All cables to be tested after installation.

.5 Qualifications: electrical work related to terminations to becarried out by qualified, licensed high voltage linemen andhigh voltage apprentice who hold valid Electrical Contractorlicense or apprentices as per the conditions of ProvincialAct respecting manpower vocational training andqualification..1 Employees registered in provincial apprentices program:permitted, under direct supervision of qualified licensedelectrician, to perform specific tasks..2 Permitted activities: determined based on training levelattained and demonstration of ability to perform specificduties.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Wire and Box Connectors Page 1Storage Facility (0-1000 V)Garrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 Materials and installation for wire and box connectors.




1.3 REFERENCES

.1 Canadian Standards Association (CSA International).1 CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 18.1-13, Metalic Outlet Boxes..2 CAN/CSA-C222.2 No. 18.3-12, Conduit, Tubing and CableFittings..3 CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 18.4-04(R2013), Hardware for theSupport of Conduit, Tubing and Cable..4 CSA C22.2 No. 65-13, Wire Connectors.

.2 Electrical and Electronic Manufacturers' Association ofCanada (EEMAC).1 EEMAC 1Y-2, 1961 Bushing Stud Connectors and AluminumAdapters (1200 Ampere Maximum Rating).

.3 National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)


.1 Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance withSection 01 74 21 - Construction/Demolition Waste Managementand Disposal.

.2 Remove from site and dispose of all packaging materials atappropriate recycling facilities.

.3 Collect and separate for disposal paper, plastic, polystyreneand corrugated cardboard packaging material in appropriateon-site bins for recycling in accordance with WasteManagement Plan.

.4 Divert unused wiring materials from landfill to metalrecycling facility as approved by DCC Representative.


New ULCV & EATV Wire and Box Connectors Page 2Storage Facility (0-1000 V)Garrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Pressure type wire connectors to: CSA C22.2 No. 65, withcurrent carrying parts of copper alloy sized to fit copperconductors as required.

.2 Fixture type splicing connectors to: CSA C22.2 No. 65, withcurrent carrying parts of copper alloy sized to fit copperconductors 10 AWG or less.

.3 Clamps or connectors for flexible conduit, as required to:CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 18.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Remove insulation carefully from ends of conductors and:.1 Install mechanical pressure type connectors and tightenscrews with appropriate compression tool recommended bymanufacturer. Installation shall meet secureness tests inaccordance with CSA C22.2 No. 65-13..2 Install fixture type connectors and tighten. Replaceinsulating cap.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Wires and Cables Page 1Storage Facility (0-1000 V)Garrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL



.2 Section 26 05 20 - Wire and Box Connectors - 0 - 1000 V.

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 CSA C22.2 No. 0.3-09(R2014), Test Methods for ElectricalWires and Cables.

1.3 PRODUCT DATA




.2 Collect and separate plastic, paper packaging and corrugatedcardboard in accordance with Waste Management Plan.

.3 Fold up metal banding, flatten and place in designated areafor recycling.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 BUILDING WIRES

.1 Conductors: stranded for 10 AWG and larger. Minimum size: 12AWG.

.2 Copper conductors: size as indicated, with minimum 600 Vinsulation of chemically cross-linked thermosettingpolyethylene material rated RW90 in interior buildinglocations.

.3 Copper conductors: size as indicated, with minimum 600 Vinsulation of chemically cross-linked thermosettingpolyethylene material rated RWU90 in underground conduits.



.4 Use GTF wiring in lighting fixtures.

.5 Do not use A/C 90. Use single conductor RW90 in flexibleconduit.

.6 Conductors shall be one continuous piece. Conductors aresized based on the 75°C column of Table 2 of the CEC. Do notuse butt splices in order to obtain the 90°C rating in Table2.

2.2 CONTROL CABLES

.1 Cable type in accordance with equipment system supplierrecommendation where indicated on drawings, or identified inequipment specification section.

.2 600 V type: 14 AWG stranded annealed copper conductors, withRW90 (x-link) insulation. Use RWU 90 for underground feeders.

.3 Use of A/C 90 cables is not permitted. Use single conductorRW90 in flexible conduit.

2.3 TECK 90 CABLE

.1 Cable: in accordance with Section 26 05 00 - Common WorkResults - For Electrical and to CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 131. Ratedfor hazardous location in areas classified as hazardous.

.2 Conductors:.1 Grounding conductor: copper..2 Circuit conductors: copper, size as indicated.

.3 Insulation:.1 Cross-linked polyethylene XLPE..2 Rating: 1000 V.

.4 Inner jacket: polyethylene XLPE.

.5 Armour: interlocking aluminum.

.6 Overall covering: thermoplastic polyvinyl chloride, low flamespread/low gas emission (LFS/LGE), fire retardant to CSAC22.2 No. 0.3.

.7 Fastenings:.1 One hole steel straps to secure surface cables 50 mm andsmaller. Two hole steel straps for cables larger than 50 mm..2 Channel type supports for two or more cables at 1200 mmcenters, unless noted otherwise, and as required by LocalAuthority.



.3 Threaded rods: 6 mm diameter to support suspendedchannels.

.8 Connectors:.1 Watertight, approved for TECK cable..2 Rated for hazardous location in areas classified ashazardous.

2.4 ARMOURED CABLES

.1 Conductors: insulated, copper, size as indicated.

.2 Type: AC90.

.3 Armour: interlocking type fabricated from aluminum strip.

.4 Type: ACWU90 PVC flame retardant jacket over armour for thisproject wet locations.

.5 Connectors: anti short connectors.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF BUILDING WIRES

.1 Install wiring as follows:.1 In conduit systems in accordance with Section 26 05 34 -Conduits, Conduit Fastenings and Conduit Fittings..2 In underground ducts in accordance with Section 26 0543.01 - Installation of Cables in Trenches and Ducts.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF CONTROL CABLES

.1 Install control cables in conduit system in accordance withSection 26 05 34 - Conduits, Conduit Fastenings and ConduitFittings and in underground ducts.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF TECK90 CABLES

.1 Terminate cables in accordance with Section 26 05 20 - Wireand Box Connector - 0-1000 V.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Connectors and Page 1Storage Facility TerminationsGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 Section 26 05 14 - Power Cable (15000 V).

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 CSA Group.1 Ontario Electrical Safety Code, 2015..2 CSA C22.2 No.41-13, Grounding and Bonding Equipment(Tri-National Standard, with NMX-J-590ANCE and UL 467)..3 CSA C22.2 No.65-13, Wire connectors (Tri-NationalStandard, with UL 486A-486B NMX-J-543-ANCE).



.2 Product Data:.1 Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed productliterature and data sheets for connectors and terminationsand include product characteristics, performance criteria,physical size, finish and limitations.

.3 Certificates: obtain inspection certificate of compliancecovering high voltage stress from inspection authority andinclude it with maintenance manuals.


.1 Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 00 - CloseoutSubmittals

.2 Operation and Maintenance Data: submit operation andmaintenance data for connectors and terminations forincorporation into manual.






.3 Storage and Handling Requirements:.1 Store materials in accordance with manufacturer'srecommendations in clean, dry, well-ventilated area..2 Store and protect connectors and terminations fromnicks, scratches, and blemishes..3 Replace defective or damaged materials with new.

.4 Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse of pallets,crates, padding, and packaging materials as specified inConstruction Waste Management Plan in accordance withSection 01 74 21 - Construction/Demolition Waste Managementand Disposal.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONNECTORS AND TERMINATIONS

.1 Copper long barrel compression connectors to CSA C22.2 No.65as required sized for conductors.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

.1 Verification of Conditions: verify that conditions ofsubstrate previously installed under other Sections orContracts are acceptable for connectors and terminationsinstallation in accordance with manufacturer's writteninstructions..1 Visually inspect substrate in presence of DCCRepresentative..2 Inform DCC Representative of unacceptable conditionsimmediately upon discovery..3 Proceed with installation only after unacceptableconditions have been remedied and after receipt of writtenapproval to proceed from DCC Representative.

3.2 INSTALLATION

.1 Install stress cones, terminations, and splices in accordancewith manufacturer's instructions.

.2 Bond and ground as required to CSA C22.2 No.41.



3.3 CLEANING



.3 Waste Management: separate waste materials for reuse andrecycling in accordance with Section 01 74 21 -Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal 01 4715 - Sustainable Requirements: Construction..1 Remove recycling containers and bins from site anddispose of materials at appropriate facility.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Grounding - Primary Page 1Storage FacilityGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 Section 26 05 22 - Connectors and Terminations.

.2 Section 26 41 00.01 - Primary Lightning Arresters.

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 CSA-C22.2 No. 41-13, Grounding and Bonding Equipment(Tri-national standard, with NMX-J-590-ANCE and UL467).



.2 Product Data:.1 Provide manufacturer's printed product literature,specifications and datasheet and include productcharacteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finishand limitations.

.3 Quality assurance submittals: provide in accordance withSection 01 45 00 - Quality Control..1 Manufacturer's Instructions: provide manufacturer'swritten installation instructions and special handlingcriteria, installation sequence, cleaning procedures andmaintenance procedures.






PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Rod electrodes: copper clad steel, 19 mm diameter by 3 m longunless noted otherwise on drawings.

.2 Conductors: bare, stranded, medium-hard drawn (MHD), size No.4/0 AWG and 2/0 AWG for ground bus, electrodeinterconnections, metal structures, gradient control mats,transformers, switchgear, motors, ground connections (referto drawings).

.3 Conductors: pvc insulated coloured green, stranded tinnedsoft annealed copper wire, size No. 4 AWG for grounding cablesheaths, raceways, pipe work, screen guards, switchboards,potential transformers.

.4 Conductors: pvc insulated coloured green, stranded tinnedsoft annealed copper wire No. 10 AWG for grounding meter andrelay cases.

.5 Bolted removable test links.

.6 Accessories: non-corroding, necessary for complete groundingsystem, type, size material as indicated, including:.1 Grounding and bonding bushings..2 Protective type clamps..3 Bolted type conductor connectors..4 Thermit welded type conductor connectors..5 Bonding jumpers, straps..6 Pressure wire connectors..7 Other accessories as required.

.7 Wire connectors and terminations: to Section 26 05 22 and asindicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Install continuous grounding system including, electrodes,conductors, connectors and accessories as indicated and torequirements of local authority having jurisdiction.

.2 Install connectors and cadweld in accordance withmanufacturer's instructions.



.3 Protect exposed grounding conductors during and afterconstruction.

.4 Make buried connections, and connections to electrodes,structural steel work, using copper welding by thermitprocess permanent mechanical connectors to ASNI/IEEE 837.

.5 Use mechanical connectors for grounding connections toequipment provided with lugs.

.6 Use No. 4/0 AWG MHD bare copper cable for main ground bus andNo. 2/0 AWG MHD bare copper cable for taps on risers frommain ground bus to equipment.

.7 Use tinned copper conductors for aluminum structures.

3.2 ELECTRODE INSTALLATION

.1 Install ground rod plate electrodes. Make groundingconnections to station equipment.

.2 Install ground rod electrodes at transformer and switchgearlocations.

.3 Make special provision for installing electrodes that willgive acceptable resistance to ground value, where rock orsand terrain prevails.

3.3 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

.1 Install grounding connections as indicated to typical stationequipment including: metallic water main, neutral. Noncurrent carrying parts of: transformers, generators, motors,circuit breakers, current transformers. Cable sheaths,raceways, pipe work, screen guards, switchboards, potentialtransformers. Meter and relay cases. Outdoor lighting.

.2 Ground hinged doors to main frame of electrical equipmentenclosure with flexible jumper.

3.4 NEUTRAL GROUNDING

.1 Connect transformer neutral and distribution neutral togetherusing 1000 V insulated conductor to one side of ground testlink, the other side of the test link being connecteddirectly to main station ground. Ensure distribution neutraland neutrals of potential transformers and service banks arebonded directly to transformer neutral and not to mainstation ground.



.2 Interconnect electrodes and neutrals at each groundinginstallation.

.3 Connect neutral of station service transformer to mainneutral bus with tap of same size as secondary neutral.

.4 Ground transformer tank with continuous conductor from tankground lug through connector on ground bus to primaryneutral. Connect neutral bushing at transformer to primaryneutral in same manner.

3.5 GROUNDING MANHOLES

.1 Install conveniently located grounding stud, electrode, sizestranded copper conductor in each manhole.

.2 Install ground rod with lug for grounding connection in eachmanhole so that top projects through bottom of manhole.

3.6 CABLE SHEATH GROUNDING

.1 Bond single conductor, metallic sheathed cables together atone end only. Break sheath continuity by inserting insulatingsleeves in cables using special isolating transformer.

.2 Use No. 6 AWG flexible copper wire soldered, not clamped, tocable sheath.

.3 Connect bonded cables to ground with No. 2/0 AWG copperconductor.


.1 Perform tests in accordance with Section 26 05 00 - CommonWork Results For Electrical.

.2 Engage an independent testing agent to inspect grounding andperform ground resistance test before backfill.

.3 Perform earth loop test and resistance tests using methodappropriate to site conditions and to approval of DCCRepresentative and local authority having jurisdiction.

.4 Perform test before energizing electrical system.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Grounding - Secondary Page 1Storage FacilityGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL




.2 Section 26 05 00 - Common Work Results for Electrical.

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 Ontario Electrical Safety Code, 2015.




.3 Collect and separate for disposal paper plastic polystyrenecorrugated cardboard packaging material in appropriateon-site bins for recycling in accordance with WasteManagement Plan.

.4 Divert unused metal materials from landfill to metalrecycling facility as approved by DCC Representative.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT

.1 Clamps for grounding of conductor: size as required toelectrically conductive underground water pipe (whereavailable).

.2 Copper conductor: minimum 6 m long for each concrete encasedelectrode, bare, stranded, tinned, soft annealed, size asindicated.



.3 Rod electrodes: copper clad steel 19 mm dia by 3 m long.

.4 Grounding conductors: bare stranded copper, tinned, softannealed, size as indicated.

.5 Insulated grounding conductors: stranded copper, greeninsulation colour, type TW, size as indicated.

.6 Ground bus: copper, size as indicated, complete withinsulated supports, fastenings, connectors.

.7 Non-corroding accessories necessary for grounding system,type, size, material as indicated, including but notnecessarily limited to:.1 Grounding and bonding bushings..2 Protective type clamps..3 Bolted type conductor connectors..4 Thermit welded type conductor connectors..5 Bonding jumpers, straps..6 Pressure wire connectors..7 Clamps for raised floor pedestal.

.8 Groundwater grounding electrode: as per detail on drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


.1 Install complete permanent, continuous grounding systemincluding, ground water grounding electrode, ground rodelectrodes, conductors, connectors, accessories. Provide agreen insulated bonding conductor in all raceways andconduits carrying circuits rated 50 V and above.

.2 Install connectors in accordance with manufacturer'sinstructions.

.3 Protect exposed grounding conductors from mechanical injury.

.4 Make buried connections, and connections to structural steel,electrodes, using Thermit exothermic welded connections toANSI/IEEE 80-2000, Substation Grounding.

.5 Use mechanical connectors for grounding connections toequipment provided with lugs.

.6 Soldered joints not permitted.



.7 Install bonding wire for flexible conduit, connected at bothends to grounding bushing, solderless lug, clamp or cupwasher and screw. Neatly cleat bonding wire to exterior offlexible conduit.

.8 Install separate ground conductor to outdoor lightingstandards.

.9 Connect building structural steel to ground by welding copperto steel.

.10 Make grounding connections in radial configuration only, withconnections terminating at single ground point. Avoid loopconnections.

.11 Ground secondary service pedestals.

3.2 ELECTRODES

.1 Install rod electrodes and make grounding connections.

.2 Bond separate, multiple electrodes together.

.3 Use size 4/0 AWG ground conductors for connections toelectrodes.

.4 Make special provision for installing electrodes that willgive acceptable resistance to ground value where rock or sandterrain prevails. Ground as indicated.

3.3 SYSTEM AND CIRCUIT GROUNDING

.1 Install system and circuit grounding connections to neutralof secondary 600/347 V system.

3.4 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

.1 Install grounding connections to typical equipment includedin, but not necessarily limited to following list. Serviceequipment, transformers, switchgear, duct systems, frames ofmotors, motor control centres, starters, control panels,building steel work, distribution panels, outdoor lighting.

3.5 GROUNDING BUS

.1 Install copper grounding bus mounted on insulated supports onwall of electrical rooms.



.2 Ground items of electrical equipment in electrical rooms toground bus with individual bare stranded groundingconductors, size as indicated.

3.6 COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS

.1 Install grounding connections for communication system asfollows:.1 Bond and ground all cabinets, outlet boxes, conduits,riser cable, cable tray, and racks in accordance with CECSection 10 and manufacturer's instructions.



.2 Perform ground continuity and resistance tests using methodappropriate to site conditions and to approval of DCCRepresentative and local authority having jurisdiction overinstallation.

.3 Perform tests before energizing electrical system.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Hangers and Supports for Page 1Storage Facility Electrical SystemsGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL








.4 Divert unused metal materials from landfill to metalrecycling facility as approved by DCC Representative.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUPPORT CHANNELS

.1 U shape, size 41 x 41 mm, 2.5 mm thick, surface mounted orsuspended.

2.2 SUPPORT KIT FOR RAISED FLOOR WIRE BASKET CABLE TRAY

.1 Shall work with all standard raised access floor.

.2 Shall support 300 mm width by 105 mm height wire basket cabletray.

.3 Install with simple tools, no hardware needed.

.4 Heavy-duty legs have multiple mounting holes for almostinfinite height adjustment.



.5 Attachment clips secure installation to raised access floorpedestal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Secure equipment to solid masonry, tile and plaster surfaceswith nylon insert anchors.

.2 Secure equipment to poured concrete with expandable inserts.

.3 Secure equipment to hollow masonry walls or suspendedceilings with toggle bolts.

.4 Secure surface mounted equipment with twist clip fasteners toinverted T bar ceilings. Ensure that T bars are adequatelysupported to carry weight of equipment specified beforeinstallation.

.5 Support equipment, conduit or cables using clips, springloaded bolts, cable clamps designed as accessories to basicchannel members.

.6 Fasten exposed conduit or cables to building construction orsupport system except frameless building metal contouredpanels using straps..1 One-hole steel straps to secure surface conduits andcables 50 mm and smaller..2 Two-hole steel straps for conduits and cables largerthan 50 mm..3 Beam clamps to secure conduit to exposed steel work.

.7 Fasten conduits and equipment to frameless building metalcontoured panels as detailed on drawings.

.8 Suspended support systems..1 Support individual cable or conduit runs with 6 mm diathreaded rods and spring clips..2 Support 2 or more cables or conduits on channelssupported by 6 mm dia threaded rod hangers where directfastening to building construction is impractical.

.9 For surface mounting of two or more conduits use channels at1.5 m on centre spacing.

.10 Provide metal brackets, frames, hangers, clamps and relatedtypes of support structures where indicated or as required tosupport conduits.



.11 Ensure adequate support for raceways and cables droppedvertically to equipment where there is no wall support.

.12 Do not use wire lashing or perforated strap to support orsecure raceways or cables.

.13 Do not use supports or equipment installed for other tradesfor conduit or cable support except with permission of othertrade and approval of DCC Representative.

.14 Install fastenings and supports as required for each type ofequipment cables and conduits, and in accordance withmanufacturer's installation recommendations.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Splitters, Junction, Pull Page 1Storage Facility Boxes and CabinetsGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL




.1 Submit shop drawings and product data for cabinets inaccordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.





PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES

.1 Telecomms service: welded steel construction with full sized,hinged door with latch and suitable for surface mounting.

.2 General Service: Welded steel construction with screw-on flatcovers for surface mounting.

.3 Covers with 25 mm minimum extension all around, forflush-mounted pull and junction boxes.

2.2 CABINETS

.1 General purpose CSA Type 2 for Indoor use and CSA Type 3R forExterior use.


New ULCV & EATV Splitters, Junction, Pull Page 2Storage Facility Boxes and CabinetsGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES INSTALLATION

.1 Install pull boxes in inconspicuous but accessible locations.Do not install boxes higher than 760mm above ceilings.

.2 Install communications pull boxes so as not to exceed 30 m ofconduit run between pull boxes and 2 90 degree bends.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

.1 Provide equipment identification in accordance with Section26 05 00 - Common Work Results For Electrical.

.2 Install size 2 engraved nameplate on enclosure coverindicating system name, voltage and phase.

.3 Install size 2 engraved nameplate on enclosure coverindicating panel and circuit numbers as appropriate.

END OF SECTION

National Defence UNCLASSIFIED Outlet Boxes, Section 26 05 32

New ULCV & EATV Conduit Boxes and Fittings Page 1Storage FacilityGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 REFERENCES





PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 OUTLET AND CONDUIT BOXES GENERAL

.1 Size boxes in accordance with Ontario Electrical Safety Code,2015.

.2 102 mm square or larger outlet boxes as required for specialdevices.

.3 Gang boxes where wiring devices are grouped.

.4 Blank cover plates for boxes without wiring devices.

.5 347 V outlet boxes for 347 V switching devices.

.6 Combination boxes with barriers where outlets for more thanone system are grouped.

.7 Outlet boxes for communication shall be double gang, minimum100mm x 100mm x 70mm deep.



2.2 SHEET STEEL OUTLET BOXES

.1 Electro-galvanized steel single and multi gang flush deviceboxes for flush installation, minimum size 76 x 50 x 38 mm oras indicated. 102 mm square outlet boxes when more than oneconduit enters one side with extension and plaster rings asrequired.

.2 102 mm square or octagonal outlet boxes for lighting fixtureoutlets.

.3 102 mm square outlet boxes with extension and plaster tilerings for flush mounting devices in finished plaster walls.

2.3 MASONRY BOXES

.1 Electro-galvanized steel masonry single and multi gang boxesfor devices flush mounted in exposed block walls.

2.4 CONCRETE BOXES

.1 Electro-galvanized sheet steel concrete type boxes for flushmount in concrete with matching extension and plaster ringsas required.

2.5 CONDUIT BOXES

.1 Cast FS or FD feraloy boxes with factory-threaded hubs andmounting feet for surface wiring of switches and receptacle.

2.6 FLOOR BOXES

.1 Concrete tight electro-galvanized sheet steel floor boxeswith adjustable finishing rings to suit floor finish withbrass faceplate. Device mounting plate to accommodate shortor long ear duplex receptacles. Minimum depth: 73 mm forreceptacles and communication outlets

.2 Adjustable, watertight, concrete tight, cast floor boxes withopenings drilled and tapped for 27 mm conduit. Minimum size;73 mm deep.

2.7 FITTINGS - GENERAL

.1 Steel bushing with ground when indicated and connectors withnylon insulated throats.



.2 Knock-out fillers to prevent entry of debris.

.3 Conduit outlet bodies for conduit up to 32 mm and pull boxesfor larger conduits.

.4 Double locknuts and insulated bushings on sheet metal boxes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Support boxes independently of connecting conduits.

.2 Fill boxes with paper, sponges or foam or similar approvedmaterial to prevent entry of debris during construction.Remove upon completion of work.

.3 For flush installations in gypsum mount outlets flush withfinished wall using tile rings to permit wall finish to comewithin 6 mm of opening.

.4 For flush installations in block wall, mount outlets flushwith finished wall to permit wall finish to come within 3 mmof opening.

.5 Provide correct size of openings in boxes for conduit.Reducing washers are not allowed.

END OF SECTION

National Defence UNCLASSIFIED Conduits, Section 26 05 34

New ULCV & EATV Conduit Fastenings and Page 1Storage Facility Conduit FittingsGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 REFERENCES

.1 Canadian Standards Association (CSA).1 CSA C22.2 No. 18.1-13, Metallic Outlet Boxes..2 CSA C22.2 No. 45.1-07(R2012), Electrical Rigid MetalConduit..3 CSA C22.2 No. 56-13, Flexible Metal Conduit andLiquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit..4 CSA C22.2 No. 83-M1985(R2013), Electrical MetallicTubing..5 CSA C22.2 No. 211.1-06(R2011), Rigid Types EB1 andDB2/ES2 PVC Conduit..6 CSA C22.2 No. 211.2-06(R2011), Rigid Types PVC(unplasticized) Conduit..7 CSA C22.2 No. 45.2-08(R2013), Electrical Rigid MetalConduit - Aluminum, Red Brass and Stainless Steel.



.2 Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste indesignated containers.

.3 Ensure emptied containers are sealed and stored safely fordisposal away from children.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUITS

.1 Rigid metal conduit: to CSA C22.2 No. 45.1(07(R2012),Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit, galvanized steel threaded.

.2 Electrical metallic tubing (EMT): to CSA C22.2 No. 83-M1985(R2013), Electrical Metallic Tubing, with couplings.



.3 Rigid pvc conduit: to CSA C22.2 No. 211.2-06(R2011), Schedule40.

.4 Flexible metal conduit: to CSA C22.2 No. 56-13. FlexibleMetal Conduit and Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduits.

.5 Epoxy coated rigid metal conduit.

2.2 CONDUIT FASTENINGS

.1 One hole steel straps to secure surface conduits 50 mm andsmaller. Two hole steel straps for conduits larger than 50mm.

.2 Beam clamps to secure conduits to exposed steel work.

.3 Channel type supports for two or more conduits at 3 m oc.

.4 Threaded rods, 6 mm dia., to support suspended channels.

2.3 CONDUIT FITTINGS

.1 Fittings: steel as manufactured for use with conduitspecified. Coating: same as conduit.

.2 Factory "ells" where 90° bends are required for 25 mm andlarger conduits excluding telecom service.

.3 Watertight connectors and couplings for EMT. Set-screws arenot acceptable.

.4 Factory "ells" are NOT permitted on communications conduit

2.4 FISH CORD

.1 Polypropylene.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Install conduits to conserve headroom in exposed locationsand cause minimum interference in spaces where conduits arerouted.

.2 Do not surface mount conduits in office type spaces.



.3 Conduits and boxes in spaces with drywall T-bar ceilingsshall be concealed in walls or above ceilings.

.4 Conduits and outlet boxes for wall mounted devices shall beconcealed for a minimum of 3 m A.F.F.

.5 Use rigid epoxy coated rigid galvanized steel conduit fortransition from underground into building, except for singleconductor cable installations.

.6 Use electrical metallic tubing (EMT) with watertightconnectors except where identified otherwise.

.7 Use Schedule 40 rigid pvc conduit in underground locations.

.8 Use flexible metal conduit for connections to motors andtransformers in dry locations. Use flexible metal conduit forfixture drops with a maximum length of 1.5 m.

.9 Use liquid tight flexible metal conduit for connections tomotors and transformers in damp, wet or corrosive locations.The maximum length of any flexible conduit shall be 1.5m.

.10 Minimum conduit size for lighting, power and control: 21 mm.Minimum conduit size for telecom: 27 mm.

.11 Bend conduit cold. Replace conduit if kinked or flattenedmore than 1/10th of its original diameter.

.12 Mechanically bend steel conduit over 21 mm dia.

.13 Field threads on rigid conduit must be of sufficient lengthto draw conduits up tight.

.14 Install fish cord in empty conduits.

.15 Remove and replace blocked conduit sections. Do not useliquids to clean out conduits.

.16 Dry conduits out before installing wire.

3.2 SURFACE CONDUITS

.1 Route parallel or perpendicular to building lines on surfacemounted u-channel supports.

.2 Locate conduits behind infrared or gas fired heaters with 1.5m clearance.

.3 Route conduits in flanged portion of structural steel.



.4 Group conduits wherever possible on suspended or surfaceu-channels supports.

.5 Do not pass conduits through structural members except asindicated.

.6 Do not locate conduits less than 75 mm parallel to steam orhot water lines with minimum of 25 mm at crossovers.

3.3 CONCEALED CONDUITS

.1 Route parallel or perpendicular to building lines.

.2 Do not install horizontal runs in masonry walls.

.3 Do not install conduits in terrazzo or concrete toppings.

3.4 CONDUITS UNDERGROUND

.1 Slope conduits to provide drainage.

.2 Waterproof joints (pvc excepted) with heavy coat ofbituminous paint.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Installation of Cables in Page 1Storage Facility Trenches and in DuctsGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 Section 26 05 14 - Power Cable (15000 V).

.2 Section 26 05 21 - Wires and Cables (0-1000V).

.3 Section 33 65 73 - Concrete Encased duct Banks and Manholes.

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 Ontario Electrical Safety Code, latest edition.

.2 Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc. (ICEA)



.2 Product Data:.1 Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed productliterature and data sheets for cables and include productcharacteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finishand limitations.




.3 Storage and Handling Requirements:.1 Store materials and in accordance with manufacturer'srecommendations in clean, dry, well-ventilated area..2 Store and protect from nicks, scratches, and blemishes..3 Replace defective or damaged materials with new.

.4 Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse of pallets,crates, padding, and packaging materials as specified inConstruction Waste Management Plan in accordance withSection 01 74 21 - Construction/Demolition Waste Managementand Disposal.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MARKERS

.1 Concrete type cable markers: 600 x 600 x 100 mm with words:cable, joint or conduit impressed in top surface, with arrowsto indicate change in direction of cable and duct runs.

.2 Polyethylene warning tape over full length of raceway route.Tape width of 75 mm with 4 mil thickness. Text on tape toread "CAUTION, BURIED ELECTRIC LINE BELOW".

.3 For telecommunication ducts orange polyethylene warning tapeover full length of raceway route. Tape width of 75 mm with 4mil thickness. Text on tape to read "CAUTION, BURIEDTELEPHONE CABLE BELOW".

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

.1 Verification of Conditions: verify that conditions ofsubstrate previously installed under other Sections orContracts are acceptable for cable installation in accordancewith manufacturer's written instructions..1 Visually inspect substrate in presence of DCCRepresentative..2 Inform DCC Representative of unacceptable conditionsimmediately upon discovery..3 Proceed with installation only after unacceptableconditions have been remedied and after receipt of writtenapproval to proceed from DCC Representative.

3.2 CABLE INSTALLATION IN DUCTS

.1 Install cables as indicated in ducts.

.2 Do not pull spliced cables inside ducts.

.3 Install multiple cables in duct simultaneously.

.4 Use CSA approved lubricants of type compatible with cablejacket to reduce pulling tension.

.5 To facilitate matching of colour coded multiconductor controlcables reel off in same direction during installation.



.6 After installation of cables, seal duct ends with ductsealing compound.

3.3 MARKERS

.1 Mark cable every 150 m along cable duct runs and changes indirection.

.2 Mark underground splices.

.3 Where markers are removed to permit installation ofadditional cables, reinstall existing markers.

.4 Lay concrete markers flat and centred over cable with topflush with finish grade.



.2 Perform tests using qualified personnel..1 Include necessary instruments and equipment.

.3 Check phase rotation and identify each phase conductor ofeach feeder.

.4 Check each feeder for continuity, short circuits and grounds..1 Ensure resistance to ground of circuits is not less than50 megohms.

.5 Pre-acceptance tests:.1 After installing cable but before splicing andterminating, perform insulation resistance test with 1000 Vmegger on each phase conductor..2 Check insulation resistance after each splice and/ortermination to ensure that cable system is ready foracceptance testing.

.6 Acceptance Tests:.1 Ensure that terminations and accessory equipment aredisconnected..2 Ground shields, ground wires, metallic armour andconductors not under test..3 High Potential (Hipot) Testing.

.1 Conduct hipot testing at percentage of originalfactory test voltage in accordance with manufacturer'sICEA recommendations.

.4 Leakage Current Testing:



.1 Raise voltage in steps from zero to maximum valuesas specified by ICEA manufacturer for type of cablebeing tested..2 Hold maximum voltage for a specified time period byICEA manufacturer..3 Record leakage current at each step.

.7 Provide DCC Representative with list of test results showinglocation at which each test was made, circuit tested andresult of each test.

.8 Remove and replace entire length of cable if cable fails tomeet any of test criteria.

3.5 CLEANING

.1 Progress cleaning: clean in accordance with Section 01 74 11- Cleaning..1 Leave Work area clean at end of each day.

.2 Final Cleaning: upon completion remove surplus materials,rubbish, tools and equipment in accordance with Section 01 7411 - Cleaning.

.3 Waste Management: separate waste materials for reuse andrecycling in accordance with Section 01 74 21 - Construction/Demolition Waste management and Disposal and Section 01 4715 - Sustainable Requirements: Construction..1 Remove recycling containers and bins from site anddispose of materials at appropriate facility.

3.6 PROTECTION

.1 Repair damage to adjacent materials caused by cablesinstallation.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Metering and Switchboard Page 1Storage Facility InstrumentsGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDED

.1 Materials, components, cabinets, instruments and installationfor metering Instruments.





.4 Section 26 05 00 - Common Work Results - For Electrical.

1.3 REFERENCES

.1 Canadian Standards Association, (CSA International).1 CAN3-C17-M84(R2015), Alternating - Current ElectricityMetering..2 CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 61010-2-032-04(R2014), SafetyRequirements for Electrical Equipment for Measurement,Control, and Laboratory Use - Part 2-032: ParticularRequirements for Hand-Held and Hand-Manipulated CurrentSensors for Electrical Measurement and Test.


.1 Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance withsection 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.

.2 Meter: indicate meter wiring connections, accuracy, recordingparameters, electrical characteristics, dimensions, paneldrilling dimensions and include cutout template.

.3 Transformers: indicate electrical data for current andpotential transformers.

1.5 WASTE MANAGEMENT DISPOSAL





.3 Collect and separate for disposal packaging material inappropriate on-site bins for recycling in accordance withWaste Management Plan.




.1 Provide hardcopy operating instruction manual and copy ofprogramming software on CD.


.1 Appropriate potential transformers and current transformersshall be provided for sensing signals for the instruments.

.2 Installation of instruments and ancillary equipment, andwiring connections to all electrical circuits, instrumentsand terminal strips for external devices shall comply withall Local and Ontario Electrical Safety Code, 2015.

.3 All communication equipment shall comply and be installed inaccordance with FCC, CSA, DOC, CE, and/or with any otherrelevant governing bodies.

.4 Provide shorting switches for CT's and disconnect switchesfor PT's as indicated.

.5 Meter shall be c/w Ethernet capability.

1.8 LEED DOCUMENTATION

.1 Submit a LEED Material Submittal Form, as included in Section01 47 15 - Sustainable Requirements: Construction to identifyrecycled content, regional content or VOC emission whenrequired by Submittal Requirements.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 The instrument shall have the following features:.1 Form factor:

.1 Remote display model: Large, backlit remote FSTNLCD display with a resolution of 320x240 pixels.

.2 Current inputs: The instrument shall have five currentinputs (I1, I2, I3, I4, I5). All current inputs shallprovide:

.1 Dielectric withstand of 2500 VAC RMS, 60 Hz for 1minute..2 500 A RMS for 1 second, non-recurring..3 Fault capture to 50 A RMS or 70 A peak.

.3 Voltage inputs: The instrument shall have five voltageinputs (V1, V2, V3, V4, V ref). The voltage inputs shall becapable of measuring from 0 to 347 Vrms (line-to-neutral) orfrom 0 to 600 Vrms (line-to-line). All voltage inputs shallprovide:

.1 Dielectric withstand of 2500 VAC RMS, 60 Hz for 1minute..2 Overload protection of 1500 VAC RMS continuous..3 Fault capture to 1400 V peak.

.4 Power supply: 85-240 VAC (±10%), 47 to 63 Hz / 110-330VDC (±10%). Typical burden is 10 VA, maximum burden is 20 VA.Ride-through (minimum) is 100ms (6 cycles @ 60 Hz @ 96 VAC),or 200ms (12 cycles @ 60 Hz @ 120 VAC) or 800ms (48 cycles @60 Hz @ 240 VAC). Dielectric withstand is 2300 VAC RMS, 60 Hzfor 1 minute..5 System frequency - 60 Hz..6 Communications port: The PMAC instrument supportsmulti-port, multi-protocol communications. The followingcommunications card options are available..7 Standard communications card: RS-232/RS-485 (COM1),RS-485 (COM2), front optical port (COM3, available onintegrated display model only)..8 Provide a BACnet interface MSTP in accordance withDivision 25.

.2 The instrument shall have Power Quality functionality:.1 High-speed voltage transient detection, capture andrecording: ITIC (CBEMA), IEEE..2 Voltage sag/swell detection: Complies with therecommendations stated in IEEE 1159..3 Harmonics.

.3 The instrument shall have the ability to perform thefollowing functions without the need for separate software:



.1 Determine statistical indicators of power qualityparameters that include but are not limited to flicker, dipsand swells, harmonics and interharmonics, in accordance withthe EN50160 standards, "Voltage characteristics ofelectricity supplied by public distribution systems"..2 Evaluate power quality statistically in accordance withIEC 61000-4-7, IEC 61000-4-15, CBEMA/ITIC, IEEE 1159 and IEEE519..3 Make available the statistical indicators of powerquality on the front panel display, or via communicationsover any supported protocol (ION, Modbus RTU, Modbus TCP, DNP3.0, IEC870-5), or via an analog transducer interface..4 Internally record the value of statistical indicators ofpower quality at regular intervals, and make these datarecords available through communications or on the frontpanel display so that it is easy to determine the trend ofthese power quality statistics..5 Monitor the value of any statistical indicator of powerquality (present, predicted, average or otherwise manipulatedvalue) with an absolute or relative setpoint. When suchsetpoint is exceeded, issue an alert via e-mail or pager, orenable control via a local interface to mitigation equipmentor control systems through relays and analog or digitaloutputs.

.4 The instrument shall be capable of calculating the followinginformation for any reading at 1-second intervals:.1 Thermal demand calculations for any parameter, withuser-programmable length of demand period to match localutility billing method..2 Sliding window demands for any parameter withuser-programmable length of demand period and number ofsub-periods to match local utility billing method..3 Predicted demand calculations of sliding window demandparameters, with user-programmable predictive responsecharacteristics..4 Minimum value for any measured parameter..5 Maximum value for any measured parameter..6 The instrument shall support direct display of allparameters on the front panel in user programmable groups,using plain language labels. Simultaneous access to allparameters shall be available through any communication port.

.5 The instrument shall be field programmable as follows:.1 Basic parameters: voltage input scale, voltage mode(Wye, Delta, single phase), current input scale, auxiliaryinput and output scales, and communications setup parametersshall be programmable from the front panel..2 All basic parameters described above, plus additionalsetpoint/relay and data log setup parameters shall beprogrammed via the communications port using a portable orremotely located computer terminal.



.3 Custom configuration of all operating parameters shallbe possible using ION modules..4 Programming through a computer shall be secured by userID and password..5 Programming through the front panel shall be secured bypassword.

.6 The instrument shall include non-volatile (NVRAM) memory asfollows:.1 Memory shall be used to store a time-stamped event logwith the following features:

.1 Supports at least 500 events.

.2 The number of records in the log shall beprogrammable..3 Each event shall be recorded with the date and timeof the event, the cause and effect of the event, and thepriority of the event..4 All events relating to setpoint activity, relayoperation and self-diagnostics shall be recorded in theevent log..5 Time stamps have a resolution of 1 millisecond..6 Time stamps shall be synchronized to within 100 msbetween devices on the same serial communicationsmedium..7 Minimum event recording response time shall be ½cycle (8.3ms) for high speed events and 1 second forother events..8 The priority of setpoint events shall beprogrammable.

.7 The instrument shall provide extensive Time of Use (TOU)functionality to store and monitor up to 20 years of seasonalrate schedules.

.8 The instrument shall provide setpoint control of internalrecording mechanisms and all digital output relays asfollows:.1 24 programmable setpoints shall be provided, each ofwhich can respond to out-of-range and alarm conditions forany measured parameter.

.1 Neutral/ground current.

.2 kW or kVAR forward or reverse.

.3 kVA.

.4 Power factor lag or lead.

.5 Frequency.

.6 kW or current demand on any phase or total oraverage..7 Individual harmonic distortion on any phase input..8 Total harmonic distortion on any phase input..9 Total even or odd harmonic distortion on any phaseinput..10 Any maximum or minimum value.



.11 Multiple energy accumulation conditions.

.12 Phase reversal.

.13 Pulse counts levels.

.14 Any digital input conditions.

.15 Any internally derived value..2 High speed sag/swell detection of voltage disturbancesshall be available on a cycle-by-cycle basis, providing theduration of the disturbance, and the minimum, maximum, andaverage value of the voltage for each phase during thedisturbance. Disturbances less than one cycle in durationshall be detected..3 Any setpoint condition shall control any number ofdigital output relays in an AND or an OR configuration, usingpulse mode or latch mode operation, for control and alarmpurposes. Digital outputs shall also be operable remotely viaany communications port..4 Any setpoint condition shall provide breaker trip relayoperation..5 Any setpoint condition shall be trigger an internal dataor waveform recorder..6 Consecutive high speed alarm conditions and triggersshall be supported on a cycle-by-cycle basis with no "dead"time between events (i.e. no need for a rearming delay timebetween events)..7 Any logical combination of any number of availablesetpoint conditions shall be used to control any internal orexternal function or events..8 Digital outputs shall support pulse output relayoperation for kWh total, kWh imported, kWh exported, kVARhtotal, kVARh imported, kVARh exported, and kVAh value.

2.2 INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS

.1 Potential Transformers (PT's):.1 Primary voltage: 600V..2 Secondary voltage: 120V..3 Ratio: 5:1..4 Frequency: 60 Hz..5 Power factor: 0.7..6 Continuous thermal rating: 200VA..7 700V insulation class transformer..8 Primary and secondary terminals: compression type withslot screws accessible from the top of the transformer..9 Core: high-grade, grain-oriented steel, wound core..10 Primary and secondary coils: wound from coated copper..11 Housing: polyurethane.

.2 Current Transformers (CT's):.1 Ratio: 200:5A..2 Frequency: 60 Hz..3 VA rating: 15 VA.



.4 600V insulation class transformer.

.5 Terminals: brass studs with one flatwasher, lockwasher,and regular nut..6 2 wire CT..7 Metering accuracy: 1.2 B0.9.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Install meter, CT's, PT's as indicated on drawing.

3.2 TESTING

.1 Test to verify that all components of the system areinstalled as required.

.2 Test and commission all components.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Lighting Control Devices Page 1Storage Facility - PhotoelectricGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES




.2 Product Data:.1 Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed productliterature and data sheets for photoelectric devices andinclude product characteristics, performance criteria,physical size, finish and limitations.




.3 Storage and Handling Requirements:.1 Store materials off ground indoors in dry location andin accordance with manufacturer's recommendations in clean,dry, well-ventilated area..2 Store and protect photoelectric devices from nicks,scratches, and blemishes..3 Protect metal accessories and trim from being bent ordamaged..4 Replace defective or damaged materials with new.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SITE LIGHTING CONTROL

.1 Photocell Integral to site lighting fixtures.

2.2 PHOTOELECTRIC LIGHTING CONTROL

.1 Exterior mounting.

.2 Capable of switching 347 V lighting loads.

.3 Voltage variation: plus or minus 10%

.4 Temperature range: minus 40 to plus 40 degrees C.

.5 Rated for 5000 operations.

.6 Fail-safe circuit complete when relay is de-energized.

.7 Switching ON lights at 70 lux.

.8 Switching OFF lights at 100 lux.

.9 CSA Type 3R enclosure.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

.1 Verification of Conditions: verify conditions of substratespreviously installed under other Sections or Contracts areacceptable for lighting control device installation inaccordance with manufacturer's written instructions..1 Visually inspect substrate in presence of DCCRepresentative..2 Inform DCC Representative of unacceptable conditionsimmediately upon discovery..3 Proceed with installation only after unacceptableconditions have been remedied and after receipt of writtenapproval to proceed from DCC Representative.

3.2 INSTALLATION

.1 Install photoelectric controls in accordance withmanufacturer's written instructions and to CSA C22.1.



3.3 CLEANING




3.4 PROTECTION


.2 Repair damage to adjacent materials caused by lightingcontrol devices installation.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Lighting Control Devices - Page 1Storage Facility Low VoltageGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 Section 26 50 00 - Lighting.

.2 Section 26 05 00 - Common Work Results for Electrical.

1.2 REFERENCES




.2 Product Data:.1 Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed productliterature and data sheets for lighting controls and includeproduct characteristics, performance criteria, physical size,finish and limitations.

.3 Shop Drawings:.1 Submit drawings stamped and signed by a professionalengineer..2 Indicate on drawings:

.1 Complete assembly.

.2 Contact surfaces.

.3 Construction features.

.4 Wiring diagrams.


.1 Submit project Waste Management Plan WasteReduction Workplan highlighting recycling and salvagerequirements..2 Submit calculations on end-of-project recyclingrates, salvage rates, and landfill rates demonstratingthat 50 75% of construction wastes were recycled orsalvaged.





.2 Operation and Maintenance Data: submit operation andmaintenance data for network lighting controls forincorporation into manual.




.3 Storage and Handling Requirements:.1 Store materials off ground indoors in dry location andin accordance with manufacturer's recommendations in clean,dry, well-ventilated area..2 Store and protect network lighting controls from nicks,scratches, and blemishes..3 Replace defective or damaged materials with new.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

.1 System shall be composed of stand-alone relay packs and roomcontrollers receiving signals from low voltage controldevices including dual technology vacancy sensors, lowvoltage momentary on/off switches nd low voltage dimmerswitches.

.2 Relay packs and room controllers must interface directly withLED luminaires such that only CAT-5e or low voltage cablingis required to interconnect luminaires with controlcomponents (sensors and switches).

.3 Power for devices shall come from relay packs or roomcontrollers.

.4 All switching and dimming shall take place using the deviceslocated in the zone itself to facilitate system robustnessand minimize wiring requirements.



.5 Operating modes should be utilized only in manners consistentwith local energy codes. Refer to drawings for sequences ofoperation.

2.2 INDIVIDUAL DEVICE SPECIFICATIONS

.1 Dual Technology Low Voltage Vacancy Sensors:.1 Sensors shall detect the presence of human activitywithin the desired space and control the off function of thelights..2 Sensors shall utilize dual technology to detect vacancyand turn off lighting in the controlled space afteradjustable time-out period..3 Dual technology sensors shall have one of its twotechnologies not require motion to detect occupancy.Acceptable dual technology includes PIR/Microphonics (alsoknown as Passive Dual Technology or PDT) or PIR/ultrasonic..4 Sensors shall be available with zero, one, or twointegrated Class 1 switching relays. Load ratings shall be 15A at 347 V. Relays shall be dry contacts..5 Communication and Class 2 low voltage power shall bedelivered to each device via standard CAT-5e low voltagecabling with RJ-45 connectors or standard low voltage cablingas required for compatibility with relay pack or roomcontroller controlling the space..6 Wall switch sensors shall recess into single-gang switchbox and fit a standard GFI opening..7 Wall switch sensors shall be white..8 Shall be compatible with relay pack or room controllercontrolling the space.

.2 Low Voltage Passive Infrared (PIR) Vacancy Sensor:.1 Sensors shall detect the presence of human activitywithin the space and control the off function of the lights..2 Sensors shall utilize PIR technology to detect vacancyand turn off lighting in the controlled space after anadjustable time-out period.

.3 Relay Packs:.1 Incorporate one or more Class 1 relays as required andcontribute low voltage power to the rest of the system..2 Rated for 347 VAC, 60 Hz..3 Wiring to low voltage sensors shall be standard lowvoltage or CAT-5 wiring..4 Consist of a self contained transformer and relaysystem..5 Capable of switching 15A minimum at 347 V upon receivinga signal from a low voltage sensor or momentary switch.

.4 Room Controller:



.1 Rated for 347V, 60 Hz input.

.2 Incorporates one or more Class 1 relays as required andcontribute long voltage power. to the rest of the system..3 Capable of switching 15 A minimum at 347 V uponreceiving a signal from a low voltage sensor or switch..4 Capable of 0-10 V dimming and 3-way 0-10 V dimming..5 Wiring to sensors shall be CAT-5e cabling.

PART 3 - EXECUTION



3.2 INSTALLATION

.1 Locate and install equipment in accordance withmanufacturer's recommendations and as indicated on drawings.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY

.1 Site tests:.1 Perform tests in accordance with Section 26 05 00 -Common Work Results For Electrical.

.2 Actuate control units in presence of DCC Representative todemonstrate lighting circuits are controlled as designated.

.3 Schedule site visits to review work.

3.4 CLEANING



END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Dry Type Transformers Page 1Storage Facility up to 600 V PrimaryGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 Materials and components for dry type transformers up to 600V primary, equipment identification and transformerinstallation.




.3 Section 26 05 00 - Common Work Results For Electrical.

1.3 REFERENCES

.1 Canadian Standards Association (CSA International).1 CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 47-13, Air-Cooled Transformers (DryType)..2 CSA C9-02(R2011), Dry-Type Transformers.

1.4 PRODUCT DATA





.3 Collect and separate for disposal paper, plastic,polystyrene, and corrugated cardboard packaging material inappropriate on-site bins for recycling in accordance withWaste Management Plan.





PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TRANSFORMERS

.1 Use transformers of one manufacturer throughout project.

.2 Design:.1 Type: ANN..2 3 Phase, KVA rating as identified on drawings, 600 Vinput, 208/120 V output, 60 Hz..3 Voltage taps: 4-2.5%, 2 FCAN, 2 FCBN..4 Insulation: Class 220 degrees C, 115 degrees Ctemperature rise..5 Windings: copper.6 Basic Impulse Level (BIL): standard..7 Hipot: standard..8 Average sound level: standard.9 Impedance at 17 degrees C: 4 to 4.5 percent..10 Enclosure: CSA Type 2 (sprinkler proof), removable metalfront panel..11 Mounting: floor or wall as indicated on drawings..12 Finish: ANSI 61 Grey (UL50)..13 Balanced impedance..14 Balanced no load output voltages..15 Cancellation of third harmonics under balancedconditions..16 Three coils common core construction..17 Transformers shall conform to CAN/CSA-C802 MaximumLosses for Distribution, Power and Dry-Type Transformers..18 Delta/Wye windings, T Type windings are not acceptable..19 K13 rating..20 Vibration isolation pads.


.1 Provide equipment identification in accordance with Section26 05 00 - Common Work Results - Electrical.

.2 Label size: 5.

.3 Nameplate wording: per Electrical Single line drawingidentification.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Mount dry type transformers above 75 kVA on floor.

.2 Mount dry type transformers on walls in locations indicatedon drawings.

.3 Ensure adequate clearance around transformer for ventilation.

.4 Install transformers in level upright position.

.5 Remove shipping supports only after transformer is installedand just before putting into service.

.6 Loosen isolation pad bolts until no compression is visible.

.7 Make primary and secondary connections in accordance withwiring diagram.

.8 Energize transformers after installation is complete.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Pad Mounted, Liquid Page 1Storage Facility Filled Medium VoltageGarrison Petawawa, ON Transformer 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL




.3 Concrete pad: Section 03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete.

.4 Installation of anchors: Section 03 30 00 Cast-in-PlaceConcrete.


1.2 REFERENCES

.1 CSA C227.4-06(R2011) Three-Phase, Pad-Mounted DistributionTransformers With Separable Insulated High VoltageConnectors.

.2 CAN/CSA-C802.1-13 Minimum Efficiency Values for Liquid-FilledDistribution Transformers.

.3 IEEE 386-2006, Separable Insulated Connector Systems forPower Distribution Systems above 600V.

.4 CAN/CSA-C50-14, Insulating Oil, Electrical for Transformersand Switches.

.5 CAN/CSA-C2.1-06(R2011), Single-Phase and Three-Phase LiquidFilled Distribution Transformers.


.1 Submit to DCC Representative standard factory testcertificates of each transformer in accordance withCAN/CSA-C2-M91(R2003).

1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS


.2 Indicate:.1 Anchoring method and dimensioned foundation template..2 Dimensioned cable entry locations..3 Dimensioned cable termination height.



.3 Identified internal and external component layout on assemblydrawing.

.4 Insulating liquid capacity.

.5 Submit primary fuse and secondary breaker time-currentcharacteristics.


.1 Provide operation and maintenance data for pad mounteddistribution transformers for incorporation into manualspecified in Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.

.2 Include insulating liquid maintenance data.

1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT

.1 Three-phase, dead-front, pad-mounted distribution transformerto CAN/CSA-C227.4, complete with integral oil insulated highvoltage gang-operated switch with visual break, options andaccessories to form complete factory assembled, selfcontained, steel fabricated unit for mounting on concretepad.

.2 The pad-mount transformer assembly shall be tamper-proofconstruction including three distinct access compartmentsseparated from each other with minimum 12 gauge steelpartitions.

.3 The three access compartments shall include the switchcompartment, the high voltage compartment, and fuse/lowvoltage bushing compartment. All access to interiorcomponents shall be through tamper-proof doors secured withshrouded bolts and locking facilities. Wind stops and doorstays to be supplied to keep doors in 110 degrees openposition.



.4 The switch shall be interlocked with fuse/low voltage bushingcompartment such that there is no access to the fuses unlessthe switch is in de-energized position, and the switch cannotbe placed in the closed position until the fuse/low voltagebushing compartment has been closed.

.5 High voltage bushing wells and inserts for connection todistribution system through separable insulated connectorsfor dead front operation.

.6 Separable insulated connectors.

.7 Spade type low voltage terminals.

.8 Connectors for primary and secondary cables.

.9 Primary protection: oil immersed, dual element bay-o-net typefuses in series with current limiting fuses inside the tanks.

.10 Load break inserts for elbow connectors.

.11 Parking stand for each high voltage bushing.

.12 Terminations and connectors suitable for radial feed.

2.2 TRANSFORMER CHARACTERISTICS

.1 Primary voltage: 12.47/7.2 kV wye connected, 3 phase, 60 Hz,solidly grounded.

.2 Secondary voltage: 600/347 V, wye connected, 3 phase, 4 wire,neutral grounded.

.3 Capacity: as indicated on drawings.

.4 Basic impulse level: 125 kV.

.5 The transformer shall have a 65°C temperature rise insulationsystem. The winding temperature shall not exceed 65°C averageand 80°C hot spot.

.6 Impedance: not less than 3% not more than 4%.

.7 Transformer efficiency to meet or exceed C802.1-00 minimumefficiency values for liquid-filled distributiontransformers.

.8 Winding: copper.



2.3 SWITCH CHARACTERISTICS

.1 Two position, isolating loadbreak switch that is oil, immersein its own compartment. The switch shall have a short timerating of 16 kA for one second and have a basic impulse levelof 170 kV BIL. The switch shall be rated 630 A at 15.5 kV(phase to phase voltages). The switch shall comply with IEEEC37.71.

2.4 VOLTAGE TAPS

.1 Four-2.5% taps, 2-FCAN, 2-FCBN.

2.5 TAP CHANGER

.1 Internally operated off-load tap changer, with provision forpadlocking on 3 phase units located in cable entrancecompartment.

2.6 INSULATION LIQUID

.1 The insulation liquid shall be supplied with the transformerand shall be a product of 100% edible seed oils with anyenhancing additives of food grade quality.

2.7 ACCESSORIES

.1 Liquid temperature thermometer with one set of contacts.

.2 Liquid level gauge with one set of contacts.

.3 Pressure relief device.

.4 25 mm drain valve.

.5 25 mm filler plug.

.6 Voltage selector Tap switch.

.7 Spare fuses.

2.8 GROUNDING

.1 Copper grounding bus size 50 mm x 6 mm x length oftransformer.

.2 Connectors for grounding conductors size as indicated.



.3 Doors and non-current carrying metal parts shall be bonded tothe tank.

2.9 FINISH

.1 Finish exterior of unit in accordance with Section 26 05 00 -Common Work Results For Electrical.



.2 Nameplate showing information in accordance with CSAC227.4-06.

2.11 WARNING SIGNS

.1 Provide warning signs in accordance with Section 26 05 00 -Common Work Results For Electrical.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

.1 Check factory made connections of transformer unit formechanical security and electrical continuity.

.2 Check transformer insulating liquid for correct quantity andspecification according to manufacturer's instructions. Checkfor leakage of insulating liquid.

3.2 INSTALLATION

.1 Ensure concrete vault is fully cured before transformer isinstalled.

.2 Set and secure transformer unit in place, rigid, plumb andsquare.

.3 Make connections.

.4 Connect transformer unit ground bus to system ground.



.5 Ensure care is taken to prevent contamination of liquid andcomponents when field filling transformers.

.6 Use only metal hose when field-filling transformer with oil.Never, under any circumstances, use rubber hose.

.7 Set taps to produce rated secondary voltage at no-load.



.2 Carry out following insulation tests using megger with 20,000megohm scale and resulting insulation resistance corrected tobase of 20°C..1 High voltage to ground with secondary grounded forduration of test..2 Low voltage to ground with primary grounded for durationof test..3 High to low voltage.

.3 Inspect primary and secondary connections for tightness andfor signs of overheating.

.4 Inspect and clean bushings and insulators.

.5 Check oil level and temperature indicators.

.6 Set transformer taps to rated voltage as specified.

.7 Inspect for oil leaks and excessive rusting.

.8 Inspect oil level.

.9 Check fuses for correctness of type and size.

.10 Check for grounding and neutral continuity between primaryand secondary circuits of transformer.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Panelboards Breaker Type Page 1Storage FacilityGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 Materials and installation for standard and custom breakertype panelboards.





.4 Section 26 28 16.02 - Moulded Case Circuit Breakers.

.5 Section 26 42 01 - Surge Protection Device Up to 600V.

1.3 REFERENCES

.1 Canadian Standards Association (CSA International).1 CSA C22.2 No. 29-15, Panelboards and EnclosedPanelboards.

.2 Underwriters Laboratories (UL).1 UL 1449 3rd Edition - Transient Voltage SurgeSuppressors.

1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS


.2 Drawings to include electrical detail of panel, branchbreaker type, quantity, ampacity and enclosure dimension.






.3 Collect and separate for disposal paper plastic, polystyreneand corrugated cardboard packaging material in appropriateon-site bins for recycling in accordance with WasteManagement Plan.

.4 Divert unused metal and wiring materials from landfill tometal recycling facility approved by DCC Representative.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PANELBOARDS

.1 Panelboards: to CSA C22.2 No. 29-15 and product of onemanufacturer..1 Install circuit breakers in panelboards before shipment..2 In addition to CSA requirements manufacturer's nameplatemust show fault current that panel including breakers hasbeen built to withstand..3 Enclosure CSA Type 2 with sprinkler drip shield forinterior panels..4 Enclosure CSA Type 4X for exterior panels.

.2 250 and 600 V panelboards: bus and breakers rated for(symmetrical) interrupting capacity as indicated.

.3 Sequence phase bussing with odd numbered breakers on left andeven on right, with each breaker identified by permanentnumber identification as to circuit number and phase.

.4 Panelboards: mains, number of circuits, and number and sizeof branch circuit breakers as indicated.

.5 Two keys for each panelboard and key panelboards alike.

.6 Copper bus with neutral of same ampere rating as mains.

.7 Mains: suitable for bolt-on breakers.

.8 Trim with concealed front bolts and hinges.

.9 Trim and door finish: baked grey enamel as per colourschedule.

.10 Include SPD on panels as indicated on drawings.

.11 Service entrance rated where indicated on drawings.



2.2 BREAKERS

.1 Breakers: to Section 26 28 16.02 - Moulded Case CircuitBreakers.

.2 Breakers with thermal and magnetic tripping in panelboardsexcept as indicated otherwise.

.3 Main breaker: separately mounted on top or bottom of panel tosuit cable entry. When mounted vertically, down positionshould open breaker.

.4 Lock-on devices for 10% of 15 to 30 A breakers installed asindicated. Turn over unused lock-on devices to DCCRepresentative.

.5 Multi-pole breakers with ties on handles are not acceptable.



.2 Nameplate for each panelboard size 3 engraved as indicated.

.3 Nameplate for each circuit in distribution panelboards size 2engraved as indicated.

.4 Complete circuit directory with typewritten legend showinglocation and load of each circuit.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Locate panelboards as indicated and mount securely, plumb,true and square, to adjoining surfaces.

.2 Install surface mounted panelboards on plywood backboards(minimum 19 mm thickness) in accordance with Section 06 10 10- Rough Carpentry. Where practical, group panelboards oncommon backboard.

.3 Mount panelboards to height specified in Section 26 05 00 -Common Work Results - Electrical or as indicated.

.4 Connect loads to circuits.



.5 Connect neutral conductors to common neutral bus withrespective neutral identified.

.6 Connect ground conductors to ground bus.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Wiring Devices Page 1Storage FacilityGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 Switches, receptacles, wiring devices, cover plates and theirinstallation.





.4 Section 26 42 01 - Surge Protection Device Up to 600V.

1.3 REFERENCES

.1 Canadian Standards Association (CSA International).1 CSA C22.2 No. 42-10, General Use Receptacles, AttachmentPlugs and Similar Devices..2 CSA C22.2 No. 42.1-13, Cover Plates for Flush-MountedWiring Devices..3 CSA-C22.2 No.55-M1986(R2012), Special Use Switches..4 CSA-C22.2 No.111-10, General-Use Snap Switches(Bi-national standard, with UL 20, twelfth edition).









.4 Divert unused metal and wiring materials from landfill tometal recycling facility as approved by DCC Representative.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RECEPTACLES

.1 Duplex receptacles, CSA type 5-20R, 125 V, 20 A, U ground,to: CSA C22.2 No. 42 with following features:.1 Ivory urea moulded housing..2 Suitable for No. 10 AWG for back and side wiring..3 Break-off links for use as split receptacles..4 Eight back wired entrances, four side wiring screws..5 Triple wipe contacts and rivetted grounding contacts.

.2 Receptacles of one manufacturer throughout project.

.3 Acceptable materials: Hubbell, P&S or Leviton Cat. No. 5362.

2.2 SWITCHES

.1 20 A, 347 V single pole switches to: CSA-C22.2 No. 55 andCSA-C22.2 No. 111.

.2 Manually operated general purpose ac switches with followingfeatures:.1 Terminal holes approved for No. 10 AWG wire..2 Silver alloy contacts..3 Urea or melamine moulding for parts subject to carbontracking..4 Suitable for back and side wiring..5 Ivory toggle.

.3 Acceptable Materials: Hubbell, Leviton, Pass and Seymour.

2.3 GFI DEVICE

.1 Specification grade ground fault circuit interruptor (GFI)duplex receptacle with Test and Reset operations, CSA Type5-20R, 125 V, U-ground colour: Ivory.

2.4 COVER PLATES

.1 Cover plates for wiring devices to: CSA C22.2 No. 42.1.

.2 Cover plates from one manufacturer throughout project.



.3 Sheet steel utility box cover for wiring devices installed insurface-mounted utility boxes.

.4 Stainless steel, vertically brushed, 1 mm thick cover platesfor wiring devices mounted in flush-mounted outlet box infinished areas.

.5 Cast cover plates for wiring devices mounted insurface-mounted FS or FD type conduit boxes.

.6 Weatherproof double lift spring-loaded cast aluminum coverplates, complete with gaskets for duplex receptacles asindicated.

.7 Weatherproof spring-loaded cast aluminum cover platescomplete with gaskets for single receptacles or switches.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Receptacles:.1 Install receptacles in gang type outlet box when morethan one receptacle is required in one location..2 Mount receptacles at height in accordance with Section26 05 00 - Common Work Results - For Electrical..3 Mount receptacles at heights and as detailed on drawingsat selected locations.

.2 Switches:.1 Install single throw switches with handle in "UP"position when switch closed..2 Install switches in gang type outlet box when more thanone switch is required in one location..3 Mount toggle switches at height in accordance withSection 26 05 00 - Common Work Results - For Electrical.

.3 Cover plates:.1 Protect stainless steel cover plate finish with paper orplastic film until painting and other work is finished..2 Install suitable common cover plates where wiringdevices are grouped..3 Do not use cover plates meant for flush outlet boxes onsurface-mounted boxes.

.4 Nameplates:.1 Install engraved size 1 nameplate on wall immediatelyabove wiring device.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Fuses - Low Voltage Page 1Storage FacilityGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 REFERENCES

.1 Canadian Standards Association (CSA).1 CSA C22.2 No.248.12-11, Low Voltage Fuses Part 12: ClassR (Bi-National Standard with, UL 248-12 (1st Edition).

1.3 SHOP DRAWING AND PRODUCT DATA



.1 Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance withSection 01 74 21 - Construction/Demolition Waste ManagementAnd Disposal, and with the Waste Reduction Workplan.




1.5 DELIVERY AND STORAGE

.1 Ship fuses in original containers.

.2 Do not ship fuses installed in switches.

.3 Store fuses in original containers in storage cabinet.




New ULCV & EATV Fuses - Low Voltage Page 2Storage FacilityGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

.2 Six spare fuses of each type and size installed up to andincluding 600 A.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FUSES GENERAL

.1 Fuses: product of one manufacturer for entire project.

2.2 FUSE TYPES

.1 Class J fuses (formerly HRCI- J)..1 Type J1, time delay, capable of carrying 500% of itsrated current for 10 s minimum..2 Type J2, fast acting.

2.3 FUSE STORAGE CABINET

.1 Fuse storage cabinet, manufactured from 2.0 mm thick aluminum750 mm high, 600 mm wide, 300 mm deep, hinged, lockable frontaccess door finished in accordance with Section 26 05 00 -Common Work Results For Electrical.

.2 Locate cabinet in Main Electrical Room.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Install fuses in mounting devices immediately beforeenergizing circuits.

.2 Ensure correct fuses fitted to physically matched mountingdevices.

.3 Ensure correct fuses fitted to assigned electrical circuit.

.4 Install spare fuses in fuse storage cabinet.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Moulded Case Circuit Page 1Storage Facility BreakersGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL




.3 Section 26 24 16.01 - Panelboards Breaker Type.

.4 Section 26 29 10 - Motor Starters to 600 V.

1.2 PRODUCT DATA


.2 Include time-current characteristic curves for breakers withampacity of 100 A and over.



.2 Collect and separate plastic, paper and corrugated cardboardin accordance with Waste Management Plan.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 BREAKERS GENERAL

.1 Moulded-case circuit breakers and ground-faultcircuit-interrupters to CSA C22.2 No. 5.

.2 Bolt-on moulded case circuit breaker: quick- make,quick-break type, for manual and automatic operation withtemperature compensation for 40 degrees C ambient.

.3 Common-trip breakers: with single handle for multi-poleapplications.


New ULCV & EATV Moulded Case Circuit Page 2Storage Facility BreakersGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

.4 Magnetic instantaneous trip elements in circuit breakers tooperate only when value of current reaches setting. Tripsettings on breakers with adjustable trips to range from 3-8times current rating.

.5 Circuit breakers with interchangeable trips as indicated.

.6 Circuit breakers to have minimum symmetrical rms interruptingcapacity rating. Same as associated board. Series rating forbreakers is not acceptable.

2.2 THERMAL MAGNETIC BREAKERS

.1 Moulded case circuit breaker to operate automatically bymeans of thermal and magnetic tripping devices to provideinverse time current tripping and instantaneous tripping forshort circuit protection.

2.3 OPTIONAL FEATURES

.1 Include as indicated on drawings;.1 Shunt trip..2 Auxiliary switch..3 On-Off locking device..4 Handle mechanism.

2.4 ENCLOSURE

.1 Locate and mount in enclosure as indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Install circuit breakers in panels as indicated.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Ground Fault Circuit Page 1Storage Facility Interrupters - Class "A"Garrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 Section 26 27 26 - Wiring Devices.

1.2 PAYMENT

.1 Payment for field testing of ground fault equipment performedby equipment manufacturer in accordance with Section 01 29 83- Payment Procedures: Testing Laboratory Services.

1.3 REFERENCES

.1 CSA International.1 CAN/CSA C22.2 No.144-M91(R2011), Ground Fault CircuitInterrupters.

.2 National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).1 NEMA PG 2.2-1999(R2009), Application Guide for GroundFault Protection Devices for Equipment.



.2 Product Data:.1 Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed productliterature and data sheets for ground fault circuitinterrupters and include product characteristics, performancecriteria, physical size, finish and limitations.

.3 Test and Evaluation Reports: submit test report for fieldtesting of ground fault equipment to DCC Representative andcertificate that system as installed meets criteriaspecified.



.2 Operation and Maintenance Data: submit operation andmaintenance data for ground fault circuit interrupters forincorporation into manual.






.3 Storage and Handling Requirements:.1 Store materials off ground indoors and in accordancewith manufacturer's recommendations in clean, dry,well-ventilated area..2 Store and protect ground fault circuit interrupters fromnicks, scratches, and blemishes..3 Replace defective or damaged materials with new.

.4 Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return ofpackaging materials as specified in Construction WasteManagement Plan Waste Reduction Workplan in accordance withSection 01 74 21 - Construction/ Demolition Waste Managementand Disposal.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Equipment and components for ground fault circuitinterrupters (GFCI): to CAN/CSA C22.2 No.144 NEMA PG 2.2.

.2 Components comprising ground fault protective system to be ofsame manufacturer.

2.2 BREAKER TYPE GROUND FAULT INTERRUPTER

.1 Single or two pole ground fault circuit interrupter for 1phase circuit c/w test and reset facilities. Rating asindicated on drawings.

2.3 GROUND FAULT PROTECTOR UNIT

.1 Self-contained with 15/20 A, 120 V circuit interrupter andduplex U-ground receptacle, CSA Type 5-20R, colour ivory,complete with:.1 Solid state ground sensing device..2 Facility for testing and reset..3 Matching cover plate.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

.1 Verification of Conditions: verify that conditions ofsubstrate previously installed under other Sections orContracts are acceptable for ground fault circuitinterrupters installation in accordance with manufacturer'swritten instructions..1 Visually inspect substrate in presence of DCCRepresentative..2 Inform DCC Representative of unacceptable conditionsimmediately upon discovery..3 Proceed with installation only after unacceptableconditions have been remedied and after receipt of writtenapproval to proceed from DCC Representative.

3.2 INSTALLATION

.1 Do not ground neutral on load side of ground fault relay.

.2 Pass phase conductors including neutral through zero sequencetransformers.

.3 Connect supply and load wiring to equipment in accordancewith manufacturer's recommendations.



.2 Arrange for field testing of ground fault equipment byContractor before commissioning service.

.3 Demonstrate simulated ground fault tests.

3.4 CLEANING


.2 Final Cleaning: upon completion remove surplus materials,rubbish, tools and equipment in accordance withSection 01 74 11 - Cleaning.




END OF SECTION

National Defence UNCLASSIFIED Disconnect Section 26 28 23

New ULCV & EATV Switches - Fused And Page 1Storage Facility Non-FusedGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL





1.2 PRODUCT DATA



.1 Separate recycle waste materials in accordance with Section01 74 21 - Construction/Demolition Waste Management andDisposal.

.2 Collect and separate for plastic, paper packaging andcorrugated cardboard in accordance with Waste ManagementPlan.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DISCONNECT SWITCHES

.1 Fusible, non-fusible, and horsepower rated disconnectswitches with CSA Type 1 or Type 3R enclosures, sizes asindicated for interior disconnect switches.

.2 Fusible, non-fusible, and horsepower rated disconnectswitches with CSA Type 4X enclosures, sizes as indicated forexterior disconnect switches.

.3 Provision for padlocking in off switch position by threelocks.

.4 Mechanically interlocked door to prevent opening when handlein ON position.

National Defence UNCLASSIFIED Disconnect Section 26 28 23

New ULCV & EATV Switches - Fused And Page 2Storage Facility Non-FusedGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

.5 Fuses: size as indicated, in accordance with Section 26 2813.01 - fuses - Low Voltage Fuses.

.6 Fuseholders: relocatable and suitable without adaptors, fortype and size of fuse indicated.

.7 Quick-make, quick-break action.

.8 ON-OFF switch position indication on switch enclosure cover.

2.2 FUSES

.1 HRC Class J, time delay.



.2 Indicate name of load controlled on size 2 nameplate.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Install disconnect switches complete with fuses ifapplicable.

.2 Test disconnect switch operation in accordance withmanufacturer's recommendations. Monitor load statusconcurrent with testing.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Contactors Page 1Storage FacilityGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 Materials and installation for contactors for system voltagesup to 600 V.





.4 Section 26 29 03 - Control Devices.

1.3 REFERENCES

.1 Canadian Standards Association (CSA International).1 CSA C22.2 No. 14-13, Industrial Control Equipment.

1.4 PRODUCT DATA



.1 Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance withSection 01 74 21 - Construction/Demolition Waste ManagementAnd Disposal.





New ULCV & EATV Contactors Page 2Storage FacilityGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONTACTORS

.1 Contactors: to CSA C22.2 No. 14.

.2 Electrically held-type, permanent magnet latch type, ormechanically held type as indicated with control pilotdevices as indicated. Rated for type of load controlled. Halfsize contactors not accepted.

.3 Complete with auxiliary contacts as required.

.4 Include the following options in cover as indicated:.1 Red indicating light..2 Green indicating light..3 Stop-Start pushbutton..4 Hand-Off-Auto selector switch..5 On-Off selector switch.

.5 Control transformer: in accordance with Section 26 29 03 -Control Devices, mounted in contactor enclosure.

.6 Contactors used to control electric-discharge lighting loadsshall have a current rating of not less than twice theconnected load.



.2 Size 2 nameplate indicating name of load controlled asindicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Install contactors and connect auxiliary control devices.

.2 Test operations of contactors in accordance withmanufacturer's recommendations. Monitor indicating lights andload status concurrent with testing.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Control Devices Page 1Storage FacilityGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 Materials and installation for industrial control devicesincluding pushbutton stations, control and relay panels.





.4 Section 26 29 01 - Contactors.

1.3 REFERENCES

.1 Canadian Standards Association (CSA International).1 CSA C22.2 No. 14-13, Industrial Control Equipment.

.2 National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)..1 NEMA ICS 1-2001 (R2008), Industrial Control and Systems:General Requirements.

1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS


.2 Include schematic, wiring, interconnection diagrams.


.1 Submit to DCC Representative one copy of test results.








PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 AC CONTROL RELAYS

.1 Control Relays: to CSA C22.2 No. 14-05 and NEMA ICS 1.

.2 Universal pole type: electrically held with 4 poles,convertible from NO to NC by changing wiring connections.Coil rating: 120 V, 5 VA. Contact rating: 120 V, 10 A.

2.2 RELAY ACCESSORIES

.1 Standard contact cartridges: normally-open - convertible tonormally-closed in field.

2.3 OPERATOR CONTROL STATIONS

.1 Enclosure: CSA Type 4, surface mounting with control devicesas indicated.

2.4 PUSHBUTTONS

.1 Heavy duty Oil tight. Operator flush type. Black, with 1-NOand 1-NC contacts rated at 10 A, AC, labels as indicated.Stop pushbuttons coloured red with provision for padlockingin depressed position and labelled "EMERGENCY STOP".

2.5 SELECTOR SWITCHES

.1 Maintained, 3 position labelled as indicated heavy duty oiltight, operators standard, contact arrangement as indicated,rated 120 V, 10 A, AC.



2.6 INDICATING LIGHTS

.1 Heavy duty Oil tight, LED type, lens colour: as indicated,supply voltage: 120 V, lamp voltage: 120 V, labels asindicated, push-to-test.

2.7 CONTROL AND RELAY PANELS

.1 CSA Type 2 sheet steel enclosure with hinged padlockableaccess door and sprinkler shield, labels, as indicated,factory installed and wired to identified terminals.

2.8 CONTROL CIRCUIT TRANSFORMERS

.1 Single phase, dry type.

.2 Primary: 600 V, 60 Hz ac.

.3 Secondary: 120 V, AC.

.4 Rating: As required.

.5 Secondary and primary fuse rating as required.

.6 Close voltage regulation as required by magnet coils.

2.9 INDICATING LIGHT

.1 Non-hazardous location area: 120V, 40W lamp, flashing beaconlight with integral warning horn rated at 85dB @ 3 meters,polycarbonate lens, colour as indicated.

2.10 SOLID STATE TIMING RELAYS

.1 Construction: AC operated electronic timing relay withsolid-state timing circuit to operate output contact. Timingcircuit and output contact completely uncapsulated to protectagainst vibration, humidity and atmospheric contaminants.

.2 Operation: as required.

.3 Potentiometer: self contained to provide time intervaladjustment.

.4 Supply voltage: 120 V, AC, 60 Hz.

.5 Temperature range: minus 20 degrees C to 60 degrees C.



.6 Output contact rating: maximum voltage 300 V AC or DC.Current: 5A.

.7 Timing ranges: as required.

2.11 INTRINSICALLY SAFE RELAYS

.1 Intrinsically safe switch amplifier, rated Class I, Zone 1,Gr. IIA and IIB, T3 hazardous location.

.2 Digital input from float switches.

.3 Analog input (if required) from level transducer.

.4 The input circuit electrically isolated from thenon-intrinsic safe circuits up to a peak voltage of 300 V.

2.12 ALARM INDICATING LIGHT

.1 Heavy duty, LED type, steady on, polycarbonate lens colourred, suitable for exterior mounting.

.2 Protective wire guard.

2.13 HOUR METER

.1 Electronic tamperproof AC hour meter for recording pumpsoperating time.

.2 Electromechanical indicator to store accumulated hours, 6digits display in format 99999,9, accuracy +/-0.02, operatingvoltage 120 V, front panel mounting.

2.14 GROUND FAULT PROTECTION

.1 Ground fault protection to measure the ground leakage currentof an electrical installation and interrupt the power supplyif the ground fault current exceeds set value.

.2 Solid state ground fault relay with characteristics:.1 Supply 120 V, 60 Hz..2 Fault current detection: selectable in a range of 1 to30 A..3 Time delay: selectable in a range of instantaneous to4.5 sec..4 Auxiliary contacts as indicated, rated 5A, 120 V.

.3 Sensor:



.1 Compatible with ground fault relay.

.2 Type: toroids, closed.

.3 Voltage: 600 V and 208 V.

.4 Ratio: as required.

.5 Short circuit withstand: 65 kA.

2.15 CURRENT TRANSFORMER (CT)

.1 Single phase current transformer, C100 accuracy, ratio asrequired.

2.16 POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER (PT)

.1 Single phase potential transformer, 600-120 V, rating asrequired, 0.3 WXY accuracy.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Install control devices and interconnect as indicated and asrecommended by equipment manufacturer.



.2 Depending upon magnitude and complexity, divide controlsystem into convenient sections, energize one section at timeand check out operation of section.

.3 Upon completion of sectional test, undertake group testing.

.4 Check out complete system for operational sequencing.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Motor Starters Page 1Storage Facility To 600 VGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL




.3 Section 26 29 03 - Control Devices.

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 Electrical and Electronic Manufacturers Association of Canada(EEMAC).1 EEMAC E14.1; Industrial Controls and Systems Standard;latest edition.



.2 Indicate:.1 Mounting method and dimensions..2 Starter size and type..3 Layout of identified internal and front panelcomponents..4 Enclosure types..5 Wiring diagram for each type of starter..6 Interconnection diagrams.


.1 Provide operation and maintenance data for motor starters forincorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00 -Closeout Submittals.

.2 Include operation and maintenance data for each type andstyle of starter.

1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS


.2 Provide listed spare parts for each different size and typeof starter:



.1 3 contacts, stationary.

.2 3 contacts, movable.

.3 2 contacts, auxiliary.

.4 2 control transformers.

.5 2 operating coil.

.6 4 fuses.

.7 20% indicating lamp bulbs used.





PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Starters: to EEMAC E14.1 Industrial Controls and SystemsStandard.

2.2 MANUAL MOTOR STARTERS

.1 Single and three phase manual motor starters of size, type,rating, and enclosure type as indicated, with components asfollows:.1 Switching mechanism, quick make and break..2 One overload heater, manual reset, trip indicatinghandle.

.2 Accessories:.1 Toggle: standard labelled as indicated..2 Indicating light: standard type and colour..3 Locking tab to permit padlocking in "ON" or "OFF"position.



2.3 MOTOR CIRCUIT PROTECTORS (MCP)

.1 Moulded case circuit breaker to operate automatically bymeans of magnetic tripping devices to provide instantaneoustripping for short circuit protection. Adjustable range from700% to 1700% of motor full load amps.

2.4 FULL VOLTAGE MAGNETIC STARTERS

.1 Combination with motor circuit protector magnetic of size,type, rating and enclosure type as indicated with componentsas follows:.1 Contactor solenoid operated, rapid action type..2 Solid state motor overload protective device in eachphase, manually reset from outside enclosure..3 Phase loss protection detector for 3 phase starters withdoor mounted indicating light..4 Wiring and schematic diagram inside starter enclosure invisible location..5 Identify each wire and terminal for externalconnections, within starter, with permanent number markingidentical to diagram.

.2 Combination type starters to include motor circuit protectorwith operating lever on outside of enclosure to control motorcircuit interrupter, and provision for:.1 Locking in "OFF" position with up to 3 padlocks..2 Independent locking of enclosure door..3 Provision for preventing switching to "ON" positionwhile enclosure door open.

2.5 ACCESSORIES

.1 Hand-Off-Auto selector switch.

.2 LED type indicating lights, colour as indicated.

.3 2-N/O and 2-N/C spare auxiliary contacts unless otherwiseindicated.

.4 AC current sensor:.1 Ranges:

.1 0-5 VDC.

.2 LOW: 1 to 10A.

.3 MID: 5 to 50A.

.4 HIGH: 20 to 200A..2 Accuracy: +/- 2% of full scale..3 Repeatability: within +/- 2% of full scale over time,temperature and unit to unit.



.4 Loading error: 0.25% error when loaded with 1 megohm(0.025% with 10 megohms, etc.)..5 Frequency: 60 Hz..6 Operating Temperature: -30°C to + 70°C..7 Case: CYCOLAC (ABS) meets UL flammability rating 94V-0..8 Response time: 100 m Sec (10% to 90%)..9 Ripple: Less than 10 mV.

.5 Single phase, dry type, control transformer with primaryvoltage as indicated and 120V secondary, 100VA, complete withsecondary fuse, installed in starter.

2.6 WIRING IDENTIFICATION

.1 Provide wiring identification in accordance with Section26 05 00 - Common Work Results - Electrical.


.1 Provide manufacturer's type test certificates including shortcircuit fault damage certification up to short circuit valuesspecified under bus bracing.

.2 Manufacturer to provide proof of quality control program inaccordance with CAN/CSA-QS-9000.

2.8 FINISHES

.1 Apply finishes to enclosure in accordance with Section26 05 00 - Common Work Results For Electrical.

.2 Paint motor control centre exterior light gray and interiorswhite.



.2 Manual starter designation label, white plate, black letters,size 1, engraved as indicated.

.3 VFD's, magnetic, soft start, and combination startersdesignation label, white plate, black letters, size 3engraved as indicated.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Install starters, connect power and control as indicated.

.2 Ensure correct fuses and overload devices elements installed.


.1 Perform tests in accordance with Section 26 05 00 - CommonWork Results For Electrical and manufacturer's instructions.

.2 Operate switches, contactors to verify correct functioning.

.3 Perform starting and stopping sequences of contactors andrelays.

.4 Check that sequence controls, interlocking with otherseparate related starters, equipment, control devices,operate as indicated.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Variable Frequency Page 1Storage Facility DrivesGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL







.2 Indicate:.1 Mounting method and dimensions..2 VFD size and type..3 Layout of identified internal and front panelcomponents..4 Enclosure type..5 Wiring diagram for VFD unit..6 Interconnection diagrams..7 Warranties:

.1 Manufacturer's Warranty




.3 Collect and separate for disposal paper, plastic, polystyreneand corrugated cardboard packaging material for recycling inaccordance with Waste Management Plan.

.4 Divert unused metal and wiring materials from landfill tometal recycling facility approved by DCC Representative.

1.4 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

.1 Provide operation and maintenance data for motor VFDs forincorporation into manual specified in Section 26 05 00 -Common Work Results - For Electrical.



1.4 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

.1 Provide operation and maintenance data for motor VFDs forincorporation into manual specified in Section 26 05 00 -Common Work Results - For Electrical.

.2 Include operation and maintenance data for each type andstyle of VFD.

1.5 FACTORY TEST

.1 Perform the following tests after drive assembly:.1 Upon completion of manufacturer and assembly, the drivesshall be subjected to a complete factory test to demonstratecompliance with specified features and characteristics..2 The testing procedure shall be the manufacturer standardprocedure to assure maintenance free service..3 All equipment, devices, instrumentation, and personnelrequired to perform the tests shall be supplied by themanufacturer. Upon satisfactory completion of the test, theseller shall upon request submit two (2) certified copies ofthe test report to the buyer. Component failure duringtesting will require repeating any test associated with thefailure or modified components to demonstrate properoperation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

.1 This specification covers AC Inverter Type Variable FrequencyDrives.

.2 Variable frequency drive to accept three phase input 600 V±10%. Voltage variation of ±10% and frequency ±2 HZ.

.3 The drive shall be suitable for operation on standard NEMAdesign B motors. The drive shall have a minimum six-diodebridge rectifier on the front end to minimize the generationof electrical noise back into the line and to provide nearunity Power Factor.

.4 The drive shall include a line reactor to optimize powerquality. The line reactors shall be integral to the unit orif separate shall be installed in an enclosure housing theline reactor and drive.



.5 The drive horsepower rating shall match the driven loadhorsepower at 575 V with a speed range of 0.1 to 60 HZ forboth constant and variable torque applications. The driveshall be capable of 110% full load (continuous) with pluggingfrom full speed one direction to full speed reverse, ifrequired.

.6 Variable Torque:.1 In the event of a sustained power loss, the controlshall shut down safely without component failure. Upon returnto power, the system shall automatically return to normaloperations. In the event of a momentary power loss, thecontrol shall shut down safely without component failure.Upon return of power, the system shall automatically returnto normal operations. The drive shall be capable of startinginto a rotating motor.

2.2 PANEL MATERIAL

.1 The drive shall be housed in a CSA Type 3, enclosure.

.2 The drive shall be capable of operation under any combinationof the following conditions without mechanical or electricaldamage..1 Ambient Temperature:-10 to 40/C..2 Storage Temperature: -20 to 60/C..3 Relative Humidity: 0 to 95% Non-Condensing..4 Vibration: Acceleration at 0.5 G maximum (20-50 HZ),amplitude at 0.1 mm maximum (50-100 HZ).

2.3 TECHNICAL FEATURES

.1 Control:.1 Control System: Digital Voltage Source Sinusoidal PWMWave Form..2 Output Voltage: 3 ph, 575 V.3 Freq. Accuracy: ±0.5% of highest frequency at 25C, ±10/Cwith an option for 0.01%..4 Freq. Resolution: 0.1 HZ Operating panel input 0.03 HZAnalog input 0.1 HZ computer interface input.5 Frequency Range: 0.5 to 400 HZ adjustable by programmingfrom keypad.6 Volts per Hertz: 3 to 60HZ, V/HZ Constant Rating 60 HZand up, Voltage Constant.7 Overload Capacity: 150% for 120 seconds Current Limitcircuitry phases back voltage and frequency until currentdecreases..8 Freq. Jump: Set points as standard: setting jumpfrequency 0 to maximum frequency. Width of each set point: 0to 30HZ.



.8 Freq. Jump: Set points as standard: setting jumpfrequency 0 to maximum frequency. Width of each set point: 0to 30HZ..9 PWM Carrier Frequency: Adjustable from 500 HZ to 3000HZ. Carrier frequency to automatically adjust to a minimum of150 0HZ at 60 HZ output.

.2 The variable frequency drive system shall include a minimumsix-diode bridge converter, filter network and atransistorized inverter section. The output shall be asinusoidal wave, pulse width modulated, voltage waveform forreduced harmonic heating in the motor. Harmonics generated,either into the system or into the load, shall not exceedlevels permitted by IEEE 519-1993. The system shall includeall the necessary control circuits, synchronizing theequipment and protective devices as required by design. Thedrive unit shall be able to withstand a phase to phase shortcircuit without damage to the drive unit. The systemprotection as a minimum shall provide the following:.1 Current Limit-Adjustable from 10 to 150%.2 Electronic Motor Overload-Adjustable from 10 to 100%.3 Overcurrent - 240% IET (trips fault).4 Short Circuit - phase to phase (trips fault).5 Over Voltage - High DC Bus Voltage (trips fault).6 Under Voltage - 20% Below Line Voltage.7 Ground Fault - phase to ground (trips fault).8 Momentary Power Failure: 30 Milliseconds standard;Option 100 Milliseconds maximum.9 Burn-Out-DC Bus Fuse Protection or 3 Phase Input Fusing.10 Solid state single-phasing protection.

2.4 PROTECTIVE FEATURES

.1 A digital keypad shall be provided to program the Drive. ADigital LED display shall illustrate the following faultconditions. One common fault relay shall be provided withForm C contacts to give an external fault indication..1 Off: Inverter has no input or is stopped.2 0.0-OHZ: Ready to run.3 60.0: Output Frequency indication.4 OC1: Overcurrent during Acceleration.5 OC2: Overcurrent during Deceleration.6 OC3: Overcurrent during run.7 OCA: Overcurrent during run.8 OCL: Overload detected at startup (Load).9 OCr: Overcurrent in regenerative discharge resistor.10 OP2: Overvoltage during deceleration.11 OP: Overvoltage.12 OL: Overload.13 Olr: Overload in regenerative discharge resistor.14 OH: Overtemperature (overheat)



.14 OH: Overtemperature (overheat)

.15 EF: Ground fault

.16 E: Emergency Stop

.2 The variable frequency drive shall be configured to shut downupon opening of a remote dry contact in the event of an alarmcondition in another system.

2.5 MONITOR FUNCTIONS

.1 The Digital Display shall be able to monitor the following:.1 The drive shall display the monitoring frequency (i.e.1800 RPM)..2 The Drive shall be able to monitor all appropriateparameters..3 The drive shall have an LED on the front panel showingthat the main DC circuit capacitor is charged.

2.6 CONTROLLER

.1 The control to be a keypad type with adjustable parameters.One key to toggle between panel control and terminal control.The drive shall be able to be field resettable to theoriginal factory settings. The Digital keypad shall allow allparameters to be changed while the drive is running. The mostcommonly used functions shall be labelled on the keypad.

.2 An LCD screen shall be provided to view functions.

2.7 INPUT EQUIPMENT

.1 The drive shall be supplied with:.1 Bypass contactor..2 Isolation contactor..3 Auto bypass..4 Main disconnect switch or circuit breaker..5 Digital Keypad..6 Three Phase Fuse Protection..7 Electronic Motor Overload Protection..8 Input reactors with 5% impedance..9 Auxiliary contacts..10 dv/dt filter.

.1 Maximum peak motor terminal voltage with 300 mcable: 150% of bus voltage..2 Maximum dv/dt: 200 volts per microsecond..3 Continuous current rating: 100% RMS..4 Intermittent current rating: 150% for 1 minute..5 Maximum and minimum inverter switching frequency:900 Hz and 8 k Hz.



.5 Maximum and minimum inverter switching frequency:900 Hz and 8 k Hz..6 Nominal inverter operating frequency: 60 Hz;minimum 6 Hz; maximum: 120 Hz..7 Maximum ambient temperature: 40°C enclosed filters..8 Insertion loss: 3% of rated voltage maximum..9 Listed to UL 508 type MX and CSA No. C22.2 No.14-95.

2.8 OPERATIONAL FUNCTION

.1 Acceleration and Deceleration Time: 0.1 to 6000 Seconds (2separate acceleration and deceleration times with a choice oflinear, S or C curves).

.2 Keypad or Signal follower 4-20 mA, 0-10 VDC, 0-5 VDC standardfeature for Drive.

.3 Programmable P.I.D. Set point input.

.4 Seven Preset Speeds, including Jog, capable of remoteselection. Operation in a continuous pattern run shall alsobe a standard programmable feature.

.5 Ramp to Stop Feature (Fault causes coast to stop).

.6 Unit shall have a microprocessor which will monitor the inputand fault information as well as select the optimum number ofpulses per wave form.

.7 Drive unit shall be able to be disconnected from the load forsetup or troubleshooting.

2.9 DOOR MOUNTED OPERATOR'S DEVICES

.1 Digital Keypad and LCD screen to be provided as standardmounted on the enclosure door along with the followingdevices mounted on the enclosure door:.1 OFF - EMCS CONTROL..2 Fault/Reset Lighted Pushbutton.3 Analog Frequency Meter.4 Manual Speed Control.5 "Run" and "Stop" Indication

2.10 LOAD REACTOR/DV/DT FILTER

.1 The load reactor/dv/dt filter shall be housed in anenclosure, CSA Type 2.



.2 Rated for 600 V, 3 phase motor.

.3 Impedance: 3%.

2.11 WIRING TERMINALS

.1 Drive control terminals shall be brought out to a terminalstrip.

2.12 BACnet INTERFACE DEVICE

.1 The unit shall be provided with a BACnet interface thatpresent a series of analogue, binary and multi-state value(AV, BV, MSV) object for mapping to the EMCS. The followingminimum object are to be mapped;.1 Enable: BV input..2 % Speed: AV input..3 Min Frequency: AV input..4 Max Frequency: AV input..5 Acceleration Rate: AV input..6 Deceleration Rate: AV input..7 Run/stop status: BV output..8 Common fault: BV output..9 Output frequency: AV output..10 Output motor speed: AV output..11 kWh Meter: AV output..12 Motor Amps: AV output..13 Bypass Mode: MSV output.

2.13 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

.1 Siemens

.2 Eaton

.3 Allen-Bradley

.4 Moeller

.5 ABB

.6 Schneider

.7 Vacon



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Install drives in accordance with manufacturers installationstandards and make power connections.

.2 Connect control wiring as indicated on drawings.

.3 Perform all calibration, programming and setup operations.Demonstrate operation of VFD throughout full range and shutdown on safety conditions.

3.2 SERVICES

.1 The manufacturer shall provide the services of trainedpersonnel to assist the Contractor in the installation andstart-up of the equipment and demonstrate the operation tothe building operators.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Primary Lightning Page 1Storage Facility ArrestersGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 Materials and installation for primary lighting arresters.





1.3 REFERENCES

.1 American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/Institute ofElectrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE).1 ANSI/IEEE C62.36-2014, Standard Test Methods for SurgeProtectors Used in Low Voltage Data Communications andSignalling Circuits, Standard Test Methods.

.2 Canadian Standards Association (CSA International).1 CAN/CSA-C233.1-87(R2004), Gapless Metal Oxide SurgeArresters for Alternating Current Systems.

1.4 PRODUCT DATA



.1 Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section01 74 21 - Construction/Demolition Waste Management andDisposal.


.3 Collect and separate for disposal paper, plastic, polystyrene,corrugated cardboard and packaging material in appropriateon-site bins for recycling in accordance with Waste ManagementPlan.


New ULCV & EATV Primary Lightning Page 2Storage Facility ArrestersGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

.4 Divert unused metal and wiring materials from landfill to metalrecycling facility as approved by DCC Representative.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Arrester component parts: to ANSI/IEEE-C62.11.

.2 Arrester characteristics:.1 Distribution arrester. MOV type..2 System highest voltage line to line 12.47 kV. Ratedvoltage 9 kV. Heavy duty arrester, fault current withstandrating: 20 kA..3 MCOV (maximum continuous operating voltage): 7.65 kV..4 Outdoor type..5 Housing: polymer..6 Accessories:

.1 Ground lead disconnect.

.2 Mounting hardware and accessories.

.3 Protective cap.

.3 Elbow surge arrester (mounted in the pad mounted transformer)..1 Direct connect, dead-front, MOV type, outdoor..2 Separable elbow housing EPDM to ANSI/IEEE std. 386..3 System voltage: 12.47 kV. Rated voltage: 9 kV..4 MCOV: 7.65 kV..5 Stainless steel pulling eye.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Mount arresters inside transformer.

.2 Connect line terminals to phase conductors.

.3 From arrester ground terminal run No. 4 AWG copper ground wireto transformer ground bus.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Surge Protection Page 1Storage Facility DevicesGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 Section 26 05 28 - Grounding - Secondary.

.2 Section 26 24 16.01 - Panelboards Breaker Type.

.3 Section 26 27 26 - Wiring Devices.

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 American National Standards Institute /Institute ofElectrical and Electronics Engineers ( ANSI/IEEE ).1 ANSI/IEEE C62.41-.1, IEEE Guide on the Surge Environmentin Low-Voltage (1000 V and less) AC Power Circuits..2 IEEE C62.41.2, IEEE Recommended Practice onCharacterization of Surges in Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less)AC Power Circuits..3 IEEE C62.45, IEEE Recommended Practice on Surge Testingfor Equipment Connected to Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less) ACPower Circuits.

.2 Underwriters' Laboratories of Canada (ULC).1 UL 1283 - Electromagnetic Interference Filters..2 UL 1449 3rd Edition - Standard for Safety for SurgeProtective Devices.

.3 NEMA LS-1-1992, Low Voltage Surge Protection Devices.



.2 Product Data:.1 Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed productliterature and data sheets for surge protective devices andinclude product characteristics, performance criteria,physical size, finish and limitations.

.3 Shop Drawings:.1 Indicate on drawings:

.1 Units Performance Characteristic.

.2 Units Features.





.2 Operation and Maintenance Data: submit operation andmaintenance data for surge protection devices forincorporation into manual.




.3 Storage and Handling Requirements:.1 Store materials off ground indoors and in accordancewith manufacturer's recommendations in clean, dry,well-ventilated area..2 Store and protect surge protection devices from nicks,scratches, and blemishes..3 Replace defective or damaged materials with new.

.4 Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return ofpackaging materials as specified in Construction WasteManagement Plan Waste Reduction Workplan in accordance withSection 01 74 21 - Construction/Demolition Waste Managementand Disposal.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICE (SPD)

.1 Location category:.1 B - indoor service entrance, distribution..2 C - outdoor distribution panels.

.2 Exposure level: 2 - medium.

.3 Operational condition:.1 Temperature: -40°C to +60°C..2 Humidity: 95% RH, non-condensing atmosphere..3 Altitude: 0 - 3600 m..4 Frequency: 60 Hz..5 Nominal Voltage: 347/600 Volts.



.4 TVSS shall be MOV based, tested per IEEE C62.41.1.

.5 TVSS component parts: to UL 1449 3rd Edition, NEMA LS 1, UL1283 and cUL.

.6 TVSS characteristics:.1 protective mode: line-to-line, line-to-neutral,line-to-ground, neutral-to-ground..2 Clamping voltage to UL-1449:

.1 Mode L-N N-G L-G L-L.

.2 Volts 1000 1000 1000 1800..3 Maximum surge current 120 kA per mode (240 kA per phase)for switchgear and 80 kA per mode (160 kA per phase fordistribution panels)..4 MCOV (maximum continuous operating voltage): greaterthan 115% of nominal (L-G)..5 Radio influence attenuation: less than or equal to -50dB @ 100 kHz..6 Filter band width: 10 kHz to 100 MHz..7 Response time: less than or equal to 1 ns..8 Integral fusing..9 Approved disconnect means.

.7 Features:.1 Monitoring of internal fuses and MOV's..2 Status indicator lights on each phase..3 Trouble light..4 SPDT (form C) auxiliary contact.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

.1 Verification of Conditions: verify that conditions ofsubstrate previously installed under other Sections orContracts are acceptable for secondary lightning arrestersinstallation in accordance with manufacturer's writteninstructions..1 Visually inspect substrate in presence of DCCRepresentative..2 Inform DCC Representative of unacceptable conditionsimmediately upon discovery..3 Proceed with installation only after unacceptableconditions have been remedied and after receipt of writtenapproval to proceed from DCC Representative.



3.2 INSTALLATION

.1 SPD device shall be located as close as possible to theprotected equipment (panel or switchboard). Lead length shallnot exceed 600 mm.

.2 Connect TVSS as per manufacturer recommendations.

3.3 CLEANING




END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Surge Protection Page 1Storage Facility Devices Up To 600 VGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 Equipment and installation of surge protection devices.





.4 Section 26 24 16.01 - Panelboards Breaker Type

1.3 REFERENCES

.1 Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)..1 IEEE C62.41.1, IEEE Guide on the Surge Environment inLow-Voltage (1000 V and less) AC Power Circuits;.2 IEEE C62.41.2, IEEE Recommended Practice onCharacterization of Surges in Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less) ACPower Circuits;.3 IEEE C62.45, IEEE Recommended Practice on Surge Testingfor Equipment Connected to Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less) ACPower Circuits.

.2 Underwriters Laboratories (UL)..1 UL 1283 - Electromagnetic Interference Filters.2 UL 1449 3rd Edition - Surge Protection Devices.

.3 NEMA LS-1-1992, Low Voltage Surge Protection Devices.

1.4 SUBMITTALS








.4 Divert unused metal and wiring materials from landfill to metalrecycling facility approved by DCC Representative.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SURGE PROTECTION DEVICE (SPD)

.1 Location category: B - major feeders, short branch circuits,service panel (indoor).

.2 Exposure level: 2. Medium.

.3 Operational condition:.1 Temperature: -40°C to +60°C.2 Humidity: 95% RH, non-condensing atmosphere.3 Altitude: 0 - 3600 m.4 Frequency: 60 Hz.5 Nominal Voltage: 347/600Y Volts for main switchboard 'MSB'and distribution panel 'DPG'; 120/208Y Volts for branchpanelboards, as indicated.

.4 SPD shall be MOV based, tested per IEEE C62.41.1-2002.

.5 SPD component parts: to UL 1449 3rd Edition, NEMA LS 1-1992, UL1283 and cUL.

.6 SPD characteristics:.1 Protection mode: line-to-line, line-to-neutral,line-to-ground, neutral-to-ground..2 Clamping voltage to UL 1449:

For Main Switchboard 'MSB' and Distribution Panel 'DPG':Mode L-N N-G L-G L-L1000 1000 1000 1000 1000

For Branch Panelboards:Mode L-N N-G L-G L-LVolts 400 400 400 700

.3 Maximum surge current 120 kA per mode (240 kA per phase)for main switchboard and distribution panel 'DPG' and 60 kA permode (120 kA per phase) for branch panelboards.



.4 MCOV (maximum continuous operating voltage): greater than115 % of nominal (L-G)..5 Mount: installed internal to distribution equipment byequipment manufacturer..6 Radio influence attenuation: less than or equal to -50 dB@ 100 kHz..7 Filter band width: 10 kHz to 100 MHz..8 Response time: less than or equal to 1 ns..9 Integral fusing..10 Approved disconnecting means.

.7 Features:.1 Monitoring of internal fuses and MOV's..2 Status indicator lights on each phase..3 Trouble light..4 SPDT (form C) auxiliary contact.

.8 Provide aux contacts as dry type contacts so no power source isrequired to permit Division 25 to pick up these points.Division 26 is responsible for power if this is required by thedevice supplier.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 SPD device shall be located as close as possible to theprotected equipment (panel or switchboards). Lead length shallnot exceed 600 mm.

.2 Connect SPD as per manufacturer recommendations.

3.2 GENERAL

.1 Supplier is responsible for commissioning device with Division25.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Lighting Page 1Storage FacilityGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 Section 26 09 43 - Lighting Control Devices - Low Voltage.

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 American National Standards Institute/Institute of Electricaland Electronics Engineers ( ANSI/IEEE ).1 ANSI/IEEE C62.41-1991, Recommended Practice for SurgeVoltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits.

.2 ASTM International Inc..1 ASTM F 1137-00(2006), Standard Specification forPhosphate/Oil and Phosphate/Organic Corrosion ProtectiveCoatings for Fasteners.

.3 Canadian Standards Association (CSA International)

.4 ICES-005-07, Radio Frequency Lighting Devices.


.6 Illuminating Enginering Society of North America.1 LM-79-08, Electric and Photometric Measurements ofSolid-State Lighting Products..2 LM-80-15, Measuring Luminous Flux and ColourMaintenance of LED Packages, Arrays and Modules. .3 TM-21-11, Projecting Long Term Lumen Maintenance of LEDLight Sources.



.2 Product Data:.1 Provide manufacturer's printed product literature,specifications and datasheet and include productcharacteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finishand limitations..2 Provide complete photometric data prepared byindependent testing laboratory for luminaires wherespecified, for approval by DCC Representative..3 Photometric data to include: VCP Table where applicablespacing criterion; 5 plane candlepower summary and lumenratings.



.3 Quality assurance submittals: provide following in accordancewith Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control..1 Manufacturer's instructions: provide manufacturer'swritten installation instructions and special handlingcriteria, installation sequence and cleaning procedures.


.1 Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance withSection 01 61 00 - Common Product Requirements.


.3 Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and returnpackaging materials in accordance with Section 01 74 21 -Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal.

.4 Divert unused metal materials from landfill to metalrecycling facility.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 LAMPS

.1 Refer to Luminaire Schedules on drawings.

2.2 LED DRIVERS

.1 LED Driver..1 Rating: 347 V, 60 Hz..2 Mounting: integral to luminaire..3 Colour temperature and colour rendering index (CRI):refer to Luminaire Schedule.

2.3 FINISHES

.1 Light fixture finish and construction to meet ULC listingsand CSA certifications related to intended installation.

2.4 OPTICAL CONTROL DEVICES

.1 As indicated on drawings.



2.5 LUMINAIRES

.1 As indicated in Luminaire Schedule.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Locate and install luminaires as indicated.

.2 Provide adequate support to suit ceiling system..1 See luminaire schedule on drawings for additionalmounting information and requirements.

3.2 WIRING

.1 Connect luminaires to lighting circuits.

3.3 LUMINAIRE SUPPORTS

.1 For suspended ceiling installations support luminairesindependently of ceiling.

3.4 LUMINAIRE ALIGNMENT

.1 Align luminaires mounted in continuous rows to form straightuninterrupted line.

.2 Align luminaires mounted individually parallel orperpendicular to building grid lines.

3.5 CLEANING

.1 Clean in accordance with Section 01 74 11 - Cleaning..1 Remove surplus materials, excess materials, rubbish,tools and equipment.

.2 Waste Management: separate waste materials in accordance withSection 01 74 21 - Construction/Demolition Waste Managementand Disposal.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Emergency Lighting Page 1Storage FacilityGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 Materials and installation for emergency lighting systems.




.3 Section 26 50 00 - Lighting.

1.3 REFERENCES

.1 Canadian Standards Association (CSA International).1 CSA C22.2 No. 141-10, Unit Equipment for EmergencyLighting.

1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS


.2 Shop drawings to indicate product, battery capacity, lumenoutput and features.




.3 Collect and separate for disposal paper, plastic, polystyrene,corrugated cardboard and packaging material in appropriateon-site bins for recycling in accordance with Waste ManagementPlan.

.4 Divert unused metal and wiring materials from landfill to metalrecycling facility approved by DCC Representative.



.5 Dispose of unused batteries at official hazardous materialcollections site approved by DCC Representative.

.6 Fold up metal banding, flatten and place in designated area forrecycling.

1.6 WARRANTY

.1 For batteries, the 12 months warranty period prescribed in theGeneral Conditions is extended to 120 months, with no-chargereplacement during the 5 years (pro-rate).

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT

.1 Emergency lighting equipment: to CSA C22.2 No. 141.

.2 Supply voltage: 347 Vac.

.3 Output voltage: 12 Vdc.

.4 Operating time: 120 min.

.5 Battery: sealed, maintenance free.

.6 Battery output capacity: As per drawings.

.7 Charger: solid state, multi-rate, voltage/current regulated,inverse temperature compensated, short circuit protected withregulated output.

.8 Solid state transfer circuit.

.9 Low voltage disconnect: solid state, modular.

.10 Signal lights: solid state, for 'AC Power ON' and 'HighCharge'.

.11 Lamp heads: integral on unit, 345 degrees horizontal and 180degrees vertical adjustment. Lamp type: LED. Rating asindicated on drawings.

.12 Remote mounted lamp heads: 345 degrees horizontal and 180degrees vertical adjustment. Lamp type: MR16, 12 VDC, 12W.

.13 Cabinet: suitable for direct mounting to wall and c/w knockoutsfor conduit. Removable or hinged front panel for easy access tobatteries.



.14 Finish: white.

.15 Auxiliary equipment:.1 Test switch..2 Battery disconnect device..3 AC input and DC output terminal blocks inside cabinet..4 Bracket.

2.2 WIRING OF REMOTE HEADS

.1 Conduit: in accordance with Section 26 05 34 - Conduits,Conduit Fastenings and Conduit Fittings.

.2 Conductors: in accordance with Section 26 05 21 - Wires andCables (0-1000 V), sized in accordance with manufacturer'srecommendations.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Install unit equipment and remote mounted fixtures.

.2 Direct heads.

.3 Ensure that emergency lighting circuit breaker is locked in ONposition.

3.2 ILLUMINATION MEASUREMENT

.1 Measure and record emergency lighting illumination inaccordance with the following..1 Verify all emergency lighting equipment is fullyoperational..2 Verify construction including building finishes arecomplete in areas illuminated by emergency lighting equipment..3 Verify calibrated light meter suitable for emergencylighting measurement is available..4 Simulate building utility power failure duringnon-daylight time period. Return building utility power serviceupon completion of illumination measurements..5 Utilize light meter to measure illumination (LUX) in allareas with emergency lighting equipment. Record measurements ondetailed floor area grid plans based on building floor plans..6 Submit illumination measurement report including two (2)copies of illumination measurements on grid floor plans.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Exit Lights Page 1Storage FacilityGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 REFERENCES

.1 Canadian Standards Association (CSA International).1 CSA C22.2 No. 141-10, Unit Equipment for EmergencyLighting..2 CAN/CSA C860-11, Performance of Internally Lighted ExitSigns.

.2 National Research Council Canada.1 National Building Code of Canada (2010).

.3 National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).1 NFPA 101-2012, Life Safety Code.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


.2 Product Data:.1 Submit manufacturer's printed product literature,specifications and datasheet and include productcharacteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finishand limitations.

.3 Quality Assurance Submittals: submit following in accordancewith Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control..1 Instructions: submit manufacturer's installationinstructions and special handling criteria, installationsequence and cleaning procedures.


.1 Separate waste materials for reuse and recycling inaccordance with Section 01 74 21 - Construction/DemolitionWaste Management and Disposal.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STANDARD UNITS

.1 Exit lights: to CSA C22.2 No. 141 and CAN/CSA C860, packagedin accordance with the Canadian Code for Preferred Packagingguidelines.

.2 Housing: extruded aluminum housing, brush aluminum finish.

.3 Face and back plates: extruded aluminum.

.4 Lamps: Low power LED's.

.5 Use running person type pictograms with green colour inaccordance with NBCC.

.6 Face plate to remain captive for relamping.

.7 Supply voltage: 347 VAC.

.8 Mounting: suitable for universal mounting directly onjunction box and c/w knockouts for conduit.

.9 Ceiling mounted or wall mounted, as indicated.

.10 Single face or double face, as indicated.

.11 Arrow: knock-outs.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


.1 Compliance: comply with manufacturer's writtenrecommendations or specifications, including producttechnical bulletins, handling, storage and installationinstructions, and datasheets.

3.2 INSTALLATION

.1 Install exit lights to manufacturer's recommendations,listing requirements, NBCC standard and local regulatoryrequirements.

.2 Connect fixtures to exit light circuits.



.3 Ensure that exit light circuit breaker is locked in onposition.

3.3 CLEANING


.2 On completion and verification of performance ofinstallation, remove surplus materials, excess materials,rubbish, tools and equipment.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Grounding And Bonding Page 1Storage Facility For CommunicationsGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 REFERENCES

.1 American National Standards Institute.1 ANSI TIA-607-C, Joint Standard - Commercial BuildingGrounding (Earthing) and Bonding Requirements forTelecommunications.

.2 Telecommunications Industries Association (TIA)/ElectronicIndustries Alliance (EIA).1 TIA/EIA-606-2002, Administration Standard for theCommercial Telecommunications Infrastructure.

.3 U.S. Department of Labor/Occupational Safety and HealthAdministration (OSHA).1 Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL).

.4 TBITS 6.9, Treasury Board Information and TechnologyStandard.



.1 Telecommunications grounding and bonding system consist ofgrounding busbars, bonding backbones, and other bondingconductors.

.2 Provides ground reference for telecommunications systemswithin building and bonding to it of telecommunicationsrooms.

.3 Metallic pathways, cable shields, conductors, and hardwarewithin telecommunications spaces are bonded totelecommunications grounding and bonding system.


.1 Health and Safety Requirements: do construction occupationalhealth and safety in accordance with Section 01 70 12 -Safety Requirements.




.1 Waste Management and Disposal:


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TELECOMMUNICATIONS MAIN GROUNDING BUSBAR (TMGB)

.1 An insulated pre-drilled copper electro tin plated buss bar,with holes sized for using a 2-hole compression connector,shall be installed under the telecommunication cabinet. Thisbus bar is known as the Telecommunications Main Grounding Busbar (TMBG) and shall be insulated from its support by aminimum of 50 mm.

2.2 BONDING CONDUCTOR FOR TELECOMMUNICATIONS

.1 3/0 AWG copper conductor, green insulated marked to: ANSITIA-607-C.

2.3 WARNING LABELS

.1 Non-metallic warning labels in English and French to: ANSITIA-607-C.

.2 Identify labels with wording "If this connector is loose ormust be removed, please call the building telecommunicationsmanager".

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TELECOMMUNICATIONS MAIN GROUNDING BUSBAR (TMGB)

.1 Install TMGB on insulated supports at 1500 mm AFF and 150 mmfrom the right side of the backboard.

.2 Install 6 AWG copper bonding conductor from TMGB toalternating current equipment ground (ACEG) of servingelectrical power panel (panelboard).



3.2 TELECOMMUNICATIONS GROUNDING BUSBAR (TGB)

.1 Install TGB in telecommunications cabinet, adjacent to thecable entrance sleeves.

.2 Install 6 AWG copper bonding conductor from TGB toalternating current equipment ground (ACEG) of servingelectrical power panel (panelboard).

3.3 BONDING CONDUCTORS GENERAL

.1 When placed in ferrous metallic conduit longer than 1 m,connect the bonding conductor to each end of conduit using 6AWG copper conductor.

3.4 BONDING CONDUCTOR FOR TELECOMMUNICATIONS

.1 Install bonding conductor for telecommunications from TMGB toservice equipment (power) ground at nearest electrical panel.

.2 Use approved 2 hole compression lugs for connection to TMGB.

3.5 BONDING TO TMGB

.1 Mechanically bond metallic parts and raceways to TMGB using 6AWG green insulated copper conductor. Vic bond metallicraceways.

.2 For cables having shield or metallic member, bond shield ormetallic member to TMGB using 6 AWG green insulated copperconductor.

.3 Bond equipment rack or cabinet to TMGB using 6 AWG greeninsulated copper conductor.

.4 All metallic parts shall be bonded together mechanically andattached to TMGB.

3.6 BONDING TO TGB

.1 Mechanically bond metallic raceways and parts intelecommunications room to TGB using 6 AWG green insulatedcopper conductor. Vice bond metallic raceways.

.2 For cables having shield or metallic member, bond shield ormetallic member to TGB using 6 AWG green insulated copperconductor.



.3 Bond equipment rack or cabinet to TGB using 6 AWG greeninsulated copper conductor.

.4 All metallic parts shall be bonded together mechanically andattached to TGB.

3.7 LABELLING

.1 Apply warning labels to telecommunications bonding andgrounding conductors.

.2 Apply additional administrative labels to: TIA/EIA-606.

END OF SECTION

National Defence UNCLASSIFIED Pathways For Section 27 05 28

New ULCV & EATV Communications Systems Page 1Storage FacilityGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL





.4 Section 26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for ElectricalSystems.

.5 Section 26 05 31 - Splitters, Junction and Pull Boxes.

.6 Section 26 05 34 - Conduits, Conduit Fastenings and ConduitFittings.

.7 Section 33 65 73 - Concrete Encased Duct Banks and Manholes.

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 TIA/EIA-569-B Commercial Building Standard forTelecommunications Pathway and Spaces.

.2 TIA-607-C Commercial Building Grounding and BondingRequirements for Telecommunications.

.3 BICSI - Outside Plant Design Manual.

.4 BICSI - Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual.





.4 Divert unused metal, conduit and wiring materials fromlandfill to metal recycling facility as approved by DCCRepresentative.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS


.1 Communications (data/voice outlets) raceways system consistsof outlet boxes, cover plates, distribution conduits, pullboxes, sleeves and caps, fish wires, cable tray, cable ladderrack, service fittings and concrete encased ducts. Completesystem to support CAT 6. rated communications cablinginstallation and operations.

.2 Grounding bus bars and grounding and bonding conductors andaccessories.

2.2 MATERIAL

.1 Conduits: EMT type, in accordance with Section 26 05 34 -Conduits, Conduit Fastenings and Conduit Fittings. Conduitminimum size 27 mm.

.2 Pull boxes: in accordance with Section 26 05 31 - Junctionand Pull Boxes. Sized in accordance with pullbox schedule ondrawings (pull box schedule indicated minimum pull box sizeto be used. If indicated size is not available, Contractorshall use next available trade size).

.3 Outlet boxes EMT type and fittings: in accordance withSection 26 05 32 - Outlet Boxes, Conduit Boxes and Fittings.

.4 Fish wire: polypropylene type.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Install raceway system, fish wire, outlet boxes, pull boxes,cover plates, conduit, sleeves and caps, miscellaneous andpositioning material to constitute complete system.

.2 All conduits shall be thin wall EMT, reamed and bushed atboth ends and bonded to the distribution system. Rigid PVC orflexible metallic or PVC conduits are NOT acceptable.



.3 Pull boxes shall be installed at a reasonable height, in anexposed location and such that access for installation ofcables is not prohibited. Pull boxes shall not be placed in afixed false ceiling space, unless immediately above asuitably marked and hinged access panel. Provide indicatordecals on ceiling T-bar rail or ceiling tiles showinglocation of pull box or splice box.

.4 Install cable trays at least 300mm away from fluorescentluminaries and cross power cables at right angles. Provideminimum 300mm access headroom above the cable tray wherepractical. "Do not" permit other building components such as:air conditioning ducts to restrict access to trays.

.5 All conduit runs shall be a maximum of 30 meters (100ft) inlength with a maximum of two (2) 90 degree bends between pullpoints.

.6 Pullboxes are not to be used for changes of direction; allwiring is to be pulled straight through and direction changesare to be via conduit elbows past the pullbox.

.7 Please note that within communications the use of C, LB, LL,LR, and T type fittings or elbow fittings are not permitted.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Structured Cabling For Page 1Storage Facility CommunicationGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 REFERENCES

.1 Canadian Standards Association (CSA International).1 CSA-C22.2 No. 214-08(R2013), Communications Cables(Bi-National standard with UL 444)..2 CSA-C22.2 No. 232-09(R2014), Optical Fiber Cables.

.2 Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA)/ElectronicIndustries Alliance (EIA).1 TIA/EIA-568-C.1-1(2012), Commercial BuildingTelecommunications Cabling Standard, Part 1: GeneralRequirements..2 TIA/EIA-568-C.2-(2009), Commercial BuildingTelecommunications Cabling Standard, Part 2: BalancedTwisted-Pair Cabling Components..3 TIA/EIA-568-C.3-1(2011), Optical Fiber CablingComponents Standard..4 TIA/EIA-606-B-(2012), Administration Standard for theCommercial Telecommunications Infrastructure..5 TIA/EIA-568-C.0-1(2010), generic telecommunicationscabling for customer premises..6 TBITS 6.9, Treasury Board Information and TechnologyStandard.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

.1 Refer to TIA/EIA-598-C, Annex A for definitions of terms:optical-fiber interconnect, distribution, and breakoutcables.


.1 Structured telecommunications wiring system consist ofunshielded-twisted-pair, terminations, connectors,cross-connection hardware and related equipment installedinside building for occupant's telecommunications systems,including voice (telephone), data, and image.

.2 Installed in physical star configuration.



.1 Horizontal cables link work areas to telecommunicationsrooms located on same floor.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

.1 Submit shop drawings.


.3 As-built Records and Drawings:.1 Provide Microsoft Access database reflecting cableinstallation and cross-connections..2 Provide electronic drawings in AutoCAD 2010 formatdepicting all construction..3 Provide two (2) bound complete hard-copy sets ofas-built records to the DCC Representative.

.1 Provide and place one hard copy of as-built recordsfor each telecommunications room in plan holder in eachtelecommunications room.


.1 Health and Safety Requirements: do construction occupationalhealth and safety in accordance with Section 01 70 12 -


.1 Waste Management and Disposal: separate waste materials forreuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 21 -Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal.









PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 HORIZONTAL DISTRIBUTION CABLE

.1 All internal communications cables will be installed by aThird Party Installer.

2.2 POWER BARS

.1 One power bar shall be installed in the telecommunicationscabinet. The power bar shall have six (6) 5-20R receptaclesand be non-switched with an L5-30P plug on a minimum 2.4 mcord. Th power bar(s) shall be UL/ULC listed and must meetUL/ULC 1363 and 1449 requirements.

2.3 WALL MOUNTED TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABINET

.1 Load capacity: 400 lb.

.2 Wall Mounted Cabinet - (16 -18 RU), with vertical cablemanagers inside cabinet. The wall mounted cabinet must meetthe following criteria:.1 Be fully welded 14 ga - 16 ga steel..2 Top and bottom cutouts for fans or cable entry..3 Locking "all metal front door"..4 Locking swing out mid-section..5 Cabinet may inverted to allow either left or right sideopening..6 Extra deep frame for large equipment..7 19" Rack mounting hardware..8 Minimum acceptable products are CTCWH-3424-DSO-B,WMCRCI-251624 and EN4DH362415LG or manufactures of similarproducts/materials.

.3 Finish: painted black.

.4 Rack-style rails: 482.6 mm tapped #12-24.

.5 Rack mounting width: 482.6 mm per EIA-310-D.

.6 Grounding provisions: per TIA-607.

.7 Wall mounted:.1 Stud mounting: 407 mm..2 Wall mounting hardware: 9.52 mm or #8 screws.



.3 Backboard for cabinet requires sheet of 75 mm thick1220mm wide x 2440 mm high, GIS plywood backboard. Thisplywood is to be installed from finished floor. .4 All joints, screw, and nail holes are to be caulkedand/or covered. Paint all six sides of the backboard with 2coats of white non-conductive fire retardant paint..5 Install the Telecommunications Main Grounding Bus Bar(TMGB) mounted on insulated supports at 150 mm AFF and 150 mmfrom the right side of the backboard..6 Install the L5-30-R receptacle on the backboard, mountedat 150 mm AFF and 150 mm from left side of backboard.

.8 UL 1863 Listed.

.9 Locks:.1 Front door and rear locks both keyed alike.

.10 Power - 20A:.1 Surge-protected duplex receptacle mounted in lower rightof rear panel space..2 Single-gauge work box..3 Non-metallic flexible conduit: 1830 mm..4 Stainless steel face plate.

.11 Grounding:.1 Grounding bar..2 Ground strap with ring terminals..3 Ground strap with ring terminal and female faston.

.12 Ventilation:.1 Two 102 mm fans, single tray assembly: 114 CFM, 120VAC,60 Hz, 36 dBA.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF HORIZONTAL DISTRIBUTION CABLES

.1 All internal communications cables will be installed by aThird Party Installer.

3.2 NUMBERING AND LABELLING

.1 All labels shall be laser printed and no handwritten labelswill be accepted.

.2 Labels shall be printed with a minimum 10pt font size.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Access Control Page 1Storage FacilityGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL



.2 Section 26 05 31 - Splitters, Junction, Pull Boxes andCabinets.

1.2 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS

.1 National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).1 NFPA 70, Article 517, National Electric Code..2 NFPA 101, Life Safety Code.

.2 Electronic Industries Association (EIA).1 REC 12749, Power Supplies.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

.1 Underwriters Laboratories of Canada (ULC).1 CAN/ULC-S319-05, Electronic Access Control Systems..2 ULC-ORD-C634-86, Guide for the Investigation ofConnectors and Switches for Use with Burglar Alarm Systems.

.2 Underwriters' Laboratories (UL).1 UL 294 Revision 3 (2005), Standard for Safety for AccessControl System Units..2 UL 1034-2004, Burglary-Resistant Electric LockingMechanisms

1.4 DESIGN PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

.1 System to be ULC-S319 compliant using ULC-S319 or UL 294certified equipment.

.2 Security access system to use company specializing inelectronic access control systems.

.3 System shall be modular, easily expandable.

.4 Access to a door will be granted when and only when:.1 The building user has presented a card at card readerand all of the following conditions are true:

.1 The card is pre-defined in the system.

.2 The user has presented the card to the reader at adoor and at a time authorized for the card holder.



.5 Entry to be allowed by presenting the following as required:.1 Proximity card.

.6 Design building access control system as:.1 ULC certified system..2 Consisting of:

.1 Remote card readers.

.2 Request to exit motion sensors.

.3 Wiring.

.7 All access parameters regarding a card holder must be inabsolute control of the owner and modified at will withouttechnical assistance.

.8 Activation of a request to exit device shall release theassociated door.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

.1 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's printed productliterature, specifications and datasheet in accordance withSection 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures..1 Submit two copies of WHMIS MSDS - Material Safety DataSheets in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - SubmittalProcedures..2 Submit 3 copies of manufacturer's literature/datasheetsfor each card reader and request to exit device..3 Submit:

.1 Functional description of equipment.

.2 Technical data for all devices.

.3 Device location plans and cable lists.

.4 Devices mounting location detail drawings.

.5 Typical devices connection detail drawings.

.2 Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00 -Submittal Procedures..1 Submit shop drawings to indicate project layout,including details.

.1 Submit shop drawings to indicate, mounting heightsand locations, wiring diagrams, door equipmentconfigurations..2 Submit wiring diagrams..3 Submit complete equipment list.

.3 Quality Assurance Submittals: Submit the following inaccordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures..1 Test Reports: Submit certified test reports fromapproved independent testing laboratories indicatingcompliance with specifications for specified performancecharacteristics and physical properties.



.2 Certificates: Submit certificates signed by manufacturercertifying that materials comply with specified performancecharacteristics and physical properties.

.1 Submit ULC/UL/CSA Product Safety Certificates.

.2 Submit verification Certificate that servicecompany is ULC/UL/CSA List alarm service company..3 Submit verification Certificate that securityaccess system is "Certified alarm system".

.3 Instructions: Submit manufacturer's installationinstructions..4 Manufacturer's Field Services: Submit copies ofmanufacturer's field reports.

.4 Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data for incorporationinto manual specified in Section 01 78 00 - CloseoutSubmittals..1 Include:

.1 System configuration and equipment physical layout.

.2 Functional description of equipment.

.3 Instructions of operation of equipment.

.4 Illustrations and diagrams to supplementprocedures..5 Operation instructions provided by manufacturer..6 Cleaning instructions.

.5 Provide a copy of inspecting technician's report to DCCRepresentative. Identify each device by location and certifythe test results.

.6 Issue a Certificate of Verification confirming the completionof the verification.

.7 Provide DCC Representative with a written list of equipmentwarranty periods.


.1 Deposit packaging materials in appropriate container on sitefor recycling or reuse.

.2 Avoid using landfill waste disposal procedures when recyclingfacilities are available.

.3 Collect and separate plastic, paper packaging and corrugatedcardboard.

.4 Dispose of corrugated cardboard, polystyrene and plasticpackaging material in appropriate on-site bin.



1.7 WARRANTY

.1 Project Warranty: Refer to Division 1 for project warrantyprovisions.

.2 Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit, for DCC Representative'sacceptance, manufacturer's standard warranty documentexecuted by authorized company official.

.3 Upon DCC Representative's approval of the installed system, a1 year warranty on parts will be in effect.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Proximity Card Readers/Keypads:.1 Type: 125kHz proximity type with Wiegand output..2 Quantity of card readers required: as indicated..3 Fitted with LED indicator light and audio sounder..4 Reading distance range: 250 mm to 400 mm..5 Compatible with contractor supplied proximity cards..6 Operating temperature: -40 degrees to +65 degreesCelsius..7 Rugged, weatherized enclosure to withstand adverseweather conditions, as indicated..8 Use of keypad and/or proximity function to be DCCRepresentative selectable according to an DCC Representativedefined schedule, according to each door, and each individualuser.

.2 Access cards: Standard, plastic, credit-card size, sealed andhighly resistant to normal handling and weather, printable,fitted with vertical slot punched hole..1 Guaranteed for 5 years against all defects and protectedagainst:

.1 Magnetic encoded cards.

.2 Metal objects including coins and keys.

.3 Retail shoplifting detection equipment.

.4 Communication equipment.

.5 Utilize proximity technology compatible withselected card reader..6 Designed with highly secure codification of cardinformation..7 Card life: minimum period of 10 years for cards insame family..8 Use one series of cards for all areas protected byaccess control system.



.9 Each card code must be unique and manufacturercertified to have never been used in the past and neverto be used again in the future.

.3 Request to exit motion detector device:.1 To be CAN/ULC-S319-05 or UL 294-1999 listed..2 Infrared and/or radar detection..3 Continuous low-voltage operation..4 Fitted with indicator light..5 Adjustable coverage..6 Designed and installed so as to not detect objects slidunder the door from outside secure area.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


.1 Compliance: Comply with manufacturer's written data,including product technical bulletins, product cataloginstallation instructions, product carton installationinstructions, and datasheet.

3.2 INSTALLATION: ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM

.1 Install access control system units and components inaccordance with CAN/ULC-S319-05.

.2 Fully enclose external cables in electrical metal tubingconduit, from activating unit location's enclosure receptacleback box to and above ceiling/wall mounted boxes andenclosures.

.3 Enclose in electrical metal tubing conduit external cablesfor associated junction box to remaining system locations,from junction box to above ceiling mounted cable ducts ormaster conduit routes.

.4 Securely fasten all components to wall, ceiling, or othersubstrate or structure.

.5 Install components in accordance with manufacturer's writteninstallation instructions to locations, heights and surfacesshown on reviewed shop drawings.

.6 Install required boxes in inconspicuous accessible locations.

.7 Mount conduit, wires, control enclosures, and power supplieson wall high enough to not interfere with building operationsin areas with exposed structure ceilings.



.8 Door hardware to be installed by persons specializing in doorhardware.

3.3 PROGRAMMING & TRAINING

.1 Training: as per Section 01 79 00 - Demonstration andTraining.


.1 Manufacturer's Services:.1 Have manufacturer of products, supplied under thisSection, review Work involved in the handling,installation/application, protection and cleaning, of itsproducts and submit written reports, in acceptable format, toverify compliance of Work with Contract..2 Manufacturer's Field Services: Provide manufacturer'sfield services consisting of product use recommendations andperiodic site visits for inspection of product installationin accordance with manufacturer's instructions..3 Schedule site visits, to review Work, at stages listed:

.1 After delivery and storage of products, and whenpreparatory Work, or other work, on which the Work ofthis Section depends, is complete but beforeinstallation beings..2 Twice during progress of Work at 25% and 60%complete..3 Upon completion of the Work, after cleaning iscarried out.

.4 Obtain reports, within 3 days of review, and submit,immediately, to DCC Representative.

3.5 VERIFICATION

.1 Perform verification inspections and test in the presence ofDCC Representative..1 Provide all necessary tools, ladders and equipment..2 Ensure appropriate subcontractors and securityspecialists are present for verification.

.2 Pre-testing Procedure.1 Verify (utilizing approved test equipment) that Systemis fully operational and meets all System performancerequirements of this specification..2 Measure and record, control (and/or voice) carrierlevels of every System channel at each of following points inthe system:

.1 Door located actuating devices.



.2 Door control panel functions.

.3 Electronic supervisory control units inputs andoutputs..4 Distribution system input and output.

.3 Provide and submit to DCC Representative two copies ofrecorded system pre-test measurements, along with pre-testcertification.

.3 Performance testing.1 Test procedure: perform test on a "go-no-go" basis.

.1 Make only operator adjustments required to showproof of performance..2 Test to demonstrate and verify that installedsystem complies with installation and technicalrequirements of this specification under operatingconditions..3 Test results to be evaluated by DCC Representativeas either acceptable or unacceptable using followingprocedures.

.2 Documentation review:.1 This review will determine if information providedis sufficient to meet requirements of thisspecification..2 Provide for review all system manuals, as installeddrawings, pre-test forms, and equipment cabinetpictorials.

.3 Mechanical inspection:.1 DCC Representative and Contractor to tour all areasto insure that all systems and subsystems are installedin place for proof of performance testing..2 Take system inventory at this time. Verifyfollowing items before beginning proof of performancetests:

.1 All electrical power circuits designated forsystem equipment are properly labeled, wired,phased, protected and grounded..2 Conductor ends are protected by heat shrinkwrap; audio spade lugs, barrier strips and punchblocks are used..3 Wiring connections to all equipment meetsapplicable codes and standards..4 Wiring to all equipment is complete..5 Dust, debris, solder splatter, etc. arecleaned and removed from site..6 All equipment is properly labeled..7 All equipment identified in System's equipmentlists are in-place and properly installed..8 Each System ground method are installed inaccordance with manufacturer's instructions andthis specification.

.4 Subsystem functional test



.1 Conduct operational testing after review ofdocumentation and mechanical inspection completed. Proceed asfollows.

.1 Perform operational test of each subsystem toverify that all equipment is properly connected,interfaced and is functionally operational to meetrequirements of this specification.

.2 Control Units.1 Take S/N readings from control unit's input andoutput in manual (and/or automatic) mode. Check outputof DC/Data converter for S/N. Evaluate entire signalquality at baseband connector output of control unit andremote equipment.

.3 Distribution (or Interface) System.1 Check each door utilizing a volt/ohm (or signallevel) meter to confirm each function and to insure thatSystem meets all performance requirements..2 Test each interconnection point (i.e: Door unit,junction box "cross connection", control unit, etc.) toensure compliance with this specification.

.4 Total system test.1 Proceed with testing when System and Subsystems arefunctionally tested and accepted. Total System tests toverify that requirements have been met for DC (and/oraudio), sub carrier, and control signals in accordancewith this specification.

.5 Safety.1 Demonstrate with documentation that access controlsystem meets safety requirements specified in UL 294.

.5 Visual verification: Objective is to assess quality ofinstallation and assembly and overall appearance to ensurecompliance with Contract Documents. Visual inspection toinclude:.1 Sturdiness of equipment fastening..2 Non-existence of installation related damages..3 Compliance of device locations with reviewed shopdrawings..4 Compatibility of equipment installation with physicalenvironment..5 Inclusion of all accessories..6 Device and cabling identification..7 Application and location of ULC approval decals.

.6 Technical verification: Purpose to ensure that all systemsand devices are properly installed and free of defects anddamage. Technical verification includes:.1 Validate sensitivity of readers and applicability andapplication of cards..2 Connecting joints and equipment fastening..3 Compliance with manufacturer's specification, productliterature and installation instructions.



.7 Operational verification: Purpose to ensure that devices andsystems' performance meet or exceed established functionalrequirements. Operational verification includes:.1 Operation of each device individually and within itsenvironment..2 Operation of each device in relation with programmableschedule and or/specific functions.

.8 Upon DCC Representative's approval of the installed system, a1 year warranty on parts will be in effect.

3.6 CLEANING

.1 Remove protective coverings from accessories and components.

.2 Adjust all components for correct function.

.3 Clean housings and system components, free from marks,packing tape, and finger prints, in accordance withmanufacturer's written cleaning recommendations.

.4 Clean all components free from dirt and fingerprints.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Multiplex Fire Alarm Page 1Storage Facility SystemGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 REFERENCES

.1 Government of Canada.1 NBC-2015, National Building Code of Canada.

.2 Canadian Forces Fire Marshal (CFFM), FMD 4003 09-11.

.3 Underwriter's Laboratories of Canada (ULC).1 CAN/ULC-S524-14, Installation of Fire Alarm Systems..2 CAN/ULC-S525-07, Audible Signal Appliances for FireAlarm Systems..3 CAN/ULC-S526-07, Visual Signal Appliances for Fire AlarmSystems..4 CAN/ULC-S527-14, Control Units for Fire Alarm Systems..5 CAN/ULC-S528-14, Manual Pull Stations for Fire AlarmSystems..6 CAN/ULC-S529-09, Smoke Detectors for Fire Alarm Systems..7 CAN/ULC-S530-91(R1999), Heat Detectors..8 CAN/ULC-S536-13, Inspection and Testing of Fire AlarmSystems..9 CAN/ULC-S537-13, Verification of Fire Alarm Systems..10 CAN/ULC-S531-14, Smoke Alarms..11 CAN/ULC-S541-07, Speakers for Fire Alarm Systems..12 National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health(NIOSH), Pocket Guide to Chemical Hazards.

.4 Multiplex Fire Alarm System Smoke Venting Sequences Section28 31 00.01a.


.1 Fully supervised, microprocessor-based, addressable, firealarm system, utilizing digital techniques for data controland digital, and multiplexing techniques for datatransmission.

.2 System to carry out fire alarm and protection functions;including receiving alarm signals; initiating general alarm;supervising components and wiring; actuating annunciators andauxiliary functions; initiating trouble signals andsignalling to base fire hall.

.3 Zoned, coded single stage.



.4 Modular in design to allow for future expansion.

.5 Operation of system shall not require personnel with specialcomputer skills.

.6 System to include:.1 Central Control Unit in separate enclosure with powersupply, stand-by batteries, central processor withmicroprocessor and logic interface, main system memory,system to allow speakers to be utilized as a two-channelPublic Address/Mass Notification system. Input-outputinterfaces for alarm receiving, annunciation/display, andprogram control/signalling..2 Data Gathering Panels/Transponders with stand-alonecapabilities..3 Power supplies..4 Initiating/input circuits..5 Output circuits..6 Auxiliary circuits..7 Wiring..8 Manual and automatic initiating devices..9 Audible and visual signalling devices..10 Local annunciators displays..11 Event log memory chip..12 Historic event recorder..13 Remote booster power supplies for output circuits..14 Transponder..15 Fire detectors..16 Fire alarm transmitter..17 Drill function on main panel.

1.4 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES

.1 System:.1 To Canadian Forces Fire Marshal approval.

.2 System components: listed by ULC and comply with applicableprovisions of National Building Code.

1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS


.2 Include:.1 Detail assembly and internal wiring diagrams for controlunit and auxiliary cabinets..2 Details for devices.



.3 Details and performance specifications for control, andperipherals.


.1 Provide operation and maintenance data for fire alarm systemfor incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00 -Closeout Submittals.

.2 Include:.1 Instructions for complete fire alarm system to permiteffective operation and maintenance..2 Technical data - illustrated parts lists with partscatalogue numbers..3 Copy of approved shop drawings with correctionscompleted and marks removed except review stamps..4 List of recommended spare parts for system.

1.7 MAINTENANCE

.1 Provide twenty-four (24) months free maintenance from date ofsubstantial completion with two inspections by manufacturerduring warranty period. Inspection tests to conform toCAN/ULC-S536. Submit inspection report to DCC Representative.



1.9 TRAINING

.1 Provide manufacturer product warranty against defects inoperation, material and workmanship for twenty-four (24)months from date of substantial completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Equipment and devices: ULC listed and labelled and suppliedby single manufacturer.

.2 Power supply: to CAN/ULC-S524.



.3 Audible signal devices: to ULC-S524.

.4 Visual signal devices: to CAN/ULC-S526.

.5 Control unit: to CAN/ULC-S527.

.6 Manual pull stations: to CAN/ULC-S528.

.7 Smoke detectors: to CAN/ULC-S529.

2.2 SYSTEM OPERATION: SINGLE STAGE - SIGNALS ONLY

.1 Actuation of any alarm initiating device to:.1 Cause electronic latch to lock-in alarm state at centralcontrol unit and data gathering panel/transponder..2 Indicate zone of alarm at central control unit anddisplay..3 Cause audible and visual signalling devices to sound andstrobe continuously throughout building and at centralcontrol unit..4 Transmit signal to base fire hall via transponder.

.2 Acknowledging alarm: indicated at central control unit.

.3 Possible to silence signals by "alarm silence" switch atcontrol unit, after 60s period of operation.

.4 Subsequent alarm, received after previous alarm has beensilenced, to re-activate signals.

.5 Actuation of supervisory devices to:.1 Cause electronic latch to lock-in supervisory state atcentral control unit and data gathering panel/transponder..2 Indicate respective supervisory zone at central controlunit and at display..3 Cause audible signal at central control unit to sound..4 Activate common supervisory sequence.

.6 Resetting alarm or supervisory device not to return systemindications/functions back to normal until control unit hasbeen reset.

.7 Trouble on system to:.1 Indicate circuit in trouble at central control unit..2 Activate "system trouble" indication, buzzer and commontrouble sequence. Acknowledging trouble condition to silenceaudible indication; whereas visual indication to remain untiltrouble is cleared and system is back to normal.

.8 Trouble on system: suppressed during course of alarm.



.9 Trouble condition on any circuit in system not to initiatealarm conditions.

2.3 CONTROL PANEL

.1 Central control unit (CCU)..1 Suitable for DCLA communication style: to CAN/ULC-S524..2 Features specified are minimum requirements formicroprocessor-based system with digital data control anddigital multiplexing techniques for data transmission..3 Minimum capacity of 420 addressable monitoring and 820addressable control/signal points..4 System to provide for priority reporting levels, withfire alarm points assigned highest priority, supervisory andmonitoring lower priority, and third priority for troubles.Possible to assign control priorities to control points insystem to guarantee operation or allow emergency override asrequired..5 Integral power supply, battery charger and standbybatteries..6 Basic life safety software: retained in non volatileErasable Programmable Read-Only-Memory (EPROM). Extra memorychips: easily field-installed. Random-Access-Memory (RAM)chips in panel to facilitate password-protected field editingof simple software functions (e.g. zone labels, priorities)and changing of system operation software..7 Circuitry to continuously monitor communications anddata processing cycles of microprocessor. Upon failure,audible and visual trouble indication to activate..8 Support 2 RS-232-C I/O port. CCU output: parallel ASCIIwith adjustable baud rates to allow interface of anycommercially available printer, terminal or PC..9 Equipped with software routines to provideEvent-Initiated-Programs (EIP); change is status of one ormore monitor points, may be programmed to operate any or allof system's control points..10 Software and hardware to maintain time of day, day ofweek, day of month, month and year..11 Event recorder via internal memory..12 Bypass switch for testing horns, signal, and airhandling unit.

2.4 POWER SUPPLIES

.1 120 V, 60 Hz as primary source of power for system.

.2 Voltage regulated, current limited distributed system power.

.3 Primary power failure or power loss (less than 102 V) willactivate common trouble sequence.



.4 Interface with battery charger and battery to provideuninterruptible transfer of power to standby source duringprimary power failure or loss.

.5 During normal operating conditions fault in battery chargingcircuit, short or open in battery leads to activate commontrouble sequence and standby power trouble indicator.

.6 Standby batteries: sealed, maintenance free.

.7 Continuous supervision of wiring for external initiating andalarm circuits to be maintained during power failure.

2.5 INITIATING/INPUT CIRCUITS

.1 Receiving circuits for alarm initiating devices such asmanual pull stations, smoke detectors, heat detectors andwater flow switches, wired in Class A configuration tocentral control unit.

.2 Alarm receiving circuits (active and spare): compatible withsmoke detectors and open contact devices.

.3 Actuation of alarm initiating device: cause system to operateas specified in "System Operation".

.4 Receiving circuits for supervisory, N/O devices. Devices:wired in Class A configuration to central control unit.

.5 Actuation of supervisory initiating device: cause system tooperate as specified in "System Operation".

.6 Addressable loops shall not serve more than one floor.

.7 Circuits shall not be loaded more than 80% of their capacity.

2.6 ALARM OUTPUT CIRCUITS

.1 Alarm output circuit: connected to signals, wired in class Aconfiguration to central control unit..1 Signal circuits' operation to follow system programming;capable of sounding horns continuously at 3-3-3 temporalpattern. Each signal circuit: rated at minimum 3.0 A, 24 VDC;fuse-protected from overloading/overcurrent..2 Manual alarm silence, automatic alarm silence and alarmsilence inhibit to be provided by system's common control..3 Circuits shall not be loaded more than 80% of theircapacity.



2.7 AUXILIARY CIRCUITS

.1 Auxiliary contacts for control functions.

.2 Actual status indication (positive feedback) from controlleddevice.

.3 Upon resetting system, auxiliary contacts to return to normalor to operate as pre-programmed.

.4 Auxiliary circuits: rated at minimum 3.0 A, 24 VDC or 120Vac, fuse-protected.

2.8 WIRING

.1 Solid copper, twisted pair, CSA FAS105, FT-4, 300 V ratedcables.

.2 Each conductor shall be permanently labeled at both ends.

.3 To initiating circuits: 18 AWG minimum, and in accordancewith manufacturer's requirements.

.4 To signal circuits: 12 AWG minimum, and in accordance withmanufacturer's requirements.

.5 To control circuits: 14 AWG minimum, and in accordance withmanufacturer's requirements.

.6 Fire alarm wiring and cables to be run in metallic conduitunless otherwise noted.

.7 Wiring of fire alarm system field devices shall be of Class Aas per CAN/ULC-ULC-S524-14.

.8 Sized as required to meet device manufacturer'srecommendations with respect to voltage drop.

2.9 MANUAL ALARM STATIONS

.1 Addressable manual pull station..1 Pull lever, semi-flush wall mounted type, single action,single stage, electronics to communicate station's status toaddressable module/transponder over 2 wires and to supplypower to station. Station address to be set on station infield. Markings on station to be bilingual..2 Weatherproof as indicated.



2.10 AUTOMATIC ALARM INITIATING DEVICES

.1 Addressable heat detectors, fixed temperature, rated forhazardous and corrosive locations as indicated.

.2 Addressable smoke detector..1 Combination photo-electric and ionization type withautomatic sensitivity controlled via fire alarm panel..2 Electronics to communicate detector's status toaddressable module/transponder..3 Detector address to be set on detector in field.

2.11 AUDIBLE AND VISUAL SIGNAL DEVICES

.1 Speakers:.1 Speakers shall be ULC Listed for their intendedfunction..2 All speakers shall be designed for a field-selectableinput of either 25 or 70 VRMS; with selectable power tapsfrom 1/4 watt to 2 watts..3 All wall-mount models shall have listed sound output ofup to 90 dBA at 3m and a listed frequency response of 400 to4000 Hz..4 All ceiling-mount models shall have listed sound outputof up to 90 dB at 3m and a listed frequency response of 400to 4000 Hz..5 Speaker shall incorporate a sealed-back construction..6 All inputs shall employ terminals that accept #12 to#18AWG wire sizes..7 Wall-mount speaker shall be designed for indoor-flushmounting to 103 mm x 53 mm electrical boxes without need foran extension ring or surface mounting..8 Ceiling-mount, speaker appliances shall be designed forindoor-flush mounting..9 Speak shall incorporate a speaker-mounting plate with asnap-on grille cover..10 The finish of the speakers shall be white or red..11 Speakers located outdoors shall be weatherproof andvandal resistant.

.2 Strobe:.1 Flashing strobe, semi-flush on surface wall mounted typeas indicated..2 Operating voltage: 24 VDC nominal..3 Red polycarbonate housing with bilingual FIRE markings..4 Flashing strobe, semi-flush on clear polycarbonatestrobe lens..5 Candela output: as noted on drawings, 1 flash per secondrate..6 Synchronized operation.



.7 Strobes mounted outdoors shall be weather proof andvandal resistant.

.3 Strobe, explosion proof:.1 Surface mounted..2 Synchronized operation..3 Operating voltage; 20 to 24 VDC..4 110 cd output intensity, clear lense..5 Certified for use in Class 1, Zone 1, 11A hazardouslocations.

.4 Speaker, explosion proof:.1 Surface mounted..2 Output sound level: 90 dB at 3 m..3 Operating voltage: 20 to 24 VDC..4 Certified for use in Class 1, Zone 1, 11A hazardouslocations.

2.12 ADDRESSABLE SENSOR BASE

.1 All addressable analog smoke and heat sensor heads asspecified below will twist lock onto their bases. Theelectronics that communicate the sensors status (analogvalue) to the control panel shall be contained in the base.The same base will be compatible for both smoke and thermalsensors. Upon removal of the head, a trouble signal will betransmitted to the control panel. The detector's address willbe set at the time of installation via a dip switch package.

.2 Where required provide an additional alarm relay (Form C,SPDT), normally open contact, for auxiliary functions.

.3 Each sensor base shall contain a LED that will flash eachtime it is scanned by the control panel (once every fourseconds). When the control panel determines that a sensor isin alarm or a trouble condition, the control panel shallcommand the LED on that sensor's base to turn on steadyindicating the abnormal condition.

.4 Each sensor base shall provide terminals to connect an LEDRemote Alarm Indicator or other auxiliary device.

.5 Each sensor shall be scanned by the control panel for itstype identification to prevent inadvertent substitution ofanother sensor type. The control panel shall operate with theinstalled device but shall initiate a `Wrong Device' troublecondition until the proper type is installed or theprogrammed sensor type is changed.



2.13 GRAPHIC DISPLAY

.1 Passive graphic plans of the building showing each floor areaincluding room names/numbers, etc. in glazed frame adjacentFire Alarm Panel.

2.14 SPRINKLER MONITORING DEVICES

.1 Fully addressable input device for each flow switch, tamperswitch and pressure switch etc.

2.15 ANCILLARY DEVICES

.1 Remote relay unit to initiate fan shutdown.

2.16 REMOTE BOOSTER POWER SUPPLIES

.1 120 V, 60 Hz as primary source of power for system.

.2 Four Class A notification appliance circuits rated 3A at 24VDC: to ULC-S527.

.3 Configurable signal rates: continuous or 3-3-3 temporal.

.4 Primary power failure or power loss will activate commontrouble sequence.

.5 Interface with battery to provide uninterruptible transfer ofpower to standby source during primary power failure or loss.

.6 During normal operating conditions fault in battery chargingcircuit, short or open in battery leads to activate commontrouble sequence and standby power trouble indicator.

.7 Standby batteries: rechargeable, sealed,maintenance free,long-life, minimum 5 years life expectancy, guaranteed for 5years.

.8 Provide sufficient battery capacity for normal systemoperation, for not less than 24 hours and immediatelyfollowing emergency power under full load for not less than30 minutes. Provide also 25% battery spare capacity.

.9 Surface mount in CSA Type 2 enclosure with batteries asindicated.



2.17 TRANSPONDER

.1 Transponder to monitor the status of the control panel and toreport alarm, trouble, and supervisory conditions to the basefire hall.

.2 Power input: 120 VAC.

.3 The transponder shall interface with and be able tocommunicate all alarm and trouble conditions to the FireHall.

2.18 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR PANELS

.1 Provide LCD annunciator panels where indicated, mounted 1.5 mabove finished floor elevation.

.2 LCD alphanumeric type with designation to indicate address ofdevice.

.3 Wired in multiple with main control panel and with otherremote annunciator panels.

.4 Supervised, including trouble signal for open circuit.

2.19 PUBLIC ADDRESS/INTERCOM SYSTEM TELEPHONE INTERFACE MODULE

.1 The module shall provide for telephone interface selectionvia built-in DIP switches. It shall include a volume controlfor tone and background music (BGM) source, and RJ-11 jacksfor night ringer, telephone line and override.

.2 A connector block, using screw terminal connections, shall beprovided for BGM source, and two (2) C-form relay contactsets. A power on LED indicator shall be provided to indicatepower applied status.

2.20 AS-BUILT RISER DIAGRAM

.1 Fire alarm system riser diagram: in glazed frame, minimumsize 600 x 600 mm.

2.21 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

.1 Acceptable manufacturers:.1 Siemens..2 Edwards..3 Honeywell.



PART 3 - PRODUCTS

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Install systems in accordance with CAN/ULC-S524.

.2 Install central control unit and connect to ac power supplyand dc standby power.

.3 Install manual alarm stations and connect to alarm circuitwiring.

.4 Locate and install detectors and connect to alarm circuitwiring. Do not mount detectors within 1 m of air outlets.Maintain at least 600 mm radius clear space on ceiling, belowand around detectors. Locate duct type detectors in straightportions of ducts.

.5 Connect alarm circuits to main control panel.

.6 Install audible and visual signal devices and connect tosignalling circuits.

.7 Connect signalling circuits to main control panel.

.8 Install remote relay units to control fan shut down.

.9 Splices are not permitted.

.10 Provide necessary raceways, cable and wiring to makeinterconnections to terminal boxes, annunciator equipment andCCU, as required by equipment manufacturer.

.11 Ensure that wiring is free of opens, shorts or grounds,before system testing and handing over.

.12 Identify circuits and other related wiring at central controlunit, annunciators, and terminal boxes.

.13 Install CO detectors in accordance with manufacturer'srecommendations..1 CO detectors mounting height: 1.5 meters above finishedfloor.

.14 Sprinkler System: wire alarm and supervisory switches inClass A configuration and connect to control panel.




.1 Perform tests in accordance with Section 26 05 00 - CommonWork Results - For Electrical and CAN/ULC-S537.

.2 Fire alarm system:.1 Test such device and alarm circuit to ensure manualstations, heat and smoke detectors, and sprinkler systemtransmit alarm to control panel and actuate general alarm..2 Check annunciator panels to ensure zones are showncorrectly..3 Simulate grounds and breaks on alarm and signallingcircuits to ensure proper operation of systems..4 Addressable circuits system style DCLA:

.1 Test each conductor on all DCLA addressable linksfor capability of providing 3 or more subsequent alarmsignals on each side of single open-circuit faultcondition imposed near midmost point of each link.Operate Acknowledge/Silence switch after reception ofeach of the 3 signals. Correct imposed fault aftercompletion of each series of tests..2 Test each conductor on all DCLA addressable linksfor capability of providing 3 or more subsequent alarmsignals during ground-fault condition imposed nearmidmost point of each link. Operate Acknowledge/Silenceswitch after reception of each of the 3 signals. Correctimposed fault after completion of each series of tests.

.3 Provide certificate to DCC Representative. Show the CFAAregistration number for the technicians.

.4 Provide final PROM program re-burn for system Engineerincorporating program changes made during construction.

.5 Fire alarm system verification shall be carried out by CFAAregistered fire alarm technicians.

3.3 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

.1 Provide on-site lectures and demonstration by fire alarmequipment manufacturer to train operational personnel in useand maintenance of fire alarm system.



.2 Allow for a total of 5 days for training. All training shallbe recorded for future reference.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Gas Detection Systems Page 1Storage FacilityGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 Section 26 05 00 - Common Works Results For Electrical.

.2 Section 26 05 21 - Wires and Cables (0-1000 V).

.3 Section 26 05 34 - Conduits, Conduit Fastenings and ConduitFittings.

.4 Section 28 31 00.01 - Multiplex Fire Alarm System.

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health(N10SH)..1 N10SH Pocket Guide to Chemical Hazards.


.1 System to include:.1 Field programmable control panel with LCD display, LED

alarm indication, audible alarm, 4-20mA analog inputs forgas sensors, and relay outputs.

.2 Gas sensors: Carbon Monoxide (CO) and Nitrogen Dioxide(NO2) sensors complete with analog transmitters totransmit 4-20 mA output linear to the concentration ofthe target gas.

.3 Wiring.

.4 Connections to BAS Control Panel and Fire Alarm ControlPanel.

1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS

.1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00 -submittal Procedures.

.2 Include:.1 Detail assembly and internal wiring diagrams for control

units and transmitters..2 Overall system diagram..3 Details and performance specifications for control

panel, transmitters, and gas sensors with item by itemcross reference to specifications for compliance.




.1 Provide operation and maintenance data for gas detectionsystem for incorporation into manual specified in Section 0178 00 - Closeout Submittals.

.2 Include:.1 Instructions for complete gas detection system to permit

effective operation and maintenance..2 Technical data - illustrated parts lists with parts

catalogue numbers..3 Copy of approved shop drawings with corrections

completed and marks removed except review stamps..4 List of recommended spare parts for system.




.3 Collect and separate for disposal paper plastic polystyrenecorrugated cardboard packaging material in appropriateon-site bins for recycling in accordance with WasteManagement Plan.

.4 Divert unused metal and wiring materials from landfill tometal recycling facility as approved by Engineer.

.5 Divert unused batteries from landfill to local batteryrecycling facility approved by Engineer.


1.7 MAINTENANCE

.1 Provide one year free maintenance with inspections and sensorcalibration as required by manufacturer during warrantyperiod. Submit inspection reports to Engineer.

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS

.1 Provide maintenance materials in accordance with Section 0178 00 - Closeout Submittals.



1.9 TRAINING

.1 Provide on-site lectures and demonstration by gas detectionsystem equipment manufacturer to train operational personnelin the use and maintenance of gas detection system.

.2 Provide two, two hours each, sessions. The actual dates ofsessions to be coordinated with Engineer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Gas detection control panel:.1 Wall mount, self-contained, field programmable control

panel with digital display, LED alarm indication, anddoor mounted audible alarm with silence/acknowledgeswitch.

.2 Scrolling LCD display of gas, concentration, and alarmstatus.

.3 Capable of supporting up to eight (8) analogtransmitters.

.4 Three programmable alarm levels: low, mid and high.

.5 Eight (8) form C output relays rated 5A, 120 VAC.

.6 24 VDC regulated power output for transmitters.

.7 Operating voltage 120 VAC, 60 Hz.

.2 Gas sensors:.1 Carbon Monoxide (CO) and nitrogen oxide (NO2) sensors

complete with transmitter to operate at 24 VDC suppliedby control panel and to produce a linear, analog signalof 4-20 mA representing a sensor range of 0 to 100% LEL.

.2 Complete with wire guard for sensor.

.3 Wiring:.1 To analog transmitters (4-20 mA signal): #16 AWG

minimum, twisted, shielded, and in accordance withmanufacturer's requirements.

.2 To analog transmitters (24 VDC power): #16 AWG minimum,shielded, and in accordance with manufacturer'srequirements.

.3 To control circuits: #12 AWG minimum, shielded, and inaccordance with manufacturer's requirements.

.4 BACnet Interface Device:.1 Provide BACnet Interface Devices for each Low Voltage

Controller so that the units are presented as a series ofAV and BV BACnet objects. See 25 20 26.29.03 for thelist of objects that must be supported. This list is theminimum acceptable.



2.2 SYSTEM OPERATION

.1 Upon detection of 25 ppm Carbon-Monoxide on 0.7 ppm NO2 inany of the detection zones, the system shall:.1 Illuminate the "Alarm" LED..2 Send signal to Fire Alarm Control panel (alarm).3 Send signal to BAS system (alarm).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 The Contractor shall carefully follow instructions indocumentation provided by the manufacturer to insure allsteps have been taken to provide a reliable, easy-to-operatesystem.

.2 All equipment shall be tested and configured in accordancewith instructions provided by the manufacturer prior toinstallation.

.3 All firmware found in products shall be the latest and mostup-to-date provided by the manufacturer, or of a version asspecified by the provider of the Video Management Application(VMA) or Network Video Recorder (NVR).

.4 All equipment requiring users to log on using a passwordshall be configured with user/site-specificpassword/passwords. No system/product default passwords shallbe allowed.

3.2 WIRING

.1 As per the Canadian Electrical Code.

.2 Refer to Section 28 23 00, Item 2.16.

.3 Use liquid tight flexible metal conduit for all exteriorpower and signal wiring.

3.3 AIMING

.1 Aiming angles are classified.

.2 Aiming angles to be provided by the DCC Representative.



.3 Allow for two (2) additional site visits followingsubstantial performance to re-adjust and re-aim cameras asdirected by DCC Representative.

3.4 TEST

.1 At the end of installation, make all necessary tests in thepresence of the user's representative.

3.5 PROGRAMMING AND TRAINING

.1 Provide the initial system software, programming, customizingand data entry.

.2 Provide Demonstration, Operating and Maintenance Instructionsas per Section 01 77 00 - Closeout Procedures and Section 0178 00 - Closeout Submittals.

.3 Identify each camera in software to indicate area viewed.

3.6 VERIFICATION

.1 Verify the operation of all devices.

.2 Verify the wiring to all equipment is complete.

.3 Provide a copy of inspecting technician's report to user.Identify each device by location and certify the testresults.

.4 Provide an initial eight (8) hours of training to the Owner'sdesigned representative.

.5 Visit site 60 days following substantial performance andprovide an additional eight (8) hours of training.

.6 Issue a Certificate of Verification confirming the completionof the verification.

3.7 COMMISSIONING

.1 Commission the system in accordance with Division 01 andadditional documentation provided by DCC Representative.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Aggregate Materials Page 1Storage FacilityGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 This section applies in conjunction with those sectionsinvolving aggregates.


.1 Section 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete.

.2 Section 31 37 00 - Rip Rap.

.3 Section 32 11 23 - Aggregate Base Course

.4 Section 33 11 16 - Site Water Utility Distribution Piping.

1.3 REFERENCES

.1 ASTM International.1 ASTM D4791-10, Standard Test Method for Flat Particles,Elongated Particles, or Flat and Elongated Particles inCoarse Aggregate.

.2 U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA)/Office of Water.1 EPA 832/R-92-005, Storm Water Management forConstruction Activities: Developing Pollution PreventionPlans and Best Management Practices.

.3 Additional Reference Documents:.1 Ontario Provincial Standards (OPS) for Roads and PublicWorks, Ministry of Transportation (MTO), latest edition..2 Ontario Ministry of the Environment StormwaterManagement Planning and Design (2003)..3 Transportation Association of Canada (TAC) NationalGuide to Sediment and Erosion control on Roadway Projects(2005)..4 Environmental Assessment Screening Report, NewInfrastructure pertaining to Department of National Defence(DND) Facilities, July, 2014, Defence Construction Canada(DCC).



.2 Product Data:



.1 Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed productliterature and data sheets for aggregate materials andinclude product characteristics, performance criteria,physical size, finish and limitations.

.3 Samples:.1 Allow continual sampling by DCC Representative duringproduction..2 Provide DCC Representative with access to source andprocessed material for sampling..3 Pay cost of sampling and testing of aggregates whichfail to meet specified requirements.


.1 Submit project Waste Management Plan WasteReduction Workplan highlighting recycling and salvagerequirements..2 Submit calculations on end-of-project recyclingrates, salvage rates, and landfill rates demonstratingthat 75% of construction wastes were recycled orsalvaged.

.2 Erosion and Sedimentation Control: submit copy oferosion and sedimentation control plan in accordance withauthorities having jurisdiction and Section 01 47 15 -Sustainable Requirements: Construction.



.2 Transportation and Handling: handle and transport aggregatesto avoid segregation, contamination and degradation.

.3 Storage: store washed materials or materials excavated fromunderwater 24 hours minimum to allow free water to drain andfor materials to attain uniform water content.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Aggregate quality: sound, hard, durable material free fromsoft, thin, elongated or laminated particles, organicmaterial, clay lumps or minerals, free from adherent coatingsand injurious amounts of disintegrated pieces or otherdeleterious substances.



.2 Flat and elongated particles of coarse aggregate: toASTM D 4791..1 Greatest dimension to exceed 5 times least dimension.

.3 Fine aggregates satisfying requirements of applicable sectionto be one, or blend of following:.1 Screenings produced in crushing of quarried rock,boulders, gravel or slag.

.4 Coarse aggregates satisfying requirements of applicablesection to be one of or blend of following:.1 Crushed rock..2 Gravel and crushed gravel composed of naturally formedparticles of stone..3 Light weight aggregate, including slag and expandedshale.


.1 Inform DCC Representative of proposed source of aggregatesand provide access for sampling 4 weeks minimum beforestarting production.

.2 If materials from proposed source do not meet, or cannotreasonably be processed to meet, specified requirements,locate alternative source.

.3 Advise DCC Representative 4 weeks minimum in advance ofproposed change of material source.

.4 Acceptance of material at source does not preclude futurerejection if it fails to conform to requirements specified,lacks uniformity, or if its field performance is found to beunsatisfactory.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

.1 Verification of Conditions: verify that conditions areacceptable for topsoil stripping..1 Visually inspect substrate in presence of DCCRepresentative..2 Inform DCC Representative of unacceptable conditionsimmediately upon discovery..3 Proceed with topsoil stripping. only after unacceptableconditions have been remedied and after receipt of writtenapproval to proceed from DCC Representative.



3.2 PREPARATION

.1 Topsoil stripping:.1 Do not handle topsoil while in wet or frozen conditionor in any manner in which soil structure is adverselyaffected..2 Begin topsoil stripping of areas as indicated by DCCRepresentative after area has been cleared of brush weeds andgrasses and removed from site..3 Strip topsoil to depths as indicated as directed by DCCRepresentative. Avoid mixing topsoil with subsoil..4 Stockpile in locations as directed by DCCRepresentative. Stockpile height not to exceed 2m..5 Dispose of unused topsoil to location as directed by DCCRepresentative.

.2 Aggregate source preparation:.1 Prior to excavating materials for aggregate production,clear and grub area to be worked, and strip unsuitablesurface materials. Dispose of cleared, grubbed and unsuitablematerials as directed by DCC Representative and approved byauthority having jurisdiction..2 Where clearing is required, leave screen of treesbetween cleared area and roadways as directed..3 Clear, grub and strip area ahead of quarrying orexcavating operation sufficient to prevent contamination ofaggregate by deleterious materials..4 When excavation is completed dress sides of excavationto nominal 1.5:1 slope, and provide drains or ditches asrequired to prevent surface standing water..5 Trim off and dress slopes of waste material piles andleave site in neat condition..6 Provide silt fence or other means to preventcontamination of existing watercourse or natural wetlandfeatures.

.3 Processing:.1 Process aggregate uniformly using methods that preventcontamination, segregation and degradation..2 Blend aggregates, as required, including reclaimedmaterials that meet physical requirements of specification ispermitted in order to satisfy gradation requirements formaterial and, percentage of crushed particles, or particleshapes specified.

.1 Use methods and equipment approved in writing byDCC Representative.

.4 When operating in stratified deposits use excavationequipment and methods that produce uniform, homogeneousaggregate gradation.



.5 Where necessary, screen, crush, wash, classify and processaggregates with suitable equipment to meet requirements..1 Use only equipment approved in writing by DCCRepresentative.

.6 Stockpiling:.1 Stockpile aggregates on site in locations as indicatedunless directed otherwise by DCC Representative. Do notstockpile on completed pavement surfaces..2 Stockpile aggregates in sufficient quantities to meetproject schedules..3 Stockpiling sites to be level, well drained, and ofadequate bearing capacity and stability to support stockpiledmaterials and handling equipment..4 Except where stockpiled on acceptably stabilized areas,provide compacted sand base not less than 300 mm in depth toprevent contamination of aggregate. Stockpile aggregates onground but do not incorporate bottom 300 mm of pile intoWork..5 Separate different aggregates by strong, full depthbulkheads, or stockpile far enough apart to preventintermixing..6 Do not use intermixed or contaminated materials. Removeand dispose of rejected materials as directed by DCCRepresentative within 48 hours of rejection..7 Stockpile materials in uniform layers of thickness asfollows:

.1 Maximum 1.5 m for coarse aggregate and base coursematerials..2 Maximum 1.5 m for fine aggregate and sub-basematerials..3 Maximum 1.5 m for other materials.

.8 Uniformly spot-dump aggregates delivered to stockpile intrucks and build up stockpile as specified..9 Do not cone piles or spill material over edges of piles..10 Do not use conveying stackers..11 During winter operations, prevent ice and snow frombecoming mixed into stockpile or in material being removedfrom stockpile.

3.3 CLEANING





.3 Leave aggregate stockpile site in tidy, well drainedcondition, free of standing surface water.

.4 Leave any unused aggregates in neat compact stockpiles asdirected by DCC Representative.


.6 For temporary or permanent abandonment of aggregate source,restore source to condition meeting requirements of authorityhaving jurisdiction.

.7 Restrict public access to temporary or permanently abandonedstockpiles by means acceptable to DCC Representative.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Clearing and Grubbing Page 1Storage FacilityGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

.1 This section specifies requirements for clearing andgrubbing.


.1 Section 31 14 13 - Soil Stripping and Stockpiling.


1.3 REFERENCES

.1 U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA)/Office of Water.1 EPA 832R92005, Storm Water Management for ConstructionActivities: Developing Pollution Prevention Plans and BestManagement Practices.

.2 Ontario provincial Standards (OPS) for Roads and PublicWorks, Ministry of Transportation (MTO), latest edition.

.3 Ontario Ministry of the Environment Stormwater ManagementPlanning and Design (2003).

.4 Transportation Association of Canada (TAC) National Guide toSediment and Erosion Control on Roadway projects (2005).

.5 Environmental Assessment Screening Report, New Infrastructurepertaining to Department of National Defence (DND)Facilities, July, 2014, Defence Construction Canada (DCC).

1.4 DEFINITIONS

.1 Clearing consists of cutting off trees and brush vegetativegrowth to not more than specified height above ground anddisposing of felled trees, previously uprooted trees andstumps, and surface debris.

.2 Close-cut clearing consists of cutting off standing trees,brush, scrub, roots, stumps and embedded logs, removing at,or close to, existing grade and disposing of fallen timberand surface debris.

.3 Clearing isolated trees consists of cutting off to not morethan specified height above ground of designated trees, anddisposing of felled trees and debris.



.4 Underbrush clearing consists of removal from treed areas ofundergrowth, deadwood, and trees smaller than 50 mm trunkdiameter and disposing of fallen timber and surface debris.

.5 Grubbing consists of excavation and disposal of stumps androots boulders and rock fragments of specified size to notless than specified depth below existing ground surface.



.2 Samples:.1 Submit 3 samples of each material listed below forapproval prior to delivery of materials to project site..2 Tree wound paint: one liter can with manufacturer'slabel..3 Herbicide: one liter can with manufacturer's label.

.3 Submit certificates signed by manufacturer certifying thatmaterials comply with specified performance characteristicsand physical properties.




.2 Safety Requirements: worker protection..1 Workers must wear gloves, respirators, dust masks longsleeved clothing, eye protection and protective clothing whenapplying herbicide materials..2 Workers must not eat, drink or smoke while applyingherbicide material..3 Clean up spills of preservative materials immediatelywith absorbent material and safely discard to landfill.

1.7 STORAGE AND PROTECTION

.1 Prevent damage to fencing, trees, landscaping, naturalfeatures, bench marks, existing buildings, existing pavement,utility lines, site appurtenances, water courses and rootsystems of trees which are to remain..1 Repair damaged items to approval of DCC Representative.



.2 Replace trees designated to remain, if damaged, asdirected by DCC Representative.



.2 Consider felled timber from which saw logs, pulpwood, posts,poles, ties, or fuel wood can be produced as saleable timber..1 Trim limbs and tops, and saw into saleable lengths..2 Stockpile adjacent to site.

.3 Remove other cleared and grubbed materials off-site. all suchmaterial site (approximate 8 km round trip distance), asdirected by DCC Representative.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Bituminous based paint of standard manufacture speciallyformulated for tree wounds.

.2 Soil Material for Fill:.1 Excavated soil material: free of debris, roots, wood,scrap material, vegetable matter, refuse, soft unsoundparticles, deleterious, or objectionable materials..2 Remove and store soil material for reused.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


.1 Provide temporary erosion and sedimentation control measuresto prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing waterrunoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways,according to requirements of authorities having jurisdictionsediment and erosion control drawings sediment and erosioncontrol plan, specific to site, that complies with EPA832/R-92-005 or requirements of authorities havingjurisdiction, whichever is more stringent.





3.2 PREPARATION

.1 Inspect site and verify with DCC Representative, itemsdesignated to remain.

.2 Locate and protect utility lines: preserve in operatingcondition active utilities traversing site..1 Notify DCC Representative immediately of damage to orwhen unknown existing utility lines are encountered..2 When utility lines which are to be removed areencountered within area of operations, notify DCCRepresentative in ample time to minimize interruption ofservice.

.3 Notify utility authorities before starting clearing andgrubbing.

.4 Keep roads and walks free of dirt and debris.

3.3 APPLICATION

.1 Manufacturer's instructions: comply with manufacturer'swritten recommendations or specifications, including producttechnical bulletins, handling, storage and installationinstructions, and datasheet.

3.4 CLEARING

.1 Clearing includes felling, trimming, and cutting of treesinto sections and satisfactory disposal of trees and othervegetation designated for removal, including downed timber,snags, brush, and rubbish occurring within cleared areas.

.2 Clear as indicated or directed by DCC Representative, bycutting at height of not more than 300 mm above ground. Inareas to be subsequently grubbed, height of stumps left fromclearing operations to be not more than 1000 mm above groundsurface.

.3 Cut off branches and cut down trees overhanging area clearedas directed by DCC Representative.

.4 Cut off unsound branches on trees designated to remain asdirected by DCC Representative.



3.5 CLOSE CUT CLEARING

.1 Close cut clearing to ground level to within 100 mm of groundsurface.

.2 Perform close cut clearing by hand so that existing muskeg isnot damaged.

.3 Cut off branches down trees overhanging area cleared asdirected by DCC Representative.

.4 Cut off unsound branches on trees designated to remain asdirected by DCC Representative.

3.6 ISOLATED TREES

.1 Cut off isolated trees as indicated directed by DCCRepresentative at height of not more than 300 mm above groundsurface.

.2 Grub out isolated tree stumps.

.3 Prune individual trees as indicated.

.4 Trim trees designated to be left standing within clearedareas of dead branches 4 cm or more in diameter; and trimbranches to heights as indicated.

.5 Cut limbs and branches to be trimmed close to bole of tree ormain branches.

.6 Paint cuts more than 3 cm in diameter with approved treewound paint.

3.7 UNDERBRUSH CLEARING

.1 Clear underbrush from areas as indicated at ground level.

3.8 GRUBBING

.1 Remove and dispose of roots larger than 7.5 cm in diameter,matted roots, and designated stumps from indicated grubbingareas.

.2 Grub out stumps and roots to not less than 200 mm belowground surface.

.3 Grub out visible rock fragments and boulders, greater than300 mm in greatest dimension, but less than 0.25 m3.



.4 Fill depressions made by grubbing with suitable material andto make new surface conform with existing adjacent surface ofground.

3.9 REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL

.1 Remove cleared and grubbed materials off site to the "5Fingers" site designated by DCC Representative.

.2 Harvestable trees will be removed by DND prior to award ofcontract. Remaining timber greater than 125 mm diameter tosaleable lengths lengths and stockpile as indicated.Stockpiled timber becomes property of the Contractor.

.3 Burning and burying of cleared and grubbed organic materialwill not be permitted. Organic material to be chipped andspread at location indicted by DCC Representative.

.4 Remaining material must be placed in lifts of no more than500 mm and levelled and compacted to 95% SPD.

.5 Remove diseased trees identified by DCC Representative anddispose of this material to approval of DCC Representative.

3.10 FINISHED SURFACE

.1 Leave ground surface in condition suitable for immediategrading operations stripping of topsoil to approval of DCCRepresentative.

3.11 CLEANING



END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Soil Stripping and Page 1Storage Facility StockpilingGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

.1 This section specified procedures for the stripping andpreservation of topsoil.


.1 Section 31 11 00 - Clearing and Grubbing.

.2 Section 31 25 05 - Erosion and Sedimentation Control.

1.3 REFERENCES


.2 Ontario Provincial Standards (OPS) for Roads and PublicWorks, Ministry of Transportation (MOT), latest edition.


.4 Transportation Association of Canada (TAC) National Guide toSediment and Erosion Control on Roadway Projects (2005).


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.



PART 3 - EXECUTION





3.2 STRIPPING OF TOPSOIL

.1 Ensure that procedures are conducted in accordance withapplicable Provincial Requirements.

.2 Remove topsoil before construction procedures commence toavoid compaction of topsoil.

.3 Handle topsoil only when it is dry and warm.

.4 Remove vegetation from targeted areas by non-chemical meansand dispose of stripped vegetation to area as directed by DCCRepresentative.

.5 Remove brush from targeted area by non-chemical means and todispose of through area as directed bu DCC Representative.

.6 Strip topsoil by scraper to depths as indicated as directedby DCC Representative..1 Avoid mixing topsoil with subsoil.

.7 Pile topsoil by mechanical hoe in berms in locations asdirected by DCC Representative..1 Stockpile height not to exceed 2.5 - 3 m.

.8 Dispose of unused topsoil in location as indicated by DCCRepresentative for later use.

.9 Protect stockpiles from contamination and compaction.



.10 Cover topsoil that has been piled for long term storage, withtrefoil or grass to maintain agricultural potential of soil.

3.3 PREPARATION OF GRADE

.1 Verify that grades are correct and notify DCC Representativeif discrepancies occur do not begin work until instructed byDCC Representative..1 Grade area only when soil is dry to lessen soilcompaction..2 Grade soil with scrapers establishing natural contoursand eliminating uneven areas and low spots, ensuring positivedrainage.

3.4 PLACING OF TOPSOIL

.1 Place topsoil only after DCC Representative has acceptedsubgrade.

.2 Spread topsoil during dry conditions by mechanical hoe inuniform layers not exceeding 150 mm, over unfrozen subgradefree of standing water.

.3 Establish traffic patterns for equipment to prevent drivingon topsoil after it has been spread to avoid compaction.

.4 Cultivate soil following spreading procedures.

3.5 SUB-SOILING

.1 Apply sub-soil, following spreading and cultivatingprocedures to designated areas to improve drainage andagricultural potential of soil.

.2 Work sub-soil area following natural grade contour lines,with vibrating sub-soiler to depth of 40 cm.

.3 Cross sub-soil the area following the first pass.

.4 Cultivate the soil with a chain harrow to de-clod the soil.

3.6 CLEANING



END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Rough Grading Page 1Storage FacilityGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES

.1 ASTM International.1 ASTM D 698-12e2, Test Method for Laboratory CompactionCharacteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (600 kN-m/m3).


.3 Ontario provincial Standards (OPS) for Roads and PublicWorks, Ministry of Transportation (MTO), latest edition.







.1 Submit project Waste Management Plan WasteReduction Workplan highlighting recycling and salvagerequirements..2 Submit calculations on end-of-project recyclingrates, salvage rates, and landfill rates demonstratingthat 75% of construction wastes were recycled orsalvaged..3 Erosion and Sedimentation Control: submit copy oferosion and sedimentation control plan in accordancewith authorities having jurisdiction and Section 01 4715 - Sustainable Requirements: Construction.


.1 Examine subsurface investigation report which is attached asAnnex C.

.2 Known underground and surface utility lines and buriedobjects are as indicated on site plan.



.3 Refer to dewatering in Section 31 23 33.01 - Excavating,Trenching and Backfilling.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Fill material: Common fill in accordance with of Section31 23 33.01 - Excavating, Trenching and Backfilling.

.2 Excavated or graded material existing on site suitable to useas fill for grading work if approved by DCC Representative.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

.1 Verification of Conditions: verify that conditions ofsubstrate previously installed under other Sections orContracts are acceptable for rough grading installation inaccordance with manufacturer's written instructions..1 Visually inspect substrate in presence of DCCRepresentative..2 Inform DCC Representative of unacceptable conditionsimmediately upon discovery..3 Proceed with installation only after unacceptableconditions have been remedied and after receipt of writtenapproval to proceed from DCC Representative.


.1 Do not handle topsoil while in wet or frozen condition or inany manner in which soil structure is adversely affected asdetermined by DCC Representative.

.2 Commence topsoil stripping of areas as indicated or asdirected by DCC Representative after area has been cleared ofbrush weeds and grasses and removed from site.

.3 Strip topsoil to depths as indicated or as directed by DCCRepresentative. Rototill weeds and grasses and retain astopsoil on site. Avoid mixing topsoil with subsoil.

.4 Stockpile in locations as indicated or directed by DCCRepresentative. Stockpile height not to exceed 2 m.



.5 Dispose of unused topsoil as directed by DCC Representativeoff site.

3.3 GRADING

.1 Rough grade to levels, profiles, and contours allowing forsurface treatment as indicated.

.2 Slope rough grade away from building 1:50 minimum asindicated.

.3 Grade ditches to depth required for maximum run-off asindicated as directed.

.4 Prior to placing fill over existing ground, scarify surfaceto depth of 150 mm minimum before placing fill over existingground. Maintain fill and existing surface at approximatelysame moisture content to facilitate bonding.

.5 Compact filled and disturbed areas to maximum dry density toASTM D 698, as follows:.1 95% under landscaped areas..2 100% under paved and walk areas.

.6 Do not disturb soil within branch spread of trees or shrubsto remain.

3.4 TESTING

.1 Quality control testing shall be conducted and paid for bythe Contractor. Inspection and testing of soil compactionwill be carried out by testing laboratory designated by ULC.Results are to be submitted to DCC Representative for review.

.2 Quality Assurance inspection and testing will be carried outby a third party designated by the DCC Representative. Costsof these tests will be paid by DCC Representative.

3.5 CLEANING





.3 Waste Management: separate waste materials for reuse andrecycling in accordance with Section 01 74 21 -Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal and01 47 15 - Sustainable Requirements: Construction..1 Remove recycling containers and bins from site anddispose of materials at appropriate facility.

3.6 PROTECTION

.1 Protect and or transplant existing fencing trees,landscaping, natural features, bench marks, buildings,pavement, surface or underground utility lines which are toremain as directed by DCC Representative. If damaged, restoreto original or better condition unless directed otherwise.

.2 Maintain access roads to prevent accumulation of constructionrelated debris on roads.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Excavating, Trenching and Page 1Storage Facility BackfillingGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 This section specifies requirements for excavating, trenchingand backfilling for structure, pipes, sewers, conduits andappurtenances.


.1 Section 31 05 16 - Aggregate Materials.

.2 Section 32 11 16.01 - Granular Sub-Base.

.3 Section 32 11 23 - Rough Grading.

.4 Section 33 05 16 - Maintenance Holes and Catch BasinStructures.

.5 Section 33 11 16 - Site Water Utility Distribution Piping.

.6 Section 33 31 13 - Public Sanitary Utility Sewerage Piping.

1.3 REFERENCES

.1 American Society for Testing and Materials International(ASTM).1 ASTM C117-13, Standard Test Method for Material Finerthan 0.075 mm (No.200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates byWashing..2 ASTM C136-14, Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis ofFine and Coarse Aggregates..3 ASTM D422-63(2007)e2, Standard Test Method forParticle-Size Analysis of Soils..4 ASTM D698-12e2, Standard Test Methods for LaboratoryCompaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort(12,400 ft-lbf/ft 3) (600 kN-m/m 3)..5 ASTM D1557-12e1, Standard Test Methods for LaboratoryCompaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort(56,000 ft-lbf/ft 3) (2,700 kN-m/m 3)..6 ASTM D4318-10e1, Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit,Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils.

.2 Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB).1 CAN/CGSB-8.1-88, Sieves, Testing, Woven Wire, InchSeries..2 CAN/CGSB-8.2-M88, Sieves, Testing, Woven Wire, Metric.

.3 Canadian Standards Association (CSA International)



.1 CAN/CSA-A3000-13, Cementitious Materials Compendium(Consists of A3001, A3002, A3003, A3004 and A3005).

.1 CSA-A3001-08, Cementitious Materials for Use inConcrete.

.2 CSA-A23.1/A23.2-09(R2014), Concrete Materials andMethods of Concrete Construction/Methods of Test and StandardPractices for Concrete.


.5 Ontario Provincial Standards (OPS) for Roads and PublicWorks, Ministry of Transportation (MTO), latest edition.




1.4 DEFINITIONS

.1 Excavation classes: two classes of excavation will berecognized; common excavation and rock excavation..1 Rock: solid material in excess of 1.00 m3 and whichcannot be removed by means of heavy duty mechanicalexcavating equipment with 0.95 to 1.15 m3 bucket. Frozenmaterial not classified as rock..2 Common excavation: excavation of materials of whatevernature, which are not included under definitions of rockexcavation.

.2 Unclassified excavation: excavation of deposits of whatevercharacter encountered in Work.

.3 Topsoil:.1 Material capable of supporting good vegetative growthand suitable for use in top dressing, landscaping andseeding..2 Material reasonably free from subsoil, clay lumps,brush, objectionable weeds, and other litter, and free fromcobbles, stumps, roots, and other objectionable materiallarger than 25 millimeters 1 inch in any dimension.



.4 Waste material: excavated material unsuitable for use in Workor surplus to requirements.

.5 Borrow material: material obtained from locations outsidearea to be graded, and required for construction of fillareas or for other portions of Work.

.6 Recycled fill material: material, considered inert, obtainedfrom alternate sources and engineered to meet requirements offill areas.

.7 Unsuitable materials:.1 Weak, chemically unstable, and compressible materials..2 Frost susceptible materials:

.1 Fine grained soils with plasticity index less than10 when tested to ASTM D 4318, and gradation withinlimits specified when tested to ASTM D 422 andASTM C 136: Sieve sizes to CAN/CGSB-8.1 CAN/CGSB-8.2..2 Table:

Sieve Designation % Passing2.00 mm 1000.10 mm 45 - 1000.02 mm 10 - 800.005 mm 0 - 45

.3 Coarse grained soils containing more than 20 % bymass passing 0.075 mm sieve.

.8 Unshrinkable fill: very weak mixture of cement, concreteaggregates and water that resists settlement when placed inutility trenches, and capable of being readily excavated.


.1 Make submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 -Submittal Procedures.

.2 Quality Control: in accordance with Section 01 45 00 -Quality Control:.1 Submit condition survey of existing conditions asdescribed in EXISTING CONDITIONS article of this Section..2 Submit for review by DCC Representative proposeddewatering and heave prevention methods as described in PART3 of this Section..3 Submit to DCC Representative written notice at least 7days prior to excavation work, to ensure cross sections aretaken..4 Submit to DCC Representative written notice when bottomof excavation is reached..5 Submit to DCC Representative testing inspection resultsand report as described in PART 3 of this Section.



.3 Preconstruction Submittals:.1 Submit construction equipment list for major equipmentto be used in this section prior to start of Work..2 Submit records of underground utility locates,indicating: location plan of existing utilities as found infield clearance record from utility authority location planof relocated and abandoned services, as required.

.4 Samples:.1 Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00 -Submittal Procedures..2 Inform DCC Representative at least 4 weeks prior tobeginning Work, of proposed source of fill unshrinkable fillmaterials and provide access for sampling..3 Submit 70 kg samples of type of fill unshrinkable fillspecified including representative samples of excavatedmaterial..4 Ship samples prepaid to DCC Representative, in tightlyclosed containers to prevent contamination and exposure toelements..5 At least 4 weeks prior to beginning Work, inform DCCRepresentative source of fly ash and submit samples to DCCRepresentative.

.1 Do not change source of Fly Ash without writtenapproval of DCC Representative.


.1 Qualification Statement: submit proof of insurance coveragefor professional liability.

.2 Where DCC Representative is employee of Contractor, submitproof that Work by DCC Representative is included inContractor's insurance coverage.

.3 Submit design and supporting data at least 2 weeks prior tobeginning Work.

.4 Design and supporting data submitted to bear stamp andsignature of qualified professional engineer registered orlicensed in Province of Ontario, Canada.

.5 Keep design and supporting data on site.

.6 Engage services of qualified professional Engineer who isregistered or licensed in Province of Ontario, Canada inwhich Work is to be carried out to design and inspectcofferdams, shoring, bracing and underpinning required forWork.



.7 Do not use soil material until written report of soil testresults are reviewed and approved by DCC Representative.

.8 Health and Safety Requirements:.1 Do construction occupational health and safety inaccordance with Section 01 70 12 - Safety Requirements.



.2 Divert excess aggregate materials from landfill to localquarry recycling facility for reuse as directed by DCCRepresentative.


.1 Examine soil report included in Annex X - GeotechnicalReport.

.2 Buried services:.1 Before commencing work verify establish location ofburied services on and adjacent to site..2 Arrange with appropriate authority for relocation ofburied services that interfere with execution of work: paycosts of relocating services..3 Remove obsolete buried services within 2 m offoundations: cap cut-offs..4 Size, depth and location of existing utilities andstructures as indicated are for guidance only. Completenessand accuracy are not guaranteed..5 Prior to beginning excavation Work, notify applicableDCC Representative authorities having jurisdiction establishlocation and state of use of buried utilities and structures.DCC Representative authorities having jurisdiction toclearly mark such locations to prevent disturbance duringWork..6 Confirm locations of buried utilities by careful testexcavations soil hydrovac methods..7 Maintain and protect from damage, water, sewer, gas,electric, telephone and other utilities and structuresencountered as indicated..8 Where utility lines or structures exist in area ofexcavation, obtain direction of DCC Representative beforeremoving re-routing. Costs for such Work to be paid by DCCRepresentative..9 Record location of maintained, re-routed and abandonedunderground lines.



.10 Confirm locations of recent excavations adjacent to areaof excavation.

.3 Existing buildings and surface features:.1 Conduct, with DCC Representative, condition survey ofexisting buildings, trees and other plants, lawns, fencing,service poles, wires, rail tracks, pavement, survey benchmarks and monuments which may be affected by Work..2 Protect existing buildings and surface features fromdamage while Work is in progress. In event of damage,immediately make repair as directed by DCC Representative..3 Where required for excavation, cut roots or branches asdirected by DCC Representative.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Granular A and Granular B Materials:.1 Granular A in accordance with OPSS Volume 2,Specification No. 1010..2 Granular B - Type II in accordance with OPSS Volume 2,Specification No. 1010.

.2 Select Backfill Material: selected material from excavationor other sources, approved by DCC Representative for useintended, unfrozen and free from rocks larger than 75 mm,cinders, ashes, sods, refuse or other deleterious materials.

.3 Unshrinkable fill: proportioned and mixed to provide:.1 Maximum compressive strength of 0.4 MPa at 28 days..2 Maximum cement content of 25 kg/m 3 with 40% by volumefly ash replacement: to CSA-A3001, Type GU..3 Minimum strength of 0.07MPa at 24 h..4 Concrete aggregates: to CSA-A23.1/A23.2..5 Cement: Type GU..6 Slump: 160 to 200 mm.

.4 Shearmat: honeycomb type bio-degradable cardboard 100 mmthick, treated to provide sufficient structural support forpoured concrete until concrete cured.

.5 Geotextiles: to Section 31 32 19.01 - Geotextiles.



PART 3 - EXECUTION





3.2 SITE PREPARATION

.1 Remove obstructions, ice and snow, from surfaces to beexcavated within limits indicated.

.2 Cut pavement or sidewalk neatly along limits of proposedexcavation in order that surface may break evenly and cleanlyin accordance with Section 02 41 13 - Selective SiteDemolition.

3.3 PREPARATION/ PROTECTION

.1 Protect existing features in accordance with Section 01 56 00- Temporary Barriers and Enclosures and applicable localregulations.

.2 Keep excavations clean, free of standing water, and loosesoil.

.3 Where soil is subject to significant volume change due tochange in moisture content, cover and protect to DCCRepresentative approval.

.4 Protect natural and man-made features required to remainundisturbed. Unless otherwise indicated or located in an areato be occupied by new construction, protect existing treesfrom damage.



.5 Protect buried services that are required to remainundisturbed.


.1 Begin topsoil stripping of areas as indicated as directed byDCC Representative after area has been cleared of brush weedsand grasses and removed from site.

.2 Strip topsoil to depths as indicated as directed by DCCRepresentative..1 Do not mix topsoil with subsoil.

.3 Stockpile in locations as indicated or as directed by DCCRepresentative..1 Stockpile height not to exceed 2 m and should beprotected from erosion.

.4 Dispose of unused topsoil to location as directed by DCCRepresentative off site, assumed to be "5 Fingers" site at anapproximate 8 km round trip distance. Material to be levelledas directed.

3.5 STOCKPILING

.1 Stockpile fill materials in areas designated by DCCRepresentative..1 Stockpile granular materials in manner to preventsegregation.

.2 Protect fill materials from contamination.

.3 Implement sufficient erosion and sediment control measures toprevent sediment release off construction boundaries and intowater bodies.

3.6 COFFERDAMS, SHORING, BRACING AND UNDERPINNING

.1 Maintain sides and slopes of excavations in safe condition byappropriate methods and in accordance with Section01 70 12 - Safety Requirements Health and Safety Act for theProvince of Ontario..1 Where conditions are unstable, DCC Representative toverify and advise methods.

.2 Obtain permit from authority having jurisdiction fortemporary diversion of water course.



.3 Construct temporary Works to depths, heights and locations asindicated or directed by DCC Representative.

.4 During backfill operation:.1 Unless otherwise indicated or directed by DCCRepresentative, remove sheeting and shoring from excavations..2 Do not remove bracing until backfilling has reachedrespective levels of such bracing..3 Pull sheeting in increments that will ensure compactedbackfill is maintained at elevation at least 500 mm above toeof sheeting.

.5 When sheeting is required to remain in place, cut off tops atelevations as indicated.

.6 Upon completion of substructure construction:.1 Remove cofferdams, shoring and bracing..2 Remove excess materials from site and restorewatercourses as indicated and as directed by DCCRepresentative.

.7 Any and all cofferdams, shoring, bracing, and underpinningdesigns shall bear the stamp and signature of a qualifiedProfessional Engineer licensed to practice in the Province ofOntario.

3.7 DEWATERING AND HEAVE PREVENTION

.1 Keep excavations free of water while Work is in progress.

.2 Provide for DCC Representative's review approval details ofproposed dewatering or heave prevention methods, includingdikes, well points, and sheet pile cut-offs.

.3 Avoid excavation below groundwater table if quick conditionor heave is likely to occur..1 Prevent piping or bottom heave of excavations bygroundwater lowering, sheet pile cut-offs, or other means.

.4 Protect open excavations against flooding and damage due tosurface run-off.

.5 Dispose of water in accordance with Section 01 35 43 -Environmental Procedures to approved collection runoff areasand in manner not detrimental to public and private property,or portion of Work completed or under construction..1 Provide and maintain temporary drainage ditches andother diversions outside of excavation limits.



.6 Provide flocculation tanks, settling basins, or othertreatment facilities to remove suspended solids or othermaterials before discharging to storm sewers, watercourses ordrainage areas.

3.8 EXCAVATION

.1 Advise DCC Representative at least 7 days in advance ofexcavation operations for initial cross sections to be taken.

.2 Excavate to lines, grades, elevations and dimensions asindicated as directed by DCC Representative.

.3 Remove concrete masonry paving walks demolished foundationsand rubble and other obstructions encountered duringexcavation in accordance with Section 02 41 13 - SelectiveSite Demolition.

.4 Excavation must not interfere with bearing capacity ofadjacent foundations.

.5 Do not disturb soil within branch spread of trees or shrubsthat are to remain..1 If excavating through roots, excavate by hand and cutroots with sharp axe or saw.

.6 For trench excavation, unless otherwise authorized by DCCRepresentative in writing, do not excavate more than 30 m oftrench in advance of installation operations and do not leaveopen more than 15 m at end of day's operation.

.7 Keep excavated and stockpiled materials safe distance awayfrom edge of trench as directed by DCC Representative.

.8 Restrict vehicle operations directly adjacent to opentrenches.

.9 Dispose of surplus and unsuitable excavated material inapproved location off site.

.10 Do not obstruct flow of surface drainage or naturalwatercourses.

.11 Earth bottoms of excavations to be undisturbed soil, level,free from loose, soft or organic matter.

.12 Notify DCC Representative when bottom of excavation isreached.

.13 Obtain DCC Representative approval of completed excavation.



.14 Remove unsuitable material from trench bottom including thosethat extend below required elevations to extent and depth asdirected by DCC Representative.

.15 Correct unauthorized over-excavation as follows:.1 Fill under footings with concrete specified forfootings..2 Fill under paved areas with Granular B, Type IIcompacted to not less than 100 % of Standard Proctor maximumdry density.

.16 Hand trim, make firm and remove loose material and debrisfrom excavations..1 Where material at bottom of excavation is disturbed,compact foundation soil to density at least equal toundisturbed soil..2 Clean out rock seams and fill with concrete mortar orgrout to approval of DCC Representative.

.17 Install geotextiles in accordance with Section 31 32 19.01 -Geotextiles.

3.9 FILL TYPES AND COMPACTION

.1 Use types of fill as indicated or specified below. Compactiondensities are percentages of maximum densities obtained fromASTM D 698..1 Exterior side of perimeter walls: use Select BackfillMaterial fill to subgrade level. Compact to 100% of correctedmaximum dry density..2 Within building area: use Granular B, Type II tounderside of base course for floor slabs. Compact to 100% ofcorrected maximum dry density..3 Under concrete slabs: provide 150 mm compacted thicknessbase course of Granular A fill topped with shearmat filler asindicated to underside of slab. Compact base course to 100%..4 Retaining walls: use Granular A fill to subgrade levelon high side for minimum 500 mm from wall and compact to 100%. For remaining portion, use Type 3 fill compacted to 100%..5 Place unshrinkable fill in areas as indicated.

3.10 BEDDING AND SURROUND OF UNDERGROUND SERVICES

.1 Place and compact granular material for bedding and surroundof underground services as indicated and as specified inSection 33 11 16 - Site Water Utility Distribution PipingSection 33 31 13 - Public Sanitary Utility Sewerage PipingSection 33 41 00 - Storm Utility Drainage Piping.

.2 Place bedding and surround material in unfrozen condition.



3.11 BACKFILLING

.1 Vibratory compaction equipment:.

.2 Do not proceed with backfilling operations until completionof following:.1 DCC Representative has inspected and approvedinstallations..2 DCC Representative has inspected and approved ofconstruction below finish grade..3 Inspection, testing, approval, and recording location ofunderground utilities..4 Removal of concrete formwork..5 Removal of shoring and bracing; backfilling of voidswith satisfactory soil material.

.3 Areas to be backfilled to be free from debris, snow, ice,water and frozen ground.

.4 Do not use backfill material which is frozen or contains ice,snow or debris.

.5 Place backfill material in uniform layers not exceeding 150mm compacted thickness up to grades indicated. Compact eachlayer before placing succeeding layer.

.6 Backfilling around installations:.1 Place bedding and surround material as specifiedelsewhere..2 Do not backfill around or over cast-in-place concretewithin 24 hours after placing of concrete..3 Place layers simultaneously on both sides of installedWork to equalize loading..4 Where temporary unbalanced earth pressures are liable todevelop on walls or other structures:

.1 Permit concrete to cure for minimum 14 days oruntil it has sufficient strength to withstand earth andcompaction pressure and approval obtained from DCCRepresentative or:.2 If approved by DCC Representative, erect bracing orshoring to counteract unbalance, and leave in placeuntil removal is approved by DCC Representative.

.7 Place unshrinkable fill in areas as indicated.

.8 Consolidate and level unshrinkable fill with internalvibrators.

.9 Install drainage and filter system in backfill as indicatedas directed by DCC Representative.



3.12 RESTORATION

.1 Upon completion of Work, remove waste materials and debris inaccordance to Section 01 74 21 - Construction/DemolitionWaste Management and Disposal, trim slopes, and correctdefects as indicated by DCC Representative.

.2 Replace topsoil as indicated as directed by DCCRepresentative.

.3 Reinstate lawns to elevation which existed before excavation.

.4 Reinstate pavements and sidewalks disturbed by excavation tothickness, structure and elevation which existed beforeexcavation.

.5 Clean and reinstate areas affected by Work as directed by DCCRepresentative.

.6 Use temporary plating to support traffic loads overunshrinkable fill for initial 24 hours.

.7 Protect newly graded areas from traffic and erosion andmaintain free of trash or debris.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Roadway Embankments Page 1Storage FacilityGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 This section specifies requirements for roadway excavation,borrow excavate and embankment construction.


.1 Section 02 41 13 - Selective Site Demolition.

.2 Section 31 11 00 Clearing and Grubbing.


.4 Section 32 11 23 - Aggregate Base Courses.

.5 Section 32 11 16.01 - Granular Sub-Base.

.6 Section 32 91 19.13 - Topsoil Placement and Grading.

1.3 REFERENCES

.1 Definitions:.1 Rock Excavation: excavation of:

.1 Material from solid masses of igneous, sedimentaryor metamorphic rock which, prior to removal, wasintegral with parent mass. Material that cannot beripped with reasonable effort with a Caterpillar D9crawler bulldozer or equivalent to be consideredintegral with parent mass..2 Boulder or rock fragments measuring in volume 1cubic metre or more.

.2 Common Excavation: excavation of materials that are notRock Excavation or Stripping..3 Unclassified Excavation: excavation of whatevercharacter other than stripping encountered in the Work..4 Stripping: excavation of organic material coveringoriginal ground..5 Embankment: material derived from usable excavation andplaced above original ground or stripped surface up to top ofsubgrade..6 Waste Material: material unsuitable for embankment,embankment foundation or material surplus to requirements..7 Borrow Material: material obtained from areas outsideright-of-way and required for construction of embankments orfor other portions of work.



.8 Topsoil: material capable of supporting good vegetativegrowth and suitable for use in top dressing, landscaping andseeding.

.2 Reference Standards:.1 ASTM International

.1 ASTM D 698-12e2, Standard Test Method forLaboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil UsingStandard Effort (12,000 ft-lbf/ft3) (600 kN-m/m3).

.2 American Association of State Highway and TransportationOfficials (AASHTO)

.1 AASHTO T99-15, Standard Method of test forMoisture-Density Relations of Soils Using a 2.5 kg(5.5lb) Rammer and 305 mm (12 in) Drop.

.3 Ontario Provincial Standards (OPS) for Roads and publicWorks, Ministry of Transportation (MTO), latest edition..4 Ontario Ministry of the Environment StormwaterManagement Planning and Design (2003)..5 Transportation Association of Canada (TAC) NationalGuide to Sediment and Erosion Control Roadway projects(2005)..6 Environmental Assessment Screening Report, NewInfrastructure pertaining to Department of National Defence(DND) Facilities, July, 2014, Defence Construction Canada(DCC).




.1 Regulatory Requirements:.1 Adhere to regulations of authority having jurisdiction..2 Adhere to Provincial and National Environmentalrequirements when potentially toxic materials are involved.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Embankment materials require approval by DCC Representative.

.2 Material used for embankment not to contain more than 3%organic matter by mass, frozen lumps, weeds, sod, roots,logs, stumps or other unsuitable material.



.3 Borrow material:.1 Obtain from sources such as quarry, or borrow pit asapproved by DCC Representative.

.1 Earth Embankment materials to consist of acceptableearth material and processed rock material free fromobjectionable quantities of organic matter, frozen soil,stumps, trees, moss, and other unsuitable materials..2 Rock Embankment material to consist of fragmentedrock produced by drilling and blasting operations, andboulders which cannot be placed in layers as specifiedfor Earth Embankments.

.1 Rock Embankment to conform to gradation asfollows:

Sieve PercentDesignation Passing by

Weight150 mm 100100 mm 85 - 10075 mm 10 - 50No. 200 * 0 - 3

.2 * Gradation is determined by that portionpassing 75 mm screen.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

.1 Verification of Conditions: verify that condition ofsubstrate is acceptable for roadway embankment Work:.1 Visually inspect substrate in presence of DCCRepresentative..2 Inform DCC Representative of unacceptable conditionsimmediately upon discovery..3 Proceed with installation only after unacceptableconditions have been remedied and after receipt of writtenapproval to proceed from DCC Representative.

3.2 COMPACTION EQUIPMENT

.1 Compaction equipment: vibratory rollers or vibrating platecompactors capable of obtaining required density in materialson project..1 Demonstrate compaction equipment effectiveness onspecified material and lift thickness by documentedperformance of test-strip before start of Work..2 Replace or supplement equipment that does not achievespecified densities.



.2 Operate compaction equipment continuously in each embankmentwhen placing material.

3.3 WATER DISTRIBUTORS

.1 Apply water with equipment capable of uniform distribution.


.1 Place top soil and finish grading in accordance with Section32 91 19.13 - Topsoil Placement and Grading.

.2 Commence topsoil stripping of areas as indicated as directedby DCC Representative after brush weeds and grasses have beenremoved from these areas.

.3 Strip topsoil to depths as directed by DCC Representative. Donot mix topsoil with subsoil.

.4 Stockpile in locations as directed by DCC Representative..1 Stockpile height: not to exceed 2 m.

.5 Dispose of unused topsoil to location as indicated asdirected by DCC Representative off site.

.6 Remove clearing and grubbing debris from stripping.

.7 Spread organic stripping, on completion of excavation andembankment construction, on slopes and trim or remove fromsite if quantity exceeds ability to grade on site.

3.5 EXCAVATING

.1 General:.1 Notify DCC Representative when waste materials areencountered and remove to depth and extent directed..2 Sub-excavate 500 mm below subgrade in cut sectionsunless otherwise directed by DCC Representative.

.1 Compact top 150 mm below sub-excavate to minimum98% maximum dry density, to ASTM D 698..2 Replace with approved embankment material andcompact to specified embankment density.

.3 Treat ground slopes, where subgrade is on transitionfrom excavation to embankment, at grade points as directed byDCC Representative..4 Treat ground slopes, where subgrade is on transitionfrom excavation to embankment, at grade points in accordancewith standard plans for "Cut and Fill Construction Methods atGrade Points" as directed by DCC Representative.



.2 Drainage:.1 Maintain profiles, crowns and cross slopes to providegood surface drainage..2 Provide ditches as work progresses to provide drainage..3 Construct interceptor ditches as indicated or asdirected before excavating or placing embankment in adjacentarea.

.3 Rock excavation:.1 Notify DCC Representative, when material appearing toconform to classification for rock is encountered, to enablemeasurements to be made to determine volume of rock. Provide12 hour notification..2 Blasting is not permitted..3 Shatter rock through mechanical means to 300 mm belowsubgrade elevation as indicated.

.4 Borrow Excavation:.1 Completely use in embankments, suitable materialsremoved from right-of-way excavations before taking materialfrom borrow areas..2 Obtain embankment materials, in excess of what isavailable from cut areas, from designated borrow areas.

.1 DCC Representative to designate extent of borrowareas and allowable depth of excavation..2 Remove waste and stripping material from borrowpits to designated locations.

.3 Slope edges of borrow areas to minimum 3:1 and providedrainage as directed..4 Trim and leave borrow pits in condition to permitaccurate measurement of material removed.

3.6 EMBANKMENTS

.1 Scarify or bench existing slopes in side hill or slopingsections to ensure proper bond between new materials andexisting surfaces..1 Method used to be pre-approved in writing by DCCRepresentative.

.2 Break up or scarify existing road surface prior to placingembankment material.

.3 Do not place material which is frozen nor place material onfrozen surfaces except in areas authorized by DCCRepresentative.

.4 Maintain crowned surface during construction to ensure readyrun-off of surface water.



.5 Drain low areas before placing materials..1 Place and compact to full width in layers not exceeding200 mm loose thickness. DCC Representative may authorizethicker lifts if specified compaction can be achieved and ifmaterial contains more than 25% by volume stone and rockfragments larger than 100 mm.

.6 Where material consists of rock:.1 Place to full width in layers of sufficient depth tocontain maximum sized rocks, but in no case is layerthickness to exceed 1 m..2 Distribute rock material to fill voids with smallerfragments to form compact mass..3 Fill surface voids at subgrade level with rock spalls orselected material to form earth-tight surface..4 Do not place boulders and rock fragments with dimensionsexceeding 150 mm within 300 mm of pavement subgradeelevation.

.7 Deductions from excavation will be made for overbuild ofembankments.

3.7 COMPACTION

.1 Break material down to sizes suitable for compaction and mixfor uniform moisture to full depth of layer.

.2 Deposit, spread, and level, embankment material in layers 200mm maximum thickness before compaction..1 Compact each layer of embankment until compactionequipment achieves no further significant consolidation..2 Ensure required compaction for each layer before placingany material for next layer.

.3 Use specialized compaction equipment supplemented by routing,hauling, and leveling equipment over each layer of fill.

.4 Obtain written approval from DCC Representative before usingspecialized compaction equipment such as tamping rollers,vibratory rollers, or other alternate compaction equipmentthat produces the required results.1 For tamping rollers, use equipment that exerts 1000 kPaminimum of pressure on tamping surface of each tamping footin transverse row.

.5 Compact each layer to minimum 98% maximum dry density:ASTM D 698 except top 150 mm of subgrade..1 Compact top 150 mm to 100% maximum dry density.

.6 Add water or dry as required to bring moisture content ofmaterials to level required to achieve specified compaction.



3.8 FINISHING

.1 Shape entire roadbed to within 25 mm of design elevations.

.2 Finish slopes, ditch bottoms and borrow pits true to lines,grades and drawings where applicable. Scale slope by removingloose fragments, for cut slopes in bedrock steeper than 1:1.

.3 Remove rocks over 150 mm in dimension from slopes and ditchbottoms.

.4 Hand finish slopes that cannot be finished satisfactorily bymachine.

.5 Round top of backslope 1.5 m both sides of top of slope.

.6 Run tractor tracks over slopes exceeding 3 m in height toleave tracks parallel to centreline of highway.

.7 Trim between constructed slopes and edge of clearing toprovide drainage and free of humps, sags and ruts.

3.9 CLEANING




3.10 PROTECTION

.1 Maintain finished surfaces in condition conforming to thissection until acceptance by DCC Representative.

.2 Provide silt fences and erosion protection as required tomitigate and prevent impacts to adjacent properties.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Erosion and Sedimentation Page 1Storage Facility ControlGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 Temporary and permanent erosion and sediment control devices.


.1 Section 31 23 33.01 - Excavation, Trenching and Backfilling.

.2 Section 31 24 13 - Roadway Embankment.

.3 Section 31 37 00 Rip-rap.

1.3 REFERENCES

.1 ASTM D1777-96(2015) Test Method for Thickness of TextileMaterials.

.2 ASTM D3776-09a(2013) Test Methods for Mass Per Unit Area(Weight) of Fabric.

.3 ASTM D4355-14 Test Method for Deterioration of Geotextiles byExposure to Light, Moisture and Heat in a Xenon Arc TypeApparatus.

.4 ASTM D4632/D4632M-08(2013)e1 Test Method for Grab BreakingLoad and Elongation of Geotextiles.

.5 ASTM D4751-12 Test Method for Determining Apparent OpeningSize of a Geotextile.

.6 ASTM D6818-14 Test Method for Ultimate Tensile Properties ofTurf Reinforcement Mats.

.7 Reference Documents.1 Ontario Provincial Standards (OPS) for Roads and PublicWorks, Ministry of Transportation (MTO), latest edition..2 Ontario Ministry of the Environment StormwaterManagement Planning and Design (2003).3 Transportation Association of Canada (TAC) NationalGuide to Sediment and Erosion Control on roadway Projects(2005).4 Environmental Assessment Screening Report, NewInfrastructure pertaining to Department of National Defence(DND) Facilities, July, 2014, Defence Construction Canada(DCC).



1.4 DEFINITIONS

.1 Erosion: Deterioration, displacement, or transportation ofland surface by wind or water, intensified by land clearingpractices related to construction activates.

.2 Rain or Rain Storm: An event defined causing the pooling ofwater on road or other impervious surfaces.

.3 Sediment: Particulate matter transported and deposited as alayer of solid particles within a body of water.

.4 Snow Melt: An event in snow conditions when the temperatureis above 0 degrees C or when environmental conditions causingsnow on the ground to melt.

1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

.1 Design, supply, install and maintain erosion and sedimentcontrol system to prevent sedimentation of receiving streamsand wetlands.

1.6 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW


.2 The Erosion and Sedimentation Control measures are providedin the contract drawings. The measures indicated are theminimum requirement. Provide any changes or additionalmeasures as required due to Contractor's schedule and WorkPlan. Changes or additional measures are to be approved bythe DCC Representative. Submit plan for work a minimum of 14days prior to the work.

1.7 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION

.1 Section 01 33 00: Submittal Procedures.

.2 Test Reports: Submit substantiating engineering data, testresults of previous tests which purport to meet performancecriteria, and other supportive data.

.3 Installation Data: Manufacturer's special installationrequirements.




.1 Products of this Section: Manufactured to ISO 14000certification requirements.

.2 Any changes to the Erosion and Sediment Control Plan asprovided in contract drawings shall conform to applicableerosion and sedimentation control codes and standards and beunder direct supervision of a Professional Engineerexperienced in design of this Work and licensed in theProvince of Ontario. All changes or additional measures areto be approved by DCC Representative.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SILT FENCING

.1 Geotextile: Woven polypropylene filter fabric, resistant toultra violet degradation, in accordance with OntarioProvincial Standards (OPS).

.2 Posts: Wood or Galvanized steel T bar, 1200 mm minimumlength, painted fluorescent orange for safety.

.3 Stabilization Plates: Galvanized, 115 cm2 size.

.4 Ties: Galvanized wire, minimum 2 mm diameter. Heavy dutyplastic ties.

.5 Wire Reinforcement: Galvanized, 1.9 mm wire with maximum 150mm mesh spacing.

2.2 MULCHING

.1 Straw and Hay Mulches: Clean, free of seeds and noxiousweeds, non compacted.

.2 Tackifier: Organic tackifier.

2.3 CHECK DAMS

.1 Rock Check Dams: Well graded stone consisting of 200 mmrocks.

.2 Straw Bales as per Ontario Provincial Standards (OPS) forRoads and Public Works, Ministry of Transportation (MTO),latest edition.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

.1 The Erosion and Sediment Control Plan shall conform to localerosion and sediment control codes and standards to meet thefollowing:.1 Prevent loss of soil by storm water runoff..2 Prevent sedimentation in receiving streams..3 Prevent air pollution by dust and particulate matter.

3.2 INSTALLATION

.1 Install silt fences and check dams as indicated in SiteSpecific Environmental Protection Plan and any approvedrevised plans.

3.3 SILT FENCES

.1 Place silt fences at right angles of flow.

.2 Install successive, parallel fences to achieve requireddegree of control.

.3 Install silt fences in accordance to Ontario ProvincialStandards (OPS) for Roads and Public Works, Ministry ofTransportation (MTO), latest edition.

3.4 MULCHING

.1 Supply and place mulching in accordance to Ontario ProvincialStandards (OPS) for Roads and Public Works, Ministry ofTransportation (MTO), latest edition.

3.5 CHECK DAMS

.1 Check Dams:.1 Supply and install check dams in accordance to OntarioProvincial Standards (OPS) for Roads and Public Works,Ministry of Transportation (MTO), latest edition.

3.6 EROSION CONTROL BLANKETS

.1 Supply and install Erosion Control Blankets in accordance toOntario Provincial Standards (OPS) for Roads and PublicWorks, Ministry of Transportation (MTO), latest edition.



3.7 MISCELLANEOUS MEASURES

.1 Diversion Structures: Construct swales and berms as indicatedor directed by DCC Representative to divert surface run offfrom disturbed areas.

.2 Sediment Trap:.1 Construct storage area to size and elevations indicatedon ESCP, to the requirements of OPSS 805..2 Construct rock outlet to dimensions indicated.

.3 Sediment Basin:.1 Construct basin with controlled water release structure..2 Construct channel with a lining of rip rap..3 Storm Drain Inlet Protection: Place gravel and stonewith a wire mesh filter around inlet.

.4 Rip Rap: Install rip rap as shown. Fill open joints with rockspalls or cobbles.

.5 Temporary Storm Drain Diversion: Install stone spillway toredirect existing storm drain system or outfall channel tosediment trap or basin.

.6 Dewatering Trap: In accordance with OPSS 805.

3.8 MONITORING AND MAINTENANCE

.1 Comply with maintenance requirements specified and with localstandards.

.2 Inspect and maintain sediment and erosion control measures ona weekly basis as a minimum.

.3 Silt Fences:.1 Maintain integrity of silt fences..2 In addition to weekly inspections, inspect silt fenceswithin twenty four (24) of rainfall, and snow melt, and dailyduring prolonged rainfall or storm. Correct deficiencies..3 During holidays and when construction is not inprogress, maintain and monitor silt fences on a weekly basisor as required by the DCC Representative and the ESCP..4 Daily review location of silt fences in areas whereconstruction activities have changed natural contours anddrainage run off. Relocate or add additional measures asrequired to maintain required effectiveness..5 Repair or replace damaged products within twenty four(24) hours.



.6 Remove sediment deposits when deposit reachesapproximately one third (1/3) the height of silt fence.Dispose of sediment in location where sediment will not erodeinto construction areas, offsite properties or watercourses..7 Do not remove silt fences until directed by the DCCRepresentative.

.4 Check Dams:.1 In addition to weekly inspection, inspect check damsregularly and after every runoff producing storm..2 Make necessary repairs.

.1 Remove accumulated leaves and sediments from behinddam when they reach a depth of one half the originalheight of the dam..2 Restore stone to maintain correct height..3 Sandbag Dams: Inspect sandbag fabric for signs ofdeterioration.

.5 Erosion Control Blankets:.1 Monitor erosion control blanket for secure anchorage..2 Replace damaged erosion control blankets..3 Reseed surface as required prior to replacement. Repairinstallation and anchoring as required.

.6 Tackifier: Reapply tackifier when erosion and disturbance hasoccurred on stockpiles, berms and embankments, as required.

.7 Seeding: Reseed and repair seeded areas that have become bareor damaged by construction activity as specified in Section32 92 19.

.8 Diversion Structures: Remove sedimentation when sedimentexceeds <38 mm in depth; place in designated area on site.

3.9 CLEAN-UP AND REMOVAL

.1 Remove check dams after final stabilization is achieved.

.2 Remove and dispose of materials..1 Remove accumulated sediment or spread to match finishedgrade; ensure proper drainage.

.3 Stabilize area disturbed by removal operations.

.4 Clean, repair or re-instate erosion control measures that aredesignated as permanent.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Geotextiles Page 1Storage FacilityGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 This section specified supply and installation of geotextilematerials for drainage ditches and roadways.



1.3 REFERENCES

.1 ASTM International.1 ASTM A123/A123M-13, Standard Specification for Zinc(Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products..2 ASTM D4491-99a(2014)E1, Standard Test Methods for WaterPermeability of Geotextiles by Permittivity..3 ASTM D4595-11, Standard Test Method for TensileProperties of Geotextiles by the Wide-Width Strip Method..4 ASTM D4716-14, Standard Test Method for Determining the(In-Plane) Flow Rate Per Unit Width and HydraulicTransmissivity of a Geosynthetic Using a Constant Head..5 ASTM D4751-12, Standard Test Method for DeterminingApparent Opening Size of a Geotextile.

.2 Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB).1 CAN/CGSB-4.2 No. 11.2-2013, Textile Test Methods -Bursting Strength - Ball Burst Test (Extension of September1989)..2 CAN/CGSB-148.1, Methods of Testing Geotextiles andComplete Geomembranes.

.1 No.2-M85, Methods of Testing Geosynthetics - Massper Unit Area..2 No.3-M85, Methods of Testing Geosynthetics -Thickness of Geotextiles..3 No.6.1-93, Methods of Testing Geotextiles andGeomembranes - Bursting Strength of Geotextiles Under NoCompressive Load..4 No.7.3-92, Methods of Testing Geotextiles andGeomembranes - Grab Tensile Test for Geotextiles..5 No. 10-94, Methods of Testing Geosynthetics -Geotextiles - Filtration Opening Size.

.3 CSA International.1 CSA G40.20/G40.21-13, General Requirements for Rolled orWelded Structural Quality Steel/Structural Quality Steel.

.4 Ontario Provincial Standard Specifications (OPSS)



.1 OPSS 1860-April 2012, Material Specification forGeotextiles.



.2 Product Data:.1 Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed productliterature and data sheets for geotextiles and includeproduct characteristics, performance criteria, physical size,finish and limitations.

.3 Samples:.1 Submit following samples 4 weeks prior to beginningWork.

.1 Minimum length of 2 m of roll width of geotextile.

.2 Methods of joining.

.4 Test and Evaluation Reports:.1 Submit copies of mill test data and certificate at least4 weeks prior to start of Work.

.5 Construction Waste Management:.1 Submit project Waste Management Plan Waste Reductionworkplan highlighting recycling and salvage requirements..2 Submit calculations on end-of-project recycling rates,salvage rates, and landfill rates demonstrating that 75% ofconstruction wastes were recycled or salvaged.



.2 Storage and Handling Requirements:.1 Store materials off ground indoors in dry location andin accordance with manufacturer's recommendations in clean,dry, well-ventilated area..2 Store and protect geotextiles from direct sunlight andUV rays..3 Replace defective or damaged materials with new.



.3 Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return bymanufacturer of pallets, crates, padding, and packagingmaterials as specified in Construction Waste Management PlanWaste Reduction Workplan in accordance with Section 01 74 21- Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal andSection 01 47 15 - Sustainable Requirements: Construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIAL

.1 Geotextile: Class II non-woven synthetic fibre fabric,supplied in rolls, in accordance with OPSS, Volume 2,Specification No. 1010.

.2 Securing pins and washers: to CSA G40.21, Grade 300W,hot-dipped galvanized with minimum zinc coating of 600 g/m2

to ASTM A 123/A 123M.

.3 Factory seams: sewn in accordance with manufacturer'srecommendations.

.4 Thread for sewn seams: equal or better resistance to chemicaland biological degradation than geotextile.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

.1 Verification of Conditions: verify that conditions ofsubstrate previously installed under other Sections orContracts are acceptable for geotextile material installationin accordance with manufacturer's written instructions..1 Visually inspect substrate in presence of DCCRepresentative..2 Inform DCC Representative of unacceptable conditionsimmediately upon discovery..3 Proceed with installation only after unacceptableconditions have been remedied and after receipt of writtenapproval to proceed from DCC Representative.

3.2 INSTALLATION

.1 Place geotextile material by unrolling onto graded surface inorientation, manner and locations indicated.



.2 Place geotextile material smooth and free of tension stress,folds, wrinkles and creases.

.3 Place geotextile material on sloping surfaces in onecontinuous length from toe of slope to upper extent ofgeotextile.

.4 Overlap each successive strip of geotextile 600 mm overpreviously laid strip.

.5 Pin successive strips of geotextile with securing pins.

.6 Protect installed geotextile material from displacement,damage or deterioration before, during and after placement ofmaterial layers.

.7 After installation, cover with overlying layer within 4 hoursof placement.

.8 Replace damaged or deteriorated geotextile to approval of DCCRepresentative.

.9 Place and compact soil layers in accordance with Section31 23 33.01 - Excavating, Trenching and Backfilling andSection 31 24 13 - Roadway Embankments.

3.3 CLEANING




3.4 PROTECTION

.1 Vehicular traffic not permitted directly on geotextile.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Rip-Rap Page 1Storage FacilityGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 This section specifies stone and geotextiles for rip-rapinstallation.


.1 Section 31 24 13 - Roadway Embankments.

.2 Section 31 32 19.01 - Geotextiles.

1.3 REFERENCES

.1 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).1 ASTM C144-11, Standard Specification for Aggregate forMasonry Mortar..2 ASTM C618-15, Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ashand Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use as a MineralAdmixture in Concrete.

.2 Canadian Standards Association (CSA).1 CAN/CSA-A23.1-09(R2014), Concrete Materials and Methodsof Concrete Construction..2 CAN/CSA-A3000-13, Cementitions Materials Compendium.



.5 Transportation Association of Canada (TAC) National Guide toSediment and Erosion Control on roadway Projects (2005).




.2 Collect and separate plastic paper packaging corrugatedcardboard in accordance with Waste Management Plan.



.3 Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic in designatedcontainers.


.5 Divert left over aggregate materials from landfill to localquarry facility for reuse as approved by DCC Representative.

.6 Divert left over hardened cement materials from landfill tolocal quarry facility for reuse as approved by DCCRepresentative.

.7 Divert left over geotextiles to local plastic recyclingfacility program as approved by DCC Representative.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STONE

.1 Hard, dense with relative density (formally specific gravity)not less than 2.65, durable quarry stone, free from seams,cracks or other structural defects, to meet following sizedistribution for use intended:.1 Armour rip-rap:

.1 Not more than 10% of total volume of stones withindividual volume less than 30 dm3..2 Not less than 50% of total volume of stones withindividual volume of 225 dm3 or more..3 Remaining percentage of total volume to haveuniform distribution of stones between 30 and 225 dm3

size..2 Heavy rip-rap:


size..3 Random rip-rap:


size..4 Hand placed rip-rap:



.1 Minimum size of individual stones 10 dm3.

.2 Not less than 75% of total volume of stones withindividual volume of 25 dm3 or more..3 Supply rock spalls or cobbles to fill open joints.

2.2 GEOTEXTILE FILTER

.1 Geotextile: in accordance with Section 31 32 19.01 -Geotextiles.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PLACING

.1 Where rip-rap is to be placed on slopes, excavate trench attoe of slope to dimensions as indicated.

.2 Fine grade area to be rip-rapped to uniform, even surface.Fill depressions with suitable material and compact toprovide firm bed.

.3 Place geotextile on prepared surface in accordance withSection 31 32 19.01 - Geotextiles and as indicated. Avoidpuncturing geotextile. Vehicular traffic over geotextile notpermitted.

.4 Place rip-rap to thickness and details as indicated.

.5 Place stones in manner approved by DCC Representative tosecure surface and create a stable mass. Place larger stonesat bottom of slopes.

.6 Hand placing:.1 Use larger stones for lower courses and as headers forsubsequent courses..2 Stagger vertical joints and fill voids with rock spallsor cobbles..3 Finish surface evenly, free of large openings and neatin appearance.

.7 Mortar:.1 Use mortar within one hour after water has been added.Do not add additional water after initial mixing..2 Begin applying mortar at bottom courses above water lineand work upwards completely filling voids except for subdrainage relief holes as indicated, and leaving outer facesof stones exposed. Remove excess mortar to expose faces ofstones as indicated.



.3 Cure and protect mortar in accordance with CAN/CSA-A23.1by using absorptive mats keeping fabric continuously wet.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Granular Sub-Base Page 1Storage FacilityGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 This section specifies requirements for obtaining and placinggravel or quarried stone as a granular sub-base to lines,grades and typical cross-section



1.3 REFERENCES

.1 ASTM International.1 ASTM C117-13, Standard Test Methods for Material FinerThan 0.075 mm Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing..2 ASTM C131-14, Standard Test Method for Resistance toDegradation of Small-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion andImpact in the Los Angeles Machine..3 ASTM C136-14, Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis ofFine and Coarse Aggregates..4 ASTM D698-12e1, Standard Test Methods for LaboratoryCompaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort(12,400ft-lbf/ft3) (600kN-m/m3)..5 ASTM D1557-12e1, Standard Test Method for LaboratoryCompaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort(56,000ft-lbf/ft3) (2,700kN-m/m3)..6 ASTM D1883-16, Standard Test Method for CBR (CaliforniaBearing Ratio) of Laboratory Compacted Soils..7 ASTM D4318-10e1, Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit,Plastic Limit and Plasticity Index of Soils.


.3 U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) / Office of Water.1 EPA 832/R-92-005, Storm Water Management forConstruction Activities: Developing Pollution PreventionPlans and Best Management Practices.

.4 Ontario provincial Standards (OPS) for Roads and Publicworks, Ministry of Transportation (MTO), latest edition.








.2 Sustainable Design Submittals:.1 Erosion and Sedimentation Control: submit copy oferosion and sedimentation control plan in accordance with EPA832/R-92-2005 authorities having jurisdiction and Section 0147 15 - Sustainable Requirements: Construction..2 Construction Waste Management:

.1 Submit project Waste Management Plan and WasteReduction Workplan highlighting recycling and salvagerequirements..2 Submit calculations on end-of-project recyclingrates, salvage rates, and landfill rates demonstratingthat percentage of construction wastes that wererecycled or salvaged.

.3 Regional Materials: submit evidence that projectincorporates required percentage of regional materials andproducts, showing their cost, distance from project tofurthest site of extraction or manufacture, and total cost ofmaterials for project.



.2 Storage and Handling Requirements:.1 Store materials in accordance with manufacturer'srecommendations erosion and sedimentation control plan..2 Replace defective or damaged materials with new.

.3 Develop Construction Waste Management Plan and WasteReduction Workplan related to Work of this Section and inaccordance with Section 01 47 15 - Sustainable Requirements:Construction.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Granular sub-base material: in accordance with Section31 05 16 - Aggregate Materials and following requirements:.1 Granular B, Type II in accordance with OPSS.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

.1 Verification of Conditions: verify conditions of substratepreviously installed under other Sections or Contracts areacceptable for granular sub-base installation in accordancewith manufacturer's written instructions..1 Visually inspect substrate in presence of DCCRepresentative..2 Inform DCC Representative of unacceptable conditionsimmediately upon discovery..3 Proceed with installation only after unacceptableconditions have been remedied and after receipt of writtenapproval to proceed from DCC Representative.

3.2 PREPARATION

.1 Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control:.1 Provide temporary erosion and sedimentation controlmeasures to prevent soil erosion and discharge ofsoil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacentproperties and walkways, according to requirements ofauthorities having jurisdiction sediment and erosion controldrawings sediment and erosion control plan, specific to site,that complies with EPA 832/R-92-005 or requirements ofauthorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent..2 Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion and sedimentationcontrol measures during construction until permanentvegetation has been established..3 Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restoreand stabilize areas disturbed during removal.

3.3 PLACING

.1 Place granular sub-base after subgrade is inspected andapproved by DCC Representative.



.2 Construct granular sub-base to depth and grade in areasindicated.

.3 Ensure no frozen material is placed.

.4 Place material only on clean unfrozen surface, free from snowor ice.

.5 Begin spreading sub-base material on crown line or high sideof one-way slope.

.6 Place granular sub-base materials using methods which do notlead to segregation or degradation.

.7 For spreading and shaping material, use spreader boxes havingadjustable templates or screeds which will place material inuniform layers of required thickness.

.8 Place material to full width in uniform layers not exceeding150 mm compacted thickness..1 DCC Representative may authorize thicker lifts ifspecified compaction can be achieved.

.9 Shape each layer to smooth contour and compact to specifieddensity before succeeding layer is placed.

.10 Remove and replace portion of layer in which material hasbecome segregated during spreading.

3.4 COMPACTION

.1 Compaction equipment to be capable of obtaining requiredmaterial densities.

.2 Efficiency of equipment not specified to be proved at leastas efficient as specified equipment at no extra cost andwritten approval must be received from DCC Representativebefore use.

.3 Equipped with device that records hours of actual work, notmotor running hours.

.4 Compact to density of not less than 100% maximum dry densityin accordance with ASTM D 698.

.5 Shape and roll alternately to obtain smooth, even anduniformly compacted sub-base.

.6 Apply water as necessary during compaction to obtainspecified density.



.7 In areas not accessible to rolling equipment, compact tospecified density with mechanical tampers approved by DCCRepresentative.

.8 Correct surface irregularities by loosening and adding orremoving material until surface is within specifiedtolerance.

3.5 PROOF ROLLING

.1 For proof rolling use standard roller of 45400 kg gross masswith four pneumatic tires each carrying 11350 kg and inflatedto 620 kPa. Four tires arranged abreast with centre tocentre spacing of 730 mm maximum.

.2 Obtain written approval from DCC Representative to use nonstandard proof rolling equipment.

.3 Proof roll at level in sub-base as indicated..1 If non standard proof rolling equipment is approved, DCCRepresentative will determine level of proof rolling.

.4 Make sufficient passes with proof roller to subject everypoint on surface to three separate passes of loaded tire.

.5 Where proof rolling reveals areas of defective subgrade:.1 Remove sub-base and subgrade material to depth andextent as directed by DCC Representative..2 Backfill excavated subgrade with common material andcompact in accordance with this section..3 Replace sub-base material and compact.

.6 Where proof rolling reveals areas of defective sub-base,remove and replace in accordance with this section at noextra cost.

3.6 CLEANING



.3 Waste Management: separate waste materials for reuse andrecycling in accordance with Section 01 74 21 -Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal 01 4715 - Sustainable Requirements: Construction.



.1 Remove recycling containers and bins from site anddispose of materials at appropriate facility.

3.7 SITE TOLERANCES

.1 Finished sub-base surface to be within 10 mm of elevation asindicated but not uniformly high or low.

3.8 PROTECTION

.1 Maintain finished sub-base in condition conforming to thissection until succeeding base is constructed, or untilgranular sub-base is accepted by DCC Representative.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Aggregate Base Courses Page 1Storage FacilityGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 This section specified requirements for obtaining and placingcrushed gravel or quarried stone as a granular base to lines,grades and typical cross sections indicted, or as directed byDCC Representative.




1.3 REFERENCES

.1 ASTM International.1 ASTM C117-13, Standard Test Methods for Material FinerThan 0.075 mm (No. 200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates byWashing..2 ASTM C131-14, Standard Test Method for Resistance toDegradation of Small-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion andImpact in the Los Angeles Machine..3 ASTM C136-14, Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis ofFine and Coarse Aggregates..4 ASTM D698-12e2, Standard Test Methods for LaboratoryCompaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort(12,400ft-lbf/ft3) (600kN-m/m3)..5 ASTM D1557-12e1, Test Method for Laboratory CompactionCharacteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort(56,000ft-lbf/ft3) (2,700kN-m/m3)..6 ASTM D1883-16, Standard Test Method for CBR (CaliforniaBearing Ratio) of Laboratory Compacted Soils..7 ASTM D4318-10e1, Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit,Plastic Limit and Plasticity Index of Soils.



.4 Ontario Provincial Standards (OPS) for Roads and publicWorks, Ministry of Transportation (MTO), latest edition.








.2 Sustainable Design Submittals:.1 Erosion and Sedimentation Control: submit copy oferosion and sedimentation control plan in accordance with EPA832/R-92-2005 authorities having jurisdiction and Section01 47 15 - Sustainable Requirements: Construction..2 Construction Waste Management:




.1 Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance withSection 01 61 00 - Common Product Requirements 31 05 16 -Aggregate Materials and with manufacturer's writteninstructions.

.2 Storage and Handling Requirements:.1 Stockpile minimum 50% of total aggregate required priorto beginning operation..2 Store materials off ground indoors in dry location andin accordance with manufacturer's recommendations in clean,dry, well-ventilated area..3 Replace defective or damaged materials with new.



.4 Store cement in weathertight bins or silos that provideprotection from dampness and easy access for inspection andidentification of each shipment.

.3 Develop Construction Waste Management Plan Waste ReductionWorkplan related to Work of this Section and in accordancewith Section 01 47 15 - Sustainable Requirements:Construction.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Granular base and shouldering: material in accordance withSection 31 05 16 - Aggregate Materials and followingrequirements:.1 Granular A, OPSS, Volume 6, Specification 1010.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

.1 Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control:.1 Provide temporary erosion and sedimentation controlmeasures to prevent soil erosion and discharge ofsoil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacentproperties and walkways, according to requirements ofauthorities having jurisdiction sediment and erosion controldrawings sediment and erosion control plan, specific to site,that complies with EPA 832/R-92-005 or requirements ofauthorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent..2 Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion and sedimentationcontrol measures during construction until permanentvegetation has been established..3 Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restoreand stabilize areas disturbed during removal.



3.2 PLACEMENT AND INSTALLATION

.1 Place granular base after sub-base surface is inspected andapproved in writing by DCC Representative.

.2 Placing:.1 Construct granular base to depth and grade in areasindicated..2 Ensure no frozen material is placed..3 Place material only on clean unfrozen surface, free fromsnow and ice..4 Begin spreading base material on crown line or on highside of one-way slope..5 Place material using methods which do not lead tosegregation or degradation of aggregate..6 For spreading and shaping material, use spreader boxeshaving adjustable templates or screeds which will placematerial in uniform layers of required thickness..7 Place material to full width in uniform layers notexceeding 150 mm compacted thickness.

.1 DCC Representative may authorize thicker lifts(layers) if specified compaction can be achieved.

.8 Shape each layer to smooth contour and compact tospecified density before succeeding layer is placed..9 Remove and replace that portion of layer in whichmaterial becomes segregated during spreading.

.3 Compaction Equipment:.1 Ensure compaction equipment is capable of obtainingrequired material densities..2 Efficiency of equipment not specified to be proved atleast as efficient as specified equipment at no extra costand written approval must be received from DCC Representativebefore use..3 Equipped with device that records hours of actual work,not motor running hours.

.4 Compacting:.1 Compact to density not less than 100% maximum drydensity to ASTM D 698..2 Shape and roll alternately to obtain smooth, even anduniformly compacted base..3 Apply water as necessary during compacting to obtainspecified density..4 In areas not accessible to rolling equipment, compact tospecified density with mechanical tampers approved in writingby DCC Representative..5 Correct surface irregularities by loosening and addingor removing material until surface is within specifiedtolerance.

.5 Proof rolling:



.1 For proof rolling use standard roller of 45400 kg grossmass with four pneumatic tires each carrying 11350 kg andinflated to 620 kPa. Four tires arranged abreast with centreto centre spacing of 730 mm..2 Obtain written approval from DCC Representative to usenon standard proof rolling equipment..3 Proof roll at level in granular base as indicated.

.1 If use of non standard proof rolling equipment isapproved, DCC Representative to determine level of proofrolling.

.4 Make sufficient passes with proof roller to subjectevery point on surface to three separate passes of loadedtire..5 Where proof rolling reveals areas of defective subgrade:

.1 Remove base, sub-base and subgrade material todepth and extent as directed by DCC Representative..2 Backfill excavated subgrade with common materialand compact in accordance with Section 32 11 16.01 -Granular Sub-Base..3 Replace sub-base material and compact in accordancewith Section 32 11 16.01 - Granular Sub-base..4 Replace base material and compact in accordancewith this Section.

.6 Where proof rolling reveals defective base or sub-base,remove defective materials to depth and extent as directed byDCC Representative and replace with new materials inaccordance with Section 32 11 16.01 - Granular Sub-base andthis section at no extra cost.

3.3 SITE TOLERANCES

.1 Finished base surface to be within plus or minus 10 mm ofestablished grade and cross section but not uniformly high orlow.

3.4 CLEANING



.3 Waste Management: separate waste materials for reuse andrecycling in accordance with Section 01 74 21 -Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal 01 4715 - Sustainable Requirements: Construction.



.1 Remove recycling containers and bins from site anddispose of materials at appropriate facility..2 Divert unused granular material from landfill to localquarry facility approved by DCC Representative.

3.5 PROTECTION

.1 Maintain finished base in condition conforming to thisSection until succeeding material is applied or untilacceptance by DCC Representative.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Roadway Dust Control Page 1Storage FacilityGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 This section specifies requirements for supply andapplication of water for alleviation or prevention of dustnuisance caused by traffic.


.1 Section 31 24 13 - Roadway Embankments.

1.3 REFERENCES

.1 Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB).1 CAN/CGSB-15.1-92, Calcium Chloride.

.2 U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA)/Office of Water.1 EPA 832/R-92-005, Storm Water Management forConstruction Activities: Developing Pollution PreventionPlans and Best Management Practices.







.2 Sustainable Design Submittals:.1 Erosion and Sedimentation Control: submit erosion andsedimentation control plan in accordance with EPA 832/R92-005authorities having jurisdiction and Section 01 47 15 -Sustainable Requirements: Construction..2 Construction Waste Management:







.2 Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: deliver materials tosite in original factory packaging, labelled withmanufacturer's name and address..1 Supply calcium chloride in quantities and at times asdirected by DCC Representative..2 Deliver calcium chloride to site in moisture-proof bagsin bulk in tank cars covered hopper cars covered trucks.Indicate name of manufacturer, name of product, net weight ormass, and percentage of calcium chloride guaranteed bymanufacturer.

.3 Storage and Handling Requirements:.1 Store bags of calcium chloride in weather-proofenclosures.





PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Water: in accordance with DCC Representative's approval.

.2 Calcium chloride shall not be used for dust control.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

.1 Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control:.1 Provide temporary erosion and sedimentation controlmeasures to prevent soil erosion and discharge ofsoil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacentproperties and walkways, according to requirements ofauthorities having jurisdiction sediment and erosion controldrawings sediment and erosion control plan, specific to site,that complies with EPA 832/R-92-005 or requirements ofauthorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent.

3.2 APPLICATION

.1 Apply water with equipment approved by DCC Representativewhen required or directed by DCC Representative.

.2 Apply water with distributors equipped with means of shut-offand with spray system to ensure uniform application.

3.3 CLEANING






.2 Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic indesignated containers.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Topsoil Placement and Page 1Storage Facility GradingGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 This section specifies requirements for preparation ofsubgrade, provision, placement, and fine grading of topsoilfor seeded lawn areas, planting beds, individual plantingpits and trees. Work includes supply and placement ofmaterials, complete with all related components andaccessories.


.1 Section 32 92 19 - Seeding.

1.3 REFERENCES

.1 Agriculture and Agri-Food Canada.1 The Canadian System of Soil Classification, ThirdEdition, 1998.

.2 Canadian Council of Ministers of the Environment.1 PN1340-2005, Guidelines for Compost Quality.






1.4 DEFINITIONS

.1 Compost:.1 Mixture of soil and decomposing organic matter used asfertilizer, mulch, or soil conditioner.



.2 Compost is processed organic matter containing 40% ormore organic matter as determined by Walkley-Black or Loss OnIgnition (LOI) test..3 Product must be sufficiently decomposed (i.e. stable) sothat any further decomposition does not adversely affectplant growth (C:N ratio below (25) (50)), and contain notoxic or growth inhibiting contaminates..4 Composed bio-solids to: CCME Guidelines for CompostQuality, Category (A) (B).



.2 Quality control submittals:.1 Soil testing: submit certified test reports showingcompliance with specified performance characteristics andphysical properties as described in PART 2 - SOURCE QUALITYCONTROL..2 Certificates: submit product certificates signed bymanufacturer certifying materials comply with specifiedperformance characteristics and criteria and physicalrequirements.


.1 Pre-installation meetings: conduct pre-installation meetingto verify project requirements, installation instructions andwarranty requirements in accordance with Section 01 32 16.07- Construction Progress Schedules - Bar (GANTT) Chart.



.2 Divert unused soil amendments from landfill to officialhazardous material collections site approved by DCCRepresentative.

.3 Do not dispose of unused soil amendments into sewer systems,into lakes, streams, onto ground or in locations where itwill pose health or environmental hazard.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TOPSOIL

.1 Topsoil for seeded areas planting beds: mixture ofparticulates, micro organisms and organic matter whichprovides suitable medium for supporting intended plantgrowth..1 Soil texture based on The Canadian System of SoilClassification, to consist of 20 to 70 % sand, minimum 7 %clay, and contain 2 to 10 % organic matter by weight..2 Contain no toxic elements or growth inhibitingmaterials..3 Finished surface free from:

.1 Debris and stones over 50 mm diameter.

.2 Course vegetative material, 10 mm diameter and 100mm length, occupying more than 2% of soil volume.

.4 Consistence: friable when moist.

2.2 SOIL AMENDMENTS

.1 Fertilizer:.1 Fertility: major soil nutrients present in followingamounts:.2 Nitrogen (N): 20 to 40 micrograms of available N pergram of topsoil..3 Phosphorus (P): 40 to 50 micrograms of phosphate pergram of topsoil..4 Potassium (K): 75 to 110 micrograms of potassium pergram of topsoil..5 Calcium, magnesium, sulfur and micro-nutrients presentin balanced ratios to support germination and/orestablishment of intended vegetation..6 Ph value: 6.5 to 8.0.

.2 Peatmoss:.1 Derived from partially decomposed species of SphagnumMosses..2 Elastic and homogeneous, brown in colour..3 Free of wood and deleterious material which couldprohibit growth..4 Shredded particle minimum size: 5 mm.

.3 Sand: washed coarse silica sand, medium to course textured.

.4 Organic matter: compost Category A or B in accordance withCCME PN1340, unprocessed organic matter, such as rottedmanure, hay, straw, bark residue or sawdust, meeting theorganic matter, stability and contaminant requirements.



.5 Use composts meeting Category B requirements for land fillreclamation and large scale industrial applications.

.6 Limestone:.1 Ground agricultural limestone..2 Gradation requirements: percentage passing by weight,90% passing 1.0 mm sieve, 50% passing 0.125 mm sieve.

.7 Fertilizer: industry accepted standard medium containingnitrogen, phosphorous, potassium and other micro-nutrientssuitable to specific plant species or application or definedby soil test.


.1 Advise DCC Representative of sources of topsoil andmanufactured topsoil to be utilized with sufficient lead timefor testing.

.2 Contractor is responsible for amendments to supply topsoil asspecified.

.3 Soil testing by recognized testing facility for PH, P and K,and organic matter.

.4 Testing of topsoil will be carried out by testing laboratorydesignated by DCC Representative..1 Soil sampling, testing and analysis to be in accordancewith Provincial standards.

PART 3 - EXECUTION








.1 Begin topsoil stripping of areas as indicated as directed byDCC Representative after area has been cleared of brush weedsand grasses and removed from site.

.2 Strip topsoil to depths as indicated as directed by DCCRepresentative..1 Avoid mixing topsoil with subsoil where textural qualitywill be moved outside acceptable range of intendedapplication.

.3 Stockpile in locations as directed by DCC Representative asindicated..1 Stockpile height not to exceed 2 m.

.4 Disposal of unused topsoil is to be in an environmentallyresponsible manner but not used as landfill as directed byDCC Representative.

.5 Protect stockpiles from contamination and compaction.

3.3 PREPARATION OF EXISTING GRADE

.1 Verify that grades are correct..1 If discrepancies occur, notify DCC Representative and donot commence work until instructed by DCC Representative.

.2 Grade soil, eliminating uneven areas and low spots, ensuringpositive drainage.

.3 Remove debris, roots, branches, stones in excess of 50 mmdiameter and other deleterious materials..1 Remove soil contaminated with calcium chloride, toxicmaterials and petroleum products..2 Remove debris which protrudes more than 75 mm abovesurface..3 Dispose of removed material off site.

.4 Cultivate entire area which is to receive topsoil to minimumdepth of 100 mm..1 Cross cultivate those areas where equipment used forhauling and spreading has compacted soil.

3.4 PLACING AND SPREADING OF TOPSOIL/PLANTING SOIL

.1 Place topsoil after DCC Representative has accepted subgrade.

.2 Spread topsoil in uniform layers not exceeding 150 mm.



.3 For sodded areas keep topsoil 15 mm below finished grade.

.4 Spread topsoil as indicated to following minimum depths aftersettlement..1 150 mm for seeded areas..2 135 mm for sodded areas..3 300 mm for flower beds..4 500 mm for shrub beds.

.5 Manually spread topsoil/planting soil around trees, shrubsand obstacles.

3.5 SOIL AMENDMENTS

.1 For planting beds turf: apply and thoroughly mix soilamendments into full specified depth of topsoil.

3.6 FINISH GRADING

.1 Grade to eliminate rough spots and low areas and ensurepositive drainage..1 Prepare loose friable bed by means of cultivation andsubsequent raking.

.2 Consolidate topsoil to required bulk density using equipmentapproved by DCC Representative..1 Leave surfaces smooth, uniform and firm against deepfootprinting.

3.7 ACCEPTANCE

.1 DCC Representative will inspect and test topsoil in place anddetermine acceptance of material, depth of topsoil and finishgrading.

3.8 SURPLUS MATERIAL

.1 Dispose of materials except topsoil not required wheredirected by DCC Representative off site.

3.9 CLEANING


.2 Upon completion of installation, remove surplus materials,rubbish, tools and equipment barriers.

END OF SECTION

National Defence New ULCV & EATV Storage Facility Garrison Petawawa, ON Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

UNCLASSIFIED Seeding

Section 32 92 19Page 1 2016-06-29

PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 Section 32 91 19.13 - Topsoil Placement and Grading


.1 Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.

.2 Product Data:

.1 Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed product literature and data sheets for seed and fertilizer and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations.

.2 Submit 2 copies of WHMIS MSDS in accordance with Section 01 70 12 - Safety Requirements and/or 01 35 43 - Environmental Procedures.

.3 Certificates: submit product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying materials comply with specified performance characteristics and criteria and physical requirements of seed mix, seed purity, and seed quality.

.4 Test Reports: submit certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance characteristics and physical properties of seed mix, seed purity, and seed quality.

1.3 SCHEDULING

.1 Seed after April 1st and before June 1st, or between August 25th and September 10th. Outside of this time window, contractor may install sod rather than seed (at no additional cost to the owner).

.2 Ensure ground is free from frost.

.3 Work must be scheduled so work is completed in one area before proceeding to next area.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TURF PRODUCTS

.1 Low-grow Perimeter Mix - Low-growing groundcover:

Species Composition % Kentucky Bluegrass ‘alene’ 20 to 30 Kentucky Bluegrass ‘kenblue’ 20 to 30 Creeping Red Fescue ‘rose’ 5 to 15 Creeping Red Fescue ‘boreal’ 5 to 15



Section 32 92 19Page 2 2016-06-29

Perennial Ryegrass 10 to 20 Microclover: Trifolium repens L.var. Pirouette

10 to 20

.2 Quality and source to comply with standards outlined in ‘Canadian Standards for Nursery Stock’ – Eighth Edition

.3 Seed must be kept in containers with original tags.

2.2 WATER

.1 Water must be free of impurities that would inhibit germination and growth.

2.3 FERTILIZER

.1 Complete synthetic, slow release with maximum 35% water soluble nitrogen:

7-24-12 - Pre-planting application 12-6-6 - for spring seeding 10-10-10 - for fall seeding

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 WORKMANSHIP

.1 Do not perform work under adverse field conditions such as frozen ground, ground covered with snow, ice or standing water.

.2 Remove and dispose of weeds; debris; stones 50 mm in diameter and large; soil contaminated by oil, gasoline and other deleterious materials; off the site as directed by DCC Representative.

3.2 SEED BED PREPARATION

.1 Verify that grades are correct. If discrepancies occur, notify DCC Representative and do not commence work until further instructed.

.2 Be a sure fine grade surface is free of humps and hollows and that it is a smooth, even grade, to contours and elevations indicated and to tolerance of plus or minus 15 mm, allowing the surface to drain naturally.

.3 Cultivate fine grades approved by DCC Representative to 25 mm depths immediately prior to seeding.

3.3 SEEDING

.1 Use equipment suitable for area to the approval of the DCC Representative.

.2 Sow seed uniformly at the rate of 150 kg/hectare.



Section 32 92 19Page 3 2016-06-29

.3 Blend application into adjacent grass areas to form uniform surfaces.

.4 Sow half of the required amount of seed in one direction and remainder at right angles.

.5 Embed seed into soil to depth of 5 mm within one hour of sowing.

.6 Roll area with equipment approved by DCC Representative.

.7 Water the seed with fine spray, avoiding washing out of seed. Apply enough water to ensure penetration of minimum 50mm.

.8 Protect seeded areas against damage. Remove this protection after DCC Representative has accepted lawn areas.

3.4 FERTILIZING PROGRAM

.1 Fertilize during establishment and warranty periods. Submit a fertilization program to the DCC Representative for approval prior to commencement of work on this item.

3.5 MAINTENANCE DURING ESTABLISHMENT PERIOD

.1 Perform following operations from time of seed application until final acceptance by the DCC Representative:

.1 Water seeded area as required to ensure germination and continued growth of grass. .1 When Environment Canada weather forecast does not

predict a cumulative rainfall of 10mm or greater for 10 consecutive days, the contractor shall water seeded areas on day 5.

.2 Water seeded fine spray to moisten soil to a depth of not less than 50 mm.

.3 Control watering to prevent washouts. .2 Dead or fare patches must be repaired and reseeded, to allow

establishment of seed prior to acceptance. .3 Cut grass to 40 mm whenever it reaches height of 60 mm,

remove clippings. .4 Fertilize seeded areas after first cutting at the rate

determined by the soil test. Spread half the required amount of fertilizer in one direction and remainder at right angles and apply water. .1 Postpone fertilizing until following spring if

scheduled application falls after September 10th. .5 Maintain seeded areas weed free.

3.6 ACCEPTANCE

.1 Seeded areas will be accepted by DCC Representative provided:



Section 32 92 19Page 4 2016-06-29

.1 Areas are uniformly established and turf is free of rutted, eroded, bare or dead spots and free of weeds.

.2 Areas have been cut at least twice.

.3 Areas have been fertilized.

.2 Areas seeded after September 10th will be accepted in following spring (within the month of May), provided acceptance conditions are fulfilled.

3.7 MAINTENANCE DURING WARRANTY PERIOD

.1 Perform following operations from time of acceptance until the end of the warranty period:

.1 Water seeded area to maintain optimum soil moisture level for continued growth of grass. .1 When Environment Canada weather forecast does not

predict a cumulative rainfall of 10mm or greater for 10 consecutive days, the contractor shall water seeded areas on day 5.

.2 Water seeded fine spray to moisten soil to a depth of not less than 50 mm.

.3 Control watering to prevent washouts. .2 Dead or bare patches must be repaired and reseed to the

satisfaction of the DCC Representative. .3 Cut the grass to 40 mm whenever it reaches the height of 60

mm. Remove clippings, which will smother grass. Fertilize seeded areas in accordance with the fertilizing program. Spread half of the required amount of fertilizer in one direction and remainder at right angles and water in well.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Maintenance Holes Page 1Storage Facility and Catch BasinGarrison Petawawa, ON Structures 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 This section specifies requirements for constructing precastconcrete manholes, catchbasins and structures. Work includessupply and installation of concrete bases, precast sections,metal casting and testing.



1.3 REFERENCES

.1 ASTM International.1 ASTM A48/A48M-03(2012), Standard Specification for GrayIron Castings..2 ASTM A123/A123M-15, Standard Specification for Zinc(Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products..3 ASTM C117-13, Standard Test Method for Materials Finerthan 75-µm (No. 200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing..4 ASTM C136-14, Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis ofFine and Coarse Aggregates..5 ASTM C139-14, Standard Specification for ConcreteMasonry Units for Construction of Catch Basins and Manholes..6 ASTM C478M-13, Standard Specification for PrecastReinforced Concrete Manhole Sections (Metric)..7 ASTM D698-12e2, Standard Test Methods for LaboratoryCompaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort(12,400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)).


.3 CSA Group.1 CSA A23.1/A23.2-09(R2014), Concrete Materials andMethods of Concrete Construction/Test Methods and StandardPractices for Concrete..2 CAN/CSA-A165 Series-04(R2014), CSA Standards on ConcreteMasonry Units (Consists of A165.1, A165.2 and A165.3)..3 CAN/CSA-A3000-13, Cementitious Materials Compendium(Consists of A3001, A3002, A3003, A3004 and A3005)..4 CSA G30.18-09(R2014), Carbon Steel Bars for ConcreteReinforcement.

.4 Ontario Provincial Standard Specifications (OPSS)



.1 OPSS 407-November 2007(R2010), ConstructionSpecification For Maintenance Hole, Catch Basin, Ditch InletAnd Valve Chamber Installation.



.2 Product Data:.1 Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed productliterature and data sheets for maintenance holes and catchbasin structures and include product characteristics,performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations.

.3 Shop Drawings:.1 Submit drawings stamped and signed by professionalengineer registered or licensed in Province of Ontario,Canada.



.2 Recycled Content:.1 Submit listing of recycled content products used,including details of required percentages or recycledcontent materials and products, showing their costs andpercentages of post-consumer and post-industrialcontent, and total cost of materials for project.



.1 Submit in accordance with Section 01 45 00 - QualityControl.

.2 Certifications:.1 Submit manufacturer's test data and certification atleast 4 weeks prior to beginning Work. Include manufacturer'sdrawings, information and shop drawings where pertinent.



.2 Certificates: submit certificates signed by manufacturercertifying that materials comply with specified performancecharacteristics and physical properties..3 Manufacturer's Instructions: submit manufacturer'sinstallation instructions and special handling criteria,installation sequence, and cleaning procedures.




.3 Storage and Handling Requirements:.1 Store materials off ground in dry location and inaccordance with manufacturer's recommendations in clean, dry,well-ventilated area..2 Store and protect maintenance holes and catch basinstructures from nicks, scratches, and blemishes..3 Replace defective or damaged materials with new.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Cast-in-place concrete:.1 In accordance with Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-PlaceConcrete.

.2 Precast maintenance hole units: to ASTM C 478M, circular..1 Top sections eccentric cone or flat slab top type withopening offset for vertical ladder installation.



.3 Precast catch basin sections: to ASTM C478M.

.4 Joints: made watertight using rubber rings, bituminouscompound, epoxy resin cement or cement mortar.

.5 Mortar:.1 Aggregate: to 31 05 16 - Aggregate Materials..2 Masonry Cement: to CAN/CSA-A3002.

.6 Ladder rungs: to CSA G30.18, No.25M billet steel deformedbars, hot dipped galvanized to ASTM A 123/A 123M..1 Rungs to be safety pattern (drop step type).

.7 Adjusting rings: to ASTM C 478M.

.8 Concrete Brick: to CAN/CSA-A165 Series.

.9 Drop maintenance hole pipe: same as sewer pipe.

.10 Steel gratings, I-beams and fasteners: as indicated.

.11 Frames, gratings, covers to dimensions as indicated andfollowing requirements:.1 Metal gratings and covers to bear evenly on frames.

.1 Frame with grating or cover to constitute one unit.

.2 Assemble and mark unit components before shipment..2 Gray iron castings: to ASTM A 48/A 48M, strength class30B..3 Castings: coated with two applications of asphaltvarnish sand blasted or cleaned and ground to eliminatesurface imperfections..4 Maintenance hole frames and covers: cover cast withoutperforations and complete with two 25 mm square lifting holesto OPSS 1850..5 Catch basin frames and covers: to OPSS 407..6 Maintenance hole frames and covers: heavy duty municipaltype for road service; light duty for landscape service..7 Size: 762 mm clear diameter for maintenance holes andcatchbasin manholes.

.12 Granular bedding and backfill: in accordance with Section31 05 16 - Aggregate Materials and following requirements:.1 Granular A as indicated in accordance with OPSS..2 Granular B as indicated in accordance with OPSS.

.13 Unshrinkable fill: in accordance with Section 31 23 33.01 -Excavating, Trenching and Backfilling.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

.1 Verification of Conditions: verify that conditions ofsubstrate previously installed under other Sections orContracts are acceptable for maintenance holes and catchbasin structures installation in accordance withmanufacturer's written instructions..1 Visually inspect substrate in presence of DCCRepresentative..2 Inform DCC Representative of unacceptable conditionsimmediately upon discovery..3 Proceed with installation only after unacceptableconditions have been remedied and after receipt of writtenapproval to proceed from DCC Representative.

3.2 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL

.1 Excavate and backfill in accordance with Section 31 23 33.01- Excavating Trenching and Backfilling and as indicated.

.2 Obtain approval of DCC Representative before installingoutfall structures, maintenance holes or catch basins.

3.3 CONCRETE WORK

.1 Do concrete work in accordance with Section 03 30 00 -Cast-in-Place Concrete.

.2 Place concrete reinforcement in accordance with Section03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcing.

.3 Position metal inserts in accordance with dimensions anddetails as indicated.

3.4 INSTALLATION

.1 Construct units in accordance with details indicated, plumband true to alignment and grade.

.2 Complete units as pipe laying progresses..1 Maximum of 3 units behind point of pipe laying will beallowed.

.3 Dewater excavation to approval of DCC Representative andremove soft and foreign material before placing concretebase.



.4 Set precast concrete base on 150 mm minimum of granularbedding compacted to 100% corrected maximum dry densitymaximum density to ASTM D 698.

.5 Precast units:.1 Set bottom section of precast unit in bed of cementmortar and bond to concrete base..2 Make each successive joint watertight with DCCRepresentative's approved rubber ring gaskets, bituminouscompound, cement mortar, epoxy resin cement, or combinationof these materials..3 Clean surplus mortar and joint compounds from interiorsurface of unit as work progresses..4 Plug lifting holes with precast concrete plugs set incement mortar or mastic compound.

.6 For sewers:.1 Place stub outlets and bulkheads at elevations and inpositions indicated..2 Bench to provide smooth U-shaped channel.

.1 Side height of channel to be 0.75 times fulldiameter of sewer..2 Slope adjacent floor at 1 in 20..3 Curve channels smoothly..4 Slope invert to establish sewer grade.

.7 Compact granular backfill to 100% corrected maximum drydensity maximum density to ASTM D 698.

.8 Place unshrinkable backfill in accordance with Section31 23 33.01 - Excavating, Trenching and Backfilling.

.9 Installing units in existing systems:.1 Where new unit is installed in existing run of pipe,ensure full support of existing pipe during installation, andcarefully remove that portion of existing pipe to dimensionsrequired and install new unit as specified..2 Make joints watertight between new unit and existingpipe..3 Where deemed expedient to maintain service aroundexisting pipes and when systems constructed under thisproject are ready for operation, complete installation withappropriate break-outs, removals, redirection of flows,blocking unused pipes or other necessary work.

.10 Set frame and cover to required elevation on no more than 4courses of brick..1 Make brick joints and join brick to frame with cementmortar..2 Parge and make smooth and watertight.



.11 Clean units of debris and foreign materials..1 Remove fins and sharp projections..2 Prevent debris from entering system.

.12 Install safety platforms in maintenance holes having depth of5 m or greater.

3.5 ADJUSTING TOPS OF EXISTING UNITS

.1 Remove existing gratings, frames and I beams and store forre-use at locations designated by DCC Representative.

.2 Sectional units:.1 Raise or lower straight walled sectional units by addingor removing precast sections as required..2 Raise or lower tapered units by removing cone section,adding, removing, or substituting riser sections to obtainrequired elevation, then replace cone section.

.1 When amount of raise is less than 600 mm usestandard maintenance grade rings.

.3 Monolithic units:.1 Raise monolithic units by roughening existing top toensure proper bond and extend to required elevation withcast-in-place concrete..2 Lower monolithic units with straight wall by removingconcrete to elevation indicated for rebuilding..3 When monolithic units with tapered upper section arelowered more than 150 mm, remove concrete for entire depth oftaper plus as much straight wall as necessary, then rebuildupper section to required elevation with cast-in-placeconcrete..4 Install additional maintenance hole ladder rungs inadjusted portion of units as required..5 Re-use existing gratings, frames and I beams..6 Re-set gratings and frames to required elevation.

.1 Re-set gratings and frames to required elevation onfull bed of cement mortar, parge and trowel smooth.


.1 Leakage Test.

.2 Install watertight plugs or seals on inlets and outlets ofeach new sanitary sewer maintenance hole and fill maintenancehole with water.

.3 Leakage not to exceed 0.3% per hour of volume of maintenancehole.



.4 If permissible leakage is exceeded, correct defects.

.5 Repeat until approved by DCC Representative.

.6 DCC Representative will issue Test Certificate for eachmaintenance hole passing test.

3.7 CLEANING



.3 Waste Management: separate waste materials for reuse andrecycling in accordance with Section 01 74 21 -Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal, andSection 01 47 15 - Sustainable Requirements: Construction..1 Remove recycling containers and bins from site anddispose of materials at appropriate facility.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Site Water Utility Page 1Storage Facility Distribution PipingGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 This section specifies requirements for constructing watermains and services. Work includes supply, installation andtesting of pipe, fittings and service connections, anddisinfection.


.1 Section 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete.



1.3 REFERENCES

.1 American National Standards Institute/American Water WorksAssociation (ANSI/AWWA).1 ANSI/AWWA B300-10, Standard for Hypochlorites..2 ANSI/AWWA B301-10, Standard for Liquid Chlorine..3 ANSI/AWWA B303-10, Standard for Sodium Chlorite..4 ANSI/AWWA C110/A21.10-12, American National Standard forDuctile-Iron and Gray Iron Fittings for Water..5 ANSI/AWWA C500-09, Standard for Metal-Seated Gate Valvesfor Water Supply Service..6 ANSI/AWWA C502-14, Standard for Dry-Barrel FireHydrants..7 ANSI/AWWA C651-05, Standard for Disinfecting WaterMains..8 ANSI/AWWA C800-12, Standard for Underground Service LineValves and Fittings..9 ANSI/AWWA C900-07, Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC)Pressure Pipe, and Fabricated Fittings, 4 Inch through 12Inch (100 mm - 300 mm), for Water Transmission andDistribution.

.2 ASTM International.1 ASTM A 123/A 123M-13, Standard Specification for Zinc(Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products..2 ASTM A 307-14, Standard Specification for Carbon SteelBolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile..3 ASTM B88M-13, Standard Specification for Seamless CopperWater Tube Metric..4 ASTM B418-12, Standard Specification for Cast andWrought Galvanic Zinc Anodes.



.5 ASTM C117-13, Standard Test Methods for Material FinerThan 0.075 mm (No. 200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates byWashing..6 ASTM C136-14, Standard Method for Sieve Analysis of Fineand Coarse Aggregates..7 ASTM C478M-15a, Standard Specification for PrecastReinforced Concrete Manhole Sections Metric..8 ASTM D698-12e2, Standard Test Method for LaboratoryCompaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort(12,400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)).

.3 American Water Works Association (AWWA)/Manual of Practice.1 AWWA M17-2006, Installation, Field Testing, andMaintenance of Fire Hydrants.


.5 CSA International.1 CAN/CSA-A3000-13, Cementitious Materials Compendium(Consists of A3001, A3002, A3003, A3004 and A3005)..2 CAN/CSA-B137 Series-13, Thermoplastic Pressure PipingCompendium. (Consists of B137.0, B137.1, B137.2, B137.3,B137.4, B137.4.1, B137.5, B137.6, B137.8, B137.9, B137.10,B137.11 and B137.12).

.1 CAN/CSA-B137.1-13, Polyethylene Pipe, Tubing, andFittings for Cold-Water Pressure Services..2 CAN/CSA-B137.3-13, Rigid Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC)Pipe for Pressure Applications.

.3 CSA G30.18-09, Carbon and Steel Bars for ConcreteReinforcement.

.6 Underwriters' Laboratories of Canada (ULC).1 CAN/ULC-S520-07, Standard for Fire Hydrants..2 CAN/ULC-S543-09, Standard for Internal-Lug, QuickConnect Couplings for Fire Hose..3 CAN/ULC-S701-11, Standard for Thermal Insulation,Polystyrene, Boards and Pipe Covering.



.2 Product Data:.1 Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed productliterature and data sheets for distribution piping materialsand include product characteristics, performance criteria,physical size, finish and limitations.



.2 Pipe certification to be on pipe.

.3 Shop Drawings:.1 Submit drawings stamped and signed by professionalengineer registered or licensed in Province of Ontario,Canada.

.4 Samples:.1 Inform DCC Representative of proposed source of beddingmaterials and provide access for sampling at least 4 weeksprior to commencing work..2 Submit manufacturer's test data and certification thatpipe materials meet requirements of this section 4 weeksminimum prior to beginning work. Include manufacturer'sdrawings, information and shop drawings where pertinent.


.1 Submit project Waste Management Plan and WasteReduction Workplan highlighting recycling and salvagerequirements..2 Submit calculations on end-of-project recyclingrates, salvage rates, and landfill rates demonstratingthat 75% of construction wastes were recycled orsalvaged..3 Recycled Content:

.1 Submit listing of recycled content productsused, including details of required percentages ofrecycled content materials and products, showingtheir costs and percentages of post-consumer andpost-industrial content, and total cost ofmaterials for project..2 Submit evidence, when Supplementary CementingMaterials (SCMs) are used, to certify reduction incement from Base Mix to Actual SCMs Mix, aspercentage.

.4 Regional Materials: submit evidence that projectincorporates required percentage of regional materialsand products, showing their cost, distance from projectto furthest site of extraction or manufacture, and totalcost of materials for project.



.2 Submit data to produce record drawings, including directionsfor operating valves, list of equipment required to operatevalves, details of pipe material, location of air and vacuumrelease valves, hydrant details.



.1 Include top of pipe, horizontal location of fittings andtype, valves, valve boxes, valve chambers and hydrants.

.3 Operation and Maintenance Data: submit operation andmaintenance data for pipe, valves, valve boxes, valvechambers and hydrants for incorporation into manual.




.3 Storage and Handling Requirements:.1 Store materials off ground indoors in dry location andin accordance with manufacturer's recommendations in clean,dry, well-ventilated area..2 Store and protect water distribution piping from nicks,scratches, and blemishes..3 Replace defective or damaged materials with new.



1.7 SCHEDULING OF WORK

.1 Schedule Work to minimize interruptions to existing services.

.2 Submit schedule of expected interruptions for approval andadhere to interruption schedule as approved by DCCRepresentative.

.3 Notify DCC Representative building occupants superintendentminimum of 24 hours in advance of interruption in service.



.4 Do not interrupt water service for more than 3 hours andconfine this period between 10:00 and 16:00 hours local timeunless otherwise authorized.

.5 Notify Base Fire Department of planned or accidentalinterruption of water supply to hydrants.

.6 Provide and post "Out of Service" sign on hydrant not in use.

.7 Advise Base Police Department of anticipated interferencewith movement of traffic.

1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS


.2 Tools: provide tools as follows:.1 Service post wrenches for curb stops..2 Hydrant wrenches..3 Tee-handle operating keys for valves.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPE, JOINTS AND FITTINGS

.1 Polyvinyl chloride pressure pipe: to ANSI/AWWA C900, pressureclass 150, DR 18, 1 MPa gasket bell end, cast iron outsidediameter..1 CAN/CSA-B137.3, PVC series 160, 1.1 MPa elastomericgasket coupling..2 Cast iron fittings: to ANSI/AWWA C110/A21.10, and forpipe diameters larger than NPS 4 cement mortar lined toANSI/AWWA C104/A21.4.

2.2 PROTECTION

.1 Provide means of protection for iron fittings in corrosivesoils in accordance with local practices and authoritieshaving jurisdiction to ANSI/AWWA C105/A21.5..1 Anode: Z-24-48 conforming to ASTM B418, Type II.

2.3 VALVES AND VALVE BOXES

.1 Valves to open counter clockwise.



.2 Gate valves: to ANSI/AWWA C500, standard iron body, brassbronze mounted wedge double disc valves with non-risingstems, suitable for 1 MPa with mechanical flanged push-ongrooved type coupling joints.

.3 Cast iron valve boxes: bituminous coated screw type threepiece sliding type adjustable over minimum of 450 mm completewith valve operating extension rod, 30 mm minimum diameter,25 x 25 mm cross section, of such length that when set onvalve operating nut top of rod will not be more than 150 mmbelow cover..1 Base to be large round type with minimum diameter of 300mm..2 Top of box to be marked "WATER"/"EAU".

2.4 SERVICE CONNECTIONS

.1 Copper tubing: to ASTM B 88M type K, annealed.

.2 Polyvinyl chloride pressure pipe: to CAN/CSA-B137.3, type1120 series 160 1.1 MPa.

.3 Copper tubing joints: compression type suitable for 1 MPaworking pressure.

.4 Brass inverted key-type curb stops: red brass to ASTM B 62,compression type with without drains..1 Curb stops to have adjustable bituminous coated castiron service box with stem to suit depth of bury..2 Top of cast iron box marked "WATER"/"EAU".

.5 Service connections for PVC pipe:.1 Service connections less than 100 mm: corporation stop,tapped to main using AWWA threads, complete with stainlessservice saddle. Service saddle to consist of circumferentialband type complete with side bars and fingers, keeper bar,stud bolts, nuts, washers and gaskets..2 Service connections 100 mm and over: use tee fitting ortapping valve and sleeve.

.6 Bronze type service clamps: for PVC pipe service connections..1 Service clamps to be of strap-type, with confined "O"ring seal cemented in place..2 Clamps to be tapped with threads to ANSI/AWWA C800.

.7 Tee connections: for services above NPS 100. Tee connectionsto be fabricated of same material and to same standards asspecified pipe fittings and to have ends matching pipe towhich they are joined.



2.5 HYDRANTS

.1 Hydrants: dry barrel type, to AWWA C502, designed for workingpressure of 1035 kPa with two 65 mm threaded hose outlets,one 100 mm threaded pumper connection, 150 mm riser barrel,134 mm minimum diameter main valve and 150 mm mechanicaljoint inlet connection. Hydrants to open counter clockwisewith an operating nut 32 mm square, threads to local connectto CAN/ULC-S543. provide metal caps. Depth of bury 2.5 mminimum to top of pipe. Provide two hose and one pumpernozzles. Hose nozzles to be two 63.5 mm (2.5 inch) nozzles,nominal size 76.4 mm (3 7/32 inch). Pumper nozzle to benominal size 102.5 mm (4 29/32 inch). Threads of connectionsto be compatible with responding Fire Department. Nozzles tobe Storz type..1 Acceptable products:

.1 Clow-McAvity Brigadier M67.

.2 Canada Valve Century.

.3 Mueller Modern Centurion.

.4 Bibby Ste Croix Sentinel.

.2 Hydrant paint: exterior enamel to CAN/CGSB-1.88-92. Colour tomatch local standard.

2.6 PIPE BEDDING AND SURROUND MATERIAL

.1 Granular material to: Section 31 05 16 - Aggregate Materialsand following requirements:.1 Granular A to OPSS.

2.7 BACKFILL MATERIAL

.1 As indicated. in accordance with Section 31 23 33.01 -Excavating, Trenching and Backfilling.

2.8 PIPE DISINFECTION

.1 Liquid chlorine to ANSI/AWWA B303 to disinfect water mains.

.2 Disinfect water mains in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C651.

2.9 THRUST RESTRAINT

.1 Thrust Blocks and Anchors: 20 MPa concrete and 15 M, grade400 reinforcing steel where indicated.



.2 Mechanical thrust restraints: to AWWA C111 and C153 formechanical and push-on joints with multiple wedge or gripperring restraining mechanism, minimum working pressure rating240 kPa and minimum safety factor of 2:1..1 Acceptable products:

.1 Ebba Iron Megalug.

.2 Star StarGrip.

.3 Mueller Aquagrip.

.4 Clow Tyler Union TUFGrip.

2.10 PIPE INSULATION

.1 50 mm Extruded polystyrene, to CAN/ULC-S701, Type 4, minimum100 psi compression strength.

2.11 YARD HYDRANT

.1 Exposed, non-freeze yard hydrant as indicated.

2.12 TRACER WIRE

.1 #10 Gauge AWG single or seven strand, insulated copper tracerwire to be provided along entire length of watermain andbrought to surface at hydrants and valves as determined byDCC Representative. Contractor to provide conductivity testto DCC Representative's satisfaction.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

.1 Verification of Conditions: verify that conditions ofsubstrate previously installed under other Sections orContracts are acceptable for distribution piping installationin accordance with manufacturer's written instructions..1 Visually inspect substrate in presence of DCCRepresentative..2 Inform DCC Representative of unacceptable conditionsimmediately upon discovery..3 Proceed with installation only after unacceptableconditions have been remedied and after receipt of writtenapproval to proceed from DCC Representative.



3.2 PREPARATION

.1 Clean pipes, fittings, valves, hydrants, and appurtenances ofaccumulated debris and water before installation..1 Inspect materials for defects to approval of DCCRepresentative..2 Remove defective materials from site as directed by DCCRepresentative.

3.3 TRENCHING

.1 Do trenching work in accordance with Section 31 23 33.01 -Excavating, Trenching and Backfilling.

.2 Ensure trench depth allows coverage over pipe to the minimumfrom finished grade as indicated.

.3 Trench alignment and depth require DCC Representative'sapproval prior to placing bedding material and pipe.

3.4 GRANULAR BEDDING

.1 Place granular bedding material in uniform layers notexceeding 150 mm compacted thickness to depth as indicated.

.2 Do not place material in frozen condition.

.3 Shape bed true to grade to provide continuous uniform bearingsurface for pipe.

.4 Shape transverse depressions in bedding as required to suitjoints.

.5 Compact each layer full width of bed to 100% maximum densityto ASTM D 698.

.6 Fill authorized or unauthorized excavation below designelevation of bottom of specified bedding in accordance withSection 31 23 33.01 - Excavating, Trenching and Backfillingwith compacted bedding material.

3.5 PIPE INSTALLATION

.1 Terminate building water service as indicated..1 Install coupling necessary for connection to buildingplumbing..2 If plumbing is already installed, make connection;otherwise cap or seal end of pipe.



.2 Lay pipes to manufacturer's standard instructions andspecifications..1 Do not use blocks except as specified.

.3 Join pipes in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

.4 Bevel or taper ends of PVC pipe to match fittings.

.5 Handle pipe by methods approved by DCC Representativerecommended by pipe manufacturer. Do not use chains or cablespassed through pipe bore so that weight of pipe bears on pipeends.

.6 Lay pipes on prepared bed, true to line and grade..1 Ensure barrel of each pipe is in contact with shaped bedthroughout its full length..2 Take up and replace defective pipe..3 Correct pipe which is not in true alignment or grade orpipe which shows differential settlement after installationgreater than 10 mm in 3 m.

.7 Face socket ends of pipe in direction of laying. For mains ongrade of 2% or greater, face socket ends up-grade.

.8 Do not exceed permissible deflection at joints as recommendedby pipe manufacturer.

.9 Keep jointing materials and installed pipe free of dirt andwater and other foreign materials..1 Whenever work is stopped, install a removable watertightbulkhead at open end of last pipe laid to prevent entry offoreign materials.

.10 Position and join pipes with equipment and methods approvedby DCC Representative.

.11 Cut pipes in approved manner as recommended by pipemanufacturer, without damaging pipe or its coating and toleave smooth end at right angles to axis of pipe.

.12 Align pipes before jointing.

.13 Install gaskets to manufacturer's recommendations. Supportpipes with hand slings or crane as required to minimizelateral pressure on gasket and maintain concentricity untilgasket is properly positioned.

.14 Avoid displacing gasket or contaminating with dirt or otherforeign material..1 Remove disturbed or contaminated gaskets..2 Clean, lubricate and replace before jointing isattempted again.



.15 Complete each joint before laying next length of pipe.

.16 Minimize deflection after joint has been made.

.17 Apply sufficient pressure in making joints to ensure thatjoint is completed to manufacturer's recommendations.

.18 Ensure completed joints are restrained by compacting beddingmaterial alongside and over installed pipes or as otherwiseapproved by DCC Representative.

.19 When stoppage of work occurs, block pipes in an approvedmanner to prevent creep during down time.

.20 Recheck plastic pipe joints assembled above ground afterplacing in trench to ensure that no movement of joint hastaken place.

.21 Do not lay pipe on frozen bedding.

.22 Do hydrostatic and leakage test and have results approved byDCC Representative before surrounding and covering joints andfittings with granular material.

.23 Backfill remainder of trench.

.24 Where a minimum pipe cover of 2.5 m cannot be achieved, waterpipe shall be insulated as indicated.

3.6 VALVE INSTALLATION

.1 Install valves to manufacturer's recommendations at locationsas indicated.

.2 Support valves located in valve boxes or valve chambers bymeans of concrete located between valve and solid ground.Bedding same as adjacent pipe. Maximum length of pipe on eachend of valve shall be 1 m. Valves not to be supported bypipe.

.3 Install underground post-type as indicated.


.1 Terminate water service at locations as indicated..1 Install coupling necessary for connection.

.2 Do not install service connections until satisfactorycompletion of hydrostatic and leakage tests of water main.



.3 Construct service connections at right angles to water mainunless otherwise directed. Locate curb stops as indicated.

.4 Tappings on PVC-C900 pipe may be threaded without serviceclamps, and shall confirm to the following:

Pipe Diameter Maximum Tap Maximum Tap(mm) Without Clamp With Clamp

(mm) (mm)100 20 25150 20 40200 25 50250 25 50

300 40 75

.5 Tappings on PVC pipe to be either PVC valve tees or bronzetype service clamps, strap type with "O" ring seal cementedin place.

.6 Employ only competent workmen equipped with suitable tools tocarry out tapping of mains, cutting and flaring of pipes.

.7 Install single and multiple tap service connections on tophalf of main, between 45 degrees and 90 degrees measured fromapex of pipe.

.8 Install multiple corporation stops, 30 degrees apart aroundcircumference of pipe and minimum of 300 mm apart along pipe.

.9 Tap main at 2:00 o'clock or 10:00 o'clock position only; notcloser to joint nor closer to adjacent service connectionsthan recommended by manufacturer, or 1 m minimum, whicheveris greater.

.10 Leave corporation stop valves fully open.

.11 In order to relieve strain on connections, install servicepipe in "Goose Neck" form "laid over" into horizontalposition.

.12 Install rigid stainless steel liners in small diameterplastic pipes with compression fittings.

.13 Install curb stop with corporation box on services NPS 2 orless in diameter..1 Equip larger services with gate valve and cast iron box..2 Set box plumb over stop and adjust top flush with finalgrade elevation..3 Leave curb stop valves fully closed.



.14 Place temporary location marker at ends of plugged or cappedunconnected water lines..1 Each marker to consist of 38 x 89 mm stake extendingfrom pipe end at pipe level to 600 mm above grade..2 Paint exposed portion of stake blue with designation"WATER SERVICE LINE" in black.

3.8 HYDRANTS

.1 Install hydrants at locations and in orientation asindicated.

.2 Install hydrants in accordance with AWWA M17.

.3 Install gate valve and cast iron valve box on hydrant serviceleads as indicated.

.4 Set hydrants plumb, with hose outlets parallel with edge ofpavement or curb line, with pumper connection facing roadwayand with body flange set at elevation of 50 mm above finalgrade.

.5 Place concrete thrust blocks as indicated and specifiedensuring that drain holes are unobstructed.

.6 To provide proper draining for each hydrant, excavate pitmeasuring not less than 1 x 1 x 0.5 m deep and backfill withcoarse gravel or crushed stone to level 150 mm above drainholes.

.7 Place appropriate sign on installed hydrants indicatingwhether or not they are in service during construction.

3.9 THRUST BLOCKS AND RESTRAINED JOINTS

.1 For thrust blocks: do concrete Work in accordance withSection 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.

.2 Place concrete thrust blocks between valves, tees, plugs,caps, bends, changes in pipe diameter, reducers, hydrants andfittings and undisturbed ground as indicated or as directedby DCC Representative.

.3 Keep joints and couplings free of concrete.

.4 Do not backfill over concrete within 24 hours after placing.

.5 For restrained joints: only use restrained joints approved byDCC Representative.



.1 Install mechanical restraint at all joints within 6.1 mof either side of all valves for watermains 300 mm diameteror larger..2 Install mechanical restraints at all joints alonghydrant lead between watermain and hydrant.

.6 Where thrust blocks cannot be laid on undisturbed ground dueto excessive excavation or fill conditions, mechanical thrustrestraints will be used.

3.10 CATHODIC PROTECTION

.1 Install sacrificial zinc anodes on all directly buriedmetallic fittings including bends, tees, crosses, valves, andhydrants and each copper service pipe.

3.11 HYDROSTATIC AND LEAKAGE TESTING

.1 Do tests in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C600.

.2 Provide labour, equipment and materials required to performhydrostatic and leakage tests hereinafter described.

.3 Notify DCC Representative at least 24 hours in advance ofproposed tests..1 Perform tests in presence of DCC Representative.

.4 Where section of system is provided with concrete thrustblocks, conduct tests at least 5 days after placing concreteor 2 days if high early strength concrete is used.

.5 Test pipeline in sections not exceeding 365 m in length,unless otherwise authorized by DCC Representative.

.6 Upon completion of pipe laying and after DCC Representativehas inspected Work in place, surround and cover pipes betweenjoints with approved granular material placed to dimensionsindicated as directed by DCC Representative.

.7 Leave hydrants, valves, joints and fittings exposed.

.8 When testing is done during freezing weather, protecthydrants, valves, joints and fittings from freezing.

.9 Strut and brace caps, bends, tees, and valves, to preventmovement when test pressure is applied.

.10 Open valves.



.11 Expel air from main by slowly filling main with potablewater..1 Install corporation stops at high points in main whereno air-vacuum release valves are installed..2 Remove stops after satisfactory completion of test andseal holes with plugs.

.12 Fill asbestos cement pipe and concrete pipe at least 24 hoursbefore testing to allow water absorption by pipe material.

.13 Thoroughly examine exposed parts and correct for leakage asnecessary.

.14 Apply hydrostatic test pressure of 1375 kPa (200 psi) minimumbased on elevation of lowest point in main and corrected toelevation of test gauge, for period of 1 hour.

.15 Examine exposed pipe, joints, fittings and appurtenanceswhile system is under pressure.

.16 Remove joints, fittings and appurtenances found defective andreplace with new sound material and make watertight.

.17 Repeat hydrostatic test until defects have been corrected.

.18 Apply leakage test pressure of 1035 kPa minimum aftercomplete backfilling of trench, based on elevation of lowestpoint in main and corrected to elevation of gauge, for periodof 2 hours.

.19 Define leakage as amount of water supplied from water storagetank metre in order to maintain test pressure for 2 hours.

.20 No leakage is permitted by the test process.

.21 Locate and repair defects if leakage is greater than amountspecified.

.22 Repeat test until leakage is within specified allowance forfull length of water main.

3.12 PIPE SURROUND

.1 Upon completion of pipe laying and after DCC Representativehas inspected Work in place, surround and cover pipes asindicated.

.2 Hand place surround material in uniform layers not exceeding150 mm compacted thickness as indicated.



.3 Place layers uniformly and simultaneously on each side ofpipe.

.4 Do not place material in frozen condition.

.5 Compact each layer from pipe invert to mid height of pipe toat least 100% maximum density to ASTM D 698.

.6 Compact each layer from mid height of pipe to underside ofbackfill to at least 98% maximum density to ASTM D 698.

3.13 BACKFILL

.1 Place backfill material, above pipe surround, in uniformlayers not exceeding 150 mm compacted thickness up to gradesas indicated.

.2 Do not place backfill in frozen condition.

.3 Under paving and walks, compact backfill to at least 100%maximum density to ASTM D 698..1 In other areas, compact to at least 98% maximum densityto ASTM D 698.

3.14 HYDRANT FLOW TESTS

.1 Conduct flow tests on every hydrant to determine fire flowsprior to painting hydrant caps and ports.

3.15 PAINTING OF HYDRANTS

.1 After installation, paint hydrants in accordance with DCCrequirements.

.2 After hydrant flow tests, paint caps and ports as per NFPA291 Recommended Practice for Fire Flow Testing and Marking ofHydrants, and as per CFFM FMD 4003.

3.16 FLUSHING AND DISINFECTING

.1 Flushing and disinfecting operations: witnessed by DCCRepresentative..1 Notify DCC Representative at least 4 days in advance ofproposed date when disinfecting operations will begin.

.2 Prior to flushing, two (2) swabs to be launched and propelledthrough watermain.



.3 Flush and disinfect water mains to AWWA C651 and as hereinspecified.

.4 Flush water mains through available outlets with a sufficientflow of potable water to produce velocity of 1.5 m/s, withinpipe for minimum 10 minutes, or until foreign materials havebeen removed and flushed water is clear.

.5 Flushing flows as follows:

Pipe Size NPS Flow (L/s) Minimum6 and below 388 7510 11512 150

.6 Provide connections and pumps for flushing as required.

.7 Open and close valves, hydrants and service connections toensure thorough flushing.

.8 When flushing has been completed to DCC Representativeapproval, introduce strong solution of chlorine as approvedby DCC Representative into water main and ensure that it isdistributed throughout entire system.

.9 Rate of chlorine application to be proportional to rate ofwater entering pipe.

.10 Chlorine application to be close to point of filling watermain and to occur at same time.

.11 Operate valves, hydrants and appurtenances while maincontains chlorine solution.

.12 Flush line to remove chlorine solution after 24 hours.

.13 Measure chlorine residuals at extreme end of pipe-line beingtested.

.14 Perform bacteriological tests on water main, after chlorinesolution has been flushed out..1 Take samples daily for minimum of 2 days..2 Should contamination remain or recur during this period,repeat disinfecting procedure.

.15 Take water samples at hydrants and service connections, insuitable sequence, to test for chlorine residual.



.16 After adequate chlorine residual not less than 50 ppm hasbeen obtained leave system charged with chlorine solution for24 hours..1 After 24 hours, take further samples to ensure thatthere is still not less than 25 ppm of chlorine residualremaining throughout system.

.17 Chlorine laden water to be disposed off-site at an approvedfacility.

3.17 SURFACE RESTORATION

.1 After installing and backfilling over water mains, restoresurface to original condition as directed by DCCRepresentative.

3.18 CLEANING




END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Public Sanitary Utility Page 1Storage Facility Sewerage PipingGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 This section specifies requirements for constructing gravitysanitary sewers. Work includes supply, installation, andtesting of pipe, fittings and service connections.



1.3 REFERENCES

.1 ASTM International.1 ASTM C 117-13, Standard Test Method for Material FinerThan 75 MU m (No. 200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates byWashing..2 ASTM C 136-14, Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysisof Fine and Coarse Aggregates..3 ASTM D 698-12e2, Standard Test Method for LaboratoryCompaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort(12,400 ft4-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3 ))..4 ASTM D 3034-14, Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings..5 ASTM D 3350-14, Standard Specification for PolyethylenePlastics Pipe and Fittings Materials.


.3 CSA International.1 CSA A3000-13, Cementitious Materials Compendium..2 CSA B1800-11, Thermoplastic Non-pressure PipeCompendium.

.1 CSA B182.2-11, PSM Type Polyvinylchloride PVC SewerPipe and Fittings.







.8 Environmental Assessment Screening Report, New DND)Facilities, July, 2014, Defence Construction Canada (DCC).


.1 Scheduling:.1 Schedule Work to minimize interruptions to existingservices and maintain existing sewage flows duringconstruction..2 Submit schedule of expected interruptions for approvaland adhere to approved schedule..3 Notify DCC Representative 24 hours minimum in advance ofany interruption in service.



.2 Product Data:.1 Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed productliterature and data sheets for pipes, and backfill andinclude product characteristics, performance criteria,physical size, finish and limitations.

.3 Shop Drawings:.1 Submit drawings stamped and signed by professionalengineer registered or licensed in Province of Ontario,Canada..2 Indicate on drawings proposed method for installingcarrier pipe for undercrossings.

.4 Samples:.1 Inform DCC Representative at least 4 weeks prior tobeginning Work, of proposed source of bedding materials andprovide access for sampling..2 Submit for testing at least 2 weeks prior to beginningWork, samples of materials proposed for use.

.5 Certificates:.1 Certification to be marked on pipe.

.6 Test and Evaluation Reports:



.1 Submit manufacturer's test data and certification 2weeks minimum before beginning Work.



.3 Recycled Content:.1 Submit listing of recycled content products used,including details of required percentages or recycledcontent materials and products, showing their costs andpercentages of post-consumer and post-industrialcontent, and total cost of materials for project..2 Submit evidence, when Supplementary CementingMaterials (SCMs) are used, to certify reduction incement from Base Mix to Actual SCMs Mix, as percentage.





.3 Storage and Handling Requirements:.1 Store materials in accordance with manufacturer'srecommendations..2 Store and protect pipes from damage..3 Replace defective or damaged materials with new.





PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PLASTIC PIPE

.1 Type PSM Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC): to ASTM D 3034 CSA B182.2..1 Standard Dimensional Ratio (SDR):

.1 150 mm dia. and below - SOR 28.

.2 200 mm dia. and above - SOR 35..2 Locked-in gasket and integral bell system..3 Nominal lengths: 6 m.


.1 Type PSM Poly (Vinyl) Chloride: to CSA B182.2, ASTM D3034.

.2 Plastic pipe: to CSA B182.1, with push-on joints.

2.3 CEMENT MORTAR

.1 Portland cement: to CSA A3000, normal type 10.

.2 Mix mortar 1 part by volume of cement to two parts of clean,sharp sand mixed dry..1 Add only sufficient water after mixing to give optimumconsistency for placement..2 Do not use additives.

2.4 PIPE BEDDING AND SURROUND MATERIALS

.1 Granular material to Section 31 05 16 - Aggregate Materialsand following requirements:.1 Granular A to OPSS.

.2 Concrete mixes and materials for cradles, encasement,supports: to Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.




.1 As indicated and in accordance with Section 31 23 33.01 -Excavating, Trenching and Backfilling.

.2 Unshrinkable fill where required to Section 31 23 33.01 -Excavating, Trenching and Backfilling.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

.1 Verification of Conditions: verify that conditions ofsubstrate previously installed under other Sections orContracts are acceptable for sewer pipe installation inaccordance with manufacturer's written instructions..1 Visually inspect substrate in presence of DCCRepresentative..2 Inform DCC Representative of unacceptable conditionsimmediately upon discovery..3 Proceed with installation only after unacceptableconditions have been remedied and after receipt of writtenapproval to proceed from DCC Representative.

3.2 PREPARATION

.1 Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control:.1 Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion and sedimentationcontrol measures during construction until permanentvegetation has been established.

.2 Clean pipes and fittings of debris and water beforeinstallation, and remove defective materials from site toapproval of DCC Representative.

.3 Clean and dry pipes and fittings before installation.

.4 Obtain DCC Representative's approval of pipes and fittingsprior to installation.

3.3 TRENCHING

.1 Do trenching Work in accordance with Section 31 23 33.01 -Excavating, Trenching and Backfilling.

.2 Protect trench from contents of sewer or sewer connection.



.3 Trench alignment and depth require approval of DCCRepresentative prior to placing bedding material and pipe.

3.4 CONCRETE BEDDING AND ENCASEMENT

.1 Do concrete Work in accordance with Section 03 30 00 -Cast-in-Place Concrete..1 Place concrete to details as directed by DCCRepresentative.

.2 Position pipe on concrete blocks to facilitate placing ofconcrete..1 When necessary, rigidly anchor or weight pipe to preventflotation when concrete is placed.

.3 Do not backfill over concrete within 24 hours after placing.


.1 Place bedding in unfrozen condition.

.2 Place granular bedding materials in uniform layers notexceeding 150 mm compacted thickness to depth as indicated.

.3 Shape bed true to grade and to provide continuous, uniformbearing surface for pipe..1 Do not use blocks when bedding pipe.

.4 Shape transverse depressions as required to suit joints.

.5 Compact each layer full width of bed to at least 100% maximumdensity to ASTM D 698.

.6 Fill excavation below bottom of specified bedding adjacent tomanholes or structures with compacted bedding material.

3.6 INSTALLATION

.1 Lay and join pipes in accordance with manufacturer'srecommendations and to approval of DCC Representative.

.2 Handle pipe using methods approved by DCC Representative..1 Do not use chains or cables passed through rigid pipebore so that weight of pipe bears upon pipe ends.

.3 Lay pipes on prepared bed, true to line and grade, with pipeinvert smooth and free of sags or high points.



.1 Ensure barrel of each pipe is in contact with shaped bedthroughout its full length. Tolerances in accordance withmanufacturers' recommendations.

.4 Begin laying at outlet and proceed in upstream direction withsocket ends of pipe facing upgrade.

.5 Joint deflection permitted within limits recommended by pipemanufacturer.

.6 Water to flow through pipe during construction, only aspermitted by DCC Representative.

.7 Whenever Work is suspended, install removable watertightbulkhead at open end of last pipe laid to prevent entry offoreign materials.

.8 Install plastic pipe and fittings in accordance with CSAB182.11.

.9 Pipe jointing:.1 Install gaskets in accordance with manufacturer'swritten recommendations as indicated..2 Support pipes with hand slings or crane as required tominimize lateral pressure on gasket and maintainconcentricity until gasket is properly positioned..3 Align pipes before joining..4 Maintain pipe joints free from mud, silt, gravel andforeign material..5 Avoid displacing gasket or contaminating with dirt orforeign material. Gaskets so disturbed to be removed, cleanedand lubricated and replaced before joining is attempted..6 Complete each joint before laying next length of pipe..7 Minimize joint deflection after joint has been made toavoid joint damage..8 At rigid structures, install pipe joints not more than1.2 m from side of structure..9 Apply sufficient pressure in making joints to ensurethat joint is complete as outlined in manufacturer'srecommendations.

.10 When stoppage of Work occurs, block pipes as directed by DCCRepresentative to prevent creep during down time.

.11 Plug lifting holes with pre-fabricated plugs approved by DCCRepresentative, set in shrinkage compensating grout.

.12 Cut pipes as required for special inserts, fittings orclosure pieces as recommended by pipe manufacturer, withoutdamaging pipe or its coating and to leave smooth end at rightangles to axis of pipe.



.13 Make watertight connections to manholes..1 Use shrinkage compensating grout when suitable gasketsare not available.

.14 Use prefabricated saddles or field connections approved byDCC Representative, for connecting pipes to existing sewerpipes..1 Joints to be structurally sound and watertight.

3.7 PIPE SURROUND

.1 Place surround material in unfrozen condition.

.2 Upon completion of pipe laying, and after DCC Representativehas inspected pipe joints, surround and cover pipes asindicated..1 Leave joints and fittings exposed until field testing iscompleted.

.3 Hand place surround material in uniform layers not exceeding150 mm compacted thickness as indicated..1 Do not dump material within 0.25 m of pipe.




.7 When field test results are acceptable to DCC Representative,place surround material at pipe joints.

3.8 BACKFILL

.1 Place backfill material in unfrozen condition.

.2 Place backfill material, above pipe surround in uniformlayers not exceeding 150 mm compacted thickness up to gradesas indicated.

.3 Under paving and walks, compact backfill to at least 100%maximum density to ASTM D 698..1 In other areas, compact to at least 100% maximum densityto ASTM D 698.

.4 Place unshrinkable fill in accordance with Section31 23 33.01 - Excavating, Trenching and Backfilling.




.1 Install pipe to CSA B182.11 and manufacturer's instructionsand specifications.

.2 Maintain grade for 100 and 125 mm diameter sewers at 1vertical to 50 horizontal unless directed otherwise by DCCRepresentative.

.3 Service connections to main sewer: standard Tee or Wyefittings or DCC Representative approved saddles..1 Do not use break-in and mortar patch-type joints.

.4 Service connection pipe: not to extend into interior of mainsewer.

.5 Make up required horizontal and vertical bends from 45degrees bends or less, separated by straight section of pipewith minimum length of 4 pipe diameters..1 Use long sweep bends where applicable.

.6 Plug service laterals with water tight caps or plugs asapproved by DCC Representative.

.7 Place location marker at ends of plugged or cappedunconnected sewer lines..1 Each marker: 38 x 89 mm stake extending from pipe end atpipe level to 0.6 m above grade..2 Paint exposed portion of stake red with designation SANSWR LINE in black.

3.10 FIELD TESTING

.1 Repair or replace pipe, pipe joint or bedding founddefective.

.2 When directed by DCC Representative, draw tapered wooden plugwith diameter of 95% of inside pipe diameter through sewer toensure that pipe is free of obstruction.

.3 Remove foreign material from sewers and related appurtenancesby flushing with water.

.4 Perform infiltration and exfiltration testing as soon aspracticable after jointing and bedding are complete, andservice connections have been installed.

.5 Do infiltration and exfiltration testing as specified hereinand as directed by DCC Representative..1 Perform tests in presence of DCC Representative.



.2 Notify DCC Representative 24 hours minimum in advance ofproposed tests.

.6 Carry out tests on each section of sewer between successivemanholes including service connections.

.7 Install watertight bulkheads in suitable manner to isolatetest section from rest of pipeline.

.8 Exfiltration test:.1 Fill test section with water to displace air in line.Maintain under nominal head for 24 hours to ensure absorptionin pipe wall is complete before test measurements are begun..2 Immediately prior to test period add water to pipelineuntil there is head of 1 m over interior crown of pipemeasured at highest point of test section or water in manholeis 1 m above static ground water level, whichever is greater..3 Duration of exfiltration test: 2 hours..4 Water loss at end of test period: not to exceed maximumallowable exfiltration over any section of pipe betweenmanholes.

.9 Infiltration test:.1 Conduct infiltration test in lieu of exfiltration testwhere static ground water level is 750 mm or more above topof pipe measured at highest point in line to be used..2 Do not interpolate a head greater than 750 mm to obtainan increase in allowable infiltration rate..3 Install watertight plug at upstream end of pipeline testsection..4 Discontinue pumping operations for at least 3 daysbefore test measurements are to begin and during this time,keep thoroughly wet at least one third of pipe invertperimeter..5 Prevent damage to pipe and bedding material due toflotation and erosion..6 Place 90 degrees V-notch weir, or other measuring deviceapproved by DCC Representative in invert of sewer at eachmanhole..7 Measure rate of flow over minimum of 1 hour, withrecorded flows for each 5 min interval.

.10 Infiltration and exfiltration: not to exceed following limitsin L per hour per 100 m of pipe, including serviceconnections.

.11 Leakage: not to exceed following limits in litres per hourper mm of diameter per 100m of sewer including serviceconnections:.1 Exfiltration, based on 600 mm head: 0.175 L..2 Infiltration: 0.150 L.



.12 Repair and retest sewer line as required, until test resultsare within limits specified.

.13 Repair visible leaks regardless of test results.

.14 Television and photographic inspections:.1 Carry out inspection of installed sewers by videocamera, digital camera or by other related means..2 Provide means of access to permit DCC Representative todo inspections.

3.11 CLEANING



.3 Waste Management: separate waste materials for reuse andrecycling in accordance with Section 01 74 21 -Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal and01 47 15 - Sustainable Requirements: Construction..1 Remove recycling containers and bins from site anddispose of materials at appropriate facility.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Storm Utility Drainage Page 1Storage Facility PipingGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 This section specifies requirements for constructing pressuresewers and appurtenances. Work includes supply, installationand testing of pipe, fittings and service connections.



1.3 REFERENCES

.1 ASTM International.1 ASTM C 14M-14, Standard Specification for ConcreteSewer, Storm Drain and Culvert Pipe (Metric)..2 ASTM C 76M-14, Standard Specification for ReinforcedConcrete Culvert, Storm Drain and Sewer Pipe (Metric)..3 ASTM C 117-13, Standard Test Method for Material FinerThan 0.075 mm (No. 200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates byWashing..4 ASTM C 136-14, Standard Method for Sieve Analysis ofFine and Coarse Aggregates..5 ASTM C 443M-12, Standard Specification for Joints forConcrete Pipe and Manholes, Using Rubber Gaskets (Metric)..6 ASTM D 698-12e1, Standard Test Methods for LaboratoryCompaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort(12,400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3))..7 ASTM D 1056-14, Standard Specification for FlexibleCellular Materials-Sponge or Expanded Rubber..8 ASTM D 3034-14, Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings.

.2 Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB).1 CAN/CGSB-8.1-M89, Sieves, Testing, Woven Wire, InchSeries..2 CAN/CGSB-8.2-M88, Sieves, Testing, Woven Wire, Metric.

.3 CSA International.1 CAN/CSA-A3000-13m Cementitious Materials Compendium..2 CSA A257 Series-09(R2014), Standards for Concrete Pipe..3 CAN/CSA-B1800-15, Thermoplastic Non-pressure PipeCompendium - B1800 Series.




.5 Ontario Provincial Standards (OPS) for Roads and Publicworks, Ministry of Transportation (MTO), latest edition.



.8 Environmental Assessment Screening Report, New Infrastructurepertaining to Department of National Defence (DND)Facilities, July, 2014, Defence Construction Canada.

1.4 SCHEDULING

.1 Schedule Work to minimize interruptions to existing servicesand to maintain existing flow during construction.

.2 Submit schedule of expected interruptions for approval andadhere to approved schedule.



.2 Product Data:.1 Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed productliterature and data sheets for pipes, and backfill andinclude product characteristics, performance criteria,physical size, finish and limitations.

.3 Shop Drawings:.1 Shop drawings to indicate proposed method for installingcarrier pipe for undercrossings..2 Submit drawings stamped and signed by professionalengineer registered or licensed in Province of Ontario,Canada.

.4 Samples:.1 Inform DCC Representative at least 4 weeks prior tobeginning Work, of proposed source of bedding materials andprovide access for sampling..2 Submit to DCC Representative for testing, at least 2weeks prior to beginning Work, samples of materials proposedfor use.

.5 Certification to be marked on pipe.



.6 Test and Evaluation Reports: submit manufacturer's test dataand certification at least 2 weeks prior to beginning Work.

.7 Manufacturer's Instructions: submit to DCC Representative 1copy of manufacturer's installation instructions.


.1 Submit project Waste Management Plan WasteReduction Workplan highlighting recycling and salvagerequirements..2 Submit calculations on end-of-project recyclingrates, salvage rates, and landfill rates demonstratingpercentage of construction wastes were recycled orsalvaged.

.3 Recycled Content:.1 Submit listing of recycled content products used,including details of required percentages of recycledcontent materials and products, showing their costs andpercentages of post-consumer and post-industrialcontent, and total cost of materials for project..2 Submit evidence, when Supplementary CementingMaterials (SCMs) are used, to certify reduction incement from Base Mix to Actual SCMs Mix, as percentage.





.3 Storage and Handling Requirements:.1 Store materials in accordance with manufacturer'srecommendations..2 Store and protect pipes from damage..3 Replace defective or damaged materials with new.




.5 Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return bymanufacturer of pallets, crates, padding, and packagingmaterials as specified in Construction Waste Management Planand Waste Reduction Workplan in accordance with Section01 74 21 - Construction/Demolition Waste Management andDisposal and Section 01 47 15 - Sustainable Requirements:Construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONCRETE PIPE

.1 Reinforced circular concrete pipe and fittings: to CSA A257,ASTM C 76M mm diameter and strength classification asindicated on shop drawings designed for flexible rubbergasket joints to ASTM C 443M CSA A257. Strengthclassification to accommodate fully loaded tandem dump track(30 tonnes gross vehicle weight) in installed condition.

.2 Lifting holes:.1 Pipe 900 mm and less diameter: no lift holes..2 Pipe greater than 900 mm diameter: lift holes not toexceed two in piece of pipe..3 Provide pre-fabricated plugs to effectively seal liftholes after installation of pipe.

2.2 PIPE BEDDING AND SURROUND MATERIAL

.1 Granular material in accordance with Section 31 05 16 -Aggregate Materials and following requirements:.1 Granular A to OPSS.

.2 Concrete mixes and materials for bedding, cradles,encasement, supports: in accordance with Section 03 30 00 -Cast-in-Place Concrete.


.1 As indicated and in accordance with Section 31 23 33.01 -Excavating, Trenching and Backfilling.



.2 Unshrinkable fill where required: in accordance with Section31 23 33.01 - Excavating, Trenching and Backfilling.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

.1 Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control:.1 Provide temporary erosion and sedimentation controlmeasures to prevent soil erosion and discharge ofsoil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacentproperties and walkways, according to requirements ofauthorities having jurisdiction, sediment and erosion controldrawings, sediment and erosion control plan, specific tosite, that complies with EPA 832/R-92-005, or requirements ofauthorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent..2 Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion and sedimentationcontrol measures during construction until permanentvegetation has been established..3 Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restoreand stabilize areas disturbed during removal.

.2 Clean pipes and fittings of debris and water beforeinstallation, and remove defective materials from site toapproval of DCC Representative.

3.2 TRENCHING

.1 Do trenching Work in accordance with Section 31 23 33.01 -Excavating, Trenching and Backfilling.

.2 Protect trench from contents of sewer.

.3 Trench alignment and depth to approval of DCC Representativeprior to placing bedding material and pipe.


.1 Place bedding in unfrozen condition.

.2 Place granular bedding material in uniform layers notexceeding 150 mm compacted thickness to depth as indicated.

.3 Shape bed true to grade and to provide continuous, uniformbearing surface for pipe..1 Do not use blocks when bedding pipes.

.4 Shape transverse depressions as required to suit joints.



.5 Compact each layer full width of bed to at least 100% maximumdensity to ASTM D 698.

.6 Fill excavation below bottom of specified bedding adjacent tomanholes or catch basins with compacted bedding material.

3.4 INSTALLATION

.1 Lay and join pipe in accordance with manufacturer'srecommendations and to approval of DCC Representative.

.2 Handle pipe using methods approved by DCC Representative..1 Do not use chains or cables passed through rigid pipebore so that weight of pipe bears upon pipe ends.

.3 Lay pipes on prepared bed, true to line and grade with pipeinverts smooth and free of sags or high points..1 Ensure barrel of each pipe is in contact with shaped bedthroughout its full length.

.4 Begin laying at outlet and proceed in upstream direction withsocket ends of pipe facing upgrade.

.5 Joint deflection permitted within limits recommended by pipemanufacturer.

.6 Water to flow through pipes during construction only aspermitted by DCC Representative.

.7 Whenever Work is suspended, install removable watertightbulkhead at open end of last pipe laid to prevent entry offoreign materials.

.8 Joints:.1 Concrete pipe:

.1 Install gaskets as recommended by manufacturer.

.2 Support pipes with hand slings or crane as requiredto minimize lateral pressure on gasket and maintainconcentricity until gasket is properly positioned..3 Align pipes before joining..4 Maintain pipe joints free from mud, silt, graveland other foreign material..5 Avoid displacing gasket or contaminating with dirtor other foreign material. Remove disturbed or dirtygaskets; clean, lubricate and replace before joining isattempted..6 Complete each joint before laying next length ofpipe..7 Minimize joint deflection after joint has been madeto avoid joint damage.



.8 Apply sufficient pressure in making joints toensure that joint is complete as outlined inmanufacturer's recommendations.

.9 When any stoppage of Work occurs, restrain pipes as directedby DCC Representative, to prevent "creep" during down time.

.10 Plug lifting holes with DCC Representative approvedprefabricated plugs, set in shrinkage compensating grout.

.11 Cut pipes as required for special inserts, fittings orclosure pieces, as recommended by pipe manufacturer, withoutdamaging pipe or its coating and to leave smooth end at rightangles to axis of pipe.

.12 Make watertight connections to manholes and catch basins..1 Use shrinkage compensating grout when suitable gasketsare not available.

.13 Use prefabricated saddles or approved field connections forconnecting pipes to existing sewer pipes..1 Joint to be structurally sound and watertight.

.14 Temporarily plug open upstream ends of pipes with removablewatertight concrete, steel or plastic bulkheads.

3.5 PIPE SURROUND

.1 Place surround material in unfrozen condition.

.2 Upon completion of pipe laying, and after DCC Representativehas inspected pipe joints, surround and cover pipes asindicated..1 Leave joints and fittings exposed until field testing iscompleted.

.3 Hand place surround material in uniform layers not exceeding150 mm compacted thickness as indicated..1 Do not dump material within 0.25 m of pipe.




.7 When field test results are acceptable to DCC Representative,place surround material at pipe joints.



3.6 BACKFILL

.1 Place backfill material in unfrozen condition.

.2 Place backfill material, above pipe surround, in uniformlayers not exceeding 150 mm compacted thickness up to gradesas indicated.

.3 Under paving and walks, compact backfill to at least 100%maximum density to ASTM D 698. In other areas, compactbackfill to at least 98% maximum density to ASTM D 698.

.4 Place unshrinkable backfill in accordance with Section31 23 33.01 - Excavating, Trenching and Backfilling.

3.7 FIELD TESTS AND INSPECTIONS

.1 Repair or replace pipe, pipe joint or bedding founddefective.

.2 Draw tapered wooden plug with diameter of 50 mm less thannominal pipe diameter through sewer to ensure that pipe isfree of obstruction directed by DCC Representative.

.3 Remove foreign material from sewers and related appurtenancesby flushing with water.

.4 Television and photographic inspections:.1 Carry out inspection of installed sewers by televisioncamera, photographic camera or by other related means.

3.8 CLEANING



.3 Waste Management: separate waste materials for reuse andrecycling in accordance with Section 01 74 21 -Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal andSection 01 47 15 - Sustainable Requirements: Construction..1 Remove recycling containers and bins from site anddispose of materials at appropriate facility.

END OF SECTION


New ULCV & EATV Concrete Encased Duct Page 1Storage Facility Bank and ManholesGarrison Petawawa, ON 2016-06-29Project No.: L-P90-2500/029

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES

.1 American Society for Testing and Materials International(ASTM).1 ASTM A 82/A 82M-07, Standard Specification for SteelWire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement..2 ASTM C 139-11, Standard Specification for ConcreteMasonry Units for Construction of Catch Basins and Manholes..3 ASTM C 478/C 478M-13, Standard Specification for PrecastReinforced Concrete Manhole Sections..4 ASTM D 1056-14, Standard Specification for FlexibleCellular Materials - Sponge or Expanded Rubber.

.2 Canadian Standards Association (CSA International).1 CAN/CSA-A3000-13, Cementitious Materials Compendium(Consists of A3001, A3002, A3003, A3004 and A3005)..2 CSA A23.1/A23.2-09(R2014), Concrete Materials andMethods of Concrete Construction/Methods of Test and StandardPractices for Concrete..3 CAN/CSA-G30.18-09, Carbon-Steel Bars for ConcreteReinforcement.




.2 Product Data:.1 Submit manufacturer's printed product literature,specifications and datasheet and include productcharacteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finishand limitations..2 Submit two copies WHMIS MSDS - Material Safety DataSheets.

.3 Shop Drawings:.1 Submit shop drawings for precast manholes.

.4 Quality assurance submittals: submit following in accordancewith Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control.



.1 Test reports: submit certified test reports forspecified materials from approved independent testinglaboratories, indicating compliance with specifications forspecified performance characteristics and physicalproperties..2 Certificates: submit certificates signed by manufacturercertifying that materials comply with specified performancecharacteristics and physical properties.

.5 Manufacturer's Instructions: submit manufacturer'sinstallation instructions and special handling criteria,installation sequence and cleaning procedures.


.1 Pre-Installation Meetings: convene pre-installation meetingone week prior to beginning work of this Section and on-siteinstallation, with contractor's representative and DCCRepresentative in accordance with Section 01 32 16.07 -Construction Progress Schedule - Bar (GANTT) Chart to:.1 Verify project requirements..2 Review installation and substrate conditions..3 Co-ordination with other building subtrades..4 Review manufacturer's installation instructions andwarranty requirements.


.1 Packing, shipping, handling and unloading:.1 Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance withSection 01 61 00 - Common Product Requirements..2 Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance withmanufacturer's written instructions.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PVC DUCTS

.1 PVC ducts, type DB2, encased in reinforced concrete.



2.2 PVC DUCT FITTINGS

.1 Rigid PVC opaque solvent welded type couplings, bell endfittings, plugs, caps, adaptors as required to make completeinstallation.

.2 Expansion joints.

.3 Rigid PVC 5 degree angle couplings.

2.3 CABLE PULLING EQUIPMENT

.1 Pulling iron: galvanized steel rods, size and shape asindicated.

.2 Pull rope: 6 mm stranded polypropylene, tensile strength 5kN, continuous throughout each duct run with 3 m spare ropeat each end.

2.4 MARKERS

.1 Concrete type cable markers: 600 x 600 x 100 mm, with words:"Cable", "Joint", "Conduit" impressed in top surface, witharrows to indicate change in direction of duct runs.

2.5 WARNING TYPE

.1 4 mil polyethylene warning tape 75 mm in width. Text on tapeto read: "CAUTION BURIED ELECTRIC LINE BELOW".

PART 3 - EXECUTION


.1 Compliance: comply with manufacturer's writtenrecommendations or specifications, including producttechnical bulletins, handling, storage and installationinstructions, and datasheets.


.1 Open trench completely between manholes before ducts are laidand ensure that no obstructions will necessitate change ingrade of ducts.



.2 Prior to laying ducts, construct "mud slab" not less than 75mm thick.

.3 Install ducts at elevations and with slope as indicated andminimum slope of 1 to 400.

.4 Install base spacers at maximum intervals of 1.5 m levelledto grades indicated for bottom layer of ducts.

.5 Lay PVC ducts with configuration and reinforcing as indicatedwith preformed interlocking, rigid plastic intermediatespacers to maintain spacing between ducts at not less than 4075 mm horizontally and vertically..1 Stagger joints in adjacent layers at least 150 mm andmake joints watertight..2 Encase duct bank with 75mm thick concrete cover..3 Use galvanized steel conduit for sections extendingabove finished grade level .

.6 Make transpositions, offsets and changes in direction using 5degree bend sections, do not exceed a total of 20 degree withduct offset.

.7 Use bell ends at duct terminations in manholes or buildings.

.8 Use conduit to duct adapters when connecting to conduits.

.9 Terminate duct runs with duct coupling set flush with end ofconcrete envelope when dead ending duct bank for futureextension.

.10 Cut, ream and taper end of ducts in field in accordance withmanufacturer's recommendations, so that duct ends are fullyequal to factory-made ends.

.11 Allow concrete to attain 50% of its specified strength beforebackfilling.

.12 Use anchors, ties and trench jacks as required to secureducts and prevent moving during placing of concrete..1 Tie ducts to spacers with twine or other non-metallicmaterial..2 Remove weights or wood braces before concrete has setand fill voids.

.13 Clean ducts before laying. Cap ends of ducts duringconstruction and after installation to prevent entrance offoreign materials.

.14 Duct cleaning:



.1 Pull 300 mm long x diameter 6 mm less than internaldiameter of duct, steel wooden mandrel, through each duct,immediately after placing of concrete..2 Then pull stiff bristle brush through duct; avoiddisturbing or damaging ducts where concrete has not setcompletely..3 Pull stiff bristle brush through each duct immediatelybefore pulling-in cables.

.15 Install four 3 m lengths of 15M 10M reinforcing rods, one ineach corner of duct bank when connecting duct to manholes orbuildings..1 Wire rods to 15M 10M dowels at manhole or building andsupport from duct spacers..2 Protect existing cables and equipment when breaking intoexisting manholes..3 Place concrete down sides of duct bank filling spaceunder and around ducts..4 Rod concrete with flat bar between vertical rows fillingvoids.

.16 Install pull rope continuous throughout each duct run with 3m spare rope at each end.

3.3 MARKERS

.1 Mark location of duct runs under hard surfaced areas notterminating in manhole with railway spike driven flush inedge of pavement, directly over run..1 Place concrete duct marker at ends of such duct runs..2 Construct markers and install flush with grade.

.2 Mark ducts every 150 m along straight runs and changes indirection.

.3 Where markers are removed to permit installation ofadditional duct, reinstall existing markers.

.4 Lay concrete markers flat and centered over duct with top 25mm above earth surface.

.5 Provide drawings showing locations of markers.


.1 Site Tests/Inspections:.1 Inspection of duct will be carried out by DCCRepresentative prior to placing..2 Placement of concrete and duct cleanout to be done whenDCC Representative present.



3.5 CLEANING



END OF SECTION

Appendix A

Geotechnical Investigation

March 2016

DRAFT REPORT ON

Preliminary Geotechnical Investigation ULCV and EATV Facility Southwest of Mattawa Trail Garrison Petawawa Petawawa, Ontario

Report Number: 13-1121-0174-3000 Distribution:

1 e-copy - Defence Construction Canada 1 e-copy - Golder Associates Ltd.

Submitted to:Defence Construction Canada Garrison Petawawa Building S-111, C Block 100 Menin Road Petawawa, Ontario K8H 2X3

GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION ULCV & EATV FACILITY – GARRISON PETAWAWA

March 2016 Report No. 13-1121-0174-3000 i

Table of Contents 1.0 INTRODUCTION .................................................................................................................................................... 1

2.0 DESCRIPTION OF PROJECT AND SITE ............................................................................................................. 2

3.0 INVESTIGATION PROCEDURES ......................................................................................................................... 3

4.0 SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS ............................................................................................................................... 5

4.1 Topsoil and Surficial Fill ............................................................................................................................ 5

4.2 Silty Sand ................................................................................................................................................. 5

4.3 Sand ......................................................................................................................................................... 5

4.4 Groundwater Conditions ........................................................................................................................... 6

5.0 DISCUSSION ......................................................................................................................................................... 7

5.1 General ..................................................................................................................................................... 7

5.2 Seismic Hazard Assessment .................................................................................................................... 7

5.2.1 Liquefaction Assessment Methodology ............................................................................................... 8

5.2.2 Liquefaction Assessment Results ....................................................................................................... 8

5.2.3 Seismic Site Class .............................................................................................................................. 9

5.3 Foundations .............................................................................................................................................. 9

5.3.1 Foundation Excavations .................................................................................................................... 10

5.3.2 Foundation Backfill ............................................................................................................................ 10

5.4 Frost Protection ...................................................................................................................................... 10

5.5 Slab on Grade Construction ................................................................................................................... 10

5.6 Site Servicing .......................................................................................................................................... 11

5.7 Pavement Design ................................................................................................................................... 11

5.8 Flooding and Erosion Potential ............................................................................................................... 15

5.9 Environmental Considerations ................................................................................................................ 15

5.10 Corrosion and Cement Type ................................................................................................................... 15

5.11 Additional Considerations ....................................................................................................................... 15

6.0 CLOSURE............................................................................................................................................................ 17

Important Information and Limitations of This Report


March 2016 Report No. 13-1121-0174-3000 ii

FIGURES

Figure 1 – Key Plan

Figure 2 – Site Plan

APPENDICES

APPENDIX AList of Abbreviations and SymbolsRecord of Borehole and Augerhole SheetsCurrent Investigation (2016)

APPENDIX BRecord of Borehole SheetPrevious Investigation (2015)

APPENDIX CGeotechnical Laboratory Testing Results

APPENDIX DMultichannel Analysis of Surface Waves (MASW) Testing ResultsGolder Report dated April 2, 2012 (12-1152-0031)

APPENDIX EHeadspace Screening Summary Tables

APPENDIX FResults of Basic Chemical AnalysisExova Laboratories Report No. 1602948

APPENDIX GAASHTO Pavement Design


March 2016 Report No. 13-1121-0174-3000 1

1.0 INTRODUCTION Golder Associates Ltd. (Golder) was retained by Defence Construction Canada (DCC) to carry out a geotechnical investigation for the proposed Ultra-Light Combat Vehicle (ULCV) and Enhanced All-Terrain Vehicle (EATV) Facility at Garrison Petawawa in Petawawa, Ontario.

The purpose of this subsurface investigation was to determine the general soil and groundwater conditions across the site by means of four boreholes and four augerholes and, based on an interpretation of the factual information obtained from the current and previous investigations carried out at the site, to provide engineering guidelines on the geotechnical design aspects of the proposed facility, including construction considerations which could influence design decisions.

This work was carried out in general conformance with our proposal dated December 17, 2015, and authorized by DCC on December 21, 2015.

The reader is referred to the “Important Information and Limitation of This Report” which follows the text but forms and integral part of this report.


March 2016 Report No. 13-1121-0174-3000 2

2.0 DESCRIPTION OF PROJECT AND SITE Plans are being prepared for a proposed Ultra-Light Combat Vehicle (ULCV) and Enhanced All-Terrain Vehicle (EATV) Facility at Garrison Petawawa in Petawawa, Ontario (see Key Plan, Figure 1).

The proposed ULCV & EATV facility will be located within the northwestern portion of CFB Petawawa, on a parcel of land located south of the intersection of Brindle Road and Mattawa Trail, southeast of the proposed Canadian Special Operations Regiment (CSOR) compound. The building/facility is to include parking for the ULCVs and EATVs, maintenance bays, vehicle wash bay, lockers, office space and washrooms, and will be contained in a fenced area which measures about 140 metres by 170 metres.

The site generally consists of relatively flat, grassed terrain.

Based on recent experience in the area, the subsurface information previously collected by others, and published geological maps; the subsurface conditions at the site are expected to generally consist of sand deposits overlying glacial till and bedrock at depths between 25 and 35 metres.


March 2016 Report No. 13-1121-0174-3000 3

3.0 INVESTIGATION PROCEDURES The drilling field work for the current investigation was carried out between January 25 and February 11, 2016. Four hollow-stem, augered borings (denoted as boreholes 16-301 through 16-304) were put down within the proposed building footprint. An additional four augered borings (denoted as augerholes 16-305 through 16-308) were put down in the proposed parking and access area that surrounds the building footprint. The locations of all borings are shown relative to site features on the attached Site Plan, Figure 2.

The borings were advanced using a track-mounted drill rig supplied and operated by CCC Geotechnical & Environmental Drilling Limited of Ottawa, Ontario. The boreholes were advanced to depths of about 8.2 metres below the existing ground surface, with the exception of borehole 16-301 which was advanced to a depth of about 22.7 metres below the existing ground surface where the drill encountered effective refusal due to binding of the native sand within the drill string. Within the open hole, a Dynamic Cone Penetration Test (DCPT) was advanced from about 22.7 to 30.6 metres depth. The augerholes were advanced to depths of about 1.5 metres below the existing ground surface.

SPTs were carried out in the boreholes at regular intervals of depth and samples of the soils encountered were recovered using drive-open sampling equipment. Grab samples were obtained at representative depths from the auger flights during drilling of the augerholes.

A standpipe piezometer was installed in borehole 16-301 to allow subsequent measurement of the groundwater level at the site.

The field work was supervised by a technician from our staff who located the borings, directed the drilling operations, logged the boreholes, took custody of the samples, and directed the in situ testing. Samples of the soil encountered were transported to our laboratory for examination by the project engineer and subsequent laboratory testing. The laboratory testing included natural water content and grain size distribution tests. During the field investigation, screening of the soil samples for potential contamination was carried out during drilling operations using visual, olfactory, and soil vapour headspace screening.

One sample of soil from borehole 16-301 was submitted to Exova Laboratories Ltd. for chemical analysis related to potential corrosion of exposed buried steel and concrete elements (corrosion and sulphate attack).

The groundwater level in the standpipe was measured on February 11, 2016.

Following completion of the drilling investigation, the boring locations were surveyed by Golder personnel using a Trimble R8 GPS unit. The coordinates of the current boreholes and augerholes and associated ground surface elevations at the time of the survey are shown in the table below. The ground surface elevations are referenced to Geodetic datum.

As part of the geotechnical investigation carried out in 2014 and 2015 for the design of the CSOR compound site, a borehole (denoted as 15-29) was put down within the proposed ULCV & EATV facility site for design of a then-proposed storm water retention pond. The coordinates of borehole 15-29 and the associated ground surface elevation at the time of that investigation are also included in the table below.


March 2016 Report No. 13-1121-0174-3000 4

Test Hole Number Boring Date

Northing Easting Ground Surface Elevation

(m) (m) (m) 16-301 January 26-29, 2016 5089671 321037 129.46

16-302 February 11, 2016 5089614 321079 129.63

16-303 February 11, 2016 5089581 321035 129.38

16-304 January 25, 2016 5089655 320992 129.21

16-305 January 27, 2016 5089748 321096 129.60

16-306 January 27, 2016 5089694 321072 129.52

16-307 January 25, 2016 5089697 321130 129.71

16-308 February 11, 2016 5089643 321112 129.52

15-293 July 29, 2015 5089692 320972 129.26 Notes: 1) Coordinates shown are relative to the UTM NAD83 (Zone 18T) coordinate system.

2) Ground surface elevations shown are relative to Geodetic Datum. 3) Borehole put down as part of geotechnical investigation for CSOR compound.


March 2016 Report No. 13-1121-0174-3000 5

4.0 SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS The subsurface conditions encountered in the borings advanced at the site are shown on the Record of Borehole and Augerhole sheets provided in Appendices A and B. The results of the laboratory classification testing on the selected soil samples are given on the Record of Borehole and Augerhole sheets and in Appendix C. The results of the MASW testing carried out at the adjacent CSOR compound site are provided in a memorandum contained in Appendix D. The results of headspace screening carried out during drilling are provided in Appendix E. The results of the basic chemical analysis are provided in Appendix F.

The subsurface conditions at this site typically consist of a surficial layer of topsoil, overlying sandy deposits to significant depth. All boreholes and augerholes put down as part of the current investigation were terminated within the sandy deposits.

Detailed descriptions of the subsurface conditions are provided on the Record of Borehole and Augerhole sheets included in Appendices A and B. The following sections present an overview of the subsurface conditions encountered in the boreholes and augerholes.

4.1 Topsoil and Surficial Fill Granular fill consisting of gravelly sand was encountered at surface at test holes 16-301, 16-304, 16-307, and 15-29. Where encountered, the thickness of the fill ranged between about 50 and 180 millimetres. At borehole 16-305 a layer of fill was encountered underlying the topsoil. The fill is, in turn, underlain by the original topsoil.

Beneath the surficial granular fill at test holes 16-301, 16-304, and 16-307 and at the ground surface at test holes 16-302, 16-203, and 16-306, topsoil was encountered. At borehole 16-304, which was located within an active staging/construction site at the time of the field investigation, the fill is underlain by native silty sand and sand. The topsoil typically consists of brown silty sand containing varying amounts of organic matter. The thickness of the topsoil generally ranges up to about 150 millimetres.

4.2 Silty Sand A deposit of silty sand was encountered beneath the topsoil and surficial fill at all test holes and extends to depths of approximately 0.3 to 0.9 metres below the existing ground surface.

Standard penetration test (SPT) “N” values in the silty sand deposit ranged from 9 to 38 blows per 0.3 metres of penetration. However, this near-surface deposit is within a frost-susceptible depth and the higher SPT N values are considered to be influenced by the frozen ground and, therefore, not representative of the natural state of packing of the silty sand.

The natural water content of samples of the silty sand from test holes 16-303, 16-304, 16-305, and 15-29 ranged from about 4 to 21 percent. The results of the laboratory grain size distribution testing carried out on three samples of the silty sand are provided on Figure C1 in Appendix C.

4.3 Sand An extensive deposit of sand was encountered beneath the topsoil, surficial fill, and/or silty sand at all test hole locations. In general, the sand deposit is brown in colour. SPT “N” values in the sand ranged from 4 to 17 blows per 0.3 metres of penetration in the upper 10 metres, but were typically on the order of about 5 to 8 blows per 0.3 metres of penetration, indicating a loose state of packing. Between about 10 and 22.7 metres depth in borehole 16-301, SPT “N” values ranged from 11 to 34 blows per 0.3 metres of penetration indicating a generally compact state of packing.


March 2016 Report No. 13-1121-0174-3000 6

During drilling of borehole 16-301 to depths below the natural groundwater table, the augers were kept full of water during advancement of the SPT sampler to minimize the potential for sand heave during testing. There were no signs of sand heave observed during drilling or sampling in the borehole. Advancement of the drill string at borehole 16-301 met effective refusal at 22.7 metres depth due to binding of the native sand within the drill string. A DCPT advanced in the open hole gave N values ranging from 13 to 37 blows per 0.3 metres of penetration to about 29.7 metres depth. Between 29.7 metres depth and the termination of the DCPT at 30.6 metres depth, the DCPT gave SPT N values of 77 to 97 blows per 0.3 metres of penetration, which is indicative of a very dense deposit underlying the sand.

The natural water content of selected sand samples was measured to range between about 2 to 11 percent within the unsaturated zone above the groundwater level. The natural water content of samples obtained from below the groundwater level ranged from about 15 to 23 percent.

The results of the laboratory grain size distribution testing carried out on samples of the sand deposit are provided on Figure C2 in Appendix C and indicate a fines content ranging from about 1 to 5 percent.

4.4 Groundwater Conditions The groundwater levels in the standpipe installed in borehole 16-301 was last measured on February 11, 2016. At that time, the groundwater level was measured to be at 17.5 metres below the ground surface (elevation 112.0 metres).

Groundwater levels are expected to fluctuate seasonally. Higher groundwater levels are expected during wet periods of the year, such as spring and are likely influenced by the level of the Ottawa River.


March 2016 Report No. 13-1121-0174-3000 7

5.0 DISCUSSION 5.1 General This section of the report provides engineering guidelines and comments on the geotechnical design and environmental aspects of the project based on our interpretation of the borehole information and project requirements, and is subject to “Important Information and Limitations of This Report” which follows the text but forms an integral part of this report.

The recommendations provided below are based on interpretation of the factual data obtained from the boreholes and augerholes advanced during the current and previous subsurface investigations at the site. The discussion and recommendations presented are intended to provide the designers with sufficient information to assess the feasible foundation alternatives and to carry out the design of the proposed development.

Where comments are made on construction, they are provided to highlight those aspects that could affect the design of the project. Those requiring information on aspects of construction should make their own interpretation of the factual information provided, as such interpretation may affect equipment selection, proposed construction methods, scheduling and the like.

5.2 Seismic Hazard Assessment In general, all boreholes encountered sandy deposits in a loose to compact state of packing from near surface to the termination of the boreholes. The ground water table was measured at a depth of about 17.5 metres below the existing ground surface. The loose to compact sands that are present beneath the ground water level may be susceptible to liquefaction during the design earthquake event.

Seismic liquefaction occurs when earthquake vibrations cause an increase in pore water pressure within the soil. The presence of excess pore water pressure reduces the effective stress between the soil particles, and the frictional resistance to shearing. Post-liquefaction settlement occurs when the soil stabilizes into a denser arrangement after an earthquake, potentially causing settlement at the ground surface. The excess pore pressure can also lead to a sudden temporary loss in strength. Where existing static shear stresses are present (e.g., presence of existing slopes), the loss of strength can lead to significant lateral movements referred to as "lateral spreading" or, under certain conditions, even catastrophic failure of the slope referred to as "flow slides". Lateral spreading and flow slides often accompany liquefaction along rivers and other shorelines.

As input to the seismic design provisions in the 2015 National Building Code of Canada (NBCC, 2015), the Geological Survey of Canada has developed 5th generation seismic hazard maps for Canada that represent the most up to date seismogenic zones and hazard analysis models. The seismic hazard in these maps correspond to a “reference ground condition” denoted by an average shear wave velocity varying between 360 and 760 metres per second in the upper 30 metres, which is referred to as Site Class C. In 2015 NBCC, Site Class C is referenced as the firm-ground condition Canada-wide.

Based on the 5th generation seismic hazard maps, the reference peak firm ground acceleration in the Petawawa area is 0.24g which corresponds to a design earthquake having a 2 percent probability of being exceeded in 50 years (i.e., 2,475 year return period) as outlined in the NBCC 2015. Based on the results of the field investigation, and correlated to those from the field investigation and the MASW testing at the adjacent site, it is anticipated that the firm ground acceleration may be amplified about 11 percent, corresponding to a peak ground surface acceleration of about 0.27g.


March 2016 Report No. 13-1121-0174-3000 8

5.2.1 Liquefaction Assessment Methodology The methodology used as part of a preliminary liquefaction potential assessment at the site is consistent with that presented in the state of the practice outlined by the National Center for Earthquake Engineering Research1. It involves comparing the cyclic shear stresses applied to the soil by the design earthquake, represented as the cyclic stress ratio (CSR), to the cyclic shear strength, represented as the cyclic resistance ratio (CRR) provided by the soil.

The CRR at borehole 16-301 was calculated using the parameter, (N1)60cs, that is based on the SPT “N” blow counts obtained in the field and corrected for overburden stress, rod length during sampling, and hammer energy efficiencies and fines content. As described in Section 3.0, drilling at borehole 16-301 met effective refusal at a depth of about 22.7 metres below the ground surface. SPT “N” blow counts were obtained to this depth and, in order to provide information below, a DCPT was carried out to the target depth of about 30.6 metres. Correlation of SPTs and DCPTs previously carried out within the same soil deposit at an adjacent site was used to normalize the DCPT results collected at borehole 16-301 to be representative of SPT values. The measured SPT N values above 22.7 metres depth and the representative DCPT N values below were used in the liquefaction analysis.

Areas of potential liquefaction identified herein were further assessed by estimating the associated seismic settlements. The methodology used to estimate these seismic settlements is consistent with that presented in Tokimatsu and Seed2.

5.2.2 Liquefaction Assessment Results The assessment of the liquefaction susceptibility at borehole 16-301 suggests that discrete portions of the saturated sandy soils below the groundwater table are potentially liquefiable under an earthquake with a design magnitude of 6.0 and a design peak ground acceleration of 0.27g. The layers of potentially liquefiable soil are present within an approximately 5 metre thick layer extending from about 20 to 25 metres below the existing ground surface.

The magnitude of post-seismic vertical settlement that may occur is dependent on the thickness of liquefiable soil that underlies the site. The results of the liquefaction assessment indicated that total post-seismic settlements on the order of up to about 50 millimetres may occur following the design seismic event. Accuracy of the estimated settlement is typically considered to be within 25 to 50 percent of the actual value. Settlements of the estimated magnitude would occur within the liquefiable soil at depths of greater than about 20 metres below the existing ground surface.

However, the potential differential settlement at ground surface predicted to occur as a result of post-seismic reconsolidation settlement is expected to be mitigated by the presence of the 17 to 20 metre thick non-liquefiable layer of overburden above the water table. The non-liquefied stratum will redistribute stresses between the near-surface footings and the liquefiable soil at depth. Shallow spread footings founded near ground surface may experience overall post-seismic settlement but, due to the bridging effect of the non-liquefiable soil layer, the footings are expected to experience differential settlements of less than 25 millimetres over a distance of about 30 metres.

1 Robertson, P.K., and Wride (Fear), C.E. (1997), Cyclic Liquefaction and its Evaluation based on the SPT and CPT, Proceeding of the NCEER Workshop on Evaluation of Liquefaction Resistance of Soils, December 31, 1999, Youd and Idriss Eds. 2 Tokimatsu, K., and Seed, H. (1987), Evaluation of Settlements in Sands due to Earthquake Shaking, ASCE, Journal of Geotechnical Engineering, 113 (8), pp861-878.


March 2016 Report No. 13-1121-0174-3000 9

Based on the limited thickness of potentially liquefiable soil, and the results of the evaluation of the potential post-seismic lateral deformations that could result due to instability of the bank of the Ottawa River at the adjacent CSOR compound site, the permanent lateral ground surface movements predicted at the ULCV & EATV site are expected to be less than about 25 millimetres.

5.2.3 Seismic Site Class The seismic design provisions of the 2015 NBCC depend, in part, on the average material properties of the upper 30 metres of soil and/or rock below founding level. It states that site classifications may be determined using the average measured shear wave velocity (Vs) or, if the average shear wave velocity is not known, the site class may be determined from average energy-corrected SPT values (N60).

The average SPT N60 values recorded at borehole 16-301 indicate that a Site Class D designation would be appropriate. The results of the MASW testing carried out in 2012 at the adjacent CSOR compound site (see Appendix D) indicate an average shear wave velocity in the upper 30 metres of about 220 metres per second, which correspond to a Site Class D designation. The soil stratigraphy and SPT N60 values recorded at borehole 16-301 compared well to those recorded at the adjacent site. Based on the similarity of soil stratigraphy, SPT N60,and site proximity, the results of the MASW testing carried out at the adjacent site are considered to be representative of the conditions at the ULCV & EATV facility site.

The 2015 NBCC strictly requires a Site Class F designation if certain soil types are encountered on the site, including potentially liquefiable soils. Generally, sites that are designated as Site Class F require a site-specific evaluation.

However, the 2015 NBCC also includes a provision stating that structures with a fundamental period of vibration less than or equal to 0.5 seconds may be designed using a Site Class selected assuming that the site soils are not liquefiable. If the proposed building structures have a fundamental period of less than or equal to 0.5 seconds, a Site Class D designation can be used.

5.3 Foundations The proposed facility is understood to provide indoor parking and maintenance requirements for the Canadian Special Operations Regiment’s ULCVs & EATVs. It has been assumed that the ULCV & EATV building will be a one or two storey building with no basement, comparable to the design of similar buildings at the CSOR compound.

Based on the subsurface conditions encountered at the site (i.e., sand, and silty sand), conventional spread or strip footings founded within the loose sandy soils are considered to be suitable. Due to the frost susceptible nature of silty sand, all footings in unheated areas will need to be provided with at least 1.8 metres of earth cover below grade for frost protection purposes, if founded within the silty sand. The need for frost protection can be waived if the footings are are founded on or within the underlying clean sand deposit.

The net bearing resistance at Serviceability Limit States (SLS) for spread footing foundations founded within sandy soils may be taken as 100 kilopascals and the factored bearing resistance at Ultimate Limit States (ULS) may be taken as 250 kilopascals, for footings up to 3.0 metres wide.

The post construction total and differential static settlements of footings sized using the above SLS net bearing resistance values should be less than about 25 and 15 millimetres, respectively, provided that the soil at or below founding level is not disturbed during construction.


March 2016 Report No. 13-1121-0174-3000 10

It has been assumed that the proposed building will comprise a rigid-frame warehouse-style construction to accommodate the large vehicles that will be parked and maintained at the facility. Static lateral loading originating in the roof and building structure of such buildings will be transferred down into the footings. The soil adjacent to each of the footings founded at relatively shallow depth will not be able to provide the required lateral passive resistance to these lateral loads. Therefore, consideration should be given to tying the footings across their footprint with grade beams or steel cables to accommodate the anticipated lateral loads.

5.3.1 Foundation Excavations The foundation excavations as well as the site service trenches will extend through the surficial granular fill and into the sandy deposit. No unusual problems are anticipated in excavating in the overburden using conventional hydraulic excavating equipment.

The Occupational Health and Safety Act (OHSA) of Ontario indicates that side slopes in the overburden materials above the water table (i.e., Type 3 soil) should be stable in the short term at 1 horizontal to 1 vertical.

The groundwater level at the site was measured at depths greater than 17 metres below the existing ground surface. Therefore, no significant groundwater flow is expected in the excavations required for foundation construction or service installation.

5.3.2 Foundation Backfill The sand expected to be encountered within the excavations at this site are not likely to be highly frost susceptible and may be used as backfill against exterior foundation elements. The existing native sand may also be generally suitable for re-use as structural/engineered fill. Silty sand, however, should not be used as backfill against foundation walls.

Since silty sand is anticipated to be encountered at ground surface and localized strata may be encountered within the sand deposit, the sand must be inspected by a geotechnical engineer to ensure its suitability. Care must be taken to ensure that any existing topsoil, rootmat, cobbles, or localized silty pockets are removed prior to consideration for re-use. Where additional fill is required, a non-frost susceptible sand conforming to the requirements for Ontario Provincial Standard Specification (OPSS) Granular B Type I may be used.

5.4 Frost Protection Due to the frost susceptible nature of near-surface silty sand, all footings in unheated areas will need to be provided with at least 1.8 metres of earth cover below grade for frost protection purposes. Exterior footings adjacent to surfaces that are not cleared of snow cover during winter months should be provided with a minimum of 1.5 metres of earth cover.

5.5 Slab on Grade Construction For predictable performance of the floor slabs, the existing fill and any surficial organics and/or topsoil should be removed from within the proposed building area. Prior to placing the granular base for the slab on grade, the sand subgrade should be proof rolled using a 10 ton vibratory roller to compact the very loose to loose sand and to provide a more uniform subgrade.

The granular base for the slab on grade should be formed using at least 150 millimetres of OPSS Granular A. Any bulk fill required to raise the grade to the underside of the Granular A should consist of OPSS Granular B Type I. The underslab fill should be placed in maximum 300 millimetre thick lifts and should be compacted to at least 95 percent of the material’s standard Proctor maximum dry density using suitable vibratory compaction equipment.


March 2016 Report No. 13-1121-0174-3000 11

The native sand within the building footprint is in a loose state of packing. The vibratory compaction will densify the surface of the sand but will not have an impact below about one metre depth. As such, the slab on grade should be designed using a subgrade modulus, k, of 50 megapascals per metre (185 psi/in).

5.6 Site Servicing Excavation for the installation of site services will generally be through the topsoil, surficial fill, upper silty sand, and into the sandy deposit. No problems are anticipated in trenching in the overburden material using conventional hydraulic excavating equipment. Side slopes should be stable in the short term at 1 horizontal to 1 vertical to depths of approximately 3 metres (i.e., Type 3 soils as per OHSA), as the water table is not expected to be encountered during construction of site servicing.

Pipe bedding for sewer and water pipes should consist of at least 150 millimetres of OPSS Granular A. In all cases, the bedding should extend to the spring line of the pipe and should be compacted to at least 95 percent of the material’s standard Proctor maximum dry density. The use of clear crushed stone as a bedding layer should not be permitted anywhere on this project since finer particles from the sandy backfill materials could potentially migrate into the voids in the clear crushed stone and cause loss of lateral pipe support.

Cover material, from the spring line of the pipe to at least 300 millimetres above the top of pipe, should consist of OPSS Granular A or Granular B Type I with a maximum particle size of 25 millimetres. The cover material should be compacted to at least 95 percent of the material’s standard Proctor maximum dry density.

In general, it should be possible to re-use the native sand as trench backfill. Where the trench will be covered with hard surfaced areas, the type of native material placed in the frost zone (between subgrade level and 1.8 metres depth) should match the soil exposed on the trench walls for frost heave compatibility. Trench backfill should be placed in maximum 300 millimetre thick lifts and should be compacted to at least 95 percent of the material’s standard Proctor maximum dry density using suitable vibratory compaction equipment.

5.7 Pavement Design The pavement design for the adjacent CSOR compound is provided in Appendix G and is applicable for the ULCV & EATV facility providing a conservative design. The pavement design was carried out in accordance with AASHTO design methods. The AASHTO design procedure is a deflection based method based on elastic layer analysis to determine the behaviour and response of the pavement under load. The following parameters were used in the analysis:

Initial Serviceability = 4.2

Terminal Serviceability = 2.2

Reliability Level (%) = 90

Overall Standard Deviation = 0.45


March 2016 Report No. 13-1121-0174-3000 12

The following structural and drainage coefficients were also used in the analysis:

Component Layer StructuralCoefficient

Drainage Coefficient

Hot Laid Asphaltic Concrete 0.42 1.0

Granular Base 0.14 1.0

Granular Subbase 0.09 1.0

The subgrade soil resilient modulus of 45,000 kilopascals was used based on sand in a loose state of packing with a subgrade preparation consisting of proof rolling prior to the construction of the pavement.

For design of the outdoor parking areas and paved access ways, the traffic volume was calculated over a 20 year design period based on the specifications of the CF-Armoured Heavy Support Vehicle System. These include typical vehicle loading of 9 tonnes on each of the front axles and 16 tonnes on each of the rear axles equipped with Michelin 16.00R20 XZL tires at a tire pressure of 690 kilopascals (100 psi).

Based on the data above, the Equivalent Single Axle Load (ESAL) per vehicle would be 32. The volume of traffic was taken to be 10 vehicles per day in each lane. The total calculated accumulated volume of traffic in ESAL’s over the 20 year design period would be 2.4 million. The data sheet for the 16.00R20 XZL tires indicates a contact radius of 464 millimetres (24.3 inches). The results of the pavement analysis are provided in Appendix G.

In preparation for pavement construction, all cobbles, topsoil, fill and otherwise deleterious material containing excessively silty or organic material should be removed from the pavement areas.

Sections requiring grade raising to proposed subgrade level should be filled using acceptable (compactable and inorganic) earth borrow or OPSS Select Subgrade Material meeting the requirements of OPSS.MUNI 212 and OPSS.MUNI 1010, respectively. These materials should be placed in maximum 300 millimetre thick lifts and should be compacted to at least 95 percent of the material’s standard Proctor maximum dry density using suitable vibratory compaction equipment.

The surface of the subgrade or fill should be crowned to promote drainage of the pavement granular structure. For predictable performance of the pavement, proper drainage of the subbase layer should be provided.

The pavement structure for the outdoor parking areas, paved access ways, and storage areas should consist of asphaltic concrete overlying OPSS Granular A base course and Granular B Type I subbase course. The following pavement structures should be used based on the layered thickness design analysis for both areas of heavy vehicle use (armoured vehicles and large trucks) and light duty use (cars and light duty trucks).

Pavement Component Thickness (millimetres)

Heavy Vehicle Use Light Vehicle Use

Asphaltic Concrete 130 50

OPSS Granular A Base 150 150

OPSS Granular B Type I Subbase 300 300


March 2016 Report No. 13-1121-0174-3000 13

The above table is based on the use of Granular B Type I subbase.

The following table summarizes the gradation requirements for various granular subbase materials that have been used within Garrison Petawawa on previous projects that would also be acceptable for use on this project.

Sieve Size

Percent Passing1

Granular A2 Granular M2Granular B

(mm)

Type I Type III Type I Mod.3 Type II2

150 - - 100 100 - -

106 - - - - 100 100

37.5 - - - - 60-80 -

26.5 100 - 50-100 50-100 50-70 50-100

19.0 85-100 100 - - - -

13.2 65-90 75-95 - - - -

9.5 50-73 55-80 - 32-100 - -

4.75 25-55 35-55 20-100 20-90 20-55 20-55

1.18 15-40 15-40 10-100 10-60 10-40 10-40

0.300 5-22 5-22 2-65 2-35 5-22 5-22

0.075 2-8 2-8 0-8 0-8 0-10 0-10

Notes: 1. Gradations do not include variations for material from an air cooled blast furnace slag source

2. Must be from a quarried source (100 % crushed)

3. From a pit and have 50% crushed

The following table provides granular subbase thicknesses based on the various subbase materials that might be considered.

Granular Subbase Type Thickness (millimetres)

Heavy Vehicle Use Light Vehicle Use

OPSS Granular B Type I 300 300

Granular B Type I Modified 250 250

OPSS Granular B Type II 225 225

OPSS Granular B Type III 300 300

OPSS Granular A 200 200

The thickness of subbase course will vary with the type of material used to construct the pavement. Granular B Type I, Type I Modified, and Type III consist of material from a pit. Comments on each subbase type are as follows:


March 2016 Report No. 13-1121-0174-3000 14

Granular B Type I has a wide gradation envelop and allows 100 percent fine sand. If only fine sand is used the pavement will be prone to forming wheel path depressions because the subbase will move laterally under traffic loading.

Granular B Type I Modified must be manufactured as it is not naturally available. Production would be similar to the production of Granular A, although the grain size distribution allows significantly larger sizes. The pavement performance will be better than if Granular B Type I or Type III are used (i.e., there would be less wheel path depression) because of the higher content of coarse size aggregate. From a strength point of view only 250 mm of subbase would be required to provide equivalent strength as Granular B Type I or Granular B Type III.

Granular B Type II must be from a quarried source and 100 percent crushed. This material is not readily available in Pembroke/Petawawa area.

Granular B Type III eliminates the fine sand component in the Granular B Type I. Granular B Type III should be readily available. Typically the cost is not affected as most pits in the Pembroke/Petawawa area are composed of sand and gravel.

Granular A will provide the best performance from a strength point of view (only 200 millimetres of Granular A will provide the same strength as 300 millimetres of Granular B Type I or III).

From a constructability point of view, the minimum thickness of the subbase layer should be 300 millimetres. This minimum thickness is needed to support construction traffic as the paved area is constructed. Depending on subgrade conditions and the time of year of construction the subbase thickness may have to be increased, particularly if the subgrade is wet.

The granular base should be uniformly compacted to 100 percent of the material’s standard Proctor maximum dry density using suitable vibratory compaction equipment. The asphaltic concrete should be compacted in accordance with Table 10 of OPSS 310.

Based on a two layer system, the composition of the asphaltic concrete pavement should be as follows:

Heavy Vehicle Use

Superpave 12.5 surface course – 50 millimetres

Superpave 19.0 base course – 80 millimetres

Light Vehicle Use

Superpave 12.5 surface course – 50 millimetres

The thicker surface course in areas of heavy vehicle use will allow better distribution of shearing forces onto the base course and, therefore, the potential for tearing of the asphaltic concrete surface course in areas where trucks are turning will be significantly decreased.

A tack coat to OPSS 308 should be provided between all lifts of asphaltic concrete and where the new pavement structure will join with the existing. This will provide a better bond between the lifts and thus increase the resistance of tearing of the asphaltic concrete surface course in truck turning areas. The tack coat shall consist of SS-1 emulsified asphalt diluted with an equal volume of water. The undiluted material shall be according to OPSS 1103.

The asphalt cement should consist of PG 58-34. The asphaltic concrete designs should be based on Traffic Category C. Traffic Category C is suitable for the heavier loaded vehicles.


March 2016 Report No. 13-1121-0174-3000 15

The above pavement designs are based on the assumption that the pavement subgrade has been acceptably prepared (i.e., where any subgrade fill has been adequately compacted to the required density and the subgrade surface not disturbed by construction operations or precipitation). The subgrade surface within the outdoor parking areas and paved access ways should be shaped smooth and crowned to promote drainage of the pavement granular structure. Drainage swales should be provided along the perimeter and on both sides of the access roads to promote surface drainage.

5.8 Flooding and Erosion Potential Flooding is not known to be a historical issue at the site. Flash storm events can cause erosion in roadway and ditch areas or those that are non-landscaped. The erodibility of the surficial silty sand has been determined using the Wischmeier Nomograph. The K-factor for the silty sand is estimated to be about 0.25 which would indicate low erodibility. The K-factor for the underlying sand is estimated to be less than 0.1. However, cut slopes within these soils should be protected by sodding or mulch and seeding as soon as is practical following construction.

5.9 Environmental Considerations Environmental field screening and subsequent analytical testing was carried out on soil samples obtained during the previous geotechnical investigations carried out at the CSOR site in 2014 and 2015. There was no previous environmental information for the site that indicated that contamination was suspected. The parameters selected for that analysis provided a general screening for common contaminants such as diesel fuel, gasoline, solvents, dry cleaning fluid, and residue from burning. At that time, the soil analytical results indicated that concentrations of the parameters analysed were below the analytical detection limits and below the applicable guidelines.

During the current investigation, field screening of the soil samples for combustible and organic vapours was carried out during drilling operations. Results of the headspace screening are summarized in Appendix E. Based on the soil analytical results from the previous investigations at the CSOR site and the field screening results collected during the current investigation, no samples from the current investigation were submitted for laboratory analysis. Excess soil generated during construction is suitable for re-use on site from an environmental perspective.

Should re-use outside of Garrison Petawawa be desired, soil quality results should be evaluated in accordance with Ontario Regulation 153/04 as well as the Ministry of the Environment and Climate Change guidance document, Management of Excess Soil – A Guide for Best Management Practices, to assess if the soil would be suitable for re-use off-site without additional management measures. If excess fill generated during construction is not consistent with the samples analysed as part of the previous geotechnical investigations carried out at the CSOR site in 2014 and 2015, additional investigations may be required to assess the soil quality.

5.10 Corrosion and Cement Type One sample of soil from borehole 16-301 was submitted to Exova Laboratories Ltd. for chemical analysis related to potential corrosion of exposed buried steel and concrete elements (corrosion and sulphate attack). The results of the testing are provided in Appendix F.

The results indicate that concrete made with Type GU Portland cement should be acceptable for substructures. The results also indicate a low potential for corrosion of exposed ferrous metal.

5.11 Additional Considerations Some soils on this site are sensitive to disturbance from ponded water, construction traffic, and frost (in some areas).


March 2016 Report No. 13-1121-0174-3000 16

All footing and subgrade areas should be inspected by experienced geotechnical personnel prior to filling or concreting to ensure that soils having adequate bearing capacity have been reached and that the bearing surfaces have been properly prepared. The placing and compaction of any engineered fill as well as sewer bedding and backfill should be inspected to ensure that the materials used conform to the specifications from both a grading and compaction view point.

At the time of the writing of this report, only conceptual details for the proposed ULCV & EATV facility were available. Golder should be retained to review the final drawings and specifications for this project prior to tendering to ensure that the guidelines in this report have been adequately interpreted.

The groundwater level monitoring device (i.e., standpipe piezometer) installed at the site will require decommissioning at the time of construction in accordance with Ontario Regulation 128/03. However, it is expected that it will either be destroyed during construction or can be more economically abandoned as part of the construction contract. If that is not the case or is not considered feasible, abandonment of the monitoring wells can be carried out separately.


March 2016 Report No. 13-1121-0174-3000 17

6.0 CLOSURE We trust this report contains sufficient information for your present requirements. If you have any questions concerning this report, or if we can be of further service to you on this project, please call us.

GOLDER ASSOCIATES LTD.

Matt Kennedy, P.Eng. Terry Nicholas, P.Eng. Geotechnical Engineer Senior Geotechnical Consultant

MJK/TJN/ob \\golder.gds\gal\ottawa\active\2013\1121 - geotechnical\13-1121-0174 dcc cfb petawawa soa\phase 3000 - new ulcv facility\report\13-1121-0174-3000 rpt-001 draft dcc new ulcv facility geotech investigation 2016-03-22.docx

Golder, Golder Associates and the GA globe design are trademarks of Golder Associates Corporation.

Golder Associates Ltd. Page 1 of 2

IMPORTANT INFORMATION AND LIMITATIONS OF THIS REPORT

Standard of Care: Golder Associates Ltd. (Golder) has prepared this report in a manner consistent with that level of care and skill ordinarily exercised by members of the engineering and science professions currently practicing under similar conditions in the jurisdiction in which the services are provided, subject to the time limits and physical constraints applicable to this report. No other warranty, expressed or implied is made.

Basis and Use of the Report: This report has been prepared for the specific site, design objective, development and purpose described to Golder by the Client, Defence Construction Canada. The factual data, interpretations and recommendations pertain to a specific project as described in this report and are not applicable to any other project or site location. Any change of site conditions, purpose, development plans or if the project is not initiated within eighteen months of the date of the report may alter the validity of the report. Golder cannot be responsible for use of this report, or portions thereof, unless Golder Ts requested to review and, if necessary, revise the report.

The information, recommendations and opinions expressed in this report are for the sole benefit of the Client. No other party may use or rely on this report or any portion thereof without Golder's express written consent. If the report was prepared to be included for a specific permit application process, then the client may authorize the use of this report for such purpose by the regulatory agency as an Approved User for the specific and identified purpose of the applicable permit review process, provided this report is not noted to be a draft or preliminary report, and is specifically relevant to the project for which the application is being made. Any other use of this report by others is prohibited and is without responsibility to Golder. The report, all plans, data, drawings and other documents as well as all electronic media prepared by Golder are considered its professional work product and shall remain the copyright property of Golder, who authorizes only the Client and Approved Users to make copies of the report, but only in such quantities as are reasonably necessary for the use of the report by those parties. The Client and Approved Users may not give, lend, sell, or otherwise make available the report or any portion thereof to any other party without the express written permission of Golder. The Client acknowledges that electronic media is susceptible to unauthorized modification, deterioration and incompatibility and therefore the Client cannot rely upon the electronic media versions of Golder's report or other work products.

The report is of a summary nature and is not intended to stand alone without reference to the instructions given to Golder by the Client, communications between Golder and the Client, and to any other reports prepared by Golder for the Client relative to the specific site described in the report. In order to properly understand the suggestions, recommendations and opinions expressed in this report, reference must be made to the whole of the report. Golder cannot be responsible for use of portions of the report without reference to the entire report.

Unless otherwise stated, the suggestions, recommendations and opinions given in this report are intended only for the guidance of the Client in the design of the specific project. The extent and detail of investigations, including the number of test holes, necessary to determine all of the relevant conditions which may affect construction costs would normally be greater than has been carried out for design purposes. Contractors bidding on, or undertaking the work, should rely on their own investigations, as well as their own interpretations of the factual data presented in the report, as to how subsurface conditions may affect their work, including but not limited to proposed construction techniques, schedule, safety and equipment capabilities.

Soil, Rock and Groundwater Conditions: Classification and identification of soils, rocks, and geologic units have been based on commonly accepted methods employed in the practice of geotechnical engineering and related disciplines. Classification and identification of the type and condition of these materials or units involves judgment, and boundaries between different soil, rock or geologic types or units may be transitional rather than abrupt. Accordingly, Golder does not warrant or guarantee the exactness of the descriptions.

Golder Associates Ltd. Page 2 of 2

IMPORTANT INFORMATION AND LIMITATIONS OF THIS REPORT (cont'd)

Special risks occur whenever engineering or related disciplines are applied to identify subsurface conditions and even a comprehensive investigation, sampling and testing program may fail to detect all or certain subsurface conditions. The environmental, geologic, geotechnical, geochemical and hydrogeologic conditions that Golder interprets to exist between and beyond sampling points may differ from those that actually exist. In addition to soil variability, fill of variable physical and chemical composition can be present over portions of the site or on adjacent properties. The professional services retained for this project include only the geotechnical aspects of the subsurface conditions at the site, unless otherwise specifically stated and identified in the report. The presence or implication(s) of possible surface and/or subsurface contamination resulting from previous activities or uses of the site and/or resulting from the introduction onto the site of materials from off-site sources are outside the terms of reference for this project and have not been investigated or addressed.

Soil and groundwater conditions shown in the factual data and described in the report are the observed conditions at the time of their determination or measurement. Unless otherwise noted, those conditions form the basis of the recommendations in the report. Groundwater conditions may vary between and beyond reported locations and can be affected by annual, seasonal and meteorological conditions. The condition of the soil, rock and groundwater may be significantly altered by construction activities (traffic, excavation, groundwater level lowering, pile driving, blasting, etc.) on the site or on adjacent sites. Excavation may expose the soils to changes due to wetting, drying or frost. Unless otherwise indicated the soil must be protected from these changes during construction.

Sample Disposal: Golder will dispose of all uncontaminated soil and/or rock samples 90 days following issue of this report or, upon written request of the Client, will store uncontaminated samples and materials at the Client's expense. In the event that actual contaminated soils, fills or groundwater are encountered or are inferred to be present, all contaminated samples shall remain the property and responsibility of the Client for proper disposal.

Follow-Up and Construction Services: All details of the design were not known at the time of submission of Golder's report. Golder should be retained to review the final design, project plans and documents prior to construction, to confirm that they are consistent with the intent of Golder's report.

During construction, Golder should be retained to perform sufficient and timely observations of encountered conditions to confirm and document that the subsurface conditions do not materially differ from those interpreted conditions considered in the preparation of Golder's report and to confirm and document that construction activities do not adversely affect the suggestions, recommendations and opinions contained in Golder's report. Adequate field review, observation and testing during construction are necessary for Golder to be able to provide letters of assurance, in accordance with the requirements of many regulatory authorities. In cases where this recommendation is not followed, Golder's responsibility is limited to interpreting accurately the information encountered at the borehole locations, at the time of their initial determination or measurement during the preparation of the Report.

Changed Conditions and Drainage: Where conditions encountered at the site differ significantly from those anticipated in this report, either due to natural variability of subsurface conditions or construction activities, it is a condition of this report that Golder be notified of any changes and be provided with an opportunity to review or revise the recommendations within this report. Recognition of changed soil and rock conditions requires experience and it is recommended that Golder be employed to visit the site with sufficient frequency to detect if conditions have changed significantly.

Drainage of subsurface water is commonly required either for temporary or permanent installations for the project. Improper design or construction of drainage or dewatering can have serious consequences. Golder takes no responsibility for the effects of drainage unless specifically involved in the detailed design and construction monitoring of the system.

SITE

GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATIONULCV AND EATV FACILITYPETAWAWA, ONTARIO

DEFENCE CONSTRUCTION CANADA

CONSULTANT

DESIGN

PREPARED

REVIEW

APPROVED

YYYY-MM-DD

TITLE

PROJECT No. Rev.

PROJECT

CLIENT

13-1121-0174PHASE3000

FIGURE

1A

2016-03-02

JM

----

----

----

KEY PLAN

1:100,000

5,0000

METRES

2,500

NOTES1. THIS FIGURE IS TO BE READ IN CONJUNCTION WITH THE ACCOMPANYING GOLDER

ASSOCIATES LTD. REPORT No. 13-1121-0174-3000

DRAFT

GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATIONULCV AND EATV FACILITYPETAWAWA, ONTARIO

DEFENCE CONSTRUCTION CANADA

CONSULTANT

DESIGN

PREPARED

REVIEW

APPROVED

YYYY-MM-DD

TITLE

PROJECT No. Rev.

PROJECT

CLIENT

13-1121-0174PHASE3000

FIGURE

2A

2016-03-02

JM

----

----

----

SITE PLAN

APPROXIMATE BOREHOLE LOCATION, CURRENT INVESTIGATION

LEGEND

1:1,000

500

METRES

25

NOTES1. THIS FIGURE IS TO BE READ IN CONJUNCTION WITH THE ACCOMAPANYING GOLDER

ASSOCIATES LTD. REPORT No. 13-1121-0174-3000REFERENCE1. BASE PLAN SUPPLIED IN PDF FORMAT BY DEFENCE CONSTRUCTION CANADA2. PROJECTION: TRANSVERSE MERCATOR DATUM: NAD 83, COORDINATE SYSTEM: UTM

ZONE 18, VERTICAL DATUM: CGVD28

DRAFT

APPROXIMATE AUGERHOLE LOCATION, CURRENT INVESTIGATION

APPROXIMATE BOREHOLE LOCATION, PREVIOUS INVESTIGATION BYGOLDER ASSOCIATES LTD. (2015)


March 2016 Report No. 13-1121-0174-3000

APPENDIX A List of Abbreviations and Symbols Record of Borehole and Augerhole Sheets Current Investigation (2016)

ABBREVIATIONS AND TERMS USED ON RECORDS OF BOREHOLES AND TEST PITS

January 2013 G-2

PARTICLE SIZES OF CONSTITUENTSSoil

ConstituentParticle Size Description Millimetres Inches

(US Std. Sieve Size)

BOULDERS Not Applicable >300 >12

COBBLES Not Applicable 75 to 300 3 to 12

GRAVEL CoarseFine

19 to 754.75 to 19

0.75 to 3(4) to 0.75

SANDCoarseMedium

Fine

2.00 to 4.750.425 to 2.000.075 to 0.425

(10) to (4)(40) to (10)(200) to (40)

SILT/CLAY Classified by plasticity <0.075 < (200)

SAMPLESAS Auger sampleBS Block sampleCS Chunk sample

DO or DP Seamless open ended, driven or pushed tube sampler – note size

DS Denison type sampleFS Foil sampleRC Rock coreSC Soil coreSS Split spoon sampler – note sizeST Slotted tubeTO Thin-walled, open – note sizeTP Thin-walled, piston – note size WS Wash sample

MODIFIERS FOR SECONDARY AND MINOR CONSTITUENTSPercentage

by Mass Modifier

>35 Use 'and' to combine major constituents(i.e., SAND and GRAVEL, SAND and CLAY)

> 12 to 35 Primary soil name prefixed with "gravelly, sandy, SILTY, CLAYEY" as applicable

> 5 to 12 some

trace

SOIL TESTSw water contentPL , wp plastic limitLL , wL liquid limitC consolidation (oedometer) testCHEM chemical analysis (refer to text)CID consolidated isotropically drained triaxial test1

CIU consolidated isotropically undrained triaxial test with porewater pressure measurement1

DR relative density (specific gravity, Gs)DS direct shear testGS specific gravityM sieve analysis for particle sizeMH combined sieve and hydrometer (H) analysisMPC Modified Proctor compaction testSPC Standard Proctor compaction testOC organic content testSO4 concentration of water-soluble sulphatesUC unconfined compression testUU unconsolidated undrained triaxial testV (FV) field vane (LV-laboratory vane test)

unit weight1. Tests which are anisotropically consolidated prior to shear are

shown as CAD, CAU.

PENETRATION RESISTANCEStandard Penetration Resistance (SPT), N:The number of blows by a 63.5 kg (140 lb) hammer dropped 760 mm (30 in.) required to drive a 50 mm (2 in.) split-spoon sampler for a distance of 300 mm(12 in.).

Cone Penetration Test (CPT) An electronic cone penetrometer with a 60° conical tip and a project end area of10 cm2 pushed through ground at a penetration rate of 2 cm/s. Measurements of tip resistance (qt), porewater pressure (u) and sleeve frictions are recorded electronically at 25 mm penetration intervals.

Dynamic Cone Penetration Resistance (DCPT); Nd: The number of blows by a 63.5 kg (140 lb) hammer dropped 760 mm (30 in.) to drive uncased a 50 mm (2 in.) diameter, 60° cone attached to "A" size drill rods for a distance of 300 mm (12 in.). PH: Sampler advanced by hydraulic pressurePM: Sampler advanced by manual pressureWH: Sampler advanced by static weight of hammerWR: Sampler advanced by weight of sampler and rod

NON-COHESIVE (COHESIONLESS) SOILS COHESIVE SOILS

Compactness2 ConsistencyTerm SPT ‘N’ (blows/0.3m)1

Very Loose 0 - 4Loose 4 to 10

Compact 10 to 30Dense 30 to 50

Very Dense >501. SPT ‘N’ in accordance with ASTM D1586, uncorrected for overburden

pressure effects. 2. Definition of compactness descriptions based on SPT ‘N’ ranges from

Terzaghi and Peck (1967) and correspond to typical average N60 values.

Term Undrained Shear Strength (kPa)

SPT ‘N’1(blows/0.3m)

Very Soft <12 0 to 2Soft 12 to 25 2 to 4Firm 25 to 50 4 to 8Stiff 50 to 100 8 to 15

Very Stiff 100 to 200 15 to 30Hard >200 >30

1. SPT ‘N’ in accordance with ASTM D1586, uncorrected for overburden pressure effects; approximate only.

Field Moisture Condition Water ContentTerm Description

Dry Soil flows freely through fingers.

Moist Soils are darker than in the dry condition and may feel cool.

Wet As moist, but with free water forming on hands when handled.

Term Description

w < PL Material is estimated to be drier than the Plastic Limit.

w ~ PL Material is estimated to be close to the Plastic Limit.

w > PL Material is estimated to be wetter than the Plastic Limit.

LIST OF SYMBOLS

January 2013 G-3

Unless otherwise stated, the symbols employed in the report are as follows:

I. GENERAL (a) Index Properties (continued)w water content

3.1416 wl or LL liquid limitln x natural logarithm of x wp or PL plastic limitlog10 x or log x, logarithm of x to base 10 lp or PI plasticity index = (wl – wp)g acceleration due to gravity ws shrinkage limitt time IL liquidity index = (w – wp) / Ip

IC consistency index = (wl – w) / Ipemax void ratio in loosest stateemin void ratio in densest stateID density index = (emax – e) / (emax - emin)

II. STRESS AND STRAIN (formerly relative density)

shear strain (b) Hydraulic Propertieschange in, e.g. in stress: h hydraulic head or potentiallinear strain q rate of flow

v volumetric strain v velocity of flowcoefficient of viscosity i hydraulic gradientPoisson’s ratio k hydraulic conductivity total stress (coefficient of permeability)effective stress ( = - u) j seepage force per unit volume

vo initial effective overburden stress1, 2,3

principal stress (major, intermediate, minor) (c) Consolidation (one-dimensional)

Cc compression indexoct mean stress or octahedral stress (normally consolidated range)

= ( 1 + 2 + 3)/3 Cr recompression index shear stress (over-consolidated range)

u porewater pressure Cs swelling indexE modulus of deformation C secondary compression indexG shear modulus of deformation mv coefficient of volume changeK bulk modulus of compressibility cv coefficient of consolidation (vertical

direction) ch coefficient of consolidation (horizontal

direction) Tv time factor (vertical direction)

III. SOIL PROPERTIES U degree of consolidationp pre-consolidation stress

(a) Index Properties OCR over-consolidation ratio = p / vo( ) bulk density (bulk unit weight)*d( d) dry density (dry unit weight) (d) Shear Strengthw( w) density (unit weight) of water p, r peak and residual shear strengths( s) density (unit weight) of solid particles effective angle of internal friction

unit weight of submerged soil angle of interface friction( = - w) coefficient of friction = tan

DR relative density (specific gravity) of solid c effective cohesionparticles (DR = s / w) (formerly Gs) cu, su undrained shear strength ( = 0 analysis)

e void ratio p mean total stress ( 1 + 3)/2n porosity p mean effective stress ( 1 + 3)/2S degree of saturation q ( 1 - 3)/2 or ( 1 - 3)/2

qu compressive strength ( 1 - 3)St sensitivity

* Density symbol is . Unit weight symbol is where = g (i.e. mass density multiplied byacceleration due to gravity)

Notes: 1 2

= c + tanshear strength = (compressive strength)/2


March 2016 Report No. 13-1121-0174-3000

APPENDIX B Record of Borehole Sheet Previous Investigation (2015)


March 2016 Report No. 13-1121-0174-3000

APPENDIX C Geotechnical Laboratory Testing Results

Cobble coarse fine coarse medium fine

Size

Sample Depth (m)

1B 0.46-0.912 0.46-0.911 0.00-0.46

Created by: MI

Project: Golder Associates Checked by: CNM

Borehole

13-1121-0174 /3000

FIGURE C1

SILTY SAND

GRAIN SIZE DISTRIBUTION

SILT AND CLAYGRAVEL SIZE SAND SIZE

0

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

80

90

100

0.00010.0010.010.1110100GRAIN SIZE, mm

15-2916-30316-306


March 2016 Report No. 13-1121-0174-3000

APPENDIX D Multichannel Analysis of Surface Waves (MASW) Testing Results Golder Report dated April 2, 2012 (12-1152-0031)

Dear Mr. Cummins:

This letter report presents the processing and results of the Multichannel Analysis of Surface-Waves (MASW) test performed for the proposed building located west of Passchendaele Road and north of Brindle Road, Petawawa, Ontario. Testing was completed on March 28, 2012.

Methodology The MASW method measures variations in surface-wave velocity with increasing distance and wavelength and can be used to infer the rock/soil types, stratigraphy and soil conditions.

A typical MASW survey requires a seismic source, to generate surface-waves, and a minimum of two geophone receivers, to measure the ground response at some distance from the source. Surface-waves are a special type of seismic-wave whose propagation is confined to the near surface medium.

The depth of penetration of a surface-wave into a medium is directly proportional to its wavelength. In a non-homogeneous medium surface-waves are dispersive, i.e., each wavelength has a characteristic velocity owing to the subsurface heterogeneities within the depth interval that particular wavelength of surface-wave propagates through. The relationship between surface-wave velocity and wavelength is used to obtain the shear-wave velocity and attenuation profile of the medium with increasing depth.

The seismic source used can be either active or passive, depending on the application and location of the survey. Examples of active sources include explosives, weight-drops, sledge hammer and vibrating pads. Examples of passive sources are road traffic, micro-tremors and water-wave action (in near-shore environments).

The geophone receivers measure the wave-train associated with the surface-wave travelling from a seismic source at different distances from the source.

April 2, 2012 Document No. 12-1152-0031

Dáire Cummins Houle-Chevrier Engineering 170 The Donway West, Suite 307 Toronto, ON M3C 2G3

NBCC SEISMIC SITE CLASS TESTING RESULTS – PASSCHENDAELE ROAD, PETAWAWA, ON

Golder Associates Ltd. 2390 Argentia Road, Mississauga, Ontario, Canada L5N 5Z7

Tel: +1 (905) 567 4444 Fax: +1 (905) 567 6561 www.golder.com Golder Associates: Operations in Africa, Asia, Australasia, Europe, North America and South America

Golder, Golder Associates and the GA globe design are trademarks of Golder Associates Corporation.

Dáire Cummins 12-1152-0031Houle-Chevrier Engineering April 2, 2012

2/6

The participation of surface-waves with different wavelengths can be determined from the wave-train by transforming the wave-train results into the frequency domain. The surface-wave velocity profile with respect to wavelength (called the ‘dispersion curve’) is determined by the delay in wave propagation measured between the geophone receivers. The dispersion curve is then matched to a theoretical dispersion curve using an iterative forward-modelling procedure. The result is a shear-wave velocity profile of the tested medium with depth, which can be used to estimate the dynamic shear modulus of the medium as a function of depth.

Field Work The MASW field work was conducted on March 28, 2012, by personnel from the Golder Associates Ltd. (Golder) Ottawa office. The line was oriented approximately 300 m north and parallel to Brindle Road, centered at UTM Location 320,992E, 5,090,122N (UTM NAD83, Zone 18T). For the MASW line, a series of 24 low frequency (4.5 Hz) geophones were laid out at 3 metre intervals. A 9.9 kg sledge hammer and a seismic weight drop of 45 kg were used as seismic sources for this investigation. Seismic records were collected with seismic sources located 5, 10, 15 and 20 metres from and collinear to the geophone array. An example of an active seismic record collected is shown in Figure 1 (below).

Figure 1: Typical seismic record collected at the site.

Data Processing Processing of the MASW test results consisted of the following main steps:

1) Transformation of the time domain data into the frequency domain using a Fast-Fourier Transform (FFT) for each source location;


3/6

2) Calculation of the phase for each frequency component;

3) Linear regression to calculate phase velocity for each frequency component;

4) Filtering of the calculated phase velocities based on the Pearson correlation coefficient (r2) between the data and the linear regression best fit line used to calculate phase velocity;

5) Generation of the dispersion curve by combining calculated phase velocities for each shot location of a single MASW test; and

6) Generation of the stiffness profile, through forward iterative modelling and matching of model data to the field collected dispersion curve.

Processing of the MASW data was completed using the SeisImager/SW software package (Geometrics Inc.). The calculated phase velocities for a seismic shot point were combined and the dispersion curve generated by choosing the minimum phase velocity calculated for each frequency component as shown on Figure 2. Shear-wave velocity profiles were generated through inverse modelling to best fit the calculated dispersion curves.

Figure 2: MASW Dispersion Curve Picks (red dots).

The minimum measured surface-wave frequency with sufficient signal-to-noise ratio to accurately measure phase velocity was approximately 3 Hz.


4/6

ResultsThe MASW test results are presented on Figure 3, which presents the calculated shear-wave velocity profile measured from the field testing. The results have been inferred using a weight drop located 10 metres from the first geophone. The field collected dispersion curves are compared with the model generated dispersion curves on Figure 4. There is a good correlation between the field collected and model calculated dispersion curves, with a root mean squared error of 1.0%.

Figure 3: MASW Modelled Shear-Wave Velocity Depth profile.


5/6

Figure 4: Comparison of Field (red dots) vs. Modelled Data (blue line).

To calculate the average shear-wave velocity as required by the National Building Code of Canada, 2005 (NBCC2005), the results were modelled to 30 metres below ground surface (mbgs). The average shear-wave velocity was found to be 220 m/s (Table 1). Shear-wave velocities of this magnitude are classified according to the NBCC2005 as Site Class D (stiff soil), based solely on the average shear-wave velocity. The NBCC2005 requires special site specific evaluation if certain soil types are encountered on the site, so the site classification stated here should be reviewed, and modified if necessary, according to borehole stratigraphy, standard penetration resistance results, and undrained shear strength measurements, if available for this site.


6/6

Table 1: Shear-Wave Velocity Profile Model Layer (mbgs) Layer

Thickness (m)

Shear-Wave Velocity (m/s) Shear-Wave Travel Time Through Layer (s) Top Bottom

0.0 1.1 1.07 153 0.007019

1.1 2.3 1.24 156 0.007916

2.3 3.7 1.40 173 0.008117 3.7 5.3 1.57 191 0.008187

5.3 7.0 1.73 206 0.008400 7.0 8.9 1.90 211 0.008970

8.9 11.0 2.06 209 0.009878 11.0 13.2 2.23 201 0.011065

13.2 15.6 2.39 206 0.011591

15.6 18.1 2.55 220 0.011637

18.1 20.9 2.72 237 0.011466 20.9 23.7 2.88 258 0.011168

23.7 26.8 3.05 274 0.011124

26.8 30.0 3.21 323 0.009937

Vs Average to 30 mbgs (m/s) 220 NBCC2005 Seismic Site Classification D

ClosureWe trust that this letter report meets your needs at the present time. If you have any questions or require clarification, please contact the undersigned at your convenience.

Yours truly,

GOLDER ASSOCIATES LTD.

Patrick Finlay, P.Geo. Christopher Phillips, M.Sc., P.Geo. Geophysicist Senior Geophysicist, Associate

PF/CRP/wlm

n:\active\2012\1152\12-1152-0031 houle chevrier-masw-petawawa\reports\final reports\12-1152-0031 ltr hceng masw final 02apr12.docx


March 2016 Report No. 13-1121-0174-3000

APPENDIX E Headspace Screening Summary Tables

March 2016 Appendix E - Summary of Soil Headspace Screening 13-1121-0174/3000

Borehole ID: BH16-301 Borehole ID: BH 16-303Measurement Date: January 26, 2016 Measurement Date: February 12, 2016

PID PID(ppm) (ppm)

SA 1 1.8 SA 1 11.6SA 2 2.2 SA 2 1.6SA 3 2.3 SA 3 4.6SA 4 2.6 SA 4 1.8SA 5 1.6 SA 5 2.0SA 6 2.1 SA 6 4.3SA 7 2.2 SA 7 7.6SA 8 2.6 SA 8 2.0SA 9 2.1 SA 9 3.4

SA 10 1.9 SA 10 4.2SA 11 0.9 SA 11 2.6SA 12 1.0SA 13 4.6SA 14 2.6 Borehole ID: BH 16-304SA 15 3.5 Measurement Date: January 26, 2016SA 16 2.4SA 17 3.9 PIDSA 18 3.6 (ppm)SA 19 3.6 SA 1 0.9SA 20 2.8 SA 2 0.7SA 21 2.6 SA 3 0.9SA 22 1.4 SA 4 0.6SA 23 2.7 SA 5 0.6SA 24 1.4 SA 6 0.4SA 25 1.2 SA 7 0.7SA 26 1.1 SA 8 0.6SA 27 2.8 SA 9 0.5SA 28 2.1 SA 10 0.5SA 29 No sample SA 11 0.6SA 30 4.3

Borehole ID: BH16-302 Augerhole ID: AH16-305Measurement Date: February 12, 2016 Measurement Date: January 27, 2016

PID PID(ppm) (ppm)

SA 1 3.6 SA 1 0.2SA 2 19.2 SA 2 0.3SA 3 2.1SA 4 1.9SA 5 2.7 Augerhole ID: AH16-306SA 6 10.8 Measurement Date: January 27, 2016SA 7 2.0SA 8 3.1 PIDSA 9 2.5 (ppm)

SA 10 2.3 SA 1 0.2SA 11 3.1 SA 2 0.2

Note: Photo Ionization Detector (PID) was calibrated to 100 parts-per-million by volume (ppmv) isobutylene gas.

Sample Sample

Sample Sample

Sample

Sample

\\golder.gds\gal\Ottawa\Active\2013\1121 - Geotechnical\13-1121-0174 DCC CFB Petawawa SOA\Phase 3000 - New ULCV Facility\Report\Appendix E - Headspace Summary\App E - PID readings.xlsx

Golder Associates Created by: CGChecked by: MJK

March 2016 Appendix E - Summary of Soil Headspace Screening 13-1121-0174/3000

Augerhole ID: BH16-307 Augerhole ID: BH16-308Measurement Date: January 26, 2016 Measurement Date: February 12, 2016

PID PID(ppm) (ppm)

SA 1 1.3 SA 1 1.9SA 2 0.9 SA 2 4.8

Note: Photo Ionization Detector (PID) was calibrated to 100 parts-per-million by volume (ppmv) isobutylene gas.

Sample Sample

\\golder.gds\gal\Ottawa\Active\2013\1121 - Geotechnical\13-1121-0174 DCC CFB Petawawa SOA\Phase 3000 - New ULCV Facility\Report\Appendix E - Headspace Summary\App E - PID readings.xlsx

Golder Associates Created by: CGChecked by: MJK


March 2016 Report No. 13-1121-0174-3000

APPENDIX F Results of Basic Chemical Analysis Exova Laboratories Report No. 1602948


March 2016 Report No. 13-1121-0174-3000

APPENDIX G AASHTO Pavement Design

Golder Associates Ltd. 1931 Robertson Road Ottawa, Ontario, K2H 5B7 Canada T: +1 (613) 592 9600